0% found this document useful (0 votes)

135 views1,959 pages

Past Papers Cambridge Pure Math3 9709 Ms 1959

Uploaded by

Thomas Guo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

135 views1,959 pages

Past Papers Cambridge Pure Math3 9709 Ms 1959

Uploaded by

Thomas Guo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1959

Cambridge Past Paper Collection

Pure Mathematics 3 (9709)

Version: 2020.05.03.001
Webpage
All comments please send to EliteEduA@gmail.com

Licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial 3.0 Unported License (the
“License”). You may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the License at http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/3.0. Unless required
by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an
“AS IS ” BASIS , WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
Contents

Cambridge Pure Math 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Year 2020 10
9709_w20_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
9709_w20_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
9709_w20_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9709_s20_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9709_s20_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
9709_s20_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
9709_m20_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Year 2019 258
9709_w19_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
9709_w19_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
9709_w19_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
9709_s19_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
9709_s19_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709_s19_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
9709_m19_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Year 2018 507
9709_w18_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
9709_w18_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
9709_w18_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
9709_s18_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
9709_s18_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
9709_s18_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
9709_m18_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Year 2017 754
9709_w17_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
9709_w17_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
9709_w17_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
9709_s17_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
9709_s17_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
9709_s17_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
9709_m17_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Year 2016 956
9709_w16_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
9709_w16_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
9709_w16_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
9709_s16_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
9709_s16_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
9709_s16_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
9709_m16_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Year 2015 1051
9709_w15_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
9709_w15_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
9709_w15_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
9709_s15_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
9709_s15_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
9709_s15_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Year 2014 1155
9709_w14_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
9709_w14_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
9709_w14_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
9709_s14_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
9709_s14_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
9709_s14_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
Year 2013 1261
9709_w13_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
9709_w13_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
9709_w13_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
9709_s13_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
9709_s13_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
9709_s13_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
Year 2012 1379
9709_w12_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
9709_w12_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
9709_w12_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
9709_s12_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
9709_s12_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
9709_s12_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Year 2011 1488
9709_w11_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
9709_w11_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
9709_w11_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
9709_s11_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556
9709_s11_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1563
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
9709_s11_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Year 2010 1600
9709_w10_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604
9709_w10_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615
9709_w10_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
9709_s10_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
9709_s10_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
9709_s10_qp_33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673
Worked Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685
Year 2009 1691
9709_w09_qp_31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
9709_w09_qp_32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1705
9709_s09_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
Year 2008 1723
9709_w08_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1727
9709_s08_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738
Year 2007 1745
9709_w07_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749
9709_s07_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758
Year 2006 1765
9709_w06_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769
9709_s06_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
Year 2005 1786
9709_w05_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1787
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1790
9709_s05_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799
Year 2004 1809
9709_w04_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
9709_s04_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1826
Year 2003 1860
9709_w03_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864
9709_s03_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1897
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Year 2002 1942
9709_w02_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1943
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1946
9709_s02_qp_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952
Mark Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
10 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2020

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

1 Solve the inequality 2 − 5x > 2 x − 3. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

2 On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying the inequalities z ≥ 2 and z − 1 + i ≤ 1. [4]

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 3 − cos 21, y = 21 + sin 21,
for 0 < 1 < 12 π.

dy
Show that = cot 1. [5]
dx

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

4 Solve the equation

log10 2x + 1 = 2 log10 x + 1 − 1.
Give your answers correct to 3 decimal places. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

− 12 x
5 (a) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation cosec x = 1 + e has exactly two
roots in the interval 0 < x < π. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

P Q
−1 1
xn+1 = π − sin ,
−1x
e 2 n +1
with initial value x1 = 2, converges to one of these roots.

Use the formula to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

8

6 (a) Express 6 cos 1 + 3 sin 1 in the form R cos 1 − !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. State the exact
value of R and give ! correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

9

(b) Hence solve the equation 6 cos 13 x + 3 sin 13 x = 2.5, for 0Å < x < 360Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

10

7 (a) Verify that −1 + 5i is a root of the equation 2x3 + x2 + 6x − 18 = 0. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

(b) Find the other roots of this equation. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

8 The coordinates x, y of a general point of a curve satisfy the differential equation

dy
x = 1 − 2x2 y,
dx
for x > 0. It is given that y = 1 when x = 1.

Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

8 + 5x + 12x2
9 Let f x = .
1 − x 2 + 3x2

(a) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

(b) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

10
y

x
O
M

− 12 x
The diagram shows the curve y = 2 − xe , and its minimum point M .

(a) Find the exact coordinates of M . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

(b) Find the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve and the axes. Give your answer in terms
of e. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

11 Two lines have equations r = i + 2j + k + , ai + 2j − k and r = 2i + j − k + - 2i − j + k, where a is a

constant.

(a) Given that the two lines intersect, find the value of a and the position vector of the point of
intersection. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

19

(b) Given instead that the acute angle between the directions of the two lines is cos−1 16 , find the
two possible values of a. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

30 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics 3 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 21 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 31

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

32 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 33

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT
above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

34 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations
AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent
AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)
CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)
CWO Correct Working Only
ISW Ignore Subsequent Working
SOI Seen Or Implied
SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)
WWW Without Wrong Working
AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 35

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 Make a recognisable sketch graph of y = 2 x − 3 and the line B1 Need to see correct V at x = 3, roughly symmetrical,
y = 2 – 5x x = 3 stated, domain at least (– 2, 5).

Find x-coordinate of intersection with y = 2 – 5x M1 Find point of intersection with y = 2|x – 3| or solve 2 – 5x with
2(x – 3) or –2(x – 3)

4 A1
Obtain x = −
3

4 A1 Do not accept x < –1.33

State final answer x < − [Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]
3

Alternative method for question 1

State or imply non-modular inequality/equality B1 Two correct linear equations only

(2 – 5x)2 >, ⩾, =, 22(x – 3)2, or corresponding quadratic equation,
or pair of linear equations
(2 – 5x) >, ⩾ , =, ± 2(x – 3)

Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term quadratic, or solve M1 21x2 + 4x – 32 = (3x + 4)(7x – 8) = 0
one linear equation, or linear inequality for x 2 – 5x or –(2 – 5x) with 2(x – 3) or –2(x – 3)

4 A1
Obtain critical value x = −
3

4 A1 Do not accept x < –1.33

State final answer x < − [Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

36 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Show a circle with centre the origin and radius 2 B1

Show the point representing 1 – i B1

Show a circle with centre 1 – i and radius 1 B1 FT The FT is on the position of 1 – i.

Shade the appropriate region B1 FT The FT is on the position of 1 – i.

Shaded region outside circle with centre the origin and radius 2
and inside circle with centre ±1 ± i and radius 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 37

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dx dy B1
State or imply = 2sin 2θ or = 2 + 2 cos 2θ
dθ dθ

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dθ dθ

dy 2 + 2cos 2θ A1 OE
Obtain correct answer =
dx 2sin 2θ

Use correct double angle formulae M1

dy A1 AG. Must have simplified numerator in terms of cosθ.

Obtain the given answer correctly = cot θ
dx

Alternative method for question 3

Start by using both correct double angle formulae M1

e.g. x = 3 – (2cos2θ − 1), y = 2θ + 2sinθcosθ

dx dy B1
or
dθ dθ

dy
=
( (
2 + 2 cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ )) M1 A1

dx 4cos θ sin θ

dy A1 AG
Simplify to given answer correctly = cot θ
dx

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

38 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Alternative method for question 3

dx dy B1
Set = 2θ. State = sin t or = 1 + cos t
dt dt

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dt dt

dy 1 + cos t A1 OE
Obtain correct answer =
dx sin t

Use correct double angle formulae M1

dy A1
Obtain the given answer correctly = cot θ
dx

4 State or imply log10 10 = 1 B1 log10 10–1 = − 1

Use law of the logarithm of a power, product or quotient M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form, free of logs A1 e.g. (2x + 1)/(x + 1)2 = 10–1
or 10(2x + 1)/(x + 1)2 = 100 or 1
or x2 + 2x + 1 = 20x + 10

Reduce to x 2 − 18 x − 9 = 0 , or equivalent A1

Solve a 3-term quadratic M1

Obtain final answers x = 18.487 and x = –0.487 A1 Must be 3 d.p. Do not allow rejection.

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 39

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = cosec x B1 π π

cosec x, U shaped, roughly symmetrical about x = , y   = 1
2 2
 π 5π 
and domain at least  ,  .
6 6 

1
− x B1 Exponential graph needs y(0) = 2, negative gradient, always
Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 1 + e 2 , and justify the increasing, and y(π) > 1
given statement Needs to mark intersections with dots, crosses, or say roots at
points of intersection, or equivalent

5(b) Use the iterative formula correctly at least twice M1 2, 2.3217, 2.2760, 2.2824…
Need to see 2 iterations and following value inserted correctly

Obtain final answer 2.28 A1 Must be supported by iterations

Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify 2.28 to A1

2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in the interval (2.275,
2.285)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

40 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) State R = 15 B1

Use trig formulae to find α M1 sin α 3 3

= with no error seen or tan α = quoted then
cos α 6 6
allow M1

Obtain α = 50.77 A1 Must be 2 d.p.

If radians 0.89 A0 MR

6(b) 2.5 B1 FT The FT is on incorrect R.

Evaluate β = cos −1 (49.797° to 4 d.p.)
15 x
= β − α [–2.9° and –301.7°]
3

x M1 x
Use correct method to find a value of in the interval Needs to use
3 3

Obtain answer rounding to x = 301.6° to 301.8° A1

Obtain second answer rounding to x = 2.9(0)° to 2.9(2)° and no A1

others in the interval

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 41

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) Substitute −1 + 5 i in the equation and attempt expansions of M1 All working must be seen.
x2 and x3 Allow M1 if small errors in 1 − 2 5i − 5 or 1 − 5i − 5i − 5
and 4 − 2 5i + 10 or 4 − 4 5i + 2 5i + 10

Use i2 = –1 correctly at least once M1 1 – 5 or 4 + 10 seen

Complete the verification correctly A1

( ) ( ) ( )
2 14 − 2 5i + −4 − 2 5i + 6 −1 + 5i − 18 = 0

7(b) State second root −1 − 5i B1

Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with M1

zeros −1 + 5i and −1 − 5i

Obtain x2 + 2x + 6 A1

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

(x + 1 – 5i ) (x + 1 + 5i ) (2x + a) = 2x3 + x2 + 6x – 18 M1

(1 – 5 i) (1 + 5 i) a = –18 A1

3 A1 OE
6a = –18 a = –3 leading to x =
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

42 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b) Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

POR = 6 SOR = – 2 M1
2
Obtain x + 2x + 6 A1

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

( )( )
POR −1 − 5i −1 + 5i a = 9 M1 A1

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

1 M1 A1
( ) ( )
SOR −1 − 5i + −1 + 5i + a = −
2

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 43

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least B1 1 2

1 − 2x
one side dy = dx
y x

Obtain term ln y B1

Obtain terms ln x − x 2 B1

Use x = 1, y = 1 to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in a solution M1 The 2 terms of required form must be from correct working
containing at least 2 terms of the form a ln y , b ln x and cx 2 e.g. ln y = lnx – x2 + 1

Obtain correct solution in any form A1

Rearrange and obtain y = xe1− x

2
A1 OE

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

44 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
1 − x 2 + 3x ( 2 + 3x )2

Use a correct method for finding a coefficient M1

Obtain one of A = 1, B = –1 , C = 6 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1 A Dx + E

In the form + , where A = 1, D = – 3
1 − x ( 2 + 3 x )2
and E = 4 can score B1 M1 A1 A1 A1 as above.

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 45

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion M1 Symbolic coefficients are not sufficient for the M1
−1 −2
−1 −1  3  −2  3  1 + ( −1)( − x ) + ( −1)( −2 )( − x )2 
of (1 − x ) , ( 2 + 3 x ) , 1 + x  , ( 2 + 3 x ) or 1 + x  A  A=1
 2   2  2
 
  3x   3x  
2

1 + ( −1)   + ( −1)( −2 )   
B  2   2   B=1
2 2 
 
 
  3x   3x  
2

1 + ( −2 )   + ( −2 )( −3)   
C  2   2   C=6
4 2 
 
 

Obtain correct un-simplified expansions up to the term in A1 FT

of each partial fraction + (1 + x + x ) +  − 12 +  34  x −  89  x
2 2 



A1 FT  6  18   81  
+ +  −   x +   x 2  [The FT is on A, B, C]
4  4  8 

A1 FT  1 6   3 18   9 81  2
1 − +  + 1 + −  x + 1 − +  x
 2 4  4 4   8 8

11 A1 Allow unsimplified fractions

Obtain final answer 2 − x + 10 x 2 , or equivalent
4   3x   3x  
2

1 + ( −2 )   + ( −2 )( −3)   
( Dx + E )  2   2   D = –3, E = 4
4  2 
 
 
The FT is on A, D, E.

© UCLES 2020 Page 16 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

46 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) Use correct product or quotient rule *M1 dy  1 

1
− x
1
− x
=  − (2 − x) e 2 −e 2
dx  2 
M1 requires at least one of derivatives correct

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and solve for x DM1

Obtain x = 4 A1 ISW
–2
Obtain y = –2e , or exact equivalent A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 17 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 47

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) Commence integration and reach *M1 Condone omission of dx

1 1 1 1 1
− x − x − x − x − x
a (2 − x) e 2 +b  e 2 dx −2 ( 2 − x ) e 2 + 4e 2 or 2 xe 2

1
− x
1
− x A1 OE
Obtain −2 ( 2 − x ) e 2

−2 e 2 dx

1
− x A1 OE
Complete integration and obtain 2 xe 2

Use correct limits, x = 0 and x = 2, correctly, having integrated DM1 Ignore omission of zeros and allow max of 1 error
twice

Obtain answer 4e–1, or exact equivalent A1 ISW

Alternative method for question 10(b)

 − x
1 *M1 A1
d  2 xe 2 
  1 1
  = 2e− 2 x − xe− 2 x
dx
1
− x A1
∴ 2 xe 2

Use correct limits, x = 0 and x = 2, correctly, having integrated DM1 Ignore omission of zeros and allow max of 1 error
twice

Obtain answer 4e–1, or exact equivalent A1 ISW

© UCLES 2020 Page 18 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

48 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) Express general point of at least one line correctly in component B1

form, i.e.
(1 + aλ, 2 + 2λ, 1 – λ) or (2 + 2µ, 1 – µ, – 1 + µ)

Equate at least two pairs of corresponding components and solve M1 May be implied
for λ or for µ 1 + aλ = 2 + 2µ 2 + 2λ = 1 – µ 1 – λ = – 1 + µ

Obtain λ = – 3 or µ = 5 A1

11 A1 Allow a = – 3.667
Obtain a = –
3

State that the point of intersection has position vector A1 Allow coordinate form (12, – 4, 4)
12i – 4j + 4k

© UCLES 2020 Page 19 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 49

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) Use correct process for finding the scalar product of direction M1 (a, 2, – 1) . (2, – 1, 1) = 2a – 2 – 1 or 2a – 3
vectors for the two lines

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar *M1
product by the product of the moduli and equate the result to
1
±
6

State a correct equation in a in any form, A1

2a − 2 − 1 1
e.g. =±
(
6 a2 + 5 ) 6

Solve for a DM1 Solve 3-term quadratic for a having expanded (2a – 3)2 to
produce 3 terms e.g.
36(2a – 3)2 = 6(a2 + 5) 138a2 – 432a + 294 = 0
23a2 – 72a + 49 = 0 (23a – 49) (a – 1) = 0

Obtain a = 1 A1

49 A1 Allow a = 2.13
Obtain a =
23

© UCLES 2020 Page 20 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

50 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) Alternative method for question 11(b)

cos(θ) = [|a2 + 22 + (–1)2|2 + | 22 + (–1)2 + 12|2 M1 Use of cosine rule. Must be correct vectors.
– |(a – 2)2 + 32 + (–2)2|2] / [2|a2 + 22 + (–1)2|.|22 + (–1)2 +12|]

1 M1 Allow M1 here for any two vectors

Equate the result to ± A1
6

Solve for a DM1 Solve 3-term quadratic for a having expanded (2a – 3)2 to
produce 3 terms e.g.
36(2a – 3)2 = 6(a2 + 5) 138a2 – 432a + 294 = 0
23a2 – 72a + 49 = 0 (23a – 49) (a – 1) = 0

Obtain a = 1 A1

49 A1 Allow a = 2.13
Obtain a =
23

© UCLES 2020 Page 21 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

1 Solve the equation

ln 1 + e−3x = 2.
Give the answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

4
3
2 (a) Expand 1 + 6x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) State the set of values of x for which the expansion is valid. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

3 The variables x and y satisfy the relation 2y = 31−2x .

(a) By taking logarithms, show that the graph of y against x is a straight line. State the exact value
of the gradient of this line. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Find the exact x-coordinate of the point of intersection of this line with the line y = 3x. Give your
ln a
answer in the form , where a and b are integers. [2]
ln b

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

4 (a) Show that the equation tan 1 + 60Å = 2 cot 1 can be written in the form

tan2 1 + 3 3 tan 1 − 2 = 0. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

(b) Hence solve the equation tan 1 + 60Å = 2 cot 1, for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

5
y

x
O

The diagram shows the curve with parametric equations

x = tan 1, y = cos2 1,
for − 12 π < 1 < 12 π.

(a) Show that the gradient of the curve at the point with parameter 1 is −2 sin 1 cos3 1. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

The gradient of the curve has its maximum value at the point P.

(b) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of P. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

6 The complex number u is defined by

7+i
u= .
1−i

(a) Express u in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Show on a sketch of an Argand diagram the points A, B and C representing u, 7 + i and 1 − i
respectively. [2]

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

(c) By considering the arguments of 7 + i and 1 − i, show that

tan−1 43 = tan−1 17 + 14 π. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

7 The variables x and t satisfy the differential equation

dx
e3t = cos2 2x,
dt
for t ≥ 0. It is given that x = 0 when t = 0.

(a) Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for x in terms of t. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) State what happens to the value of x when t tends to infinity. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

8 With respect to the origin O, the position vectors of the points A, B, C and D are given by
` a ` a ` a ` a
−−¿ 2 −−¿ 4 −−¿ 1 −−¿ 3
OA = 1 , OB = −1 , OC = 1 and OD = 2 .
5 1 2 3

(a) Show that AB = 2 CD. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

−−¿ −−¿
(b) Find the angle between the directions of AB and CD. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

7x + 18
9 Let f x = .
3x + 2 x2 + 4

(a) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

17
2
(b) Hence find the exact value of Ó f x dx. [6]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20 [Turn over

10
y

R
3
x
O a 2π

M

The diagram shows the curve y = x cos x, for 0 ≤ x ≤ 32 π, and its minimum point M , where x = a.
The shaded region between the curve and the x-axis is denoted by R.

1
(a) Show that a satisfies the equation tan a = . [3]
2a

........................................................................................................................................................

@ A
(b) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula an+1 = π + tan−1
1
, with initial value
2an
x1 = 3, converges to a.

Use this formula to determine a correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to
4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

(c) Find the volume of the solid obtained when the region R is rotated completely about the x-axis.
Give your answer in terms of π. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/O/N/20

70 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics 3 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 18 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 71

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

72 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 73

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

74 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 75

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 State that 1 + e −3 x
=e 2 B1 With no errors seen to that point

Use correct method to solve an equation of the form e −3 x = a , where M1 (e −3 x

)
= 6.389... Evidence of method must be seen.
a > 0, for x or equivalent

Obtain answer x = – 0.618 only A1 Must be 3 decimal places

Alternative method for question 1

State that 1 + e −3 x = e 2 B1

Rearrange to obtain an expression for e x and solve an equation of the M1 1

ex = 3
form e x = a , where a > 0, or equivalent e2 − 1

Obtain answer x = – 0.618 only A1 Must be 3 decimal places

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(a) State a correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 or x 3 term M1 For the given expression

State correct first two terms 1 + 2x A1

40 3 A1 + A1 One mark for each correct term. ISW Accept 13 13

Obtain the next two terms −4 x 2 + x
3 The question asks for simplified coefficients, so candidates
should cancel fractions.

2(b) 1 B1 OE. Strict inequality

State answer x <
6

1
© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

76 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) State or imply y log 2 = log 3 − 2 x log 3 B1 Accept y ln 2 = (1 − 2 x ) ln 3

State that the graph of y against x has an equation which is linear in x B1 Correct equation. Need a clear statement/comparison with
and y, or is of the form ay = bx + c matching linear form.

2ln 3 B1 Must be exact.

Clear indication that the gradient is – 2log
ln 2 k , log 1
3
Any equivalent e.g. − 2
log 2 9
k

3(b) Substitute y = 3x in an equation involving logarithms and solve for x M1

ln 3 A1 Allow M1A1 for the correct answer following decimals

Obtain answer x =
ln 72

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 77

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) Use correct tan ( A + B ) formula and obtain an equation in tan θ M1 tan θ + tan 60° 2
e.g. =
1 − tan θ tan 60° tan θ

Use tan 60° = 3 and obtain a correct horizontal equation in any form ( ) (
A1 e.g. tan θ tan θ + 3 = 2 1 − 3 tan θ
)
Reduce to tan 2 θ + 3 3 tan θ − 2 = 0 correctly A1 AG

4(b) Solve the given quadratic to obtain a value for θ M1  −3 3 ± 35 

 tan θ = = 0.3599, − 5.556 
 2 

Obtain one correct answer e.g. θ = 19.8 ° A1 Accept 1d.p. or better.

If over-specified must be correct. 19.797...., 100.2029...

Obtain second correct answer θ = 100.2° and no others in the given A1 Ignore answers outside the given interval.
interval

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

78 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) dx dy B1 CWO, AEF.

State = sec 2 θ or = −2sin θ cos θ
dθ dθ

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dθ dθ

dy A1 AG
Obtain = −2sin θ cos3 θ from correct working
dx

Alternative method for question 5(a)

Convert to Cartesian form and differentiate M1 1

y=
1 + x2

dy −2 x A1 OE
=
( )
2
dx 1 + x 2

dy A1 AG
Obtain = −2sin θ cos3 θ from correct working
dx

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 79

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b) d M1 Condone incorrect naming of the derivative

Use correct product rule to obtain
dθ
(
±2cos3 θ sin θ ) For work done in correct context

Obtain correct derivative in any form (

A1 e.g. ± −2cos 4θ + 6sin 2θ cos 2θ )
Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in one trig ratio A1 e.g. 3 tan 2θ = 1 , or 4 sin 2θ = 1 or 4 cos 2θ = 3

1 A1
Obtain answer x = – Or − 3
3 3

Alternative method for question 5(b)

d2 y M1
Use correct quotient rule to obtain
dx 2

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

( ) ( )
2
−2 1 + x 2 + 2 × 2 x × 2 x 1 + x2

(1 + x )
2 4

Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in x2 A1 e.g. 6x2 = 2

1 A1
Obtain answer x = –
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

80 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + i, or equivalent M1 Must multiply out

Obtain numerator 6 + 8i or denominator 2 A1

Obtain final answer u = 3 + 4i A1

Alternative method for question 6(a)

Multiply out (1 − i )( x + iy ) = 7 + i and compare real and imaginary parts M1

Obtain x + y = 7 or y − x = 1 A1

Obtain final answer u = 3 + 4i A1

6(b) Show the point A representing u in a relatively correct position B1 FT The FT is on xy ≠ 0.

Show the other two points B and C in relatively correct positions: B1

A
approximately equal distance above / below real axis 4

C
2

Take the position of A as a guide to ‘scale’ if axes not

marked

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 81

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(c) 1 B1 ArgC
State or imply arg(1 – i) = − π
4

Substitute exact arguments in arg(7 + i) – arg(1 – i) = arg u M1 Must see a statement about the relationship between the Args
e.g. ArgA = ArgB − ArgC or equivalent exact method

4 1 1 A1 Obtain given answer correctly from their u = k ( 3 + 4i )

Obtain tan −1   = tan −1   + π correctly
3 7 4

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

82 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) Correct separation of variables B1

 sec 
2 x dx = e −3t dt
2

Needs correct structure

1 B1
Obtain term − e−3t
3

Obtain term of the form k tan 2 x M1 From correct working

1 A1
Obtain term tan 2 x
2

Use x = 0, t = 0 to evaluate a constant, or as limits in a solution M1

containing terms of the form a tan 2 x and be −3t , where ab ≠ 0

Obtain correct solution in any form A1 1 1 1

e.g. tan 2 x = − e−3t +
2 3 3

1 −1  2  A1
Obtain final answer x =
2 3
(
tan  1 − e −3t 

)
7

7(b) 1 −1  2  B1 FT Correct value. Accept x → 0.294

State that x approaches tan  
2 3 The FT is dependent on letting e −3t → 0 in a solution
containing e −3t .

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 83

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)  2  2 B1 Or equivalent seen or implied

     
Obtain AB =  −2  and CD =  1 
 −4  1
   

Use the correct process for calculating the modulus of both vectors to M1 AB = 24, CD = 6
obtain AB and CD

Using exact values, verify that AB = 2CD A1 Obtain given statement from correct work
Allow from BA = 2DC, OE

8(b) Use the correct process to calculate the scalar product of the relevant M1  2  2  2   4
 
vectors (their AB and CD )        
 −2  and  1  or  −2  and  2 
 −4   1   −4   2
       

Divide the scalar product by the product of the moduli and evaluate the M1
inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 99.6 ° (or 1.74 radians) or better A1 Do not ISW if go on to subtract from 180°
(99.594…, 1.738...) Accept 260.4°

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

84 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
 
8(c) State correct vector equations for AB and CD in any form, B1ft Follow their AB and CD
 2  2 1  2 4  2  3  2
       
e.g. ( r = )  1  + λ  −2  and ( r = )  1  + μ  1         
Alternative: ( r = )  −1 + λ  −2  and ( r = )  2  + μ  1 
5  −4   2 1 1  −4   3 1
               

Equate at least two pairs of components of their lines and solve for λ or M1
for µ

Obtain correct pair of values from correct equations A1 Alternatives when taking A or B as point on line

A λ µ B λ µ

17 7 17 7
ij − 16 1
3 ≠ ij − 76 − 23 ≠
3 3 3 3

ik 1
2 1 0≠2 ik − 12 0 0≠2

3 1
jk 2 -3 5 ≠ −5 jk 2 -4 5 ≠ −5

Verify that all three equations are not satisfied and that the lines do not A1 CWO with conclusion
intersect 17 7 17 7
e.g. ≠ or = is inconsistent or equivalent
3 3 3 3

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 85

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) A Bx +C B1
State or imply the form + 2
3x + 2 x +4

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 3, B = –1, C = 3 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

9(b) Integrate and obtain ln ( 3x + 2 ) ... B1 FT The FT is on A

(
State a term of the form k ln x 2 + 4 . ) M1
From x
λx
2
dx
+4

1 A1 FT The FT is on B
( )
... − ln x 2 + 4 ...
2

3 x B1 FT The FT is on C
... + tan −1
2 2

Substitute limits correctly in an integral with at least two terms of the M1 Using terms that have been obtained correctly from
x completed integrals
( )
form a ln ( 3 x + 2 ) , b ln x 2 + 4 and c tan −1   , and subtract in correct
2
order

3 3 A1
Obtain answer ln 2 + π , or exact 2-term equivalent
2 8

© UCLES 2020 Page 16 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

86 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1 dy 1

e.g. = cos x − x sin x . Accept in a or in x
dx 2 x

1 A1 Obtain given answer from correct working.

Equate derivative to zero and obtain tan a = The question says ‘show that ..’ so there should be an
2a
intermediate step e.g. cos x = 2 x sin x .
1
Allow tan x =
2x

10(b) Use the iterative process correctly at least once (get one value and go on M1 Must be working in radians
to use it in a second use of the formula) Degrees gives 1, 12.6039, 5.4133, ... M0

Obtain final answer 3.29 A1 Clear conclusion

Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p.to justify 3.29, or show there A1 3, 3.3067, 3.2917, 3.2923
is a sign change in the interval (3.285, 3.295) Allow more than 4d.p. Condone truncation.

© UCLES 2020 Page 17 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 87

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

( )
10(c) 2 B1 1
State or imply the indefinite integral for the volume is π x cos x dx [If π omitted, or 2π or π used, give B0 and follow
2
through. 4/6 available]

Use correct cos 2A formula, commence integration by parts and reach *M1 x2 x 1
x(ax + b sin 2 x) ±  ax + b sin 2 xdx Alternative: + sin 2 x −
4 4 4sin 2 xdx

1 1 1 1 A1
Obtain x( x + sin 2 x) −  x + sin 2 x dx , or equivalent
2 4 2 4

Complete integration and obtain A1 OE

1 2 1 1
x + x sin 2 x + cos 2 x
4 4 8

1 DM1 π  π2 1 1
Substitute limits x = 0 and x = π , having integrated twice  +0− −0−0− 
2 2 8 4 4

1 A1 CAO
Obtain answer
16
( )
π π 2 − 4 , or exact equivalent

© UCLES 2020 Page 18 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

1 Solve the inequality 2 − 5x > 2 x − 3. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

2 On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying the inequalities z ≥ 2 and z − 1 + i ≤ 1. [4]

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 3 − cos 21, y = 21 + sin 21,
for 0 < 1 < 12 π.

dy
Show that = cot 1. [5]
dx

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

4 Solve the equation

log10 2x + 1 = 2 log10 x + 1 − 1.
Give your answers correct to 3 decimal places. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

− 12 x
5 (a) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation cosec x = 1 + e has exactly two
roots in the interval 0 < x < π. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

P Q
−1 1
xn+1 = π − sin ,
−1x
e 2 n +1
with initial value x1 = 2, converges to one of these roots.

Use the formula to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

8

6 (a) Express 6 cos 1 + 3 sin 1 in the form R cos 1 − !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. State the exact
value of R and give ! correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

9

(b) Hence solve the equation 6 cos 13 x + 3 sin 13 x = 2.5, for 0Å < x < 360Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

10

7 (a) Verify that −1 + 5i is a root of the equation 2x3 + x2 + 6x − 18 = 0. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

(b) Find the other roots of this equation. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

8 The coordinates x, y of a general point of a curve satisfy the differential equation

dy
x = 1 − 2x2 y,
dx
for x > 0. It is given that y = 1 when x = 1.

Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

8 + 5x + 12x2
9 Let f x = .
1 − x 2 + 3x2

(a) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

(b) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

10
y

x
O
M

− 12 x
The diagram shows the curve y = 2 − xe , and its minimum point M .

(a) Find the exact coordinates of M . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

(b) Find the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve and the axes. Give your answer in terms
of e. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20 [Turn over

11 Two lines have equations r = i + 2j + k + , ai + 2j − k and r = 2i + j − k + - 2i − j + k, where a is a

constant.

(a) Given that the two lines intersect, find the value of a and the position vector of the point of
intersection. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

19

(b) Given instead that the acute angle between the directions of the two lines is cos−1 16 , find the
two possible values of a. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/O/N/20

0.0 Year 2020 107

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics 3 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 21 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

108 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 109

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

110 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 111

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

112 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 Make a recognisable sketch graph of y = 2 x − 3 and the line B1 Need to see correct V at x = 3, roughly symmetrical,
y = 2 – 5x x = 3 stated, domain at least (– 2, 5).

Find x-coordinate of intersection with y = 2 – 5x M1 Find point of intersection with y = 2|x – 3| or solve 2 – 5x with
2(x – 3) or –2(x – 3)

4 A1
Obtain x = −
3

4 A1 Do not accept x < –1.33

State final answer x < − [Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]
3

Alternative method for question 1

State or imply non-modular inequality/equality B1 Two correct linear equations only

(2 – 5x)2 >, ⩾, =, 22(x – 3)2, or corresponding quadratic equation,
or pair of linear equations
(2 – 5x) >, ⩾ , =, ± 2(x – 3)

4 A1
Obtain critical value x = −
3

4 A1 Do not accept x < –1.33

State final answer x < − [Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 113

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Show a circle with centre the origin and radius 2 B1

Show the point representing 1 – i B1

Show a circle with centre 1 – i and radius 1 B1 FT The FT is on the position of 1 – i.

Shade the appropriate region B1 FT The FT is on the position of 1 – i.

Shaded region outside circle with centre the origin and radius 2
and inside circle with centre ±1 ± i and radius 1

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

114 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dx dy B1
State or imply = 2sin 2θ or = 2 + 2 cos 2θ
dθ dθ

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dθ dθ

dy 2 + 2cos 2θ A1 OE
Obtain correct answer =
dx 2sin 2θ

Use correct double angle formulae M1

dy A1 AG. Must have simplified numerator in terms of cosθ.

Obtain the given answer correctly = cot θ
dx

Alternative method for question 3

Start by using both correct double angle formulae M1

e.g. x = 3 – (2cos2θ − 1), y = 2θ + 2sinθcosθ

dx dy B1
or
dθ dθ

dy
=
( (
2 + 2 cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ )) M1 A1

dx 4cos θ sin θ

dy A1 AG
Simplify to given answer correctly = cot θ
dx

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 115

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Alternative method for question 3

dx dy B1
Set = 2θ. State = sin t or = 1 + cos t
dt dt

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dt dt

dy 1 + cos t A1 OE
Obtain correct answer =
dx sin t

Use correct double angle formulae M1

dy A1
Obtain the given answer correctly = cot θ
dx

4 State or imply log10 10 = 1 B1 log10 10–1 = − 1

Use law of the logarithm of a power, product or quotient M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form, free of logs A1 e.g. (2x + 1)/(x + 1)2 = 10–1
or 10(2x + 1)/(x + 1)2 = 100 or 1
or x2 + 2x + 1 = 20x + 10

Reduce to x 2 − 18 x − 9 = 0 , or equivalent A1

Solve a 3-term quadratic M1

Obtain final answers x = 18.487 and x = –0.487 A1 Must be 3 d.p. Do not allow rejection.

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

116 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = cosec x B1 π π

cosec x, U shaped, roughly symmetrical about x = , y   = 1
2 2
 π 5π 
and domain at least  ,  .
6 6 

5(b) Use the iterative formula correctly at least twice M1 2, 2.3217, 2.2760, 2.2824…
Need to see 2 iterations and following value inserted correctly

Obtain final answer 2.28 A1 Must be supported by iterations

Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify 2.28 to A1

2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in the interval (2.275,
2.285)

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 117

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) State R = 15 B1

Use trig formulae to find α M1 sin α 3 3

= with no error seen or tan α = quoted then
cos α 6 6
allow M1

Obtain α = 50.77 A1 Must be 2 d.p.

If radians 0.89 A0 MR

6(b) 2.5 B1 FT The FT is on incorrect R.

Evaluate β = cos −1 (49.797° to 4 d.p.)
15 x
= β − α [–2.9° and –301.7°]
3

x M1 x
Use correct method to find a value of in the interval Needs to use
3 3

Obtain answer rounding to x = 301.6° to 301.8° A1

Obtain second answer rounding to x = 2.9(0)° to 2.9(2)° and no A1

others in the interval

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

118 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

Use i2 = –1 correctly at least once M1 1 – 5 or 4 + 10 seen

Complete the verification correctly A1

( ) ( ) ( )
2 14 − 2 5i + −4 − 2 5i + 6 −1 + 5i − 18 = 0

7(b) State second root −1 − 5i B1

Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with M1

zeros −1 + 5i and −1 − 5i

Obtain x2 + 2x + 6 A1

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

(x + 1 – 5i ) (x + 1 + 5i ) (2x + a) = 2x3 + x2 + 6x – 18 M1

(1 – 5 i) (1 + 5 i) a = –18 A1

3 A1 OE
6a = –18 a = –3 leading to x =
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 119

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b) Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

POR = 6 SOR = – 2 M1
2
Obtain x + 2x + 6 A1

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

( )( )
POR −1 − 5i −1 + 5i a = 9 M1 A1

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

Alternative method for question 7(b)

State second root −1 − 5i B1

1 M1 A1
( ) ( )
SOR −1 − 5i + −1 + 5i + a = −
2

3 A1 OE
Obtain root x =
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

120 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least B1 1 2

1 − 2x
one side dy = dx
y x

Obtain term ln y B1

Obtain terms ln x − x 2 B1

Obtain correct solution in any form A1

Rearrange and obtain y = xe1− x

2
A1 OE

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 121

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
1 − x 2 + 3x ( 2 + 3x )2

Use a correct method for finding a coefficient M1

Obtain one of A = 1, B = –1 , C = 6 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1 A Dx + E

In the form + , where A = 1, D = – 3
1 − x ( 2 + 3 x )2
and E = 4 can score B1 M1 A1 A1 A1 as above.

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

122 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 + ( −1)   + ( −1)( −2 )   
B  2   2   B=1
2 2 
 
 
  3x   3x  
2

1 + ( −2 )   + ( −2 )( −3)   
C  2   2   C=6
4 2 
 
 

Obtain correct un-simplified expansions up to the term in A1 FT

of each partial fraction + (1 + x + x ) +  − 12 +  34  x −  89  x
2 2 



A1 FT  6  18   81  
+ +  −   x +   x 2  [The FT is on A, B, C]
4  4  8 

A1 FT  1 6   3 18   9 81  2
1 − +  + 1 + −  x + 1 − +  x
 2 4  4 4   8 8

11 A1 Allow unsimplified fractions

Obtain final answer 2 − x + 10 x 2 , or equivalent
4   3x   3x  
2

1 + ( −2 )   + ( −2 )( −3)   
( Dx + E )  2   2   D = –3, E = 4
4  2 
 
 
The FT is on A, D, E.

© UCLES 2020 Page 16 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 123

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) Use correct product or quotient rule *M1 dy  1 

1
− x
1
− x
=  − (2 − x) e 2 −e 2
dx  2 
M1 requires at least one of derivatives correct

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and solve for x DM1

Obtain x = 4 A1 ISW
–2
Obtain y = –2e , or exact equivalent A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 17 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

124 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) Commence integration and reach *M1 Condone omission of dx

1 1 1 1 1
− x − x − x − x − x
a (2 − x) e 2 +b  e 2 dx −2 ( 2 − x ) e 2 + 4e 2 or 2 xe 2

1
− x
1
− x A1 OE
Obtain −2 ( 2 − x ) e 2

−2 e 2 dx

1
− x A1 OE
Complete integration and obtain 2 xe 2

Use correct limits, x = 0 and x = 2, correctly, having integrated DM1 Ignore omission of zeros and allow max of 1 error
twice

Obtain answer 4e–1, or exact equivalent A1 ISW

Alternative method for question 10(b)

 − x
1 *M1 A1
d  2 xe 2 
  1 1
  = 2e− 2 x − xe− 2 x
dx
1
− x A1
∴ 2 xe 2

Use correct limits, x = 0 and x = 2, correctly, having integrated DM1 Ignore omission of zeros and allow max of 1 error
twice

Obtain answer 4e–1, or exact equivalent A1 ISW

© UCLES 2020 Page 18 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 125

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) Express general point of at least one line correctly in component B1

form, i.e.
(1 + aλ, 2 + 2λ, 1 – λ) or (2 + 2µ, 1 – µ, – 1 + µ)

Equate at least two pairs of corresponding components and solve M1 May be implied
for λ or for µ 1 + aλ = 2 + 2µ 2 + 2λ = 1 – µ 1 – λ = – 1 + µ

Obtain λ = – 3 or µ = 5 A1

11 A1 Allow a = – 3.667
Obtain a = –
3

State that the point of intersection has position vector A1 Allow coordinate form (12, – 4, 4)
12i – 4j + 4k

© UCLES 2020 Page 19 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

126 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) Use correct process for finding the scalar product of direction M1 (a, 2, – 1) . (2, – 1, 1) = 2a – 2 – 1 or 2a – 3
vectors for the two lines

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar *M1
product by the product of the moduli and equate the result to
1
±
6

State a correct equation in a in any form, A1

2a − 2 − 1 1
e.g. =±
(
6 a2 + 5 ) 6

Solve for a DM1 Solve 3-term quadratic for a having expanded (2a – 3)2 to
produce 3 terms e.g.
36(2a – 3)2 = 6(a2 + 5) 138a2 – 432a + 294 = 0
23a2 – 72a + 49 = 0 (23a – 49) (a – 1) = 0

Obtain a = 1 A1

49 A1 Allow a = 2.13
Obtain a =
23

© UCLES 2020 Page 20 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 127

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) Alternative method for question 11(b)

cos(θ) = [|a2 + 22 + (–1)2|2 + | 22 + (–1)2 + 12|2 M1 Use of cosine rule. Must be correct vectors.
– |(a – 2)2 + 32 + (–2)2|2] / [2|a2 + 22 + (–1)2|.|22 + (–1)2 +12|]

1 M1 Allow M1 here for any two vectors

Equate the result to ± A1
6

Solve for a DM1 Solve 3-term quadratic for a having expanded (2a – 3)2 to
produce 3 terms e.g.
36(2a – 3)2 = 6(a2 + 5) 138a2 – 432a + 294 = 0
23a2 – 72a + 49 = 0 (23a – 49) (a – 1) = 0

Obtain a = 1 A1

49 A1 Allow a = 2.13
Obtain a =
23

© UCLES 2020 Page 21 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the set of values of x for which 2 31−2x < 5x . Give your answer in a simplified exact form. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

2 (a) Expand 2 − 3x−2 in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) State the set of values of x for which the expansion is valid. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

3 Express the equation tan 1 + 60Å = 2 + tan 60Å − 1 as a quadratic equation in tan 1, and hence solve
the equation for 0Å ≤ 1 ≤ 180Å. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

4 The curve with equation y = e2x sin x + 3 cos x has a stationary point in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ π.

(a) Find the x-coordinate of this point, giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Determine whether the stationary point is a maximum or a minimum. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

5 (a) Find the quotient and remainder when 2x3 − x2 + 6x + 3 is divided by x2 + 3. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

2x3 − x2 + 6x + 3
3
(b) Using your answer to part (a), find the exact value of Ô
x2 + 3
dx. [5]
1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

6
A

O 2x rad T

The diagram shows a circle with centre O and radius r . The tangents to the circle at the points A and
B meet at T , and angle AOB is 2x radians. The shaded region is bounded by the tangents AT and BT ,
and by the minor arc AB. The area of the shaded region is equal to the area of the circle.

(a) Show that x satisfies the equation tan x = π + x. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

(b) This equation has one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π. Verify by calculation that this root lies
between 1 and 1.4. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(c) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = tan−1 π + xn
to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

Let f x =
cos x
1 + sin x
7 .

(a) Show that f ′ x < 0 for all x in the interval − 12 π < x < 32 π. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

11
1π

(b) Find Ó
2
f x dx. Give your answer in a simplified exact form. [4]
1π
6

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

12
y
8 A certain curve is such that its gradient at a point x, y is proportional to . The curve passes
x x
through the points with coordinates 1, 1 and 4, e.

(a) By setting up and solving a differential equation, find the equation of the curve, expressing y in
terms of x. [8]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Describe what happens to y as x tends to infinity. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

9 With respect to the origin O, the vertices of a triangle ABC have position vectors
−−¿ −−¿ −−¿
OA = 2i + 5k, OB = 3i + 2j + 3k and OC = i + j + k.

(a) Using a scalar product, show that angle ABC is a right angle. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Show that triangle ABC is isosceles. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20 [Turn over

(a) The complex number u is defined by u =

3i
a + 2i
10 , where a is real.

(i) Express u in the Cartesian form x + iy, where x and y are in terms of a. [3]

................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Find the exact value of a for which arg u* = 13 π. [3]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

(b) (i) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex
numbers z satisfying the inequalities z − 2i ≤ z − 1 − i and z − 2 − i ≤ 2. [4]

(ii) Calculate the least value of arg z for points in this region. [2]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/M/J/20

0.0 Year 2020 147

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics 3 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

148 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 149

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED

Mathematics-Specific Marking Principles

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of accuracy
is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or the
method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

150 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 151

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

152 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1 Use law of the logarithm of a product or power M1

Obtain a correct linear inequality in any form, e.g. ln 2 + (1 – 2x) ln 3 < x ln 5 A1

Solve for x M1

ln 6 A1
Obtain x >
ln 45

Question Answer Marks

2(a)  3 
−2 M1
State a correct unsimplified version of the x or x2 term of the expansion of (2 – 3x)–2 or  1 − x 
 2 

1 B1
State correct first term
4

3 27 2 A1 + A1
Obtain the next two terms x+ x
4 16

2(b) 2 B1
State answer x < , or equivalent
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 153

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3 Use tan (A ± B) formula and obtain an equation in tan θ M1

Using tan 60° = 3 , obtain a horizontal equation in tan θ in any correct form A1

Reduce the equation to 3 tan 2 θ + 4 tan θ − 1 = 0 , or equivalent A1

Solve a 3-term quadratic for tan θ M1

Obtain a correct answer, e.g. 12.1° A1

Obtain a second correct answer, e.g. 122.9°, and no others in the given interval A1

Question Answer Marks

4(a) Use product rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form e.g. 2e 2 x ( sin x + 3 cos x ) + e 2 x ( cos x − 3sin x ) A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in one trigonometric ratio M1

Obtain x = 1.43 only A1

4(b) Use a correct method to determine the nature of the stationary point M1
x = 1.42, y′ = 0.06e
2.84
>0
e.g.
x = 1.44, y′ = −0.07e
2.88
<0

Show that it is a maximum point A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

154 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) Commence division and reach quotient of the form 2x + k M1

Obtain quotient 2x – 1 A1

Obtain remainder 6 A1

5(b) Obtain terms x2 – x B1FT

(FT on quotient of the form 2x + k)

 x  M1
Obtain term of the form a tan −1  
 3

6  x  A1FT
Obtain term tan −1  
3  3
(FT on a constant remainder)

Use x = 1 and x = 3 as limits in a solution containing a term of the form a tan −1 ( bx ) M1

1 A1
Obtain final answer π + 6 , or exact equivalent
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 155

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

6(a) State or imply AT = r tan x or BT = r tan x B1

Use correct area formula and form an equation in r and x M1

Rearrange in the given form A1

6(b) Calculate the values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at x = 1 and x = 1.4 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

6(c) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.35 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.35 to 2 d.p. or show there is a sign change in the interval (1.345, 1.355) A1

Question Answer Marks

7(a) Use quotient or product rule M1

− sin x (1 + sin x ) − cos x ( cos x ) A1

Obtain derivative in any correct form e.g.
(1 + sin x ) 2

Use Pythagoras to simplify the derivative M1

Justify the given statement A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

156 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

7(b) State integral of the form a ln (1 + sin x) *M1

State correct integral ln (1 + sin x) A1

Use limits correctly DM1

4 A1
Obtain answer ln
3

8(a) dy y B1
State =k , or equivalent
dx x x

Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side M1

Obtain term ln y, or equivalent A1

1 A1
Obtain term −2k , or equivalent
x

b M1
Use given coordinates to find k or a constant of integration c in a solution containing terms of the form a ln y and , where
x
ab ≠ 0

Obtain k = 1 and c = 2 A1 + A1

 2  A1
Obtain final answer y = exp  − + 2  , or equivalent
 x 

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 157

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
ଶ
8(b) State that y approaches e B1FT
(FT their c in part (a) of the correct form)

1
   
9(a) ( ) ( )
State AB or BA and BC or CB in vector form B1

Calculate their scalar product M1

Show product is zero and confirm angle ABC is a right angle A1

9(b) Use correct method to calculate the lengths of AB and BC M1

Show that AB = BC and the triangle is isosceles A1

9(c) State a correct equation for the line through B and C, B1

e.g. r = i + j + k + λ (2i + j + 2k) or r = 3i + 2 j + 3k + μ ( −2i − j − 2k )
 
Taking a general point of BC to be P, form an equation in λ by either equating the scalar product of OP and BC to zero, M1

or applying Pythagoras to triangle OBP (or OCP), or setting the derivative of OP to zero

5 A1
Solve and obtain λ = –
9

1 A1
Obtain answer 2 , or equivalent
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

158 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

Alternative method for question 9(c)

Use a scalar product to find the projection CN (or BN) of OC (or OB) on BC M1

5 14  A1
Obtain answer CN =  or BN = 
3 3

Use Pythagoras to find ON M1

1 A1
Obtain answer 2 , or equivalent
3

Question Answer Marks

10(a)(i) Multiply numerator and denominator by a – 2i, or equivalent M1

Use i2 = –1 at least once A1

6 3ai A1
Obtain answer +
a2 + 4 a2 + 4

10(a)(ii) 1 B1
Either state that arg u = − π or express u* in terms of a (FT on u)
3

Use correct method to form an equation in a M1

Obtain answer a = −2 3 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 159

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

10(b)(i) Show the perpendicular bisector of points representing 2i and 1 + i B1

Show the point representing 2 + i B1

Show a circle with radius 2 and centre 2 + i B1FT

(FT on the position of the point for 2 + i)

Shade the correct region B1

10(b)(ii) State or imply the critical point 2 + 3i B1

Obtain answer 56.3° or 0.983 radians B1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the quotient and remainder when 6x4 + x3 − x2 + 5x − 6 is divided by 2x2 − x + 1. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

2
ln y

5.24, 2.7

1.5, 1.2

x
O

The variables x and y satisfy the equation y2 = Aekx , where A and k are constants. The graph of
ln y against x is a straight line passing through the points 1.5, 1.2 and 5.24, 2.7 as shown in the
diagram.

Find the values of A and k correct to 2 decimal places. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

3 Find the exact value of

4
Ó x 2 ln x dx.
3
[5]
1

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

4 A curve has equation y = cos x sin 2x.

Find the x-coordinate of the stationary point in the interval 0 < x < 12 π, giving your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

6

5 (a) Express 2 cos x − 5 sin x in the form R cos x + !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. Give the
exact value of R and the value of ! correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

7

(b) Hence solve the equation 2 cos 21 − 5 sin 21 = 1, for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

6
y

x
O 1

x
The diagram shows the curve y = , for x ≥ 0, and its maximum point M .
1 + 3x4
(a) Find the x-coordinate of M , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

9

(b) Using the substitution u = 3x2 , find by integration the exact area of the shaded region bounded
by the curve, the x-axis and the line x = 1. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

7 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy y−1
= .
dx x + 1 x + 3
It is given that y = 2 when x = 0.

Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [9]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

8 (a) Solve the equation 1 + 2iw + iw* = 3 + 5i. Give your answer in the form x + iy, where x and y
are real. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

(b) (i) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex
numbers z satisfying the inequalities z − 2 − 2i ≤ 1 and arg z − 4i ≥ − 14 π. [4]

(ii) Find the least value of Im z for points in this region, giving your answer in an exact form.
[2]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

9
y

x
O p 1
2π

k
The diagram shows the curves y = cos x and y = , where k is a constant, for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 π. The
1+x
curves touch at the point where x = p.

1
(a) Show that p satisfies the equation tan p = . [5]
1+p

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

15
A @
(b) Use the iterative formula pn+1 = tan−1
1
to determine the value of p correct to 3 decimal
1 + pn
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(c) Hence find the value of k correct to 2 decimal places. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20 [Turn over

16
−−¿
10 With respect to the origin O, the points A and B have position vectors given by OA = 6i + 2j and
−−¿
OB = 2i + 2j + 3k. The midpoint of OA is M . The point N lying on AB, between A and B, is such
that AN = 2 NB.

(a) Find a vector equation for the line through M and N . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

The line through M and N intersects the line through O and B at the point P.

(b) Find the position vector of P. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(c) Calculate angle OPM , giving your answer in degrees. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/M/J/20

0.0 Year 2020 179

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics 3 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

180 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 181

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of accuracy
is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or the
method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

182 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 183

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

184 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
2
1 Commence division and reach partial quotient 3x + kx M1
2
Obtain quotient 3x + 2x –1 A1

Obtain remainder 2x – 5 A1

Question Answer Marks

2 State or imply 2 ln y = ln A + kx B1

Substitute values of ln and x, or equate gradient of line to k, and solve for k M1

Obtain k = 0.80 A1

Solve for ln A M1

Obtain A = 3.31 A1

Alternative method for question 2

Obtain two correct equations in y and x by substituting y- and x- values in the given equation B1

Solve for k M1

Obtain k = 0.80 A1

Solve for A M1

Obtain A = 3.31 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 185

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3 5 5
1 M1*
Commence integration and reach ax 2 ln x + b  x2 .
x
dx

5
2 2 2 2 1
5 A1
Obtain
5
x ln x −
5x . dx
x

2 2
5
4 2
5 A1
Complete the integration and obtain x ln x − x , or equivalent
5 25

Use limits correctly, having integrated twice DM1

2 4 2  4
e.g × 32 ln 4 − × 32 −  × 0  +
5 25  5  25

128 124 A1
Obtain answer ln 2 − , or exact equivalent
5 25

Question Answer Marks

4 Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. –sin x sin 2x + 2cos x cos 2x A1

Use double angle formula to express derivative in terms of sin x and cos x M1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in one trig function M1

Obtain 3 sin 2x = 1, or 3 cos 2x = 2 or 2 tan 2x = 1 A1

Solve and obtain x = 0.615 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

186 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) State R = 7 B1

Use trig formulae to find α M1

Obtain α = 57.688° A1

5(b)  1  B1 FT
Evaluate cos − 1  to at least 3 d.p. (67.792°)
 7
(FT is on their R)

Use correct method to find a value of in the interval M1

Obtain answer, e.g. 5.1° A1

Obtain second answer, e.g.117.3°, only A1

6(a) Use quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

e.g.
(1 + 3x ) − x × 12 x
4 3

(1 + 3 x )
4 2

Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1

Obtain answer 0.577 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 187

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

6(b) State or imply du = 2 3x dx , or equivalent B1

Substitute for x and dx M1

1 A1
Obtain integrand , or equivalent
(
2 3 1 + u2 )
State integral of the form tan and use limits u = 0 and u = 3 (or x = 0 and x = 1) correctly M1

3 A1
Obtain answer π , or exact equivalent
18

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

188 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

7 Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1

Obtain term ln(y – 1) B1

1 A B M1
Carry out a relevant method to determine A and B such that ≡ +
( x + 1)( x + 3) x +1 x + 3

1 1 A1
Obtain A = and B = −
2 2

1 1 A1 FT
Integrate and obtain terms ln ( x + 1) − ln ( x + 3) ln + 1 − ln( + 3), or equivalent + A1 FT
2 2
(FT is on A and B)

Use x = 0, y = 2 to evaluate a constant, or as limits in a solution containing terms of the form a ln(y – 1), b ln(x + 1) and M1
c ln(x + 3), where abc ≠ 0

Obtain correct answer in any form A1

 3x + 3  A1
Obtain final answer y = 1 +   , or equivalent
 x+3 

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 189

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

8(a) Substitute and obtain a correct equation in x and y B1

2
Use i = –1 and equate real and imaginary parts M1

Obtain two correct equations in x and y, e.g. x – y = 3 and 3x + y = 5 A1

Solve and obtain answer z = 2 – i A1

8(b)(i) Show a point representing 2 + 2i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 and centre not at the origin B1 FT

(FT is on the point representing the centre)

Show the correct half line from 4i B1

Shade the correct region B1

8(b)(ii) Carry out a complete method for finding the least value of Im z M1

1 A1
Obtain answer 2 − 2 , or exact equivalent
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

190 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

9(a) k B1
State cos p =
1+ p

Differentiate both equations and equate derivatives at x = p M1

k A1
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. − sin p = −
(1 + p )2
Eliminate k M1

Obtain the given answer showing sufficient working A1

9(b) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer p = 0.568 A1

Show sufficient iterations to justify 0.568 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign change in the interval (0.5675, 0.5685) A1

9(c) Use a correct method to find k M1

Obtain answer k = 1.32 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 191

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

10(a) State that the position vector of M is 3i + j B1

Use a correct method to find the position vector of N M1

10 A1
Obtain answer i + 2 j + 2k
3

Use a correct method to form an equation for MN M1

1  A1
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. r = 3i + j + λ  i + j + 2k 
3 

10(b) State or imply r = µ(2i + 2j + 3k) as equation for OB B1

Equate sufficient components of MN and OB and solve for λ or for µ M1

Obtain λ = 3 or µ = 2 and position vector 4i + 4j + 6k for P A1

10(c) Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of direction vectors for OP and MP, or equivalent M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the moduli and evaluate the inverse M1
cosine of the result

Obtain answer 21.6° A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 2x − 1 > 3 x + 2. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

3
1
2 Find the exact value of Ó 2 − xe−2x dx. [5]
0

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

3 (a) Show that the equation

ln 1 + e−x + 2x = 0
can be expressed as a quadratic equation in ex . [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Hence solve the equation ln 1 + e−x + 2x = 0, giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places.
[4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

5

4 The equation of a curve is y = x tan−1 12 x .

dy
(a) Find . [3]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) The tangent to the curve at the point where x = 2 meets the y-axis at the point with coordinates
0, p.

Find p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

5 By first expressing the equation

tan 1 tan 1 + 45Å = 2 cot 21
as a quadratic equation in tan 1, solve the equation for 0Å < 1 < 90Å. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

6 (a) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation x5 = 2 + x has exactly one real
root. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Show that if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

4xn5 + 2
xn+1 =
5xn4 − 1

converges, then it converges to the root of the equation in part (a). [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

........................................................................................................................................................

(c) Use the iterative formula with initial value x1 = 1.5 to calculate the root correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

2
7 Let f x = .
2x − 1 2x + 1

(a) Express f x in partial fractions. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Using your answer to part (a), show that

2 1 1 1 1
f x = − + + . [2]
2x − 12 2x − 1 2x + 1 2x + 12

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

11
2 2
(c) Hence show that Ó f x dx = 25 + 12 ln 59 . [5]
1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

8 Relative to the origin O, the points A, B and D have position vectors given by
−−¿ −−¿ −−¿
OA = i + 2j + k, OB = 2i + 5j + 3k and OD = 3i + 2k.
A fourth point C is such that ABCD is a parallelogram.

(a) Find the position vector of C and verify that the parallelogram is not a rhombus. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

(b) Find angle BAD, giving your answer in degrees. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

9 (a) The complex numbers u and w are such that

u − w = 2i and uw = 6.
Find u and w, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying the inequalities

z − 2 − 2i ≤ 2, 0 ≤ arg z ≤ 14 π and Re z ≤ 3. [5]

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20 [Turn over

10
r

A tank containing water is in the form of a hemisphere. The axis is vertical, the lowest point is A and
the radius is r , as shown in the diagram. The depth of water at time t is h. At time t = 0 the tank is
water is r. At this instant a tap at A is opened and water begins to flow out at
full and the depth of the
a rate proportional to h. The tank becomes empty at time t = 14.

The volume of water in the tank is V when the depth is h. It is given that V = 13 π 3rh2 − h3 .

(a) Show that h and t satisfy a differential equation of the form

dh B
=− ,
2rh 2 − h 2
1 3
dt

where B is a positive constant. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

(b) Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for t in terms of h and r. [8]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/33/M/J/20

0.0 Year 2020 211

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics 3 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

212 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 213

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of accuracy
is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or the
method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

214 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 215

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

216 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
2 2 2
1 State or imply non-modular inequality (2x – 1) > 3 (x + 2) , or corresponding quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations B1

Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations for x M1

Obtain critical values x = –7 and x = –1 A1

State final answer –7 < x < –1 A1

Alternative method for question 1

Obtain critical value x = –1 from a graphical method, or by solving a linear equation or linear inequality B1

Obtain critical value x = –7 similarly B2

State final answer –7 < x < –1 B1

[Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 217

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

2 Commence integration and reach M1*


a ( 2 − x ) e −2 x + b e −2 x dx , or equivalent

1 1 A1
Obtain −
2 2 
( 2 − x ) e−2 x − e−2 x dx , or equivalent

1 1 A1
Complete integration and obtain − ( 2 − x ) e−2 x + e−2 x , or equivalent
2 4

Use limits correctly, having integrated twice DM1

1 A1
Obtain answer
4
( )
3 − e−2 , or exact equivalent

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

218 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
–x –2x
3(a) Remove logarithms correctly and state 1 + e = e , or equivalent B1

Show equation is + − 1 = 0, where = e , or equivalent B1

3(b) Solve a 3-term quadratic for u M1

1 A1
Obtain root
2
( )
−1 + 5 , or decimal in [0.61, 0.62]

Use correct method for finding x from a positive root M1

Obtain answer x = –0.481 only A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 219

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

4(a) Use the product rule M1

State or imply derivative of tan ( ) is of the form /(4 + ), where k = 2 or 4, or equivalent M1

1  2x A1
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. tan −1  x  + 2 , or equivalent
2  x +4

4(b) 1 B1
State or imply y-coordinate is π
2

Carry out a complete method for finding p, e.g. by obtaining the equation of the tangent and setting x = 0, or by equating the M1
1
π−p
gradient at x = 2 to 2
2

Obtain answer p = –1 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

220 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5 Use tan 2A formula to express RHS in terms of tan θ M1

Use tan (A ± B) formula to express LHS in terms of tan θ M1

Using tan 45° = 1, obtain a correct horizontal equation in any form A1

2
Reduce equation to 2 tan θ + tan θ − 1 = 0 A1

Solve a 3-term quadratic and find a value of θ M1

Obtain answer θ = 26.6° and no other A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 221

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
5
6(a) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = x B1

Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = x + 2 and justify the given statement B1

6(b) 5
4x + 2 B1
State a suitable equation, e.g. x =
5x4 − 1

Rearrange this as x5 = 2 + x or commence working vice versa B1

6(c) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.267 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 1.267 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign change in the interval (1.2665, 1.2675) A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

222 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

7(a) A B M1
State or imply the form + and use a relevant method to find A or B
2x − 1 2x + 1

Obtain A = 1, B = –1 A1

7(b) Square the result of part (a) and substitute the fractions of part (a) M1

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

7(c) 1 1 1 1 B3, 2, 1, 0
Integrate and obtain − − ln ( 2 x − 1) + ln ( 2 x + 1) − , or equivalent
2 ( 2 x − 1) 2 2 2 ( 2 x + 1)

Substitute limits correctly M1

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 223

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks
 
8(a) State or imply AB or AD in component form B1

Use a correct method for finding the position vector of C M1

Obtain answer 4i + 3j + 4k, or equivalent A1

Using the correct process for the moduli, compare lengths of a pair of adjacent sides, e.g. AB and AD M1

Show that ABCD has a pair of unequal adjacent sides A1

Alternative method for question 8(a)

 
State or imply AB or AD in component form B1

Use a correct method for finding the position vector of C M1

Obtain answer 4i + 3j + 4k, or equivalent A1

 
Use the correct process to calculate the scalar product of AC and BD , or equivalent M1

Show that the diagonals of ABCD are not perpendicular A1

5
 
8(b) Use the correct process to calculate the scalar product of a pair of relevant vectors, e.g. AB and AD M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the moduli of the two vectors and evaluate M1
the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 100.3° A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

224 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

8(c) Use a correct method to calculate the area, e.g. calculate AB.AC sin BAD M1

Obtain answer 11.0 A1 FT

(FT on angle BAD)

Question Answer Marks

9(a) Eliminate u or w and obtain an equation w or u M1

2 2
Obtain a quadratic in u or w, e.g. u – 2iu – 6 = 0 or w + 2iw – 6 = 0 A1

Solve a 3-term quadratic for u or for w M1

Obtain answer u = 5 + i , w = 5 − i A1

Obtain answer u = − 5 + i , w = − 5 − i A1

9(b) Show the point representing 2 + 2i B1

Show a circle with centre 2 + 2i and radius 2 B1 FT

(FT is on the position of 2 + 2i)

Show half-line from origin at 45° to the positive x-axis B1

Show line for Re z = 3 B1

Shade the correct region B1

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 225

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

10(a) dV B1
State or imply = −k h
dt

dV B1
State or imply = 2πrh − πh 2 , or equivalent
dh

dV dV dh M1
Use = .
dt dh dt

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

10(b) Separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side M1

3
4 2 2 2
5 A3, 2, 1, 0
Obtain terms rh − h and –Bt
3 5

Use t = 0, h = r to find a constant of integration c M1

Use t = 14, h = 0 to find B M1

14
5
1
5 A1
Obtain correct c and B, e.g. c = r2, B= r2
15 15

3 5 A1
 h 2  h 2
Obtain final answer t = 14 − 20   + 6   , or equivalent
r r

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 (a) Sketch the graph of y = x − 2. [1]

(b) Solve the inequality x − 2 < 3x − 4. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

2 Solve the equation ln 3 + ln 2x + 5 = 2 ln x + 2. Give your answer in a simplified exact form. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

3 (a) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation sec x = 2 − 12 x has exactly one root
in the interval 0 ≤ x < 12 π. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 0.8 and 1. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

A @
(c) Use the iterative formula xn+1 = cos−1
2
to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places.
4 − xn
Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

5
1π

Find Ó
3
4 x sec2 x dx. Give your answer in a simplified exact form. [7]
1π
6

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

cos 3x sin 3x
5 (a) Show that + = 2 cot 2x. [4]
sin x cos x

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

cos 3x sin 3x
(b) Hence solve the equation + = 4, for 0 < x < π. [3]
sin x cos x

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

6 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy 1 + 4y2
= .
dx ex
It is given that y = 0 when x = 1.

(a) Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) State what happens to the value of y as x tends to infinity. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

7 The equation of a curve is x3 + 3xy2 − y3 = 5.

dy x2 + y2
(a) Show that = 2 . [4]
dx y − 2xy

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

(b) Find the coordinates of the points on the curve where the tangent is parallel to the y-axis. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

8
G N F

E
D
B
C

j M

O i A

In the diagram, OABCDEFG is a cuboid in which OA = 2 units, OC = 3 units and OD = 2 units.

Unit vectors i, j and k are parallel to OA, OC and OD respectively. The point M on AB is such that
MB = 2 AM . The midpoint of FG is N .
−−−¿ −−−¿
(a) Express the vectors OM and MN in terms of i, j and k. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(b) Find a vector equation for the line through M and N . [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

2 + 11x − 10x2
9 Let f x = .
1 + 2x 1 − 2x 2 + x

(a) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

(b) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20 [Turn over

10 (a) The complex numbers v and w satisfy the equations

v + iw = 5 and 1 + 2iv − w = 3i.
Solve the equations for v and w, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real.
[6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

(b) (i) On an Argand diagram, sketch the locus of points representing complex numbers z satisfying
z − 2 − 3i = 1. [2]

(ii) Calculate the least value of arg z for points on this locus. [2]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 9709/32/F/M/20

0.0 Year 2020 245

Cambridge International A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics March 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

246 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 247

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Mathematics-Specific Marking Principles

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or the
method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

248 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 249

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

250 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(a) Make a recognisable sketch graph of y = x − 2 B1

1(b) Find x-coordinate of intersection with y = 3x – 4 M1

3 A1
Obtain x =
2

3 A1
State final answer x > only
2

Alternative method for question 1(b)

Solve the linear inequality 3x − 4 > 2 − x , or corresponding equation M1

3 A1
Obtain critical value x =
2

3 A1
State final answer x > only
2

Alternative method for question 1(b)

Solve the quadratic inequality ( x − 2 ) < ( 3x − 4 ) ,

2 2 M1
or corresponding equation

3 A1
Obtain critical value x =
2

3 A1
State final answer x > only
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 251

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Use law of logarithm of a power and sum and remove logarithms M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. 3 ( 2 x + 5 ) = ( x + 2 )

2 A1

Use correct method to solve a 3-term quadratic, obtaining at least one root M1

Obtain final answer x = 1 + 2 3 or 1 + 12 only A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) Sketch the graph y = sec x M1

1 A1
Sketch the graph y = 2 − x , and justify the given statement
2

3(b) Calculate the values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at x = 0.8 M1

and x = 1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

3(c) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.88 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 0.88 to 2 d.p., or show there is a A1

sign change in the interval (0.875, 0.885)

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

252 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
*
4 Integrate by parts and reach ax tan x + b  tan xdx M1

Obtain x tan x −  tan x dx A1

Complete the integration, obtaining a term ± lncos x , or equivalent M1

Obtain integral x tan x + lncos x , or equivalent A1

Substitute limits correctly, having integrated twice DM1

Use a law of logarithms M1

5 1 A1
Obtain answer 3π − ln 3 , or exact simplified equivalent
18 2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) Express LHS correctly as a single fraction B1

Use cos ( A ± B ) formula to simplify the numerator M1

Use sin 2A formula to simplify the denominator M1

Obtain the given result. A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 253

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b) Obtain an equation in tan2x and use correct method to solve for x M1

Obtain answer, e.g. 0.232 A1

Obtain second answer, e.g. 1.80 A1 Ignore answers outside the given interval.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side B1

Obtain term of the form a tan −1 (2 y) M1

1 A1
Obtain term tan −1 ( 2 y )
2

Obtain term −e− x B1

Use x = 1, y = 0 to evaluate a constant or as limits in a solution containing M1

terms of the form atan −1 ( by ) and ce ± x

Obtain correct answer in any form A1

1 A1
Obtain final answer y =
2
( )
tan 2e −1 − 2e − x , or equivalent

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

254 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(b) 1 B1FT The FT is on correct work on a solution containing

State that y approaches
2
( )
tan 2e −1 , or equivalent
e− x .

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) dy B1
State or imply 3 y 2 + 6 xy as derivative of 3xy 2
dx

dy B1
State or imply 3y 2 as derivative of y 3
dx

dy M1 dy
Equate attempted derivative of LHS to zero and solve for Need to see factorised out prior to AG
dx dx

Obtain the given answer correctly A1 AG

7(b) Equate denominator to zero *M1

Obtain y = 2x, or equivalent A1

Obtain an equation in x or y DM1

Obtain the point (1, 2) A1

State the point ( 3

5, 0 ) B1 Alternatively (1.71, 0).

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 255

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) Obtain OM = 2i + j B1

Use a correct method to find MN M1

Obtain MN = – i + 2j + 2k A1

8(b) Use a correct method to form an equation for MN M1

Obtain r = 2i + j + λ(– i + 2j + 2k), or equivalent A1

2

8(c) Find DP for a point P on MN with parameter λ, e.g. ( 2 − λ ,1 + 2λ , −2 + 2λ ) B1


Equate scalar product of DP and a direction vector for MN to zero and solve M1
for λ

4 A1
Obtain λ =
9

14 17 8 A1
State that the position vector of P is i + j+ k
9 9 9

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

256 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
1 + 2x 1 − 2x 2 + x

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = – 2, B = 1 and C = 4 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

9(b) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of (1 + 2 x ) ,
−1 M1
−1
−1 −1  1 
(1 − 2 x ) , (2 + x) or  1 + x 
 2 

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each partial A1FT The FT is on A, B and C.
fraction + A1FT
+ A1FT

7 2 A1
Obtain final answer 1 + 5 x − x
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2020 257

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) Solve for v or w M1

2
Use i =−1 M1

2i 5 + 7i A1
Obtain v = – or w =
1+ i −1 + i

Multiply numerator and denominator by the conjugate of the denominator M1

Obtain v = – 1 – i A1

Obtain w = 1 – 6i A1

10(b)(i) Show a circle with centre 2 + 3i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 and centre not at the origin B1

10(b)(ii) Carry out a complete method for finding the least value of arg z M1

Obtain answer 40.2° or 0.702 radians A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

258 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2019

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

3

1 Given that ln 1 + e2y = x, express y in terms of x. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

2 Solve the inequality 2x − 3 > 4 x + 1. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 2t + sin 2t, y = ln 1 − cos 2t.
dy
Show that = cosec 2t. [5]
dx

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

4 The number of insects in a population t weeks after the start of observations is denoted by N . The
population is decreasing at a rate proportional to N e−0.02t . The variables N and t are treated as
dN
continuous, and it is given that when t = 0, N = 1000 and = −10.
dt

(i) Show that N and t satisfy the differential equation

= −0.01e−0.02t N .
dN
[1]
dt

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Solve the differential equation and find the value of t when N = 800. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) State what happens to the value of N as t becomes large. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

5 The curve with equation y = e−2x ln x − 1 has a stationary point when x = p.

@ A
1
(i) Show that p satisfies the equation x = 1 + exp , where exp x denotes ex . [3]
2 x − 1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

(ii) Verify by calculation that p lies between 2.2 and 2.6. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to determine p correct to 2 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

cos x dy
6 (i) By differentiating , show that if y = cot x then = − cosec2 x. [2]
sin x dx

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Show that Ó x cosec2 x dx = 0 + ln 4.

2
1 [6]
10 4
4

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

7 Two lines l and m have equations r = ai + 2j + 3k + , i − 2j + 3k and r = 2i + j + 2k + - 2i − j + k

respectively, where a is a constant. It is given that the lines intersect.

(i) Find the value of a. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

(ii) When a has this value, find the equation of the plane containing l and m. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

x2 + x + 6
8 Let f x = .
x2 x + 2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

15
4
(ii) Hence, showing full working, show that the exact value of Ó f x dx is 49 . [5]
1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

9 (i) By first expanding cos 2x + x, show that cos 3x 4 cos3 x − 3 cos x. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Hence solve the equation cos 3x + 3 cos x + 1 = 0, for 0 ≤ x ≤ 0. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Find the exact value of Ó

3
cos3 x dx. [4]
10
6

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19 [Turn over

10 (a) The complex number u is given by u = −3 − 2ï10i. Showing all necessary working and without
using a calculator, find the square roots of u. Give your answers in the form a + ib, where the
numbers a and b are real and exact. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram shade the region whose points represent complex numbers
z satisfying the inequalities z − 3 − i ≤ 3, arg z ≥ 14 0 and Im z ≥ 2, where Im z denotes the
imaginary part of the complex number z. [5]

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge Assessment
International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/O/N/19

278 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 October/November 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 279

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

280 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for
specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the
formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark
can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically
says otherwise; and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M
or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 281

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

282 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 State 1 + e 2y
=e x B1

Make y the subject M1 Rearrange to e 2 y = ... and use logs

A1 OE
1
Obtain answer y = ln e x − 1
2
( )
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 283

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 State or imply non-modular inequality B1 2

12 x + 44 x + 7 < 0
( 2 x − 3) > 42 ( x + 1)
2 2
, or corresponding quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations
( 2 x − 3) = ±4 ( x + 1)
Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations M1 Correct method seen, or implied by correct
for x answers

7 1 A1
Obtain critical values x = − and x = −
2 6

7 1 A1
State final answer − < x < −
2 6

Alternative method for question 2

7 B1
Obtain critical value x = − from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by solving a
2
linear equation or an inequality

1 B2
Obtain critical value x = − similarly
6

7 1 B1
State final answer − <x<−
2 6

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

284 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dx B1
State = 2 + 2cos 2t
dt

Use the chain rule to find the derivative of y M1

dy 2sin 2t A1 OE
Obtain =
dt 1 − cos 2t

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dt dt

dy A1 AG
Obtain = cosec2t correctly
dx

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 285

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) dN B1 OE
State = ke −0.02t N and show k = – 0.01
dt ( −10 = k × 1× 1000 )
1

4(ii) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1 1

∫ N dN = ∫ −0.01e
−0.02 t
dt

Obtain term ln N B1 OE

Obtain term 0.5e −0.02t B1 OE

Use N = 1000, t = 0 to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in a solution with terms a ln N M1

and be −0.02t , where ab ≠ 0

Obtain correct solution in any form A1 1

ln1000 − = 6.41
(
e.g. ln N − ln1000 = 0.5 e −0.02t − 1) 2

Substitute N = 800 and obtain t = 29.6 A1

4(iii) 1000 B1 Accept 606 or 607 or 606.5

State that N approaches
e

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

286 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

dy e−2 x
= −2e−2 x ln ( x − 1) +
dx x −1

Equate derivative to zero and derive A1 AG

1 1

x = 1 + e 2( x−1) or p = 1 + 2( p−1)

5(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of relevant expressions at x = 2.2 and M1
x = 2.6
1
f ( x ) = ln ( x − 1) − ⇒ f ( 2.2 ) = −0.234, f ( 2.6 ) = 0.317
2 ( x − 1)
e −2 x
f ( x ) = 2e −2 x ln ( x − 1) + ⇒ f ( 2.2 ) = 0.005… , f ( 2.6 ) = −0.0017...
x −1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 287

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(iii)  1  M1
Use the iterative process pn +1 = 1 + exp  correctly at least once
 2 ( p − 1) 
 n 

Obtain final answer 2.42 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 2.42 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (2.415, 2.425)

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

288 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) Use correct quotient rule M1

dy A1 AG
Obtain = − cosec 2 x correctly
dx

6(ii) Integrate by parts and reach ax cot x + b ∫ cot x dx *M1

Obtain − x cot x + ∫ cot x dx A1 OE

State ± ln sin x as integral of cot x M1

Obtain complete integral − x cot x + ln sin x A1 OE

Use correct limits correctly DM1 π 1

0+0+ − ln
4 2

1 A1 AG
Obtain ( π + ln 4 ) following full and exact working
4

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 289

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Express general point of l or m in component form B1

e.g. (a + λ, 2 – 2λ, 3 + 3λ) or (2 + 2µ, 1 – µ, 2 + µ)

Equate at least two pairs of corresponding components and solve for λ or for µ M1

Obtain either λ = – 2 or µ = – 5 A1
1 2
or λ = a or µ = a − 1
3 3
1 1
or λ = ( a − 4 ) or µ = ( 3a − 7 )
5 5

Obtain a = – 6 A1

7(ii) Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b and c, e.g. a – 2b + 3c = 0 B1

Obtain a second equation, e.g. 2a – b + c = 0 and solve for one ratio M1

Obtain a : b : c = 1 : 5 : 3 A1 OE

Substitute a relevant point and values of a, b, c in general equation and find d M1

Obtain correct answer x + 5y + 3z = 13 A1FT OE. The FT is on a from part (i), if used

Alternative method for question 7(ii)

Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, M1 e.g. ( i − 2 j + 3k ) . ( 2i − j + k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. i + 5j + 3k A1

Substitute a relevant point and find d M1

Obtain correct answer x + 5y + 3z = 13 A1FT OE. The FT is on a from part (i), if used

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

290 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(ii) Alternative method for question 7(ii)

Using a relevant point and relevant vectors, form a 2-parameter equation for the plane M1

State a correct equation, e.g. r = 2i + j + 2k +λ(i – 2j + 3k) +µ(2i – j + k) A1FT

State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1FT

Eliminate λ and µ M1

Obtain correct answer x + 5y + 3z = 13 A1FT OE. The FT is on a from part (i), if used

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
x x2 x + 2

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = – 1, B = 3, C = 2 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1 Ax + B C

Allow in the form +
x2 x+2

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 291

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(ii) 3 B1FT + The FT is on A, B, C; or on A, D, E.

Integrate and obtain terms ln x − + 2ln ( x + 2 ) B1FT +
x
B1FT

b M1 3
Substitute limits correctly in an integral with terms a ln x , and c ln ( x + 2 ) , where − ln 4 − + 2ln 6 ( + ln1) + 3 − 2ln 3
x 4
abc ≠ 0

9 A1 AG – work to combine or simplify logs is

Obtain following full and exact working required
4

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

292 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Use cos(A + B) formula to express cos3x in terms of trig functions of 2x and x M1

Use double angle formulae and Pythagoras to obtain an expression in terms of cos x M1
only

Obtain a correct expression in terms of cos x in any form A1

3
Obtain cos3 x ≡ 4cos x − 3cos x A1 AG

9(ii) 3
Use identity and solve cubic 4cos x = −1 for x M1 cos x = −0.6299...

Obtain answer 2.25 and no other in the interval A1 Accept 0.717π

M1A0 for 129.0°

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 293

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(iii) 1 3 B1 +
Obtain indefinite integral sin 3x + sin x B1
12 4

Substitute limits in an indefinite integral of the form a sin 3 x + b sin x , where ab ≠ 0 M1 1 1 π 1 π π

sin π + 3sin − sin − 3sin 
4  3 3 3 2 6

Obtain answer
1
24
( )
9 3 − 11 , or exact equivalent
A1

Alternative method for question 9(iii)

B1 +
∫ cos x (1 − sin x ) dx = sin x − 3 sin x ( +C )
2 1 3
B1

Substitute limits in an indefinite integral of the form a sin x + b sin 3 x where ab ≠ 0 M1  3 1 1 3 1 

 − − + 
 2 2 4 2 24 

Obtain answer
1
24
( )
9 3 − 11 , or exact equivalent
A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

294 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) Square a + ib and equate real and imaginary parts to – 3 and −2 10 respectively *M1

Obtain a 2 − b 2 = −3 and 2ab = −2 10 A1

Eliminate one unknown and find an equation in the other DM1

4 2 4 2
Obtain a + 3a − 10 = 0 , or b − 3b − 10 = 0 , or horizontal 3-term equivalent A1

Obtain answers ± ( )
2 − 5i , or exact equivalent A1

10(b) Show point representing 3 + i in relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with radius 3 and centre not at the origin B1

1 B1
Show correct half line from the origin at π to the real axis
4

Show horizontal line y = 2 B1

Shade the correct region B1 Im(z)

shaded
Im(z) = 2

i
π
4
3 Re(z)

© UCLES 2019 Page 17 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

3

1 Solve the equation 5 ln 4 − 3x = 6. Show all necessary working and give the answer correct to
3 decimal places. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

e−2x dy
2 The curve with equation y = has a stationary point in the interval −1 < x < 1. Find and
1−x 2 dx
hence find the x-coordinate of this stationary point, giving the answer correct to 3 decimal places.
[5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

3 The polynomial x4 + 3x3 + ax + b, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. When p x is
divided by x2 + x − 1 the remainder is 2x + 3. Find the values of a and b. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

4 (i) Express ï6 sin x + cos x in the form R sin x + !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. State the exact
value of R and give ! correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

(ii) Hence solve the equation ï6 sin 21 + cos 21 = 2, for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

5 The equation of a curve is 2x2 y − xy2 = a3 , where a is a positive constant. Show that there is only one
point on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis and find the y-coordinate of this point.
[7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

6 The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
sin 21 1 = x + 2 cos 21 1
d1
for 0 < 1 < 0. It is given that x = 1 when 1 = 13 0 . Solve the differential equation and obtain an
expression for x in terms of cos 1. [8]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

7 (a) Find the complex number z satisfying the equation

iz
z+ − 2 = 0,
z*
where z* denotes the complex conjugate of z. Give your answer in the form x + iy, where x and
y are real. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

(b) (i) On a single Argand diagram sketch the loci given by the equations z − 2i = 2 and Im z = 3,
where Im z denotes the imaginary part of z. [2]

(ii) In the first quadrant the two loci intersect at the point P. Find the exact argument of the
complex number represented by P. [2]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

2x2 + x + 8
8 Let f x = .
2x − 1 x2 + 2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

15
5
(ii) Hence, showing full working, find Ó f x dx, giving the answer in the form ln c, where c is an
1
integer. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

16
a
9 It is given that Ó x cos 31 x dx = 3, where the constant a is such that 0 < a < 32 0.
0

(i) Show that a satisfies the equation

4 − 3 cos 13 a
a= . [5]
sin 13 a

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

(ii) Verify by calculation that a lies between 2.5 and 3. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to calculate a correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19 [Turn over

10 The line l has equation r = i + 3j − 2k + , i − 2j + 3k. The plane p has equation 2x + y − 3z = 5.

(i) Find the position vector of the point of intersection of l and p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between l and p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

(iii) A second plane q is perpendicular to the plane p and contains the line l. Find the equation of q,
giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/O/N/19

314 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 October/November 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 20 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 315

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

316 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for
specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the
formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark
can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically
says otherwise; and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M
or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 317

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

318 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 Remove logarithms and state 4 − 3x = e1.2 , or equivalent B1 Accept 4 − 3x = 3.32 ( 01169.....) 3 s.f. or better

Use correct method to solve an equation of the form 3x = a , where M1 (3 x

= 0.67988.. )
a > 0. Complete method to x =…
If using log3 the subscript can be implied

Obtain answer x = – 0.351 only A1 CAO must be to 3 d.p.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 319

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Use correct quotient rule or correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

dy −2e
=
−2 x
( )
1 − x 2 + 2 xe−2 x

( )
2
dx 1 − x2

Equate derivative to zero and obtain a 3 term quadratic in x M1

Obtain a correct 3-term equation A1 From correct work only

e.g. 2 x 2 + 2 x − 2 = 0 or x 2 + x = 1

Solve and obtain x = 0.618 only A1 From correct work only

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

320 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Commence division and reach partial quotient x 2 + kx M1

Obtain correct quotient x 2 + 2 x − 1 A1

Set their linear remainder equal to 2x + 3 and solve for a or for b M1 Remainder = ( a + 3) x + ( b − 1)

Obtain answer a = – 1 A1

Obtain answer b = 4 A1

Alternative method for question 3

( )( )
State x 4 + 3 x 3 + ax + b = x 2 + x − 1 x 2 + Ax + B + 2 x + 3 and form M1 e.g. 3 = 1 + A and 0 = −1 + A + B
and solve two equations in A and B

Obtain A = 2, B = −1 A1

Form and solve equations for a or b M1 e.g. a = B − A + 2, b = − B + 3

Obtain answer a = – 1 A1

Obtain answer b = 4 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 321

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Alternative method for question 3

−1 ± 5 M1 Allow for correct use of either root in exact or decimal form.

Use remainder theorem with x =
2

a a 5 9 5 A1 Expand brackets and obtain exact equation for either root.

Obtain − ± +b = ∓ Accept exact equivalent.
2 2 2 2

Solve simultaneous equations for a or b M1

Obtain answer a = – 1 from exact working A1

Obtain answer b = 4 from exact working A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) State R = 7 B1

Use correct trig formulae to find α M1 1 1 6

e.g. tan α = , sin α = , or cos α =
6 7 7

Obtain α = 22.208 ° A1 ISW

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

322 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii)  2  B1FT 49.107 ° to 3 d.p. B1 can be implied by correct answer(s) later.

Evaluate sin −1   to at least 1 d.p. The FT is on their R
 7

SC: allow B1 for a correct alternative equation

e.g. 3tan 2 θ − 2 6 tan θ + 1 = 0

Use correct method to find a value of θ in the interval M1 Must get to θ

Obtain answer, e.g. 13.4 ° A1 Accept correct over-specified answers.

13.449…, 54.3425…

Obtain second answer, e.g. 54.3 ° and no extras in the given A1 Ignore answers outside the given interval.
interval

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 323

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 dy B1
State 4 xy + 2 x 2 , or equivalent, as derivative of 2x 2 y
dx

dy B1
State y 2 + 2 xy , or equivalent, as derivative of xy 2
dx

dy *M1 dy y 2 − 4 xy
Equate attempted derivative of LHS to zero and set equal to = 2
dx dx 2 x − 2 xy
zero (or set numerator equal to zero)

Reject y = 0 B1 Allow from y 2 − kxy = 0

Obtain y = 4x A1 OE from correct numerator. ISW

Obtain an equation in y (or in x) and solve for y (or for x) in terms DM1 y3 y3
of a 8 x3 − 16 x3 = a3 or − = a3
8 4

Obtain y = – 2a A1 With no errors seen

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

324 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 Alternative method for question 5

a3 M1 Correct use of function of a function and implicit differentiation

Rewrite as y = 2
and differentiate
2 x − xy

Obtain correct derivative (in any form) A1  dy 

−a3  4 x − y − x 
dy  dx 
=
( 2x )
2
dx 2
− xy

dy *M1
set equal to zero (or set numerator equal to zero)
dx

Obtain 4x – y = 0 A1

2
Confirm 2 x − xy ≠ 0 B1 x = 0 and 2x = y both give a = 0

Obtain an equation in y (or in x) and solve for y (or for x) DM1 y3 y3

8 x3 − 16 x3 = a3 or − = a3
8 4

Obtain y = – 2a A1 With no errors seen

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 325

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 1 1 B1 Or equivalent integrands.
∫
Separate variables correctly to obtain x + 2 ∫
dx = cot θ dθ
2 Integral signs SOI

Obtain term ln ( x + 2 ) B1 Modulus signs not needed.

1 M1
Obtain term of the form k ln sin θ
2

1 A1
Obtain term 2ln sin θ
2

1 M1 Reach C = an expression or a decimal value

Use x = 1, θ = π to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in an
3
(
expression containing p ln ( x + 2 ) and q ln sin 1 θ
2 )
Obtain correct solution in any form A1 ln12 = 2.4849….. Accept constant to at least 3 s.f.
1 1
e.g. ln ( x + 2 ) = 2 ln sin θ + ln12 Accept with ln3 − 2ln
2 2

Remove logarithms and use correct double angle formula M1  x + 2 1 − cosθ 

Need correct algebraic process.  = 
 12 2 

Obtain answer x = 4 − 6cosθ A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

326 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) Substitute and obtain a correct horizontal equation in x and y in any B1 zz * +iz − 2 z* = 0 ⇒
form x 2 + y 2 + ix − y − 2 x + 2iy = 0
Allow if still includes brackets and/or i 2

Use i 2 = −1 and equate real and imaginary parts to zero OE *M1 For their horizontal equation

Obtain two correct equations A1 Allow ix + 2iy = 0

e.g. x 2 + y 2 − y − 2 x = 0 and x + 2y = 0

Solve for x or for y DM1

6 3 A1 1
Obtain answer − i and no other OE, condone ( 6 − 3i )
5 5 5

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 327

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b)(i) Show a circle with centre 2i and radius 2 B1

Show horizontal line y = 3 – in first and second quadrant B1 Im(z)

P
3i

Re(z)

SC: For clearly labelled axes not in the conventional directions,

allow B1 for a fully ‘correct’ diagram.

7(b)(ii) Carry out a complete method for finding the argument.

(Not by measuring the sketch)
M1
(z = 3 + 3i )
Must show working if using 1.7 in place of 3 .

1 A1 SC: Allow B2 for 60° with no working

Obtain answer π (or 60°)
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

328 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) A Bx + C B1
State or imply the form + 2
2x −1 x +2

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 4, B = – 1, C = 0 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

8(ii) Integrate and obtain term 2ln ( 2 x − 1) B1FT 1

The FT is on A. Aln ( 2 x − 1)
2

(
Integrate and obtain term of the form k ln x 2 + 2 ) *M1
From
nx
x2 + 2

A1FT The FT is on B
1
(
Obtain term − ln x 2 + 2
2
)
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form DM1 2ln 9 ( −2ln1) − 1 ln 27 + 1 ln 3
a ln ( 2 x − 1) + b ln( x 2 + 2) , where ab ≠ 0 2 2

Obtain answer ln 27 after full and correct exact working A1 ISW

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 329

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Commence integration by parts, reaching *M1

1 1
3 ∫
ax sin x − b sin x dx
3

1 1 A1
3 3 ∫
Obtain 3 x sin x − 3 sin x dx

1 1 A1
Complete integration and obtain 3 x sin x + 9 cos x
3 3

Substitute limits correctly and equate result to 3 in an integral of the DM1 a a

3 = 3a sin + 9 cos ( −0 ) − 9
1 1 3 3
form pxsin x + qcos x
3 3

a A1 With sufficient evidence to show how they reach the given

4 − 3cos equation
Obtain a = 3 correctly
a
sin
3

9(ii) Calculate values at a = 2.5 and a = 3 of a relevant expression or pair M1 2.5 < 2.679 and 3 > 2.827
of expressions. If using 2.679 and 2.827 must be linked explicitly to 2.5 and 3.
Solving f(a) = 0, f(2.5) = 0.179. and f(3) = –0.173 or if
f ( a ) = a sin 1 a + 3cos 1 a − 4 ⇒ f (2.5) = −0.13..,f (3) = 0.145...
3 3

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 Accept values to 1 sf. or better

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

330 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(iii) 4 − 3cos 13 an M1
Use the iterative process an +1 = an +1 correctly at least
sin 13 an
once

Show sufficient iterations to at least 5 d.p. to justify 2.736 to 3d.p., A1

or show a sign change in the interval (2.7355, 2.7365)

Obtain final answer 2.736 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) Express general point of l in component form B1

e.g. (1 + λ, 3 – 2λ, – 2 + 3λ)

Substitute in equation of p and solve for λ M1

5 5 2 A1 OE
Obtain final answer i + j from λ = Accept 1.67i + 1.67 j or better
3 3 3

© UCLES 2019 Page 17 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 331

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) Use correct method to evaluate a scalar product of relevant vectors M1

e.g. (i – 2j + 3k).(2i + j – 3k)

Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the M1 9
scalar product by the product of the moduli and evaluate the inverse sin θ =
14
sine or cosine of the result

Obtain answer 40.0 ° or 0.698 radians A1 AWRT

Alternative method for question 10(ii)

Use correct method to evaluate a vector product of relevant vectors M1

e.g. (i – 2j + 3k)x(2i + j – 3k)

Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the M1 115
modulus of the vector product by the product of the moduli of the cosθ =
14
two vectors and evaluate the inverse sine or cosine of the result

Obtain answer 40.0 ° or 0.698 radians A1 AWRT

© UCLES 2019 Page 18 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

332 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) State a – 2b + 3c = 0 or 2a + b – 3c = 0 B1

Obtain two relevant equations and solve for one ratio, M1 Could use 2a + b – 3c = 0 and
e.g. a : b  a + 3b − 2c = d
 5 5
 3 a + 3 b = d
i.e. use two points on the line rather than the direction of the
line. The second M1 is not scored until they solve for d.

Obtain a : b : c = 3 : 9 : 5 A1 OE

Substitute a, b, c and a relevant point in the plane equation and M1 Using their calculated normal and a relevant point
evaluate d

Obtain answer 3x + 9y + 5z = 20 A1 OE

Alternative method for question 10(iii)

Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, M1

e.g. (i – 2j + 3k) × (2i + j – 3k)

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 3i + 9j + 5k A1

Use the product and a relevant point to find d M1 Using their calculated normal and a relevant point

Obtain answer 3x + 9y + 5z = 20, or equivalent A1 OE

© UCLES 2019 Page 19 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 333

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) Alternative method for question 10(iii)

Attempt to form a 2-parameter equation with relevant vectors M1

State a correct equation A1

e.g. r = i + 3j – 2k + λ(i – 2j + 3k) + µ(2i + j – 3k)

State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

Obtain answer 3x + 9y + 5z = 2 A1 OE

© UCLES 2019 Page 20 of 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

1 Solve the inequality 2 x + 2 > 3x − 1. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

2 The polynomial 6x3 + ax2 + bx − 2, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
2x + 1 is a factor of p x and that when p x is divided by x + 2 the remainder is −24. Find the
values of a and b. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

32x + 3−x
3 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation = 4. Give your answer correct to
32x − 3−x
3 decimal places. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

4 (i) By first expanding tan 2x + x, show that the equation tan 3x = 3 cot x can be written in the form
tan4 x − 12 tan2 x + 3 = 0. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

(ii) Hence solve the equation tan 3x = 3 cot x for 0Å < x < 90Å. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

5 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation ln x + 2 = 4e−x has exactly one
real root. [2]

(ii) Show by calculation that this root lies between x = 1 and x = 1.5. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

9
@ A
4
(iii) Use the iterative formula xn+1 = ln to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places.
ln xn + 2
Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

6 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number with modulus 1 and argument 13 0 is denoted by w.

(i) Express w in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

The complex number 1 + 2i is denoted by u. The complex number v is such that v = 2 u and
arg v = arg u + 13 0 .

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points representing u and v. [2]

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

(iii) Explain why v can be expressed as 2uw. Hence find v, giving your answer in the form a + ib,
where a and b are real and exact. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

7 The plane m has equation x + 4y − 8z = 2. The plane n is parallel to m and passes through the point
P with coordinates 5, 2, −2.

(i) Find the equation of n, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Calculate the perpendicular distance between m and n. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

(iii) The line l lies in the plane n, passes through the point P and is perpendicular to OP, where O is
the origin. Find a vector equation for l. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

8
y

x
O 1
20

The diagram shows the graph of y = sec x for 0 ≤ x < 12 0.

1.2
(i) Use the trapezium rule with 2 intervals to estimate the value of Ó sec x dx, giving your answer
0
correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Explain, with reference to the diagram, whether the trapezium rule gives an overestimate or an
underestimate of the true value of the integral in part (i). [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

(iii) P is the point on the part of the curve y = sec x for 0 ≤ x < 12 0 at which the gradient is 2. By first
1
differentiating , find the x-coordinate of P, giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places.
cos x
[6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

dx
9 The variables x and t satisfy the differential equation 5 = 20 − x 40 − x. It is given that x = 10
dt
when t = 0.

(i) Using partial fractions, solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for x in terms of t.
[9]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) State what happens to the value of x when t becomes large. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19 [Turn over

10
y

x
O 0

The diagram shows the graph of y = ecos x sin3 x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 0, and its maximum point M . The shaded
region R is bounded by the curve and the x-axis.

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M . Show all necessary working and give your answer correct to 2 decimal
places. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

(ii) By first using the substitution u = cos x, find the exact value of the area of R. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/O/N/19

0.0 Year 2019 353

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 October/November 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

354 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 355

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for
specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the
formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark
can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically
says otherwise; and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M
or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

356 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 357

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 State or imply non-modular inequality ( x + 2 ) > ( 3x − 1) , or corresponding B1

2 2

quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations 2(x + 2) = ± (3x – 1)

Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations M1
for x

3 A1
Obtain critical values x = − and x = 5
5

3 A1
State final answer − < x < 5
5

Alternative method for question 1

Obtain critical value x = 5 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by solving B1

a linear equation or an inequality

3 B2
Obtain critical value x = − similarly
5

3 B1
State final answer − < x < 5
5

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

358 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 1 B1
Substitute x = − , equate result to zero and obtain a correct equation, e.g.
2
6 1 1
− + a− b−2=0
8 4 2

Substitute x = – 2 and equate result to – 24 *M1

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. −48 + 4a − 2b − 2 = −24 A1

Solve for a or for b DM1

Obtain a = 5 and b = – 3 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Reduce the equation to a horizontal equation in 33 x , 33x+1 or 27 x M1

( )
Simplify and reach 3( 33 x ) = 5 , 3 27 x = 5 , or equivalent A1

Use correct method for finding x from a positive value of 33 x , 33 x +1 or 27 x M1

Obtain answer x = 0.155 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 359

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Use tan (A + B) formula to express the LHS in terms of tan 2x and tan x M1

Using the tan 2A formula, express the entire equation in terms of tan x M1

Obtain a correct equation in tan x in any form A1

Obtain the given form correctly A1 AG

4(ii) Use correct method to solve the given equation for x M1

Obtain answer, e.g. x = 26.8 ° A1

Obtain second answer, e.g. x = 73.7 ° and no other A1 Ignore answers outside the given interval

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = ln ( x + 2 ) B1

Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 4e − x , and justify the given statement B1 Consideration of behaviour for x < 0 is
needed for the second B1

5(ii) Calculate the values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at x = 1 and x = 1.5 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

360 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least twice using output from a previous M1
iteration

Obtain final answer 1.23 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.23 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (1.225, 1.235)

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 1 3 B1
Obtain answer w = + i
2 2

6(ii) Show point representing u B1

Show point representing v in relatively correct position B1

6(iii) Explain why the moduli are equal B1

Explain why the arguments are equal B1

Use i 2 = −1 and obtain 2uw in the given form M1

(
Obtain answer 1 − 2 3 + 2 + 3 i ) A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 361

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Substitute coordinates (5, 2, – 2) in x + 4y – 8z = d M1

Obtain plane equation x + 4y – 8z = 29, or equivalent A1

7(ii) Attempt to use perpendicular formula to find perpendicular from (5, 2, – 2) to m M1

5 + 8 + 16 − 2 A1
Obtain a correct unsimplified expression, e.g.
(1 + 16 + 64 )
Obtain answer 3 A1

Alternative method 1 for question 7(ii)

2 29 B1
State or imply perpendicular from O to m is or from O to n is
9 9

Find difference in perpendiculars M1

Obtain answer 3 A1

Alternative method 2 for question 7(ii)

Obtain correct parameter value, or position vector or coordinates of the foot of the B1
1  14 2 2 
perpendicular from (5, 2, – 2) to m, e.g. µ = ± ;  , , 
3  3 3 3

Calculate the length of the perpendicular M1

Obtain answer 3 B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

362 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(iii) Calling the direction vector ai + bj + ck, use a scalar product to form a relevant B1
equation in a, b and c, e.g. a + 4b – 8c = 0 or 5a + 2b – 2z = 0

Solve two relevant equations for the ratio a : b : c M1

Obtain a : b : c = 4 : – 19: – 9 A1 OE

State answer r = 5i + 2j – 2k + λ(4i – 19j – 9k) A1 OE

Alternative method for question 7(iii)

Attempt to calculate vector product of two relevant vectors, e.g. (i + 4j – 8k)×(5i + M1

2j – 2k)

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain 8i – 38j – 18k A1 OE

State answer r = 5i + 2j – 2k + λ(4i – 19j – 9k) A1 OE

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 363

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) State or imply ordinates 1, 1.2116…, 2.7597... B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 0.6 M1

Obtain answer 1.85 A1

8(ii) Explain why the rule gives an overestimate B1

8(iii) Differentiate using quotient or chain rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in terms of sin x and cos x A1

Equate derivative to 2, use Pythagoras and obtain an equation in sin x M1

2
Obtain 2sin x + sin x − 2 = 0 A1 OE

Solve a 3-term quadratic for x M1

Obtain answer x = 0.896 only A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

364 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Separate variables correctly and integrate one side B1

Obtain term 0.2t, or equivalent B1

Carry out a relevant method to obtain A and B such that *M1 OE

1 A B
≡ +
( 20 − x )( 40 − x ) 20 − x 40 − x

1 1 A1
Obtain A = and B = −
20 20

1 1 A1FT The FT is on A and B

Integrate and obtain terms − ln ( 20 − x ) + ln ( 40 − x ) OE +A1FT
20 20

Use x = 10, t = 0 to evaluate a constant, or as limits DM1

Obtain correct answer in any form A1

60e 4t − 40 A1 OE
Obtain final answer x =
3e 4t − 1

9(ii) State that x approaches 20 B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 365

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) Use product rule and chain rule at least once M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero, use Pythagoras and obtain an equation in cos x M1

2
Obtain cos x + 3cos x − 1 = 0 , or 3-term equivalent A1

Obtain answer x = 1.26 A1

10(ii) Using du = ± sin x dx express integrand in terms of u and du M1

u
Obtain integrand e u − 1 ( 2
) A1 OE

( )
Commence integration by parts and reach aeu u 2 − 1 + b ∫ ueu du *M1

( )
Obtain eu u 2 − 1 − 2 ∫ ueu du A1 OE

(
Complete integration, obtaining eu u 2 − 2u + 1 ) A1 OE

Substitute limits u = 1 and u = – 1 (or x = 0 and x = π ), having integrated DM1

completely

4 A1
Obtain answer , or exact equivalent
e

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Use the trapezium rule with 3 intervals to estimate the value of

3
Ó 2x − 4 dx. [3]
0

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation ln 2x − 3 = 2 ln x − ln x − 1. Give your answer
correct to 2 decimal places. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

3 Find the gradient of the curve x3 + 3xy2 − y3 = 1 at the point with coordinates 1, 3. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

4 By first expressing the equation cot 1 − cot 1 + 45Å = 3 as a quadratic equation in tan 1, solve the
equation for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

1
5 (i) Differentiate with respect to 1. [2]
sin2 1

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
x tan 1 + cosec2 1 = 0,
d1
for 0 < 1 < 12 0 and x > 0. It is given that x = 4 when 1 = 16 0. Solve the differential equation,
obtaining an expression for x in terms of 1. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

6 (i) By first expanding sin 2x + x, show that sin 3x 3 sin x − 4 sin3 x. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

9
10

(ii) Hence, showing all necessary working, find the exact value of Ó
3
sin3 x dx. [4]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

7
y

x
O a 4

1
The diagram shows the curves y = 4 cos 21 x and y = , for 0 ≤ x < 4. When x = a, the tangents to
4−x
the curves are perpendicular.
/
(i) Show that a = 4 − 2 sin 12 a . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

(ii) Verify by calculation that a lies between 2 and 3. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to determine a correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

16 − 17x
8 Let f x = .
2 + x 3 − x 2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

9
z
D

y
C
B
O

A x

The diagram shows a set of rectangular axes Ox, Oy and Oz, and four points A, B, C and D with
−−→ −−→ −−→ −−→
position vectors OA = 3i, OB = 3i + 4j, OC = i + 3j and OD = 2i + 3j + 5k.

(i) Find the equation of the plane BCD, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the planes BCD and OABC. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19 [Turn over

10 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number ï3 + i is denoted by u.

(i) Express u in the form rei1 , where r > 0 and −0 < 1 ≤ 0, giving the exact values of r and 1. Hence
or otherwise state the exact values of the modulus and argument of u4 . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

(ii) Verify that u is a root of the equation z3 − 8z + 8ï3 = 0 and state the other complex root of this
equation. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying the inequalities z − u ≤ 2 and Im z ≥ 2, where Im z denotes the imaginary part of z.
[5]

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/31/M/J/19

0.0 Year 2019 385

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 May/June 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

386 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 387

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

388 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 389

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

390 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 State or imply ordinates 3, 2, 0, 4 B1 These and no more

Accept in unsimplified form 20 − 4 etc.

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 1 and four ordinates M1

Obtain answer 5.5 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Use law for the logarithm of a product, quotient or power M1 x

Condone ln for M1
x −1

Obtain a correct equation free of logarithms A1 e.g. ( 2 x − 3)( x − 1) = x 2 or x 2 − 5 x + 3 = 0

Solve a 3-term quadratic obtaining at least one root M1 Must see working if using an incorrect quadratic
 5 ± 13 
 2 
 

Obtain answer x = 4.30 only A1 Q asks for 2 dp. Do not ISW. Overspecified answers score A0
Overspecified and no working can score M1A0

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 391

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dy B1
State or imply 3 y 2 + 6 xy as derivative of 3xy 2
dx

dy B1
State or imply 3 y 2 as derivative of y 3
dx

Equate derivative of LHS to zero, substitute (1, 3) and find the M1  dy x 2 + y 2 

gradient  = 2  For incorrect derivative need to see the
 dx y − 2 xy 
substitution

10 A1 3.33 or better. Allow 30 ISW after correct answer seen

Obtain final answer or equivalent 9
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

392 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 Use correct trig formula and obtain an equation in tan θ M1 Allow with 45° e.g. 1 − 1 =3
tan θ tan θ + tan 45°
1 − tan θ tan 45°

Obtain a correct horizontal equation in any form A1 e.g. 1 + tan θ − tan θ (1 − tan θ ) = 3tan θ (1 + tan θ )

Reduce to 2tan 2θ + 3 tan θ − 1 = 0 A1 or 3-term equivalent

Solve 3-term quadratic and find a value of θ M1 Must see working if using an incorrect quadratic

Obtain answer 15.7 ° A1 One correct solution (degrees to at least 3 sf)

Obtain answer 119.(3 )° A1 Second correct solution and no others in range

(degrees to at least 3 sf)
Mark 0.274, 2.082 as MR: A0A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 393

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) Use chain rule M1 (

k cos θ sin −3 θ = − kcosec 2θ cot θ )
Allow M1 for −2 cos θ sin −1 θ

Obtain correct answer in any form A1

e.g. −2cosec 2θ cot θ , −2cos θ Accept −2sin θ cosθ
sin 3 θ sin 4 θ

5(ii) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1 ∫ x dx = ∫ −cosec θ cot θ dθ
2

1 2 B1
Obtain term x
2

k M1* or equivalent
Obtain term of the form
sin 2θ

1 A1 or equivalent
Obtain term
2sin 2θ

1 DM1 Dependent on the preceding M1

Use x = 4, θ = π to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in a solution
6
b
with terms ax 2 and , where ab ≠ 0
sin 2θ

Obtain solution x = ( cosec θ + 12 )

2 A1 or equivalent

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

394 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) State correct expansion of sin ( 2 x + x ) B1

Use trig formulae and Pythagoras to express sin 3x in terms of sin x M1

Obtain a correct expression in any form ( ) (

A1 e.g. 2sin x 1 − sin 2 x + sin x 1 − 2sin 2 x )
Obtain sin 3 x ≡ 3sin x − 4sin 3 x correctly AG A1 Accept = for ≡

6(ii) 3 1 B1 B1 One mark for each term correct

Use identity, integrate and obtain − cos x + cos3x
4 12

Use limits correctly in an integral of the form M1  3 1 3 1 11 2 

a cos x + b cos 3x, where ab ≠ 0 − − + − = − + 
 8 12 4 12 24 3 

5 A1 Must be exact. Accept simplified equivalent e.g. 15

Obtain answer 72
24
Answer only with no working is 0/4

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 395

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) State at least one correct derivative B1 −2sin 1 x, 1

2 ( 4 − x )2
Equate product of derivatives to – 1 M1 or equivalent

1 A1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 2sin x = ( 4 − x )
2

A1
Rearrange correctly to obtain a = 4 − 2sin a AG
2

7(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at M1 a = 2 2 < 2.7027..  0.703   2.317 
a = 2 and a = 3 e.g.    
a = 3 3 > 2.587..  −0.412   −0.995 
Values correct to at least 2 dp

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

7(iii) 1 M1
Use the iterative formula an +1 = 4 − (2sin an ) correctly at least
2
once

Obtain final answer 2.611 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 2.611 to 3 d.p., or show A1 2, 2.70272, 2.60285, 2.61152, 2.61070, 2.61077
there is a sign change in the interval 2.5, 2.62233, 2.60969, 2.61087, 2.61076
(2.6105, 2.6115) 3, 2.58756, 2.61301, 2.61056, 2.61079
Condone truncation. Accept more than 5 dp

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

396 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
2+ x 3− x ( 3 − x )2
Use a correct method to obtain a constant M1

Obtain one of A =2, B = 2, C = – 7 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1 A Dx + E

[Mark the form + , where A = 2, D = – 2 and
2+ x ( 3 − x )2
E = – 1, B1M1A1A1A1.]

8(ii) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of M1
−1

( 2 + x ) , ( 3 − x ) or ( 3 − x ) , or equivalent, e.g. 1 + x 

−1 −1 −2 1
 2 

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each A1 FT on A, B and C

partial fraction A1 x x2 2  x x 2  7  2 x 3x 2 
A1 1 − 2 + 4 3 1 + 3 + 9  − 9 1 + 3 + 9 

8 43 7 2 A1
Obtain final answer − x+ x
9 54 108

For the A, D, E form of fractions give M1A1ftA1ft for the

expanded partial fractions, then, if D ≠ 0, M1 for multiplying out
fully, and A1 for the final answer.

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 397

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
9(i) Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. CB = 2i + j B1

Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b, c, M1 e.g. 2a + b = 0, a + 5c = 0, a + b – 5c = 0

Obtain two correct equations in a, b, c A1

Solve to obtain a : b : c, M1 or equivalent

Obtain a : b : c = 5 : – 10 : – 1, A1 or equivalent

Obtain equation 5 x − 10 y − z = −25 , A1 or equivalent

Alternative method 1
JJJG JJJG
Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. CD = i + 5k B1 BD = −i − j + 5k

Obtain a second such vector and calculate their M1

vector product, e.g. ( 2i + j) × ( i + 5k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 5i – 10j – k A1

Substitute to find d M1

Obtain equation 5 x − 10 y − z = −25 , A1 or equivalent

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

398 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Alternative method 2

JJJG
Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. DB = i + j − 5k B1

Obtain a second such vector and form correctly a M1

2-parameter equation for the plane

State a correct equation, e.g. A1

r = 3i + 4 j + λ ( i + 5k ) + µ ( i + j − 5k )

State three equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

Obtain equation 5 x − 10 y − z = −25 A1 or equivalent

Alternative method 3

Substitute for B and C and obtain 3a + 4b = d and B1

a + 3b = d

Substitute for D to obtain a third equation and M1

eliminate one unknown (a, b, or d) entirely

Obtain two correct equations in two unknowns, e.g. a, b, c A1

Solve to obtain their ratio, e.g. a : b : c M1

Obtain a : b : c = 5 : – 10 : – 1, A1 or equivalent
a : c : d = 5 : – 1: – 25, or b : c : d = 10 : 1 : 25

Obtain equation 5 x − 10 y − z = −25 A1 or equivalent

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 399

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Alternative method 4

Substitute for B and C and obtain 3a + 4b = d and B1

a +3b = d

Solve to obtain a : b : d M2 or equivalent

Obtain a : b : d = 1 : – 2: – 5 A1 or equivalent

Substitute for C to obtain c M1

Obtain equation 5 x − 10 y − z = −25 A1 or equivalent

9(ii) State or imply a normal vector for the plane OABC is k B1

Carry out correct process for evaluating a scalar product of two M1 i.e. correct process using k and their normal
relevant vectors, e.g. (5i – 10j – k).(k)

Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the M1 Allow M1M1 for clear use of an incorrect vector that has been
scalar product by the product of the moduli and evaluate the inverse stated to be the normal to OABC
cosine of the result

Obtain answer 84.9° or 1.48 radians A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

400 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) State or imply r = 2 B1 Accept 4

1 B1
State or imply θ = π
6

Use a correct method for finding the modulus or the argument of u 4 M1 Allow correct answers from correct u with minimal working shown

Obtain modulus 16 A1

2 A1 i
2π
Obtain argument π Accept 16e 3
3

10(ii) Substitute u and carry out a correct method for finding u 3 M1 (u 3

)
= 8i Follow their u 3 if found in part (i)

Verify u is a root of the given equation A1

State that the other root is 3 −i B1

Alternative method

State that the other root is 3 −i B1

Form quadratic factor and divide cubic by quadratic M1

(z − )( )(
3 − i z − 3 + i = z 2 − 2 3z + 4 )
Verify that remainder is zero and hence that u is a root of the given A1
equation

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 401

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) Show the point representing u in a relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with centre u and radius 2 B1 FT on the point representing u.

Condone near miss of origin

Show the line y = 2 B1 Im

shaded y=2

Shade the correct region B1

Show that the line and circle intersect on x = 0 B1 Condone near miss

© UCLES 2019 Page 17 of 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

Find the coefficient of x3 in the expansion of 3 − x 1 + 3x 3 in ascending powers of x.

1
1 [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation 9x = 3x + 12. Give your answer correct to 2 decimal
places. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

3 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation cot 21 = 2 tan 1 for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

5
x
4 Find the exact coordinates of the point on the curve y = at which the gradient of the tangent
1 + ln x
is equal to 14 . [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

5 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

It is given that the complex number −1 + ï3i is a root of the equation

kx3 + 5x2 + 10x + 4 = 0,

where k is a real constant.

(i) Write down another root of the equation. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Find the value of k and the third root of the equation. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

6
A

x rad
B C

r
O

In the diagram, A is the mid-point of the semicircle with centre O and radius r. A circular arc with
centre A meets the semicircle at B and C. The angle OAB is equal to x radians. The area of the shaded
region bounded by AB, AC and the arc with centre A is equal to half the area of the semicircle.

(i) Use triangle OAB to show that AB = 2r cos x. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

0
O@ A
(ii) Hence show that x = cos−1 . [2]
16x

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

(iii) Verify by calculation that x lies between 1 and 1.5. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iv) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (ii) to determine x correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

dy
7 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation = xex+y . It is given that y = 0 when x = 0.
dx

(i) Solve the differential equation, obtaining y in terms of x. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Explain why x can only take values that are less than 1. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

10x + 9
8 Let f x = .
2x + 1 2x + 32

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

13
1
(ii) Hence show that Ó f x dx = 12 ln 59 + 15 . [5]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

9 The points A and B have position vectors i + 2j − k and 3i + j + k respectively. The line l has equation
r = 2i + j + k + - i + j + 2k.

(i) Show that l does not intersect the line passing through A and B. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

(ii) The plane m is perpendicular to AB and passes through the mid-point of AB. The plane m
intersects the line l at the point P. Find the equation of m and the position vector of P. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19 [Turn over

10
y

x
O 1
20
M

The diagram shows the curve y = sin 3x cos x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0 and its minimum point M . The shaded
region R is bounded by the curve and the x-axis.

(i) By expanding sin 3x + x and sin 3x − x show that

sin 3x cos x = 12 sin 4x + sin 2x. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Using the result of part (i) and showing all necessary working, find the exact area of the region R.
[4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

........................................................................................................................................................

dy
(iii) Using the result of part (i), express in terms of cos 2x and hence find the x-coordinate of M ,
dx
giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/M/J/19

0.0 Year 2019 421

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 May/June 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 18 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

422 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 423

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

424 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 2
State unsimplified term in x , or its coefficient in the expansion of B1 Symbolic binomial coefficients are not sufficient for the B
marks
1
 1 × −2 
(1 + 3x ) 3  3 3 ( 3 x )2 
 2 
 

State unsimplified term in x 3 , or its coefficient in the expansion of B1

1
 1 × −2 × −5 
(1 + 3x ) 3 3 3 3 ( 3 x )3 
 6 
 

Multiply by (3 – x) to give 2 terms in x 3 , or their coefficients M1

(3× 106 + 1) Ignore errors in terms other than x 3

3 × x 3coeff − x 2 coeff and no other term in x3

Obtain answer 6 A1 Not 6x 3

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 425

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 State or imply u − u − 12 ( = 0 ) , or equivalent in 3 B1

( )
2 x 2
Need to be convinced they know 32 x = 3x

Solve for u, or for 3x , and obtain root 4 B1

Use a correct method to solve an equation of the form 3 = a x M1 Need to see evidence of method. Do not penalise an attempt
where a >0 to use the negative root as well.
e.g. x ln 3 = ln a, x = log 3 a
If seen, accept solution of straight forward cases such as 3x =
3 , x = 1 without working

Obtain final answer x = 1.26 only A1 The Q asks for 2 dp

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

426 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Use correct trig formulae to obtain an equation in tan θ or *M1 1 − tan θ

2
cot 2 θ − 1 2
equivalent (e.g all in sin θ or all in cos θ) = 2 tan θ . Allow =
2 tan θ 2 cot θ cot θ

Obtain a correct simplified equation A1 1 5

5 tan 2 θ = 1 or sin 2 θ = or cos 2 θ =
6 6

Solve for θ DM1 Dependent on the first M1

Obtain answer 24.1° (or 155.9°) A1 One correct in range to at least 3 sf

Obtain second answer A1 FT 180° − their 24.1° and no others in range.

Correct to at least 3 sf. Accept 156° but not 156.0
Ignore values outside range
If working in tan θ or cos θ need to be considering both
square roots to score the second A1
Mark 0.421, 2.72 as a MR, so A0A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 427

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 Use correct quotient rule

( )
M1 Allow use of correct product rule on x × 1 + ln x −1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

dy (1 + ln x ) − x × x  1
1 
1
= = − 
dx (1 + ln x )
2
 1 + ln x (1 + ln x ) 
2
 

1 M1 1
(1 + ln x )
2
Equate derivative to and obtain a quadratic in ln x or (1+ ln x) Horizontal form. Accept ln x =
4 4

Reduce to (ln x) 2 − 2 ln x + 1 = 0 A1 or 3-term equivalent. Condone lnx 2 if later used correctly

Solve a 3-term quadratic in ln x for x M1 Must see working if solving incorrect quadratic

Obtain answer x = e A1 Accept e1

1 A1 Exact only with no decimals seen before the exact value.

Obtain answer y = e
2 e1 e
Accept but not
2 1 + ln e

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) State answer −1 − 3i B1 1

If − given as well at this point, still just B1
2

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

428 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) Substitute x = −1 + 3i in the equation and attempt expansions of M1 Need to see sufficient working to be convinced that a
calculator has not been used.
x 2 and x3

Use i 2 = −1 correctly at least once M1 Allow for relevant use at any point in the solution

Obtain k = 2 A1

Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with M1 Could use factor theorem from this point. Need to see
zeros −1 + 3i and −1 − 3i working. M1 for correct testing of correct root or allow M1
for three unsuccessful valid attempts.

Obtain x 2 + 2 x + 4 A1  1
Using factor theorem, obtain f  −  = 0
 2

1 A1 Final answer
Obtain root x = − , or equivalent, via division or
2
inspection

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 429

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) Alternative method 1

Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with M1 Need to see sufficient working to be convinced that a
zeros −1 + 3i and −1 − 3i (multiplying two linear factors or calculator has not been used.
using sum and product of roots)

Use i 2 = −1 correctly at least once M1 Allow for relevant use at any point in the solution

Obtain x 2 + 2 x + 4 A1 Allow M1A0 for x 2 + 2 x + 3

Obtain linear factor kx + 1 and compare coefficients of x or x2 and M1 Can find the factor by inspection or by long division
solve for k Must get to zero remainder

Obtain k = 2 A1

1 A1 Final answer
Obtain root x = −
2

1
Note: Verification that x = − is a root is worth no marks
2
without a clear demonstration of how the root was obtained

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

430 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) Alternative method 2

Use equation for sum of roots of cubic and use equation for product M1
of roots of cubic

Use i 2 = −1 correctly at least once M1 Allow for relevant use at any point in the solution

5 4 A1
Obtain − = −2 + γ , − = 4γ
k k

Solve simultaneous equations for k and γ M1

Obtain k = 2 A1

1 A1 Final answer
Obtain root γ = −
2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) Correct use of trigonometry to obtain AB = 2r cos x B1 AG

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 431

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii) Use correct method for finding the area of the sector and the M1 1 1 2 1
× π r = ( 2r cos x ) 2 x
2
semicircle and form an equation in x 2 2 2

π A1 π
Obtain x = cos −1 correctly AG Via correct simplification e.g. from cos 2 x =
16 x 16 x

6(iii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at M1 x =1 1 → 1.11 f (1) = 1.11
x = 1 and x = 1.5 e.g. Accept
x = 1.5 1.5 → 1.20 f (1.5 ) = 1.20
Must be working in radians π
f ( x ) = x − cos −1 : f (1) = −0.111., f (1.5) = 0.3..
16 x
π
f ( x) = cos x − : f (1) = 0.097., f (1.5) = −0.291.
16 x
For 16 x cos x − π f (1) = 1.529.., f (1.5) = −3.02..
2

Must find values. M1 if at least one value correct

Correct values and complete the argument correctly A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

432 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(iv)
 π 
M1 1,1.11173, 1.13707, 1.14225, 1.14329, 1.14349,
Use xn +1 = cos −1   correctly at least twice 1.14354,1.14354
 16 xn 
1.25,1.16328,1.14742,1.14432,1.14370
Must be working in radians 1.5,1.20060,1.15447,1.14570,1.14397,1.14363

Obtain final answer 1.144 A1

Show sufficient iterations to at least 5 d.p. to justify 1.144 to 3 d.p. A1

or show there is a sign change in the interval
(1.1435, 1.1445)

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 433

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one B1 −y

∫ e dy = ∫ xe dx
x

side

Obtain term −e − y B1 B0B1 is possible

Commence integration by parts and reach xe ± ∫ e dx

x x M1 B0B0M1A1 is possible

Obtain xe x − e x A1 or equivalent

B1B1M1A1 is available if there is no constant of integration

Use x = 0, y = 0 to evaluate a constant, or as limits in a definite M1 Must see this step

integral, in a solution with terms ae − y , bxe x and ce x , where abc ≠
0

Obtain correct solution in any form A1 e.g. e − y = e x − xe x

Rearrange as y = − ln (1 − x ) − x A1 or equivalent e.g.

y = ln 1
e x (1 − x )
ISW

7(ii) Justify the given statement B1 e.g. require 1 − x > 0 for the ln term to exist, hence x < 1
Must be considering the range of values of x, and must be
relevant to their y involving ln (1− x )

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

434 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
2 x + 1 2 x + 3 ( 2 x + 3)2

Use a correct method to find a constant M1

Obtain the values A = 1, B = – 1, C = 3 A1 A1 A1

A Dx + E Full marks for the three correct constants – do not actually

[Mark the form + , where A = 1, D = – 2 and need to see the partial fractions
2 x + 1 ( 2 x + 3)2
E = 0, B1M1A1A1A1 as above.]

8(ii) Integrate and obtain terms B1 B1 B1 FT on A, B and C.

1 1 3
ln ( 2 x + 1) − ln ( 2 x + 3) −
2 2 2 ( 2 x + 3)
[Correct integration of the A, D, E form of fractions gives
1 ln ( 2 x + 1) + x − 1 ln ( 2 x + 3) if integration by parts is used
2 2x + 3 2
for the second partial fraction.]

Substitute limits correctly in an integral with terms a ln ( 2 x + 1) , M1 value for upper limit – value for lower limit
1 slip in substituting can still score M1
b ln ( 2 x + 3) and c / ( 2 x + 3) , where abc ≠ 0 Condone omission of ln (1)
If using alternative form: cx / ( 2 x + 3 )

Obtain the given answer following full and correct working A1 Need to see at least one interim step of valid log work.

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 435

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Carry out correct method for finding a vector equation for AB M1

Obtain ( r = ) i + 2 j − k + λ ( 2i − j + 2k ) , or equivalent A1

Equate two pairs of components of general points on their AB and l M1  1 + 2λ   2 + µ 

and solve for λ or forµ    
 2 − λ  =  1+ µ 
 −1 + 2λ  1 + 2µ 
   

Obtain correct answer for λ or µ, e.g. λ = 0, µ = – 1 A1

Verify that all three equations are not satisfied and the lines fail to A1 Alternatives
intersect ( ≠ is sufficient justification e.g. 2 ≠ 0 ) A λ µ B λ µ
Conclusion needs to follow correct values
ij 2 1 1 5 −1 1 1 5
3 3 ≠ 3 3 ≠
3 3 3 3

ik 0 –1 2≠0 –1 –1 2≠0

jk 1 0 3≠ 2 0 0 3≠ 2

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

436 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) 3 B1
State or imply midpoint has position vector 2i + j
2

Substitute in 2x – y + 2z = d and find d M1 Correct use of their direction for AB and their midpoint

Obtain plane equation 4x – 2y + 4z = 5 A1 2

  5
or equivalent e.g. r.  −1 =
  2
2

Substitute components of l in plane equation and solve for µ M1 Correct use of their plane equation.

1 3 1 A1 Final answer
Obtain µ = − and position vector i + j for the point P Accept coordinates in place of position vector
2 2 2

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 437

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) State correct expansion of sin ( 3x + x ) or sin ( 3x − x ) B1 B0 If their formula retains ± in the middle

1 M1
Substitute expansions in (sin 4 x + sin 2 x)
2

1 A1 Must see the sin 4x and sin 2x or reference to LHS and

Obtain sin 3 x cos x = ( sin 4 x + sin 2 x ) correctly RHS for A1
2
AG

10(ii) 1 1 B1 B1
Integrate and obtain − cos 4 x − cos 2 x
8 4

1 M1 In their expression
Substitute limits x = 0 and x = π correctly
3

9 A1 From correct working seen.

Obtain answer
16

© UCLES 2019 Page 17 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

438 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) State correct derivative 2cos 4 x + cos 2 x B1

Using correct double angle formula, express derivative in terms of M1

cos 2x and equate the result to zero

Obtain 4cos 2 2 x + cos 2 x − 2 = 0 A1

Solve for x or 2x (could be labelled x) M1 Must see working if solving an incorrect quadratic
 −1 ± 33  The roots of the correct quadratic are -0.843 and 0.593
Need to get as far as x = ...
 cos 2 x = 8

  The wrong value of x is 0.468 and can imply M1 if correct
quadratic seen
Could be working from a quartic in cos x :
16 cos 4 x − 14 cos 2 x + 1 = 0

Obtain answer x = 1.29 only A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 18 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Use logarithms to solve the equation 53−2x = 4 7x , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places.
[4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

3
10

Show that Ó x2 cos 2x dx = 02 − 8.

4
2 1 [5]
32
0

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

1 − cos 21 + sin 21
3 Let f 1 = .
1 + cos 21 + sin 21

(i) Show that f 1 = tan 1. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

5
10

(ii) Hence show that Ó f 1 d1 = 12 ln 23 .

4
[4]
10
6

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

1 + e−x
4 The equation of a curve is y = , for x > 0.
1 − e−x

dy
(i) Show that is always negative. [3]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

(ii) The gradient of the curve is equal to −1 when x = a. Show that a satisfies the equation
e2a − 4ea + 1 = 0. Hence find the exact value of a. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

5 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy
x + 1y = y2 + 5.
dx
It is given that y = 2 when x = 0. Solve the differential equation obtaining an expression for y2 in
terms of x. [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

6
y

a x
O b

The diagram shows the curve y = x4 − 2x3 − 7x − 6. The curve intersects the x-axis at the points a, 0
and b, 0, where a < b. It is given that b is an integer.

(i) Find the value of b. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Hence show that a satisfies the equation a = − 13 2 + a2 + a3 . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (ii) to determine a correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

12

7 The curve y = sin x + 13 0 cos x has two stationary points in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 0.

dy
(i) Find . [2]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

the formula for cos A + B, show that, at the stationary points on the curve,
(ii) By considering
cos 2x + 13 0 = 0. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

(iii) Hence find the exact x-coordinates of the stationary points. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

8 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number u is defined by

4i
u= .
1 − ï3i

(i) Express u in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

(ii) Find the exact modulus and argument of u. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying the inequalities z < 2 and z − u < z . [4]

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

2x 5 − x
9 Let f x = .
3 + x 1 − x 2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x up to and including the term in x3 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19 [Turn over

10 The line l has equation r = i + 2j + 3k + - 2i − j − 2k.

(i) The point P has position vector 4i + 2j − 3k. Find the length of the perpendicular from P to l.
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

(ii) It is given that l lies in the plane with equation ax + by + 2z = 13, where a and b are constants.
Find the values of a and b. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/33/M/J/19

458 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 May/June 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 459

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be
limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

460 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade
descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 461

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

462 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 463

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 Use law of the logarithm of a product or quotient M1

Use law of the logarithm of power twice M1

Obtain a correct linear equation in x, e.g. A1

( 3 − 2x) ln5 = ln4 + xln7
Obtain answer x = 0.666 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Commence integration and reach M1*

a x 2 sin 2 x + b ∫ x sin 2 x d x

1 2 A1
Obtain x sin 2 x − ∫ x sin 2 x dx , or equivalent
2

Complete the integration and obtain A1

1 2 1 1
x sin 2 x + x cos 2 x − sin 2 x , or equivalent
2 2 4

Use limits correctly, having integrated twice DM1

Obtain given answer correctly A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

464 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) Use double angle formulae and express entire fraction in terms of sinθ and cos θ M1

Obtain a correct expression A1

Obtain the given answer A1

3(ii) State integral of the form ± lncosθ M1*

Use correct limits correctly and insert exact values for the trig ratios DM1

1 3 A1
Obtain a correct expression, e.g. − ln + ln
2 2

Obtain the given answer following full and exact working A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Use the quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

2e −x A1
Reduce to – , or equivalent, and explain why this is always negative
( )
2
1 − e− x

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 465

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) Equate derivative to – 1 and obtain the given equation B1

State or imply u − 4u + 1 = 0 , or equivalent in e

2 a B1

Solve for a M1

( )
Obtain answer a = ln 2 + 3 and no other A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1

Obtain term ln ( x +1) B1

(
Obtain term of the form a ln y 2 + 5 ) M1

1 A1
Obtain term ln( y 2 + 5)
2

Use y = 2, x = 0 to determine a constant, or as limits, in a solution containing terms M1

aln(y2 +5) and b ln ( x +1) , where ab ≠ 0

Obtain correct solution in any form A1

Obtain final answer y = 9 ( x + 1) − 5 A1

2 2

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

466 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) State b = 3 B1

6(ii) Commence division by x – b and reach partial quotient x + kx 3 2 M1

Obtain quotient x + x + 3 x + 2
3 2 A1 There being no remainder

Equate quotient to zero and rearrange to make the subject a M1

Obtain the given equation A1

6(iii) M1
Use the iterative formula an +1 = −
1
3
( )
2 + an 2 + an3 correctly at least once

Obtain final answer –0.715 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify –0.715 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval
(–0.7145, –0.7155)

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 467

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

7(ii) Equate derivative to zero and use correct cos(A + B) formula M1

Obtain the given equation A1

7(iii) Use correct method to solve for x M1

1 A1
Obtain answer, e.g. x = π
12

7 A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. π , and no other
12

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + 3i , or equivalent M1

4i − 4 3 and 3 + 1 A1

Obtain final answer − 3 + i A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

468 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(ii) State that the modulus of u is 2 B1

5 B1
State that the argument of u is π (or 150°)
6

8(iii) Show a circle with centre the origin and radius 2 B1

Show u in a relatively correct position B1 FT

Show the perpendicular bisector of the line joining u and the origin B1 FT

Shade the correct region B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 469

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
3+ x 1− x (1− x )2

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = –3, B = –1, C = 2 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1 A Dx + E

Mark the form + , where A = –3,
3+ x (1 − x)2
D = 1 and E = 1, B1M1A1A1A1 as above.

9(ii) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of ( 3 + x ) , M1
−1

1
(1 + x)−1 , (1− x) or (1− x)
−1 −2

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 3 of each partial fraction A1 FT on A

A1 FT on B

A1 FT on C

10 44 190 3 A1 For the A, D, E form of fractions give

Obtain final answer x + x2 + x M1A1ftA1ft for the expanded partial fractions,
3 9 27
then, if D ≠ 0, M1 for multiplying out fully, and
A1 for the final answer.

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

470 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
Find PQ for a general point Q on l, e.g. −3i + 6k + µ ( 2i − j − 2k)
10(i) B1

JJJG M1
Calculate scalar product of PQ and a direction vector for l and equate the result to
zero

Solve for µ and obtain µ = 2 A1

JJJG M1
Carry out a complete method for finding the length of PQ

Obtain answer 3 A1

Alternative method for question 10(i)

JJJG JJJG
Calling the point (1, 2, 3) A, state A P (or PA ) in component form, e.g. 3i – 6k B1
JJJG JJJG
Use a scalar product with a direction vector for l to find the projection of A P (or PA ) M1
on l

18 A1
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g.
9

Use Pythagoras to find the perpendicular M1

Obtain answer 3 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 471

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) Alternative method for question 10(i)

JJJG JJJG B1
State A P (or PA) in component form

Calculate a vector product with a direction vector for l M1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 6i – 6j – 3k A1

Divide modulus of the product by that of the direction vector M1

Obtain answer 3 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

472 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) Substitute coordinates of a general point of l in the plane equation and equate constant M1
terms

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. a + 2b + 6 = 13 A1

Equate the coefficient of µ to zero M1

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 2a – b – 4 = 0 A1

Substitute (1, 2, 3) in the plane equation M1

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. a + 2b + 6 = 13 A1

Alternative method for question 10(ii)

Find a second point on l and obtain an equation in a and/or b M1

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 5a – 2 = 13 A1

Equate scalar product of a direction vector for l and a vector normal for the plane to M1
zero

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 2a – b – 4 = 0 A1

Solve for a or for b M1

Obtain a = 3 and b = 2 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

1 (i) Show that the equation log10 x − 4 = 2 − log10 x can be written as a quadratic equation in x. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Hence solve the equation log10 x − 4 = 2 − log10 x, giving your answer correct to 3 significant
figures. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

2 The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

2x6n + 12xn
xn+1 = ,
3x5n + 8

with initial value x1 = 2, converges to !.

(i) Use the formula to calculate ! correct to 4 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to
6 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) State an equation satisfied by ! and hence find the exact value of !. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

3 (i) Given that sin 1 + 45Å + 2 cos 1 + 60Å = 3 cos 1, find the exact value of tan 1 in a form involving
surds. You need not simplify your answer. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Hence solve the equation sin 1 + 45Å + 2 cos 1 + 60Å = 3 cos 1 for 0Å < 1 < 360Å. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

6
4
− 32
4 Show that Ó x ln x dx = 2 − ln 4. [5]
1

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

5 The variables x and y satisfy the relation sin y = tan x, where − 12 0 < y < 12 0. Show that

dy 1
= . [5]
dx cos x cos 2x

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

6 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

= ky3 e−x ,
dy
dx

where k is a constant. It is given that y = 1 when x = 0, and that y = e when x = 1. Solve the
differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

7 (a) Showing all working and without using a calculator, solve the equation

1 + iz2 − 4 + 3iz + 5 + i = 0.
Give your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

(b) The complex number u is given by

u = −1 − i.
On a sketch of an Argand diagram show the point representing u. Shade the region whose points
represent complex numbers satisfying the inequalities z < z − 2i and 14 0 < arg z − u < 12 0 .
[4]

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

12 + 12x − 4x2
8 Let f x = .
2 + x 3 − 2x

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

9 Two planes have equations 2x + 3y − z = 1 and x − 2y + z = 3.

(i) Find the acute angle between the planes. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

(ii) Find a vector equation for the line of intersection of the planes. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19 [Turn over

10
y

x
O 1
20

The diagram shows the curve y = sin3 x cos x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0 , and its maximum point M .

(i) Using the substitution u = cos x, find by integration the exact area of the shaded region bounded
by the curve and the x-axis. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

(ii) Showing all your working, find the x-coordinate of M , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal
places. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 9709/32/F/M/19

492 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics March 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2019 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 493

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

494 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 495

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

496 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 497

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(i) Use law for the logarithm of a product or quotient M1

Use log10 100 = 2 or 10 = 100 2 M1

Obtain x 2 − 4 x − 100 = 0 , or equivalent A1

1(ii) Solve a 3-term quadratic equation M1

Obtain answer 12.2 only A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain answer 1.3195 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 6 d.p. to justify 1.3195 to 4 d.p., or show there is a sign change in A1
(1.31945, 1.31955)

2(ii) 6
2 x + 12 x B1
State x = , or equivalent
3x5 + 8

State answer 5
4 , or exact equivalent B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

498 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) Use trig formulae and obtain an equation in sin θ and cos θ M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1

Substitute exact trig ratios and obtain an expression for tan θ M1

2 2 −1 A1
Obtain answer tan θ = , or equivalent
1− 6

3(ii) State answer, e.g. θ = 128.4° B1

State second answer, e.g. θ = 308.4° B1 ft

Question Answer Marks Guidance

*
4 −
1 1
− 1 M1
Integrate by parts and reach ax 2 ln x + b ∫ x 2. dx
x

−
1 1
− 1 A1
Obtain −2 x 2 ln x + 2 ∫ x 2 . dx , or equivalent
x

−
1
−
1 A1
Complete the integration, obtaining −2 x 2 ln x − 4 x 2 , or equivalent

Substitute limits correctly, having integrated twice M1(dep*)

Obtain the given answer following full and correct working A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 499

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 dy B1
State cos y as derivative of sin y
dx

State correct derivative in terms of x and y, e.g. sec2 x / cos y B1

sec 2 x B1
State correct derivative in terms of x, e.g.
2
1 − tan x

Use double angle formula M1

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

500 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side B1

1 B1
Obtain term − , or equivalent
2 y2

Obtain term – k e− x B1

Use a pair of limits, e.g. x = 0, y = 1 to obtain an equation in k and an arbitrary constant c M1

Use a second pair of limits, e.g. x = 1, y = e , to obtain a second equation and solve for k or M1
for c

1 A1
Obtain k = and c = 0
2
1
x A1
Obtain final answer y = e 2 , or equivalent

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 501

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) Use quadratic formula to solve for z M1

2
Use i = −1 throughout M1

Obtain correct answer in any form A1

Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 – i, or equivalent M1

Obtain final answer, e.g. 1 – i A1

5 1 A1
Obtain second final answer, e.g. + i
2 2

7(b) Show the point representing u in relatively correct position B1

Show the horizontal line through z = i B1

Show correct half-lines from u, one of gradient 1 and the other vertical B1ft

Shade the correct region B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

502 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) B C B1
State or imply the form A + +
2 + x 3 − 2x

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 2, B = – 4 and C = 6 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

8(ii) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of ( 2 + x ) or ( 3 − 2 x ) , or M1
−1 −1

equivalent

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x2 of each partial fraction A1ft +A1ft The ft is on B and C

Add the value of A to the sum of the expansions M1

7 7 A1
Obtain final answer 2 + x + x2
3 18

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 503

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. B1

2i + 3j – k, or i – 2j + k

Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of two normal vectors M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product of the two normal vectors by M1
the product of their moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 56.9° or 0.994 radians A1

9(ii) EITHER: Carry out a complete strategy for finding a point on the line (call the line l) M1

Obtain such a point, e.g. (1, 1, 4) A1

EITHER: State a correct equation for a direction vector ai + bj + ck for l, B1

e.g. 2a + 3b – c = 0

State a second equation, e.g. a – 2b + c = 0, M1

and solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c = 1 : – 3: – 7, or equivalent A1

State a correct answer, e.g. A1

r = i + j + 4k + λ(i – 3j – 7k)

OR1: Attempt to calculate the vector product of the two normal vectors M1

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain i – 3j – 7k, or equivalent A1

State a correct answer, e.g. A1

r = i + j + 4k + λ(i – 3j – 7k), or equivalent

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

504 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) OR2: Obtain a second point on l e.g. (0, 4, 11) B1

Subtract position vectors and obtain a direction vector for l M1

Obtain i – 3j – 7k, or equivalent A1

State a correct answer, e.g. r = 4j + 11k + µ(i – 3j – 7k), or equivalent A1

OR3: Express one variable in terms of a second M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. y = 4 − 3 x A1

Express the third variable in terms of the second M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = 11 − 7 x A1

Form a vector equation for the line M1

State a correct answer, e.g. r = 4j + 11k + λ(i – 3j – 7k), or equivalent A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2019 505

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) OR4: Express one variable in terms of a second M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. A1

4 y
x= −
3 3

Express the same variable in terms of the third M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. A1

11 z
x= −
7 7

Form a vector equation for the line M1

Obtain a correct answer, e.g. A1

r = 4j + 11k +µ(i – 3j – 7k), or equivalent

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

506 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) State or imply du = – sin x dx B1

Using Pythagoras express the integral in terms of u M1

(
Obtain integrand ± u 1 − u 2
) A1

2 2
3 7 A1
Integrate and obtain − u 2 + u 2 , or equivalent
3 7

3 7 M1 Or substitute original limits

Change limits correctly and substitute correctly in an integral of the form au 2 + bu 2 correctly in an integral of the form
3 7
a (cos x ) 2 + b(cos x) 2

8 A1
Obtain answer
21

10(ii) Use product rule and chain rule at least once M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1 + A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain a horizontal equation in integral powers of sin x and cos x M1

Use correct methods to obtain an equation in one trig function M1

2 2 2
Obtain tan x = 6 , 7cos x = 1 or 7sin x = 6 , or equivalent, and obtain answer 1.183 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 507

Year 2018

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the set of values of x satisfying the inequality 22x − a < x + 3a , where a is a positive constant.
[4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

2ex + e−x
2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation = 4, giving your answer correct to
ex − e−x
2 decimal places. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

3 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation x3 = 3 − x has exactly one real
root. [2]

(ii) Show that if a sequence of real values given by the iterative formula

2xn3 + 3
xn+1 =
3xn2 + 1

converges, then it converges to the root of the equation in part (i). [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use this iterative formula to determine the root correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of
each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 2 sin 1 + sin 21, y = 2 cos 1 + cos 21,
where 0 < 1 < 0.

dy
(i) Obtain an expression for in terms of 1. [3]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

(ii) Hence find the exact coordinates of the point on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the
y-axis. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

5 The coordinates x, y of a general point on a curve satisfy the differential equation

dy
x = 2 − x2 y.
dx
The curve passes through the point 1, 1. Find the equation of the curve, obtaining an expression for
y in terms of x. [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

6 (i) Show that the equation ï2 cosec x + cot x = ï3 can be expressed in the form R sin x − ! = ï2,
where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

(ii) Hence solve the equation ï2 cosec x + cot x = ï3, for 0Å < x < 180Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

7
y

R
x
O 1
20

The diagram shows the curve y = 5 sin2 x cos3 x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0, and its maximum point M . The shaded
region R is bounded by the curve and the x-axis.

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

(ii) Using the substitution u = sin x and showing all necessary working, find the exact area of R. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

2 + 3i
8 (a) Showing all necessary working, express the complex number in the form r ei1 , where r > 0
1 − 2i
and −0 < 1 ≤ 0. Give the values of r and 1 correct to 3 significant figures. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

(b) On an Argand diagram sketch the locus of points representing complex numbers z satisfying the
equation z − 3 + 2i = 1. Find the least value of z for points on this locus, giving your answer
in an exact form. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

6x2 + 8x + 9
9 Let f x = .
2 − x 3 + 2x2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

17
0
(ii) Hence, showing all necessary working, show that Ó f x dx = 1 + 12 ln 34 . [5]
−1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

10 The planes m and n have equations 3x + y − 2z = 10 and x − 2y + 2z = 5 respectively. The line l has
equation r = 4i + 2j + k + , i + j + 2k.

(i) Show that l is parallel to m. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the planes m and n. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

(iii) A point P lies on the line l. The perpendicular distance of P from the plane n is equal to 2. Find
the position vectors of the two possible positions of P. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18 [Turn over

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/O/N/18

0.0 Year 2018 527

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

528 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 529

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

530 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 531

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

532 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality B1

2 2 ( 2 x − a ) < ( x + 3a ) , or corresponding quadratic equation, or pair of
2 2

linear equations
2(2x – a) = ± (x + 3a)

Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear M1

equations for x

5 1 A1
Obtain critical values x = a and x = − a
3 5

1 5 A1
State final answer − a < x < a
5 3

5 B1
OR: Obtain critical value x = a from a graphical method, or by inspection, or
3
by solving a linear equation or an inequality

1 B2
Obtain critical value x = − a similarly
5

1 5 B1
State final answer − a < x < a
5 3
[Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 533

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Rearrange the equation in the form ae2 x = b or ae x = be− x M1

Obtain correct equation in either form with a = 2 and b = 5 A1

Use correct method to solve for x M1

Obtain answer x = 0.46 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 (i) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = x 3 B1

Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 3 – x, and justify the given statement B1 Consideration of behaviour for x < 0 is needed
for the second B1

3(ii) ( ) ( )
State or imply the equation x = 2 x 3 + 3 / 3 x 2 + 1 B1

Rearrange this in the form x3 = 3 − x , or commence work vice versa B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

534 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.213 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. or more to justify 1.213 to 3 d.p., or show there is a A1
sign change in the interval (1.2125, 1.2135)

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) dx dy B1
Obtain = 2cos θ + 2cos 2θ or = −2sin θ − 2sin 2θ
dθ dθ

Use dy/dx = dy/dθ ÷ dx/dθ M1

dy 2sin θ + 2sin 2θ A1
Obtain correct in any form, e.g. –
dx 2cosθ + 2cos 2θ

4(ii) Equate denominator to zero and use any correct double angle formula M1*

Obtain correct 3-term quadratic in cos θ in any form A1

Solve for θ depM1*

1 A1
Obtain x = 3 3 / 2 and y = , or exact equivalents
2

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 535

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1

Obtain term ln y B1

1 2 B1+B1
Obtain terms 2 ln x – x
2

Use x = 1, y = 1 to evaluate a constant, or as limits M1

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. A1

1 1
ln y = 2ln x − x 2 +
2 2

1 1  A1
Rearrange as y = x 2 exp  − x 2  , or equivalent
2 2 

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) Rearrange in the form 3 sin x − cos x = 2 B1

State R = 2 B1

Use trig formulae to obtain α M1

Obtain α = 30° with no errors seen A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

536 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii)  2 B1ft
Evaluate sin −1  
 R 

Carry out a correct method to find a value of x in the given interval M1

Obtain answer x = 75° A1

Obtain a second answer e.g. x = 165° and no others A1ft

[Treat answers in radians as a misread. Ignore answers outside the given interval.]

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Use product rule M1*

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in a single trig function depM1*

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 3 tan 2 x = 2 A1

Obtain answer x = 0.685 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 537

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(ii) ( )
Use the given substitution and reach a ∫ u 2 − u 4 du M1

Obtain correct integral with a = 5 and limits 0 and 1 A1

1 1  M1
Use correct limits in an integral of the form a  u 3 − u 5 
3 5 

2 A1
Obtain answer
3

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

538 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + 2i, or equivalent, M1

or equate to x + iy, obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y

4 7 A1
Obtain quotient − + i, or equivalent
5 5

Use correct method to find either r or θ M1

Obtain r = 1.61 A1

Obtain θ = 2.09 A1

OR: Find modulus or argument of 2 + 3i or of 1 – 2i B1

Use correct method to find r M1

Obtain r = 1.61 A1

Use correct method to find θ M1

Obtain θ = 2.09 A1

8(ii) Show a circle with centre 3 – 2i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 B1ft Centre not at the origin

Carry out a correct method for finding the least value of z M1

Obtain answer 13 – 1 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 539

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
2− x 3 + 2x ( 3 + 2 x )2
Use a correct method to find a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 1, B = – 1, C = 3 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

A Dx + E
[Mark the form + , where A = 1, D = – 2 and E = 0, B1M1A1A1A1
2− x ( 3 + 2 x )2
as above.]

9(ii) Integrate and obtain terms B3ft The f.t is on A, B, C; or on A, D, E.

1 3
− ln ( 2 − x ) − ln ( 3 + 2 x ) –
2 2 ( 3 + 2x )

Substitute correctly in an integral with terms a ln (2 – x), M1

b ln (3 + 2x) and c / (3 + 2x) where abc ≠ 0

Obtain the given answer after full and correct working A1

[Correct integration of the A, D, E form gives an extra constant term if integration by
parts is used for the second partial fraction.]

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

540 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) EITHER: Expand scalar product of a normal to m and a direction vector of l M1

Verify scalar product is zero A1

Verify that one point of l does not lie in the plane A1

OR: Substitute coordinates of a general point of l in the equation of the plane m M1

Obtain correct equation in λ in any form A1

Verify that the equation is not satisfied for any value of λ A1

10(ii) Use correct method to evaluate a scalar product of normal vectors to m and n M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the M1
moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 74.5° or 1.30 radians A1

10(iii) EITHER: Using the components of a general point P of l form an equation in λ by M1

equating the perpendicular distance from n to 2

OR: Take a point Q on l, e.g. (5, 3, 3) and form an equation in λ by equating the M1
length of the projection of QP onto a normal to plane n to 2

Obtain a correct modular or non-modular equation in any form A1

Solve for λ and obtain a position vector for P, e.g. 7i + 5j + 7j from λ = 3 A1

Obtain position vector of the second point, e.g. 3i + j – k from λ = – 1 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality 32x − 1 > x + 4. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation sin 1 − 30Å + cos 1 = 2 sin 1, for 0Å < 1 < 180Å.
[4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

(i) Find Ô
ln x
3 dx. [3]
x3

........................................................................................................................................................

2
(ii) Hence show that Ô dx = 16
1 3 − ln 4.
ln x
[2]
1
x3

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

4 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation

ex + e−x
= 4,
ex + 1
giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

5 The equation of a curve is y = x ln 8 − x. The gradient of the curve is equal to 1 at only one point,
when x = a.

(i) Show that a satisfies the equation x = 8 −

8
ln 8 − x
. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

(ii) Verify by calculation that a lies between 2.9 and 3.1. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to determine a correct to 2 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

6 A certain curve is such that its gradient at a general point with coordinates x, y is proportional to
y2
. The curve passes through the points with coordinates 1, 1 and e, 2. By setting up and solving
x
a differential equation, find the equation of the curve, expressing y in terms of x. [8]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

A curve has equation y = , for − 12 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0.

3 cos x
2 + sin x
7

(i) Find the exact coordinates of the stationary point of the curve. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

11
a
(ii) The constant a is such that Ô dx = 1. Find the value of a, giving your answer correct
3 cos x
2 + sin x
0
to 3 significant figures. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

7x2 − 15x + 8
Let f x =
1 − 2x 2 − x2
8 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

2 + 6i
in the form x + iy, where x
1 − 2i
9 (a) (i) Without using a calculator, express the complex number
and y are real. [2]

................................................................................................................................................

2 + 6i
in the form r cos 1 + i sin 1, where r > 0
1 − 2i
(ii) Hence, without using a calculator, express
and −0 < 1 ≤ 0, giving the exact values of r and 1. [3]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying both the inequalities z − 3i ≤ 1 and Re z ≤ 0, where Re z denotes the real part of z.
Find the greatest value of arg z for points in this region, giving your answer in radians correct to
2 decimal places. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

10 The line l has equation r = 5i − 3j − k + , i − 2j + k. The plane p has equation

r − i − 2j. 3i + j + k = 0.
The line l intersects the plane p at the point A.

(i) Find the position vector of A. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between l and p. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

[Question 10 (iii) is printed on the next page.]

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18 [Turn over

(iii) Find the equation of the line which lies in p and intersects l at right angles. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/O/N/18

560 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 19 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 561

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

562 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 563

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

564 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 565

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 State or imply non-modular inequality B1

32 ( 2 x − 1) > ( x + 4 ) , or corresponding quadratic equation, or pair
2 2

35 x 2 − 44 x − 7 = 0
of linear equations/inequalities 3 ( 2 x − 1) = ± ( x + 4 )

Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term M1 Allow for reasonable attempt at factorising
quadratic, or solve two linear equations for x e.g. (5x – 7)(7x + 1)

7 1 A1 Accept 1.4 and -0.143 or better for penultimate A mark

Obtain critical values x = and x = −
5 7

7 1 A1 ‘and’ is A0, 7 < x < − 1 is A0. Must be exact values.

State final answer x > , x <− 5 7
5 7 Must be strict inequalities in final answer

Alternative

7 B1 or by inspection, or by solving a linear equation or an inequality

Obtain critical value x = from a graphical method
5

1 B2
Obtain critical value x = − similarly
7

7 1 B1 [Do not condone ⩾ for >, or ⩽ for <.]

State final answer x > or x < − or equivalent
5 7

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

566 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Use trig formula and obtain an equation in sin θ and cosθ M1* Condone sign error in expansion and/or omission of "+ cos θ "
sin θ cos 30° − cos θ sin 30° + cos θ = 2 sin θ

Obtain an equation in tan θ M1(dep*) e.g. tan θ = 1−sin 30°

2 − cos30°
Can be implied by correct answer following correct expansion.
Otherwise need to see working

( )
Obtain tan θ = 1 / 4 − 3 , or equivalent A1 4+ 3
13
, 0.4409.... (2 s.f or better)

Obtain final answer θ = 23.8° and no others in range A1 At least 3 sf ( 23.7939....)

ignore extra values outside range

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) ln x 1 1 M1*
Integrate by parts and reach a + b ∫ . 2 dx
x2 x x

1 ln x 1 1 A1
Obtain ± ± ∫ . 2 dx, or equivalent
2 x2 x 2x

ln x 1 A1 Condone without ‘+ C ’

Complete integration correctly and obtain − − , or ISW
2 x2 4 x2
equivalent

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 567

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(ii) ln x b M1(dep*) 1 1 1
Substitute limits correctly in an expression of the form a + − ln 2 − +
x2 x2 8 16 4
or equivalent

Obtain the given answer following full and exact working A1 The step ln 2 = 1 ln 4 or 2ln2 = ln4 needs to be clear.
2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 B1
( )
2
Substitute and obtain 3-term quadratic 3u + 4u − 1 = 0 , or e.g. 3 e x 2
+ 4e x − 1 = 0
equivalent

Solve a 3 term quadratic for u M1 Must be an equation with real roots

Obtain root ( )
7 − 2 / 3 , or decimal in [0.21, 0.22] A1 Or equivalent. Ignore second root (even if incorrect)

Use correct method for finding x from a positive value of e x M1 Must see some indication of method: use of x = ln u

Obtain answer x = – 1.536 only A1 CAO. Must be 3 dp

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

568 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) Use product rule on a correct expression M1 x

Condone with + unless there is clear evidence of incorrect
8− x
product rule.

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1 dy x

= ln ( 8 − x ) −
dx 8− x

8 A1 Given answer: check carefully that it follows from correct

Equate derivative to 1 and obtain x = 8 − working
ln ( 8 − x )

Condone the use of a for x throughout

5(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of relevant M1 8 8

8− = 3.09 > 2.9, 8− = 2.97 < 3.1
expressions at x = 2.9 and x = 3.1 ln 5.1 ln 4.9
Clear linking of pairs needed for M1 by this method
(0.19 and -0.13)

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 Note: valid to consider gradient at 2.9 (1.06..) and 3.1 (0.95..)
and comment on comparison with 1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 569

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(iii) 8 M1 3, 3.0293, 3.0111, 3.0225, 3.0154, ( 3.0198 )

Use the iterative process xn +1 = 8 – correctly to find at
ln ( 8 − xn ) 2.9, 3.0897, 2.9728, 3.0460, 3.0006, 3.290, 3.0113, 3.0223, 3.0155
least two successive values. 3.1, 2.9661, 3.0501, 2.9980, 3.0305, 3.0103, 3.0229, 3.0151
SR: Clear successive use of 0, 1, 2, 3 etc., or equivalent, scores M0. Allow M1 if values given to fewer than 4 dp

Obtain final answer 3.02 A1

Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify 3.02 to 2 d.p., A1 Must have two consecutive values rounding correctly to 3.02
or show there is a sign change in the interval (3.015, 3.025)

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

570 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 dy y2 B1 SC: If k = 1 seen or implied give B0 and then allow B1B1B0M1,

State equation =k , or equivalent max 3/8.
dx x

Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1 k 1

∫ x dx = ∫ y 2
dy

Allow with incorrect value substituted for k

1 B1 + B1 Incorrect k used scores max. B1B0

Obtain terms – and k ln x
y

Use given coordinates correctly to find k and/or a constant of M1 SC: If an incorrect method is used to find k, M1 is allowable for
integration C in an equation containing terms ay , b ln x and C a correct method to find C

1 A1 + A1 1 1
Obtain k = and c = – 1, or equivalent ln x = 1 − A0 for fortuitous answers.
2 2 y

2 A1 −1
Obtain answer y = , or equivalent, and ISW y=
2 − ln x −1 + ln x

SC: MR of the fraction.

dy y2
=k 2 B1
dx x
Separate variables and integrate B1
−1 − k
= ( +C ) B1+B1
y x
Substitute to find k and/or c M1
e 2−e
k= , c= A1+A1
2 ( e − 1) 2 ( e − 1)
Answer A0

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 571

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1 dy −3sin x ( 2 + sin x ) − 3 cos x cos x

=
dx ( 2 + sin x )2
Condone invisible brackets if recovery implied later.

Equate numerator to zero M1

2 2
Use cos x + sin x = 1 and solve for sin x M1 −6 sin x − 3 = 0 ⇒ sinx =….

Obtain coordinates x = − π / 6 and y = 3 ISW A1 + A1 From correct working. No others in range

SR: A candidate who only states the numerator of the derivative,

but justifies this, can have full marks. Otherwise they score
M0A0M1M1A0A0

7(ii) State indefinite integral of the form k ln (2 + sin x) M1*

Substitute limits correctly, equate result to 1 and obtain A1 or equivalent

3 ln (2 + sin a) – 3 ln 2 = 1

Use correct method to solve for a M1(dep*) Allow for a correct method to solve an incorrect equation, so
long as that equation has a solution.
1 + 12 sin a = e ⇒ a = sin  2 e − 1 
1 −13

  ( 1
3
)
Can be implied by 52.3°

Obtain answer a = 0.913 or better A1 Ignore additional solutions. Must be in radians.

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

572 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
1 − 2x 2− x ( 2 − x )2
Use a correct method for finding a constant M1 7 = A + 2B
M1 is available following a single slip in working from their form −15 = −4 A − 5 B − 2C
but no A marks (even if a constant is “correct”)
8 = 4 A + 2B + C

Obtain one of A = 1, B = 3, C = – 2 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

A Dx + E
[Mark the form + , where A = 1, D = – 3 and
1 − 2x ( 2 − x )2
E = 4, B1M1A1A1A1 as above.]

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 573

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(ii) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of M1 Symbolic coefficients are not sufficient for the M1
−1 −2

(1 − 2 x )−1 , ( 2 − x )−1 , 1 − x  , ( 2 − x )−2 or 1 − x 

1 1
 2   2 

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each A3ft 1 + 2x + 4x2

partial fraction The ft is on A, B, C. 3
+ 34 x + 83 x 2
2

− 12 − 12 x − 83 x 2

9 A1
Obtain final answer 2 + x + 4 x 2
4

[For the A, D, E form of fractions give M1A2ft for the expanded [The ft is on A, D, E.]
partial fractions, then, if D ≠ 0, M1 for multiplying out fully, and
A1 for the final answer.]

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

574 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)(i) Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + 2i, or equivalent M1 Requires at least one of 2 + 10i + 12i 2 and 1 − 4i 2 together with
use of i 2 = −1 . Can be implied by −105+10i

Obtain quotient – 2 + 2i A1

Alternative

Equate to x + iy, obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or M1 x + 2 y = 2, y − 2x = 6

for y

Obtain quotient – 2 + 2i A1

9(a)(ii) Use correct method to find either r or θ M1 If only finding θ , need to be looking for θ in the correct
quadrant

Obtain r = 2 2 , or exact equivalent A1ft ft their x + iy

3 A1ft ft on k(-1 + i) for k > 0 Do not ISW

Obtain θ = π from exact work
4

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 575

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) Show a circle with centre 3i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 B1ft Follow through their centre provided not at the origin
For clearly unequal scales, should be an ellipse

All correct with even scales and shade the correct region B1 Im z

3i
1

Re z

Carry out a correct method for calculating greatest value of arg z M1 π −1 1

e.g. arg z = + sin
2 3

Obtain answer 1.91 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 16 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

576 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) Substitute for r and expand the scalar product to obtain an equation M1* e.g. 3 ( 5 + λ ) + ( −3 − 2λ ) + ( −1 + λ ) = 5 ( 2λ = 5 − 11)
in λ
or 3 ( 4 + λ ) + 1( −5 − 2λ ) + ( −1 + λ ) = 0
Must attempt to deal with i + 2j

Solve a linear equation for λ M1(dep*)

Obtain λ = – 3 and position vector rA= 2i +3j – 4k for A A1 Accept coordinates

10(ii) State or imply a normal vector of p is 3i + j + k, or equivalent B1

Use correct method to evaluate a scalar product of relevant vectors M1

e.g. (i – 2j + k).(3i + j + k)

Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the M1 2
cos θ =
scalar product by the product of the moduli and evaluate the inverse 6 11
sine or cosine of the result
Second M1 available if working with the wrong vectors

Obtain answer 14.3° or 0.249 radians A1 Or better

© UCLES 2018 Page 17 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 577

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) Alternative 1

Use of a point on l and Cartesian equation 3 x + y + z = 5 to find M1

distance of point from plane e.g. B ( 5, − 3, − 1)
d = 3×59−+31−+11−5

= 6
11
( = 1.809...) A1

d M1
Complete method to find angle e.g. sin θ =
AB

 6  A1 Or better
θ = sin −1   = 0.249
 11 54 

Alternative 2

State or imply a normal vector of p is 3i + j + k, or equivalent B1

Use correct method to evaluate a vector product of relevant vectors M1 3i − 2 j + 7k

e.g. (i – 2j + k)x(3i + j + k)

Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the M1 32 + 22 + 7 2
vector product by the product of the moduli and evaluate the inverse sin θ = .
sine or cosine of the result 11 6
Second M1 available if working with the wrong vectors

Obtain answer 14.3° or 0.249 radians A1 Or better

© UCLES 2018 Page 18 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

578 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) Taking the direction vector of the line to be ai + bj + ck , state a B1

relevant equation in a, b, c, e.g. 3a + b + c = 0

State a second relevant equation, e.g. a – 2b + c = 0, and solve for M1

one ratio, e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c = 3 : – 2 : – 7, or equivalent A1

State answer r = 2i + 3j – 4k + µ (3i – 2j – 7k) A1ft Or equivalent. The f.t. is on rA Requires ‘r = ….’

Alternative

Attempt to calculate the vector product of relevant vectors, e.g. M1

(3i + j + k) × (i – 2j + k)

Obtain two correct components of the product A1

Obtain correct product, e.g. 3i – 2j – 7k A1

State answer r = 2i + 3j – 4k + µ ( 3i – 2j – 7k) A1ft Or equivalent. The f.t. is on rA. Requires “ r = ….”

© UCLES 2018 Page 19 of 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Find the set of values of x satisfying the inequality 22x − a < x + 3a , where a is a positive constant.
[4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

2ex + e−x
2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation = 4, giving your answer correct to
ex − e−x
2 decimal places. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

3 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation x3 = 3 − x has exactly one real
root. [2]

(ii) Show that if a sequence of real values given by the iterative formula

2xn3 + 3
xn+1 =
3xn2 + 1

converges, then it converges to the root of the equation in part (i). [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use this iterative formula to determine the root correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of
each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 2 sin 1 + sin 21, y = 2 cos 1 + cos 21,
where 0 < 1 < 0.

dy
(i) Obtain an expression for in terms of 1. [3]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

(ii) Hence find the exact coordinates of the point on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the
y-axis. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

5 The coordinates x, y of a general point on a curve satisfy the differential equation

dy
x = 2 − x2 y.
dx
The curve passes through the point 1, 1. Find the equation of the curve, obtaining an expression for
y in terms of x. [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

6 (i) Show that the equation ï2 cosec x + cot x = ï3 can be expressed in the form R sin x − ! = ï2,
where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

(ii) Hence solve the equation ï2 cosec x + cot x = ï3, for 0Å < x < 180Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

7
y

R
x
O 1
20

The diagram shows the curve y = 5 sin2 x cos3 x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0, and its maximum point M . The shaded
region R is bounded by the curve and the x-axis.

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

(ii) Using the substitution u = sin x and showing all necessary working, find the exact area of R. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

2 + 3i
8 (a) Showing all necessary working, express the complex number in the form r ei1 , where r > 0
1 − 2i
and −0 < 1 ≤ 0. Give the values of r and 1 correct to 3 significant figures. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

6x2 + 8x + 9
9 Let f x = .
2 − x 3 + 2x2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

17
0
(ii) Hence, showing all necessary working, show that Ó f x dx = 1 + 12 ln 34 . [5]
−1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

10 The planes m and n have equations 3x + y − 2z = 10 and x − 2y + 2z = 5 respectively. The line l has
equation r = 4i + 2j + k + , i + j + 2k.

(i) Show that l is parallel to m. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the planes m and n. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

(iii) A point P lies on the line l. The perpendicular distance of P from the plane n is equal to 2. Find
the position vectors of the two possible positions of P. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18 [Turn over

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/O/N/18

598 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 599

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

600 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 601

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

602 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 603

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality B1

2 2 ( 2 x − a ) < ( x + 3a ) , or corresponding quadratic equation, or pair of
2 2

linear equations
2(2x – a) = ± (x + 3a)

Make reasonable attempt at solving a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear M1

equations for x

5 1 A1
Obtain critical values x = a and x = − a
3 5

1 5 A1
State final answer − a < x < a
5 3

5 B1
OR: Obtain critical value x = a from a graphical method, or by inspection, or
3
by solving a linear equation or an inequality

1 B2
Obtain critical value x = − a similarly
5

1 5 B1
State final answer − a < x < a
5 3
[Do not condone ⩽ for < in the final answer.]

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

604 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Rearrange the equation in the form ae2 x = b or ae x = be− x M1

Obtain correct equation in either form with a = 2 and b = 5 A1

Use correct method to solve for x M1

Obtain answer x = 0.46 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 (i) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = x 3 B1

Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 3 – x, and justify the given statement B1 Consideration of behaviour for x < 0 is needed
for the second B1

3(ii) ( ) ( )
State or imply the equation x = 2 x 3 + 3 / 3 x 2 + 1 B1

Rearrange this in the form x3 = 3 − x , or commence work vice versa B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 605

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.213 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. or more to justify 1.213 to 3 d.p., or show there is a A1
sign change in the interval (1.2125, 1.2135)

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) dx dy B1
Obtain = 2cos θ + 2cos 2θ or = −2sin θ − 2sin 2θ
dθ dθ

Use dy/dx = dy/dθ ÷ dx/dθ M1

dy 2sin θ + 2sin 2θ A1
Obtain correct in any form, e.g. –
dx 2cosθ + 2cos 2θ

4(ii) Equate denominator to zero and use any correct double angle formula M1*

Obtain correct 3-term quadratic in cos θ in any form A1

Solve for θ depM1*

1 A1
Obtain x = 3 3 / 2 and y = , or exact equivalents
2

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

606 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1

Obtain term ln y B1

1 2 B1+B1
Obtain terms 2 ln x – x
2

Use x = 1, y = 1 to evaluate a constant, or as limits M1

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. A1

1 1
ln y = 2ln x − x 2 +
2 2

1 1  A1
Rearrange as y = x 2 exp  − x 2  , or equivalent
2 2 

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) Rearrange in the form 3 sin x − cos x = 2 B1

State R = 2 B1

Use trig formulae to obtain α M1

Obtain α = 30° with no errors seen A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 607

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii)  2 B1ft
Evaluate sin −1  
 R 

Carry out a correct method to find a value of x in the given interval M1

Obtain answer x = 75° A1

Obtain a second answer e.g. x = 165° and no others A1ft

[Treat answers in radians as a misread. Ignore answers outside the given interval.]

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Use product rule M1*

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in a single trig function depM1*

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 3 tan 2 x = 2 A1

Obtain answer x = 0.685 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

608 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(ii) ( )
Use the given substitution and reach a ∫ u 2 − u 4 du M1

Obtain correct integral with a = 5 and limits 0 and 1 A1

1 1  M1
Use correct limits in an integral of the form a  u 3 − u 5 
3 5 

2 A1
Obtain answer
3

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 609

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + 2i, or equivalent, or equate to x M1

+ iy, obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y

4 7 A1
Obtain quotient − + i, or equivalent
5 5

Use correct method to find either r or θ M1

Obtain r = 1.61 A1

Obtain θ = 2.09 A1

OR: Find modulus or argument of 2 + 3i or of 1 – 2i B1

Use correct method to find r M1

Obtain r = 1.61 A1

Use correct method to find θ M1

Obtain θ = 2.09 A1

8(ii) Show a circle with centre 3 – 2i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 B1ft Centre not at the origin

Carry out a correct method for finding the least value of z M1

Obtain answer 13 – 1 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

610 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
2− x 3 + 2x ( 3 + 2 x )2
Use a correct method to find a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 1, B = – 1, C = 3 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

A Dx + E
[Mark the form + , where A = 1, D = – 2 and
2− x ( 3 + 2 x )2
E = 0, B1M1A1A1A1 as above.]

9(ii) Integrate and obtain terms B3ft The f.t is on A, B, C; or on A, D, E.

1 3
− ln ( 2 − x ) − ln ( 3 + 2 x ) –
2 2 ( 3 + 2x )

Substitute correctly in an integral with terms a ln (2 – x), M1

b ln (3 + 2x) and c / (3 + 2x) where abc ≠ 0

Obtain the given answer after full and correct working A1

[Correct integration of the A, D, E form gives an extra constant term if integration by
parts is used for the second partial fraction.]

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 611

9709/33 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) EITHER: Expand scalar product of a normal to m and a direction vector of l M1

Verify scalar product is zero A1

Verify that one point of l does not lie in the plane A1

OR: Substitute coordinates of a general point of l in the equation of the plane m M1

Obtain correct equation in λ in any form A1

Verify that the equation is not satisfied for any value of λ A1

10(ii) Use correct method to evaluate a scalar product of normal vectors to m and n M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the M1
moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 74.5° or 1.30 radians A1

10(iii) EITHER: Using the components of a general point P of l form an equation in λ by M1

equating the perpendicular distance from n to 2

OR: Take a point Q on l, e.g. (5, 3, 3) and form an equation in λ by equating the M1
length of the projection of QP onto a normal to plane n to 2

Obtain a correct modular or non-modular equation in any form A1

Solve for λ and obtain a position vector for P, e.g. 7i + 5j + 7j from λ = 3 A1

Obtain position vector of the second point, e.g. 3i + j – k from λ = – 1 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation ln x4 − 4 = 4 ln x − ln 4, giving your answer correct
to 2 decimal places. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

2 (i) Given that sin x − 60Å = 3 cos x − 45Å, find the exact value of tan x. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Hence solve the equation sin x − 60Å = 3 cos x − 45Å, for 0Å < x < 360Å. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

e 3x
3 A curve has equation y = . Find the x-coordinates of the stationary points of the curve in the
tan 12 x
interval 0 < x < 0. Give your answers correct to 3 decimal places. [6]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

4 The polynomial x4 + 2x3 + ax + b, where a and b are constants, is divisible by x2 − x + 1. Find the
values of a and b. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

6
3
O@ A
Let I = Ô
4
x
1−x
5 dx.
1
4

(i) Using the substitution x = cos 1, show that I = Ó 2 cos2 1 d1.

3
2
[4]
10
6

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

(ii) Hence find the exact value of I . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

6 In a certain chemical reaction the amount, x grams, of a substance is decreasing. The differential
equation relating x and t, the time in seconds since the reaction started, is

= −kx t,
dx
dt
where k is a positive constant. It is given that x = 100 at the start of the reaction.

(i) Solve the differential equation, obtaining a relation between x, t and k. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

(ii) Given that t = 25 when x = 80, find the value of t when x = 40. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

7 (i) Showing all working and without using a calculator, solve the equation z2 + 2ï6z + 8 = 0,
giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points representing the roots. [1]

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

(iii) The points representing the roots are A and B, and O is the origin. Find angle AOB. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iv) Prove that triangle AOB is equilateral. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

The positive constant a is such that Ó x e− 2 x dx = 2.

a 1
8
0

(i) Show that a satisfies the equation a = 2 ln a + 2. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Verify by calculation that a lies between 3 and 3.5. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iteration based on the equation in part (i) to determine a correct to 2 decimal places. Give
the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

12x2 + 4x − 1
Let f x =
x − 1 3x + 2
9 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

10 The point P has position vector 3i − 2j + k. The line l has equation r = 4i + 2j + 5k + - i + 2j + 3k.

(i) Find the length of the perpendicular from P to l, giving your answer correct to 3 significant
figures. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

(ii) Find the equation of the plane containing l and P, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18 [Turn over

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/31/M/J/18

0.0 Year 2018 631

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 11 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
632 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers.
They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors
for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme,
referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The
meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed
instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question
(however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate
responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should
not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June633
2018
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously ‘correct’ answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
634 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become ‘follow through’ marks. MR is not
applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June635
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 Use law for the logarithm of a product, quotient or power M1

Obtain a correct equation free of logarithms, e.g. 4( x 4 − 4) = x 4 A1

Solve for x M1

Obtain answer x = 1.52 only A1

Question Answer Marks

2(i) Use trig formulae and obtain an equation in sin x and cos x M1*

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1

Substitute exact trig ratios and obtain an expression for tan x M1(dep*)

Obtain answer tan x =

(
− 6+ 6 ) or equivalent A1

(6 − 2 )
4

2(ii) State answer, e.g. 118.5° B1

State second answer, e.g. 298.5° B1ft

Question Answer Marks

3 Use quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain a quadratic in tan 1 x or an equation of the M1 *

2
form a sin x = b

Solve for x M1(dep*)

Obtain answer 0.340 A1

Obtain second answer 2.802 and no other in the given interval A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
636 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

4 EITHER: Commence division by x 2 − x + 1 and reach a partial quotient M1

of the form x 2 + kx

Obtain quotient x 2 + 3 x + 2 A1

Either Set remainder identically equal to zero and solve for a or for b, or M1
multiply given divisor and found quotient and obtain a or b

Obtain a = 1 A1

Obtain b = 2 A1

OR: Assume an unknown factor x 2 + Bx + C and obtain an equation M1

in B and/or C

Obtain B = 3 and A = 2 A1

Either Use equations to obtain a or b or multiply given divisor and M1

found factor to obtain a or b

Obtain a = 1 A1

Obtain b = 2 A1

Question Answer Marks

5(i) State or imply dx = −2cos θ sin θ dθ , or equivalent B1

Substitute for x and dx, and use Pythagoras M1

Obtain integrand ± 2cos 2θ A1

Justify change of limits and obtain given answer correctly A1

5(ii) Obtain indefinite integral of the form aθ + b sin 2θ M1*

1 A1
Obtain θ + sin 2θ
2

Use correct limits correctly M1(dep*)

Obtain answer 1 π with no errors seen A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June637
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

6(i) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side B1

Obtain term ln x B1

Obtain term − 2 kt t , or equivalent B1

Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 100 and t = 0, in a solution containing M1

terms a ln x and b t t

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. 1n x = − 2 kt t + 1n 100 A1

6(ii) Substitute x = 80 and t = 25 to form equation in k M1

Substitute x = 40 and eliminate k M1

Obtain answer t = 64.1 A1

Question Answer Marks

7(i) Use quadratic formula, or completing the square, or the substitution z = x + iy to M1

find a root, using i 2 = −1

Obtain a root, e.g. − 6 − 2i A1

Obtain the other root, e.g. − 6 − 2i A1

7(ii) Represent both roots in relatively correct positions B1ft

7(iii) State or imply correct value of a relevant length or angle, e.g. OA, OB, AB, angle B1ft
between OA or OB and the real axis

Carry out a complete method for finding angle OAB M1

Obtain AOB = 60° correctly A1

7(iv) Give a complete justification of the given statement B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
638 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

8(i) 1
− x
1
− x M1*
Integrate by parts and reach l xe 2 +m∫e 2 dx

1
− x
1
− x A1
Obtain −2 xe 2 +2∫e 2 dx

1
− x
1
− x A1
Complete the integration and obtain −2 xe 2 − 4e 2 , or equivalent

Having integrated twice, use limits and equate result to 2 M1(dep*)

Obtain the given equation correctly A1

8(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at a = 3 and a = 3.5 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

8(iii) Use the iterative formula an +1 = 21n( an + 2) correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.36 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 3.36 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (3.355, 3.365)

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June639
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

9(i) B C B1
State or imply the form A + +
x − 1 3x + 2

State or obtain A = 4 B1

Use a correct method to obtain a constant M1

Obtain one of B = 3, C = – 1 A1

Obtain the other value A1

9(ii) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of ( x − 1) −1 or
M1
(3x + 2)−1 , or equivalent

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each partial fraction A1ft + A1ft

Add the value of A to the sum of the expansions M1

1 9 33 A1
Obtain final answer − x − x2
2 4 8

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
640 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

JJJG JJJG
10(a) EITHER: Find PQ (or QP ) for a general point Q on l, e.g. B1
(1 + µ ) i + ( 4 + 2µ ) j + ( 4 + 3µ ) k
JJJG
Calculate the scalar product of PQ and a direction vector for l M1
and equate to zero

3 A1
Solve and obtain correct solution e.g. µ = −
2

Carry out method to calculate PQ M1

Obtain answer 1.22 A1

JJJG JJJG
OR1: Find PQ (or QP ) for a general point Q on l B1

Use a correct method to express PQ 2 (or PQ) in terms of µ M1

Obtain a correct expression in any form A1

Carry out a complete method for finding its minimum M1

Obtain answer 1.22 A1

JJJG JJJG
OR2: Calling (4, 2, 5) A, state PA (or AP ) in component form, e.g. i + 4j + 4k B1
JJJG JJJG
Use a scalar product to find the projection of PA (or AP ) on l M1

Obtain correct answer 21 / 14 , or equivalent A1

Use Pythagoras to find the perpendicular M1

Obtain answer 1.22 A1

JJJG JJJG
OR3: State PA (or AP ) in component form B1
JJJG
Calculate vector product of PA and a direction vector for l M1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 4i + j – 2k A1

Divide modulus of the product by that of the direction vector M1

Obtain answer 1.22 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June641
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

10(ii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b and c, B1

e.g. a + 2b + 3c = 0
JJJG
Obtain a second relevant equation, e.g. using PA a + 4b + 4c = 0, M1
and solve for one ratio

Obtain a : b : c = 4 : 1 : – 2, or equivalent A1

Substitute a relevant point and values of a, b, c in general equation M1

and find d

Obtain correct answer, 4x + y – 2z = 8, or equivalent A1

OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, e.g. M1

(i + 4j + 4k) × (i + 2j + 3k)

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 4i + j – 2k A1

Substitute a relevant point and find d M1

Obtain correct answer, 4x + y – 2z = 8, or equivalent A1

OR2: Using a relevant point and relevant vectors form a 2-parameter M1

equation for the plane

State a correct equation, e.g. A1

r = 4i + 2j + 5k + λ(i + 4j + 4k) + µ(i + 2j + 3k)

State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

Obtain correct answer 4x + y – 2z = 8, or equivalent A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation 32x − 1 = 2x , giving your answers correct to
3 significant figures. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation cot 1 + cot 1 + 45Å = 2, for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

3
y

P x, y

x
O T N

In the diagram, the tangent to a curve at the point P with coordinates x, y meets the x-axis at T . The
point N is the foot of the perpendicular from P to the x-axis. The curve is such that, for all values of
x, the gradient of the curve is positive and TN = 2.

= y.
dy 1
(i) Show that the differential equation satisfied by x and y is [1]
dx 2

........................................................................................................................................................

The point with coordinates 4, 3 lies on the curve.

(ii) Solve the differential equation to obtain the equation of the curve, expressing y in terms of x.
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

2 sin x − sin 2x

sin x
1 − cos 2x 1 + cos x
4 (i) Show that . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

7
10
2 sin x − sin 2x
(ii) Hence, showing all necessary working, find Ô
2

1 − cos 2x
dx, giving your answer in the
10
3
form ln k. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

5 The equation of a curve is x2 x + 3y − y3 = 3.

dy x2 + 2xy
= 2
y − x2
(i) Show that . [4]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

(ii) Hence find the exact coordinates of the two points on the curve at which the gradient of the
normal is 1. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

6
A

a 1 rad a

B C

The diagram shows a triangle ABC in which AB = AC = a and angle BAC = 1 radians. Semicircles
are drawn outside the triangle with AB and AC as diameters. A circular arc with centre A joins B
and C. The area of the shaded segment is equal to the sum of the areas of the semicircles.

(i) Show that 1 = 12 0 + sin 1. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

(ii) Verify by calculation that 1 lies between 2.2 and 2.4. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to determine 1 correct to 2 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

7 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex numbers −3ï3 + i and ï3 + 2i are denoted by u and v respectively.

(i) Find, in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact, the complex numbers uv and
u
. [5]
v

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

(ii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram with origin O, show the points A and B representing the
complex numbers u and v respectively. Prove that angle AOB = 23 0. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

8
y

x
O

− 13 x
The diagram shows the curve y = x + 1e and its maximum point M .

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

(ii) Find the area of the shaded region enclosed by the curve and the axes, giving your answer in
terms of e. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

x − 4x2
Let f x =
3 − x 2 + x2
9 .

Bx + C
+
A
3−x 2 + x2
(i) Express f x in the form . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

10 Two lines l and m have equations r = 2i − j + k + s 2i + 3j − k and r = i + 3j + 4k + t i + 2j + k

respectively.

(i) Show that the lines are skew. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

A plane p is parallel to the lines l and m.

(ii) Find a vector that is normal to p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Given that p is equidistant from the lines l and m, find the equation of p. Give your answer in
the form ax + by + cz = d . [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18 [Turn over

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/M/J/18

0.0 Year 2018 661

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

662 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
1.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 2

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 663

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
2.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

664 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
3.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 4

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 665

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
4.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 5

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

666 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 6

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 667

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
5.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 7

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

668 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 8

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 669

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
6.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

670 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 671

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
7.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

672 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 673

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
8.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

674 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 675

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
9.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

676 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 16

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 677

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
10.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

678 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 679

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 18 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

680 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 681

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

682 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 683

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

684 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular equation M1

( )
8 2 x 2
( )
− 18 2 x + 9 = 0
( ) ( )
2 2
32 2 x − 1 = 2 x , or pair of equations

( )
3 2x − 1 = ± 2x

3 3 A1
Obtain 2 x = and 2 x = or equivalent
2 4

3 B1
OR: Obtain 2 x = by solving an equation
2

3 B1
Obtain 2 x = by solving an equation
4

Use correct method for solving an equation of the form M1

2 x = a , where a > 0

Obtain final answers x = 0.585 and x = – 0.415 only A1 The question requires 3 s.f.
Do not ISW if they go on to reject one value

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 685

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Use correct tan (A ± B) formula and obtain an equation in tan θ M1 1 + 1 − tan θ tan 45 = 2 Allow M1 with tan 45°
tan θ tan θ + tan 45
= 1 + 1 − tan θ
tan θ tan θ + 1

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1 With values substituted

Reduce to 3 tan θ = 1, or equivalent

2 A1

Obtain answer x = 30 ° A1 One correct solution

Obtain answer x = 150 ° A1 Second correct solution and no others in range

OR: use correct sin ( A ± B ) and cos ( A ± B ) to form

equation in sin θ and cos θ M1A1

Reduce to tan 2 θ = 1 , sin 2 θ = 1 , cos 2 θ = 3 or cot 2 θ = 3 A1

3 4 4
etc.

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

686 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) Fully justify the given statement B1 Some indication of use of gradient of curve = gradient of tangent
(PT) and no errors seen /no incorrect statements

3(ii) Separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side B1 B1 Must be working from ∫ 1 dy = ∫ kdx
y
1
Obtain terms ln y and x B marks are not available for fortuitously correct answers
2

Use x = 4, y = 3 to evaluate a constant or as limits in a solution M1

with terms a ln y and bx, where ab ≠ 0

Obtain correct solution in any form A1 ln y = 12 x + ln 3 − 2

1
x−2 A1 1 x + ln 3− 2 x −1.80
Obtain answer y = 3e 2 , or equivalent Accept y = e 2 , y=e 2 , y = 3 e x−4
y = ... scores A0

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 687

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Use correct double angle formulae and express LHS in terms of M1 2sin x − 2sin x cos x
cos x and sin x
(
1 − 2cos 2 x − 1)
Obtain a correct expression A1

Complete method to get correct denominator e.g. by factorising M1

to remove a factor of 1 − cos x

Obtain the given RHS correctly A1

OR (working R to L):

sin x 1 − cos x sin x − sin x cos x Given answer so check working carefully
× = M1A1
1 + cos x 1 − cos x 1 − cos 2 x
2sin x − 2sin x cos x
=
2 − 2cos 2 x

2sin x − sin 2 x
= M1A1
1 − cos 2 x

4(ii) State integral of the form a ln(1 + cos x) M1* If they use the substitution u = 1 + cos x
allow M1A1 for − ln u

Obtain integral − ln(1 + cos x) A1

Substitute correct limits in correct order M1(dep)*

()
Obtain answer ln 3 , or equivalent
2
A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

688 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) dy B1
State or imply 3 y 2 as derivative of y 3
dx

dy B1 dy dy
State or imply 6 xy + 3x 2 as derivative of 3x 2 y 3x 2 + 6 xy + 3x 2 − 3y2 =0
dx dx dx

 dy 
OR State or imply 2 x ( x + 3 y ) + x 2 1 + 3  as derivative of
 dx 
x2 ( x + 3 y )

dy M1 Given answer so check working carefully

Equate derivative of the LHS to zero and solve for
dx

Obtain the given answer A1

5(ii) Equate derivative to – 1 and solve for y M1*

Use their y = – 2x or equivalent to obtain an equation M1(dep*)

in x or y

Obtain answer (1, – 2) A1

Obtain answer ( 3 3 , 0) B1 1 ln 3
Must be exact e.g. e 3 but ISW if decimals after exact value
seen

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 689

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) Use correct method for finding the area of a segment and area of M1 πa 2
1 2 1
semicircle and form an equation in θ e.g. = a θ − a 2 sin θ
4 2 2

State a correct equation in any form A1 Given answer so check working carefully

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

6(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions M1 π f ( 2.2 ) = 2.37... > 2.2
at θ = 2.2 and θ = 2.4 e.g. f (θ ) = + sin θ

2 f ( 2.4 ) = 2.24... < 2.4
π f ( 2.2 ) = −0.17... < 0
or f (θ ) = θ − − sin θ 
2 f ( 2.4 ) = +0.15... > 0

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

690 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(iii) 1 M1 e.g.
Use θ n +1 = π + sin θ n correctly at least once
2 2.2 2.3 2.4

Obtain final answer 2.31 A1 2.3793 2.3165 2.2463

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 2.31 to 2 d.p. or A1 2.2614 2.3054 2.3512
show there is a sign change in the interval (2.305, 2.315)
2.3417 2.3129 2.2814

2.2881 2.3079 2.3288

2.3244 2.2970

2.3000 2.3185

2.3165 2.3041

2.3054 2.3138

2.3129 2.3072

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 691

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) 2
Substitute in uv, expand the product and use i = −1 M1

Obtain answer uv = −11 − 5 3i A1

EITHER: Substitute in u/v and multiply numerator and M1

denominator by the conjugate of v, or
equivalent

Obtain numerator −7 + 7 3i or denominator 7 A1

Obtain final answer −1 + 3i A1

OR: Substitute in u/v , equate to x + iy and solve M1 −3 3 = 3x − 2 y

for x or for y 
 1 = 2 x + 3 y

Obtain x = – 1 or y = 3 A1

Obtain final answer −1 + 3 i A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

692 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(ii) Show the points A and B representing u and v in relatively B1

correct positions

Carry out a complete method for finding angle AOB, e.g. M1 −1 − 2

calculate arg(u/v)
tan a = −1 , tan b = 2 ⇒ tan ( a − b ) = 3 3 3
OR: 3 3 3 1− 2
9
=− 3
( ) ()
If using θ = tan −1 − 3 must refer to arg u
v ⇒ θ = 2π
3
 −3 3  3 
 
 
OR: cosθ =  1  2  = −9 + 2 = −1
7 28 14 2
⇒ θ = 2π
3
28 + 7 − 49 1
OR: cos θ = =− ⇒ θ = 2π
2 28 7 2 3

Prove the given statement A1 Given answer so check working carefully

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 693

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) Use correct product or quotient rule M1 dy −1 x −1 x

= − 13 ( x + 1) e 3 +e 3
dx
1x 1x

dy e
3 − ( x + 1) 1 e 3
or = 3
2x
dx
e3

Obtain complete correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1

Obtain answer x = 2 with no errors seen A1

8(ii) 1
− x
1
− x M1*
Integrate by parts and reach a ( x + 1) e 3 + b∫e 3 dx

1
− x
1
− x A1 −1 x −1 x −1 x
Obtain −3 ( x + 1) e 3 + 3∫ e 3 dx , or equivalent −3xe 3 + ∫ 3e 3 dx − 3e 3

1
− x
1
− x A1
Complete integration and obtain −3 ( x + 1) e 3 − 9e 3 , or
equivalent

Use correct limits x = – 1 and x = 0 in the correct order, M1(dep*)

having integrated twice

1 A1
Obtain answer 9e 3 − 12 , or equivalent

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

694 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) Use a correct method to find a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = – 3, B = 1, C = 2 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

9(ii) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion M1 Symbolic binomial coefficients are not sufficient for the M1.
−1 −1
−1  1   1 
( )
−1
of ( 3 − x ) , 1 − x  , 2 + x 2 or 1 + x 2 
 3   2 

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x3 of A1Ft + A1Ft The ft is on A, B and C.
−1 1 + x + x + x ...  + x + 2  1 − x ... 
2 3 2
each partial fraction
 3 9 27  2  2 
2 3 2 3
−1 − x − x − x + 1 − x + x − x
3 9 27 2 2 4

Multiply out their expansion, up to the terms in x3 , by M1

Bx + C, where BC ≠ 0

1 11 31 3 A1
Obtain final answer x − x2 − x , or equivalent
6 18 108

© UCLES 2018 Page 16 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2018 695

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) Equate at least two pairs of components and solve for s or for t M1  s = −4  s = −2
 3  s = −6  5
 −5 or   −13
t= 3 t = −11 or t = 5
  7 ≠ −7 
−5 ≠ −1   6 ≠ −8
 3 5 5

Obtain correct answer for s or t, e.g. s = – 6, t = – 11 A1

Verify that all three equations are not satisfied and the lines fail A1
to intersect

State that the lines are not parallel B1

10(ii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain a relevant B1

equation in a, b and c, e.g. 2a + 3b – c = 0

Obtain a second equation, e.g. a + 2b +c = 0, M1

and solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c and state correct answer, e.g. A1

5i – 3j + k, or equivalent

OR: Attempt to calculate vector product of M1

relevant vectors, e.g. (2i + 3j – k)×(i + 2j + k)

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 5i – 3j + k A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 17 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

696 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

9709/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018

PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) EITHER: State position vector or coordinates of the B1 OR: Use the result of (ii) to form equations of planes containing
mid-point of a line segment joining points on l l and m B1
3 5
and m, e.g. i + j + k
2 2

Use the result of (ii) and the mid-point to M1 Use average of distances to find equation of p. M1
find d

Obtain answer 5x – 3y + z = 7, or equivalent A1 Obtain answer 5x – 3y + z = 7, or equivalent A1

OR: Using the result of part (ii), form an equation M1

in d by equating perpendicular distances to
the plane of a point on l and a point on m

14 − d −d A1
State a correct equation, e.g. =
35 35

Solve for d and obtain answer 5x – 3y + z = A1

7, or equivalent

© UCLES 2018 Page 18 of 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

4
in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
4 − 3x
1 Expand
coefficients. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation 52x = 5x + 5. Give your answer correct to 3 decimal
places. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

5
10

Showing all necessary working, find the value of Ó x cos 3x dx, giving your answer in terms of 0 .
6
3
0
[5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

The curve with equation y = has a stationary point at x = p.

ln x
3+x
4

(i) Show that p satisfies the equation ln x = 1 +

3
. [3]
x

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

(ii) By sketching suitable graphs, show that the equation in part (i) has only one root. [2]

3+x
(iii) It is given that the equation in part (i) can be written in the form x = . Use an iterative
ln x
formula based on this rearrangement to determine the value of p correct to 2 decimal places.
Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

(i) By first expanding cos2 x + sin2 x , or otherwise, show that

3
5

cos6 x + sin6 x = 1 − 34 sin2 2x. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

(ii) Hence solve the equation

cos6 x + sin6 x = 23 ,
for 0Å < x < 180Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

1
4 − y2
6 (i) Express in partial fractions. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

= 4 − y2 ,
dy
x
dx
and y = 1 when x = 1. Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x.
[6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

7 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

(i) Express cos 1 + 2 sin 1 in the form R cos 1 − !, where R > 0 and 0 < ! < 12 0. Give the exact
values of R and tan !. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Hence, showing all necessary working, show that Ô d1 = 5.

4
15
cos 1 + 2 sin 12
[5]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

8 The equation of a curve is 2x3 − y3 − 3xy2 = 2a3 , where a is a non-zero constant.

dy 2x2 − y2
=
dx y2 + 2xy
(i) Show that . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

(ii) Find the coordinates of the two points on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the y-axis.
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

9 (a) Find the complex number z satisfying the equation

3z − iz* = 1 + 5i,
where z* denotes the complex conjugate of z. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
which satisfy both the inequalities z ≤ 3 and Im z ≥ 2, where Im z denotes the imaginary part
of z. Calculate the greatest value of arg z for points in this region. Give your answer in radians
correct to 2 decimal places. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

10 The points A and B have position vectors 2i + j + 3k and 4i + j + k respectively. The line l has equation
r = 4i + 6j + - i + 2j − 2k.

(i) Show that l does not intersect the line passing through A and B. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

The point P, with parameter t, lies on l and is such that angle PAB is equal to 120Å.

(ii) Show that 3t2 + 8t + 4 = 0. Hence find the position vector of P. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18 [Turn over

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/33/M/J/18

716 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June717
2018
PUBLISHED

Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers.
They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors
for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme,
referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The
meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed
instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question
(however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate
responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should
not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
718 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously ‘correct’ answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June719
2018
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
720 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 Obtain a correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 term of the expansion of M1

1
−
1
 3  2
( 4 − 3x ) −
2 or  1 − x 
 4 

State correct first term 2 B1

3 27 2 A1 + A1
Obtain the next two terms x+ x
4 64

Total: 4

Question Answer Marks

2 State or imply u 2 = u + 5 , or equivalent in 5 x B1

Solve for u, or 5 x M1

1 A1
Obtain root (1 + 21 ), or decimal in [2.79, 2.80]
2

Use correct method for finding x from a positive root M1

Obtain answer x = 0.638 and no other answer A1

Total: 5

Question Answer Marks

3 Integrate by parts and reach ax sin 3x + b ∫ sin 3xdx M1*

1 `1 A1
Obtain x sin 3 x − ∫ sin 3 xdx , or equivalent
3 3

1 1 A1
Complete the integration and obtain x sin 3 x + cos 3 x , or equivalent
3 9

Substitute limits correctly having integrated twice and obtained ax sin 3x + b cos 3x M1(dep*)

1 A1
Obtain answer (π − 2 ) OE
18

Total: 5

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June721
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

4(i) Use the quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain the given equation A1

Total: 3

4(ii) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = ln x B1

3 B1
Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 1 + , and justify the given statement
x

Total: 2

4(iii) 3+ x M1
Use iterative formula xn +1 = correctly at least once
ln xn

Obtain final answer 4.97 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p.to justify 4.97 to 2 d.p. or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (4.965, 4.975)

Total: 3

Question Answer Marks

5(i) Attempt cubic expansion and equate to 1 M1

Obtain a correct equation A1

Use Pythagoras and double angle formula in the expansion M1

Obtain the given result correctly A1

Total: 4

5(ii) Use the identity and carry out a method for finding a root M1

Obtain answer 20.9° A1

Obtain a second answer, e.g. 69.1° A1FT

Obtain the remaining answers, e.g. 110.9° and 159.1°, and no others in the given A1FT
interval

Total: 4

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
722 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

6(i) Carry out relevant method to find A and B such that M1

1 A B
≡ +
4− y 2
2+ y 2− y

1 A1
Obtain A = B =
4

Total: 2

6(ii) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side to obtain one of the terms M1
a ln x, b ln (2 + y) or c ln (2 – y)

Obtain term ln x B1

1 1 A1FT
Integrate and obtain terms ln ( 2 + y ) − ln ( 2 − y )
4 4

Use x = 1 and y = 1 to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in a solution containing at M1

least two terms of the form a ln x, b ln (2 + y) and c ln (2 – y)

Obtain a correct solution in any form, e.g. A1

1 1 1
ln x = ln ( 2 + y ) − ln ( 2 − y ) − ln 3
4 4 4

2 ( 3 x 4 − 1) A1
Rearrange as , or equivalent
( 3x 4
+ 1)

Total: 6

Question Answer Marks

7(i) State answer R = 5 B1

Use trig formulae to find tan α M1

Obtain tan α = 2 A1

Total: 3

7(ii) State that the integrand is 3sec 2 (θ − α ) B1FT

State correct indefinite integral 3tan (θ − α ) B1FT

Substitute limits correctly M1

Use tan(A ± B) formula M1

Obtain the given exact answer correctly A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June723
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

8(i) dy B1
State or imply 3y 2 as derivative of y3
dx

dy B1
State or imply 3 y 2 + 6 xy as derivative of 3xy 2
dx

dy M1
Equate derivative of LHS to zero and solve for
dx

Obtain the given answer A1

Total: 4

8(ii) Equate denominator to zero and solve for y M1*

Obtain y = 0 and x = a A1

Obtain y = αx and substitute in curve equation to find x or M1(dep*)

to find y

Obtain x = – a A1

Obtain y = 2a A1

Total: 5

Question Answer Marks

9(a) Substitute and obtain a correct equation in x and y B1

Use i2 =−1 and equate real and imaginary parts M1

Obtain two correct equations in x and y, e.g. A1

3x – y = 1 and 3y – x = 5

Solve and obtain answer z = 1 + 2(i) A1

Total: 4

9(b) Show a circle with radius 3 B1

Show the line y = 2 extending in both quadrants B1

Shade the correct region B1

Carry out a complete method for finding the greatest value of arg z M1

Obtain answer 2.41 A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
724 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

10(i) Carry out a correct method for finding a vector equation for AB M1

Obtain r = 2i + j +3k +λ(2i – 2k), or equivalent A1

Equate pair(s) of components AB and l and solve for λ or µ M1(dep*)

Obtain correct answer for λ or µ A1

Verify that all three component equations are not satisfied A1

Total: 5

10(ii) State or imply a direction vector for AP has components B1

(2 + t, 5 + 2t, – 3 – 2t)
JJJG JJJG
State or imply that cos 120° equals the scalar product of AP and AB divided by the M1
product of their moduli

Carry out the correct processes for finding the scalar product and the product of the M1
moduli in terms of t, and obtain an equation in terms of t

Obtain the given equation correctly A1

Solve the quadratic and use a root to find a position vector for P M1

2 A1
Obtain position vector 2i + 2j + 4k from t = – 2, having rejected the root t = −
3

Total: 6

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Use the trapezium rule with three intervals to estimate the value of
10

Ó 1 − tan x dx,
4

giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

3

2 Expand 4 1 − 4x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

3 (i) Using the expansions of cos 3x + x and cos 3x − x, show that
1
2
cos 4x + cos 2x cos 3x cos x. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

5
10

(ii) Hence show that Ó cos 3x cos x dx = 38 ï3.

6
[3]
− 16 0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

4 The variables x and y satisfy the equation yn = Ax3 , where n and A are constants. It is given that
y = 2.58 when x = 1.20, and y = 9.49 when x = 2.51.

(i) Explain why the graph of ln y against ln x is a straight line. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Find the values of n and A, giving your answers correct to 2 decimal places. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

5 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 2t + sin 2t, y = 1 − 2 cos 2t,
for − 12 0 < t < 12 0.

dy
(i) Show that = 2 tan t. [5]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

(ii) Hence find the x-coordinate of the point on the curve at which the gradient of the normal is 2.
Give your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

6 The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
x cos2 1 = 2 tan 1 + 1,
d1
for 0 ≤ 1 < 12 0 and x > 0. It is given that x = 1 when 1 = 14 0 .

d 2 tan 1
(i) Show that tan2 1 = . [1]
d1 cos2 1

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Solve the differential equation and calculate the value of x when 1 = 13 0, giving your answer
correct to 3 significant figures. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

7 (i) By sketching suitable graphs, show that the equation e2x = 6 + e−x has exactly one real root. [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 0.5 and 1. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

(iii) Show that if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

xn+1 = 13 ln 1 + 6exn
converges, then it converges to the root of the equation in part (i). [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iv) Use this iterative formula to calculate the root correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

5x2 + x + 27
8 Let f x = .
2x + 1 x2 + 9

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

15
4
(ii) Hence find Ó f x dx, giving your answer in the form ln c, where c is an integer. [5]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

9 The complex number 1 + 2i is denoted by u.

(i) It is given that u is a root of the equation 2x3 − x2 + 4x + k = 0, where k is a constant.

(a) Showing all working and without using a calculator, find the value of k. [3]

................................................................................................................................................

(b) Showing all working and without using a calculator, find the other two roots of this equation.
[4]

................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

................................................................................................................................................

(ii) On an Argand diagram sketch the locus of points representing complex numbers z satisfying the
equation z − u = 1. Determine the least value of arg z for points on this locus. Give your answer
in radians correct to 2 decimal places. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

10 The line l has equation r = 4i + 3j − k + - i + 2j − 2k. The plane p has equation 2x − 3y − z = 4.

(i) Find the position vector of the point of intersection of l and p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Find the acute angle between l and p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

(iii) A second plane q is parallel to l, perpendicular to p and contains the point with position vector
4j − k. Find the equation of q, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18 [Turn over

Additional Page

If you use the following lined page to complete the answer(s) to any question(s), the question number(s)
must be clearly shown.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 9709/32/F/M/18

744 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 10 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March745
2018
PUBLISHED

Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers.
They should be applied alongside the specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors
for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit
is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme,
referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these
features are specifically assessed by the question as indicated by the mark scheme. The
meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed
instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question
(however; the use of the full mark range may be limited according to the quality of the candidate
responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should
not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
746 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March747
2018
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not
applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
748 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 State or imply ordinates 1, 0.8556…, 0.6501…, 0 B1

1 M1
Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = π and four ordinates
12

Obtain answer 0.525 A1

Question Answer Marks

2 State a correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 or x3 term M1

State correct first two terms 1 – x A1

3 7 A1 + A1
Obtain the next two terms − x 2 − x 3
2 2

Question Answer Marks

3(i) State correct expansion of cos ( 3x + x ) or cos ( 3 x − x ) B1

1 M1
Substitute in (cos 4 x + cos 2 x )
2

Obtain the given identity correctly AG A1

3(ii) 1 1 B1
Obtain integral sin 4 x + sin 2 x
8 4

Substitute limits correctly M1

Obtain the given answer following full, correct and exact working AG A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March749
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

4(i) State or imply n ln y = ln A + 3 ln x B1

State that the graph of ln y against ln x has an equation which is linear in ln y and ln B1
x, or has equation of the form nY = ln A + 3X, where Y = ln y and X = ln x, and is
thus a straight line.

4(ii) Substitute x- and y-values in n ln y = ln A + 3 ln x or in the given equation and solve M1

for one of the constants

Obtain a correct constant, e.g. n = 1.70 A1

Solve for a second constant M1

Obtain the other constant, e.g. A = 2.90 A1

Question Answer Marks

5(i) State correct derivative of x or y with respect to t B1

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dt dt

dy 4sin 2t A1
Obtain = , or equivalent
dx 2 + 2cos 2t

Use double angle formulae throughout M1

Obtain the given answer correctly AG A1

5(ii)  1 B1
State or imply t = tan −1  − 
 4

Obtain answer x = – 0.961 B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
750 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

6(i) Show sufficient working to justify the given statement AG B1

6(ii) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side B1

1 2 B1
Obtain term x
2

Obtain terms tan 2 θ + tanθ , or sec2θ + tan θ B1 + B1

1 M1
Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 1, θ = π , in a solution with two terms of the
4
form ax 2 and b tan θ , where ab ≠ 0

State correct answer in any form, A1

1 3
e.g. x 2 = tan 2θ + tan θ −
2 2

1 A1
Substitute θ = π and obtain x = 2.54
3

Question Answer Marks

7(i) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = e 2 x B1

Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 6 + e − x , and justify the given statement B1

7(ii) Calculate the value of a relevant expression or values of a pair of relevant M1

expressions at x = 0.5 and x = 1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

7(iii) B1
1
(
State a suitable equation, e.g. x = ln 1 + 6e x
3
)
Rearrange this as e2 x = 6 + e− x , or commence working vice versa B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March751
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

7(iv) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.928 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 0.928 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (0.9275, 0.9285)

Question Answer Marks

8(i) A Bx + C B1
State or imply the form + 2
2x + 1 x + 9

Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 3, B = 1 and C = 0 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

8(ii) 3 B1 FT
Integrate and obtain term ln ( 2 x + 1)
2
(FT on A value)

Integrate and obtain term of the form k ln( x 2 + 9) M1

1 A1 FT
Obtain term ln( x 2 + 9)
2
(FT on B value)

( )
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form a ln ( 2 x + 1) + b ln x 2 + 9 , M1

where ab ≠ 0

Obtain answer ln 45 after full and correct working A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
752 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2018
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

9(i)(a) Substitute x = 1 + 2i in the equation and attempt expansions of x 2 and x3 M1

Use i 2 = −1 correctly at least once and solve for k M1

Obtain answer k = 15 A1

9(i)(b) State answer 1 – 2i B1

Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with zeros 1 + 2i and M1
1 – 2i

Obtain x 2 − 2 x + 5 A1

3 A1
Obtain root − , or equivalent, via division or inspection
2

9(ii) Show a circle with centre 1 + 2i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 B1

Carry out a complete method for calculating the least value of arg z M1

Obtain answer 0.64 A1

Question Answer Marks

10(i) Express general point of l in component form, e.g. B1

r = ( 4 + µ ) i + ( 3 + 2 µ ) j + ( −1 − 2µ ) k , or equivalent

NB: Calling the vector a + µ b, the B1 is earned by a correct reduction of the sum
to a single vector or by expressing the substitution as a distributed sum a.n + µ b.n

Substitute in given equation of p and solve for µ M1

Obtain final answer 2i – j + 3k from µ = −2 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2018 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March753
2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

10(ii) Using the correct process, evaluate the scalar product of a direction vector for l and M1
a normal for p

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of M1
the moduli and find the inverse sine or cosine of the result

Obtain answer 10.3° (or 0.179 radians) A1

10(iii) EITHER: State a + 2b – 2c = 0 or 2a – 3b – c = 0 (B1

Obtain two relevant equations and solve for one M1

ratio, e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c = 8 : 3 : 7, or equivalent A1

Substitute a, b, c and given point and evaluate d M1

Obtain answer 8x + 3y + 7z = 5 A1)

OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant (M1

vectors, e.g. (2i – 3j – k)×(i + 2j – 2k)

Obtain two correct components of the product A1

Obtain correct product, e.g. 8i + 3j +7k A1

Use the product and the given point to find d M1

Obtain answer 8x + 3y + 7z = 5, or equivalent A1)

OR2: Attempt to form a 2-parameter equation with (M1

relevant vectors

State a correct equation, e.g. A1

r = 4j – k + λ(i + 2j – 2k) + µ (2i – 3j – k)

State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

State answer 8x + 3y + 7z = 5, or equivalent A1)

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

754 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2017

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Find the quotient and remainder when x4 is divided by x2 + 2x − 1. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

2 Two variable quantities x and y are believed to satisfy an equation of the form y = C ax , where C and
a are constants. An experiment produced four pairs of values of x and y. The table below gives the
corresponding values of x and ln y.

x 0.9 1.6 2.4 3.2

ln y 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.6

By plotting ln y against x for these four pairs of values and drawing a suitable straight line, estimate
the values of C and a. Give your answers correct to 2 significant figures. [5]

ln y

x
0 1 2 3 4

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

3 The equation x3 = 3x + 7 has one real root, denoted by !.

(i) Show by calculation that ! lies between 2 and 3. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

Two iterative formulae, A and B, derived from this equation are as follows:

xn+1 = 3xn + 7 3 ,
1
(A)
xn3 − 7
xn+1 = . (B)
3
Each formula is used with initial value x1 = 2.5.

(ii) Show that one of these formulae produces a sequence which fails to converge, and use the other
formula to calculate ! correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

4 (i) Prove the identity tan 45Å + x + tan 45Å − x 2 sec 2x. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

(ii) Hence sketch the graph of y = tan 45Å + x + tan 45Å − x for 0Å ≤ x ≤ 90Å. [3]

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

5 The equation of a curve is 2x4 + xy3 + y4 = 10.

dy 8x3 + y3
(i) Show that =− . [4]
dx 3xy2 + 4y3

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

(ii) Hence show that there are two points on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis
and find the coordinates of these points. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

6 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy
= 4 cos2 y tan x,
dx
for 0 ≤ x < 12 0, and x = 0 when y = 14 0. Solve this differential equation and find the value of x when
y = 13 0. [8]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

7 (a) The complex number u is given by u = 8 − 15i. Showing all necessary working, find the two
square roots of u. Give answers in the form a + ib, where the numbers a and b are real and exact.
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

(b) On an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers satisfying
both the inequalities z − 2 − i ≤ 2 and 0 ≤ arg z − i ≤ 14 0. [4]

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

4x2 + 9x − 8
8 Let f x = .
x + 2 2x − 1

B C
(i) Express f x in the form A + + . [4]
x + 2 2x − 1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

15
4
(ii) Hence show that Ó f x dx = 6 + 12 ln 16
7
. [5]
1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

9
y

R
x
O 2

− 12 x
The diagram shows the curve y = 1 + x2 e for x ≥ 0. The shaded region R is enclosed by the curve,
the x-axis and the lines x = 0 and x = 2.

(i) Find the exact values of the x-coordinates of the stationary points of the curve. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

42
(ii) Show that the exact value of the area of R is 18 − . [5]
e

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17 [Turn over

10 The equations of two lines l and m are r = 3i − j − 2k + , −i + j + 4k and r = 4i + 4j − 3k + - 2i + j − 2k

respectively.

(i) Show that the lines do not intersect. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the directions of the lines. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

(iii) Find the equation of the plane which passes through the point 3, −2, −1 and which is parallel
to both l and m. Give your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/O/N/17

774 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
775
PUBLISHED 2017

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
776 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
777
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

1 Commence division and reach a partial quotient x 2 + kx M1

Obtain quotient x 2 − 2 x + 5 A1

Obtain remainder −12 x + 5 A1

Question Answer Marks

2 Plot the four points and draw straight line B1

State or imply that ln y = ln C + x ln a B1

Carry out a completely correct method for finding ln C or ln a M1

Obtain answer C = 3.7 A1

Obtain answer a = 1.5 A1

Question Answer Marks

3(i) Calculate value of a relevant expression or expressions at x = 2 and x = 3 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

3(ii) Use an iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Show that (B) fails to converge A1

Using (A), obtain final answer 2.43 A1

Show sufficient iterations to justify 2.43 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in A1
(2.425, 2.435)

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
778 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

4(i) Use correct tan( A ± B ) formula and express the LHS in terms of tan x M1

Using tan 45° = 1 express LHS as a single fraction A1

Use Pythagoras or correct double angle formula M1

Obtain given answer A1

4(ii) Show correct sketch for one branch B1

Both branches correct and nothing else seen in the interval B1

Show asymptote at x = 45° B1

Question Answer Marks

5(i) dy B1
State or imply y 3 + 3 xy 2 as derivative of xy 3
dx

dy B1
State or imply 4 y 3 as derivative of y 4
dx

dy M1
Equate derivative of the LHS to zero and solve for
dx

Obtain the given answer A1

5(ii) Equate numerator to zero *M1

Obtain y = −2x, or equivalent A1

Obtain an equation in x or y DM1

Obtain final answer x = −1, y = 2 and x = 1, y = −2 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
779
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

6 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of one side B1

Obtain term tan y , or equivalent B1

Obtain term of the form k ln cos x , or equivalent M1

Obtain term −4ln cos x , or equivalent A1

Use x = 0 and y = 14 π in solution containing a tan y and b ln cos x to evaluate a M1

constant, or as limits

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. tan y = 4ln sec x + 1 A1

Substitute y = 13 π in solution containing terms a tan y and b ln cos x , and use correct M1
method to find x

Obtain answer x = 0.587 A1

Question Answer Marks

7(a) Square x + iy and equate real and imaginary parts to 8 and –15 M1

Obtain x 2 − y 2 = 8 and 2 xy = −15 A1

Eliminate one unknown and find a horizontal equation in the other M1

Obtain 4 x 4 − 32 x 2 − 225 = 0 or 4 y 4 + 32 y 2 − 225 = 0 , or three term equivalent A1

1 A1
Obtain answers ± (5 − 3i) or equivalent
2

7(b) Show a circle with centre 2 + i in a relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with radius 2 and centre not at the origin B1

Show line through i at an angle of 14 π to the real axis B1

Shade the correct region B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
780 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

8(i) Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 2, B = 2, C = –1 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

8(ii) 1 B2 FT
Integrate and obtain terms 2 x + 2ln( x + 2) − ln(2 x − 1) (deduct B1 for each error or
2
omission) [The FT is on A, B and C]

Substitute limits correctly in an integral containing terms a ln( x + 2) and b ln(2 x − 1) , *M1
where ab ≠ 0

Use at least one law of logarithms correctly DM1

Obtain the given answer after full and correct working A1

Question Answer Marks

9(i) Use correct product or quotient rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain a 3 term quadratic equation in x M1

Obtain answers x = 2 ± 3 A1

9(ii) *M1
∫
− 12 x − 12 x
Integrate by parts and reach k (1 + x 2 )e + l xe dx

A1
∫
− 12 x − 12 x
Obtain −2(1 + x 2 )e + 4 xe dx , or equivalent

Complete the integration and obtain (−18 − 8 x − 2 x 2 )e

− 12 x
, or equivalent A1

Use limits x = 0 and x = 2 correctly, having fully integrated twice by parts DM1

Obtain the given answer A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
781
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

10(i) Equate at least two pairs of components of general points on l and m and solve for λ M1
or for µ

Obtain correct answer for λ or µ, e.g. λ = 3 or µ = – 2 ; λ = 0 or µ = − 12 ; or A1

λ = 32 or µ = − 72

Verify that not all three pairs of equations are satisfied and that the lines fail to A1
intersect

10(ii) Carry out correct process for evaluating scalar product of direction vectors for l and m *M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of DM1
the moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 45° or 14 π (0.785) radians A1

10(iii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b and c, e.g. B1
− a + b + 4c = 0

Obtain a second equation, e.g. 2a + b − 2c = 0 and solve for one ratio, M1

e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c = 2 : −2 : 1, or equivalent A1

Substitute (3, −2, −1) and values of a, b and c in general equation and find d M1

Obtain answer 2 x − 2 y + z = 9 , or equivalent A1

OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, e.g (M1

(−i + j + 4k ) × (2i + j − 2k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. −6i + 6 j − 3k A1

Substitute (3, −2, −1) in −6 x + 6 y − 3 z = d , or equivalent, and find d M1

Obtain answer −2 x + 2 y − z = −9 , or equivalent A1)

OR2: Using the relevant point and relevant vectors, form a 2-parameter equation (M1
for the plane

State a correct equation, e.g. r = 3i − 2 j − k + λ (−i + j + 4k ) + µ (2i + j − 2k ) A1

State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
782 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

Obtain answer 2 x − 2 y + z = 9 , or equivalent A1)

OR3: Using the relevant point and relevant vectors, form a determinant equation (M1
for the plane

x−3 y + 2 z +1 A1
State a correct equation, e.g. −1 1 4 =0
2 1 −2

Attempt to expand the determinant M1

Obtain two correct cofactors A1

Obtain answer −2 x + 2 y − z = −9 , or equivalent A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1
y

x
−1.2 O 1.2

The diagram shows a sketch of the curve y = for values of x from −1.2 to 1.2.
3
9 − x3

(i) Use the trapezium rule, with two intervals, to estimate the value of
1.2
Ô
3
9 − x3
dx,
−1.2

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Explain, with reference to the diagram, why the trapezium rule may be expected to give a good
approximation to the true value of the integral in this case. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

2 Showing all necessary working, solve the equation 2 log2 x = 3 + log2 x + 1, giving your answer
correct to 3 significant figures. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

3 By expressing the equation tan 1 + 60Å + tan 1 − 60Å = cot 1 in terms of tan 1 only, solve the equation
for 0Å < 1 < 90Å. [5]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

2 − sin x
4 The curve with equation y = has one stationary point in the interval − 12 0 < x < 12 0.
cos x

(i) Find the exact coordinates of this point. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

(ii) Determine whether this point is a maximum or a minimum point. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

5 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

x + 1 = y x + 2,
dy
dx
and it is given that y = 2 when x = 1. Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for y in
terms of x. [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

6 The equation of a curve is x3 y − 3xy3 = 2a4 , where a is a non-zero constant.

dy 3x2 y − 3y3
=
9xy2 − x3
(i) Show that . [4]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

(ii) Hence show that there are only two points on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the
x-axis and find the coordinates of these points. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

7 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number 1 − ï3i is denoted by u.

(i) Find the modulus and argument of u. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Show that u3 + 8 = 0. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

(iii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying both the inequalities z − u ≤ 2 and Re z ≥ 2, where Re z denotes the real part of z.
[4]

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

8x2 + 9x + 8
Let f x =
1 − x 2x + 32
8 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

It is given that Ó x 2 ln x dx = 2, where a > 1.

a 1
9
1

7 + 2a 2
3

(i) Show that a =

3
2 . [5]
3 ln a

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

(ii) Show by calculation that a lies between 2 and 4. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use the iterative formula

` a23
7 + 2an
3

an+1 =
2

3 ln an

to determine a correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places.
[3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17 [Turn over

10 Two planes p and q have equations x + y + 3z = 8 and 2x − 2y + z = 3 respectively.

(i) Calculate the acute angle between the planes p and q. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) The point A on the line of intersection of p and q has y-coordinate equal to 2. Find the equation
of the plane which contains the point A and is perpendicular to both the planes p and q. Give
your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/O/N/17

802 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
803
PUBLISHED 2017

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for
numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted
obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy
marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously ‘correct’ answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
804 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed
working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where
some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain unaltered.
In this case all A and B marks then become ‘follow through’ marks. MR is not applied when
the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2
penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
805
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

1(i) State or imply ordinates 0.915929…, 1, 1.112485… B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 1.2 and three ordinates M1

Obtain answer 2.42 only A1

1(ii) Justify the given statement B1

Question Answer Marks

2 Use law for the logarithm of a power or a quotient on the given equation M1

Use log 2 8 = 3 or 23 = 8 M1

Obtain x 2 − 8 x − 8 = 0 , or horizontal equivalent A1

Solve a 3-term quadratic equation M1

Obtain final answer x = 8.90 only A1

Question Answer Marks

3 Use correct tan( A ± B ) formula and express LHS in terms of tan θ M1

Using tan 60° = 3 and cot θ = 1 / tan θ , obtain a correct equation in tan θ in any A1
form

Reduce the equation to one in tan 2 θ only M1

Obtain 11tan 2 θ = 1 , or equivalent A1

Obtain answer 16.8° A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
806 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

4(i) Use correct product or quotient rule or rewrite as 2sec x − tan x and differentiate M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate the derivative to zero and solve for x M1

Obtain x = 16 π A1

Obtain y = 3 A1

4(ii) Carry out an appropriate method for determining the nature of a stationary point M1

Show the point is a minimum point with no errors seen A1

Question Answer Marks

5 1 x+2 B1
Separate variables and obtain ∫ y dy = ∫ x + 1 dx
Obtain term ln y B1

Use an appropriate method to integrate ( x + 2) / ( x + 1) *M1

Obtain integral x + ln( x + 1) , or equivalent, e.g. ln( x + 1) + x + 1 A1

Use x = 1 and y = 2 to evaluate a constant, or as limits DM1

Obtain correct solution in x and y in any form e.g. ln y = x + ln( x + 1) − 1 A1

Obtain answer y = ( x + 1)e x −1 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
807
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

6(i) dy B1
State or imply 3 x 2 y + x3 as derivative of x3 y
dx

dy B1
State or imply 9 xy 2 + 3 y 3 as derivative of 3xy 3
dx

dy M1
Equate derivative of the LHS to zero and solve for
dx

Obtain the given answer AG A1

6(ii) Equate numerator to zero and use x = – y to obtain an equation in x or in y M1

Obtain answer x = a and y = – a A1

Obtain answer x = – a and y = a A1

Consider and reject y = 0 and x = y as possibilities B1

Question Answer Marks

7(i) State modulus 2 B1

State argument − 13 π or −60° ( 53 π or 300°) B1

7(ii) EITHER: Expand (1 − ( 3)i)3 completely and process i2 and i3 (M1

Verify that the given relation is satisfied A1)

OR: u 3 = 23 ( cos ( −π ) + i sin ( −π ) ) or equivalent: follow their answers to (i) (M1

Verify that the given relation is satisfied A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
808 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

7(iii) Show a circle with centre 1 − ( 3)i in a relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with radius 2 passing through the origin B1

Show the line Re z = 2 B1

Shade the correct region B1

Question Answer Marks

8(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + +
1 − x 2 x + 3 (2 x + 3) 2

Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 1, B = −2, C = 5 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

A Dx + E
[Mark the form + , where A = 1, D = – 4, E = – 1, B1M1A1A1A1 as
1 − x (2 x + 3) 2
above.]

8(ii) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of (1 − x) −1 , M1
−1 −1 −2 −2
(1 + x) , (2 x + 3) , (1 + x) or (2 x + 3)
2
3
2
3

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each partial fraction A3 FT

Obtain final answer 8

+ 19 x + 139 x 2 , or equivalent A1
9 27

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
809
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

9(i) 1 *M1
∫
3 3
Integrate by parts and reach ax 2 ln x + b x 2 . dx
x

A1
∫
3 1
Obtain 2
3
x 2 ln x − 23 x 2 dx

Obtain integral 2
3 3
x 2 ln x − 94 x 2 , or equivalent A1
3

Substitute limits correctly and equate to 2 DM1

Obtain the given answer correctly AG A1

9(ii) Evaluate a relevant expression or pair of expressions at x = 2 and x = 4 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

9(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.031 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 3.031 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (3.0305, 3.0315)

Question Answer Marks

10(i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. i + j + 3k or 2i − 2 j + k B1

Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of two normal vectors M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product of the two M1
normals by the product of their moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain final answer 72.5° or 1.26 radians A1

10(ii) EITHER: Substitute y = 2 in both plane equations and solve for x or for z (M1

Obtain x = 3 and z = 1 A1)

OR: Find the equation of the line of intersection of the planes

Substitute y = 2 in line equation and solve for x or for z (M1

Obtain x = 3 and z = 1 A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
810 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b and c, e.g. a + b + 3c = 0 (B1

Form a second relevant equation, e.g. 2a − 2b + c = 0 , and solve for one *M1
ratio, e.g. a : b

Obtain final answer a : b : c = 7 : 5 : – 4 A1

Use coordinates of A and values of a, b and c in general equation and find DM1
jjjjjjjjjjjjjjjd

Obtain answer 7 x + 5 y − 4 z = 27 , or equivalent A1 FT)

OR1: Calculate the vector product of relevant vectors, e.g. (*M1

(i + j + 3k ) × (2i − 2 j + k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 7i + 5 j − 4k A1

Substitute coordinates of A in plane equation with their normal and find d DM1

Obtain answer 7 x + 5 y − 4 z = 27 , or equivalent A1 FT)

OR2: Using relevant vectors, form a two-parameter equation for the plane (*M1

State a correct equation, e.g. r = 3i + 2 j + k + λ (i + j + 3k ) + µ (2i − 2 j + k ) A1 FT

State 3 correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1 FT

Eliminate λ and µ DM1

Obtain answer 7 x + 5 y − 4 z = 27 , or equivalent A1 FT)

OR3: Use the direction vector of the line of intersection of the two planes as (*M1
normal vector to the plane

Two correct components A1

Three correct components A1

Substitute coordinates of A in plane equation with their normal and find d DM1

Obtain answer 7 x + 5 y − 4 z = 27 , or equivalent A1 FT)

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Find the quotient and remainder when x4 is divided by x2 + 2x − 1. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

x 0.9 1.6 2.4 3.2

ln y 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.6

By plotting ln y against x for these four pairs of values and drawing a suitable straight line, estimate
the values of C and a. Give your answers correct to 2 significant figures. [5]

ln y

x
0 1 2 3 4

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

3 The equation x3 = 3x + 7 has one real root, denoted by !.

(i) Show by calculation that ! lies between 2 and 3. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

Two iterative formulae, A and B, derived from this equation are as follows:

xn+1 = 3xn + 7 3 ,
1
(A)
xn3 − 7
xn+1 = . (B)
3
Each formula is used with initial value x1 = 2.5.

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

4 (i) Prove the identity tan 45Å + x + tan 45Å − x 2 sec 2x. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

(ii) Hence sketch the graph of y = tan 45Å + x + tan 45Å − x for 0Å ≤ x ≤ 90Å. [3]

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

5 The equation of a curve is 2x4 + xy3 + y4 = 10.

dy 8x3 + y3
(i) Show that =− . [4]
dx 3xy2 + 4y3

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

(ii) Hence show that there are two points on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis
and find the coordinates of these points. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

6 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy
= 4 cos2 y tan x,
dx
for 0 ≤ x < 12 0, and x = 0 when y = 14 0. Solve this differential equation and find the value of x when
y = 13 0. [8]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

7 (a) The complex number u is given by u = 8 − 15i. Showing all necessary working, find the two
square roots of u. Give answers in the form a + ib, where the numbers a and b are real and exact.
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

(b) On an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers satisfying
both the inequalities z − 2 − i ≤ 2 and 0 ≤ arg z − i ≤ 14 0. [4]

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

4x2 + 9x − 8
8 Let f x = .
x + 2 2x − 1

B C
(i) Express f x in the form A + + . [4]
x + 2 2x − 1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

15
4
(ii) Hence show that Ó f x dx = 6 + 12 ln 16
7
. [5]
1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

9
y

R
x
O 2

− 12 x
The diagram shows the curve y = 1 + x2 e for x ≥ 0. The shaded region R is enclosed by the curve,
the x-axis and the lines x = 0 and x = 2.

(i) Find the exact values of the x-coordinates of the stationary points of the curve. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

42
(ii) Show that the exact value of the area of R is 18 − . [5]
e

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17 [Turn over

10 The equations of two lines l and m are r = 3i − j − 2k + , −i + j + 4k and r = 4i + 4j − 3k + - 2i + j − 2k

respectively.

(i) Show that the lines do not intersect. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the directions of the lines. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

(iii) Find the equation of the plane which passes through the point 3, −2, −1 and which is parallel
to both l and m. Give your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/O/N/17

830 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
831
PUBLISHED 2017

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
832 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
833
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

1 Commence division and reach a partial quotient x 2 + kx M1

Obtain quotient x 2 − 2 x + 5 A1

Obtain remainder −12 x + 5 A1

Question Answer Marks

2 Plot the four points and draw straight line B1

State or imply that ln y = ln C + x ln a B1

Carry out a completely correct method for finding ln C or ln a M1

Obtain answer C = 3.7 A1

Obtain answer a = 1.5 A1

Question Answer Marks

3(i) Calculate value of a relevant expression or expressions at x = 2 and x = 3 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

3(ii) Use an iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Show that (B) fails to converge A1

Using (A), obtain final answer 2.43 A1

Show sufficient iterations to justify 2.43 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in A1
(2.425, 2.435)

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
834 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

4(i) Use correct tan( A ± B ) formula and express the LHS in terms of tan x M1

Using tan 45° = 1 express LHS as a single fraction A1

Use Pythagoras or correct double angle formula M1

Obtain given answer A1

4(ii) Show correct sketch for one branch B1

Both branches correct and nothing else seen in the interval B1

Show asymptote at x = 45° B1

Question Answer Marks

5(i) dy B1
State or imply y 3 + 3 xy 2 as derivative of xy 3
dx

dy B1
State or imply 4 y 3 as derivative of y 4
dx

dy M1
Equate derivative of the LHS to zero and solve for
dx

Obtain the given answer A1

5(ii) Equate numerator to zero *M1

Obtain y = −2x, or equivalent A1

Obtain an equation in x or y DM1

Obtain final answer x = −1, y = 2 and x = 1, y = −2 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
835
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

6 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of one side B1

Obtain term tan y , or equivalent B1

Obtain term of the form k ln cos x , or equivalent M1

Obtain term −4ln cos x , or equivalent A1

Use x = 0 and y = 14 π in solution containing a tan y and b ln cos x to evaluate a M1

constant, or as limits

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. tan y = 4ln sec x + 1 A1

Substitute y = 13 π in solution containing terms a tan y and b ln cos x , and use correct M1
method to find x

Obtain answer x = 0.587 A1

Question Answer Marks

7(a) Square x + iy and equate real and imaginary parts to 8 and –15 M1

Obtain x 2 − y 2 = 8 and 2 xy = −15 A1

Eliminate one unknown and find a horizontal equation in the other M1

Obtain 4 x 4 − 32 x 2 − 225 = 0 or 4 y 4 + 32 y 2 − 225 = 0 , or three term equivalent A1

1 A1
Obtain answers ± (5 − 3i) or equivalent
2

7(b) Show a circle with centre 2 + i in a relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with radius 2 and centre not at the origin B1

Show line through i at an angle of 14 π to the real axis B1

Shade the correct region B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
836 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

8(i) Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 2, B = 2, C = –1 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

8(ii) 1 B2 FT
Integrate and obtain terms 2 x + 2ln( x + 2) − ln(2 x − 1) (deduct B1 for each error or
2
omission) [The FT is on A, B and C]

Substitute limits correctly in an integral containing terms a ln( x + 2) and b ln(2 x − 1) , *M1
where ab ≠ 0

Use at least one law of logarithms correctly DM1

Obtain the given answer after full and correct working A1

Question Answer Marks

9(i) Use correct product or quotient rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and obtain a 3 term quadratic equation in x M1

Obtain answers x = 2 ± 3 A1

9(ii) *M1
∫
− 12 x − 12 x
Integrate by parts and reach k (1 + x 2 )e + l xe dx

A1
∫
− 12 x − 12 x
Obtain −2(1 + x 2 )e + 4 xe dx , or equivalent

Complete the integration and obtain (−18 − 8 x − 2 x 2 )e

− 12 x
, or equivalent A1

Use limits x = 0 and x = 2 correctly, having fully integrated twice by parts DM1

Obtain the given answer A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
837
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

10(i) Equate at least two pairs of components of general points on l and m and solve for λ M1
or for µ

Obtain correct answer for λ or µ, e.g. λ = 3 or µ = – 2 ; λ = 0 or µ = − 12 ; or A1

λ = 32 or µ = − 72

Verify that not all three pairs of equations are satisfied and that the lines fail to A1
intersect

10(ii) Carry out correct process for evaluating scalar product of direction vectors for l and m *M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of DM1
the moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result

Obtain answer 45° or 14 π (0.785) radians A1

10(iii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b and c, e.g. B1
− a + b + 4c = 0

Obtain a second equation, e.g. 2a + b − 2c = 0 and solve for one ratio, M1

e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c = 2 : −2 : 1, or equivalent A1

Substitute (3, −2, −1) and values of a, b and c in general equation and find d M1

Obtain answer 2 x − 2 y + z = 9 , or equivalent A1

OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, e.g (M1

(−i + j + 4k ) × (2i + j − 2k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. −6i + 6 j − 3k A1

Substitute (3, −2, −1) in −6 x + 6 y − 3 z = d , or equivalent, and find d M1

Obtain answer −2 x + 2 y − z = −9 , or equivalent A1)

OR2: Using the relevant point and relevant vectors, form a 2-parameter equation (M1
for the plane

State a correct equation, e.g. r = 3i − 2 j − k + λ (−i + j + 4k ) + µ (2i + j − 2k ) A1

State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
838 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter October/November
0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks

Obtain answer 2 x − 2 y + z = 9 , or equivalent A1)

OR3: Using the relevant point and relevant vectors, form a determinant equation (M1
for the plane

x−3 y + 2 z +1 A1
State a correct equation, e.g. −1 1 4 =0
2 1 −2

Attempt to expand the determinant M1

Obtain two correct cofactors A1

Obtain answer −2 x + 2 y − z = −9 , or equivalent A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality 2x + 1 < 3 x − 2. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

1
2 Expand 3 in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
1 + 6x
coefficients. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

3 It is given that x = ln 1 − y − ln y, where 0 < y < 1.

e−x
(i) Show that y = . [2]
1 + e −x

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

5
1 A @
2e
(ii) Hence show that Ó y dx = ln . [4]
0 e+1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = ln cos 1, y = 31 − tan 1,
where 0 ≤ 1 < 12 0.

dy
(i) Express in terms of tan 1. [5]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

(ii) Find the exact y-coordinate of the point on the curve at which the gradient of the normal is equal
to 1. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

5
P

x rad
A B
O

The diagram shows a semicircle with centre O, radius r and diameter AB. The point P on its
circumference is such that the area of the minor segment on AP is equal to half the area of the minor
segment on BP. The angle AOP is x radians.

(i) Show that x satisfies the equation x = 13 0 + sin x. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

(ii) Verify by calculation that x lies between 1 and 1.5. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to determine x correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

6 The plane with equation 2x + 2y − z = 5 is denoted by m. Relative to the origin O, the points A and B
have coordinates 3, 4, 0 and −1, 0, 2 respectively.

(i) Show that the plane m bisects AB at right angles. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

A second plane p is parallel to m and nearer to O. The perpendicular distance between the planes is 1.

(ii) Find the equation of p, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

7 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex numbers u and w are defined by u = −1 + 7i and w = 3 + 4i.

(i) Showing all your working, find in the form x + iy, where x and y are real, the complex numbers
u
u − 2w and . [4]
w

........................................................................................................................................................

In an Argand diagram with origin O, the points A, B and C represent the complex numbers u, w and
u − 2w respectively.

(ii) Prove that angle AOB = 14 0. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) State fully the geometrical relation between the line segments OB and CA. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

8 (i) By first expanding 2 sin x − 30Å, express 2 sin x − 30Å − cos x in the form R sin x − !, where
R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. Give the exact value of R and the value of ! correct to 2 decimal places.
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

(ii) Hence solve the equation

2 sin x − 30Å − cos x = 1,
for 0Å < x < 180Å. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

1
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [2]
x 2x + 3

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy
x 2x + 3 = y,
dx
and it is given that y = 1 when x = 1. Solve the differential equation and calculate the value of y
when x = 9, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17 [Turn over

10
y

x
O 1
40

The diagram shows the curve y = sin x cos2 2x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 14 0 and its maximum point M .

(i) Using the substitution u = cos x, find by integration the exact area of the shaded region bounded
by the curve and the x-axis. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

(ii) Find the x-coordinate of M . Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/31/M/J/17

858 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
859
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
860 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
861
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 EITHER:
State or imply non-modular inequality (2 x + 1) < (3( x − 2)) , or corresponding
2 2 (B1
quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations (2 x + 1) = ±3( x − 2)

Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic e.g. 5 x 2 − 40 x + 35 = 0 or M1

solve two linear equations for x

Obtain critical values x = 1 and x = 7 A1

State final answer x < 1 and x > 7 A1)

OR:
Obtain critical value x = 7 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by solving (B1
a linear equation or inequality

Obtain critical value x = 1 similarly B2

State final answer x < 1 and x > 7 B1)

Total: 4

2 EITHER:
State a correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 or x3 term in the expansion of (M1
− 13
(1 + 6 x )

State correct first two terms 1 − 2x A1

Obtain term 8x 2 A1

A1)
x3  37 x 3  in final answer
1
Obtain term − 112
3
 3 

OR:
−4
Differentiate expression and evaluate f (0) and f ′(0) , where f ′( x) = k (1 + 6 x ) 3 (M1

Obtain correct first two terms 1 − 2 x A1

Obtain term 8x 2 A1

Obtain term − 112 x3 in final answer A1)

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
862 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

3(i) 1− y B1
Remove logarithms correctly and obtain e x =
y

e
−x B1
Obtain the given answer y = −x
following full working
1+ e

Total: 2

3(ii) State integral k ln(1 + e− x ) where k = ± 1 *M1

State correct integral − ln(1 + e− x ) A1

Use limits correctly DM1

A1
Obtain the given answer ln 
2e 
 following full working
 e +1

Total: 4

4(i)  dx sin θ  M1
Use chain rule to differentiate x  =− 
 d θ cos θ 

dy B1
State = 3 − sec θ
2

dθ

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dθ dθ

dy 3 − sec θ
2 A1
Obtain correct in any form e.g.
dx − tan θ

dy tan θ − 2
2 A1
Obtain = , or equivalent
dx tan θ

Total: 5

4(ii) Equate gradient to −1 and obtain an equation in tan θ M1

Solve a 3 term quadratic ( tan 2 θ + tan θ − 2 = 0 ) in tan θ M1

π 3π A1
Obtain θ = and y = −1 only
4 4

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
863
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

5(i) Use correct sector formula at least once and form an equation in r and x M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1

Rearrange in the given form A1

Total: 3

5(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or expressions at x = 1 and x = 1.5 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

Total: 2

5(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.374 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 1.374 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (1.3745, 1.3755)

Total: 3

6(i) State or obtain coordinates (1, 2, 1) for the mid-point of AB B1

Verify that the midpoint lies on m B1

State or imply a correct normal vector to the plane, e.g. 2i + 2 j − k B1

State or imply a direction vector for the segment AB, e.g. −4i − 4 j + 2k B1

Confirm that m is perpendicular to AB B1

Total: 5

6(ii) State or imply that the perpendicular distance of m from the origin is 53 , or B1
unsimplified equivalent

State or imply that n has an equation of the form 2 x + 2 y − z = k B1

Obtain answer 2 x + 2 y − z = 2 B1

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
864 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

7(i) State that u – 2w = – 7 – i B1

EITHER:
u (M1
Multiply numerator and denominator of by 3 – 4i, or equivalent
w

Simplify the numerator to 25 + 25i or denominator to 25 A1

Obtain final answer 1 + i A1)

OR:
Obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y (M1

Obtain x = 1 or y = 1 A1

Obtain final answer 1 + i A1)

Total: 4

7(ii) u M1
Find the argument of
w

Obtain the given answer A1

Total: 2

7(iii) State that OB and CA are parallel B1

State that CA = 2OB, or equivalent B1

Total: 2

8(i) Use sin( A − B ) formula and obtain an expression in terms of sin x and cos x M1

Collect terms and reach 3 sin x − 2cos x , or equivalent A1

Obtain R = 7 A1

Use trig formula to find α M1

Obtain α = 49.11° with no errors seen A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
865
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

8(ii) Evaluate sin −1 (1/ 7) to at least 1 d.p. (22.21° to 2 d.p.) B1 FT

Use a correct method to find a value of x in the interval 0° < x < 180° M1

Obtain answer 71.3° A1

[ignore answers outside given range.]

Total: 3

9(i) 1 A B M1
Carry out a relevant method to obtain A and B such that ≡ + , or
x(2 x + 3) x 2 x + 3
equivalent

Obtain A = 13 and B = − 23 , or equivalent A1

Total: 2

9(ii) Separate variables and integrate one side B1

Obtain term ln y B1

Integrate and obtain terms 13 ln x − 13 ln(2 x + 3) , or equivalent B2 FT

Use x = 1 and y = 1 to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in a solution containing M1

a ln y, b ln x, c ln(2 x + 3)

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln y = 13 ln x − 13 ln(2 x + 3) + 13 ln 5 A1

Obtain answer y = 1.29 (3s.f. only) A1

Total: 7

10(i) State or imply du = − sin x dx B1

Using correct double angle formula, express the integral in terms of u and du M1

Obtain integrand ±(2u 2 − 1) 2 A1

1 A1
∫
Change limits and obtain correct integral (2u 2 − 1) 2 du with no errors seen
1
2

Substitute limits in an integral of the form au 5 + bu 3 + cu M1

Obtain answer 1
(7 − 4 2) , or exact simplified equivalent A1
15

Total: 6

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31
866 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

10(ii) Use product rule and chain rule at least once M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and use trig formulae to obtain an equation in M1

cos x and sin x

Use correct methods to obtain an equation in cos x or sin x only M1

Obtain 10cos2 x = 9 or 10sin 2 x = 1 , or equivalent A1

Obtain answer 0.32 A1

Total: 6

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the equation ln x2 + 1 = 1 + 2 ln x, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

2 Solve the inequality x − 3 < 3x − 4. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

3 (i) Express the equation cot 1 − 2 tan 1 = sin 21 in the form a cos4 1 + b cos2 1 + c = 0, where a, b
and c are constants to be determined. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

(ii) Hence solve the equation cot 1 − 2 tan 1 = sin 21 for 90Å < 1 < 180Å. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = t2 + 1, y = 4t + ln 2t − 1.

dy
(i) Express in terms of t. [3]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

(ii) Find the equation of the normal to the curve at the point where t = 1. Give your answer in the
form ax + by + c = 0. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

5 In a certain chemical process a substance A reacts with and reduces a substance B. The masses of A
= −0.2xy and
dy
and B at time t after the start of the process are x and y respectively. It is given that
dt
x= . At the beginning of the process y = 100.
10
1 + t2

(i) Form a differential equation in y and t, and solve this differential equation. [6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Find the exact value approached by the mass of B as t becomes large. State what happens to the
mass of A as t becomes large. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

6 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number 2 − i is denoted by u.

(i) It is given that u is a root of the equation x3 + ax2 − 3x + b = 0, where the constants a and b are
real. Find the values of a and b. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

(ii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers z
satisfying both the inequalities z − u < 1 and z < z + i. [4]

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

(i) Prove that if y = = sec 1 tan 1.

1 dy
cos 1 d1
7 then [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

1 + sin 1
2 sec2 1 + 2 sec 1 tan 1 − 1.
1 − sin 1
(ii) Prove the identity [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

........................................................................................................................................................

10
1 + sin 1
(iii) Hence find the exact value of Ô d1.
4

1 − sin 1
[4]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

5x2 − 7x + 4
Let f x =
3x + 2 x2 + 5
8 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

16
−−→
9 Relative to the origin O, the point A has position vector given by OA = i + 2j + 4k. The line l has
equation r = 9i − j + 8k + - 3i − j + 2k.

(i) Find the position vector of the foot of the perpendicular from A to l. Hence find the position
vector of the reflection of A in l. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

(ii) Find the equation of the plane through the origin which contains l. Give your answer in the form
ax + by + cz = d. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Find the exact value of the perpendicular distance of A from this plane. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17 [Turn over

10
y

x
O p 1
40

The diagram shows the curve y = x2 cos 2x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 14 0. The curve has a maximum point at M
where x = p.
@ A
(i) Show that p satisfies the equation p = 12 tan−1
1
. [3]
p

........................................................................................................................................................

@ A
(ii) Use the iterative formula pn+1 = 12 tan−1
1
to determine the value of p correct to 2 decimal
pn
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

(iii) Find, showing all necessary working, the exact area of the region bounded by the curve and the
x-axis. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/M/J/17

886 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
887
PUBLISHED

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
888 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
889
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 Use law of the logarithm of a power or a quotient M1

A1
Remove logarithms and obtain a correct equation in x. e.g. x 2 + 1 = ex 2

Obtain answer 0.763 and no other A1

Total: 3

2 EITHER: (B1
State or imply non-modular inequality ( x − 3) 2 < (3x − 4)2 , or corresponding equation

Make reasonable attempt at solving a three term quadratic M1

Obtain critical value x = 7 A1

State final answer x > 7 only A1)

OR1: (B1
State the relevant critical inequality 3 − x < 3 x − 4 , or corresponding equation

Solve for x M1

Obtain critical value x = 7 A1

State final answer x > 7 only A1)

OR2: (B1
Make recognizable sketches of y = x − 3 and y = 3 x − 4 on a single diagram

Find x-coordinate of the intersection M1

Obtain x = 7 A1
4

State final answer x > 7 only A1)

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
890 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

3(i) Use correct formulae to express the equation in terms of cos θ and sin θ M1

Use Pythagoras and express the equation in terms of cos θ only M1

A1
Obtain correct 3-term equation, e.g. 2cos4 θ + cos2 θ − 2 = 0

Total: 3

3(ii) M1
Solve a 3-term quadratic in cos2 θ for cos θ

Obtain answer θ = 152.1°only A1

Total: 2

4(i) dy 2 B1
State = 4+
dt 2t − 1

dy dy dx M1
Use = ÷
dx dt dt

dy 8t − 2 2 2 A1
Obtain answer = , or equivalent e.g. +
dx 2t (2t − 1) t 4t 2 − 2t

Total: 3

4(ii) Use correct method to find the gradient of the normal at t = 1 M1

Use a correct method to form an equation for the normal at t = 1 M1

Obtain final answer x + 3 y − 14 = 0 , or horizontal equivalent A1

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
891
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

5(i) dy 2y B1
State =− , or equivalent
dt (1 + t ) 2

Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of one side M1

Obtain term ln y , or equivalent A1

2 A1
Obtain term , or equivalent
(1 + t )

Use y = 100 and t = 0 to evaluate a constant, or as limits in an expression containing terms of M1

b
the form a ln y and
1+ t

2 A1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln y = − 2 + ln100
1+ t

Total: 6

5(ii) 100 B1
State that the mass of B approaches , or exact equivalent
e2

State or imply that the mass of A tends to zero B1

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
892 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

6(i) EITHER: (M1

2 3
Substitute x = 2 – i (or x = 2 + i ) in the equation and attempt expansions of x and x

Equate real and/or imaginary parts to zero M1

Obtain a = – 2 A1

Obtain b = 10 A1)

OR1: (M1
2 3
Substitute x = 2 – i in the equation and attempt expansions of x and x

Substitute x = 2 + i in the equation and add/subtract the two equations M1

Obtain a = – 2 A1

Obtain b = 10 A1)

OR2: (M1

( )
Factorise to obtain ( x − 2 + i )( x − 2 − i )( x − p )  = x 2 − 4 x + 5 ( x − p ) 
 

Compare coefficients M1

Obtain a = – 2 A1

Obtain b = 10 A1)

OR3: (M1
Obtain the quadratic factor ( x 2 − 4 x + 5 )

Use algebraic division to obtain a real linear factor of the form x − p and set the remainder M1
equal to zero

Obtain a = – 2 A1

Obtain b = 10 A1)

OR4: (M1
Use αβ = 5 and α + β = 4 in αβ + βγ + γα = −3

Solve for γ and use in αβγ = −b and/or α + β + γ = −a M1

Obtain a = – 2 A1

Obtain b = 10 A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
893
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

OR5: (M1
Factorise as (x–- (2-i))(x2 + ex + g) and compare coefficients to form an equation in a and b

Equate real and/or imaginary parts to zero M1

Obtain a = – 2 A1

Obtain b = 10 A1)

Total: 4

6(ii) Show a circle with centre 2 − i in a relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with radius 1 and centre not at the origin B1

Show the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining 0 to – i B1

Shade the correct region B1

Total: 4

7(i) Use quotient or chain rule M1

Obtain given answer correctly A1

Total: 2

7(ii) EITHER: (M1

Multiply numerator and denominator of LHS by 1 + sin θ

Use Pythagoras and express LHS in terms of sec θ and tanθ M1

Complete the proof A1)

OR1: (M1
Express RHS in terms of cos θ and sin θ

Use Pythagoras and express RHS in terms of sin θ M1

Complete the proof A1)

OR2: (M1
Express LHS in terms of secθ and tanθ

Multiply numerator and denominator by secθ + tanθ and use Pythagoras M1

Complete the proof A1)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
894 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

7(iii) Use the identity and obtain integral 2 tan θ + 2secθ − θ B2

Use correct limits correctly in an integral containing terms a tanθ and b secθ M1

Obtain answer 2 2 − 1 π A1
4

Total: 4

8(i) A Bx + C B1
State or imply the form + 2
3x + 2 x + 5

Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 2, B = 1, C = −3 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

Total: 5

Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of (3x + 2) −1 , (1 + 3 x)−1 ,
8(ii) M1
2
2 −1 1
(5 + x ) or (1 + x ) 2 − 1
5
 −1
[Symbolic coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient]
2

2 A1FT +
Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x of each partial fraction.
A1FT
The FT is on A, B, C. from part (i)

M1
Multiply out up to the term in x 2 by Bx +C, where BC ≠ 0

A1
Obtain final answer 2 − 13 x + 237 x 2 , or equivalent
5 10 100

Total: 5

9(i) EITHER:
uuur
Find AP for a general point P on l with parameter λ , e.g.(8 + 3λ, – 3 − λ, 4 + 2λ) (B1
uuur
Equate scalar product of AP and direction vector of l to zero and solve for λ M1

Obtain λ = − 5 and foot of perpendicular 3 i + 3 j + 3k A1

2 2 2

Carry out a complete method for finding the position vector of the reflection of A in l M1

Obtain answer 2i + j + 2k A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
895
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

OR: uuur (B1

Find AP for a general point P on l with parameter λ , e.g.(8 + 3λ, – 3 − λ, 4 + 2λ)
2
M1
Differentiate AP and solve for λ at minimum

Obtain λ = − 5 and foot of perpendicular 3 i + 3 j + 3k A1

2 2 2

Carry out a complete method for finding the position vector of the reflection of A in l M1

Obtain answer 2i + j + 2k A1)

Total: 5

9(ii) EITHER: (B1

Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b and c, e.g. 3a − b + 2 c = 0

Form a second relevant equation, e.g. 9a – b + 8c = 0 and solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1

Obtain final answer a : b : c = 1 : 1 : – 1 and state plane equation x + y – z = 0 A1)

OR1: (M1
Attempt to calculate vector product of two relevant vectors, e.g. (3i − j + 2k ) × (9i − j + 8k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. −6i − 6 j + 6k , and state plane equation − x − y + z = 0 A1)

OR2: (M1
Using a relevant point and relevant vectors, attempt to form a 2-parameter equation for the
plane, e.g. r = 6i + 6k + s (3i − j + 2k ) + t (9i − j + 8k )

State 3 correct equations in x, y, z, s and t A1

Eliminate s and t and state plane equation x + y − z = 0 , or equivalent A1)

OR3: (M1
Using a relevant point and relevant vectors, attempt to form a determinant equation for the
x − 3 y −1 z − 4
plane, e.g. 3 −1 2 =0
9 −1 8

Expand a correct determinant and obtain two correct cofactors A1

Obtain answer −6 x − 6 y + 6 z = 0 , or equivalent A1)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/32
896 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

9(iii) EITHER: (M1

uuur
Using the correct processes, divide the scalar product of OA and a normal to the plane by the
modulus of the normal or make a recognisable attempt to apply the perpendicular formula

1+ 2 − 4 A1 FT
Obtain a correct expression in any form, e.g. , or equivalent
(1 + 12 + (−1)2 )
2

Obtain answer 1 3 , or exact equivalent A1)

OR1: (B1 FT
Obtain equation of the parallel plane through A, e.g. x + y – z = – 1
[The f.t. is on the plane found in part (ii).]

Use correct method to find its distance from the origin M1

Obtain answer 1 3 , or exact equivalent A1)

OR2: (B1 FT
Form equation for the intersection of the perpendicular through A and the plane
[FT on their n]

Solve for λ M1

1 A1)
λn =
3

Total: 3

10(i) Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form ( y′ = 2x cos 2x − 2x2 sin 2x ) A1

Equate to zero and derive the given equation A1

Total: 3

10(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once e.g. M1

0.5 → 0.55357 → 0.53261 → 0.54070 → 0.53755

Obtain final answer 0.54 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 0.54 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in A1
the interval (0.535, 0.545)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/32
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
897
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

10(iii) *M1
Integrate by parts and reach ax 2 sin 2 x + b ∫ x sin 2 x dx

A1
Obtain 1 x 2 sin 2 x − ∫ 2 x. 1 sin 2 x dx
2 2

A1
Complete integration and obtain 1 x 2 sin 2 x + 1 x cos 2 x − 1 sin 2 x , or equivalent
2 2 4

Substitute limits x = 0, x = 1 π , having integrated twice DM1

A1
Obtain answer 1 (π 2 − 8) , or exact equivalent
32

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

2
cot x − tan x
cos 2x.
cot x + tan x
1 Prove the identity [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

2 Expand 3 + 2x−3 in ascending powers of x up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

3 Using the substitution u = ex , solve the equation 4e−x = 3ex + 4. Give your answer correct to 3 significant
figures. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

5
10

Find the exact value of Ó 1 sin 21 1 d1.

2
4 [4]
0

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

5 A curve has equation y = 23 ln 1 + 3 cos2 x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0.

dy
(i) Express in terms of tan x. [4]
dx

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

(ii) Hence find the x-coordinate of the point on the curve where the gradient is −1. Give your answer
correct to 3 significant figures. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

6 The equation cot x = 1 − x has one root in the interval 0 < x < 0, denoted by !.

(i) Show by calculation that ! is greater than 2.5. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Show that, if a @sequenceA of values in the interval 0 < x < 0 given by the iterative formula
xn+1 = 0 + tan−1 converges, then it converges to !.
1
1 − xn
[2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) Use this iterative formula to determine ! correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

7
y

x
O

The diagram shows a sketch of the curve y = for x > 0, and its minimum point M .
e2
x
(i) Find the x-coordinate of M . [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

(ii) Use the trapezium rule with two intervals to estimate the value of
3 1x
Ô
2e
dx,
x
1

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(iii) The estimate found in part (ii) is denoted by E. Explain, without further calculation, whether
another estimate found using the trapezium rule with four intervals would be greater than E or
less than E. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

8 In a certain chemical reaction, a compound A is formed from a compound B. The masses of A and
B at time t after the start of the reaction are x and y respectively and the sum of the masses is equal
to 50 throughout the reaction. At any time the rate of increase of the mass of A is proportional to the
mass of B at that time.

= k 50 − x, where k is a constant.

dx
(i) Explain why [1]
dt

........................................................................................................................................................

It is given that x = 0 when t = 0, and x = 25 when t = 10.

(ii) Solve the differential equation in part (i) and express x in terms of t. [8]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

3x2 − 4
Let f x =
x2 3x + 2
9 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

(ii) Hence show that Ó f x dx = ln 25 − 1.

2
8
[5]
1

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

16
−−→ −−→
10 The points A and B have position vectors given by OA = i − 2j + 2k and OB = 3i + j + k. The line l
has equation r = 2i + j + mk + - i − 2j − 4k, where m is a constant.

(i) Given that the line l intersects the line passing through A and B, find the value of m. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

(ii) Find the equation of the plane which is parallel to i − 2j − 4k and contains the points A and B.
Give your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17 [Turn over

11 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

(a) The complex numbers z and w satisfy the equations

z + 1 + iw = i and 1 − iz + iw = 1.

Solve the equations for z and w, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real.
[6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

(b) The complex numbers u and v are given by u = 1 + 2ï3i and v = 3 + 2i. In an Argand diagram,
u and v are represented by the points A and B. A third point C lies in the first quadrant and is
such that BC = 2AB and angle ABC = 90Å. Find the complex number z represented by C, giving
your answer in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/33/M/J/17

0.0 Year 2017 917

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
918 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
919
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
920 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 Express the LHS in terms of either cos x and sin x or in terms of tan x B1

Use Pythagoras M1

Obtain the given answer A1

Total: 3

2 EITHER: (M1
State a correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 term in the expansion of
(1 + 23 x )
−3
or ( 3 + 2 x )
−3

 −3 
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   , are not sufficient for M1.]
 2

State correct first term 1 B1

Obtain term − 272 x A1

Obtain term 8
x2 A1)
81

OR: (M1
Differentiate expression and evaluate f ( 0 ) and f ' ( 0 ) , where f ' ( x ) = k ( 3 + 2 x )
−4

State correct first term 1 B1

Obtain term − 272 x A1

Obtain term 8
x2 A1)
81

Total: 4

3 Rearrange as 3u 2 + 4u − 4 = 0 , or 3e2 x + 4e x − 4 = 0 , or equivalent B1

Solve a 3-term quadratic for e x or for u M1

Obtain e x = 2
or u = 23 A1
3

Obtain answer x = –0.405 and no other A1

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
921
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

4 *M1
∫
Integrate by parts and reach aθ cos 12 θ + b cos 12 θ dθ

Complete integration and obtain indefinite integral −2θ cos 12 θ + 4sin 12 θ A1

Substitute limits correctly, having integrated twice DM1

Obtain final answer ( 4 − π ) / 2 , or exact equivalent A1

Total: 4

5(i) Use the chain rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Use correct trigonometry to express derivative in terms of tan x M1

dy 4 tan x A1
Obtain =− , or equivalent
dx 4 + tan 2 x

Total: 4

5(ii) Equate derivative to –1 and solve a 3–term quadratic for tan x M1

Obtain answer x=1.11 and no other in the given interval A1

Total: 2

6(i) Calculate the value of a relevant expression or expressions at x = 2.5 and at another M1
relevant value, e.g. x = 3

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

Total: 2

6(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. x = π + tan −1 (1 / (1 − x ) ) without suffices B1

Rearrange this as cot x = 1 − x , or commence working vice versa B1

Total: 2

6(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 2.576 only A1

Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 2.576 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval (2.5755, 2.5765)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
922 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

7(i) Use correct quotient rule or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1

Obtain x = 2 A1

Total: 4

7(ii) State or imply ordinates 1.6487…, 1.3591…, 1.4938… B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 1 and three ordinates M1

Obtain answer 2.93 only A1

Total: 3

7(iii) Explain why the estimate would be less than E B1

Total: 1

8(i) Justify the given differential equation B1

Total: 1

8(ii) Separate variables correctly and attempt to integrate one side B1

Obtain term kt, or equivalent B1

Obtain term − ln ( 50 − x ) , or equivalent B1

Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 0, t = 0 in a solution containing terms M1*
a ln ( 50 − x ) and bt

Obtain solution − ln ( 50 − x ) = kt − ln 50 , or equivalent A1

Use x = 25, t = 10 to determine k DM1

Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln 50 − ln ( 50 − x ) = 101 ( ln 2 ) t A1

Obtain answer x = 50 (1 − exp ( −0.0693t ) ) , or equivalent A1

Total: 8

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
923
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

9(i) A B C B1
State or imply the form + 2+
x x 3x + 2

Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 3, B = –2, C = –6 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

Ax + B C
[Mark the form + using same pattern of marks.]
x 2
3x + 2

Total: 5

9(ii) 2 B3 FT
Integrate and obtain terms 3ln x = − 2ln ( 3x + 2 )
x
[The FT is on A, B and C]

3x − 2
Note: Candidates who integrate the partial fraction by parts should obtain
x2
2
3ln x + − 3 or equivalent
x

Use limits correctly, having integrated all the partial fractions, in a solution M1
containing terms a ln x + bx + c ln ( 3x + 2 )

Obtain the given answer following full and exact working A1

Total: 5

10(i) Carry out a correct method for finding a vector equation for AB M1

Obtain r = i − 2 j + 2k + λ ( 2i + 3j − k ) , or equivalent A1

Equate two pairs of components of general points on AB and l and solve for λ or for M1
µ

Obtain correct answer for λ or µ, e.g. λ = 75 or µ = 73 A1

Obtain m = 3 A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/33
924 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter May/June
0. Cambridge Pure Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

10(ii) EITHER: (B1

Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b and c, e.g. a − 2b − 4c = 0

Form a second relevant equation, e.g. 2a + 3b − c = 0 and solve for one ratio, e.g. a M1
:b

Obtain final answer a : b : c = 14 : – 7 : 7 A1

Use coordinates of a relevant point and values of a, b and c and find d M1

Obtain answer 14 x − 7 y + 7 z = 42 , or equivalent A1)

OR 1:
Attempt to calculate the vector product of relevant vectors, e.g. (M1
( i − 2 j − 4k ) × ( 2i + 3j − k )
Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 14i − 7 j + 7k A1

Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 14 x − 7 y + 7 z = d , or equivalent, and M1

find d

Obtain answer 14 x − 7 y + 7 z = 42 , or equivalent A1)

OR 2:
Using a relevant point and relevant vectors, form a 2–parameter equation for the (M1
plane

State a correct equation, e.g. r = i − 2 j + 2k + s ( i − 2 j − 4k ) + t ( 2i + 3j − k ) A1

State 3 correct equations in x, y, z, s and t A1

Eliminate s and t M1

Obtain answer 2x – y + z = 6, or equivalent A1)

OR 3: (M1
Using a relevant point and relevant vectors, form a determinant equation for the
plane

x −1 y + 2 z −1 A1
State a correct equation, e.g. 1 −2 −4 =0
2 3 −1

Attempt to expand the determinant M1

Obtain or imply two correct cofactors A1

Obtain answer 14 x − 7 y + 7 z = 42 , or equivalent A1)

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/33
0.0 Year 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
925
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

11(a) Solve for z or for w M1

Use i 2 = −1 M1

i 2+i A1
Obtain w = or z =
2−i 2−i

Multiply numerator and denominator by the conjugate of the denominator M1

Obtain w = − 15 + 52 i A1

Obtain z = 53 + 54 i A1

Total: 6

11(b) EITHER: (B1

(
Find ±  2 + 2 − 2 3 i 
  )
Multiply by 2i (or –2i) M1*

Add result to v DM1

Obtain answer 4 3 − 1 + 6i A1)

OR: (M1
z −v
State = ki , or equivalent
v−u

State k = 2 A1

Substitute and solve for z even if i omitted M1

Obtain answer 4 3 − 1 + 6i A1)

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

Solve the equation ln 1 + 2x = 2, giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places.

1 [3]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

2 Solve the inequality x − 4 < 23x + 1. [4]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

− 12 x
3 (i) By sketching suitable graphs, show that the equation e = 4 − x2 has one positive root and one
negative root. [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that the negative root lies between −1 and −1.5. [2]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

−1x
(iii) Use the iterative formula xn+1 = − 4 − e 2 n to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places.

Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

4 (i) Express 8 cos 1 − 15 sin 1 in the form R cos 1 + !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å, stating the
exact value of R and giving the value of ! correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

(ii) Hence solve the equation

8 cos 2x − 15 sin 2x = 4,
for 0Å < x < 180Å. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

5 The curve with equation y = e−ax tan x, where a is a positive constant, has only one point in the interval
0 < x < 12 0 at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis. Find the value of a and state the exact value
of the x-coordinate of this point. [7]

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

................................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

6 The line l has equation r = i + 2j − 3k + , 2i − j + k. The plane p has equation 3x + y − 5z = 20.

(i) Show that the line l lies in the plane p. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

(ii) A second plane is parallel to l, perpendicular to p and contains the point with position vector
3i − j + 2k. Find the equation of this plane, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

A water tank has vertical sides and a horizontal rectangular base, as shown in the diagram. The area
of the base is 2 m2. At time t = 0 the tank is empty and water begins to flow into it at a rate of 1 m3

per hour. At the same time water begins to flow out from the base at a rate of 0.2 h m3 per hour,
where h m is the depth of water in the tank at time t hours.

(i) Form a differential equation satisfied by h and t, and show that the time T hours taken for the
depth of water to reach 4 m is given by
4
T=Ô
10
5− h
dh. [3]
0

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

(ii) Using the substitution u = 5 − h, find the value of T .

[6]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

8 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The polynomial z4 + 3z2 + 6z + 10 is denoted by p z. The complex number −1 + i is denoted by u.

(i) Showing all your working, verify that u is a root of the equation p z = 0. [3]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Find the other three roots of the equation p z = 0. [7]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

x 6 − x
Let f x =
2 + x 4 + x2
9 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17 [Turn over

10
y

Q
x
O e

The diagram shows the curve y = ln x2 . The x-coordinate of the point P is equal to e, and the normal
to the curve at P meets the x-axis at Q.

(i) Find the x-coordinate of Q. [4]

........................................................................................................................................................

(ii) Show that Ó ln x dx = x ln x − x + c, where c is a constant. [1]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

(iii) Using integration by parts, or otherwise, find the exact value of the area of the shaded region
between the curve, the x-axis and the normal PQ. [5]

........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 9709/32/F/M/17

0.0 Year 2017 945

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 Pure Mathematics March 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 11 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709
946/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0/32Year
9709 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March947
2017
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709
948/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

1 Remove logarithm and obtain 1 + 2 x = e 2 B1

Use correct method to solve an equation of the form 2 x = a , where a > 0 M1

Obtain answer x = 2.676 A1

Total: 3

Question Answer Marks

2 EITHER:

State or imply non-modular inequality ( x − 4) 2 < (2(3x + 1)) 2 , or corresponding (B1

quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations x − 4 = ±2(3x + 1)

Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear M1

equations for x

Obtain critical values x = − 65 and x = 2 A1

State final answer x < − 65 , x > 2 A1)

OR:

Obtain critical value x = − 65 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by (B1

solving a linear equation or inequality

Obtain critical value x = 2

similarly B2
7

State final answer x < − 65 , x > 2 B1)

Total: 4

Question Answer Marks

3(i) Sketch a relevant graph, e.g. y = e

− 12 x B1

Sketch a second relevant graph, e.g. y = 4 − x 2 , and justify the given statement B1

Total: 2

3(ii) Calculate the value of a relevant expression or values of a pair of expressions at M1

x = – 1 and x = – 1.5

complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0/32Year
9709 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March949
2017
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

3(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer – 1.41 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify – 1.41 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign A1
change in the interval ( – 1.415, – 1.405)

Total: 3

Question Answer Marks

4(i) State R = 17 B1

Use trig formula to find α M1

Obtain α = 61.93° with no errors seen A1

Total: 3

4(ii) Evaluate cos −1 (4 / 17) to at least 1d.p. (76.39° to 2 d.p.) B1

Use a correct method to find a value of x in the interval 0° < x < 180° M1

Obtain answer, e.g. x = 7.2° A1

Obtain second answer, e.g. x = 110.8°and no others A1

[Ignore answers outside the given interval.]

[Treat answers in radians as a misread.]

Total: 4

Question Answer Marks

5 Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

Equate derivative to zero, use Pythagoras and obtain a quadratic equation in tan x M1

Obtain tan 2 x − a tan x + 1 = 0 , or equivalent A1

Use the condition for a quadratic to have only one root M1

Obtain answer a = 2 A1

Obtain answer x = 14 π A1

Total: 7

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709
950/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

6(i) Verify that the point with position vector i + 2 j − 3k lies in the plane B1

EITHER:

Find a second point on l and substitute its coordinates in the equation of p (M1

Verify that the second point, e.g. (3, 1, – 2), lies in the plane A1)

OR:

Expand scalar product of a normal to p and the direction vector of l (M1

Verify scalar product is zero A1)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0/32Year
9709 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March951
2017
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

6(ii) EITHER:

Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a , b and c, e.g. 2a − b + c = 0 (B1

Obtain a second relevant equation, e.g. 3a + b − 5c = 0 , and solve for one ratio M1
e.g. a : b

Obtain a : b : c = 4 : 13 : 5 , or equivalent A1

Substitute (3, – 1, 2) and the values of a, b and c in the general equation and find d M1

Obtain answer 4 x + 13 y + 5 z = 9 , or equivalent A1)

OR1:

Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, e.g. (M1

(2i − j + k ) × (3i + j − 5k )

Obtain two correct components A1

Obtain correct answer, e.g. 4i + 13j + 5k A1

Substitute (3, – 1, 2) in 4 x + 13 y + 5 z = d , or equivalent, and find d M1

Obtain answer 4 x + 13 y + 5 z = 9 , or equivalent A1)

OR2:

Using the relevant point and relevant vectors form a 2-parameter equation for the (M1
plane

State a correct equation, e.g. r = 3i − j + 2k + λ (2i − j + k ) + µ (3i + j − 5k ) A1

State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1

Eliminate λ and µ M1

Obtain answer 4 x + 13 y + 5 z = 9 , or equivalent A1)

OR3:

Using the relevant point and relevant vectors form a determinant equation for the (M1
plane

x − 3 y +1 z − 2 A1
State a correct equation, e.g. 2 −1 1 =0
3 1 −5

Attempt to expand the determinant M1

Obtain or imply two correct cofactors A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709
952/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

Obtain answer 4 x + 13 y + 5 z = 9 , or equivalent A1)

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0/32Year
9709 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March953
2017
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

7(i) dV dh B1
State or imply =2
dt dt

dV B1
State or imply = 1 − 0.2 h
dt

Obtain the given answer correctly B1

Total: 3

7(ii) 1 B1
State or imply du = − dh , or equivalent
2 h

Substitute for h and dh throughout M1

5
20(5 − u ) A1
Obtain T = ∫
3
u
du , or equivalent

Integrate and obtain terms 100ln u − 20u , or equivalent A1

Substitute limits u = 3 and u = 5 correctly M1

Obtain answer 11.1, with no errors seen A1

Total: 6

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709
954/32 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme
Chapter 0. Cambridge PureMarch
Math2017
3
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

8(i) Substitute z = −1 + i and attempt expansions of the z 2 and z 4 terms M1

Use i 2 = −1 at least once M1

Complete the verification correctly A1

Total: 3

8(ii) State second root z = −1 − i B1

Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with zeros M1
−1 + i and − 1 − i

Obtain z 2 + 2 z + 2 , or equivalent A1

Attempt division of p(z) by z 2 + 2 z + 2 and reach a partial quotient z 2 + kz M1

Obtain quadratic factor z 2 − 2 z + 5 A1

Solve 3-term quadratic and use i 2 = −1 M1

Obtain roots 1 + 2i and 1 – 2i A1

Total: 7

Question Answer Marks

9(i) A Bx + C B1
State or imply the form +
2 + x 4 + x2

Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = – 2, B = 1, C = 4 A1

Obtain a second value A1

Obtain the third value A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0/32Year
9709 2017 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme March955
2017
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks

9(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (1 + 12 x ) −1 , M1
(2 + x) −1 , (1 + 14 x 2 ) −1 or (4 + x 2 ) −1

Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each partial fraction A1 + A1

Multiply out up to the term in x 2 by Bx + C , where BC ≠ 0 M1

Obtain final answer 3

x − 12 x 2 A1
4

[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g. −1 C 2 , are not sufficient for the first M1. The
f.t. is on A, B, C.]

[In the case of an attempt to expand x(6 − x)(2 + x) −1 (4 + x 2 ) −1 , give M1A1A1 for
the expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]

Total: 5

Question Answer Marks

10(i) ln x B1
State or imply derivative is 2
x

State or imply gradient of the normal at x = e is − 12 e , or equivalent B1

Carry out a complete method for finding the x-coordinate of Q M1

2 A1
Obtain answer x = e + , or exact equivalent
e

Total: 4

10(ii) Justify the given statement by integration or by differentiation B1

Total: 1

10(iii) ln x M1*
Integrate by parts and reach ax(ln x)2 + b x. ∫ x
dx

Complete the integration and obtain x(ln x) 2 − 2 x ln x + 2 x , or equivalent A1

Use limits x = 1 and x = e correctly, having integrated twice DM1

Obtain exact value e – 2 A1

1 B1
Use x- coordinate of Q found in part (i) and obtain final answer e − 2 +
e

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

956 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

3x + 2
1 Solve the equation = 8, giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]
3x − 2

− 32
2 Expand 2 − x 1 + 2x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

3 Express the equation sec 1 = 3 cos 1 + tan 1 as a quadratic equation in sin 1. Hence solve this equation
for −90Å < 1 < 90Å. [5]

4 The equation of a curve is xy x − 6y = 9a3 , where a is a non-zero constant. Show that there is only
one point on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis, and find the coordinates of this
point. [7]

5 (i) Prove the identity tan 21 − tan 1 tan 1 sec 21. [4]
10

(ii) Hence show that Ó tan 1 sec 21 d1 = 12 ln 23 .

6
[4]
0

6 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

cosec 21 x = 13 x + 1

has one root in the interval 0 < x ≤ 0. [2]

(ii) Show by calculation that this root lies between 1.4 and 1.6. [2]

(iii) Show that, if a sequence of values in the interval 0 < x ≤ 0 given by the iterative formula
@ A
xn+1 = 2 sin−1
3
xn + 3
converges, then it converges to the root of the equation in part (i). [2]

(iv) Use this iterative formula to calculate the root correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2016 9709/31/O/N/16

7
y

x
O 2

The diagram shows part of the curve y = 2x − x2 e 2 and its maximum point M .
1x

(i) Find the exact x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Find the exact value of the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve and the positive x-axis.
[5]

8 Two planes have equations 3x + y − z = 2 and x − y + 2z = 3.

(i) Show that the planes are perpendicular. [3]

(ii) Find a vector equation for the line of intersection of the two planes. [6]

9 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

(a) Solve the equation 1 + 2iw2 + 4w − 1 − 2i = 0, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where
x and y are real. [5]

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers
satisfying the inequalities z − 1 − i ≤ 2 and − 14 0 ≤ arg z ≤ 14 0. [5]

10 A large field of area 4 km2 is becoming infected with a soil disease. At time t years the area infected is
dx
x km2 and the rate of growth of the infected area is given by the differential equation = kx 4 − x,
dt
where k is a positive constant. It is given that when t = 0, x = 0.4 and that when t = 2, x = 2.

(i) Solve the differential equation and show that k = 14 ln 3. [9]

(ii) Find the value of t when 90% of the area of the field is infected. [2]

© UCLES 2016 9709/31/O/N/16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/31/O/N/16

960 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 961

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
1.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 2

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

962 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
2.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 963

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
3.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 4

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

964 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
4.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 5

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 965

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 6

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

966 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
5.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 7

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 967

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 8

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

968 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
6.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 969

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 10

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

970 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
7.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 11

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 971

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 12

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

972 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
8.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 13

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 973

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 14

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

974 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 15

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 975

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
9.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 16

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

976 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 17

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 977

https://solvedpapers.co.uk
10.

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 18

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

978 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 19

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 979

https://solvedpapers.co.uk

Are You a Candidate? Tuition with Experienced CIE Teachers

Want A*? IGCSE & A-Level https://tutors.solvedpapers.co.uk 20

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

980 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 981
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

982 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 983
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

1 Solve for 3x and obtain 3x = 187 B1

x
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 3 = a , where a > 0 M1
Obtain answer x = 0.860 3 d.p. only A1 [3]

−3
2 State correct unsimplified first two terms of the expansion of (1 + 2 x ) 2 , e.g. 1 + (− 32 )(2 x) B1
State correct unsimplified term in x 2 , e.g. ( − 32 )( − 32 − 1)(2 x ) 2 / 2! B1
2
Obtain sufficient terms of the product of (2 – x) and the expansion up to the term in x M1
Obtain final answer 2 − 7 x + 18 x 2 Do not ISW A1 [4]

3 EITHER: Correctly restate the equation in terms of sin θ and cos θ B1

Correct method to obtain a horizontal equation in sin θ M1
Reduce the equation to a correct quadratic in any form, e.g. 3sin 2 θ − sin θ − 2 = 0 A1
Solve a three-term quadratic for sin θ M1
Obtain final answer θ = −41.8° only A1
[Ignore answers outside the given interval.]

OR 1: Square both sides of the equation and use 1 + tan 2 θ = sec 2 θ B1

Correct method to obtain a horizontal equation in sin θ M1
Reduce the equation to a correct quadratic in any form, e.g. 9 sin 2 θ − 6 sin θ − 8 = 0 A1
Solve a three-term quadratic for sin θ M1
Obtain final answer θ = −41.8° only A1

OR 2: Multiply through by (secθ + tanθ) M1

Use sec2θ – tan2θ = 1 B1
Obtain 1 = 3 + 3sinθ A1
Solve for sinθ M1
Obtain final answer θ = −41.8° only A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

984 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

dy
4 EITHER: EITHER: State 2 xy + x 2 , or equivalent, as derivative of x 2 y B1
dx
dy
State 6 y 2 + 12 xy , or equivalent, as derivative of 6xy 2 B1
dx
dy
OR: Differentiating LHS using correct product rule, state term xy (1 − 6 ) , or
dx
equivalent B1
dy
State term ( y + x )( x − 6 y ) , or equivalent B1
dx

dy
Equate attempted derivative of LHS to zero and set equal to zero M1*
dx
Obtain a horizontal equation, e.g. 6 y 2 − 2 xy = 0 (from correct work only) A1
Explicitly reject y = 0 as a possibility py − qxy = 0
2
A1
Obtain an equation in x or y DM1
Obtain answer (−3a, −a) A1

3 3
9a 9a
OR: Rearrange to y = and use correct quotient rule to obtain − × ..... B1
x(x − 6y) (x − 6y)
2 2
x
State term ( x − 6 y ) + x (1 − 6 y ′ ) , or equivalent B1
Justify division by x(x – 6y) B1
dy
Set equal to zero M1*
dx
Obtain a horizontal equation, e.g. 6 y 2 − 2 xy = 0 (from correct work only) A1
Obtain an equation in x or y DM1
Obtain answer (−3a, −a) A1 [7]

5 (i) EITHER: Use tan 2A formula to express LHS in terms of tan θ M1

Express as a single fraction in any correct form A1
Use Pythagoras or cos 2A formula M1
Obtain the given result correctly A1

OR: Express LHS in terms of sin 2θ, cos 2θ, sin θ and cos θ M1
Express as a single fraction in any correct form A1
Use Pythagoras or cos 2A formula or sin(A – B) formula M1
Obtain the given result correctly A1 [4]

(ii) Integrate and obtain a term of the form a ln(cos 2θ ) or b ln(cos θ ) (or secant equivalents) M1*
Obtain integral − 2 ln(cos 2θ ) + ln(cos θ ) , or equivalent
1
A1
Substitute limits correctly (expect to see use of both limits) DM1
Obtain the given answer following full and correct working A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 985
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

6 (i) Make recognizable sketch of a relevant graph B1

Sketch the other relevant graph and justify the given statement B1 [2]

(ii) Use calculations to consider the value of a relevant expression at x = 1.4 and x = 1.6,
or the values of relevant expressions at x = 1.4 and x = 1.6 M1
Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 [2]

 3 
(iii) State x = 2sin −1   B1
 x +3
Rearrange this in the form cosec 12 x = 13 x + 1 B1 [2]
x  3 
If working in reverse, need sin =  for first B1
2  x +3

(iv) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.471 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 1.471 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.4705, 1.4715) A1 [3]

7 (i) Use the correct product rule M1

1x 1x
2
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. (2 − 2 x)e 2
+ 1
2
(2 x − x )e 2
A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain x = 5 − 1 only A1 [4]

∫
1x 1x
(ii) Integrate by parts and reach a(2 x − x 2 )e 2 + b (2 − 2 x)e 2 dx M1*

Obtain 2e (2 x − x 2 ) − 2 ∫ (2 − 2 x )e dx , or equivalent
1
x 1
2 2
x
A1
1x
Complete the integration correctly, obtaining (12 x − 2 x 2 − 24)e , or equivalent2
A1

Use limits x = 0, x = 2 correctly having integrated by parts twice DM1

Obtain answer 24 – 8e, or exact simplified equivalent A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

986 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

8 (i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. 3i + j − k or i − j + 2k B1

Use correct method to calculate their scalar product M1
Show value is zero and planes are perpendicular A1 [3]

(ii) EITHER: Carry out a complete strategy for finding a point on l the line of intersection M1
Obtain such a point, e.g. (0, 7, 5) , (1, 0, 1), (5/4, –7/4, 0) A1
EITHER: State two equations for a direction vector ai + bj + ck for l,
e.g. 3a + b − c = 0 and a − b + 2c = 0 B1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 1 : −7 : −4, or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 7 j + 5k + λ (i − 7 j − 4k ) A1

OR1: Obtain a second point on l, e.g. (1, 0, 1) B1

Subtract vectors and obtain a direction vector for l M1
Obtain −i + 7 j + 4k , or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = i + k + λ (−i + 7 j + 4k ) A1

OR2: Attempt to find the vector product of the two normal vectors M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain i − 7 j − 4k , or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 7 j + 5k + λ (i − 7 j − 4k ) A1

OR1: Express one variable in terms of a second variable M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. y = 7 – 7x A1
Express the third variable in terms of the second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = 5 – 4x A1
Form a vector equation for the line M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = 7 j + 5k + λ (i − 7 j − 4k ) A1

OR2: Express one variable in terms of a second variable M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = 5 − 4 x A1
Express the same variable in terms of the third M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression e.g. z = (7 + 4 y ) / 7 A1
Form a vector equation for the line M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = 54 i − 74 j + λ ( − 14 i + 74 j + k ) A1 [6]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 987
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

9 (a) EITHER: Use quadratic formula to solve for w M1

Use i 2 = −1 M1
1 5
Obtain one of the answers w = and w = − A1
2i + 1 2i + 1
Multiply numerator and denominator of an answer by –2i + 1, or equivalent M1
Obtain final answers 15 − 52 i and –1 + 2i A1

OR1: Multiply the equation by 1 – 2i M1

Use i 2 = −1 M1
Obtain 5w2 + 4 w (1 − 2i ) − (1 − 2i ) = 0 , or equivalent
2
A1
Use quadratic formula or factorise to solve for w M1
Obtain final answers 15 − 52 i and –1 + 2i A1

OR2: Substitute w = x + iy and form equations for real and imaginary parts M1
Use i 2 = −1 M1
Obtain ( x 2 − y 2 ) − 4 xy + 4 x − 1 = 0 and 2 ( x 2 − y 2 ) + 2 xy + 4 y + 2 = 0 o.e. A1
Form equation in x only or y only and solve M1
Obtain final answers 15 − 52 i and –1 + 2i A1 [5]

(b) Show a circle with centre 1 + i B1

Show a circle with radius 2 B1
Show half-line arg z = 14 π B1
Show half-line arg z = − 14 π B1
Shade the correct region B1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

988 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 9 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 31

10 (i) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side M1

Integrate and obtain term kt, or equivalent A1
1 A B
Carry out a relevant method to obtain A and B such that ≡ + , or equivalent M1*
x(4 − x) x 4 − x
1
Obtain A = B = , or equivalent A1
4
1 1
Integrate and obtain terms ln x − ln(4 − x) , or equivalent A1
4 4

EITHER: Use a pair of limits in an expression containing plnx, qln(4 – x) and rt

and evaluate a constant DM1
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. ln x − ln(4 − x) = 4kt − ln 9 ,
 x 
or ln   = 4kt − 8k A1
4− x
Use a second pair of limits and determine k DM1
Obtain the given exact answer correctly A1

OR: Use both pairs of limits in a definite integral M1*

Obtain the given exact answer correctly A1
Substitute k and either pair of limits in an expression containing
plnx, qln(4 – x) and rt and evaluate a constant DM1
x
Obtain ln = t ln 3 − ln 9 or equivalent A1 [9]
4−x

(ii) Substitute x = 3.6 and solve for t M1

Obtain answer t = 4 A1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

3x + 2
1 Solve the equation = 8, giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]
3x − 2

− 32
2 Expand 2 − x 1 + 2x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

3 Express the equation sec 1 = 3 cos 1 + tan 1 as a quadratic equation in sin 1. Hence solve this equation
for −90Å < 1 < 90Å. [5]

5 (i) Prove the identity tan 21 − tan 1 tan 1 sec 21. [4]
10

(ii) Hence show that Ó tan 1 sec 21 d1 = 12 ln 23 .

6
[4]
0

6 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

cosec 21 x = 13 x + 1

has one root in the interval 0 < x ≤ 0. [2]

(ii) Show by calculation that this root lies between 1.4 and 1.6. [2]

(iv) Use this iterative formula to calculate the root correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/O/N/16

7
y

x
O 2

The diagram shows part of the curve y = 2x − x2 e 2 and its maximum point M .
1x

(i) Find the exact x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Find the exact value of the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve and the positive x-axis.
[5]

8 Two planes have equations 3x + y − z = 2 and x − y + 2z = 3.

(i) Show that the planes are perpendicular. [3]

(ii) Find a vector equation for the line of intersection of the two planes. [6]

9 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

(a) Solve the equation 1 + 2iw2 + 4w − 1 − 2i = 0, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where
x and y are real. [5]

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers
satisfying the inequalities z − 1 − i ≤ 2 and − 14 0 ≤ arg z ≤ 14 0. [5]

(i) Solve the differential equation and show that k = 14 ln 3. [9]

(ii) Find the value of t when 90% of the area of the field is infected. [2]

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/O/N/16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/O/N/16

992 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 9 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 993
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

994 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 995
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

1 Solve for 3x and obtain 3x = 187 B1

x
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 3 = a , where a > 0 M1
Obtain answer x = 0.860 3 d.p. only A1 [3]

3 EITHER: Correctly restate the equation in terms of sin θ and cos θ B1

OR 1: Square both sides of the equation and use 1 + tan 2 θ = sec 2 θ B1

OR 2: Multiply through by (secθ + tanθ) M1

Use sec2θ – tan2θ = 1 B1
Obtain 1 = 3 + 3sinθ A1
Solve for sinθ M1
Obtain final answer θ = −41.8° only A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

996 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

5 (i) EITHER: Use tan 2A formula to express LHS in terms of tan θ M1

Express as a single fraction in any correct form A1
Use Pythagoras or cos 2A formula M1
Obtain the given result correctly A1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 997
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

6 (i) Make recognizable sketch of a relevant graph B1

Sketch the other relevant graph and justify the given statement B1 [2]

 3 
(iii) State x = 2sin −1   B1
 x +3
Rearrange this in the form cosec 12 x = 13 x + 1 B1 [2]
x  3 
If working in reverse, need sin =  for first B1
2  x +3

(iv) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.471 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 1.471 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.4705, 1.4715) A1 [3]

7 (i) Use the correct product rule M1

1x 1x
2
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. (2 − 2 x)e 2
+ 1
2
(2 x − x )e 2
A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain x = 5 − 1 only A1 [4]

∫
1x 1x
(ii) Integrate by parts and reach a(2 x − x 2 )e 2 + b (2 − 2 x)e 2 dx M1*

Obtain 2e (2 x − x 2 ) − 2 ∫ (2 − 2 x )e dx , or equivalent
1
x 1
2 2
x
A1
1x
Complete the integration correctly, obtaining (12 x − 2 x 2 − 24)e , or equivalent2
A1

Use limits x = 0, x = 2 correctly having integrated by parts twice DM1

Obtain answer 24 – 8e, or exact simplified equivalent A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

998 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

8 (i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. 3i + j − k or i − j + 2k B1

Use correct method to calculate their scalar product M1
Show value is zero and planes are perpendicular A1 [3]

OR1: Obtain a second point on l, e.g. (1, 0, 1) B1

Subtract vectors and obtain a direction vector for l M1
Obtain −i + 7 j + 4k , or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = i + k + λ (−i + 7 j + 4k ) A1

OR1: Express one variable in terms of a second variable M1

OR2: Express one variable in terms of a second variable M1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 999
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

9 (a) EITHER: Use quadratic formula to solve for w M1

OR1: Multiply the equation by 1 – 2i M1

Use i 2 = −1 M1
Obtain 5w2 + 4 w (1 − 2i ) − (1 − 2i ) = 0 , or equivalent
2
A1
Use quadratic formula or factorise to solve for w M1
Obtain final answers 15 − 52 i and –1 + 2i A1

(b) Show a circle with centre 1 + i B1

Show a circle with radius 2 B1
Show half-line arg z = 14 π B1
Show half-line arg z = − 14 π B1
Shade the correct region B1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1000 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 9 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 32

10 (i) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side M1

EITHER: Use a pair of limits in an expression containing plnx, qln(4 – x) and rt

OR: Use both pairs of limits in a definite integral M1*

(ii) Substitute x = 3.6 and solve for t M1

Obtain answer t = 4 A1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 It is given that z = ln y + 2 − ln y + 1. Express y in terms of z. [3]

The equation of a curve is y = , for −0 < x < 0. Show that the gradient of the curve is positive
sin x
1 + cos x
2
for all x in the given interval. [4]

3 Express the equation cot 21 = 1 + tan 1 as a quadratic equation in tan 1. Hence solve this equation for
0Å < 1 < 180Å. [6]

4 The polynomial 4x4 + ax2 + 11x + b, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
p x is divisible by x2 − x + 2.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, find the real roots of the equation p x = 0. [2]

5
y
P x, y

x
O N

The diagram shows a variable point P with coordinates x, y and the point N which is the foot of the
perpendicular from P to the x-axis. P moves on a curve such that, for all x ≥ 0, the gradient of the
curve is equal in value to the area of the triangle OPN , where O is the origin.

(i) State a differential equation satisfied by x and y. [1]

The point with coordinates 0, 2 lies on the curve.

(ii) Solve the differential equation to obtain the equation of the curve, expressing y in terms of x.
[5]

(iii) Sketch the curve. [1]

x − 1
4
Let I = Ô
2 x + x
6 dx.
1

u−1
2
(i) Using the substitution u = x, show that I = Ô

u+1
du. [3]
1

(ii) Hence show that I = 1 + ln 49 . [6]

© UCLES 2016 9709/33/O/N/16

7 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number z is defined by z = ï2 − ï6i. The complex conjugate of z is denoted by z*.

(i) Find the modulus and argument of z. [2]

(ii) Express each of the following in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact:
(a) z + 2z*;
z*
(b) .
iz
[4]

(iii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram with origin O, show the points A and B representing the
complex numbers z* and iz respectively. Prove that angle AOB is equal to 16 0. [3]

3x2 + x + 6
Let f x =
x + 2 x2 + 4
8 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

9
y

x
O a 1
20

The diagram shows the curves y = x cos x and y = , where k is a constant, for 0 < x ≤ 12 0. The curves
k

touch at the point where x = a.

(i) Show that a satisfies the equation tan a =

2
. [5]
a
@ A
(ii) Use the iterative formula an+1 = tan−1
2
to determine a correct to 3 decimal places. Give the
an
result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

(iii) Hence find the value of k correct to 2 decimal places. [2]

[Question 10 is printed on the next page.]

© UCLES 2016 9709/33/O/N/16 [Turn over

10 The line l has vector equation r = i + 2j + k + , 2i − j + k.

(i) Find the position vectors of the two points on the line whose distance from the origin is 10.
[5]

(ii) The plane p has equation ax + y + z = 5, where a is a constant. The acute angle between the line
l and the plane p is equal to sin−1 23 . Find the possible values of a.

[5]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/33/O/N/16

1004 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 6 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1005
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1006 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1007
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 33

1 Use law of the logarithm of a quotient M1

y+2
Remove logarithms and obtain a correct equation, e.g. e z = A1
y +1
2 − ez
Obtain answer y = , or equivalent A1 [3]
ez −1

2 Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
1
Use Pythagoras to simplify the derivative to , or equivalent A1
1 + cos x
Justify the given statement, − 1 < cosx < 1 statement, or equivalent A1 [4]

3 Use the tan 2A formula to obtain an equation in tan θ only M1

Obtain a correct horizontal equation A1
Rearrange equation as a quadratic in tan θ, e.g. 3tan 2 θ + 2tan θ − 1 = 0 A1
Solve for θ (usual requirements for solution of quadratic) M1
Obtain answer, e.g. 18.4° A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. 135° , and no others in the given interval A1 [6]

4 (i) Commence division by x 2 − x + 2 and reach a partial quotient 4x2 + kx M1

Obtain quotient 4 x + 4 x + a − 4 or 4 x + 4 x + b / 2
2 2
A1
Equate x or constant term to zero and solve for a or b M1
Obtain a = 1 A1
Obtain b = − 6 A1 [5]

(ii) Show that x 2 − x + 2 = 0 has no real roots B1

Obtain roots 12 and − 32 from 4 x 2 + 4 x − 3 = 0 B1 [2]

dy 1
5 (i) State equation = xy B1 [1]
dx 2

(ii) Separate variables correctly and attempts to integrate one side of equation M1
Obtain terms of the form a ln y and bx 2 A1
Use x = 0 and y = 2 to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in expression containing
a ln y or bx2 M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln y = 14 x 2 + ln 2 A1
1 x2
Obtain correct expression for y, e.g. y = 2e 4 A1 [5]

(iii) Show correct sketch for x ⩾ 0. Needs through (0, 2) and rapidly increasing
positive gradient. B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1008 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 33

1
6 (i) State or imply du = dx B1
2 x
Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
Justify the change in limits and obtain the given answer A1 [3]

B
(ii) Convert integrand into the form A + M1*
u +1
Obtain integrand A =1, B = −2 A1
Integrate and obtain u − 2ln(u + 1) A1 + A1
Substitute limits correctly in an integral containing terms au and bln(u + 1),
where ab ≠ 0 DM1
Obtain the given answer following full and correct working A1 [6]
[The f.t. is on A and B.]

7 (i) State modulus 2 2 , or equivalent B1

State argument − 13 π (or −60°) B1 [2]

(ii) (a) State answer 3 2 + 6 i B1

(b) EITHER: Substitute for z and multiply numerator and denominator by

conjugate of iz M1
Simplify the numerator to 4 3 + 4 i or the denominator to 8 A1
Obtain final answer 12 3 + 12 i A1
OR: Substitute for z, obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or
for y M1
Obtain x = 12 3 or y = 12 A1
Obtain final answer 1
2
3+ 1
2
i A1 [4]

(iii) Show points A and B in relatively correct positions B1

Carry out a complete method for finding angle AOB, e.g. calculate the
z∗
argument of M1
iz
Obtain the given answer A1 [3]

A Bx + C
8 (i) State or imply the form + B1
x + 2 x2 + 4
Use a correct method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of A = 2, B = 1, C = − 1 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain a third value A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1009
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2016 9709 33

(ii) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of ( x + 2) −1 ,
(1 + 12 x ) −1 , (4 + x 2 ) −1 or (1 + 14 x 2 ) −1 M1
2
Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x of each partial
fraction A1 + A1
Multiply out fully by Bx + C, where BC ≠ 0 M1
Obtain final answer 34 − 14 x + 165 x 2 , or equivalent A1 [5]
 −1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient for the M1. The f.t.
1
is on A, B, C.]
[In the case of an attempt to expand (3 x 2 + x + 6)( x + 2) −1 ( x 2 + 4) −1 , give
M1A1A1 for the expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final
answer.]

9 (i) Differentiate both equations and equate derivatives M1*

k
Obtain equation cos a − a sin a = − 2 A1 + A1
a
k
State a cos a = and eliminate k DM1
a
Obtain the given answer showing sufficient working A1 [5]

(ii) Show clearly correct use of the iterative formula at least once M1
Obtain answer 1.077 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 1.077 to 3 d.p., or show there is a
sign change in the interval (1.0765, 1.0775) A1 [3]

(iii) Use a correct method to determine k M1

Obtain answer k = 0.55 A1 [2]

10 (i) Express general point of l in component form e.g. (1 + 2λ , 2 − λ , 1 + λ ) B1

Using the correct process for the modulus form an equation in λ M1*
Reduce the equation to a quadratic, e.g. 6λ 2 + 2λ − 4 = 0 A1
Solve for λ (usual requirements for solution of a quadratic) DM1
Obtain final answers −i + 3j and 73 i + 43 j + 53 k A1 [5]

(ii) Using the correct process, find the scalar product of a direction vector for l and a
normal for p M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product
of the moduli and equate the result to 23 M1
2a − 1 + 1 2
State a correct equation in any form, e.g. =± A1
2 2 2
(a + 1 + 1). (2 + (−1) + 1) 3
Solve for a2 M1
Obtain answer a = ± 2 A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 (i) Solve the equation 2 x − 1 = 3 x . [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation 25x − 1 = 35x , giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures.
[2]

Find the exact value of Ó xe−2x dx.

2
2 [5]
0

3 By expressing the equation cosec 1 = 3 sin 1 + cot 1 in terms of cos 1 only, solve the equation for
0Å < 1 < 180Å. [5]

4 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

dy
x = y 1 − 2x2 ,
dx
and it is given that y = 2 when x = 1. Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for y in
terms of x in a form not involving logarithms. [6]

5 The curve with equation y = sin x cos 2x has one stationary point in the interval 0 < x < 12 0. Find the
x-coordinate of this point, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [6]

6 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

5e−x = x
has one root. [2]

(ii) Show that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

@ A
25
xn+1 = 2 ln
1
xn
converges, then it converges to the root of the equation in part (i). [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula, with initial value x1 = 1, to calculate the root correct to 2 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

7 The equation of a curve is x3 − 3x2 y + y3 = 3.

dy x2 − 2xy
(i) Show that = 2 . [4]
dx x − y2

(ii) Find the coordinates of the points on the curve where the tangent is parallel to the x-axis. [5]

© UCLES 2016 9709/31/M/J/16

4x2 + 12
8 Let f x = .
x + 1 x − 32

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

9 With respect to the origin O, the points A, B, C, D have position vectors given by
−−→ −−→ −−→ −−→
OA = i + 3j + 2k, OB = 2i + j − k, OC = 2i + 4j + k, OD = −3i + j + 2k.

(i) Find the equation of the plane containing A, B and C, giving your answer in the form
ax + by + cz = d. [6]

(ii) The line through D parallel to OA meets the plane with equation x + 2y − z = 7 at the point P.

Find the position vector of P and show that the length of DP is 2 14. [5]

10 (a) Showing all your working and without the use of a calculator, find the square roots of the complex
number 7 − 6ï2i. Give your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [5]

(b) (i) On an Argand diagram, sketch the loci of points representing complex numbers w and z
such that w − 1 − 2i = 1 and arg z − 1 = 34 0. [4]

(ii) Calculate the least value of w − z for points on these loci. [2]

© UCLES 2016 9709/31/M/J/16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/31/M/J/16

0.0 Year 2016 1013

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/31
Paper 3 May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1014 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1015

Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1016 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

1 (i) EITHER: State or imply non-modular equation (2( x − 1)) 2 = (3x) 2 , or pair of linear equations
2( x − 1) = ±3 x B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations M1
Obtain answers x = −2 and x = 52 A1

OR: Obtain answer x = −2 by inspection or by solving a linear equation (B1

Obtain answer x = 52 similarly B2)
[3]

(ii) Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 5 x = a or 5 x +1 = a , where a > 0 M1
Obtain answer x =– 0.569 only A1
[2]

2 ∫
Integrate by parts and reach axe −2 x + b e−2 x dx M1

∫
Obtain − 12 xe−2 x + 12 e−2 x dx , or equivalent A1
Complete the integration correctly, obtaining − 12 xe −2 x − 14 e −2 x , or equivalent A1
1
Use limits x = 0 and x = correctly, having integrated twice
2
M1
−1
Obtain answer 1
4
1
− e , or exact equivalent
2
A1
[5]

3 Correctly restate the equation in terms of sin θ and cos θ B1

Using Pythagoras obtain a horizontal equation in cos θ M1
Reduce the equation to a correct quadratic in cos θ, e.g. 3cos 2 θ − cos θ − 2 = 0 A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic for cos θ M1
Obtain answer θ = 131.8° only A1
[5]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval.]

4 Separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side M1*

Obtain term ln y A1
Obtain terms ln x − x 2 A1
Use x = 1 and y = 2 to evaluate a constant, or as limits DM1*
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln y = ln x − x 2 + ln 2 + 1 A1
Obtain correct expression for y, free of logarithms, i.e. y = 2 x exp(1 − x 2 ) A1
[6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1017

Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

5 Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. cos x cos 2 x − 2sin x sin 2 x A1
Equate derivative to zero and use double angle formulae M1
Remove factor of cos x and reduce equation to one in a single trig function M1
Obtain 6sin 2 x = 1 , 6 cos 2 x = 5 or 5 tan 2 x = 1 A1
Solve and obtain x = 0.421 A1
[6]
[Alternative: Use double angle formula M1.Use chain rule to differentiate M1. Obtain correct
derivative
e.g. cos θ − 6 sin 2 θ cos θ A1, then as above.]

6 (i) Make recognizable sketch of a relevant graph B1

Sketch the other relevant graph and justify the given statement B1
[2]

1
(ii) State x = ln(25 / x) B1
2
Rearrange this in the form 5e− x = x B1
[2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.43 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.43 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the
interval (1.425, 1.435) A1
[3]

dy
7 (i) State or imply 6 xy + 3x 2 as derivative of 3x 2 y B1
dx
dy
State 3 y 2 as derivative of y 3 B1
dx
dy
Equate attempted derivative of the LHS to zero and solve for M1
dx
Obtain the given answer A1
[4]

(ii) Equate numerator to zero M1*

Obtain x = 2y, or equivalent A1
Obtain an equation in x or y DM1*
Obtain the point (−2, −1) A1
State the point (0, 1.44) B1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1018 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

A B C
8 (i) State or imply the form + + B1
x + 1 x − 3 ( x − 3) 2
Use a correct method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = 1, B = 3, C = 12 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain a third value A1
[5]

A Dx + E
[Mark the form + , where A =1, D = 3, E = 3, B1M1A1A1A1 as above.]
x + 1 ( x − 3) 2

(ii) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion
of ( x + 1) −1 , ( x − 3) −1 , (1 − 13 x ) −1 ,

( x − 3)−2 , or (1 − 13 x ) −2 M1
Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term
in x 2 of each partial fraction A1 + A1 + A1
Obtain final answer 43 − 94 x + 34 x 2 , or equivalent A1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1019

Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

9 (i) EITHER: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. AB = i − 2 j − 3k B1
Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b, c e.g. a − 2b − 3c = 0 , a + b − c = 0 ,
or 3b + 2c = 0 M1
State two correct equations A1
Solve to obtain ratio a : b : c M1
Obtain a : b : c = 5 : −2 : 3 A1
Obtain equation 5 x − 2 y + 3 z = 5 , or equivalent A1

OR1: Substitute for two points, e.g. A and B, and obtain a + 3b + 2c = d and
2a + b − c = d (B1
Substitute for another point, e.g. C, to obtain a third equation and eliminate one unknown
entirely from all three equations M1
Obtain two correct equations in three unknowns, e.g. in a, b, c A1
Solve to obtain their ratio M1
Obtain a : b : c = 5 : −2 : 3, a : c : d = 5 : 3 : 5, a : b : d = 5 : −2 : 5, or b : c : d = −2 : 3 : 5 A1
Obtain equation 5x − 2y + 3z= 5, or equivalent A1)

OR2: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. AC = i + j − k (B1
Obtain a second such vector and calculate their vector product, e.g.
(i − 2 j − 3k ) × (i + j − k ) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct answer e.g. 5i − 2 j + 3k A1
Substitute in 5 x − 2 y + 3 z = d to find d M1
Obtain equation 5 x − 2 y + 3 z = 5 , or equivalent A1)

OR3: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. BC = 3j + 2k (B1
Obtain a second such vector and form correctly a 2-parameter equation for the plane M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = i + 3 j + 2k + λ (i − 2 j − 3k ) + µ (3 j + 2k ) A1
State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ, µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain equation 3x −2 y + 3z= 5, or equivalent A1)
[6]

(ii) Correctly form an equation for the line through D parallel to OA M1

Obtain a correct equation e.g. r = −3i + j + 2k + λ (i + 3 j + 2k ) A1
Substitute components in the equation of the plane and solve for λ M1
Obtain λ = 2 and position vector −i + 7 j + 6k for P A1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
[5]

10 (a) Square x+ iy and equate real and imaginary parts to 7 and −6 2 respectively M1
Obtain equations x 2 − y 2 = 7 and 2 xy = −6 2 A1
Eliminate one variable and find an equation in the other M1
Obtain x 4 − 7 x 2 − 18 = 0 or y 4 + 7 y 2 − 18 = 0 , or 3-term equivalent A1
Obtain answers ± (3 − i 2) A1
[5]
© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1020 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper

Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 31

(b) (i) Show point representing 1 + 2i B1

Show circle with radius 1 and centre 1 + 2i B1
Show a half line from the point representing 1 B1
Show line making the correct angle with the real axis B1
[4]

(ii) State or imply the relevance of the perpendicular from 1 + 2i to the line M1
Obtain answer 2 − 1 (or 0.414) A1
[2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Use logarithms to solve the equation 43x−1 = 3 5x , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places.
[4]

1
2 Expand in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
1 − 2x
coefficients. [4]

Find the exact value of Ó

2
3 x2 sin 2x dx. [5]
0

ln x2
4 The curve with equation y = has two stationary points. Find the exact values of the coordinates
x
of these points. [6]

5 (i) Prove the identity cos 41 − 4 cos 21 8 sin4 1 − 3. [4]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

cos 41 = 4 cos 21 + 3,
for 0Å ≤ 1 ≤ 360Å. [4]

6 The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
3 + cos 21 = x sin 21,
d1
and it is given that x = 3 when 1 = 14 0.

(i) Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for x in terms of 1. [7]

(ii) State the least value taken by x. [1]

4x2 + 7x + 4
7 Let f x = .
2x + 1 x + 2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

4
(ii) Show that Ó f x dx = 8 − ln 3. [5]
0

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/M/J/16

8
y

x
O a 0

The diagram shows the curve y = cosec x for 0 < x < 0 and part of the curve y = e−x . When x = a, the
tangents to the curves are parallel.

1 dy
(i) By differentiating , show that if y = cosec x then = − cosec x cot x. [3]
sin x dx

(ii) By equating the gradients of the curves at x = a, show that

@ a A
−1 e
a = tan . [2]
sin a

(iii) Verify by calculation that a lies between 1 and 1.5. [2]

(iv) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (ii) to determine a correct to 3 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

−−→
9 The points A, B and C have position vectors, relative to the origin O, given by OA = i + 2j + 3k,
−−→ −−→
OB = 4j + k and OC = 2i + 5j − k. A fourth point D is such that the quadrilateral ABCD is a
parallelogram.

(i) Find the position vector of D and verify that the parallelogram is a rhombus. [5]

(ii) The plane p is parallel to OA and the line BC lies in p. Find the equation of p, giving your answer
in the form ax + by + cz = d . [5]

10 (a) Showing all necessary working, solve the equation iz2 + 2z − 3i = 0, giving your answers in the
form x + iy, where x and y are real and exact. [5]

(b) (i) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, show the locus representing complex numbers satisfying
the equation z = z − 4 − 3i. [2]
(ii) Find the complex number represented by the point on the locus where z is least. Find the
modulus and argument of this complex number, giving the argument correct to 2 decimal
places. [3]

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/M/J/16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/M/J/16

1024 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/32
Paper 3 May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 7 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1025
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine
doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of
the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently
be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is

correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of
an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical
answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow
A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81
instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1026 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR – 1 A penalty of MR – 1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR – 2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA – 1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA – 1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1027
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 32

1 Use law of the logarithm of a product, power or quotient M1*

Obtain a correct linear equation, e.g. (3 x − 1) ln 4 = ln 3 + x ln 5 A1
Solve a linear equation for x DM1*
Obtain answer x = 0.975 A1 [4]

2 State a correct un-simplified version of the x or x 2 or x 3 term M1

State correct first two terms 1 + x A1
Obtain the next two terms 32 x 2 + 52 x 3 A1 A1 [4]
 − 12 
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient for the M mark.]
 3 

3 ∫
Integrate by parts and reach ax 2 cos 2 x + b x cos 2 x dx M1*

∫
Obtain − 12 x 2 cos 2 x + x cos 2 x , or equivalent A1
Complete the integration and obtain − 12 x 2 cos 2 x + 12 x sin 2 x + 14 cos 2 x , or equivalent A1
Use limits correctly having integrated twice DM1*
Obtain answer 18 (π 2 − 4) , or exact equivalent, with no errors seen A1 [5]

2ln x
4 State or imply derivative of (ln x) 2 is B1
x
Use correct quotient or product rule M1
2ln x (ln x) 2
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. 2 − A1
x x2
Equate derivative (or its numerator) to zero and solve for ln x M1
Obtain the point (1, 0) with no errors seen A1
Obtain the point (e 2 , 4e −2 ) A1 [6]

5 (i) EITHER: Express cos 4θ in terms of cos 2θ and/or sin 2θ B1

Use correct double angle formulae to express LHS in terms of sin θ and/or cos θ M1
Obtain a correct expression in terms of sin θ alone A1
Reduce correctly to the given form A1

OR: Use correct double angle formula to express RHS in terms of cos 2θ M1
Express cos 2 2θ in terms of cos 4θ B1
Obtain a correct expression in terms of cos 4θ and cos 2θ A1
Reduce correctly to the given form A1 [4]

(ii) Use the identity and carry out a method for finding a root M1
Obtain answer 68.5° A1
Obtain a second answer, e.g. 291.5° A1
Obtain the remaining answers, e.g. 111.5° and 248.5°, and no others in the given
interval A1 [4]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1028 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 32

6 (i) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side B1
Obtain term ln x B1
Obtain term of the form k ln(3 + cos 2θ ) , or equivalent M1
Obtain term − 12 ln(3 + cos 2θ ) , or equivalent A1
1
Use x = 3, θ = 4
π to evaluate a constant or as limits in a solution
with terms a ln x and b ln(3 + cos 2θ ) ,where ab ≠ 0 M1
State correct solution in any form, e.g. ln x = − 1
2
ln(3 + cos 2θ ) + 32 ln 3 A1
 27 
Rearrange in a correct form, e.g. x =   A1 [7]
 3 + cos 2θ 

(ii) State answer x = 3 3 / 2 , or exact equivalent (accept decimal answer in [2.59,

2.60]) B1 [1]

B C
7 (i) State or imply the form A + + B1
2x + 1 x + 2
State or obtain A = 2 B1
Use a correct method for finding a constant M1
Obtain one of B = 1, C = −2 A1
Obtain the other value A1 [5]

(ii) Integrate and obtain terms 2 x + 12 ln(2 x + 1) − 2ln( x + 2) B3

Substitute correct limits correctly in an integral with terms a ln(2 x + 1)
and b ln( x + 2) , where ab ≠0 M1
Obtain the given answer after full and correct working A1 [5]

8 (i) Use correct quotient or chain rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [3]

(ii) State a correct equation, e.g. −e − a = − cos ec a cot a B1

Rearrange it correctly in the given form B1 [2]

(iii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or pair of expressions at x = 1 and x = 1.5 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iv) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.317 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 5 d.p. to justify 1.317 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.3165, 1,3175) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1029
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 32

9 (i) Either state or imply AB or BC in component form, or state position vector of

midpoint of AC B1

Use a correct method for finding the position vector of D M1

Obtain answer 3i + 3 j + k , or equivalent A1

EITHER: Using the correct process for the moduli, compare lengths of a pair of
adjacent sides,
e.g. AB and BC M1
Show that ABCD has a pair of adjacent sides that are equal A1

OR: Calculate scalar product AC.BD or equivalent M1
Show that ABCD has perpendicular diagonals A1 [5]

(ii) EITHER: State a + 2b + 3c = 0 or 2a + b − 2c = 0 B1

Obtain two relevant equations and solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = −7 : 8 : −3, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in −7x + 8y −3z = d, and evaluate M1
Obtain answer −7x + 8y −3z = 29, or equivalent A1

OR1:Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors,

e.g. (i + 2 j + 3k ) × (2i + j − 2k ) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. −7i + 8 j − 3k A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in −7 x + 8 y − 3 z = d and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer −7 x + 8 y − 3 z = 29 or equivalent A1

OR2:Attempt to form a 2-parameter equation with relevant vectors M1

State a correct equation, e.g. r = 2i + 5 j − k + λ (i + 2 j + 3k ) + µ (2i + j − 2k ) A1
State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain answer −7 x + 8 y − 3 z = 29 , or equivalent A1

OR3:Using a relevant point and relevant direction vectors, form a determinant

equation for the plane M1
x − 2 y − 5 z +1
State a correct equation, e.g. 1 2 3 =0 A1
2 1 −2
Attempt to expand the determinant M1
Obtain correct values of two cofactors A1
Obtain answer −7 x + 8 y − 3 z = 29 , or equivalent A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1030 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 32

10 (a) EITHER: Use quadratic formula to solve for z M1

Use i 2 = −1 M1
Obtain a correct answer in any form, simplified as far as (−2 ± i 8) / 2i A1
Multiply numerator and denominator by i, or equivalent M1
Obtain final answers 2 + i and − 2 + i A1

OR: Substitute x + iy and equate real and imaginary parts to zero M1

Use i 2 = −1 M1
Obtain −2 xy + 2 x = 0 and x 2 − y 2 + 2 y − 3 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Solve for x and y M1
Obtain final answers 2 + i and − 2 + i A1 [5]

(b) (i) EITHER: Show the point representing 4 + 3i in relatively correct position B1
Show the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining this point to the
origin B1 [2]

OR: Obtain correct Cartesian equation of the locus in any form, e.g.
8 x + 6 y = 25 B1
Show this line B1
[This f.t. is dependent on using a correct method to determine the equation.]

(ii) State or imply the relevant point is represented by 2 + 1.5i or is at (2, 1.5) B1
Obtain modulus 2.5 B1
Obtain argument 0.64 (or 36.9°) (allow decimals in [0.64, 0.65] or [36.8,
36.9]) B1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality 2 x − 2 > 3x + 1. [4]

2 The variables x and y satisfy the relation 3y = 42−x .

(i) By taking logarithms, show that the graph of y against x is a straight line. State the exact value
of the gradient of this line. [3]

(ii) Calculate the exact x-coordinate of the point of intersection of this line with the line with equation
y = 2x, simplifying your answer. [2]

3 (i) Express ï5 cos x + 2 sin x in the form R cos x − !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å, giving the
value of ! correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

ï5 cos 12 x + 2 sin 12 x = 1.2,

for 0Å < x < 360Å. [3]

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = t + cos t, y = ln 1 + sin t,

where − 12 0 < t < 12 0.

= sec t.
dy
(i) Show that [5]
dx

(ii) Hence find the x-coordinates of the points on the curve at which the gradient is equal to 3. Give
your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [3]

5 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

= e−2y tan2 x,
dy
dx
for 0 ≤ x < 12 0, and it is given that y = 0 when x = 0. Solve the differential equation and calculate the
value of y when x = 14 0. [8]

6 The curve with equation y = x2 cos 21 x has a stationary point at x = p in the interval 0 < x < 0.

(i) Show that p satisfies the equation tan 12 p =

4
. [3]
p

(ii) Verify by calculation that p lies between 2 and 2.5. [2]

A @
(iii) Use the iterative formula pn+1 = 2 tan −1
4
to determine the value of p correct to 2 decimal
pn
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2016 9709/33/M/J/16

3
1
Let I = Ô
x5
7 3 dx.
1 + x2

0

u − 12
2
(i) Using the substitution u = 1 + x , show that I = Ô
2
du. [3]
1
2u3

(ii) Hence find the exact value of I . [5]

−−→
The points A and B have position vectors, relative to the origin O, given by OA = i + j + k and
−−→
8
OB = 2i + 3k. The line l has vector equation r = 2i − 2j − k + - −i + 2j + k.

(i) Show that the line passing through A and B does not intersect l. [4]

1
ï2
(ii) Show that the length of the perpendicular from A to l is . [5]

9 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex numbers −1 + 3i and 2 − i are denoted by u and v respectively. In an Argand diagram
with origin O, the points A, B and C represent the numbers u, v and u + v respectively.

(i) Sketch this diagram and state fully the geometrical relationship between OB and AC. [4]

(ii) Find, in the form x + iy, where x and y are real, the complex number
u
. [3]
v

(iii) Prove that angle AOB = 34 0. [2]

10x − 2x2
Let f x =
x + 3 x − 12
10 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

© UCLES 2016 9709/33/M/J/16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/33/M/J/16

1034 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/33
Paper 3 May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 7 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1035
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1036 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1037
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 33

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (2( x − 2))2 > (3x + 1) 2 , or corresponding quadratic
equation, or pair of linear equations 2( x − 2) = ± (3x + 1) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations for x M1
Obtain critical values x = −5 and x = 53 A1
State final answer −5 < x < 53 A1

OR: Obtain critical value x = −5 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by solving a linear
equation or inequality (B1
Obtain critical value x = 53 similarly B2
State final answer −5 < x < 53 B1)
[Do not condone ≤ for <.] [4]

2 (i) State or imply y ln 3 = (2 − x)ln 4 B1

State that this is of the form ay = bx + c and thus a straight line, or equivalent B1
ln 4
State gradient is − , or exact equivalent B1
ln 3
[3]

(ii) Substitute y = 2x and solve for x, using a log law correctly at least once M1
Obtain answer x = ln 4 / ln 6 , or exact equivalent A1
[2]

3 (i) State answer R =3 B1

Use trig formula to find M1
Obtain α = 41.81° with no errors seen A1
[3]

(ii) Evaluate cos −1 (0.4) to at least 1 d.p. (66.42°to 2 d.p.) B1

Carry out an appropriate method to find a value of x in the given range M1
Obtain answer 216.5° only A1
[Ignore answers outside the given interval.] [3]

dx
4 (i) State = 1 − sin t B1
dt
Use chain rule to find the derivative of y M1
dy cos t
Obtain = , or equivalent A1
dt 1 + sin t
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
[5]

(ii) State or imply t = cos −1 ( 13 ) B1

Obtain answers x = 1.56 and x = − 0.898 B1 + B1
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1038 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 33

5 Separate variables and make reasonable attempt at integration of either integral M1

Obtain term 12 e 2 y B1
Use Pythagoras M1
Obtain terms tan x − x A1
Evaluate a constant or use x = 0, y = 0 as limits in a solution containing terms
ae ±2 y and b tan x ,( ab ≠ 0) M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. 12 e 2 y = tan x − x + 12 A1
Set x = 14 π and use correct method to solve an equation of the form e ±2 y = a or e ± y = a , where
a>0 M1
Obtain answer y = 0.179 A1
[8]

6 (i) Use the product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate 2-term derivative to zero and obtain the given answer correctly A1
[3]

(ii) Use calculations to consider the sign of a relevant expression at p = 2 and p = 2.5, or
compare values of relevant expressions at p= 2 and p = 2.5 M1
Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1
[2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 2.15 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 2.15 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (2.145,2.155) A1
[3]

7 (i) State or imply du = 2x dx , or equivalent B1

Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
Reduce to the given form and justify the change in limits A1
[3]

(ii) Convert integrand to a sum of integrable terms and attempt integration M1

1 1
Obtain integral 12 ln u + − 2 , or equivalent A1 + A1
u 4u
(deduct A1 for each error or omission)
Substitute limits in an integral containing two terms of the form a ln u and bu −2 M1
Obtain answer 12 ln 2 − 165 , exact simplified equivalent A1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1039
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 33

8 (i) State a correct equation for AB in any form, e.g. r = i + j + k + λ (i − j + 2k ) , or equivalent B1

Equate at least two pairs of components of AB and l and solve for λ or for µ M1
Obtain correct answer for λ or for µ , e.g. λ = −1 or µ = 2 A1
Show that not all three equations are not satisfied and that the lines do not intersect A1
[4]

(ii) EITHER: Find AP (or PA) for a general point P on l, e.g. (1 − µ )i + (−3 + 2µ ) j + (−2 + µ )k B1

Calculate the scalar product of AP and a direction vector for l and equate to zero M1
Solve and obtain µ = 32 A1
3
Carry out a method to calculate AP when µ = 2
M1
1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
2

OR 1:Find AP (or PA) for a general point P on l (B1
2
Use correct method to express AP (or AP) in terms of µ M1
Obtain a correct expression in any form, e.g. (1 − µ )2 + (−3 + 2µ )2 + (−2 + µ )2 A1

Carry out a complete method for finding its minimum M1

Obtain the given answer correctly A1)

OR 2:Calling (2, −2, −1) C, state AC (or CA) in component form, e.g. i − 3 j − 2k (B1

Use a scalar product to find the projection of AC ( or CA) on l M1
9
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. A1
6
Use Pythagoras to find the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1)

OR 3:State AC ( or CA) in component form (B1

Calculate vector product of AC and a direction vector for l, e.g. (i − 3 j − 2k ) × (−i + 2 j + k ) M1
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. i + j − k A1
Divide modulus of the product by that of the direction vector M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1)
[5]

u
9 (i) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator of by 2 + i, or equivalent M1
v
Simplify the numerator to −5 +5i or denominator to 5 A1
Obtain final answer −1 + I A1

OR: Obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y (M1
Obtain x = −1 or y = 1 A1
Obtain final answer −1 + I A1)
[3]

(ii) Obtain u + v = 1 + 2i B1
In an Argand diagram show points A, B, C representing u, v and u + v respectively B1
State that OB and AC are parallel B1
State that OB = AC B1
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1040 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2016 9709 33

(iii) Carry out an appropriate method for finding angle AOB, e.g. find arg(u / v ) M1
3
Show sufficient working to justify the given answer 4
π A1
[2]

A B C
10 (i) State or imply the form + + B1
x + 3 x − 1 ( x − 1) 2
Use a correct method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = −3, B = 1, C = 2 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1
A Dx + E
[Mark the form + , where A = −3, D = 1, E = 1, B1M1A1A1A1 as above.] [5]
x + 3 ( x − 1) 2

(ii) Use a correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of ( x + 3)−1 , (1 + 13 x) −1 ,
( x − 1)−1 , (1 − x)−1 , ( x − 1)−2 , or (1 − x)−2 M1
2
Obtain correct unsimplified expressions up to the term in x of each partial fraction A1 + A1 + A1
Obtain final answer 103 x + 449 x 2 , or equivalent A1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the equation ln x2 + 4 = 2 ln x + ln 4, giving your answer in an exact form. [3]

2 Express the equation tan 1 + 45Å − 2 tan 1 − 45Å = 4 as a quadratic equation in tan 1. Hence solve
this equation for 0Å ≤ 1 ≤ 180Å. [6]

3 The equation x5 − 3x3 + x2 − 4 = 0 has one positive root.

(i) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 1 and 2. [2]

(ii) Show that the equation can be rearranged in the form

O@ A
x = 3 3x + 2 − 1 .
4
[1]
x

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on this rearrangement to determine the positive root correct to
2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

4 The polynomial 4x3 + ax + 2, where a is a constant, is denoted by p x. It is given that 2x + 1 is a

factor of p x.

(i) Find the value of a. [2]

(ii) When a has this value,

(a) factorise p x, [2]
(b) solve the inequality p x > 0, justifying your answer. [3]

1
Let I = Ô
9
5 2 dx.
3 + x2

0

(i) Using the substitution x = ï3 tan 1, show that I = ï3 Ó cos2 1 d1.
6
[3]
0

(ii) Hence find the exact value of I . [4]

6 A curve has equation

sin y ln x = x − 2 sin y,
for − 12 0 ≤ y ≤ 12 0.

dy
(i) Find in terms of x and y. [5]
dx

(ii) Hence find the exact x-coordinate of the point on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the
x-axis. [3]

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/F/M/16

7 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

= xex+y ,
dy
dx
and it is given that y = 0 when x = 0.

(i) Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for y in terms of x. [7]

(ii) Explain briefly why x can only take values less than 1. [1]

` a ` a ` a
1 2 2
8 The line l has equation r = 2 + , 1 . The plane p has equation r. −1 = 6.
−1 3 −1

(i) Show that l is parallel to p. [3]

(ii) A line m lies in the plane p and is perpendicular to l. The line m passes through the point with
coordinates 5, 3, 1. Find a vector equation for m. [6]

3x3 + 6x − 8
Let f x =
x x2 + 2
9 .

B Cx + D
(i) Express f x in the form A + + 2
x +2
. [5]
x

(ii) Show that Ó f x dx = 3 − ln 4.

2
[5]
1

10 (a) Find the complex number z satisfying the equation z* + 1 = 2iz, where z* denotes the complex
conjugate of z. Give your answer in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [5]

(b) (i) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex
numbers satisfying the inequalities z + 1 − 3i ≤ 1 and Im z ≥ 3, where Im z denotes the
imaginary part of z. [4]
(ii) Determine the difference between the greatest and least values of arg z for points lying in
this region. [2]

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/F/M/16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 9709/32/F/M/16

1044 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the March 2016 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3 (Pure Mathematics), maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®
and Cambridge International A and AS Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1045
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not
lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote
a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by
substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be
implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1046 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error
in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1047
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 32

1 Use law of the logarithm of a power, quotient or product M1

Remove logarithms and obtain a correct equation in x, e.g. x 2 + 4 = 4 x 2 A1
Obtain final answer x = 2 / 3 , or exact equivalent A1 [3]

2 Use tan(A ± B) formula and obtain an equation in tan θ M1

Using tan 45° = 1 , obtain a horizontal equation in tan θ in any correct form A1
2
Reduce the equation to 7 tan θ − 2 tan θ − 1 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic for tan θ M1
Obtain a correct answer, e.g. θ = 28.7° A1
Obtain a second answer, e.g. θ = 165.4° , and no others A1 [6]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread (0.500, 2.89).]

3 (i) Consider sign of x 5 − 3 x 3 + x 2 − 4 at x = 1 and x = 2, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(ii) Rearrange the given quintic equation in the given form, or work vice versa B1 [1]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.78 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.78 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.775, 1.785) A1 [3]

4 (i) Substitute x = − 12 and equate to zero, or divide by (2 x + 1) and equate constant remainder
to zero M1
Obtain a = 3 A1 [2]

(ii) (a) Commence division by (2x + 1) reaching a partial quotient of 2x 2 + kx M1

Obtain factorisation (2 x + 1)(2 x2 − x + 2) A1 [2]
2
[The M1 is earned if inspection reaches an unknown factor 2x + Bx + C and an
equation in B and/or C, or an unknown factor Ax 2 + Bx + 2 and an equation in
A and/or B.]

(b) State or imply critical value x = − 12 B1

2 3
Show that 2 x − x + 2 is always positive, or that the gradient of 4 x + 3 x + 2 is always
positive B1*
1
Justify final answer x > − 2 B1(dep*) [3]

5 (i) State or imply dx = 3 sec 2 θ dθ B1

Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1048 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 32

1
(ii) Replace integrand by 2
cos 2θ + 12 B1
1
Obtain integral 4
sin 2θ + 12 θ B1
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form c sin 2θ + bθ , where cb ≠ 0 M1
Obtain answer 121 3π + 83 , or exact equivalent A1 [4]
[The f.t. is on integrands of the form a cos 2θ + b , where ab ≠ 0.]

6 (i) EITHER: State correct derivative of sin y with respect to x B1

Use product rule to differentiate the LHS M1
Obtain correct derivative of the LHS A1
Obtain a complete and correct derived equation in any form A1
dy
Obtain a correct expression for in any form A1
dx
OR: State correct derivative of sin y with respect to x B1
Rearrange the given equation as sin y = x / (ln x + 2) and attempt to differentiate
both sides B1
Use quotient or product rule to differentiate the RHS M1
Obtain correct derivative of the RHS A1
dy
Obtain a correct expression for in any form A1 [5]
dx

dy
(ii) Equate to zero and obtain a horizontal equation in ln x or sin y M1
dx
Solve for ln x M1
Obtain final answer x = 1/ e , or exact equivalent A1 [3]

7 (i) Separate variables and attempt integration of one side M1

Obtain term −e − y A1
Integrate xe x by parts reaching xe x ± e x dx∫ M1
x x
Obtain integral xe − e A1
Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 0, y = 0 M1
Obtain correct solution in any form A1
Obtain final answer y = − ln(e x (1 − x)) , or equivalent A1 [7]

(ii) Justify the given statement B1 [1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2016 1049
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 32

8 (i) EITHER: Substitute for r in the given equation of p and expand scalar product M1
Obtain equation in λ in any correct form A1
Verify this is not satisfied for any value of λ A1
OR1: Substitute coordinates of a general point of l in the Cartesian equation of plane p M1
Obtain equation in λ in any correct form A1
Verify this is not satisfied for any value of λ A1
OR2: Expand scalar product of the normal to p and the direction vector of l M1
Verify scalar product is zero A1
Verify that one point of l does not lie in the plane A1
OR3: Use correct method to find the perpendicular distance of a general point
of l from p M1
Obtain a correct unsimplified expression in terms of λ A1
Show that the perpendicular distance is 5 / 6 , or equivalent, for all λ A1
OR4: Use correct method to find the perpendicular distance of a particular point
of l from p M1
Show that the perpendicular distance is 5 / 6 , or equivalent A1
Show that the perpendicular distance of a second point is also 5 / 6 , or
equivalent A1 [3]

(ii) EITHER: Calling the unknown direction vector ai + bj + ck state equation 2a + b + 3c = 0 B1

State equation 2a − b − c = 0 B1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain ratio a : b : c = 1 : 4 : − 2, or equivalent A1
OR: Attempt to calculate the vector product of the direction vector of l and the normal
vector of the plane p, e.g. (2i + j + 3k ) × (2i − j − k ) M2
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain answer 2i + 8 j − 4k , or equivalent A1
Form line equation with relevant vectors M1
Obtain answer r = 5i + 3 j + k + µ (i + 4 j − 2k ) , or equivalent A1 [6]

9 (i) State or obtain A = 3 B1

Use a relevant method to find a constant M1
Obtain one of B = −4, C = 4 and D = 0 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]

(ii) Integrate and obtain 3x − 4ln x B1

2
Integrate and obtain term of the form k ln( x + 2) M1
2
Obtain term 2ln( x + 2) A1
2
Substitute limits in an integral of the form ax + b ln x + c ln( x + 2) , where abc ≠ 0 M1
Obtain given answer 3 − ln 4 after full and correct working A1 [5]

10 (a) Substitute and obtain a correct equation in x and y B1

Use i 2 = −1 and equate real and imaginary parts M1
Obtain two correct equations, e.g. x + 2y +1 = 0 and y + 2x = 0 A1
Solve for x or for y M1
Obtain answer z = 13 − 23 i A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1050 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 32

(b) (i) Show a circle with centre −1 + 3 i B1

Show a circle with radius 1 B1
Show the line Im z = 3 B1
Shade the correct region B1 [4]

(ii) Carry out a complete method to calculate the relevant angle M1

Obtain answer 0.588 radians (accept 33.7°) A1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1051

Year 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 2x − 5 > 32x + 1. [4]

2 Using the substitution u = 3x , solve the equation 3x + 32x = 33x giving your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [5]

3 The angles 1 and & lie between 0Å and 180Å, and are such that
tan 1 − & = 3 and tan 1 + tan & = 1.

Find the possible values of 1 and &. [6]

4 The equation x3 − x2 − 6 = 0 has one real root, denoted by !.

(i) Find by calculation the pair of consecutive integers between which ! lies. [2]

(ii) Show that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

_P Q
6
xn+1 = xn +
xn
converges, then it converges to !. [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula to determine ! correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

5 The equation of a curve is y = e−2x tan x, for 0 ≤ x < 12 0.

dy
(i) Obtain an expression for and show that it can be written in the form e−2x a + b tan x2 , where
dx
a and b are constants. [5]

(ii) Explain why the gradient of the curve is never negative. [1]

(iii) Find the value of x for which the gradient is least. [1]

6 The polynomial 8x3 + ax2 + bx − 1, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
x + 1 is a factor of p x and that when p x is divided by 2x + 1 the remainder is 1.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, factorise p x completely. [3]

© UCLES 2015 9709/31/O/N/15

7 The points A, B and C have position vectors, relative to the origin O, given by
` a ` a ` a
−−→ 1 −−→ 3 −−→ 1
OA = 2 , OB = 0 and OC = 1 .
0 1 4
The plane m is perpendicular to AB and contains the point C.

(i) Find a vector equation for the line passing through A and B. [2]

(ii) Obtain the equation of the plane m, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [2]

(iii) The line through A and B intersects the plane m at the point N . Find the position vector of N

and show that CN = 13. [5]

8 The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
= x + 2 sin2 21,
d1
and it is given that x = 0 when 1 = 0. Solve the differential equation and calculate the value of x when
1 = 14 0, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [9]

9 The complex number 3 − i is denoted by u. Its complex conjugate is denoted by u*.

(i) On an Argand diagram with origin O, show the points A, B and C representing the complex
numbers u, u* and u* − u respectively. What type of quadrilateral is OABC? [4]

u*
(ii) Showing your working and without using a calculator, express in the form x + iy, where x
u
and y are real. [3]

u*
(iii) By considering the argument of , prove that
u

tan−1 34 = 2 tan−1 13 . 3

10
y

R
x
O 1 p

x2
The diagram shows the curve y = for x ≥ 0, and its maximum point M . The shaded region R
1 + x3
is enclosed by the curve, the x-axis and the lines x = 1 and x = p.

(i) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Calculate the value of p for which the area of R is equal to 1. Give your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [6]

© UCLES 2015 9709/31/O/N/15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 9709/31/O/N/15

0.0 Year 2015 www.Bmundo.com
1055

r
LA\S
q +oq ir" .0c* /Nov zo rs
2x-El > Z Z1t r I

2-/- - 5 3(>x + t
zE> ,r" + kz +l
" -zlt>t+>E ) x-L + 36 >,. '+
a> 5LX + r6)( - 16
x' + )( -2 < O
(x+z
a+t-
- x +Z : o

-Z< x<
_ ?x
2

Ut-iU:l
u--u'- u -- O
-r) = o
(r)'- qcrlr )
z
\ tG

x [n3 -- l,r

\ 5\_

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1056 www.Smundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

NO Dairi

3. ta"(o -/) = L 'ia, o + toad =

- to^ -2 = \ -tqa
I + taa $ to..'
taa s - *a,r 3taa U -la^
- {on - 3+3(r-1a"
-z{a" + 3 tan -3
-2 = o
-+t ton
= --L

= l,o"-{}-k3" {..

A = tLt.L'
IL

&* 5a.
q- 63. *z

l&oo - +s"
tJ>

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1057

1- - x - b =o
tot C7-) = *'-x- -6
*c,l = t - k -c
-L < O

fc:l -- z'- -(,

- z1 -1-6
= 12 > o
z2

ii) x3 - ,"' - ( = o
'r-3 +
L
x + L

x
L
ra q(6, =)

ii;) x,
xz {, +
xl
= L.z3La+.
2 zt+1 L
).zl8B2
|a. = >.2-l 8?? *=2.2t1 (s4.
?-.2i8+8
a/ = Z.>j

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1058 www.Smundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

--" sac--ra

Q:,* 9a-cz 1 - Ztoat

L ( 1+ ta"',c - ztanx
-2L

,.:tiv,.r-

a_ >o t - ta^lt ) >z o

'>.o AL! LT

-t-" ( t - *o^ rc
- *o. ,(
-ta. x-
-t

j
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1059

l.J. D.l.l

9r'+ ar'+ b1 - t

'rt = -l
+ a C{ ) + b (-l -t
a.. :o
-b
(- 5 :l
-)

-l+ *a L -t
-+b
a ->b : lL
f,-\
\_, - 6\
\<./ r--
u - ->.

a= 6

cx ) = ,t3 + 6*' - r-l

8x'- zr-
+ {-]L -31 -l
&x' + *x-
- 2>c- - 3rn
- >x' - L/-
- :x- -l

N+ y--LX-l
x+l qx + l)(z)( - I

s)",,,*,"..""'.'"'-,.
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1060 www.Bmundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

No Dale

? 0A= (:
\o )
i) ii od

\I
(:

iqa- A
'z
rr)

2x-2 +L 2-2 +

lino )( = I *)t _ -..,+

aL-z
+t
zt ) - z
2+kt - I +kt +t -Lz
qt -b

x= ll 2\3/ _z
7
3
- 0A/

CN -0 cN-
r:=
= JJ5

:-loA
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1061

ti. :)..:.:

o
.l d*
lo
nL or?-A= 1-2a;"'
1+ L ri"'A = r - coszA
z
I - cos k
x+L
e -Le -
si'a ? S +4
)v q

*o
c -- (nr-
(n lrt + t ..1_

-lnt' Ia gtrr Q I
I^--L
)c+2 -_1 *Isinzr-
a_

z
XtZ :
x=
I 1=

I
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1062 www.Smundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

NO Date

*_
1 l/ : 5Lq
l) -- zL
'7s ut,,)
-r)
E

OAGC is a (Lq (o

i) ,*
3+ L 3+ i
ti ?-( 3+i
+ bL -+ L
3 -r
t + 6i
lo
.-
Er-

ii) t (,(

= 1o,-'({\ - 1oi'(-L.
,-l
-ro^
tan-'
MA

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1063

li.. l:ii:-

1o
t= x'
[+ )C]
i) d" (+ 13 )(2x) - (t')(sx"
dn (t+ xt
)1 + 2:cq - 3,-+
( r + x3 )'
2r- - x'
( *'c')'
r1+

2x-x* =o
-r(z .' xl :0
2 - >c3 . o
)Lt -- z

il) L'
_f'
I l+rc3
4.tt"x'1=3rt-
d*
sx
t+.rc?

- ["2 ' 3
(n Lt+ p' 1 * (. 2-
3+tnu
Ls*\^t -l
3 !-

''ll
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1064 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1065
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not
lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote
a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by
substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be
implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1066 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error
in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1067
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 31

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (2 x − 5) 2 > (3(2 x + 1)) 2 , or corresponding

quadratic
equation, or pair of linear equations (2 x − 5) = ±3(2 x + 1) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations for x M1
Obtain critical values –2 and 1 A1
4
State final answer − 2 < x < 1 A1
4
OR: Obtain critical value x = −2 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by solving a
linear
equation or inequality B1
Obtain critical value x = 1 similarly B2
4
State final answer − 2 < x < 14 B1 [4]
[Do not condone ⩽ for < ]

2 State or imply 1 + u = u 2 B1
Solve for u M1
Obtain root 1 (1 + 5 ) , or decimal in [1.61, 1.62] A1
2
Use correct method for finding x from a positive root M1
Obtain x = 0.438 and no other answer A1 [5]

3 Use tan( A ± B ) and obtain an equation in tan θ and tan φ M1*

Substitute throughout for tan θ or for tan φ dep M1*
Obtain 3 tan 2 θ − tan θ − 4 = 0 or 3 tan 2 φ − 5 tan φ − 2 = 0 , or 3-term equivalent A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic and find an angle M1
Obtain answer θ = 135°, φ = 63.4° A1
Obtain answer θ = 53.1°, φ = 161.6° A1 [6]
[Treat answers in radians as a misread. Ignore answers outside the given interval.]
[SR: Two correct values of θ (or φ) score A1; then A1 for both correct θ, φ pairs.]

4 (i) Evaluate, or consider the sign of, x 3 − x 2 − 6 for two integer values of x, or equivalent M1
Obtain the pair x = 2 and x = 3, with no errors seen A1 [2]

(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. x = ( x + (6 / x)) B1

3 2
Rearrange this as x − x − 6 = 0 , or work vice versa B1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 2.219 A1
Show sufficient iterates to 5 d.p. to justify 2.219 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (2.2185, 2.2195) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1068 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 31

5 (i) State or imply that the derivative of e −2 x is − 2e −2 x B1

Use product or quotient rule M1
Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Use Pythagoras M1
Justify the given form A1 [5]

(ii) Fully justify the given statement B1 [1]

(iii) State answer x = 1 π B1 [1]

6 (i) Substitute x = −1 , equate to zero and simplify at least as far as − 8 + a − b − 1 = 0 B1

Substitute x = − 1 and equate the result to 1 M1
2
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. − 1 + 1 a − 1 b − 1 = 1 A1
4 2
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtain a = 6 and b = −3 A1 [5]

(ii) Commence division by (x + 1) reaching a partial quotient 8 x 2 + kx M1

Obtain quadratic factor 8 x 2 − 2 x − 1 A1
Obtain factorisation ( x + 1)(4 x + 1)(2 x − 1) A1 [3]
2
[The M1 is earned if inspection reaches an unknown factor 8 x + Bx + C and an equation
in B and/or C, or an unknown factor Ax 2 + Bx − 1 and an equation in A and/or B.]
[If linear factors are found by the factor theorem, give B1B1 for (2x –1) and (4x + 1), and
B1 for the complete factorisation.]

7 (i) Use correct method to form a vector equation for AB M1

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = i + 2 j + λ (2i − 2 j + k ) or r = 3i + k + µ ( 2i − 2 j + k ) A1 [2]

(ii) Using a direction vector for AB and a relevant point, obtain an equation for m in any form M1
Obtain answer 2x –2y + z = 4, or equivalent A1 [2]

(iii) Express general point of AB in component form, e.g. (1 + 2λ , 2 − 2λ , λ ) or

(3 + 2 µ , − 2 µ , 1 + µ ) B1
Substitute in equation of m and solve for λ or for µ M1
Obtain final answer 7 i + 2 j + 2 k for the position vector of N, from λ = 2 or µ = − 1 A1
3 3 3 3 3
Carry out a correct method for finding CN M1
Obtain the given answer 13 A1 [5]
[The f.t. is on the direction vector for AB.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1069
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 31

8 Separate variables and integrate one side B1

Obtain term ln( x + 2) B1
Use cos 2A formula to express sin 2 2θ in the form a + b cos 4θ M1
Obtain correct form (1 − cos 4θ ) / 2 , or equivalent A1
Integrate and obtain term 1 θ − 1 sin 4θ , or equivalent A1
2 8
Evaluate a constant, or use θ = 0, x = 0 as limits in a solution containing terms
c ln( x + 2), d sin( 4θ ), eθ M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln( x + 2) = 1 θ − 1 sin 4θ + ln 2 A1
2 8
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form ln( x + 2) = f M1
Obtain answer x = 0.962 A1 [9]

9 (i) Show u in a relatively correct position B1

Show u* in a relatively correct position B1
Show u* − u in a relatively correct position B1
State or imply that OABC is a parallelogram B1 [4]

(ii) EITHER: Substitute for u and multiply numerator and denominator by 3 + i, or equivalent M1
Simplify the numerator to 8 + 6i or the denominator to 10 A1
Obtain final answer 4 + 3 i , or equivalent A1
5 5
OR: Substitute for u, obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y M1
Obtain x = 4 or y = 3 , or equivalent A1
5 5
Obtain final answer + 3 i , or equivalent
4 A1 [3]
5 5

(iii) State or imply arg(u*/ u) = tan −1 ( 3 ) B1

4
Substitute exact arguments in arg(u ∗ / u ) = arg u ∗ − arg u M1
Fully justify the given statement using exact values A1 [3]

10 (i) Use the quotient rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = 3 2 , or exact equivalent A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply indefinite integral is of the form k ln(1 + x 3 ) M1

State indefinite integral 1 ln(1 + x 3 ) A1
3
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form k ln(1 + x 3 ) M1
State or imply that the area of R is equal to 1 ln(1 + p 3 ) − 1 ln 2 , or equivalent A1
3 3
Use a correct method for finding p from an equation of the form ln(1 + p 3 ) = a
or ln((l + p 3 ) / 2) = b M1
Obtain answer p = 3.40 A1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 2x − 5 > 32x + 1. [4]

2 Using the substitution u = 3x , solve the equation 3x + 32x = 33x giving your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [5]

3 The angles 1 and & lie between 0Å and 180Å, and are such that
tan 1 − & = 3 and tan 1 + tan & = 1.

Find the possible values of 1 and &. [6]

4 The equation x3 − x2 − 6 = 0 has one real root, denoted by !.

(i) Find by calculation the pair of consecutive integers between which ! lies. [2]

(ii) Show that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

_P Q
6
xn+1 = xn +
xn
converges, then it converges to !. [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula to determine ! correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

5 The equation of a curve is y = e−2x tan x, for 0 ≤ x < 12 0.

dy
(i) Obtain an expression for and show that it can be written in the form e−2x a + b tan x2 , where
dx
a and b are constants. [5]

(ii) Explain why the gradient of the curve is never negative. [1]

(iii) Find the value of x for which the gradient is least. [1]

6 The polynomial 8x3 + ax2 + bx − 1, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
x + 1 is a factor of p x and that when p x is divided by 2x + 1 the remainder is 1.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, factorise p x completely. [3]

© UCLES 2015 9709/32/O/N/15

(i) Find a vector equation for the line passing through A and B. [2]

(ii) Obtain the equation of the plane m, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [2]

(iii) The line through A and B intersects the plane m at the point N . Find the position vector of N

and show that CN = 13. [5]

8 The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
= x + 2 sin2 21,
d1
and it is given that x = 0 when 1 = 0. Solve the differential equation and calculate the value of x when
1 = 14 0, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [9]

9 The complex number 3 − i is denoted by u. Its complex conjugate is denoted by u*.

(i) On an Argand diagram with origin O, show the points A, B and C representing the complex
numbers u, u* and u* − u respectively. What type of quadrilateral is OABC? [4]

u*
(ii) Showing your working and without using a calculator, express in the form x + iy, where x
u
and y are real. [3]

u*
(iii) By considering the argument of , prove that
u

tan−1 34 = 2 tan−1 13 . 3

10
y

R
x
O 1 p

x2
The diagram shows the curve y = for x ≥ 0, and its maximum point M . The shaded region R
1 + x3
is enclosed by the curve, the x-axis and the lines x = 1 and x = p.

(i) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Calculate the value of p for which the area of R is equal to 1. Give your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [6]

© UCLES 2015 9709/32/O/N/15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 9709/32/O/N/15

0.0 Year 2015 1073

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1074 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not
lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote
a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by
substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be
implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1075
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error
in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1076 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 32

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (2 x − 5) 2 > (3(2 x + 1)) 2 , or corresponding

3 Use tan( A ± B ) and obtain an equation in tan θ and tan φ M1*

4 (i) Evaluate, or consider the sign of, x 3 − x 2 − 6 for two integer values of x, or equivalent M1
Obtain the pair x = 2 and x = 3, with no errors seen A1 [2]

(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. x = ( x + (6 / x)) B1

3 2
Rearrange this as x − x − 6 = 0 , or work vice versa B1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 2.219 A1
Show sufficient iterates to 5 d.p. to justify 2.219 to 3 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (2.2185, 2.2195) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1077
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 32

5 (i) State or imply that the derivative of e −2 x is − 2e −2 x B1

Use product or quotient rule M1
Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Use Pythagoras M1
Justify the given form A1 [5]

(ii) Fully justify the given statement B1 [1]

(iii) State answer x = 1 π B1 [1]

6 (i) Substitute x = −1 , equate to zero and simplify at least as far as − 8 + a − b − 1 = 0 B1

Substitute x = − 1 and equate the result to 1 M1
2
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. − 1 + 1 a − 1 b − 1 = 1 A1
4 2
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtain a = 6 and b = −3 A1 [5]

(ii) Commence division by (x + 1) reaching a partial quotient 8 x 2 + kx M1

7 (i) Use correct method to form a vector equation for AB M1

Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = i + 2 j + λ (2i − 2 j + k ) or r = 3i + k + µ ( 2i − 2 j + k ) A1 [2]

(ii) Using a direction vector for AB and a relevant point, obtain an equation for m in any form M1
Obtain answer 2x –2y + z = 4, or equivalent A1 [2]

(iii) Express general point of AB in component form, e.g. (1 + 2λ , 2 − 2λ , λ ) or

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1078 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 32

8 Separate variables and integrate one side B1

9 (i) Show u in a relatively correct position B1

Show u* in a relatively correct position B1
Show u* − u in a relatively correct position B1
State or imply that OABC is a parallelogram B1 [4]

(iii) State or imply arg(u*/ u) = tan −1 ( 3 ) B1

4
Substitute exact arguments in arg(u ∗ / u ) = arg u ∗ − arg u M1
Fully justify the given statement using exact values A1 [3]

10 (i) Use the quotient rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = 3 2 , or exact equivalent A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply indefinite integral is of the form k ln(1 + x 3 ) M1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Sketch the graph of y = eax − 1 where a is a positive constant. [2]

1 + 9x ≈ 1 + 3x + ax2 + bx3 for small values of x, find the values of the coefficients a
3
2 Given that
and b. [3]

3 A curve has equation

2 − tan x
y=
1 + tan x
.

Find the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point for which x = 14 0, giving the answer in the
form y = mx + c where c is correct to 3 significant figures. [6]

4 A curve has parametric equations

x = t2 + 3t + 1, y = t4 + 1.
The point P on the curve has parameter p. It is given that the gradient of the curve at P is 4.

(i) Show that p = 2p + 3.

3
[3]

(ii) Verify by calculation that the value of p lies between 1.8 and 2.0. [2]

(iii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to find the value of p correct to 2 decimal
places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

Use the substitution u = 4 − 3 cos x to find the exact value of Ô

2
9 sin 2x
4 − 3 cos x
5 dx. [8]
0

6 The angles A and B are such that

sin A + 45Å = 2ï2 cos A and 4 sec2 B + 5 = 12 tan B.

Without using a calculator, find the exact value of tan A − B. [8]

7 (i) Show that x + 1 is a factor of 4x3 − x2 − 11x − 6. [2]

4x2 + 9x − 1
(ii) Find Ô
4x3 − x2 − 11x − 6
dx. [8]

8 A plane has equation 4x − y + 5Ï = 39. A straight line is parallel to the vector i − 3j + 4k and passes
through the point A 0, 2, −8. The line meets the plane at the point B.

(i) Find the coordinates of B. [3]

(ii) Find the acute angle between the line and the plane. [4]

(iii) The point C lies on the line and is such that the distance between C and B is twice the distance
between A and B. Find the coordinates of each of the possible positions of the point C. [3]

© UCLES 2015 9709/33/O/N/15

9 (a) It is given that 1 + 3iw = 2 + 4i. Showing all necessary working, prove that the exact value of
w2 is 2 and find arg w2 correct to 3 significant figures. [6]

(b) On a single Argand diagram sketch the loci Ï = 5 and Ï − 5 = Ï . Hence determine the complex
numbers represented by points common to both loci, giving each answer in the form rei1 . [4]

10 Naturalists are managing a wildlife reserve to increase the number of plants of a rare species. The
number of plants at time t years is denoted by N , where N is treated as a continuous variable.

(i) It is given that the rate of increase of N with respect to t is proportional to N − 150. Write
down a differential equation relating N , t and a constant of proportionality. [1]

(ii) Initially, when t = 0, the number of plants was 650. It was noted that, at a time when there were
900 plants, the number of plants was increasing at a rate of 60 per year. Express N in terms of t.
[7]

(iii) The naturalists had a target of increasing the number of plants from 650 to 2000 within 15 years.
Will this target be met? [2]

© UCLES 2015 9709/33/O/N/15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 9709/33/O/N/15

1082 www.Smundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

v 20(9

t.
=a -l

l*9:-) = L
t -t + \ 3,/
2( 3l
{ I -)L- +...

3. = Z - taa rt
I ' ton.,.
I * tonx Lt- > -*' sacl/
i+ N-)
..\9C L

)c =
44_ -- z- I I

dot Q*r)' t+l

$: x--

-1
x a ++R -r

\
x + t-6
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1083

t3 +l

dv
=
rtu
-.+
-. C*
d;. Ct dt
zt r-3

+Z
(z +z

Qo'- I Czp,:)
e'(r.8,)3- q CzL(.8 ) +l
^7.012 <o
q (>)' zLr) * 3 )

va(va Vo+*nl.<, o,.[ z.o

ii,) p"+ r

P
P" Cr.B )+3

lz
p* - r.812 : l.& (z"(-
P, t.t132-

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1084 www.Smundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Dale

5. 3ca\)( Cog.l. = q -u

S;n 2-'(.
Q-3.osx-
a.=Jt ( - 3cos-4
d.

_t 6 co s rt : sr,^
", J.rr
-- J
',-n r | 4-u
./,-a

-t J

-t
-I
_T
= 8u - ZV
tL_ 9/-
.l-,2
= /6u'-
'5 + u' +c-

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1085

{" -+ (+5 z ) ccs A

ces Q5" + cas A sin q9' = 2)coriS
SM z, cos

{ s,xA ! cos A ) cos A-

{s;,nA = cos A
*aa k -- 3

sr.' E * g: - lz laa &

+ To^ + 5 -- { z (a'?tS
d4
L

- lL+a4 F, +
2ia^b ( >fa.6 -3
ztat B -7
*an &

*on N-g ta^ A - -ta"

t +{a,rft-[o.n8
z-L
t +C3X:-

-_ 3_
tl

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1086 www.Smundo.corn
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

ex- -Gx *L
Qx'-*"-'ll*--6
Q x? * kac-
- E-*' - tt t
-5*'* 5'l-
- (v- - (
-L^>L - 6
0

rS .to r
Qx'+ x- I

kr' - *'-ll,. - L
)(+ x" * 9 ,,. -
Q y-'
- x- - t lrt - L (r.trXQx"-E,r-6
x lc-l
(z+r)(9, "sXx-z
x"+ 9x . I A e- C
x+ rf,(x*:!x-z) )(+ I kz*3 x*>
Y',{ + '')x - x +5 x-1 + @ (x+ r)(r->
4C )<+t qr +1)
X.2 r)
"3Q:l
A (- r )(-3
3A
t
$ ?

B=B

€, --,---.-^"-"" -^
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1087

1. -l
<(1"-*'-rt,<-(
*2
x+l qx +3 )< -L
&

't l'" (x -z

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1088 www.Smundo.cOm
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

li3 ,1.i.

& i) Phn" Q*- -+5t-5

Lf , c-
-8 +
x-- t = 2-3t z -- -8 +k

. z+3t -Q0+>oL =3
11 J -0

G C >t-r 4. - >( : ? e=9

ii)
\\g-r
\
L
Co! 6r-
-t </)
_1 l+
\t
+ ? "t 20

0 = cos-rp.gt?_.,.
= 3 9.2"
.,, a c,,.te a br-|,,,2-o- la,lz
o'- I
ltt ftB 0c"
.-8 +9t
t.Oc- 5a
tq' ,-3

1L +

B( = zAL
t- +cq z ,lz-"1-+17'
t 8l:Sft +!{'+ lcry.1 -16t+t1'= Q (zav )
(t' - l5t t a,

''lt
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1089

N. Lli::.

3 i,i) L -b

e(q,-zr.23 t / .-2-o

-_ --l

S, ","
,".- ,"^".,""". ...
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1090 www.Bmundo.com
Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

l.lo Llal3

1a) l+ 3i l^r = Z _{. Yc

ur -- a+9c t- 3c
{ *3i t - 5(
+ YL -
-z
2_ c - 12 c
I - ti-
tv-za
to
a_
(? )' * 6,.'
ul'l = Lnt z
,-l-l
(,l) = taa' -?
-o.t+z.J
&.q L"l q)
IJ
-0.tgk
b1

OAM = B

BL cos 0
)L

#
4: E t '' -
=:E
&t bL

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 www.Smundo.com
1091

No. Date

/ri),lN = LCN-rro)
dL
dN

00 - {rd

N-{so
N-lS0 rc--

1,,

l" (tt - lso -- o0 + (n

[" N -i.ro - lr 9o0 =oo
(" / Ht -lvo
5oo
N-I-sD :
s.ao
9ao a_ + I,E o
o.orxas
'+ (]f0
1o < 20
-[his tc,r b. ou,:

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1092 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1093
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1094 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1095
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

1 Draw curve with increasing gradient existing for negative and positive values of x M1

Draw correct curve passing through the origin A1 [2]

2 Either State correct unsimplified x 2 or x 3 term M1

Obtain a = − 9 A1
Obtain b = 45 A1

5
−
Or Use chain rule to differentiate twice to obtain form k (1 + 9 x) 3 M1
5
−
Obtain f ′′( x ) = −18(1 + 9 x) 3 and hence a = − 9 A1
8
−
Obtain f ′′′( x ) = 270(1 + 9 x) 3 and hence b = 45 A1 [3]

3 Use correct quotient rule or equivalent to find first derivative M1*

− (1 + tan x) sec 2 x − sec 2 x(2 − tan x)
Obtain or equivalent A1
(1 + tan x) 2
1
Substitute x = π to find gradient dep M1*
4
3
Obtain − A1
2
1
Form equation of tangent at x = π M1
4
3
Obtain y = − x + 1.68 or equivalent A1 [6]
2

dy y& dy
4 (i) Use = and equate to 4 M1
dx x& dx
4 p3
Obtain = 4 or equivalent A1
2p + 3
Confirm given result p = 3 2 p + 3 correctly A1 [3]

(ii) Evaluate p − 3 2 p + 3 or p 3 − 2 p − 3 or equivalent at 1.8 and 2.0 M1

Justify result with correct calculations and argument
(–0.076 and 0.087 or –0.77 and 1 respectively) A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative process correctly at least once with 1.8 ⩽ pn ⩽ 2.0 M1
Obtain final answer 1.89 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify 1.89 or show sign change in
interval (1.885, 1.895) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1096 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

5 State du = 3 sin x dx or equivalent B1

Use identity sin 2 x = 2 sin x cos x B1
Carry out complete substitution, for x and dx M1
8 − 2u
Obtain ∫u
du , or equivalent A1
1 3
Integrate to obtain expression of form au 2 + bu 2 , ab ≠ 0 M1*
1 3
4
Obtain correct 16u − u 2
2 A1
3

Apply correct limits correctly dep M1*

20
Obtain or exact equivalent A1 [8]
3

6 State or imply sin A × cos 45 + cos A × sin 45 = 2 2 cos A B1

Divide by cos A to find value of tan A M1
Obtain tan A = 3 A1
Use identity sec 2 B = 1 + tan 2 B B1
Solve three-term quadratic equation and find tan B M1
3
Obtain tan B = only A1
2
tan A − tan B
Substitute numerical values in M1
1 + tan A tan B
3
Obtain A1 [8]
11

7 (i) Either Substitute x = −1 and evaluate M1

Obtain 0 and conclude x + 1 is a factor A1

Or Divide by x + 1 and obtain a constant remainder M1

Obtain remainder = 0 and conclude x + 1 is a factor A1 [2]

(ii) Attempt division, or equivalent, at least as far as quotient 4 x 2 + kx M1

Obtain complete quotient 4 x 2 − 5x − 6 A1
A B C
State form + + A1
x + 1 x − 2 4x + 3
Use relevant method for finding at least one constant M1
Obtain one of A = −2, B = 1, C = 8 A1
Obtain all three values A1
Integrate to obtain three terms each involving natural logarithm of linear form M1
Obtain − 2 ln( x + 1) + ln( x − 2) + 2 ln(4 x + 3) , condoning no use of modulus signs
and absence of … + c A1 [8]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1097
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

8 (i) Express a general point on the line in single component form, e.g. (λ , 2 − 3λ , − 8 + 4λ ) ,
substitute in equation of plane and solve for λ M1
Obtain λ = 3 A1
Obtain (3, − 7, 4) A1 [3]

(ii) State or imply normal vector to plane is 4i – j + 5k B1

Carry out process for evaluating scalar product of two relevant vectors M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product
of the moduli and evaluate sin −1 or cos−1 of the result. M1
Obtain 54.8° or 0.956 radians A1 [4]

(iii) Either Find at least one position of C by translating by appropriate multiple

of direction vector i – 3j + 4k from A or B M1
Obtain (−3, 11, − 20) A1
Obtain (9, − 25, 28) A1

Or Form quadratic equation in λ by considering BC 2 = 4AB 2 M1

Obtain 26λ2 − 156λ − 702 = 0 or equivalent and hence λ = −3, λ = 9 A1
Obtain (−3, 11, − 20) and (9, − 25, 28) A1 [3]

9 (a) Either Find w using conjugate of 1+ 3i M1

7−i
Obtain or equivalent A1
5
Square x + iy form to find w 2 M1
48 − 14i
Obtain w 2 = and confirm modulus is 2 A1
25
Use correct process for finding argument of w 2 M1
Obtain –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1

Or 1 Find w using conjugate of 1+ 3i M1

7−i
Obtain or equivalent A1
5
Find modulus of w and hence of w 2 M1
Confirm modulus is 2 A1
Find argument of w and hence of w 2 M1
Obtain –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1

Or 2 Square both sides to obtain (−8 + 6i) w 2 = −12 + 16i B1

2
Find w using relevant conjugate M1
Use correct process for finding modulus of w 2 M1
Confirm modulus is 2 A1
Use correct process for finding argument of w 2 M1
Obtain –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1098 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

Or 3 Find modulus of LHS and RHS M1

Find argument of LHS and RHS M1
Obtain 10 e 1.249 i w = 20 e 1.107 i or equivalent A1
Obtain w = 2 e −0.1419i or equivalent A1
Use correct process for finding w 2 M1
Obtain 2 and –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1

Or 4 Find moduli of 2 + 4i and 1+ 3i M1

Obtain 20 and 10 A1
Obtain w 2 = 2 correctly A1
Find arg(2 + 4i) and arg(1 + 3i) M1
2
Use correct process for arg( w ) A1
Obtain –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1

Or 5 Let w = a + ib , form and solve simultaneous equations in a and b M1

7 1
a = and b = − A1
5 5
Find modulus of w and hence of w 2 M1
Confirm modulus is 2 A1
Find argument of w and hence of w 2 M1
Obtain –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1

Or 6 Find w using conjugate of 1+ 3i M1

7−i
Obtain or equivalent A1
5
Use w 2 = ww M1
Confirm modulus is 2 A1
Find argument of w and hence of w 2 M1
Obtain –0.284 radians or − 16.3° A1 [6]

(b) Draw circle with centre the origin and radius 5 B1

Draw straight line parallel to imaginary axis in correct position B1
Use relevant trigonometry on a correct diagram to find argument(s) M1
1
± πi
Obtain 5e 3 or equivalents in required form A1 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1099
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2015 9709 33

dN
10 (i) State = k ( N − 150 ) B1 [1]
dt

dN
(ii) Substitute = 60 and N = 900 to find value of k M1
dt
Obtain k = 0.08 A1
Separate variables and obtain general solution involving ln( N − 150) M1*
Obtain ln( N − 150) = 0.08t + c (following their k ) or ln( N − 150) = kt + c A1
Substitute t = 0 and N = 650 to find c dep M1*
Obtain ln( N − 150) = 0.08t + ln500 or equivalent A1
Obtain N = 500e 0.08t + 150 A1 [7]

(iii) Either Substitute t = 15 to find N or solve for t with N = 2000 M1

Obtain Either N = 1810 or t = 16.4 and conclude target not met A1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Use logarithms to solve the equation 25x = 32x+1 , giving the answer correct to 3 significant figures.
[4]

2 Use the trapezium rule with three intervals to find an approximation to

Ó 3x − 10 dx.

3
4
0

3 Show that, for small values of x2 ,

−2
1 − 2x2 − 1 + 6x2 3 ≈ kx4 ,
2

where the value of the constant k is to be determined. [6]

4 The equation of a curve is

y = 3 cos 2x + 7 sin x + 2.
Find the x-coordinates of the stationary points in the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 0. Give each answer correct to
3 significant figures. [7]

5 (a) Find Ó 4 + tan2 2x dx. [3]

10
sin x + 16 0

(b) Find the exact value of Ô
2

dx. [5]
10
sin x
4

6 The straight line l1 passes through the points 0, 1, 5 and 2, −2, 1. The straight line l2 has equation
r = 7i + j + k + - i + 2j + 5k.

(i) Show that the lines l1 and l2 are skew. [6]

(ii) Find the acute angle between the direction of the line l2 and the direction of the x-axis. [3]

7 Given that y = 1 when x = 0, solve the differential equation

= 4x 3y2 + 10y + 3,

dy
dx
obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [9]

22 + 4i
The complex number w is defined by w =
2 − i2
8 .

(i) Without using a calculator, show that w = 2 + 4i. [3]

(ii) It is given that p is a real number such that 14 0 ≤ arg w + p ≤ 34 0. Find the set of possible values
of p. [3]

(iii) The complex conjugate of w is denoted by w*. The complex numbers w and w* are represented
in an Argand diagram by the points S and T respectively. Find, in the form Ï − a = k, the
equation of the circle passing through S, T and the origin. [3]

© UCLES 2015 9709/31/M/J/15

9
y

x
O

The diagram shows the curve y = x2 e2−x and its maximum point M .

(i) Show that the x-coordinate of M is 2. [3]

(ii) Find the exact value of Ó x2 e2−x dx.

2
[6]
0

10
y

O x

The diagram shows part of the curve with parametric equations

x = 2 ln t + 2, y = t3 + 2t + 3.

(i) Find the gradient of the curve at the origin. [5]

(ii) At the point P on the curve, the value of the parameter is p. It is given that the gradient of the
curve at P is 12 .

(a) Show that p = − 2.

1
3p + 2
2
[1]

(b) By first using an iterative formula based on the equation in part (a), determine the coordinates
of the point P. Give the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places and each coordinate of
P correct to 2 decimal places. [4]

© UCLES 2015 9709/31/M/J/15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 9709/31/M/J/15

0.0 Year 2015 1103

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1104 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1105

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1106 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1107

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1108 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1109

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1110 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1111

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3 (Paper 3), maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1112 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1113
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1114 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 31

1 Use law for the logarithm of a power at least once *M1

Obtain correct linear equation, e.g. 5 xIn 2 = ( 2 x + 1)In3 A1
Solve a linear equation for x M1 dep *M
Obtain x = 0.866 A1 [4]

2 Attempt calculation of at least 3 ordinates M1

Obtain 9, 7, 1, 17 A1
Use trapezium rule with h = 1 M1
1
Obtain ( 9 + 14 + 2 + 17 ) or equivalent and hence 21 A1 [4]
2

3 Either Obtain correct (unsimplified) version of x 2 or x 4 term in (1 − 2 x 2 ) −2 M1

2
Obtain 1 + 4 x A1
Obtain … + 12x 4 A1
2
Obtain correct (unsimplified) version of x 2 or x 4 term in (1 + 6 x 2 ) 3 M1
2 4
Obtain 1 + 4 x − 4 x A1
Combine expansions to obtain k = 16 with no error seen A1
2
Or Obtain correct (unsimplified) version of x 2 or x 4 term in (1 + 6 x 2 ) 3 M1
2
Obtain 1 + 4 x A1
Obtain … − 4x 4 A1
Obtain correct (unsimplified) version of x 2 or x 4 term in (1 − 2 x 2 ) −2 M1
Obtain 1 + 4 x 2 + 12 x 4 A1
Combine expansions to obtain k = 16 with no error seen A1 [6]

4 Differentiate to obtain form a sin 2 x + b cos x M1

Obtain correct − 6 sin 2 x + 7 cos x A1
Use identity sin 2 x = 2 sin x cos x B1
Solve equation of form c sin x cos x + d cos x = 0 to find at least one value of x M1
Obtain 0.623 A1
Obtain 2.52 A1
1
Obtain 1.57 or π from equation of form c sin x cos x + d cos x = 0 A1
2
Treat answers in degrees as MR – 1 situation [7]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1115
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 31

5 (a) Use identity tan 2 2 x = sec 2 2 x − 1 B1

Obtain integral of form ax + b tan 2 x M1
1
Obtain correct 3x + tan 2x , condoning absence of + c A1 [3]
2

1 1
(b) State sin x cos π + cos x sin π B1
2 6
1 cos x sin 16 π
Simplify integrand to cos π+ or equivalent B1
6 sin x
Integrate to obtain at least term of form a In(sin x) *M1
Apply limits and simplify to obtain two terms M1 dep *M
1 1 1
Obtain π 3− ln( ) or equivalent A1 [5]
8 2 2

 2 
 
6 (i) Obtain ±  − 3  as direction vector of l1 B1
 − 4
 
State that two direction vectors are not parallel B1
Express general point of l1 or l 2 in component form, e.g. (2λ , 1 − 3λ , 5 − 4λ )
or (7 + µ , l + 2 µ , 1 + 5µ ) B1
Equate at least two pairs of components and solve for λ or for µ M1
Obtain correct answers for λ and µ A1
Verify that all three component equations are not satisfied (with no errors seen) A1 [6]
1 1
   
(ii) Carry out correct process for evaluating scalar product of  2  and  0  M1
 5 0
   
Use correct process for finding modulus and evaluating inverse cosine M1
Obtain 79.5° or 1.39 radians A1 [3]

dy
7 Separate variables and factorise to obtain = 4 x dx or equivalent B1
(3 y + 1)( y + 3)
A B
State or imply the form + and use a relevant method to find A or B M1
3y + 1 y + 3
3 1
Obtain A = and B = − A1
8 8
Integrate to obtain form k1ln(3 y + 1) + k2ln(y + 3) M1
1 1
Obtain correct ln(3 y + 1) − ln(y = 3) = 2 x 2 or equivalent A1
8 8
2
Substitute x = 0 and y = 1 in equation of form k1ln(3 y + 1) + k2ln(y + 3) = k3 x + c
to find a value of c M1
Obtain c = 0 A1
Use correct process to obtain equation without natural logarithm present M1
2
3e16 x − 1
Obtain y = 2
or equivalent A1 [9]
3 − e16 x

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1116 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 31

8 (i) Either Expand (2 − i) 2 to obtain 3 − 4i or unsimplified equivalent B1

Multiply by 3 + 4i and simplify to x + iy form or equivalent M1
3 + 4i
Confirm given answer 2 + 4i A1
Or Expand (2 − i) 2 to obtain 3 − 4i or unsimplified equivalent B1
Obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or y M1
Confirm given answer 2 + 4i A1 [3]

(ii) Identify 4 + 4 or − 4 + 4i as point at either end or state p = 2 or state p = −6 B1

Use appropriate method to find both critical values of p M1
State –6 Y p Y 2 A1 [3]

(iii) Identify equation as of form z − a = a or equivalent M1

2 2 2
Form correct equation for a not involving modulus, e.g. (a − 2) + 4 = a A1
State z − 5 = 5 A1 [3]

9 (i) Use product rule to find first derivative M1

Obtain 2 xe 2− x − x 2 e 2− x A1
Confirm x = 2 at M A1 [3]

∫
(ii) Attempt integration by parts and reach ± x 2 e 2− x ± 2 xe 2− x dx *M1

∫
Obtain − x 2 e 2− x + 2 xe 2− x dx A1

Attempt integration by parts and reach ± x 2 e 2− x ± 2 xe 2− x ± 2e 2− x *M1

Obtain − x 2 e 2− x − 2 xe 2− x − 2e 2− x A1
Use limits 0 and 2 having integrated twice M1 dep *M
Obtain 2e 2 − 10 A1 [6]

dx 2 dy
10 (i) Obtain = and = 3t 2 + 2 B1
dt t + 2 dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
dy 1
Obtain = (3t 2 + 2)(t + 2) A1
dx 2
Identify value of t at the origin as –1 B1
5
Substitute to obtain as gradient at the origin A1 [5]
2

1 1
(ii) (a) Equate derivative to and confirm p = −22
B1 [1]
2 3p + 2
(b) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1
Obtain value p = −1.924 or better (–1.92367…) A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify accuracy or show a sign change in
appropriate interval A1
Obtain coordinates (–5.15, –7.97) A1 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Use the trapezium rule with three intervals to estimate the value of
10

Ó ln 1 + sin x dx,
2

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

2 Using the substitution u = 4x , solve the equation 4x + 42 = 4x+2 , giving your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [4]

3 A curve has equation y = cos x cos 2x. Find the x-coordinate of the stationary point on the curve in
the interval 0 < x < 12 0, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [6]

4 (i) Express 3 sin 1 + 2 cos 1 in the form R sin 1 + !, where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å, stating the exact
value of R and giving the value of ! correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

3 sin 1 + 2 cos 1 = 1,
for 0Å < 1 < 180Å. [3]

5
A

O 2x rad T

The diagram shows a circle with centre O and radius r. The tangents to the circle at the points A and
B meet at T , and the angle AOB is 2x radians. The shaded region is bounded by the tangents AT and
BT , and by the minor arc AB. The perimeter of the shaded region is equal to the circumference of the
circle.

(i) Show that x satisfies the equation

tan x = 0 − x. 3

(ii) This equation has one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 0. Verify by calculation that this root lies
between 1 and 1.3. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = tan−1 0 − xn
to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

© UCLES 2015 9709/32/M/J/15

3
1
Let I = Ô
x
2− x
6 dx.
0

2 2 − u2
2

(i) Using the substitution u = 2 − x, show that I = Ô

du. [4]
u
1

(ii) Hence show that I = 8 ln 2 − 5. [4]

7 The complex number u is given by u = −1 + 4ï3i.

(i) Without using a calculator and showing all your working, find the two square roots of u. Give
your answers in the form a + ib, where the real numbers a and b are exact. [5]

(ii) On an Argand diagram, sketch the locus of points representing complex numbers Ï satisfying
the relation Ï − u = 1. Determine the greatest value of arg Ï for points on this locus. [4]

5x2 + x + 6
Let f x =
3 − 2x x2 + 4
8 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

9 The number of organisms in a population at time t is denoted by x. Treating x as a continuous variable,

the differential equation satisfied by x and t is
x e −t
=
dx
k + e −t
,
dt
where k is a positive constant.

(i) Given that x = 10 when t = 0, solve the differential equation, obtaining a relation between x, k
and t. [6]

(ii) Given also that x = 20 when t = 1, show that k = 1 −

2
. [2]
e

(iii) Show that the number of organisms never reaches 48, however large t becomes. [2]

−−→ −−→
10 The points A and B have position vectors given by OA = 2i − j + 3k and OB = i + j + 5k. The line l
has equation r = i + j + 2k + - 3i + j − k.

(i) Show that l does not intersect the line passing through A and B. [5]

(ii) Find the equation of the plane containing the line l and the point A. Give your answer in the
form ax + by + cÏ = d. [6]

© UCLES 2015 9709/32/M/J/15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 9709/32/M/J/15

1120 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1121

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1122 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1123

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1124 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1125

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1126 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1127

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1128 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1129

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1130 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine
doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of
the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently
be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1131
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR – 1 A penalty of MR – 1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR – 2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA – 1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA – 1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1132 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 32

1 State or imply ordinates 0, 0.405465…, 0.623810…, 0.693147… B1

1
Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = π and four ordinates M1
6
Obtain answer 0.72 A1 [3]

2 Use laws of indices correctly and solve for u M1

16
Obtain u in any correct form, e.g. u = A1
16 − 1
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 4 x = a , where a > 0 M1
Obtain answer x = 0.0466 A1 [4]

3 EITHER: Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. − sin x cos 2 x − 2 cos x sin 2 x A1
Use the correct double angle formulae to express derivative in cos x and sin x,
or cos 2x and sin x M1
OR1: Use correct double angle formula to express y in terms of cos x and attempt
differentiation M1
Use chain rule correctly M1
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. − 6 cos 2 x sin x + sin x A1
OR2: Use correct factor formula and attempt differentiation M1
3 1
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. − sin 3x − sin x A1
2 2
Use correct trig formulae to express derivative in terms of cos x and sin x, or sin x M1
Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in one trig function M1
Obtain 6 cos 2 x = 1 , 6 sin 2 x = 5 , tan 2 x = 5 or 3 cos 2 x = −2 A1
Obtain answer x = 1.15 (or 65.9°) and no other in the given interval A1 [6]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval.]
[SR: Solution attempts following the EITHER scheme for the first two marks can earn the
second and third method marks as follows:
Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in tan 2x and tan x M1
Use correct double angle formula to obtain an equation in tan x M1]

4 (i) State R = 13 B1
Use trig formula to find α M1
Obtain α = 33.69° with no errors seen A1 [3]

(ii) Evaluate sin −1 (1 / 13 ) to at least 1 d.p. (16.10° to 2 d.p ) B1

Carry out an appropriate method to find a value of θ in the interval 0° < θ < 180° M1
Obtain answer θ = 130.2° and no other in the given interval A1 [3]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval.]
[Treat answers in radians as a misread and deduct A1 from the marks for the angles.]

5 (i) State or imply AT = r tan x or BT = r tan x B1

Use correct arc formula and form an equation in r and x M1
Rearrange in the given form A1 [3]

(ii) Calculate values of a relevant expression or expressions at x = 1 and x = 1.3 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1133
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 32

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.11 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.11 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in
the interval (1.105, 1.115) A1 [3]

1
6 (i) State or imply du = − dx , or equivalent B1
2 x
Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
± 2( 2 − u ) 2
Obtain integrand , or equivalent A1
u
Show correct working to justify the change in limits and obtain the given answer with
no errors seen A1 [4]

(ii) Integrate and obtain at least two terms of the form a ln u, bu, and cu 2 M1*
2
Obtain indefinite integral 8 ln u − 8u + u , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits correctly M1(dep*)
Obtain the given answer correctly having shown sufficient working A1 [4]

7 (i) Square x + iy and equate real and imaginary parts to −1 and 4 3 M1

2 2
Obtain x − y = −1 and 2 xy = 4 3 A1
Eliminate one unknown and find an equation in the other M1
Obtain x 4 + x 2 − 12 = 0 or y 4 − y 2 − 12 = 0 , or three term equivalent A1
Obtain answers ± ( 3 + 2i) A1 [5]
[If the equations are solved by inspection, give B2 for the answers and B1 for justifying them]

(ii) Show a circle with centre − 1+ 4 3 in a relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with radius 1 and centre not at the origin B1
Carry out a complete method for calculating the greatest value of arg z M1
Obtain answer 1.86 or 106.4° A1 [4]

A Bx + C
8 (i) State or imply the form + 2 B1
3 − 2x x + 4
Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = 3, B = −1, C = −2 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]

2
(ii) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion of (3 − 2 x) −1 , (1− x) −1 ,
3
1
(4 + x 2 ) −1 or (1+ x 2 ) −1 M1
4
Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x 2 of each partial fraction A1 +A1
Multiply out up to the term in x2 by Bx +C, where BC ≠ 0 M1
1 5 41
Obtain final answer + x+ x 2 , or equivalent A1 [5]
2 12 72

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1134 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 32

 − 1
[Symbolic coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient for the first M1.The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
2
[In the case of an attempt to expand (5 x 2 + x + 6)(3 − 2 x) −1 ( x 2 + 4) −1 , give
M1A1A1for the expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]

9 (i) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of one side B1

Obtain term ln x B1
Obtain term of the form a ln(k + e − t ) M1
Obtain term − ln(k + e −t ) A1
−t
Evaluate a constant or use limits x = 10, t = 0 in a solution containing terms a ln(k + e )
and b ln x M1*
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln x − ln 10 = − ln(k + e −t ) + ln(k + 1) A1 [6]

(ii) Substitute x = 20, t = 1 and solve for k M1(dep*)

Obtain the given answer A1 [2]

(iii) Using e −t → 0 and the given value of k, find the limiting value of x M1
Justify the given answer A1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1135
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 32

10 (i) Carry out a correct method for finding a vector equation for AB M1
Obtain r = 2i − j + 3k + λ ( −i + 2 j + 2k ) , or equivalent A1
Equate at least two pairs of components of general points on AB and l and solve for λ or
for µ M1
4 3
Obtain correct answer for λ or µ, e.g. λ = 1 or µ = 0; λ = − or µ = ;
5 5
1 3
or λ = or µ = − A1
4 2
Verify that not all three pairs of equations are satisfied and that the lines fail to intersect A1 [5]

(ii) EITHER: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. i − 2 j + k B1
Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b and c, e.g. 3a + b − c = 0 B1
Form a second relevant equation, e.g. a – 2b + c = 0 and solve for one ratio,
e.g. a : b M1
Obtain final answer a : b : c = 1 : 4 : 7 A1
Use coordinates of a relevant point and values of a, b and c in general equation
and find d M1
Obtain answer x + 4y + 7z = 19, or equivalent A1
OR1: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. i − 2 j + k B1
Obtain a second relevant vector parallel to the plane and attempt to calculate
their vector product, e.g. (i − 2 j + k ) × (3i + j − k ) M1
Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain correct answer, e.g. i + 4 j + 7k A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in x + 4y + 7z = d, or equivalent,
and find d M1
Obtain answer x + 4y + 7z = 19, or equivalent A1
OR2: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. i − 2 j + k B1
Using a relevant point and second relevant vector, form a 2-parameter equation
for the plane M1
State a correct equation, e.g. r = 2i − j + 3k + s (i − 2 j + k ) + t (3i + j − k ) A1
State 3 correct equations in x, y, z, s and t A1
Eliminate s and t M1
Obtain answer x + 4y + 7z = 19, or equivalent A1
OR3: Using the coordinates of A and two points on l, state three simultaneous
equations in a, b, c and d, e.g. a + b + 2c = d, 2a − b + 3c = d and 4a + 2b + c = d B1
Solve and find one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
State one correct ratio A1
Obtain a correct ratio of three of the unknowns, e.g. a : b : c = 1 : 4 : 7,
or equivalent A1
Either use coordinates of a relevant point and the found ratio to find the fourth
unknown, e.g. d, or find the ratio a : b : c : d M1
Obtain answer x + 4y + 7z = 19, or equivalent A1
OR4: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. i − 2 j + k B1
Using a relevant point and second relevant vector, form a determinant equation
for the plane M1
x − 2 y +1 z − 3
State a correct equation, e.g. 1 −2 1 =0 A1
3 1 −1
Attempt to expand the determinant M1
Obtain or imply two correct cofactors A1
Obtain answer x + 4y +7z =19, or equivalent A1 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation ln x + 4 = 2 ln x + ln 4, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

2 Solve the inequality x − 2 > 2x − 3. [4]

3 Solve the equation cot 2x + cot x = 3 for 0Å < x < 180Å. [6]

e2x
4 The curve with equation y = has one stationary point. Find the exact values of the coordinates
4 + e3x
of this point. [6]

5 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = a cos4 t, y = a sin4 t,
where a is a positive constant.

dy
(i) Express in terms of t. [3]
dx

(ii) Show that the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point with parameter t is

x sin2 t + y cos2 t = a sin2 t cos2 t. 3

(iii) Hence show that if the tangent meets the x-axis at P and the y-axis at Q, then
OP + OQ = a,
where O is the origin. [2]

a
6 It is given that Ó x cos x dx = 0.5, where 0 < a < 12 0.
0

1.5 − cos a
(i) Show that a satisfies the equation sin a = . [4]
a
(ii) Verify by calculation that a is greater than 1. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

P Q
−1 1.5 − cos an
an+1 = sin
an
to determine the value of a correct to 4 decimal places, giving the result of each iteration to
6 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2015 9709/33/M/J/15

7 The number of micro-organisms in a population at time t is denoted by M . At any time the variation
in M is assumed to satisfy the differential equation
dM
= k ïM cos 0.02t,
dt
where k is a constant and M is taken to be a continuous variable. It is given that when t = 0, M = 100.

(i) Solve the differential equation, obtaining a relation between M , k and t. [5]

(ii) Given also that M = 196 when t = 50, find the value of k. [2]

(iii) Obtain an expression for M in terms of t and find the least possible number of micro-organisms.
[2]

8 The complex number 1 − i is denoted by u.

(i) Showing your working and without using a calculator, express

i
u
in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [2]

(ii) On an Argand diagram, sketch the loci representing complex numbers Ï satisfying the equations
Ï − u = Ï and Ï − i = 2. [4]

(iii) Find the argument of each of the complex numbers represented by the points of intersection of
the two loci in part (ii). [3]

9 Two planes have equations x + 3y − 2Ï = 4 and 2x + y + 3Ï = 5. The planes intersect in the straight
line l.

(i) Calculate the acute angle between the two planes. [4]

(ii) Find a vector equation for the line l. [6]

11x + 7
10 Let f x = .
2x − 1 x + 22

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

2
(ii) Show that Ó f x dx = 1
4
+ ln 94 . [5]
1

© UCLES 2015 9709/33/M/J/15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2015 9709/33/M/J/15

0.0 Year 2015 1139

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1140 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1141

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1142 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1143

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1144 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1145

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1146 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1147

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1148 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1149
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1150 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

1 Use law for the logarithm of a product, quotient or power M1

x+4
Obtain a correct equation free of logarithms, e.g. =4 A1
x2
Solve a 3-term quadratic obtaining at least one root M1
Obtain final answer x = 1.13 only A1 4

2 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality ( x − 2) 2 > ( 2 x − 3) 2 , or corresponding equation B1

Solve a 3-term quadratic, as in Q1. M1
5
Obtain critical value x = A1
3
5
State final answer x < only A1
3
OR1: State the relevant critical linear inequality (2 − x) > (2 x − 3) , or corresponding
equation B1
Solve inequality or equation for x M1
5
Obtain critical value x = A1
3
5
State final answer x < only A1
3
OR2: Make recognisable sketches of y = 2x – 3 and y = x − 2 on a single diagram B1
Find x-coordinate of the intersection M1
5
Obtain x = A1
3
5
State final answer x < only A1 4
3

3 Use correct tan 2A and cot A formulae to form an equation in tan x M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1
Reduce equation to the form tan 2 x + 6 tan x − 3 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Solve a three term quadratic in tan x for x, as in Q1. M1
Obtain answer, e.g. 24.9° (24.896) A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. 98.8 (98.794) and no others in the given interval A1 6
[Ignore outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread.]
Radian answers 0.43452, 1.7243

4 Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and obtain a horizontal equation M1
Carry out complete method for solving an equation of the form ae3 x = b , or ae5 x = be 2 x M1
Obtain x = ln 2 , or exact equivalent A1
1
Obtain y = , or exact equivalent A1 6
3

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1151
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

dx dy
5 (i) State = −4a cos 3 t sin t , or = 4a sin 3 t cos t B1
dt dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
dy
Obtain correct expression for in a simplified form A1 3
dx

(ii) Form the equation of the tangent M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1
Obtain the given answer A1 3

(iii) State the x-coordinate of P or the y-coordinate of Q in any form B1

Obtain the given result correctly B1 2

6 ∫
(i) Integrate and reach ± x sin x m sin x dx M1*
Obtain integral x sin x + cos x A1
Substitute limits correctly, must be seen since AG, and equate result to 0.5 M1(dep*)
Obtain the given form of the equation A1 4

(ii) EITHER: Consider the sign of a relevant expression at a = 1 and at another relevant value,
π
e.g. a = 1.5 Y M1
2
OR: Using limits correctly, consider the sign of [x sin x + cos x ]0a − 0.5 , or compare
the value of [x sin x + cos x ]0a with 0.5, for a =1 AND for another relevant value,
π
e.g a = 1.5 Y . M1
2
Complete the argument, so change of sign, or above and below stated, both with correct
calculated values A1 2

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.2461 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 6 d.p. to justify 1.2461 to 4 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.24605, 1.24615) A1 3

7 (i) Separate variables correctly and integrate one side B1

Obtain term 2 M , or equivalent B1
Obtain term 50k sin(0.02t ) , or equivalent B1
Evaluate a constant of integration, or use limits M = 100, t =0 in a solution with terms of
the form a M and b sin(0.02t ) M1*
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. 2 M = 50k sin(0.02t ) + 20 A1 5

(ii) Use values M =196, t =50 and calculate k M1(dep*)

Obtain answer k = 0.190 A1 2

(iii) State an expression for M in terms of t, e.g. M = ( 4.75 sin( 0.02t ) + 10) 2 M1(dep*)
State that the least possible number of micro-organisms is 28 or 27.5 or 27.6 (27.5625) A1 2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1152 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

i
8 (i) EITHER: Substitute for u in and multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + i M1
u
1 1
Obtain final answer − + i , or equivalent A1
2 2
OR: Substitute for u, obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y M1
1 1
Obtain final answer − + i , or equivalent A1 2
2 2

(ii) Show a point representing u in a relatively correct position B1

Show the bisector of the line segment joining u to the origin B1
Show a circle with centre at the point representing i B1
Show a circle with radius 2 B1 4

1
(iii) State argument − π , or equivalent, e.g. 270° B1
2
State or imply the intersection in the first quadrant represents 2 + i B1
State argument 0.464, (0.4636)or equivalent, e.g. 26.6° (26.5625) B1 3

9 (i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. i + 3 j − 2k , or 2i + j + 3k B1

Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of two normal vectors M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product of the two normals by
the product of their moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result M1
Obtain answer 85.9° or 1.50 radians A1 4

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2015 1153
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

(ii) EITHER: Carry out a complete strategy for finding a point on l M1

Obtain such a point, e.g. (0, 2, 1) A1
EITHER: State two equations for a direction vector ai + bj + ck for l,
e.g. a + 3b – 2c = 0
and 2a + b + 3c = 0 B1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 11 : −7 : −5 A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2 j + k + λ (11i − 7 j − 5k ) A1
 22 3
OR1: Obtain a second point on l, e.g.  , 0, −  B1
 7 7
Subtract position vectors and obtain a direction vector for l M1
Obtain 22i − 14 j − 10k , or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2 j + k + λ (22i − 14 j − 10k ) A1
OR2: Attempt to find the vector product of the two normal vectors M1
Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain 11 i − 7 j − 5k , or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2 j + k + λ (11 i − 7 j − 5k ) A1
OR3: Express one variable in terms of a second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = (22 − 11 y ) / 7 A1
Express the same variable in terms of the third M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = (11 − 11z ) / 5 A1
Form a vector equation for the line M1
 7 5 
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2j + k + λ  i − j − k  A1
 11 11 
OR4: Express one variable in terms of a second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. y = (22 − 7 x) / 11 A1
Express the third variable in terms of the second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = (11 − 5 x) / 11 A1
Form a vector equation for the line M1
 7 5 
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2j + k + λ  i − j − k  A1 6
 11 11 
[The marks are dependent on all M marks being earned.]

A B C
10 (i) State or imply f ( x ) ≡ + + B1
2 x − 1 x + 2 ( x + 2) 2
Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = 2, B = −1, C = 3 A1
Obtain the remaining values A1 + A1 5
A Dx + E
[Apply an analogous scheme to the form + ; the values being A = 2,
2 x − 1 ( x + 2) 2
D = −1, E = 1.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1154 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – May/June 2015 9709 33

1 3
(ii) Integrate and obtain terms ∙ 2 ln(2 x − 1) − ln( x + 2) − B1 + B1 + B1
2 x+2
Use limits correctly, namely substitution must be seen in at least two of the partial fractions
to obtain M1 Integrate all 3 partial fractions and substitute in all three partial fractions
for A1 since AG. M1
Obtain the given answer following full and exact working A1 5
[The t marks are dependent on A, B, C etc.]
[SR: If B, C or E omitted, give B1M1 in part (i) and B1 B1 M1 in part (ii).]
− x +1
[NB: Candidates who follow the A, D, E scheme in part (i) and then integrate
( x + 2) 2
1 x −1
by parts should obtain ∙ 2 ln(2 x − 1) − ln( x + 2) + (the third term is equivalent
2 x+2
3
to − + 1 ).]
x+2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1155

Year 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Use logarithms to solve the equation ex = 3x−2 , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

2 (i) Use the trapezium rule with 3 intervals to estimate the value of
20

Ó
3
cosec x dx,
10
6

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Using a sketch of the graph of y = cosec x, explain whether the trapezium rule gives an
overestimate or an underestimate of the true value of the integral in part (i). [2]

3 The polynomial ax3 + bx2 + x + 3, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
3x + 1 is a factor of p x, and that when p x is divided by x − 2 the remainder is 21. Find the
values of a and b. [5]

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

1
x= , y = tan3 t,
cos3 t
where 0 ≤ t < 12 0.

dy
(i) Show that = sin t. [4]
dx

(ii) Hence show that the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point with parameter t is
y = x sin t − tan t. [3]

5 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex numbers w and Ï satisfy the relation

Ï+i
w= .
iÏ + 2

(i) Given that Ï = 1 + i, find w, giving your answer in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [4]

(ii) Given instead that w = Ï and the real part of Ï is negative, find Ï, giving your answer in the form
x + iy, where x and y are real. [4]

© UCLES 2014 9709/31/O/N/14

3
a
6 It is given that Ó ln 2x dx = 1, where a > 1.
1
@ A
ln 2
(i) Show that a = exp 1 +
1
2
, where exp x denotes ex . [6]
a
(ii) Use the iterative formula
P Q
ln 2
an+1 = exp 1 +
1
2 an
to determine the value of a correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to
4 decimal places. [3]

7 In a certain country the government charges tax on each litre of petrol sold to motorists. The revenue
per year is R million dollars when the rate of tax is x dollars per litre. The variation of R with x is
modelled by the differential equation
@ A
dR 1
=R − 0.57 ,
dx x
where R and x are taken to be continuous variables. When x = 0.5, R = 16.8.

(i) Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for R in terms of x. [6]

(ii) This model predicts that R cannot exceed a certain amount. Find this maximum value of R. [3]

8 (i) By first expanding sin 21 + 1, show that

sin 31 = 3 sin 1 − 4 sin3 1. 4

2 sin 1
(ii) Show that, after making the substitution x = , the equation x3 − x + 16 ï3 = 0 can be written
ï3
in the form sin 31 = 34 . [1]

(iii) Hence solve the equation

x3 − x + 16 ï3 = 0,
giving your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

x2 − 8x + 9
9 Let f x = .
1 − x 2 − x2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

10 The line l has equation r = 4i − 9j + 9k + , −2i + j − 2k. The point A has position vector 3i + 8j + 5k.

(i) Show that the length of the perpendicular from A to l is 15. [5]

(ii) The line l lies in the plane with equation ax + by − 3Ï + 1 = 0, where a and b are constants. Find
the values of a and b. [5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/31/O/N/14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 9709/31/O/N/14

0.0 Year 2014 1159

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1160 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1161

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1162 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1163

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1164 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1165

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1166 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1167

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1168 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1169

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1170 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1171
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1172 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 31

1 Use law of the logarithm of a power M1

Obtain a correct linear equation in any form, e.g. x = ( x − 2) ln 3 A1
Obtain answer x = 22.281 A1 [3]

2 (i) State or imply ordinates 2, 1.1547…, 1, 1.1547… B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 1 π and four ordinates M1
6
Obtain answer 1.95 A1 [3]

(ii) Make recognisable sketch of y = cosec x for the given interval B1

Justify a statement that the estimate will be an overestimate B1 [2]

3 Substitute x = − 1 , equate result to zero or divide by 3x + 1 and equate the remainder to zero
3
and obtain a correct equation, e.g. − 1 a + 1 b − 1 + 3 = 0 B1
27 9 3
Substitute x = 2 and equate result to 21 or divide by x – 2 and equate constant remainder to 21 M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 8a + 4b + 5 = 21 A1
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtain a = 12 and b = −20 A1 [5]

4 (i) Use chain rule correctly at least once M1

dx 3sint dy
Obtain either = 4
or = 3tan 2tsec 2t , or equivalent A1
dt cos t dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]

(ii) State a correct equation for the tangent in any form B1

Use Pythagoras M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [3]

1 + 2i
5 (i) Substitute z = 1 + i and obtain w = B1
1+ i
EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by the conjugate of the denominator,
or equivalent M1
Simplify numerator to 3 + i or denominator to 2 A1
Obtain final answer 3 + 1 i , or equivalent A1
2 2
OR: Obtain two equations in x and y, and solve for x or for y M1
Obtain x = 3 or y = 1 , or equivalent A1
2 2
Obtain final answer 3 + 1 i , or equivalent A1 [4]
2 2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1173
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 31

(ii) EITHER: Substitute w = z and obtain a 3-term quadratic equation in z,

e.g. iz + z − i = 0
2
B1
Solve a 3-term quadratic for z or substitute z = x + iy and use a correct
method to solve for x and y M1
OR: Substitute w = x + iy and obtain two correct equations in x and y by equating
real and imaginary parts B1
Solve for x and y M1
−1 ± 3i
Obtain a correct solution in any form, e.g. z = A1
2i
31
Obtain final answer − + i A1 [4]
2 2

1
6 ∫
(i) Integrate and reach bxln2 x − c x. dx , or equivalent
x
M1*

1
Obtain xln2 x − ∫ x. dx , or equivalent A1
x
Obtain integral xln2 x − x , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits correctly and equate to 1, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. aln2a − a +1 − ln2 = 1 A1
Obtain the given answer A1 [6]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.94 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.94 to 2d.p. or show that there is a sign
change in the interval (1.935, 1.945). A1 [3]

7 (i) Separate variables correctly and attempt to integrate at least one side B1
Obtain term lnR B1
Obtain ln x − 0.57 x B1
Evaluate a constant or use limits x = 0.5, R = 16.8, in a solution containing terms of the form
alnR and blnx M1
Obtain correct solution in any form A1
(3.80 − 0.57 x )
Obtain a correct expression for R, e.g. R = xe , R = 44.7 xe −0.57 x or
(0.285 − 0.57 x )
R = 33.6 xe A1 [6]

dR
(ii) Equate to zero and solve for x M1
dx
State or imply x = 0.57 −1 , or equivalent, e.g. 1.75 A1
Obtain R = 28.8 (allow 28.9) A1 [3]

8 (i) Use sin(A + B) formula to express sin3θ in terms of trig. functions of 2θ and θ M1
Use correct double angle formulae and Pythagoras to express sin3θ in terms of sinθ M1
Obtain a correct expression in terms of sinθ in any form A1
Obtain the given identity A1 [4]
[SR: Give M1 for using correct formulae to express RHS in terms of sinθ and cos2θ,
then M1A1 for expressing in terms of sinθ and sin3θ only, or in terms
of cosθ , sinθ, cos2θ and sin2θ, then A1 for obtaining the given identity.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1174 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 31

(ii) Substitute for x and obtain the given answer B1 [1]

(iii) Carry out a correct method to find a value of x M1

Obtain answers 0.322, 0.799, −1.12 A1 + A1 + A1 [4]
[Solutions with more than 3 answers can only earn a maximum of A1 + A1.]

A B C
9 (i) State or imply the form + + 2
B1
1− x 2− x (2 − x )
Use a correct method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of A = 2, B = −1, C = 3 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain a third value A1 [5]
A Dx + E
[The alternative form + 2
, where A = 2, D = 1, E = 1 is marked
1− x (2 − x )
B1M1A1A1A1 as above.]

(ii) Use correct method to find the first two terms of the expansion
−1 −1 −2
of (1 − x) , (2 − x) , (2 − x) , (1 − 12 x ) −1 or (1 − 12 x ) −2 M1
2
Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x
of each partial fraction A1 + A1 + A1
Obtain final answer 9 + 5 x + 39 x 2 , or equivalent A1 [5]
4 2 16
 −1 
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient for M1. The is on A,B,C.]
1

[For the A,D,E form of partial fractions, give M1 A1 A1 for the expansions then,
if D ≠ 0, M1 for multiplying out fully and A1 for the final answer.]
2 −1 −2
[In the case of an attempt to expand ( x − 8 x + 9)(1 − x) (2 − x) , give M1A1A1 for
the expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]

uur uur
10 (i) EITHER: Find AP (or PA ) for a point P on l with parameter λ,
e.g. i − 17 j + 4k + λ ( −2i + j − 2k ) B1
uur
Calculate scalar product of AP and a direction vector for l and equate to zero M1
Solve and obtain λ = 3 A1
Carry out a complete method for finding the length of AP M1
Obtain the given answer 15 correctly A1
uur uur
OR1: Calling (4, −9, 9) B, state BA (or AB ) in component form, e.g. − i + 17 j − 4k B1
uur
Calculate vector product of BA and a direction vector for l,
e.g. ( −i + 17 j − 4k ) × ( −2i + j − 2k ) M1
Obtain correct answer, e.g. − 30i + 6 j + 33k A1
Divide the modulus of the product by that of the direction vector M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
uur uur
OR2: State BA (or AB ) in component form B1
Use a scalar product to find the projection of BA (or AB) on l M1
27
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. A1
9
Use Pythagoras to find the perpendicular M1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1175
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 31

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

uur uur
OR3: State BA (or AB ) in component form B1
Use a scalar product to find the cosine of ABP M1
27
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. A1
9. 306
Use trig. to find the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
uur uur
OR4: State BA (or AB ) in component form B1
Find a second point C on l and use the cosine rule in triangle ABC to find the
cosine of angle A, B, or C, or use a vector product to find the area of ABC M1
Obtain correct answer in any form A1
Use trig. or area formula to find the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
uur uur
OR5: State correct AP (or PA ) for a point P on l with parameter λ in any form B1
Use correct method to express AP 2 (or AP) in terms of λ M1
Obtain a correct expression in any form,
2 2 2
e.g. (1 − 2λ ) + (−17 + λ ) + (4 − 2λ ) A1
Carry out a method for finding its minimum (using calculus, algebra
or Pythagoras) M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [5]

(ii) EITHER: Substitute coordinates of a general point of l in equation of plane and either
equate constant terms or equate the coefficient of λ to zero, obtaining an
equation in a and b M1*
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 4a –9b – 27 + 1 = 0 A1
Obtain a second correct equation, e.g. –2a + b + 6 = 0 A1
Solve for a or for b M1(dep*)
Obtain a = 2 and b = −2 A1
OR: Substitute coordinates of a point of l and obtain a correct equation,
e.g. 4a – 9b = 26 B1
EITHER: Find a second point on l and obtain an equation in a and b M1*
Obtain a correct equation A1
OR: Calculate scalar product of a direction vector for l and a vector
normal to the plane and equate to zero M1*
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. –2a + b + 6 = 0 A1
Solve for a or for b M1(dep*)
Obtain a = 2 and b = −2 A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Use logarithms to solve the equation ex = 3x−2 , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

2 (i) Use the trapezium rule with 3 intervals to estimate the value of
20

Ó
3
cosec x dx,
10
6

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Using a sketch of the graph of y = cosec x, explain whether the trapezium rule gives an
overestimate or an underestimate of the true value of the integral in part (i). [2]

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

1
x= , y = tan3 t,
cos3 t
where 0 ≤ t < 12 0.

dy
(i) Show that = sin t. [4]
dx

(ii) Hence show that the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point with parameter t is
y = x sin t − tan t. [3]

5 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex numbers w and Ï satisfy the relation

Ï+i
w= .
iÏ + 2

(i) Given that Ï = 1 + i, find w, giving your answer in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [4]

(ii) Given instead that w = Ï and the real part of Ï is negative, find Ï, giving your answer in the form
x + iy, where x and y are real. [4]

© UCLES 2014 9709/32/O/N/14

(i) Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for R in terms of x. [6]

(ii) This model predicts that R cannot exceed a certain amount. Find this maximum value of R. [3]

8 (i) By first expanding sin 21 + 1, show that

sin 31 = 3 sin 1 − 4 sin3 1. 4

2 sin 1
(ii) Show that, after making the substitution x = , the equation x3 − x + 16 ï3 = 0 can be written
ï3
in the form sin 31 = 34 . [1]

(iii) Hence solve the equation

x3 − x + 16 ï3 = 0,
giving your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

x2 − 8x + 9
9 Let f x = .
1 − x 2 − x2

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

10 The line l has equation r = 4i − 9j + 9k + , −2i + j − 2k. The point A has position vector 3i + 8j + 5k.

(i) Show that the length of the perpendicular from A to l is 15. [5]

(ii) The line l lies in the plane with equation ax + by − 3Ï + 1 = 0, where a and b are constants. Find
the values of a and b. [5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/32/O/N/14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 9709/32/O/N/14

0.0 Year 2014 1179

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1180 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1181
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1182 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 32

1 Use law of the logarithm of a power M1

Obtain a correct linear equation in any form, e.g. x = ( x − 2) ln 3 A1
Obtain answer x = 22.281 A1 [3]

2 (i) State or imply ordinates 2, 1.1547…, 1, 1.1547… B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 1 π and four ordinates M1
6
Obtain answer 1.95 A1 [3]

(ii) Make recognisable sketch of y = cosec x for the given interval B1

Justify a statement that the estimate will be an overestimate B1 [2]

4 (i) Use chain rule correctly at least once M1

dx 3sint dy
Obtain either = 4
or = 3tan 2tsec 2t , or equivalent A1
dt cos t dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]

(ii) State a correct equation for the tangent in any form B1

Use Pythagoras M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1183
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 32

(ii) EITHER: Substitute w = z and obtain a 3-term quadratic equation in z,

1
6 ∫
(i) Integrate and reach bxln2 x − c x. dx , or equivalent
x
M1*

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.94 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.94 to 2d.p. or show that there is a sign
change in the interval (1.935, 1.945). A1 [3]

dR
(ii) Equate to zero and solve for x M1
dx
State or imply x = 0.57 −1 , or equivalent, e.g. 1.75 A1
Obtain R = 28.8 (allow 28.9) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1184 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 32

(ii) Substitute for x and obtain the given answer B1 [1]

(iii) Carry out a correct method to find a value of x M1

Obtain answers 0.322, 0.799, −1.12 A1 + A1 + A1 [4]
[Solutions with more than 3 answers can only earn a maximum of A1 + A1.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1185
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 32

Obtain the given answer correctly A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 3x − 1 < 2x + 5. [4]

2 A curve is defined for 0 < 1 < 12 0 by the parametric equations

x = tan 1, y = 2 cos2 1 sin 1.

= 6 cos5 1 − 4 cos3 1.
dy
Show that [5]
dx

3 The polynomial 4x3 + ax2 + bx − 2, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
x + 1 and x + 2 are factors of p x.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [4]

(ii) When a and b have these values, find the remainder when p x is divided by x2 + 1. [3]

4 (i) Show that cos 1 − 60Å + cos 1 + 60Å cos 1. [3]

cos 2x − 60Å + cos 2x + 60Å

= 3, find the exact value of cos x.
cos x − 60Å + cos x + 60Å
(ii) Given that [4]

5 The complex numbers w and Ï are defined by w = 5 + 3i and Ï = 4 + i.

in the form x + iy, showing all your working and giving the exact values of x and y.
iw
Ï
(i) Express
[3]

(ii) Find wÏ and hence, by considering arguments, show that

tan−1 35 + tan−1 14 = 14 0.

4

−2
It is given that I = Ó 1 + 3x2
0.3
6 dx.
0

(i) Use the trapezium rule with 3 intervals to find an approximation to I , giving the answer correct
to 3 decimal places. [3]
−2
(ii) For small values of x, 1 + 3x2 ≈ 1 + ax2 + bx4 . Find the values of the constants a and b.

Hence, by evaluating Ó 1 + ax2 + bx4 dx, find a second approximation to I , giving the answer
0.3

0
correct to 3 decimal places. [5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/33/O/N/14

7 The equations of two straight lines are

r = i + 4j − 2k + , i + 3k and r = ai + 2j − 2k + - i + 2j + 3ak,
where a is a constant.

(i) Show that the lines intersect for all values of a. [4]

(ii) Given that the point of intersection is at a distance of 9 units from the origin, find the possible
values of a. [4]

8 The variables x and y are related by the differential equation

= 5 xy sin 13 x .
dy 1 12
dx

(i) Find the general solution, giving y in terms of x. [6]

(ii) Given that y = 100 when x = 0, find the value of y when x = 25. [3]

9 (i) Sketch the curve y = ln x + 1 and hence, by sketching a second curve, show that the equation

x3 + ln x + 1 = 40
has exactly one real root. State the equation of the second curve. [3]

(ii) Verify by calculation that the root lies between 3 and 4. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = 40 − ln xn + 1 ,

3

with a suitable starting value, to find the root correct to 3 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

(iv) Deduce the root of the equation

ey − 13 + y = 40,

giving the answer correct to 2 decimal places. [2]

10 By first using the substitution u = ex , show that

ln 4
Ô
e2x
dx = ln 85 .

e + 3e + 2
2x x
10
0

© UCLES 2014 9709/33/O/N/14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 9709/33/O/N/14

0.0 Year 2014 1189

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1190 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1191

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1192 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1193

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1194 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1195

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1196 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1197

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Cambridge International Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1198 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1199
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1200 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 33

State or imply non-modular inequality ( 3x − 1) < ( 2 x + 5 ) or corresponding

2 2
1 Either
quadratic equation or pair of linear equations 3 x − 1 = ± (2 x + 5) B1
2
Solve a three-term quadratic or two linear equations 5 x − 26 x − 24 < 0 M1
4
Obtain − and 6 A1
5
4
State − < x < 6 A1
5

Or Obtain value 6 from graph, inspection or solving linear equation B1

4
Obtain value − similarly B2
5
4
State − < x < 6 B1 [4]
5

2 Use correct product rule or correct chain rule to differentiate y M1

dy
dy dθ
Use = dx M*1
dx dθ
− 4 cos θ sin 2 θ + 2 cos 3 θ
Obtain or equivalent A1
sec 2 θ
dy
Express in terms of cos θ DM*1
dx
Confirm given answer 6 cos 5 θ − 4 cos 3 θ legitimately A1 [5]

3 (i) Either Equate p(–1) or p(–2) to zero or divide by (x + 1) or (x + 2 ) and M*1

equate constant remainder to zero.
Obtain two equations a − b = 6 and 4a − 2b = 34 or equivalents A1
Solve pair of equations for a or b DM*1
Obtain a = 11 and b = 5 A1

Or State or imply third factor is 4 x − 1 B1

Carry out complete expansion of (x + 1)(x + 2 )(4 x − 1) or M1
(x + 1)(x + 2 )(Cx + D )
Obtain a = 11 A1
Obtain b = 5 A1 [4]

(ii) Use division or equivalent and obtaining linear remainder M1

Obtain quotient 4 x + a , following their value of a A1
Indicate remainder x − 13 A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1201
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 33

4 (i) Either Use cos ( A ± B ) correctly at least once M1

State correct complete expansion A1
1
Confirm given answer cos θ with explicit use of cos 60o = A1
2
SR: “correct” answer from sign errors in both expansions is B1 only

Or Use correct cos A + cos B formula M1

 2θ   − 120 
State correct result e.g. 2 cos  cos  A1
 2   2 
(
Confirm given answer cos θ with explicit use of cos ± 60o =) 1
2
A1 [3]

cos 2 x
(ii) State or imply =3 B1
cos x
Obtain equation 2 cos 2 x − 3 cos x − 1 = 0 B1
Solve a three-term quadratic equation for cos x M1
1
( )
Obtain 3 − 17 or exact equivalent and, finally, no other
4
A1 [4]

5 (i) State or imply iw = −3 + 5i B1

4−i
Carry out multiplication by M1
4−i
7 23
Obtain final answer − + i or equivalent A1 [3]
17 17

(ii) Multiply w by z to obtain 17 + 17i B1

3 1
State arg w = tan −1 or arg z = tan −1 B1
5 4
State arg wz = arg w + arg z M1
3 1 1
Confirm given result tan −1 + tan −1 = π legitimately A1 [4]
5 4 4

6 (i) State or imply correct ordinates 1, 0.94259…, 0.79719…, 0.62000… B1

Use correct formula or equivalent with h = 0.1 and four y values M1
Obtain 0.255 with no errors seen A1 [3]

(ii) Obtain or imply a = −6 B1

Obtain x 4 term including correct attempt at coefficient M1
Obtain or imply b = 27 A1
27 5
Either Integrate to obtain x − 2 x 3 + x , following their values of a and b B1
5
Obtain 0.259 B1
Or Use correct trapezium rule with at least 3 ordinates M1
Obtain 0.259 (from 4) A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1202 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 33

7 (i) State at least two of the equations 1 + λ = a + µ , 4 = 2 + 2 µ , − 2 + 3λ = −2 + 3aµ B1

Solve for λ or for µ M1
Obtain λ = a (or λ = a + µ − 1 ) and µ = 1 A1
Confirm values satisfy third equation A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply point of intersection is (a + 1, 4, 3a − 2 ) B1

Use correct method for the modulus of the position vector and equate to 9, following their
point of intersection M*1
Solve a three-term quadratic equation in a ( 2
a −a−6 =0 ) DM*1
Obtain –2 and 3 A1 [4]

8 (i) Sensibly separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side M1
1
Obtain 2 y = ... or equivalent
2
A1
1 1 1
3 3 ∫
Correct integration by parts of x sin x as far as ax cos x ± b cos xdx
3
M1

1 1
3 ∫
Obtain − 3x cos x + 3 cos xdx or equivalent
3
A1

1 1
Obtain − 3x cos x + 9 sin x or equivalent A1
3 3
2
 3 1 9 1 
Obtain y =  − x cos x + sin x + c  or equivalent A1 [6]
 10 3 10 3 

(ii) Use x = 0 and y = 100 to find constant M*1

Substitute 25 and calculate value of y DM*1
Obtain 203 A1 [3]

9 (i) Sketch increasing curve with correct curvature passing through origin, for x ≥ 0 B1
Recognisable sketch of y = 40 − x 3 , with equation stated, for x > 0 B1
Indicate in some way the one intersection, dependent on both curves being roughly
correct and both existing for some x < 0 B1 [3]

(ii) Consider signs of x 3 + ln (x + 1) − 40 at 3 and 4 or equivalent or compare values of

relevant expressions for x = 3 and x = 4 M1
Complete argument correctly with correct calculations (–11.6 and 25.6) A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.377 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify accuracy to 3 d.p. or show sign change in interval
(3.3765, 3.3775) A1 [3]

(iv) Attempt value of ln (x + 1) M1

Obtain 1.48 A1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1203
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International A Level – October/November 2014 9709 33

du
10 State or imply = ex B1
dx
Substitute throughout for x and dx M1
u
Obtain ∫ u 2 + 3u + 2
du or equivalent (ignoring limits so far) A1

A B
State or imply partial fractions of form + , following their integrand B1
u + 2 u +1
Carry out a correct process to find at least one constant for their integrand M1
2 1
Obtain correct − A1
u + 2 u +1

Integrate to obtain a ln (u + 2 ) + b ln (u + 1) M1
Obtain 2 ln (u + 2 ) − ln (u + 1) or equivalent, follow their A and B A1
Apply appropriate limits and use at least one logarithm property correctly M1
8
Obtain given answer ln legitimately A1 [10]
5

u2
SR for integrand
u (u + 1)(u + 2 )
A B C
State or imply partial fractions of form + + (B1)
u u +1 u + 2
Carry out a correct process to find at least one constant (M1)
2 1
Obtain correct − (A1)
u + 2 u +1
…complete as above.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 (i) Simplify sin 2! sec !. [2]

(ii) Given that 3 cos 2" + 7 cos " = 0, find the exact value of cos ". [3]

2 Use the substitution u = 1 + 3 tan x to find the exact value of

10
1 + 3 tan x

Ô
4

dx. 5
0
cos2 x

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

3t + 2
x = ln 2t + 3, y=
2t + 3
.

Find the gradient of the curve at the point where it crosses the y-axis. [6]

4 The variables x and y are related by the differential equation

6ye3x
=
dy
dx 2 + e3x
.

Given that y = 36 when x = 0, find an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

9ï3 + 9i
The complex number Ï is defined by Ï =
ï3 − i
5 . Find, showing all your working,

(i) an expression for Ï in the form rei1 , where r > 0 and −0 < 1 ≤ 0, [5]
(ii) the two square roots of Ï, giving your answers in the form rei1 , where r > 0 and −0 < 1 ≤ 0. [3]

6 It is given that 2 ln 4x − 5 + ln x + 1 = 3 ln 3.

(i) Show that 16x3 − 24x2 − 15x − 2 = 0. [3]

(ii) By first using the factor theorem, factorise 16x3 − 24x2 − 15x − 2 completely. [4]

(iii) Hence solve the equation 2 ln 4x − 5 + ln x + 1 = 3 ln 3. [1]

7 The straight line l has equation r = 4i − j + 2k + , 2i − 3j + 6k. The plane p passes through the point
4, −1, 2 and is perpendicular to l.

(i) Find the equation of p, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [2]

(ii) Find the perpendicular distance from the origin to p. [3]

(iii) A second plane q is parallel to p and the perpendicular distance between p and q is 14 units.
Find the possible equations of q. [3]

© UCLES 2014 9709/31/M/J/14

8 (i) By sketching each of the graphs y = cosec x and y = x 0 − x for 0 < x < 0, show that the equation
cosec x = x 0 − x
has exactly two real roots in the interval 0 < x < 0. [3]

1 + x2 sin x
(ii) Show that the equation cosec x = x 0 − x can be written in the form x =
0 sin x
. [2]

(iii) The two real roots of the equation cosec x = x 0 − x in the interval 0 < x < 0 are denoted by !
and ", where ! < ".
(a) Use the iterative formula

1 + xn2 sin xn
xn+1 =
0 sin xn
to find ! correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places.
[3]
(b) Deduce the value of " correct to 2 decimal places. [1]

4 + 12x + x2
3 − x 1 + 2x2
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]

4 + 12x + x2
3 − x 1 + 2x2
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including

the term in x2 . [5]

10
y

x
O
T4
T2

The diagram shows the curve y = 10e− 2 x sin 4x for x ≥ 0. The stationary points are labelled T1 , T2 ,
1

T3 , … as shown.

(i) Find the x-coordinates of T1 and T2 , giving each x-coordinate correct to 3 decimal places. [6]

(ii) It is given that the x-coordinate of Tn is greater than 25. Find the least possible value of n. [4]

© UCLES 2014 9709/31/M/J/14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 9709/31/M/J/14

0.0 Year 2014 1207

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1208 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1209

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1210 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1211

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1212 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1213

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1214 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1215

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1216 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1217

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1218 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1219
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1220 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1221
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 31

1 (i) State sin2α = 2sinα cosα and secα = 1/cosα B1

Obtain 2sinα B1 [2]

(ii) Use cos2β = 2cos2β –1 or equivalent to produce correct equation in cosβ B1

Solve three-term quadratic equation for cosβ M1
1
Obtain cos β = only A1 [3]
3

du
2 State = 3 sec 2 x or equivalent B1
dx
Express integral in terms of and (accept unsimplified and without limits) M1
1
1
Obtain ∫ 3 u 2 du A1
1 3
2C 2
Integrate Cu 2 to obtain u M1
3
14
Obtain A1 [5]
9

2
3 Obtain for derivative of x B1
2t + 3
Use quotient of product rule, or equivalent, for derivative of y M1
5
Obtain or unsimplified equivalent A1
(2t + 3)2
Obtain t = –1 B1
dy dy dx
Use = / in algebraic or numerical form M1
dx dt dt
5
Obtain gradient A1 [6]
2

4 Separate variables correctly and recognisable attempt at integration of at least one side M1
Obtain ln y, or equivalent B1

(
Obtain k l n 2 + e3x ) B1

(
Use y(0) = 36 to find constant in y = A 2 + e 3 x )k
( )
or l ny = k l n 2 + e3 x + c or equivalent M1*


(
k
Obtain equation correctly without logarithms from l ny = l n  A 2 + e3 x  ) *M1
 

(
Obtain y = 4 2 + e3 x )
2
A1 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1222 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 31

5 (i) Either Multiply numerator and denominator by 3 + i and use i2 = –1 M1

Obtain correct numerator 18 + 18 3i or correct denominator 4 B1

9 9  
Obtain + 3i or  18 + 18 3i  / 4 A1
2 2  

Obtain modulus or argument M1

1
πi
Obtain 9e 3 A1 [5]
OR Obtain modulus and argument of numerator or denominator, or both
moduli or both arguments M1
1 1
Obtain moduli and argument 18 and π or 2 and − π
6 6
1 1
or moduli 18 and 2 or arguments π and − π (allow degrees) B1
6 6
1 1
πi − πi
Obtain 18e 6 ÷ 2e 6 or equivalent A1
Divide moduli and subtract arguments M1
1
πi
Obtain 9e 3 A1 [5]

1
πi
(ii) State 3e 6 , following through their answer to part (i) B1
1 1
π i± π i
State 3e 6 2 , following through their answer to part (i) B1
5
− πi
Obtain 3e 6
B1 [3]

6 (i) Use law for the logarithm for a product or quotient or exponentiation
AND for a power M1
Obtain (4x – 5)2(x + 1) = 27 B1
Obtain given equation correctly 16x3 – 24x2 – 15x – 2 = 0 A1 [3]

1
(ii) Obtain x = 2 is root or (x – 2) is a factor, or likewise with x = − B1
4
Divide by (x – 2) to reach a quotient of the form 16x2 + kx M1
Obtain quotient 16x2 + 8x + 1 A1

Obtain (x – 2)(4x + 1)2 or (x – 2), (4x + 1), (4x + 1) A1 [4]

(iii) State x = 2 only A1 [1]

7 (i) Obtain 2x – 3y + 6z for LHS of equation B1

Obtain 2x – 3y + 6z = 23 B1 [2]

(ii) Either Use correct formula to find perpendicular distance M1

± 23
Obtain unsimplified value , following answer to (i) A1
2 2 + (− 3) + 6 2
2

23
Obtain or equivalent A1 [3]
7

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1223
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 31

OR 1 Use scalar product of (4, –1, 2) and a vector normal to the plane M1

Use unit normal to plane to obtain ±

(8 + 3 + 12) A1
49
23
Obtain or equivalent A1 [3]
7
OR 2 Find parameter intersection of p and r = µ (2i – 3j + 6k) M1

23  46 69 138 
Obtain µ = [and  ,− ,  as foot of perpendicular] A1
49  49 49 49 
23
Obtain distance or equivalent A1 [3]
7

(iii) Either Recognise that plane is 2x – 3y + 6z = k and attempt use of formula for
perpendicular distance to plane at least once M1
23 − k
Obtain = 14 or equivalent A1
7
Obtain 2x – 3y + 6z = 121 and 2x – 3y + 6z = –75 A1 [3]
OR Recognise that plane is 2x – 3y + 6z = k and attempt to find at least one
point on q using l with λ = ±2 M1
Obtain 2x – 3y + 6z = 121 A1
Obtain 2x – 3y + 6z = –75 A1 [3]

8 (i) Sketch y = cosec x for at least 0 , x , π B1

Sketch y = x(π – x) for at least 0 , x , π B1
1 2
Justify statement concerning two roots, with evidence of 1 and π for y-values
4
on graph via scales B1 [3]

1
(ii) Use cosecx = and commence rearrangement M1
sin x
Obtain given equation correctly, showing sufficient detail A1 [2]

(iii) (a) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.66 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 decimal places to justify answer or show a
sign change in the interval (0.655, 0.665) A1 [3]

(b) Obtain 2.48 B1 [1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1224 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 31

A B C
9 (i) Either State or imply partial fractions are of form + + B1
3 − x 1 + 2 x (1 + 2 x )2
Use any relevant method to obtain a constant M1
Obtain A = 1 A1
3
Obtain B = A1
2
1
Obtain C = − A1 [5]
2
A Dx + E
Or State or imply partial fractions are of form + B1
3 − x (1 + 2 x )2
Use any relevant method to obtain a constant M1
Obtain A = 1 A1
Obtain D = 3 A1
Obtain E = 1 A1 [5]

−1
−1  1 
(ii) Obtain the first two terms of one of the expansion of (3 − x ) , 1 − x 
 3 

(1 + 2 x )−1 and (1 + 2 x )−2 M1

Obtain correct unsimplified expansion up to the term in x2 of each partial fraction,
following in each case the value of A, B, C A1
A1
A1
4 8 1 2
Obtain answer − x+ x A1 [5]
3 9 27
[If A, D, E approach used in part (i), give M1A1 A1 for the expansions, M1 for
multiplying out fully and A1 for final answer]

10 (i) Use of product or quotient rule M1

1 1
− x − x
Obtain − 5e 2 sin 4 x + 40e 2 cos 4 x A1
dy
Equate to zero and obtain tan4z = k or R cos(4x ± α) M1
dx
 1
Obtain tan 4x = 8 or 65 cos 4 x ± tan −1  A1
 8
Obtain 0.362 or 20.7° A1
Obtain 1.147 or 65.7° A1 [6]

1
(ii) State or imply that x-coordinates of Tn are increasing by π or 45° B1
4
Attempt solution of inequality (or equation) of form x1 + (n – 1)kπ . 25 M1
4
Obtain n > (25 − 0.362 ) + 1 , following through on their value of x1 A1
π
n = 33 A1 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Find the set of values of x satisfying the inequality

x + 2a > 3 x − a ,
where a is a positive constant. [4]

2 Solve the equation

2 ln 5 − e−2x = 1,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 Solve the equation

cos x + 30Å = 2 cos x,
giving all solutions in the interval −180Å < x < 180Å. [5]

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = t − tan t, y = ln cos t,
for − 12 0 < t < 12 0.

dy
(i) Show that = cot t. [5]
dx

(ii) Hence find the x-coordinate of the point on the curve at which the gradient is equal to 2. Give
your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [2]

5 (i) The polynomial f x is of the form x − 22 g x, where g x is another polynomial. Show that
x − 2 is a factor of f ′ x. [2]

(ii) The polynomial x5 + ax4 + 3x3 + bx2 + a, where a and b are constants, has a factor x − 22 .
Using the factor theorem and the result of part (i), or otherwise, find the values of a and b. [5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/32/M/J/14

6
A
B x C

In the diagram, A is a point on the circumference of a circle with centre O and radius r. A circular arc
with centre A meets the circumference at B and C. The angle OAB is equal to x radians. The shaded
region is bounded by AB, AC and the circular arc with centre A joining B and C. The perimeter of
the shaded region is equal to half the circumference of the circle.
0 0 1
(i) Show that x = cos−1 . [3]
4 + 4x
(ii) Verify by calculation that x lies between 1 and 1.5. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

@ A
0
xn+1 = cos−1
4 + 4xn
to determine the value of x correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to
4 decimal places. [3]

7 (a) It is given that −1 + ï5i is a root of the equation Ï3 + 2Ï + a = 0, where a is real. Showing your
working, find the value of a, and write down the other complex root of this equation. [4]

w−1
(b) The complex number w has modulus 1 and argument 21 radians. Show that = i tan 1. [4]
w+1

8
y

x
O 0

The diagram shows the curve y = x cos 12 x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 0.

dy d2 y
(i) Find and show that 4 2 + y + 4 sin 12 x = 0. [5]
dx dx
(ii) Find the exact value of the area of the region enclosed by this part of the curve and the x-axis.
[5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/32/M/J/14 [Turn over

9 The population of a country at time t years is N millions. At any time, N is assumed to increase at a
dN
rate proportional to the product of N and 1 − 0.01N . When t = 0, N = 20 and = 0.32.
dt

(i) Treating N and t as continuous variables, show that they satisfy the differential equation
dN
= 0.02N 1 − 0.01N . 1
dt

(ii) Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for t in terms of N . [8]

(iii) Find the time at which the population will be double its value at t = 0. [1]

10 Referred to the origin O, the points A, B and C have position vectors given by
−−→ −−→ −−→
OA = i + 2j + 3k, OB = 2i + 4j + k and OC = 3i + 5j − 3k.

(i) Find the exact value of the cosine of angle BAC. [4]

(ii) Hence find the exact value of the area of triangle ABC. [3]

(iii) Find the equation of the plane which is parallel to the y-axis and contains the line through B
and C. Give your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/32/M/J/14

1228 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1229

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1230 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1231

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1232 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1233

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1234 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1235

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1236 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1237
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine
doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of
the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently
be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1238 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR – 1 A penalty of MR – 1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR – 2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA – 1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA – 1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1239
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 32

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality ( x + 2a ) 2 > (3( x − a )) 2 , or corresponding

quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations (x + 2a ) = ±3(x − a ) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations
for x M1
Obtain critical values x = 14 a and x = 52 a A1
State answer 1
4
a < x < 52 a A1
5
OR: Obtain critical value x = a from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by solving
2
a linear equation or inequality B1
Obtain critical value x = 14 a similarly B2
State answer 1
4
a < x < 52 a B1 4
[Do not condone Y for <.]

1
2 Remove logarithms and obtain 5 − e − 2 x = e 2 , or equivalent B1
1
−2 x 2x −x x 2x
Obtain a correct value for e , e , e or e , e.g. e = 1 /(5 − e )2
B1
2x −2 x x −x
Use correct method to solve an equation of the form e = a , e = a , e = a or e =a
where a > 0. [The M1 is dependent on the correct removal of logarithms.] M1
Obtain answer x = −0.605 only. A1 4

3 Use cos(A + B) formula to obtain an equation in cos x and sin x M1

Use trig formula to obtain an equation in tan x (or cos x or sin x) M1
Obtain tan x = 3 − 4 , or equivalent (or find cos x or sin x) A1
Obtain answer x = −66.2° A1
Obtain answer x = 113.8° and no others in the given interval A1 5
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread (−1.16, 1.99).]
[The other solution methods are via cos x = ±1 / (1 + ( 3 − 4) 2 ) and
sin x = ± ( 3 − 4)/ (1 + ( 3 − 4) 2 ) .]

dx
4 (i) State = 1 − sec 2 t , or equivalent B1
dt
Use chain rule M1
dy sin t
Obtain =− , or equivalent A1
dt cos t
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt

Obtain the given answer correctly. A1 5

(ii) State or imply t = tan −1 ( 12 ) B1

Obtain answer x = −0.0364 B1 2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1240 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 32

5 (i) Differentiate f(x) and obtain f ′( x) = ( x − 2) 2 g ′( x) + 2( x − 2)g ( x) B1

Conclude that (x – 2) is a factor of f ′( x ) B1 2

(ii) EITHER: Substitute x = 2, equate to zero and state a correct equation,

e.g. 32 + 16a + 24 + 4b + a = 0 B1
Differentiate polynomial, substitute x = 2 and equate to zero or divide by
(x − 2) and equate constant remainder to zero M1*
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 80 + 32a + 36 + 4b = 0 A1
OR1: ( )
Identify given polynomial with (x − 2 )2 x 3 + Ax 2 + Bx + C and obtain an
equation in a and/or b M1*
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 14 a − 4(4 + a ) + 4 = 3 A1
Obtain a second correct equation, e.g. − 34 a + 4(4 + a ) = b A1
OR2: Divide given polynomial by (x − 2 ) and obtain an equation in a and b
2
M1*
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 29 + 8a + b + 0 A1
Obtain a second correct equation, e.g. 176 + 47a + 4b = 0 A1
Solve for a or for b M1(dep*)
Obtain a = −4 and b = 3 A1 5

6 (i) Use correct arc formula and form an equation in r and x M1

Obtain a correct equation in any form A1
Rearrange in the given form A1 3

(ii) Consider sign of a relevant expression at x = 1 and x = 1.5, or compare values of relevant
expressions at x = 1 and x = 1.5 M1
Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 2

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.21 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.21 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.205,1.215) A1 3

7 (a) EITHER: Substitute and expand ( −1 + 5 i) 3 completely M1

2
Use i = −1 correctly at least once M1
Obtain a = −12 A1
State that the other complex root is − 1 − 5 i B1
OR1: State that the other complex root is − 1 − 5 i B1
State the quadratic factor z 2 + 2 z + 6 B1
Divide the cubic by a 3-term quadratic, equate remainder to zero and solve for
a or, using a 3-term quadratic, factorise the cubic and determine a M1
Obtain a = −12 A1
OR2: State that the other complex root is − 1 − 5i B1
State or show the third root is 2 B1
Use a valid method to determine a M1
Obtain a = –12 A1
OR3: ( )
Substitute and use De Moivre to cube 6cis 114.1o , or equivalent M1
Find the real and imaginary parts of the expression M1
Obtain a = –12 A1
State that the other complex root is − 1 − 5i B1 4

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1241
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 32

(b) EITHER: Substitute w = cos 2θ + i sin 2θ in the given expression B1

Use double angle formulae throughout M1
Express numerator and denominator in terms of cosθ and sinθ only A1
Obtain given answer correctly A1
OR: Substitute w = e 2iθ in the given expression B1
Divide numerator and denominator by e iθ , or equivalent M1
Express numerator and denominator in terms of cosθ and sinθ only A1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 4

8 (i) Use product rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Differentiate first derivative using the product rule M1
Obtain second derivative in any correct form, e.g. − 12 sin 12 x − 14 x cos 12 x − 12 sin 12 x A1
Verify the given statement A1 5

∫
(ii) Integrate and reach kx sin 12 x + l sin 12 x dx M1*

∫
Obtain 2 x sin 12 x − 2 sin 12 x dx , or equivalent A1
Obtain indefinite integral 2 x sin 12 x + 4 cos 12 x A1
Use correct limits x = 0, x = π correctly M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 2π − 4 , or exact equivalent A1 5

dN
9 (i) State or imply = kN (1 − 0.01N ) and obtain the given answer k = 0.02 B1 1
dt

(ii) Separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side M1

Integrate and obtain term 0.02t, or equivalent A1
1 A B
Carry out a relevant method to obtain A or B such that ≡ + , or
N (1 − 0.01N ) N 1 − 0.01N
equivalent M1*
Obtain A =1 and B = 0.01, or equivalent A1
Integrate and obtain terms ln N − ln(1 − 0.01N ) , or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant or use limits t = 0, N = 20 in a solution with terms a ln N and
b ln(1 − 0.01N ) , ab ≠ 0 M1(dep*)
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. ln N − ln(1 − 0.01N ) = 0.02t + ln 25 A1
Rearrange and obtain t = 50 ln(4 N /(100 − N )) , or equivalent A1 8

(iii) Substitute N = 40 and obtain t = 49.0 B1 1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1242 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 32

10 (i) EITHER: State or imply AB and AC correctly in component form B1

Using the correct processes evaluate the scalar product AB. AC , or equivalent M1
Using the correct process for the moduli divide the scalar product by the
product of the moduli M1
Obtain answer 20 A1
21
OR: Use correct method to find lengths of all sides of triangle ABC M1
Apply cosine rule correctly to find the cosine of angle BAC M1
Obtain answer 20 A1 4
21

(ii) State an exact value for the sine of angle BAC, e.g. 41/21 B1
Use correct area formula to find the area of triangle ABC M1
Obtain answer 12 41 , or exact equivalent A1 3
[SR: Allow use of a vector product, e.g. AB × AC = −6i + 2 j − k B1 . Using correct
1
process for the modulus, divide the modulus by 2 M1. Obtain answer 2
41 A1.]

(iii) EITHER: State or obtain b = 0 B1

Equate scalar product of normal vector and BC (or CB ) to zero M1
Obtain a + b − 4c = 0 (or a − 4c = 0) A1
Substitute a relevant point in 4x + z = d and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer 4x + z = 9, or equivalent A1
OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, e.g. (j)×(i + j – 4k) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. −4i − k A1
Substitute a relevant point in 4x + z = d and evaluate d M1
Obtain 4x + z = 9, or equivalent A1
OR2: Attempt to form 2-parameter equation for the plane with relevant vectors M1
State a correct equation, e.g. r = 2i +4j + k + λ(j) + µ(i + j – 4k) A1
State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1
Eliminate µ M1
Obtain answer 4x + z = 9, or equivalent A1
OR3: State or obtain b = 0 B1
Substitute for B and C in the plane equation and obtain 2a + c = d and
3a – 3c = d (or 2a + 4b + c = d and 3a + 5b –3c = d) B1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : d M1
Obtain a : c : d, or equivalent M1
Obtain answer 4x + z = 9, or equivalent A1
OR4: Attempt to form a determinant equation for the plane with relevant vectors M1
x − 2 y − 4 z −1
State a correct equation, e.g. 0 1 0 =0 A1
1 1 −4
Attempt to use a correct method to expand the determinant M1
Obtain two correct terms of a 3-term expansion, or equivalent A1
Obtain answer 4 x + z = 9 , or equivalent A1 5

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the equation log10 x + 9 = 2 + log10 x. [3]

− 13
2 Expand 1 + 3x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

3 (i) Show that the equation

tan x − 60Å + cot x = ï3
can be written in the form

2 tan2 x + ï3 tan x − 1 = 0. 3

(ii) Hence solve the equation

tan x − 60Å + cot x = ï3,

for 0Å < x < 180Å. [3]

10
4 The equation x = has one positive real root, denoted by !.
e −1 2x

(i) Show that ! lies between x = 1 and x = 2. [2]

(ii) Show that if a sequence of positive values given by the iterative formula
P Q
10
xn+1 = 2 ln 1 +
1
xn
converges, then it converges to !. [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula to determine ! correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

5 The variables x and 1 satisfy the differential equation

dx
2 cos2 1 = 2x + 1,
d1
and x = 0 when 1 = 14 0. Solve the differential equation and obtain an expression for x in terms of 1.
[7]

© UCLES 2014 9709/33/M/J/14

6
y
M

x
O

2
The diagram shows the curve x2 + y2 = 2 x2 − y2 and one of its maximum points M . Find the
coordinates of M . [7]

3 − 5i
7 (a) The complex number is denoted by u. Showing your working, express u in the form
1 + 4i
x + iy, where x and y are real. [3]

(b) (i) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex
numbers satisfying the inequalities Ï − 2 − i ≤ 1 and Ï − i ≤ Ï − 2. [4]
(ii) Calculate the maximum value of arg Ï for points lying in the shaded region. [2]

6 + 6x
8 Let f x = .
2 − x 2 + x2

A Bx + C
(i) Express f x in the form + . [4]
2−x 2 + x2
1
(ii) Show that Ó f x dx = 3 ln 3. [5]
−1

9
y

x
O 1
20

The diagram shows the curve y = e2 sin x cos x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0, and its maximum point M .

(i) Using the substitution u = sin x, find the exact value of the area of the shaded region bounded by
the curve and the axes. [5]

(ii) Find the x-coordinate of M , giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [6]

© UCLES 2014 9709/33/M/J/14 [Turn over

10 The line l has equation r = i + 2j − k + , 3i − 2j + 2k and the plane p has equation 2x + 3y − 5Ï = 18.

(i) Find the position vector of the point of intersection of l and p. [3]

(ii) Find the acute angle between l and p. [4]

(iii) A second plane q is perpendicular to the plane p and contains the line l. Find the equation of q,
giving your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [5]

© UCLES 2014 9709/33/M/J/14

1246 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1247

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1248 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1249

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1250 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1251

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1252 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1253

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1254 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1255

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1256 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1257
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1258 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 33

1 Use law of the logarithm of a quotient or product or 2 = log10 100 M1

Remove logarithms and obtain x + 9 = 100x, or equivalent A1
Obtain answer x = 111 A1 3

2 State a correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 or x 3 term M1

State correct first two terms 1 − x A1
Obtain the next two terms 2 x 2 − 143 x 3 A1 + A1 4
− 3
1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient for the M mark.]
 3 

3 (i) Use tan(A ± B) formula and obtain an equation in tan x M1

Using tan 60° = 3 , obtain a horizontal equation in tan x in any correct form A1
Reduce the equation to the given form A1 3

(ii) Solve the given quadratic for tan x M1

Obtain a correct answer, e.g. x = 21.6° A1
Obtain a second answer, e.g. x = 128.4°, and no others A1 3
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread
(0.377, 2.24).]

4 (i) Consider sign of x − 10 /(e 2 x − 1) at x = 1 and x = 2 M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 2

(ii) State or imply α = 12 ln(1 + 10 / α ) B1

2α
Rearrange this as α = 10 /(e − 1) or work vice versa B1 2

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.14 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.14 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.135, 1.145) A1 3

5 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side B1

Obtain term in the form a (2 x + 1) M1
Express 1 /(cos 2 θ ) as sec2 θ B1
Obtain term of the form k tan θ M1
Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 0, θ = 14 π in a solution with terms a ( 2 x + 1) and k tan θ,
ak ≠ 0 M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. (2 x + 1) = 12 tan θ + 12 A1
Rearrange and obtain x = 18 (tan θ + 1) 2 − 12 , or equivalent A1 7

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2014 1259
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 33

6 Obtain correct derivative of RHS in any form B1

Obtain correct derivative of LHS in any form B1
dy
Set equal to zero and obtain a horizontal equation M1
dx
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. x 2 + y 2 = 1 , from correct work A1
2 2
By substitution in the curve equation, or otherwise, obtain an equation in x or y M1
Obtain x = 1
2
3 A1
Obtain y = 1
2 A1 7

7 (a) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 − 4i, or equivalent, and use i 2 = −1 M1
Simplify numerator to −17 −17i , or denominator to 17 A1
Obtain final answer −1 −i A1
OR: Using i 2 = −1 , obtain two equations in x and y, and solve for x or for y M1
Obtain x = −1 or y = −1, or equivalent A1
Obtain final answer −1 − i A1 3

(b) (i) Show a point representing 2 + i in relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with centre 2 + i and radius 1 B1
Show the perpendicular bisector of the line segment joining i and 2 B1
Shade the correct region B1 4

(ii) State or imply that the angle between the tangents from the origin to the circle is
required M1
Obtain answer 0.927 radians (or 53.1°) A1 2

8 (i) Use a correct method for finding a constant M1

Obtain one of A = 3, B = 3, C = 0 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain a third value A1 4

(ii) Integrate and obtain term − 3 ln(2 − x) B1

2
Integrate and obtain term of the form k ln(2 + x ) M1
2
Obtain term 3
2
ln(2 + x ) A1
2
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form a ln(2 − x) + b ln(2 + x ) , where ab ≠ 0 M1
Obtain given answer after full and correct working A1 5

9 (i) Substitute for x and dx throughout using u = sinx and du = cos x dx, or equivalent M1
Obtain integrand e 2u A1
Obtain indefinite integral 12 e 2u A1
Use limits u = 0, u = 1 correctly, or equivalent M1
Obtain answer 12 (e 2 − 1) , or exact equivalent A1 5

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1260 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 33

(ii) Use chain rule or product rule M1

Obtain correct terms of the derivative in any form, e.g. 2cosx e 2 sin x cos x − e 2 sin x sin x A1 + A1
Equate derivative to zero and obtain a quadratic equation in sin x M1
Solve a 3-term quadratic and obtain a value of x M1
Obtain answer 0.896 A1 6

10 (i) Express general point of l in component form, e.g. (1 + 3λ , 2 − 2λ ,− 1 + 2λ ) B1

Substitute in given equation of p and solve for λ M1
Obtain final answer − 12 i + 3j − 2k , or equivalent, from λ = − 12 A1 3

(ii) State or imply a vector normal to the plane, e.g. 2i + 3 j − 5k B1

Using the correct process, evaluate the scalar product of a direction vector for l and a
normal for p M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the
moduli and find the inverse sine or cosine of the result M1
Obtain answer 23.2° (or 0.404 radians) A1 4

(iii) EITHER: State 2a + 3b − 5c = 0 or 3a − 2b + 2c = 0 B1

Obtain two relevant equations and solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 4 : 19 : 13, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 4x + 19y + 13z = d, and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer 4x + 19y + 13z = 29, or equivalent A1
OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors, e.g.
(2i + 3j − 5k)×(3i − 2j + 2k) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. −4i −19j −13k A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 4x + 19y + 13z = d M1
Obtain answer 4x + 19y + 13z = 29, or equivalent A1
OR2: Attempt to form a 2-parameter equation with relevant vectors M1
State a correct equation, e.g. r = i + 2 j − k + λ (2i + 3 j − 5k ) + µ (3i − 2 j + 2k ) A1
State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain answer 4x + 19y + 13z = 29, or equivalent A1
OR3: Using a relevant point and relevant direction vectors, form a determinant
equation for the plane M1
x −1 y − 2 z +1
State a correct equation, e.g. 2 3 −5 =0 A1
3 −2 2
Attempt to expand the determinant M1
Obtain correct values of two cofactors A1
Obtain answer 4 x + 19 y + 13z = 29 , or equivalent A1 5

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1261

Year 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1+x
The equation of a curve is y = for x > − 12 . Show that the gradient of the curve is always
1 + 2x
1
negative. [3]

2 Solve the equation 2 3x − 1 = 3x , giving your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

Find the exact value of Ô

ln x
3 dx. [5]
x
1

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = e−t cos t, y = e−t sin t.

= tan t − 14 0 .
dy
Show that [6]
dx

5 (i) Prove that cot 1 + tan 1 2 cosec 21. [3]

(ii) Hence show that Ó cosec 21 d1 = 12 ln 3.

3
[4]
10
6

B C
r

In the diagram, A is a point on the circumference of a circle with centre O and radius r. A circular arc
with centre A meets the circumference at B and C. The angle OAB is 1 radians. The shaded region
is bounded by the circumference of the circle and the arc with centre A joining B and C. The area of
the shaded region is equal to half the area of the circle.

2 sin 21 − 0
(i) Show that cos 21 =
41
. [5]

(ii) Use the iterative formula

2 sin 21n − 0
P Q
1n+1 = cos −1
41n
1 ,
2

with initial value 11 = 1, to determine 1 correct to 2 decimal places, showing the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2013 9709/31/O/N/13

2x2 − 7x − 1
Let f x =
x − 2 x2 + 3
7 .

(i) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f x in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

8 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

(a) The complex numbers u and v satisfy the equations

u + 2v = 2i and iu + v = 3.

Solve the equations for u and v, giving both answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real.
[5]

(b) On an Argand diagram, sketch the locus representing complex numbers Ï satisfying Ï + i = 1
and the locus representing complex numbers w satisfying arg w − 2 = 34 0. Find the least value
of Ï − w for points on these loci. [5]

9
C

B
A

The diagram shows ` aA, B and C `

` athree points a position vectors with respect to the origin O are
whose
−−→ 2 −−→ 0 −−→ 3
given by OA = −1 , OB = 3 and OC = 0 . The point D lies on BC, between B and C, and is
2 1 4
such that CD = 2 DB.

(i) Find the equation of the plane ABC, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [6]

(ii) Find the position vector of D. [1]

1
(iii) Show that the length of the perpendicular from A to OD is 3 65 . [4]

[Question 10 is printed on the next page.]

© UCLES 2013 9709/31/O/N/13 [Turn over

h
60°

A tank containing water is in the form of a cone with vertex C. The axis is vertical and the semi-
vertical angle is 60Å, as shown in the diagram. At time t = 0, the tank is full and the depth of water
is H . At this instant, a tap at C is opened and water begins to flow out. The volume of water in the
tank decreases at a rate proportional to ïh, where h is the depth of water at time t. The tank becomes
empty when t = 60.

(i) Show that h and t satisfy a differential equation of the form

−3
= −Ah 2 ,
dh
dt
where A is a positive constant. [4]

(ii) Solve the differential equation given in part (i) and obtain an expression for t in terms of h and
H. [6]

(iii) Find the time at which the depth reaches 21 H . [1]

[The volume V of a cone of vertical height h and base radius r is given by V = 13 0r2 h.]

© UCLES 2013 9709/31/O/N/13

0.0 Year 2013 1265

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1266 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1267

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1268 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1269

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1270 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1271

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1272 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1273

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1274 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1275

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1276 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1277
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1278 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1279
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

1 Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Justify the given statement A1 [3]

2 EITHER: State or imply non-modular equation 2 2 3x − 1 = 3 x ( ) ( )

2 2
, or pair of equations
( x
)
2 3 − 1 = ±3 x
M1
2
Obtain 3x = 2 and 3 x = (or 3x+1 = 2) A1
3
OR: Obtain 3x = 2 by solving an equation or by inspection B1
2
Obtain 3 x = (or 3x+1 = 2) by solving an equation or by inspection B1
3
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 3x = a (or 3x+1 = a), where a > 0 M1
Obtain final answers 0.631 and –0.369 A1 [4]

1 1
1
3 EITHER: Integrate by parts and reach kx 2 ln x − m x 2 . dx
x ∫ M1*
1
1
Obtain 2 x 2 ln x − 2 ∫ 1
dx , or equivalent A1
x2
1 1
Integrate again and obtain 2 x 2 ln x − 4 x 2 , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits x = 1 and x = 4, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 4(ln 4 − 1) , or exact equivalent A1
1 1
u u
OR1: Using u = ln x, or equivalent, integrate by parts and reach kue 2 − m e 2 du ∫ M1*
1 1
u u
Obtain 2ue 2 −2 ∫ e 2 du , or equivalent A1
1 1
u u
Integrate again and obtain 2ue 2 − 4e 2 , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits u = 0 and u = ln4, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 4 ln 4 − 4 , or exact equivalent A1
1
OR2: Using u = x , or equivalent, integrate and obtain ku ln u − m u. du
u ∫ M1*

∫
Obtain 4u ln u − 4 1du , or equivalent A1
Integrate again and obtain 4u ln u − 4u , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits u = 1 and u = 2, having integrated twice or quoted ∫ ln u du
as u ln u ± u M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 8 ln 2 − 4 , or exact equivalent A1
x ln x ± x x ln x ± x
OR3: Integrate by parts and reach I =
x
+k
x x
dx ∫ M1*

x ln x − x 1 1 1
Obtain I =
x
+ I−
2 2 x
dx ∫ A1

Integrate and obtain I = 2 x ln x − 4 x , or equivalent A1

Substitute limits x = 1 and x = 4, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 4 ln 4 − 4 , or exact equivalent A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1280 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

4 Use correct product or quotient rule at least once M1*

dx dy
Obtain = e − t sin t − e − t cos t or = e − t cos t − e − t sin t , or equivalent A1
dt dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
dy sin t − cos t
Obtain = , or equivalent A1
dx sin t + cos t
dy
EITHER: Express in terms of tan t only M1(dep*)
dx
 1 
Show expression is identical to tan  t − π  A1
 4 
 1 
OR: Express tan  t − π  in terms of tan t M1
 4 
dy
Show expression is identical to A1 [6]
dx

5 (i) Use Pythagoras M1

Use the sin2A formula M1
Obtain the given result A1 [3]

(ii) Integrate and obtain a k ln sin θ or m ln cosθ term, or obtain integral of the form
p ln tan θ M1*
1 1 1
Obtain indefinite integral ln sin θ − ln cos θ , or equivalent, or ln tan θ A1
2 2 2
Substitute limits correctly M1(dep)*
Obtain the given answer correctly having shown appropriate working A1 [4]

6 (i) State or imply AB = 2r cosθ or AB 2 = 2r 2 − 2r 2 cos(π − 2θ ) B1

Use correct formula to express the area of sector ABC in terms of r and θ M1
Use correct area formulae to express the area of a segment in terms of r and θ M1
State a correct equation in r and θ in any form A1
Obtain the given answer A1 [5]
[SR: If the complete equation is approached by adding two sectors to the shaded
area above BO and OC give the first M1 as on the scheme, and the second M1
for using correct area formulae for a triangle AOB or AOC, and a sector AOB
or AOC.]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.95 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 0.95 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (0.945, 0.955) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1281
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

A Bx + C
7 (i) State or imply partial fractions are of the form + 2 B1
x−2 x +3
Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = –1, B = 3, C = –1 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansions of (x − 2 ) ,
−1

−1 −1
 1 
( 2
)−1  1 2
1 − x  , x + 3 or 1 + x  M1
 2   3 
Substitute correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x2 into each
partial fraction A1 +A1
Multiply out fully by Bx + C, where BC ≠ 0 M1
1 5 17 2
Obtain final answer + x + x , or equivalent A1 [5]
6 4 72
 − 1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   are not sufficient for the M1. The f.t. is
1
on A, B, C.]
( ) ( )
−1
[In the case of an attempt to expand 2 x 2 − 7 x − 1 (x − 2) x 2 + 3 , give M1A1A1
−1

for the expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of partial fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i);
M1A1 A1 in (ii)]

8 (a) EITHER: Solve for u or for v M1

2i − 6 5
Obtain u = or v = , or equivalent A1
l − 2i l − 2i
Either: Multiply a numerator and denominator by conjugate of denominator,
or equivalent
Or: Set u or v equal to x + iy, obtain two equations by equating real and
imaginary parts and solve for x or for y M1
OR: Using a + ib and c +id for u and v, equate real and imaginary parts and obtain
four equations in a, b, c and d M1
Obtain b + 2d = 2, a + 2c = 0, a + d = 0 and –b + c = 3, or equivalent A1
Solve for one unknown M1
Obtain final answer u = –2 –2i, or equivalent A1
Obtain final answer v = l + 2i, or equivalent A1 [5]

(b) Show a circle with centre –i B1

Show a circle with radius l B1
3
Show correct half line from 2 at an angle of π to the real axis B1
4
Use a correct method for finding the least value of the modulus M1
3
Obtain final answer − 1 , or equivalent, e.g. 1.12 (allow 1.1) A1 [5]
2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1282 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

9 (i) EITHER: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. AB = −2i + 4 j − k B1

Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b, c, e.g. − 2a + 4b − c = 0 ,
3a − 3b + 3c = 0 , or a + b + 2c = 0 M1
Obtain two correct equations in a, b, c A1
Solve to obtain ratio a : b : c M1
Obtain a : b : c = 3 : 1 : −2 , or equivalent A1
Obtain equation 3x + y – 2z = 1, or equivalent A1
OR1: Substitute for two points, e.g. A and B, and obtain 2a − b + 2c = d
and 3b + c = d B1
Substitute for another point, e.g. C, to obtain a third equation and eliminate
one unknown entirely from the three equations M1
Obtain two correct equations in three unknowns, e.g. in a, b, c A1
Solve to obtain their ratio, e.g. a : b : c M1
Obtain a : b : c = 3 : 1 : −2 , a : c : d = 3 : −2 : 1 , a : b : d = 3 :1:1 or
b : c : d = −1 : −2 : 1 A1
Obtain equation 3x + y − 2 z = 1 , or equivalent A1
OR2: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. BC = 3i − 3 j + 3k B1
Obtain a second such vector and calculate their vector product
e.g. (− 2i + 4 j − k ) × (3i − 3j + 3k ) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct answer, e.g. 9i + 3j – 6k A1
Substitute in 9 x + 3 y − 6 z = d to find d M1
Obtain equation 9 x + 3 y − 6 z = 3 , or equivalent A1
OR3: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. AC = i + j + 2k B1
Obtain a second such vector and form correctly a 2-parameter equation for
the plane M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = 3i + 4k + λ (− 2i + 4 j − k ) + µ (i + j + 2k ) A1
State three correct equations in x, y, z , λ, µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain equation 3x + y − 2 z = 1 , or equivalent A1 [6]

(ii) Obtain answer i + 2j + 2k, or equivalent B1 [1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1283
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

OA.OD
(iii) EITHER: Use to find projection ON of OA onto OD M1
OD
4
Obtain ON = A1
3
Use Pythagoras in triangle OAN to find AN M1
Obtain the given answer A1
OR1: Calculate the vector product of OA and OD M1
Obtain answer 6i + 2j – 5k A1
Divide the modulus of the vector product by the modulus of OD M1
Obtain the given answer A1
OR2: Taking general point P of OD to have position vector λ (i + 2 j + 2k ) , form
an equation in λ by either equating the scalar product of AP and OP to
zero, or using Pythagoras in triangle OPA, or setting the derivative of AP
to zero M1
4
Solve and obtain λ = A1
9
4
Carry out method to calculate AP when λ = M1
9
Obtain the given answer A1
OR3: Use a relevant scalar product to find the cosine of AOD or ADO M1
4 5
Obtain cos AOD = or cos ADO = , or equivalent A1
9 3 10
Use trig to find the length of the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer A1
OR4: Use cosine formula in triangle AOD to find cos AOD or cos ADO M1
8 10
Obtain cos AOD = or cos ADO = , or equivalent A1
18 6 10
Use trig to find the length of the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]

10 (i) State or imply V = πh3 B1

dV
State or imply = −k h B1
dt
dV dV dh
Use = . , or equivalent M1
dt dh dt
Obtain the given equation A1 [4]
dV
[The M1 is only available if is in terms of h and has been obtained by a
dh
correct method.]
dV
[Allow B1 for = k h but withhold the final A1 until the polarity of the constant
dt
k
has been justified.]
3π

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1284 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 9 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 31

(ii) Separate variables and integrate at least one side M1

5
2
Obtain terms h 2 and –At, or equivalent A1
5
5
Use t = 0, h = H in a solution containing terms of the form ah 2 and bt + c M1
5
Use t = 60, h = 0 in a solution containing terms of the form ah 2 and bt + c M1
5 5 5
2 1 2
Obtain a correct solution in any form, e.g. h2 = H 2t + H 2 A1
5 150 5

 5

  h 2 
(ii) Obtain final answer t = 601 −    , or equivalent A1 [6]
 H 
 

1
(iii) Substitute h = H and obtain answer t = 49.4 B1 [1]
2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1+x
1 The equation of a curve is y = for x > − 12 . Show that the gradient of the curve is always
1 + 2x
negative. [3]

2 Solve the equation 2 3x − 1 = 3x , giving your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

4
ln x
3 Find the exact value of dx. [5]
x
1

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = e−t cos t, y = e−t sin t.

dy
Show that = tan t − 14 . [6]
dx

5 (i) Prove that cot + tan 2 cosec 2. [3]

1
3
(ii) Hence show that cosec 2 d = 12 ln 3. [4]
1
6

B C
r

In the diagram, A is a point on the circumference of a circle with centre O and radius r. A circular arc
with centre A meets the circumference at B and C. The angle OAB is radians. The shaded region
is bounded by the circumference of the circle and the arc with centre A joining B and C. The area of
the shaded region is equal to half the area of the circle.

2 sin 2 −
(i) Show that cos 2 = . [5]
4

(ii) Use the iterative formula

−1 2 sin 2n −
n+1 = cos
1 ,
2 4n
with initial value 1 = 1, to determine correct to 2 decimal places, showing the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2013 9709/32/O/N/13

2x2 − 7x − 1
7 Let fx = .
x − 2x2 + 3

(i) Express fx in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of fx in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 .
[5]

8 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

(a) The complex numbers u and v satisfy the equations

u + 2v = 2i and iu + v = 3.

Solve the equations for u and v, giving both answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real.
[5]

(b) On an Argand diagram, sketch the locus representing complex numbers satisfying + i = 1
and the locus representing complex numbers w satisfying argw − 2 = 34 . Find the least value
of − w for points on these loci. [5]

9
C

B
A

The diagram shows

A, B and C

three points
position vectors with respect to the origin O are
whose
−−→ 2 −−→ 0 −−→ 3
given by OA = −1 , OB = 3 and OC = 0 . The point D lies on BC, between B and C, and is
2 1 4
such that CD = 2 DB.

(i) Find the equation of the plane ABC, giving your answer in the form ax + by + c = d. [6]

(ii) Find the position vector of D. [1]

(iii) Show that the length of the perpendicular from A to OD is 1
3 65 . [4]

[Question 10 is printed on the next page.]

© UCLES 2013 9709/32/O/N/13 [Turn over

h
60°

A tank containing water is in the form of a cone with vertex C. The axis is vertical and the semi-
vertical angle is 60, as shown in the diagram. At time t = 0, the tank is full and the depth of water
is H . At this instant, a tap at C is opened and water begins to flow out. The volume of water in the
tank decreases at a rate proportional to h, where h is the depth of water at time t. The tank becomes
empty when t = 60.

(i) Show that h and t satisfy a differential equation of the form

dh −3
= −Ah 2 ,
dt
where A is a positive constant. [4]

(ii) Solve the differential equation given in part (i) and obtain an expression for t in terms of h and
H. [6]

(iii) Find the time at which the depth reaches 12 H . [1]

[The volume V of a cone of vertical height h and base radius r is given by V = 13 r2 h.]

© UCLES 2013 9709/32/O/N/13

1288 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1289
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1290 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1291
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

1 Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Justify the given statement A1 [3]

2 EITHER: State or imply non-modular equation 22 3x − 1 = 3x ( ) ( )

1 1
1
3 EITHER: Integrate by parts and reach kx 2 ln x − m x 2 . dx
x ∫ M1*
1
1
∫
Obtain 2 x 2 ln x − 2 1 dx , or equivalent A1
x2
1 1
Integrate again and obtain 2 x 2 ln x − 4 x 2 , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits x = 1 and x = 4, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 4(ln 4 − 1) , or exact equivalent A1
1 1
u u
OR1: Using u = ln x, or equivalent, integrate by parts and reach kue 2 − m e 2 du ∫ M1*
1 1
u u
Obtain 2ue 2 −2 ∫ e 2 du , or equivalent A1
1 1
u u
Integrate again and obtain 2ue 2 − 4e 2 , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits u = 0 and u = ln4, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 4 ln 4 − 4 , or exact equivalent A1
1
OR2: Using u = x , or equivalent, integrate and obtain ku ln u − m u. du
u ∫ M1*

x ln x − x 1 1 1
Obtain I =
x
+ I−
2 2 x
dx ∫ A1

Integrate and obtain I = 2 x ln x − 4 x , or equivalent A1

Substitute limits x = 1 and x = 4, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 4 ln 4 − 4 , or exact equivalent A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1292 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

4 Use correct product or quotient rule at least once M1*

dx dy
Obtain = e − t sin t − e − t cos t or = e − t cos t − e − t sin t , or equivalent A1
dt dt
d y d y dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
dy sin t − cos t
Obtain = , or equivalent A1
dx sin t + cos t
dy
EITHER: Express in terms of tan t only M1(dep*)
dx
 1 
Show expression is identical to tan  t − π  A1
 4 
 1 
OR: Express tan  t − π  in terms of tan t M1
 4 
dy
Show expression is identical to A1 [6]
dx

5 (i) Use Pythagoras M1

Use the sin2A formula M1
Obtain the given result A1 [3]

6 (i) State or imply AB = 2r cosθ or AB 2 = 2r 2 − 2r 2 cos(π − 2θ ) B1

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.95 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 0.95 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (0.945, 0.955) A1 [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1293
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansions of (x − 2 ) ,
−1

for the expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of partial fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i);
M1A1 A1 in (ii)]

8 (a) EITHER: Solve for u or for v M1

(b) Show a circle with centre –i B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1294 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

9 (i) EITHER: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. AB = −2i + 4 j − k B1

Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b, c, e.g. − 2a + 4b − c = 0 ,
3a − 3b + 3c = 0 , or a + b + 2c = 0 M1
Obtain two correct equations in a, b, c A1
Solve to obtain ratio a : b : c M1
Obtain a : b : c = 3 : 1 : −2 , or equivalent A1
Obtain equation 3x + y – 2z = 1, or equivalent A1
OR1: Substitute for two points, e.g. A and B, and obtain 2a − b + 2c = d
and 3b + c = d B1
Substitute for another point, e.g. C, to obtain a third equation and eliminate
one unknown entirely from the three equations M1
Obtain two correct equations in three unknowns, e.g. in a, b, c A1
Solve to obtain their ratio, e.g. a : b : c M1
Obtain a : b : c = 3 :1 : −2 , a : c : d = 3 : −2 :1 , a : b : d = 3 :1:1 or
b : c : d = −1 : −2 : 1 A1
Obtain equation 3 x + y − 2 z = 1 , or equivalent A1
OR2: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. BC = 3i − 3 j + 3k B1
Obtain a second such vector and calculate their vector product
e.g. (− 2i + 4 j − k ) × (3i − 3j + 3k ) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct answer, e.g. 9i + 3j – 6k A1
Substitute in 9 x + 3 y − 6 z = d to find d M1
Obtain equation 9 x + 3 y − 6 z = 3 , or equivalent A1
OR3: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane, e.g. AC = i + j + 2k B1
Obtain a second such vector and form correctly a 2-parameter equation for
the plane M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. r = 3i + 4k + λ (− 2i + 4 j − k ) + µ (i + j + 2k ) A1
State three correct equations in x, y, z , λ, µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain equation 3 x + y − 2 z = 1 , or equivalent A1 [6]

(ii) Obtain answer i + 2j + 2k, or equivalent B1 [1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1295
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

10 (i) State or imply V = πh3 B1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1296 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 9 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 32

(ii) Separate variables and integrate at least one side M1

5
2
Obtain terms h2 and –At, or equivalent A1
5
5
Use t = 0, h = H in a solution containing terms of the form ah 2 and bt + c M1
5
Use t = 60, h = 0 in a solution containing terms of the form ah 2 and bt + c M1
5 5 5
2 1 2
Obtain a correct solution in any form, e.g. h2 = H 2t + H 2 A1
5 150 5

 5

  h 2 
(ii) Obtain final answer t = 601 −    , or equivalent A1 [6]
 H 
 

1
(iii) Substitute h = H and obtain answer t = 49.4 B1 [1]
2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Given that 2 ln x + 4 − ln x = ln x + a, express x in terms of a. [4]

Use the substitution u = 3x + 1 to find Ô

3x
3x + 1
2 dx. [4]

3 The polynomial f x is defined by

f x = x3 + ax2 − ax + 14,
where a is a constant. It is given that x + 2 is a factor of f x.

(i) Find the value of a. [2]

(ii) Show that, when a has this value, the equation f x = 0 has only one real root. [3]

4 A curve has equation 3e2x y + ex y3 = 14. Find the gradient of the curve at the point 0, 2. [5]

− 12 x
It is given that Ó 4xe dx = 9, where p is a positive constant.
p
5
0

8p + 16
@ A
(i) Show that p = 2 ln . [5]
7

(ii) Use an iterative process based on the equation in part (i) to find the value of p correct to
3 significant figures. Use a starting value of 3.5 and give the result of each iteration to 5 significant
figures. [3]

6 Two planes have equations 3x − y + 2Ï = 9 and x + y − 4Ï = −1.

(i) Find the acute angle between the planes. [3]

(ii) Find a vector equation of the line of intersection of the planes. [6]

7 (i) Given that sec 1 + 2 cosec 1 = 3 cosec 21, show that 2 sin 1 + 4 cos 1 = 3. [3]

(ii) Express 2 sin 1 + 4 cos 1 in the form R sin 1 + ! where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å, giving the value
of ! correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(iii) Hence solve the equation sec 1 + 2 cosec 1 = 3 cosec 21 for 0Å < 1 < 360Å. [4]

7x2 + 8
1 + x2 2 − 3x
8 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]

7x2 + 8
in ascending powers of x up to and including the term in x2 ,
1 + x2 2 − 3x
(ii) Hence expand
simplifying the coefficients. [5]

© UCLES 2013 9709/33/O/N/13

9 (a) Without using a calculator, use the formula for the solution of a quadratic equation to solve

2 − iÏ2 + 2Ï + 2 + i = 0.
Give your answers in the form a + bi. [5]
1 0i
(b) The complex number w is defined by w = 2e 4 . In an Argand diagram, the points A, B and
C represent the complex numbers w, w3 and w* respectively (where w* denotes the complex
conjugate of w). Draw the Argand diagram showing the points A, B and C, and calculate the
area of triangle ABC. [5]

10
y

A
x
O

A particular solution of the differential equation

= 4 y3 + 1 cos2 x
dy
3y2
dx
is such that y = 2 when x = 0. The diagram shows a sketch of the graph of this solution for 0 ≤ x ≤ 20;
the graph has stationary points at A and B. Find the y-coordinates of A and B, giving each coordinate
correct to 1 decimal place. [10]

© UCLES 2013 9709/33/O/N/13

BLANK PAGE

9709/33/O/N/13
1300 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1301

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1302 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1303

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1304 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1305

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1306 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1307

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1308 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1309

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1310 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1311

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1312 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1313
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1314 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1315
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

1 Apply at least one logarithm property correctly *M1

Obtain
(x + 4)2 = x + a or equivalent without logarithm involved A1
x
Rearrange to express x in terms of a M1 d*M
16
Obtain or equivalent A1 [4]
a −8

du
2 Carry out complete substitution including the use of =3 M1
dx
1 1 
Obtain ∫  3 − 3u  du A1

Integrate to obtain form k1u + k 2 ln u or k1u + k 2 ln 3u where k1k 2 ≠ 0 M1

1 1
Obtain (3x + 1) − ln(3x + 1) or equivalent, condoning absence of modulus signs and + c A1 [4]
3 3

3 (i) Substitute –2 and equate to zero or divide by x + 2 and equate remainder to zero or use
–2 in synthetic division M1
Obtain a = –1 A1 [2]

(ii) Attempt to find quadratic factor by division reaching x2 + kx, or inspection as far as
( ) (
(x + 2) x 2 + Bx + c and equations for one or both of B and C, or (x + 2) Ax 2 + Bx + 7 )
and equations for one or both of A and B. M1
Obtain x 2 − 3 x + 7 A1
Use discriminant to obtain –19, or equivalent, and confirm one root cwo A1 [3]

dy
4 Differentiate y3 to obtain 3 y 2 B1
dx
Use correct product rule at least once *M1
dy dy
Obtain 6e 2 x y + 3e 2 x + e x y 3 + 3e x y 2 as derivative of LHS A1
dx dx
dy
Equate derivative of LHS to zero, substitute x = 0 and y = 2 and find value of M1(d*M)
dx
4
Obtain − or equivalent as final answer A1 [5]
3

1 1
− x − x
5 (i) Use integration by parts to obtain axe 2
∫
+ be 2 dx M1*
1 1
− x − x
Obtain − 8 xe 2
∫
+ 8e 2 dx or unsimplified equivalent A1
1 1
− x − x
Obtain − 8 xe 2 − 16e 2 A1
Use limits correctly and equate to 9 M1(d*M)
 8 p + 16 
Obtain given answer p = 2 ln  correctly A1 [5]
 7 

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1316 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

(ii) Use correct iteration formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.77 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 5sf or better to justify accuracy 3.77 or show sign change in
interval (3.765, 3.775) A1 [3]
[ 3.5 → 3.6766 → 3.7398 → 3.7619 → 3.7696 → 3.7723 ]

6 (i) Find scalar product of the normals to the planes M1

Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the
moduli and find cos–1 of the result. M1
Obtain 67.8° (or 1.18 radians) A1 [3]

(ii) EITHER Carry out complete method for finding point on line M1
 17 6 
Obtain one such point, e.g. (2,−3,0 ) or  ,0,  or (0,−17,−4 ) or … A1…
7 7

Either State 3a − b + 2c = 0 and a + b − 4c = 0 or equivalent B1

Attempt to solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 1 : 7 : 2 or equivalent A1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = [2, –3, 0] + λ [1, 7, 2] A1

Or 1 Obtain a second point on the line A1

Subtract position vectors to obtain direction vector M1
Obtain [1, 7, 2] or equivalent A1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = [2, –3, 0] + λ [1, 7, 2] A1

Or 2 Use correct method to calculate vector product of two normals M1

Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain [2, 14, 4] or equivalent A1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = [2, –3, 0] + λ [1, 7, 2] A1
[ is dependent on both M marks in all three cases]

OR 3 Express one variable in terms of a second variable M1

1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = ( 4 + z ) A1
2
Express the first variable in terms of third variable M1
1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = ( 17 + y ) A1
7
Form a vector equation for the line M1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = [0, –17, –4] + λ [1, 7, 2] A1

OR 4 Express one variable in terms of a second variable M1

Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = 2 x − 4 A1
Express third variable in terms of the second variable M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. y = 7 x − 17 A1
Form a vector equation for the line M1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = [0, –17, –4] + λ [1, 7, 2] A1 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1317
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

1 1
7 (i) Use secθ = and cosecθ = B1
cos θ sin θ
Use sin 2θ = 2 sin θ cos θ and to form a horizontal equation in sin θ and cos θ or
fractions with common denominators M1
Obtain given equation 2 sin θ + 4 cos θ = 3 correctly A1 [3]

(ii) State or imply R = 20 or 4.47 or equivalent B1

Use correct trigonometry to find α M1
Obtain 63.43 or 63.44 with no errors seen A1 [3]

(iii) Carry out a correct method to find one value in given range M1
Obtain 74.4° (or 338.7°) A1
Carry out a correct method to find second value in given range M1
Obtain 338.7° (or 74.4°) and no others between 0° and 360° A1 [4]

A B C
8 (i) Either State or imply form + + B1
1 + x ( 1 + x) 2
2 − 3x
Use any relevant method to find at least one constant M1
Obtain A = –1 A1
Obtain B = 3 A1
Obtain C = 4 A1
A Bx C
Or State or imply form + + B1
1 + x ( 1 + x )2 2 − 3x
Use any relevant method to find at least one constant M1
Obtain A = 2 A1
Obtain B = –3 A1
Obtain C = 4 A1
Dx + E F
Or State or imply form + B1
( 1 + x ) 2 − 3x
2

Use any relevant method to find at least one constant M1

Obtain D = –1 A1
Obtain E = 2 A1
Obtain F = 4 A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1318 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

Use correct method to find first two terms of expansion of (1 + x )

−1
(ii) Either or
−1
 3 
(1 + x )−2 or (2 − 3 x )
−1
or 1 − x  M1
 2 
Obtain correct unsimplified expansion of first partial fraction up to x2 term A1
Obtain correct unsimplified expansion of second partial fraction up to x2 term A1
Obtain correct unsimplified expansion of third partial fraction up to x2 term A1
25 2
Obtain final answer 4 − 2 x + x A1
2
Use correct method to find first two terms of expansion of (1 + x )
−2
Or 1
−1
 3 
or (2 − 3 x )
−1
or 1 − x  M1
 2 
Obtain correct unsimplified expansion of first partial fraction up to x2 term A1
Obtain correct unsimplified expansion of second partial fraction up to x2 term A1
Expand and obtain sufficient terms to obtain three terms M1
25 2
Obtain final answer 4 − 2 x + x A1
2
Or 2 (expanding original expression)
Use correct method to find first two terms of expansion of (1 + x )
−2

−1
 3 
or (2 − 3 x )
−1
or 1 − x  M1
 2 
Obtain correct expansion 1 − 2 x + 3 x 2 or unsimplified equivalent A1
1 3 9 
Obtain correct expansion 1 + x + x 2  or unsimplified equivalent A1
2 2 4 
Expand and obtain sufficient terms to obtain three terms M1
25 2
Obtain final answer 4 − 2 x + x A1
2
Or 3 (McLaurin expansion)
Obtain first derivative f ′(x ) = ( 1 + x ) − 6 ( 1 + x ) + 12 ( 2 − 3 x )
−2 −3 −2
M1
Obtain f ′(0 ) = 1 − 6 + 3 or equivalent A1
Obtain f ′′(0 ) = −2 + 18 + 9 or equivalent A1
Use correct form for McLaurin expansion M1
25 2
Obtain final answer 4 − 2 x + x A1 [5]
2

9 (a) Solve using formula, including simplification under square root sign M1*
− 2 ± 4i
Obtain or similarly simplified equivalents A1
2(2 − i )
2+i
Multiply by or equivalent in at least one case M1(d*M)
2+i
4 3
Obtain final answer − + i A1
5 5
Obtain final answer –i A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1319
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 33

(b) Show w in first quadrant with modulus and argument relatively correct B1
Show w3 in second quadrant with modulus and argument relatively correct B1
Show w* in fourth quadrant with modulus and argument relatively correct B1
Use correct method for area of triangle M1
Obtain 10 by calculation A1 [5]

10 Use 2 cos 2 x = 1 + cos 2 x or equivalent B1

Separate variables and integrate at least one side M1
( )
Obtain ln y 3 + 1 = K or equivalent A1
Obtain K = 2 x + sin 2 x or equivalent A1
Use x = 0 , y = 2 to find constant of integration (or as limits) in an expression containing
( )
at least two terms of the form a ln y 3 + 1 , bx or c sin 2x M1*
( 3
)
Obtain ln y + 1 = 2 x + sin 2 x + ln 9 or equivalent e.g. implied by correct constant A1
1 3
Identify at least one of π and π as x-coordinate at stationary point B1
2 2
Use correct process to find y-coordinate for at least one x-coordinate M1(d*M)
Obtain 5.9 A1
Obtain 48.1 A1 [10]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the quotient and remainder when 2x2 is divided by x + 2. [3]

1 + 3x
1 + 2x
2 Expand in ascending powers of x up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

7x2 − 3x + 2
x x2 + 1
3 Express in partial fractions. [5]

4 (i) Solve the equation 4x − 1 = x − 3. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation 4y+1 − 1 = 4y − 3 correct to 3 significant figures.

[3]

5 For each of the following curves, find the gradient at the point where the curve crosses the y-axis:

1 + x2
(i) y =
1 + e2x
; [3]

(ii) 2x3 + 5xy + y3 = 8. [4]

6 The points P and Q have position vectors, relative to the origin O, given by
−−→ −−→
OP = 7i + 7j − 5k and OQ = −5i + j + k.
The mid-point of PQ is the point A. The plane is perpendicular to the line PQ and passes through A.

(i) Find the equation of , giving your answer in the form ax + by + cÏ = d. [4]

(ii) The straight line through P parallel to the x-axis meets at the point B. Find the distance AB,
correct to 3 significant figures. [5]

7 (a) Without using a calculator, solve the equation

3w + 2iw* = 17 + 8i,
where w* denotes the complex conjugate of w. Give your answer in the form a + bi. [4]

(b) In an Argand diagram, the loci

arg Ï − 2i = 16 0 and Ï − 3 = Ï − 3i

intersect at the point P. Express the complex number represented by P in the form rei1 , giving
the exact value of 1 and the value of r correct to 3 significant figures. [5]

(a) Show that Ó 4x ln x dx = 56 ln 2 − 12.

4
8 [5]
2

(b) Use the substitution u = sin 4x to find the exact value of Ó

24
cos3 4x dx. [5]
0

© UCLES 2013 9709/31/M/J/13

9 (i) Express 4 cos 1 + 3 sin 1 in the form R cos 1 − !, where R > 0 and 0 < ! < 12 0. Give the value
of ! correct to 4 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence
(a) solve the equation 4 cos 1 + 3 sin 1 = 2 for 0 < 1 < 20, [4]

(b) find Ô d1.

50
4 cos 1 + 3 sin 12
[3]

10 Liquid is flowing into a small tank which has a leak. Initially the tank is empty and, t minutes later,
the volume of liquid in the tank is V cm3. The liquid is flowing into the tank at a constant rate of
80 cm3 per minute. Because of the leak, liquid is being lost from the tank at a rate which, at any
instant, is equal to kV cm3 per minute where k is a positive constant.

(i) Write down a differential equation describing this situation and solve it to show that

V= 80 − 80e−kt .
1
7
k

(ii) It is observed that V = 500 when t = 15, so that k satisfies the equation

4 − 4e−15k
k= .
25
Use an iterative formula, based on this equation, to find the value of k correct to 2 significant
figures. Use an initial value of k = 0.1 and show the result of each iteration to 4 significant
figures. [3]

(iii) Determine how much liquid there is in the tank 20 minutes after the liquid started flowing, and
state what happens to the volume of liquid in the tank after a long time. [2]

© UCLES 2013 9709/31/M/J/13

BLANK PAGE

9709/31/M/J/13
0.0 Year 2013 1323

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1324 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1325

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1326 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1327

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1328 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1329

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1330 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1331

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1332 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1333
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1334 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1335
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 31

1 Carry out division or equivalent at least as far as two terms of quotient M1

Obtain quotient 2 x − 4 A1
Obtain remainder 8 A1 [3]

− 1
2 Obtain 1 − x as first two terms of (1 + 2 x ) 2 B1
3 2 − 12
Obtain + x or unsimplified equivalent as third term of (1 + 2 x )
2
B1
− 12
Multiply 1 + 3x by attempt at (1 + 2 x ) , obtaining sufficient terms M1
3 2
Obtain final answer 1 + 2x − x 2
A1 [4]

A Bx + C
3 State or imply correct form + B1
x x2 + 1
Use any relevant method to find at least one constant M1
Obtain A = 2 A1
Obtain B = 5 A1
Obtain C = −3 A1 [5]

4 (i) Either State or imply non-modular equation (4 x − 1)2 = ( x − 3) 2 or pair of

linear equations 4 x − 1 = ±( x − 3) B1
Solve a three-term quadratic equation or two linear equations M1
2 4
Obtain − and A1
3 5

2
Or Obtain value − from inspection or solving linear equation B1
3
4
Obtain value similarly B2 [3]
5

4
(ii) State or imply at least 4 y =, following a positive answer from part (i) B1√
5
Apply logarithms and use log ab = b log a property M1
Obtain –0.161 and no other answer A1 [3]

5 (i) Use correct quotient rule or equivalent M1

(1 + e 2 x )2 x − (1 + x 2 )2e 2 x
Obtain or equivalent A1
(1 + e 2 x ) 2
1
Substitute x = 0 and obtain − or equivalent A1 [3]
2

dy
(ii) Differentiate y 3 and obtain 3 y 2 B1
dx
dy
Differentiate 5xy and obtain 5 y + 5 x B1
dx
dy dy
Obtain 6 x 2 + 5 y + 5 x + 3 y2 =0 B1
dx dx

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1336 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 31

5
Substitute x = 0, y = 2 to obtain − or equivalent following correct work B1 [4]
6

6 (i) State or imply Auuuis

r
(1, 4, –2) B1
State or imply QP = 12i + 6j – 6k or equivalent B1
Use QP as normal and A as mid-point to find equation of plane M1
Obtain 12 x + 6 y − 6 z = 48 or equivalent A1 [4]

(ii) Either State equation of PB is r = 7i + 7j – 5k + λ i B1

Set up and solve a relevant equation for λ . M1
Obtain λ = −9 and hence B is (–2, 7, –5) A1
Use correct method to find distance between A and B. M1
Obtain 5.20 A1

Or Obtain 12 for result of scalar product of QP and i or equivalent B1

Use correct method involving moduli, scalar product and cosine
to find angle APB M1
Obtain 35.26° or equivalent A1
Use relevant trigonometry to find AB M1
Obtain 5.20 A1 [5]

7 (a) State or imply 3a + 3bi + 2i(a − bi) = 17 + 8i B1

Consider real and imaginary parts to obtain two linear equations in a and b M1*
Solve two simultaneous linear equations for a or b M1 (dep*)
Obtain 7 − 2i A1 [4]

(b) Either Show or imply a triangle with side 2 B1

State at least two of the angles 14 π , 23 π and 1
12
π B1
State or imply argument is 14 π B1
Use sine rule or equivalent to find r M1
1π i
Obtain 6.69e 4 A1

Or State y = x. B1
1 3 x 1 y−2
State y = x + 2 or = or = B1
3 2 2
x + ( y − 2) 2 2 x + ( y − 2) 2
2

π
State or imply argument is B1
4
Solve for x or y. M1
1
πi
Obtain 6.69e 4
A1 [5]

∫
1
8 (a) Carry out integration by parts and reach ax 2 ln x + b 2
x 2 dx M1*
2 2
Obtain 2 x ln x − ∫ 1x . 2 x dx A1
Obtain 2 x 2 ln x − x 2 A1
Use limits, having integrated twice M1 (dep*)
Confirm given result 56 ln 2 − 12 A1 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1337
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 31

(b) State or imply ddux = 4 cos 4 x B1

Carry out complete substitution except limits M1
Obtain ∫ ( 14 − 14 u 2 ) du or equivalent A1
Integrate to obtain form k1u + k2u3 with non-zero constants k1 , k2 M1
Use appropriate limits to obtain 11
96
A1 [5]

9 (i) State or imply R = 5 B1

Use relevant trigonometry to find α M1
Obtain α = 0.6435 A1 [3]

(ii) (a) Carry out appropriate method to find one value in given range M1
Obtain 1.80 A1
Carry out appropriate method to find second value in given range M1
Obtain 5.77 and no other value A1 [4]

(b) Express integrand as k sec2 (θ − their α ) for any constant k M1

Integrate to obtain result k tan(θ − their α ) A1
Obtain correct answer 2 tan(θ − 0.6435) A1 [3]

10 (i) State ddVt = 80 − kV B1

Correctly separate variables and attempt integration of one side M1
Obtain a ln(80 − kV ) = t or equivalent M1*
Obtain − 1k ln(80 − kV ) = t or equivalent A1
Use t = 0 and V = 0 to find constant of integration or as limits M1 (dep*)
Obtain − 1k ln(80 − kV ) = t − 1k ln 80 or equivalent A1
Obtain given answer V = k1 (80 − 80e− kt ) correctly A1 [7]

(ii) Use iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.14 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 s.f. to justify answer to 2 s.f. or show a sign
change in the interval (0.135, 0.145) A1 [3]

(iii) State a value between 530 and 540 cm3 inclusive B1

State or imply that volume approaches 569 cm3 (allowing any value between
567 and 571 inclusive) B1 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

Solve the equation x − 2 =

1
1 3x . [3]

2 The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

xn xn3 + 100
xn+1 =
2 xn3 + 25
,

with initial value x1 = 3.5, converges to !.

(i) Use this formula to calculate ! correct to 4 decimal places, showing the result of each iteration
to 6 decimal places. [3]

(ii) State an equation satisfied by ! and hence find the exact value of !. [2]

3
ln y

(0.64, 0.76)

(1.69, 0.32)

x2
O

The variables x and y satisfy the equation y = Ae−kx , where A and k are constants. The graph of ln y
2

against x2 is a straight line passing through the points 0.64, 0.76 and 1.69, 0.32, as shown in the
diagram. Find the values of A and k correct to 2 decimal places. [5]

4 The polynomial ax3 − 20x2 + x + 3, where a is a constant, is denoted by p x. It is given that 3x + 1
is a factor of p x.

(i) Find the value of a. [3]

(ii) When a has this value, factorise p x completely. [3]

5
y

x
–a 3a

The diagram shows the curve with equation

x3 + xy2 + ay2 − 3ax2 = 0,
where a is a positive constant. The maximum point on the curve is M . Find the x-coordinate of M in
terms of a. [6]

© UCLES 2013 9709/32/M/J/13

1
6 (i) By differentiating , show that the derivative of sec x is sec x tan x. Hence show that if
cos x
y = ln sec x + tan x then = sec x.
dy
[4]
dx

(ii) Using the substitution x = ï3 tan 1, find the exact value of
3
Ô
1
3 + x2
dx,
1

expressing your answer as a single logarithm. [4]

7 (i) By first expanding cos x + 45Å, express cos x + 45Å − ï2 sin x in the form R cos x + !,
where R > 0 and 0Å < ! < 90Å. Give the value of R correct to 4 significant figures and the value
of ! correct to 2 decimal places. [5]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

cos x + 45Å − ï2 sin x = 2,
for 0Å < x < 360Å. [4]

in the form 2 + +
1 A B C
x 2x + 1 x 2x + 1
8 (i) Express 2
. [4]
x

(ii) The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

y = x2 2x + 1
dy
,
dx
and y = 1 when x = 1. Solve the differential equation and find the exact value of y when x = 2.
Give your value of y in a form not involving logarithms. [7]

9 (a) The complex number w is such that Re w > 0 and w + 3w* = iw2 , where w* denotes the complex
conjugate of w. Find w, giving your answer in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [5]

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers
Ï which satisfy both the inequalities Ï − 2i ≤ 2 and 0 ≤ arg Ï + 2 ≤ 14 0. Calculate the greatest
value of Ï for points in this region, giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [6]

10 The points A and B have position vectors 2i − 3j + 2k and 5i − 2j + k respectively. The plane p has
equation x + y = 5.

(i) Find the position vector of the point of intersection of the line through A and B and the plane p.
[4]

(ii) A second plane q has an equation of the form x + by + cÏ = d, where b, c and d are constants.
The plane q contains the line AB, and the acute angle between the planes p and q is 60Å. Find
the equation of q. [7]

© UCLES 2013 9709/32/M/J/13

BLANK PAGE

9709/32/M/J/13
0.0 Year 2013 1341

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1342 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1343

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1344 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1345

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1346 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1347

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1348 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1349

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1350 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1351

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1352 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1353
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1354 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 32
2
1 
1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular equation ( x − 2) 2 =  x  ,
3 
1
or pair of equations x − 2 = ± x M1
3
Obtain answer x = 3 A1
3
Obtain answer x = , or equivalent A1
2

OR: Obtain answer x = 3 by solving an equation or by inspection B1

1
State or imply the equation x – 2 = − , or equivalent M1
3
3
Obtain answer x = , or equivalent A1 [3]
2

2 (i) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.6840 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 6 d.p. to justify 3.6840, or show there is a sign
change in the interval (3.68395, 3.68405) A1 [3]

x( x 3 + 100)
(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. x = B1
2( x 3 + 25)
State that the value of α is 3 50 , or exact equivalent B1 [2]

3 EITHER: State or imply ln y = ln A – kx2 B1

Substitute values of ln y and x2, and solve for k or ln A M1
Obtain k = 0.42 or A = 2.80 A1
Solve for ln A or k M1
Obtain A = 2.80 or k = 0.42 A1

OR1: State or imply ln y = ln A – kx2 B1

Using values of ln y and x2, equate gradient of line to –k and solve for k M1
Obtain k = 0.42 A1
Solve for ln A M1
Obtain A = 2.80 A1

OR2: Obtain two correct equations in k and A and substituting y– and x2 – values in
2
y = Ae -kx B1
Solve for k M1
Obtain k = 0.42 A1
Solve for A M1
Obtain A = 2.80 A1 [5]
[SR: If unsound substitutions are made, e.g. using x = 0.;64 and y = 0.76, give
B1M0A0M1A0 in the EITHER and OR1 schemes, and B0M1A0M1A0 in the OR2
scheme.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1355
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 32

1
4 (i) Substitute x = − , or divide by 3 x + 1 , and obtain a correct equation,
3
1 20 1
e.g. − a− − +3=0 B1
27 9 3
Solve for a an equation obtained by a valid method M1
Obtain a = 12 A1 [3]

1 2
(ii) Commence division by 3 x + 1 reaching a partial quotient ax + kx M1
3
Obtain quadratic factor 4 x 2 − 8 x + 3 A1
Obtain factorisation (3 x + 1)(2 x − 1)(2 x − 3) A1 [3]
1 2
[The M1 is earned if inspection reaches an unknown factor ax + Bx + C and an
3
equation in B and/or C, or an unknown factor Ax 2 + Bx + 3 and an equation in A
and/or B, or if two coefficients with the correct moduli are stated without working.]
[If linear factors are found by the factor theorem, give B1B1 for (2x – 1) and
(2x – 3), and B1 for the complete factorisation.]
[Synthetic division giving 12x2 – 24x + 9 as quadratic factor earns M1A1, but the
1
final factorisation needs ( x + ) , or equivalent, in order to earn the second A1.]
3
1
[SR: If x = is used in substitution or synthetic division, give the M1 in part (i) but
3
give M0 in part (ii).]

dy
5 EITHER: State 2ay as derivative of ay2 B1
dx
dy
State y 2 + 2 xy as derivative of xy2 B1
dx
dy
Equate derivative of LHS to zero and set equal to zero M1
dx
Obtain 3x 2 + y 2 − 6ax = 0 , or horizontal equivalent A1
Eliminate y and obtain an equation in x M1
Solve for x and obtain answer x = 3a A1

3ax 2 − x 3
OR1: Rearrange equation in the form y 2 = and attempt differentiation of one
x+a
side B1
Use correct quotient or product rule to differentiate RHS M1
Obtain correct derivative of RHS in any form A1
dy
Set equal to zero and obtain an equation in x M1
dx
Obtain a correct horizontal equation free of surds A1
Solve for x and obtain answer x = 3a A1

1
 3ax 2 − x 3  2
OR2: Rearrange equation in the form y =   and differentiation of RHS
 B1
 x+a 
Use correct quotient or product rule and chain rule M1
Obtain correct derivative in any form A1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1356 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 32

Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation in x M1

Obtain a correct horizontal equation free of surds A1
Solve for x and obtain answer x = 3a A1 [6]

6 (i) Use correct quotient or chain rule to differentiate sec x M1

Obtain given derivative, sec x tan x, correctly A1
Use chain rule to differentiate y M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]

(ii) Using dx 3 sec 2 θ dθ , or equivalent, express integral in terms of θ and d θ M1

Obtain ∫ secθ dθ A1
1 1
Use limits π and π correctly in an integral form of the form k ln (secθ + tan θ ) M1
6 3
2+ 3
Obtain a correct exact final answer in the given form, e.g. ln  A1 [4]
 3 


7 (i) Use cos (A + B) formula to express the given expression in terms of cos x and sin x M1
cos x 3
Collect terms and reach − sin x, or equivalent A1
2 2
Obtain R = 2.236 A1
Use trig formula to find α M1
Obtain α = 71.57° with no errors seen A1 [5]

(ii) Evaluate cos–1 (2/2.236) to at least 1 d.p. (26.56° to 2 d.p., use of R = 5 gives
26.57°) B1
Carry out an appropriate method to find a value of x in the interval 0°< x < 360° M1
Obtain answer, e.g. x = 315° (315.0°) A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. 261.9° and no others in the given interval A1 [4]
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[Treat answers in radians as a misread and deduct A1 from the answers for the
angles.]
[SR: Conversion of the equation to a correct quadratic in sin x, cos x, or tan x earns
B1, then M1 for solving a 3-term quadratic and obtaining a value of x in the given
interval, and A1 + A1 for the two correct answers (candidates must reject spurious
roots to earn the final A1).]

8 (i) Use any relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 1, B = –2, C = 4 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [4]
[If A and C are found by the cover up rule, give B1 + B1 then M1A1 for finding B. If
only one is found by the rule, give B1M1A1A1.]

1
(ii) Separate variables and obtain one term by integrating or a partial fraction M1
y
1
Obtain ln y = – – 2 ln (2x + 1) + c, or equivalent A3
2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1357
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 32

Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 1, y = 1, in a solution containing at least three

terms of the form k ln y, l/x, m ln x and n ln (2x + 1), or equivalent M1
1
Obtain solution ln y = – − 2 ln x + 2 ln(2 x + 1) + c , or equivalent A1
2
1
25
Substitute x = 2 and obtain y = e 2 , or exact equivalent free of logarithms A1 [7]
36
(The f.t. is on A, B, C. Give A2 if there is only one error or omission in the
integration; A1 if two.)

9 (a) Substitute w = x + iy and state a correct equation in x and y B1

Use i2 = –1 and equate real parts M1
Obtain y = –2 A1
Equate imaginary parts and solve for x M1
Obtain x = 2 2 , or equivalent, only A1 [5]

(b) Show a circle with centre 2i B1

Show a circle with radius 2 B1
1
Show half line from –2 at π to real axis B1
4
Shade the correct region B1
Carry out a complete method for calculating the greatest value of z M1
Obtain answer 3.70 A1 [6]

10 (i) Carry out a correct method for finding a vector equation for AB M1
Obtain r = 2i – 3j + 2k + λ (3i + j – k) or
r = µ (2i + 3j + 2k) + (1 – µ )(5i – 2j + k), or equivalent A1
Substitute components in equation of p and solve for λ or for µ M1
3 1 13 3 1
Obtain λ = or µ = − and final answer i − j + k, or equivalent A1 [4]
2 2 2 2 2

(ii) Either equate scalar product of direction vector of AB and normal to q to zero or
substitute for A and B in the equation of q and subtract expressions M1*
Obtain 3 + b – c = 0, or equivalent A1
Using the correct method for the moduli, divide the scalar product of the normals to
1
p and q by the product of their moduli and equate to ± , or form horizontal
2
equivalent M1*
1+ b 1
Obtain correct equation in any form, e.g. =± A1
( 2 2
)
1 + b + c (1 + 1) 2
Solve simultaneous equations for b or for c M1 (dep*)
Obtain b = –4 and c = –1 A1
Use a relevant point and obtain final answer x – 4y – z = 12, or equivalent A1 [7]
(The f.t. is on b and c.)

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 4x + 3 > x . [4]

2 It is given that ln y + 1 − ln y = 1 + 3 ln x. Express y in terms of x, in a form not involving logarithms.

[4]

3 Solve the equation tan 2x = 5 cot x, for 0Å < x < 180Å. [5]

4 (i) Express ï3 cos x + sin x in the form R cos x − !, where R > 0 and 0 < ! < 12 0, giving the exact
values of R and !. [3]

(ii) Hence show that

Ô 2 dx = 4 ï3.
2
1 1 4
ï3 cos x + sin x

10
6

5 The polynomial 8x3 + ax2 + bx + 3, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p x. It is given that
2x + 1 is a factor of p x and that when p x is divided by 2x − 1 the remainder is 1.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, find the remainder when p x is divided by 2x2 − 1. [3]

6
y

a x
O

The diagram shows the curves y = e2x−3 and y = 2 ln x. When x = a the tangents to the curves are
parallel.

(i) Show that a satisfies the equation a = 1

2
3 − ln a. [3]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this equation has a root between 1 and 2. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula an+1 = 12 3 − ln an to calculate a correct to 2 decimal places, showing
the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

© UCLES 2013 9709/33/M/J/13

7 The complex number Ï is defined by Ï = a + ib, where a and b are real. The complex conjugate of Ï
is denoted by Ï*.

(i) Show that Ï 2 = ÏÏ* and that Ï − ki* = Ï* + ki, where k is real. [2]

In an Argand diagram a set of points representing complex numbers Ï is defined by the equation
Ï − 10i = 2 Ï − 4i.

(ii) Show, by squaring both sides, that

ÏÏ* − 2iÏ* + 2iÏ − 12 = 0.

Hence show that Ï − 2i = 4. [5]

(iii) Describe the set of points geometrically. [1]

8 The variables x and t satisfy the differential equation

dx k − x3
t = ,
dt 2x2
for t > 0, where k is a constant. When t = 1, x = 1 and when t = 4, x = 2.

(i) Solve the differential equation, finding the value of k and obtaining an expression for x in terms
of t. [9]

(ii) State what happens to the value of x as t becomes large. [1]

9
y

x
O 1
2
p

The diagram shows the curve y = sin2 2x cos x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 0, and its maximum point M .

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M . [6]

(ii) Using the substitution u = sin x, find by integration the area of the shaded region bounded by the
curve and the x-axis. [4]

10 The line l has equation r = i + j + k + , ai + 2j + k, where a is a constant. The plane p has equation
x + 2y + 2Ï = 6. Find the value or values of a in each of the following cases.

(i) The line l is parallel to the plane p. [2]

(ii) The line l intersects the line passing through the points with position vectors 3i + 2j + k and
i + j − k. [4]

(iii) The acute angle between the line l and the plane p is tan−1 2. [5]

© UCLES 2013 9709/33/M/J/13

BLANK PAGE

9709/33/M/J/13
0.0 Year 2013 1361

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1362 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1363

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1364 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1365

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1366 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1367

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1368 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1369

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1370 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1371

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1372 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1373
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1374 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1375
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 33

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (4x + 3)2 > x2, or corresponding equation
or pair of equations 4x + 3 = ± x M1
Obtain a critical value, e.g. –1 A1
3
Obtain a second critical value, e.g. − A1
5
3
State final answer x < –1, x > − A1
5

OR: Obtain critical value x = –1, by solving a linear equation or inequality, or from a graphical
method or by inspection B1
3
Obtain the critical value − similarly B2
5
3
State final answer x < –1, x > − B1 [4]
5
[Do not condone ≤ or ≥ .]

2 Use law for the logarithm of a product, quotient or power M1

Use ln e = 1 or exp(l) = 3 M1
y +1
Obtain correct equation free of logarithms in any form, e.g. = ex 3 A1
y
Rearrange as y = (ex3 – 1)–1, or equivalent A1 [4]

3 Use correct tan 2A formula and cot x = 1/tan x to form an equation in tan x M1
Obtain a correct horizontal equation in any form A1
Solve an equation in tan2x for x M1
Obtain answer, e.g. 40.2° A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. 139.8°, and no other in the given interval A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval.]
[Treat answers in radians as a misread and deduct A1 from the marks for the angles.]
[SR: For the answer x = 90° give B1 and A1 for one of the other angles.]

4 (i) State R = 2 B1
Use trig formula to find α M1
1
Obtain α = π with no errors seen A1 [3]
6

(ii) Substitute denominator of integrand and state integral k tan (x – α ) M1*

1  1 
State correct indefinite integral tan  x − π  A1
4  6 
Substitute limits M1 (dep*)
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1376 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 33

1
5 (i) Substitute x = − , or divide by (2x + 1), and obtain a correct equation, e.g. a – 2b + 8 = 0 B1
2
1
Substitute x = and equate to 1, or divide by (2x – 1) and equate constant remainder to 1 M1
2
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. a + 2b + 12 = 0 A1
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtain a = –10 and b = –1 A1 [5]

(ii) Divide by 2x2 – 1 and reach a quotient of the form 4x + k M1

Obtain quotient 4x – 5 A1
Obtain remainder 3x – 2 A1 [3]

6 (i) State the correct derivatives 2e2x – 3 and 2/x B1

Equate derivatives and use a law of logarithms on an equation equivalent to ke2x – 3 = m/x M1
Obtain the given result correctly (or work vice versa) A1 [3]

1
(ii) Consider the sign of a − (3 − ln a) when a = 1 and a = 2, or equivalent M1
2
Complete the argument with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.35 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.35 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.345, 1.355) A1 [3]

7 (i) Show that a 2 + b 2 = (a + ib)(a − ib) B1

∗
Show that (a + ib − ki) = a − ib + ki B1 [2]

(ii) Square both sides and express the given equation in terms of z and z ∗ M1
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. (z – 10i)(z* + 10i) = 4(z – 4i)(z* + 4i) A1
Obtain the given equation A1
Either express z − 2i = 4 in terms of z and z* or reduce the given equation to the form
z −u = r M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [5]

(iii) State that the locus is a circle with centre 2i and radius 5 B1 [1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2013 1377
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 33

8 (i) Separate variables correctly and integrate at least one side M1

Obtain term ln t, or equivalent B1
Obtain term of the form a ln(k – x3) M1
2
Obtain term − ln(k − x 3 ) , or equivalent A1
3
EITHER: Evaluate a constant or use limits t = 1, x =1 in a solution containing a ln t and
b ln(k – x3) M1*
2 3 2
Obtain correct answer in any form e.g. ln t = − ln(k − x ) + ln(k − 1) A1
3 3
Use limits t = 4, x =2, and solve for k M1(dep*)
Obtain k = 9 A1

OR: Using limits t = 1, x = 1 and t = 4, x = 2 in a solution containing a ln t and

b ln (k – x3) obtain an equation in k M1*
2 2
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. ln 4 = − ln(k − 8) + ln(k − 1) A1
3 3
Solve for k M1(dep*)
Obtain k = 9 A1

3 1
−
Substitute k = 9 and obtain x = (9 − 8t 2 )3 A1 [9]

1
(ii) State that x approaches 9 3 , or equivalent B1 [1]

9 (i) Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. 4sin2x cos2x cos x – sin2 2x sin x A1
Equate derivative to zero and use a double angle formula M1*
Reduce equation to one in a single trig function M1(dep*)
Obtain a correct equation in any form,
e.g. 10 cos3 x = 6 cos x, 4 = 6 tan2 x or 4 = 10 sin2 x A1
Solve and obtain x = 0.685 A1 [6]

(ii) Using du = ± cos x dx, or equivalent, express integral in terms of u and du M1

Obtain ∫ 4u 2 (1 − u 2 ) du , or equivalent A1
Use limits u = 0 and u = 1 in an integral of the form au3 + bu5 M1
8
Obtain answer (or 0.533) A1 [4]
15

10 (i) Equate scalar product of direction vector of l and p to zero M1

Solve for a and obtain a = –6 A1 [2]

(ii) Express general point of l correctly in parametric form, e.g. 3i + 2j + k + µ (2i + j + 2k)
or (1 – µ )(3i + 2j + k) + µ (i + j – k) B1
Equate at least two pairs of corresponding components of l and the second line and solve
for λ or for µ M1
2 1 2 1
Obtain either λ = or µ = ; or λ = or µ = ; or reach λ (a − 4) = 0
3 3 a −1 a −1
or (1 + µ )(a − 4) = 0 A1
Obtain a = 4 having ensured (if necessary) that all three component equations are satisfied A1 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1378 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 33

(iii) Using the correct process for the moduli, divide scalar product of direction vector if l and
normal to p by the product of their moduli and equate to the sine of the given angle, or form
an equivalent horizontal equation M1*
Use 25 as sine of the angle A1
a+6 2
State equation in any form, e.g. = A1
2
(a + 4 + 1) (1 + 4 + 4) 5
Solve for a M1 (dep*)
60
Obtain answers for a = 0 and a = , or equivalent A1 [5]
31
[Allow use of the cosine of the angle to score M1M1.]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1379

Year 2012

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the set of values of x satisfying the inequality 3 | x − 1| < | 2x + 1|. [4]

2 Solve the equation

5x−1 = 5x − 5,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 Solve the equation

sin(θ + 45◦ ) = 2 cos(θ − 30◦ ),
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < θ < 180◦ . [5]

4 When (1 + ax)−2 , where a is a positive constant, is expanded in ascending powers of x, the coefficients
of x and x3 are equal.

(i) Find the exact value of a. [4]

(ii) When a has this value, obtain the expansion up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [3]

, show that if y = sec x then = sec x tan x.

1 dy
5 (i) By differentiating [2]
cos x dx

≡ sec x + tan x.
1
sec x − tan x
(ii) Show that [1]

≡ 2 sec2 x − 1 + 2 sec x tan x.

1
(sec x − tan x)2
(iii) Deduce that [2]

√
1π

(iv) Hence show that ä = ( 2 − π ).

4
1 1
(sec x − tan x)2
dx 4
8 [3]
0

6 The variables x and y are related by the differential equation

= 1 − y2 .
dy
x
dx
When x = 2, y = 0. Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [8]

7 The equation of a curve is ln(xy) − y3 = 1.

=
dy y
dx x(3y3 − 1)
(i) Show that . [4]

(ii) Find the coordinates of the point where the tangent to the curve is parallel to the y-axis, giving
each coordinate correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

© UCLES 2012 9709/31/O/N/12

8
y
M

x
O

− 12 x2√
The diagram shows the curve y = e (1 + 2x2 ) for x ≥ 0, and its maximum point M .

(i) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

p
xn+1 = ln(4 + 8x2n ),
with initial value x1 = 2, converges to a certain value α . State an equation satisfied by α and
hence show that α is the x-coordinate of a point on the curve where y = 0.5. [3]

(iii) Use the iterative formula to determine α correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

√
9 The complex number 1 + ( 2)i is denoted by u. The polynomial x4 + x2 + 2x + 6 is denoted by p(x).

(i) Showing your working, verify that u is a root of the equation p(x) = 0, and write down a second
complex root of the equation. [4]

(ii) Find the other two roots of the equation p(x) = 0. [6]

10 With respect to the origin O, the points A, B and C have position vectors given by

−−→ −−→ −−→

3 2 1
OA = −2 !, OB = −1 ! and OC = −5 !.
4 7 −3
−−→
The plane m is parallel to OC and contains A and B.

(i) Find the equation of m, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d . [6]

(ii) Find the length of the perpendicular from C to the line through A and B. [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/31/O/N/12
0.0 Year 2012 1383

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1384 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1385

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1386 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1387

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1388 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1389

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1390 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1391

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1392 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1393

-CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1394 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1395
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1396 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 31

1 EITHER State or imply non-modular inequality (3(x – 1))2 < (2x + 1)2
or corresponding quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations 3(x – 1) = ± (2x + 1) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear
equations M1
2
Obtain critical values x = and x = 4 A1
5
2
State answer <x<4 A1
5

2
OR Obtain critical value x = or x = 4 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by
5
solving a linear equation or inequality B1
2
Obtain critical values x = and x = 4 B2
5
2
State answer < x < 4 B1 [4]
5
[Do not condone for .]

2 EITHER Use laws of indices correctly and solve for 5x or for 5–x or for 5x–1 M1
5
Obtain 5x or for 5–x or for 5x–1 in any correct form, e.g. 5x = 1 A1
1 – 5
Use correct method for solving 5x = a, or 5–x = a, or 5x–1 = a, where a 0 M1
Obtain answer x = 1.14 A1

ln5x–1 +5
OR Use an appropriate iterative formula, e.g. xn+1 = , correctly, at least once M1
ln 5
Obtain answer 1.14 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 3 d.p. to justify 1.14 to 2 d.p., or show
there is a sign change in the interval (1.135, 1.145) A1
Show there is no other root A1 [4]
[For the solution x = 1.14 with no relevant working give B1, and a further B1 if
1.14 is shown to be the only solution.]

3 Attempt use of sin (A + B) and cos (A – B) formulate to obtain an equation in cos θ and sin θ M1
Obtain a correct equation in any form A1
Use trig. formula to obtain an equation in tan θ (or cos θ, sin θ or cot θ) M1
√6 –1
Obtain tan θ = , or equivalent (or find cost θ, sin θ or cot θ) A1
1 – √2
Obtain answer θ = 105.9°, and no others in the given interval A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given material]

4 (i) Obtain correct unsimplified terms in x and x3 B1 + B1

Equate coefficients and solve for a M1
1
Obtain final answer a = , or exact equivalent A1 [4]
√2

(ii) Use correct method and value of a to find the first two terms of the expansion (1 + ax)–2 M1
Obtain 1 – √2x, or equivalent A1
3
Obtain term x A1 [3]
2

[Symbolic coefficients, e.g. –2 a, are not sufficient for the first B marks]
1
[The f.t. is solely on the value of a.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1397
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 31

5 (i) Use correct quotient or chain rule M1

Obtain the given answer correctly having shown sufficient working A1 [2]

(ii) Use a valid method, e.g. multiply numerator and denominator by sec x + tan x, and a
version of Pythagoras to justify the given identity B1 [1]

(iii) Substitute, expand (sec x + tan x)2 and use Pythagoras once M1
Obtain given identity A1 [2]

(iv) Obtain integral 2 tan x – x + 2 sec x B1

Use correct limits correctly in an expression of the form a tan x + bx + c sec x, or
equivalent, where abc 0 M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [3]

6 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of one side B1

Obtain term ln x B1
1 B
State or imply మ ≡
1 –

1 –
and use a relevant method to find A or B
1
M1
1 1
Obtain A = , B =
2 2
1 1
Integrate and obtain – ln (1 – y) + ln (1 + y), or equivalent A1
2 2
1+y 1–y
[If the integral is directly stated as k1 ln or k2 ln give M1, and then A2 for
1–y 1+y
1 1
k1 = or k2 = – ]
2 2
Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 2, y = 0 in a solution containing terms a ln x, b ln (1 – y)
and c ln (1 + y), where abc 0 M1
[This M mark is not available if the integral of 1/(1 – y2) is initially taken to be of the form
k ln (1 – y2)]
1 1+y
Obtain solution in any correct form, e.g. ln = ln x – ln 2 A1
2 1–y
x2 – 4
Rearrange and obtain y = , or equivalent, free of logarithms A1 [8]
x2 4

1 1 dy
7 (i) EITHER: State or imply
as derivative of ln xy, or equivalent B1
x dx
2 dy
State or imply 3y as derivative of y3, or equivalent B1
dx
dy
Equate derivative of LHS to zero and solve for M1
dx
Obtain the given answer A1
dy
OR Obtain xy = exp (1 + y3) and state or imply y + x as derivative of xy B1
dx
d
State or imply 3y2 exp (1 + y3) as derivative of (1 + y3) B1
dx
dy
Equate derivatives and solve for M1
dx
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]
[The M1 is dependent on at least one of the B marks being earned]

(ii) Equate denominator to zero and solve for y M1*

Obtain y = 0.693 only A1
Substitute found value in the equation and solve for x M1(dep*)
Obtain x = 5.47 only A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1398 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 31

8 (i) Use correct product or quotient rule and use chain rule at least once M1
Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve an equation with at least two non-zero terms
for real x M1

Obtain answer x = , or exact equivalent A1 [4]

√2

(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. α = ln4

8α B1
2
Rearrange to reach eα = 4 + 8α2 B1
1 2
Obtain = e– 2 α 1
2α2 , or work vice versa
1
B1 [3]
2

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.86 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.86 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.855, 1.865) A1 [3]

9 (i) EITHER Substitute x = 1 + √2 i and attempt the expansions of the x2 and x4 terms M1
Use i2 = –1 correctly at least once B1
Complete the verification A1
State second root 1 – √2 i B1
OR 1 State second root 1 – √2 i B1
Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with zeros 1 ± √2 i M1
Obtain x2 – 2x + 3, or equivalent A1
Show that the division of p(x) by x2 – 2x + 3 gives zero remainder and
complete the verification A1
OR 2 Substitute x = 1 + √2 i and use correct method to express x2 and x4 in polar form M1
Obtain x2 and x4 in any correct polar form (allow decimals here) B1
Complete an exact verification A1
State second root 1 – √2 i, or its polar equivalent (allow decimals here) B1 [4]

(ii) Carry out a complete method for finding a quadratic factor with zeros 1 ± √2 i M1*
Obtain x2 – 2x + 3, or equivalent A1
Attempt division of p(x) by x2 – 2x + 3 reaching a partial quotient x2 + kx,
or equivalent M1 (dep*)
Obtain quadratic factor x2 – 2x + 2 A1
Find the zeros of the second quadratic factor, using i2 = –1 M1 (dep*)
Obtain roots –1 + i and –1 –i A1 [6]
[The second M1 is earned if inspection reaches an unknown factor x2 + Bx + C and an
equation in B and/or C, or an unknown factor Ax2 + Bx + (6/3) and an equation in A and/or B]
[If part (i) is attempted by the OR 1 method, then an attempt at part (ii) which uses or
quotes relevant working or results obtained in part (i) should be marked using the scheme for part (ii)]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1399
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 31

10 (i) EITHER Use scalar product of relevant vectors, or subtract point equations to form two
equations in a,b,c, e.g. a – 5b – 3c = 0 and a – b – 3c = 0 M1*
State two correct equations in a,b,c A1
Solve simultaneous equations and find one ratio, e.g. a : c, or b = 0 M1 (dep*)
Obtain a : b : c = 3 : 0 : 1, or equivalent A1
Substitute a relevant point in 3x + z = d and evaluate d M1 (dep*)
Obtain equation 3x + z = 13, or equivalent A1
OR 1 Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors,
e.g. (i – 5j – 3k) × (i – j – 3k) M2*
Obtain 2 correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. 12i + 4k A1
Substitute a relevant point in 12x + 4z = d and evaluate d M1 (dep*)
Obtain 3x + z =13, or equivalent A1
OR 2 Attempt to form 2–parameter equation for the plane with relevant vectors M2*
State a correct equation e.g. r = 3i – 2j + 4k + λ(i – 5j – 3k) + µ(i – j –3k) A1
State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1 (dep*)
Obtain equation 3x + z =13, or equivalent A1 [6]

(ii) EITHER for a point P on AB with a parameter t, e.g. 2i + 3j + 7k + t(–i + j + 3k) B1
Find
Either: Equate scalar product
,
to zero and form an equation in t
Or 1: Equate derivative for CP2 (or CP) to zero and form an equation in t
Or 2: Use Pythagoras in triangle CPA (or CPB) and form an equation in t M1
Solve and obtain correct value of t, e.g. t = –2 A1
Carry out a complete method for finding the length of CP M1
Obtain answer 3√2 (4.24), or equivalent A1
OR 1 (or
State ) and
in component form B1
Using a relevant scalar product find the cosine of CAB (or CBA) M1
22 33
Obtain cost CAB = – , or cos CBA = , or equivalent A1
√11.√62 √11.√117
Use trig to find the length of the perpendicular M1
Obtain answer 3√2 (4.24), or equivalent A1
OR 2 (or
State ) and
in component form B1
Using a relevant scalar product find the length of the projection AC (or BC)
on AB M1
Obtain answer 2√11 (or), 3√11 or equivalent A1
Use Pythagoras to find the length of the perpendicular M1
Obtain answer 3√2 (4.24), or equivalent A1
OR 3 (or
State ) and
in component form B1
Calculate their vector product, e.g. (–2i – 3j – 7k ) × (–i + j + 3k) M1
Obtain correct product, e.g. –2i + 13j – 5k A1
Divide modulus of the product by the modulus of M1
Obtain answer 3√2 (4.24), or equivalent A1
OR 4 State two of
, in component form
) and B1
Use cosine formula in triangle ABC to find cos A or cos B M1
44 66
Obtain cos A = – , or cos B = A1
2√11.√62 2√11.√117
Use trig to find the length of the perpendicular M1
Obtain answer 3√2 (4.24), or equivalent A1 [5]
[The f.t is on
]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the set of values of x satisfying the inequality 3 | x − 1| < | 2x + 1|. [4]

2 Solve the equation

5x−1 = 5x − 5,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 Solve the equation

sin(θ + 45◦ ) = 2 cos(θ − 30◦ ),
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < θ < 180◦ . [5]

4 When (1 + ax)−2 , where a is a positive constant, is expanded in ascending powers of x, the coefficients
of x and x3 are equal.

(i) Find the exact value of a. [4]

(ii) When a has this value, obtain the expansion up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [3]

, show that if y = sec x then = sec x tan x.

1 dy
5 (i) By differentiating [2]
cos x dx

≡ sec x + tan x.
1
sec x − tan x
(ii) Show that [1]

≡ 2 sec2 x − 1 + 2 sec x tan x.

1
(sec x − tan x)2
(iii) Deduce that [2]

√
1π

(iv) Hence show that ä = ( 2 − π ).

4
1 1
(sec x − tan x)2
dx 4
8 [3]
0

6 The variables x and y are related by the differential equation

= 1 − y2 .
dy
x
dx
When x = 2, y = 0. Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [8]

7 The equation of a curve is ln(xy) − y3 = 1.

=
dy y
dx x(3y3 − 1)
(i) Show that . [4]

(ii) Find the coordinates of the point where the tangent to the curve is parallel to the y-axis, giving
each coordinate correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

8
y
M

x
O

− 12 x2√
The diagram shows the curve y = e (1 + 2x2 ) for x ≥ 0, and its maximum point M .

(i) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

(iii) Use the iterative formula to determine α correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

√
9 The complex number 1 + ( 2)i is denoted by u. The polynomial x4 + x2 + 2x + 6 is denoted by p(x).

(i) Showing your working, verify that u is a root of the equation p(x) = 0, and write down a second
complex root of the equation. [4]

(ii) Find the other two roots of the equation p(x) = 0. [6]

10 With respect to the origin O, the points A, B and C have position vectors given by

−−→ −−→ −−→

3 2 1
OA = −2 !, OB = −1 ! and OC = −5 !.
4 7 −3
−−→
The plane m is parallel to OC and contains A and B.

(i) Find the equation of m, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d . [6]

(ii) Find the length of the perpendicular from C to the line through A and B. [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/32/O/N/12
0.0 Year 2012 1403

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1404 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1405
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1406 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 32

4 (i) Obtain correct unsimplified terms in x and x3 B1 + B1

Equate coefficients and solve for a M1
1
Obtain final answer a = , or exact equivalent A1 [4]
√2

(ii) Use correct method and value of a to find the first two terms of the expansion (1 + ax)–2 M1
Obtain 1 – √2x, or equivalent A1
3
Obtain term x A1 [3]
2

[Symbolic coefficients, e.g. –2 a, are not sufficient for the first B marks]
1
[The f.t. is solely on the value of a.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1407
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 32

5 (i) Use correct quotient or chain rule M1

Obtain the given answer correctly having shown sufficient working A1 [2]

(ii) Use a valid method, e.g. multiply numerator and denominator by sec x + tan x, and a
version of Pythagoras to justify the given identity B1 [1]

(iii) Substitute, expand (sec x + tan x)2 and use Pythagoras once M1
Obtain given identity A1 [2]

(iv) Obtain integral 2 tan x – x + 2 sec x B1

Use correct limits correctly in an expression of the form a tan x + bx + c sec x, or
equivalent, where abc 0 M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [3]

6 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of one side B1

(ii) Equate denominator to zero and solve for y M1*

Obtain y = 0.693 only A1
Substitute found value in the equation and solve for x M1(dep*)
Obtain x = 5.47 only A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1408 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 32

Obtain answer x = , or exact equivalent A1 [4]

√2

(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. α = ln4

8α B1
2
Rearrange to reach eα = 4 + 8α2 B1
1 2
Obtain = e– 2 α 1
2α2 , or work vice versa
1
B1 [3]
2

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.86 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.86 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.855, 1.865) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1409
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 32

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation

ln(x + 5) = 1 + ln x,
giving your answer in terms of e. [3]

2 (i) Express 24 sin θ − 7 cos θ in the form R sin(θ − α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ . Give the value
of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence find the smallest positive value of θ satisfying the equation

24 sin θ − 7 cos θ = 17. [2]

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

4t
x= , y = 2 ln(2t + 3).
2t + 3

dy
(i) Express in terms of t, simplifying your answer. [4]
dx

(ii) Find the gradient of the curve at the point for which x = 1. [2]

4 The variables x and y are related by the differential equation

dy
(x2 + 4) = 6xy.
dx
It is given that y = 32 when x = 0. Find an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

5 The expression f (x) is defined by f (x) = 3x e−2x .

(i) Find the exact value of f ′ − 12 . [3]

0
(ii) Find the exact value of ã f (x) dx. [5]
− 12

6
y

x
a O b

The diagram shows the curve y = x4 + 2x3 + 2x2 − 4x − 16, which crosses the x-axis at the points (α , 0)
and (β , 0) where α < β . It is given that α is an integer.

(i) Find the value of α . [2]

√
(ii) Show that β satisfies the equation x = 3
(8 − 2x). [3]

(iii) Use an iteration process based on the equation in part (ii) to find the value of β correct to 2 decimal
places. Show the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

7
y

x
O

The diagram shows part of the curve y = sin3 2x cos3 2x. The shaded region shown is bounded by the
curve and the x-axis and its exact area is denoted by A.

(i) Use the substitution u = sin 2x in a suitable integral to find the value of A. [6]
kπ
(ii) Given that ã | sin3 2x cos3 2x | dx = 40A, find the value of the constant k. [2]
0

[Questions 8, 9 and 10 are printed on the next page.]

8 Two lines have equations

5 1 p 2
r= 1 ! + s −1 ! and r= 4 ! + t 5 !,
−4 3 −2 −4
where p is a constant. It is given that the lines intersect.

(i) Find the value of p and determine the coordinates of the point of intersection. [5]

(ii) Find the equation of the plane containing the two lines, giving your answer in the form
ax + by + cß = d , where a, b, c and d are integers. [5]

9 − 7x + 8x2
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(3 − x)(1 + x2 )

9 − 7x + 8x2
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including the
(3 − x)(1 + x2 )
term in x3 . [5]

10 (a) Without using a calculator, solve the equation iw2 = (2 − 2i)2 . [3]

(b) (i) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the region R consisting of points representing the
complex numbers ß where
|ß − 4 − 4i | ≤ 2. [2]

(ii) For the complex numbers represented by points in the region R, it is given that

p ≤ |ß| ≤ q and α ≤ arg ß ≤ β .

Find the values of p, q, α and β , giving your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [6]

0.0 Year 2012 1413

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1414 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1415

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1416 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1417

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1418 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1419

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1420 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1421

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1422 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1423
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1424 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation.

The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1425
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 33

1 State or imply 1n e = 1 B1
Apply at least one logarithm law for product or quotient correctly M1
(or exponential equivalent)
5
Obtain x + 5 = ex or equivalent and hence A1 [3]
e −1

2 (i) State or imply R = 25 B1

Use correct trigonometric formula to find ~ M1
Obtain 16.26 ° with no errors seen A1 [3]

17
(ii) Evaluate of sin −1 ( = 42.84…°) M1
R
Obtain answer 59.1 ° A1 [2]

3 (i) Either Use correct quotient rule or equivalent to obtain

dx 4(2t + 3) − 8t
= or equivalent B1
dt (2t + 3) 2
dy 4
Obtain = or equivalent B1
dt 2t + 3
dy
dy dt
Use = or equivalent M1
dx dx
dt
1
Obtain (2t + 3) or similarly simplified equivalent A1
3
3x
Or Express t in terms of x or y e.g. t = B1
4 − 2x
 6 
Obtain Cartesian equation e.g. y = 21n   B1
2− x
dy 2
Differentiate and obtain = M1
dx 2 − x
1
Obtain (2t + 3) or similarly simplified equivalent A1 [4]
3

3
(ii) Obtain 2t = 3 or t = B1
2
dy
Substitute in expression for and obtain 2 B1 [2]
dx

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1426 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 33

4 Separate variables correctly and integrate one side M1

Obtain ln y = ... or equivalent A1
Obtain = 31n ( x 2 + 4) or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant or use x = 0, y = 32 as limits in a solution M1
containing terms a ln y and b ln ( x 2 + 4 )
Obtain ln y = 31n ( x 2 + 4) + ln 32 − 31n 4 or equivalent A1
1
( )
Obtain y = x 2 + 4 or equivalent
2
A1 [6]

5 (i) Either Use correct product rule M1

Obtain 3e −2 x − 6 xe −2 x or equivalent A1
1
Substitute − and obtain 6e A1
2
Or Take ln of both sides and use implicit differentiation correctly M1
dy 1 
Obtain = y  − 2  or equivalent A1
dx  x 
1
Substitute − and obtain 6e A1 [3]
2

∫ ke
−2 x
(ii) Use integration by parts to reach kxe −2 x ± dx M1
3 −2 x 3 −2 x
Obtain −
2
xe +
2 ∫
e dx or equivalent A1

3 3
Obtain − xe − 2 x − e − 2 x or equivalent A1
2 4
Substitute correct limits correctly DM1
3
Obtain − with no errors or inexact work seen A1 [5]
4

6 (i) Find y for x = –2 M1

Obtain 0 and conclude that ~== –2 A1 [2]

(ii) Either Find cubic factor by division or inspection or equivalent M1

Obtain x 3 + 2 x − 8 A1
Rearrange to confirm given equation x = 3 8 − 2 x A1
Or Derive cubic factor from given equation and form product with (x – ~) M1
(
(x + 2) x 3 + 2 x − 8 ) A1
Obtain quartic x + 2 x 3 + 2 x 2 − 4 x − 16 ( = 0)
4
A1
Or Derive cubic factor from given equation and divide the quartic by the cubic M1
( ) (
x 4 + 2 x 3 + 2 x 2 − 4 x − 16 ÷ x 3 + 2 x − 8 ) A1
Obtain correct quotient and zero remainder A1 [3]

(iii) Use the given iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.67 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify answer 1.67 to 2 d.p. or show
there is a change of sign in interval (1.665, 1.675) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1427
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 33

7 (i) State or imply du = 2cos2x dx or equivalent B1

Express integrand in terms of u and du M1
Obtain ∫
1 3
2
( )
u 1 − u 2 du or equivalent A1

Integration to obtain an integral of the form k 1u 4 + k 2 u 6 , k 1 , k 2 ≠ 0 M1

1
Use limits 0 and 1 or (if reverting to x) 0 and π correctly DM1
4
1
Obtain , or equivalent A1 [6]
24

(ii) Use 40 and upper limit from part (i) in appropriate calculation M1
Obtain k = 10 with no errors seen A1 [2]

8 (i) State or imply general point of either line has coordinates (5 + s, 1 – s, – 4 + 3s) or B1
(p + 2t, 4 + 5t, – 2 – 4t)
Solve simultaneous equations and find s and t M1
Obtain s = 2 and t = – 1 or equivalent in terms of p A1
Substitute in third equation to find p = 9 A1
State point of intersection is (7, – 1, 2) A1 [5]

(ii) Either Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b, c

e.g. a – b + 3c = 0 or 2a + 5b – 4c = 0 M1
State two correct equations in a, b, c A1
Solve simultaneous equations to obtain at least one ratio DM1
Obtain a : b : c = – 11 : 10 : 7 or equivalent A1
Obtain equation –11x + 10y + 7z = –73 or equivalent with integer coefficients A1
1  2
Or 1 Calculate vector product of  −1 and  5  M1
3  −4 
   
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
 −11
Obtain correct  10  or equivalent A1
 7 
 
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in r.n = d to find d DM1

Obtain equation –11x + 10y + 7z = –73 or equivalent with integer coefficients A1

Or 2 Using relevant vectors, form correctly a two-parameter equation for the plane M1
5 1  2
Obtain r =  1  + λ  −1 + µ  5  or equivalent A1
 −4  3  −4 
     
State three equations in x, y, z, λ , µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ DM1
Obtain 11x – 10y – 7z = 73 or equivalent with integer coefficients A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1428 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 33

A Bx + C
9 (i) State or imply form + B1
3 − x 1 + x2
Use relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain A = 6 A1
Obtain B = –2 A1
Obtain C = 1 A1 [5]

(ii) Either Use correct method to obtain first two terms of expansion
−1
 1 
(
of (3 − x ) or 1 − x  or 1 + x 2
−1
) −1
M1
 3 
A 1 1 1 3
Obtain 1 + x + x 2 + x  A1
3 3 9 27 
Obtain (Bx + C)(1 – x2) A1
Obtain sufficient terms of the product (Bx + C)(1 – x2), B, C ≠ 0 and add the
two expansions M1
4 7 56 3
Obtain final answer 3 − x − x 2 + x A1
3 9 27
Or Use correct method to obtain first two terms of expansion
−1
 1 
(
of (3 − x ) or 1 − x  or 1 + x 2
−1
) −1
M1
 3 
1 1 1 1 3
Obtain 1 + x + x 2 + x  A1
3 3 9 27 
Obtain (1 – x2) A1
Obtain sufficient terms of the product of the three factors M1
4 7 56 3
Obtain final answer 3 − x − x 2 + x A1 [5]
3 9 27

10 (a) Expand and simplify as far as iw 2 = −8i or equivalent B1

Obtain first answer i 8 , or equivalent B1
Obtain second answer − i 8 , or equivalent and no others B1 [3]

(b) (i) Draw circle with centre in first quadrant M1

Draw correct circle with interior shaded or indicated A1 [2]

(ii) Identify ends of diameter corresponding to line through origin and centre M1
Obtain p = 3.66 and q = 7.66 A1
Show tangents from origin to circle M1
1 
Evaluate sin −1  2 M1
4 
1 1 
Obtain α = π − sin −1  2  or equivalent and hence 0.424 A1
4 4 
1  1 
Obtain β = π + sin −1  2  or equivalent and hence 1.15 A1 [6]
4 4 

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the equation | 4 − 2x | = 10, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [3]

(i) Expand √
1
(1 − 4x)
2 in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [3]

1 + 2x
(ii) Hence find the coefficient of x2 in the expansion of √
(4 − 16x)
. [2]

3 The polynomial p(x) is defined by

p(x) = x3 − 3ax + 4a,
where a is a constant.

(i) Given that (x − 2) is a factor of p(x), find the value of a. [2]

(ii) When a has this value,

(a) factorise p(x) completely, [3]
(b) find all the roots of the equation p(x2 ) = 0. [2]

(1 + 2i)2
The complex number u is defined by u =
2+i
4 .

(i) Without using a calculator and showing your working, express u in the form x + iy, where x and
y are real. [4]

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the locus of the complex number ß such that |ß − u | = | u |.
[3]

5
y

x
O a

The diagram shows the curve

y = 8 sin 21 x − tan 21 x
for 0 ≤ x < π . The x-coordinate of the maximum point is α and the shaded region is enclosed by the
curve and the lines x = α and y = 0.

(i) Show that α = 23 π . [3]

(ii) Find the exact value of the area of the shaded region. [4]

6 The equation of a curve is 3x2 − 4xy + y2 = 45.

(i) Find the gradient of the curve at the point (2, −3). [4]

(ii) Show that there are no points on the curve at which the gradient is 1. [3]

7 The variables x and y are related by the differential equation

=
dy 6x e3x
.
dx y2
It is given that y = 2 when x = 0. Solve the differential equation and hence find the value of y when
x = 0.5, giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [8]

1 2
8 The point P has coordinates (−1, 4, 11) and the line l has equation r = 3! + λ 1 !.
−4 3

(i) Find the perpendicular distance from P to l. [4]

(ii) Find the equation of the plane which contains P and l, giving your answer in the form
ax + by + cß = d , where a, b, c and d are integers. [5]

4x2 + 5x + 3
2x2 + 5x + 2
9 By first expressing in partial fractions, show that

4x2 + 5x + 3
4
ä dx = 8 − ln 9. [10]
0
2x2 + 5x + 2

10 + 5 tan2 x = 0. Denoting tan x by t, form an equation in t and hence show

(i) It is given that 2 tan 2x √
that either t = 0 or t = 3 (t + 0.8). [4]
√
(ii) It is given that there is exactly one real value of t satisfying the equation t = 3
(t + 0.8). Verify
by calculation that this value lies between 1.2 and 1.3. [2]
√
(iii) Use the iterative formula tn+1 = 3 (tn + 0.8) to find the value of t correct to 3 decimal places. Give
the result of each iteration to 5 decimal places. [3]

(iv) Using the values of t found in previous parts of the question, solve the equation

2 tan 2x + 5 tan2 x = 0
for −π ≤ x ≤ π . [3]

BLANK PAGE

9709/31/M/J/12
1432 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1433

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1434 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1435

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1436 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1437

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1438 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1439

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1440 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1441

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1442 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1443
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1444 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1445
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

1 State or imply 4 − 2 x = −10 and 10 B1

Use correct method for solving equation of form 2 x = a M1
Obtain 3.81 A1 [3]

1
2 (i) Either Obtain correct (unsimplified) version of x or x2 term from (1 − 4 x) 2 M1
Obtain 1 + 2x A1
Obtain + 6x2 A1
− 32
Or Differentiate and evaluate f(0) and f′(0) where f′(x) = k (1 − 4 x) M1
Obtain 1 + 2x A1
Obtain + 6x2 A1 [3]

(ii) Combine both x2 terms from product of 1 + 2x and answer from part (i) M1
Obtain 5 A1 [2]

3 (i) Substitute x = 2 and equate to zero, or divide by x – 2 and equate constant remainder to
zero, or equivalent M1
Obtain a = 4 A1 [2]

(ii) (a) Find further (quadratic or linear) factor by division, inspection or factor theorem or
equivalent M1
Obtain x2 + 2x – 8 or x + 4 A1
State (x – 2)2(x + 4) or equivalent A1 [3]

(b) State any two of the four (or six) roots B1

State all roots ( ± 2 , ± 2i ), provided two are purely imaginary B1 [2]

4 (i) Either Expand (1 + 2i)2 to obtain –3 + 4i or unsimplified equivalent B1

Multiply numerator and denominator by 2 – i M1
Obtain correct numerator –2 + 11i or correct denominator 5 A1
2 11
Obtain − + i or equivalent A1
5 5
Or Expand (1 + 2i)2 to obtain –3 + 4i or unsimplified equivalent B1
Obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or y M1
2
Obtain final answer x = − A1
5
11
Obtain final answer y = A1 [4]
5

(ii) Draw a circle M1

Show centre at relatively correct position, following their u A1
Draw circle passing through the origin A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1446 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

1 1 1
5 (i) Differentiate to obtain 4 cos x − sec 2 x B1
2 2 2
1
Equate to zero and find value of cos x M1
2
1 1 2
Obtain cos x = and confirm α = π A1 [3]
2 2 3

1
(ii) Integrate to obtain − 16 cos x … B1
2
1
… + 2 ln cos x or equivalent B1
2
2 1 1
Using limits 0 and π in a cos x + b ln cos x M1
3 2 2
1
Obtain 8 + 2 ln or exact equivalent A1 [4]
2

dy
6 (i) Obtain 2 y as derivative of y2 B1
dx
dy
Obtain − 4 y − 4 x as derivative of –4xy B1
dx
dy
Substitute x = 2 and y = –3 and find value of
dx
d (45)
(dependent on at least one B1 being earned and =0) M1
dx
12
Obtain or equivalent A1 [4]
7

dy dy
(ii) Substitute = 1 in an expression involving , x and y and obtain ay = bx M1
dx dx
Obtain y = x or equivalent A1
Uses y = x in original equation and demonstrate contradiction A1 [3]

7 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration on at least one side M1

1
Obtain y 3 or equivalent on left-hand side A1
3
∫
Use integration by parts on right-hand side (as far as axe 3 x + be 3 x dx ) M1

∫
Obtain or imply 2 xe 3 x + 2e 3 x dx or equivalent A1
2
Obtain 2 xe 3 x − e 3 x A1
3
Substitute x = 0, y = 2 in an expression containing terms Ay3, Bxe3x, Ce3x, where ABC ≠ 0, and
find the value of c M1
1 2 10
Obtain y 3 = 2 xe3 x − e3 x + or equivalent A1
3 3 3
Substitute x = 0.5 to obtain y = 2.44 A1 [8]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1447
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

 2 
 
8 (i) Either Obtain ±  − 1  for vector PA (where A is point on line) or equivalent B1
 − 15 
 
Use scalar product to find cosine of angle between PA and line M1
42
Obtain or equivalent A1
14 × 230
Use trigonometry to obtain 104 or 10.2 or equivalent A1
 2n + 2 
 
Or 1 Obtain ±  n − 1  for PN (where N is foot of perpendicular) B1
 3n − 15 
 
Equate scalar product of PN and line direction to zero
Or equate derivative of PN 2 to zero
Or use Pythagoras’ theorem in triangle PNA to form equation in n M1
Solve equation and obtain n = 3 A1
Obtain 104 or 10.2 or equivalent A1
 2 
 
Or 2 Obtain ±  − 1  for vector PA (where A is point on line) B1
 − 15 
 
Evaluate vector product of PA and line direction M1
 12 
 
Obtain ±  − 36  A1
 −4 
 
Divide modulus of this by modulus of line direction and obtain 104 or 10.2 or
equivalent A1
 2 
 
Or 3 Obtain ±  − 1  for vector PA (where A is point on line) B1
 − 15 
 
Evaluate scalar product of PA and line direction to obtain distance AN M1
Obtain 3 14 or equivalent A1
Use Pythagoras’ theorem in triangle PNA and obtain 104 or 10.2 or
equivalent A1
 2 
 
Or 4 Obtain ±  − 1  for vector PA (where A is point on line) B1
 − 15 
 
Use a second point B on line and use cosine rule in triangle ABP to find angle A
or angle B or use vector product to find area of triangle M1
Obtain correct answer (angle A = 42.25…) A1
Use trigonometry to obtain 104 or 10.2 or equivalent A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1448 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

(ii) Either Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b, c, e.g. 2a + b + 3c = 0 or

2a – b – 15c = 0 M1
State two correct equations in a, b and c A1
Solve simultaneous equations to obtain one ratio M1
Obtain a : b : c = –3 : 9 : –1 or equivalent A1
Obtain equation –3x + 9y – z = 28 or equivalent A1
2
   2   8
     
Or 1 Calculate vector product of two of  1  ,  − 1  and  2  or equiv M1
 3   − 15   − 6
     
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
 − 3
 
Obtain correct  9  or equivalent A1
 − 1
 
Substitute in –3x + 9y – z = d to find d or equivalent M1
Obtain equation –3x + 9y – z = 28 or equivalent A1
Or 2 Form a two-parameter equation of the plane M1
 1   2  2 
     
Obtain r =  3  + s 1  + t  − 1  or equivalent A1
 − 4   3   − 15 
     
State three equations in x, y, z, s, t A1
Eliminate s and t M1
Obtain equation 3x – 9y + z = –28 or equivalent A1 [5]

B C
9 State or imply form A + + B1
2x + 1 x + 2
State or obtain A = 2 B1
Use correct method for finding B or C M1
Obtain B = 1 A1
Obtain C = –3 A1
1
Obtain 2 x + ln(2 x + 1) − 3 ln( x + 2) [Deduct B1 for each error or omission] B3
2
Substitute limits in expression containing aln(2x + 1) + bln(x + 2) M1
1
Show full and exact working to confirm that 8 + ln 9 − 3 ln 6 + 3 ln 2 , or an equivalent
2
expression, simplifies to given result 8 – ln 9 A1 [10]

[SR: If A omitted from the form of fractions, give B0B0M1A0A0 in (i); B0 B1 B1 M1A0
in (ii).]
M Nx Px Q
[SR: For a solution starting with + or + , give B0B0M1A0A0 in (i);
2x + 1 x + 2 2x + 1 x + 2
B1 B1 B1 , if recover correct form, M1A0 in (ii).]
B Dx + E
[SR: For a solution starting with + , give M1A1 for one of B = 1, D = 2, E = 1
2x + 1 x+2
and A1 for the other two constants; then give B1B1 for A = 2, C = −3.]
Fx + G C
[SR: For a solution starting with + , give M1A1 for one of C = −3, F = 4, G = 3
2x + 1 x + 2
and A1 for the other constants or constant; then give B1B1 for A = 2, B = 1.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1449
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 31

10 (i) Use correct identity for tan 2 x and obtains at4 + bt3 + ct2 + dt = 0, where b may be zero M1
Obtain correct horizontal equation, e.g. 4t + 5t2 – 5t4 = 0 A1
Obtain kt(t3 + et + f) = 0 or equivalent M1
Confirm given results t = 0 and t = 3 t + 0.8 A1 [4]

(ii) Consider sign of t − 3 t + 0.8 at 1.2 and 1.3 or equivalent M1

Justify the given statement with correct calculations (–0.06 and 0.02) A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once with 1.2 < tn < 1.3 M1
Obtain final answer 1.276 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify answer or show there is a change of sign in interval
(1.2755, 1.2765) A1 [3]

(iv) Evaluate tan–1 (answer from part (iii)) to obtain at least one value M1
Obtain –2.24 and 0.906 A1
State –π, 0 and π B1 [3]
[SR If A0, B0, allow B1 for any 3 roots]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation

ln(3x + 4) = 2 ln(x + 1),
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

2
C
M q
a

A B

In the diagram, ABC is a triangle in which angle ABC is a right angle and BC = a. A circular arc,
with centre C and radius a, joins B and the point M on AC . The angle ACB is θ radians. The area of
the sector CMB is equal to one third of the area of the triangle ABC .

(i) Show that θ satisfies the equation

tan θ = 3θ . [2]

(ii) This equation has one root in the interval 0 < θ < 12 π . Use the iterative formula

θn+1 = tan−1 (3θn )

to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

r
1−x
Expand in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
1+x
3
coefficients. [5]

4 Solve the equation

cosec 2θ = sec θ + cot θ ,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < θ < 360◦ . [6]

5 The variables x and y satisfy the differential equation

= e2x+y ,
dy
dx
and y = 0 when x = 0. Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

6 The equation of a curve is y = 3 sin x + 4 cos3 x.

(i) Find the x-coordinates of the stationary points of the curve in the interval 0 < x < π . [6]

(ii) Determine the nature of the stationary point in this interval for which x is least. [2]

7 Throughout this question the use of a calculator is not permitted.

The complex number u is defined by

1 + 2i
u=
1 − 3i
.

(i) Express u in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [3]

(ii) Show on a sketch of an Argand diagram the points A, B and C representing the complex numbers
u, 1 + 2i and 1 − 3i respectively. [2]

(iii) By considering the arguments of 1 + 2i and 1 − 3i, show that

tan−1 2 + tan−1 3 = 34 π . [3]

Let I = ä √
5
x + (6 − x)
8 dx.
2
√
(i) Using the substitution u = (6 − x), show that
2

I=ä [4]
10u
(3 − u)(2 + u)
du.
1

(ii) Hence show that I = 2 ln 92 . [6]

9
y

R
x
O e

The diagram shows the curve y = x 2 ln x. The shaded region between the curve, the x-axis and the line
1

x = e is denoted by R.

(i) Find the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point where x = 1, giving your answer in the
form y = mx + c. [4]

(ii) Find by integration the volume of the solid obtained when the region R is rotated completely
about the x-axis. Give your answer in terms of π and e. [7]

[Question 10 is printed on the next page.]

10 Two planes, m and n, have equations x + 2y − 2ß = 1 and 2x − 2y + ß = 7 respectively. The line l has
equation r = i + j − k + λ (2i + j + 2k).

(i) Show that l is parallel to m. [3]

(ii) Find the position vector of the point of intersection of l and n. [3]

(iii) A point P lying on l is such that its perpendicular distances from m and n are equal. Find the
position vectors of the two possible positions for P and calculate the distance between them.
[6]
[The perpendicular distance of a point with position vector x1 i + y1 j + ß1 k from the plane
| ax1 + by1 + cß1 − d |
ax + by + cß = d is √ 2
(a + b 2 + c 2 )
.]

0.0 Year 2012 1453

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1454 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1455

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1456 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1457

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1458 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1459

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1460 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1461

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1462 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1463
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1464 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1465
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32

1 EITHER: Use law of the logarithm of a power or quotient and remove logarithms M1
Obtain a 3-term quadratic equation x 2 − x − 3 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Solve 3-term quadratic obtaining 1 or 2 roots M1
Obtain answer 2.30 only A1
1 
OR1: Use an appropriate iterative formula, e.g. x n +1 = exp ln (3 x n + 4 ) − 1 correctly at
2 
least once M1
Obtain answer 2.30 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 3 d.p. to justify 2.30 to 2 d.p., or show there is a
sign change in the interval (2.295, 2.305) A1
Show there is no other root A1
OR2: Use calculated values to obtain at least one interval containing the root M1
Obtain answer 2.30 A1
Show sufficient calculations to justify 2.30 to 3 s.f., e.g. show it lies in (2.295, 2.305) A1
Show there is no other root A1 [4]

1 2 1
2 (i) Using the formulae r θ and bh , form an equation an a and θ M1
2 2
Obtain given answer A1 [2]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain answer θ = 1.32 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.32 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.315, 1.325) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1466 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32
1
− 12
3 EITHER: State a correct unsimplified term in x or x 2 of (1 − x) 2 or (1 + x) B1
1
State correct unsimplified expansion of (1 − x) up to the term in x 2
2
B1
− 12
State correct unsimplified expansion of (1 + x) up to the term in x 2 B1
1
− 12
Obtain sufficient terms of the product of the expansions of (1 − x) and (1 + x) 2
M1
1
Obtain final answer 1 − x + x 2 A1
2
− 12
OR1: State that the given expression equals (1 − x)(1 − x 2 ) and state that the first term of
1
2 −2
the expansion of (1 − x ) is 1 B1
1
2 −2
State correct unsimplified term in x 2 of (1 − x ) B1
1
2 −2
State correct unsimplified expansion of (1 − x ) up to the term in x 2 B1
Obtain sufficient terms of the product of (1 – x) and the expansion M1
1
Obtain final answer 1 − x + x 2 A1
2
1
OR2: State correct unsimplified expansion of (1 + x) up to the term in x 2
2
B1
Multiply expansion by (1 – x) and obtain 1 – 2x + 2x2 B1
Carry out correct method to obtain one non-constant term of the expansion of
(1 − 2 x + 2 x )
1
2 2
M1
Obtain a correct unsimplified expansion with sufficient terms A1
1
Obtain final answer 1 − x + x 2 A1 [5]
2
1
[Treat (1 + x) −1 (1 − x 2 ) 2 by the EITHER scheme.]
1
[Symbolic coefficients, e.g.  2  , are not sufficient for the B marks.]
 2

4 Use trig formulae to express equation in terms of cos θ and sin θ M1

Use Pythagoras to obtain an equation in sin θ M1
Obtain 3-term quadratic 2 sin 2 θ − 2 sin θ − 1 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic and obtain a value of θ M1
Obtain answer, e.g. 201.5° A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. 338.5°, and no others in the given interval A1 [6]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians (3.52, 5.91) as a misread
and deduct A1 from the marks for the angles.]

5 Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of both sides B1

Obtain term − e − y , or equivalent B1
1
Obtain term e 2 x , or equivalent B1
2
Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 0, y = 0 in a solution containing terms ae − y and be 2 x M1
1 3
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. − e − y = e 2 x − A1
2 2
2x
Rearrange and obtain y = ln(2 /(3 − e )) , or equivalent A1 [6]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1467
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32

6 (i) State derivative in any correct form, e.g. 3 cos x − 12 cos 2 x sin x B1 + B1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for sin 2x, or sin x or cos x M1
1
Obtain answer x = π A1
12
5
Obtain answer x = π A1
12
1
Obtain answer x = π and no others in the given interval A1 [6]
2

(ii) Carry out a method for determining the nature of the relevant stationary point M1
1
Obtain a maximum at π correctly A1 [2]
12
[Treat answers in degrees as a misread and deduct A1 from the marks for the angles.]

7 (i) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by 1 + 3i, or equivalent M1

Simplify numerator to –5 + 5i, or denominator to 10, or equivalent A1
1 1
Obtain final answer − + i , or equivalent A1
2 2
OR: Obtain two equations in x and y, and solve for x or for y M1
1 1
Obtain x = − or y = , or equivalent A1
2 2
1 1
Obtain final answer − + i , or equivalent A1 [3]
2 2

(ii) Show B and C in relatively correct positions in an Argand diagram B1

Show u in a relatively correct position B1 [2]

(iii) Substitute exact arguments in the LHS arg(1 + 2i) − arg(1 − 3i) = arg u, or equivalent M1
3
Obtain and use arg u = π A1
4
Obtain the given result correctly A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1468 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32

8 (i) State or imply 2u du = −dx , or equivalent B1

Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
− 10u
Obtain integrand , or equivalent A1
6 − u2 + u
Show correct working to justify the change in limits and obtain the given answer
correctly A1 [4]

A B
(ii) State or imply the form of fractions + and use a relevant method to find A
3−u 2+u
or B M1
Obtain A = 6 and B = −4 A1
Integrate and obtain − 6 ln(3 − u ) − 4 ln(2 + u ) , or equivalent A1 + A1
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form a ln(3 − u ) + b ln(2 + u ) M1
Obtain the given answer correctly having shown sufficient working A1 [6]
[The f.t. is on A and B.]

9 (i) Use correct product rule M1

ln xx
Obtain derivative in any correct form, e.g. + A1
2 x x
Carry out a complete method to form an equation of the tangent at x = 1 M1
Obtain answer y = x – 1 A1 [4]

∫
(ii) State or imply that the indefinite integral for the volume is π x(ln x) 2 dx B1
ln x
∫
Integrate by parts and reach ax 2 (ln x) 2 + b x 2 .
x
dx M1*

1 2
Obtain
2 ∫
x (ln x) 2 − x ln x dx , or unsimplified equivalent A1

1
x∫
Attempt second integration by parts reaching cx 2 ln x + d x 2 . dx M1(dep*)

1 2 1 1
Complete the integration correctly, obtaining x (ln x) 2 − x 2 ln x + x 2 A1
2 2 4
Substitute limits x = 1 and x = e, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
1
Obtain answer π (e 2 − 1) , or exact equivalent A1 [7]
4
[If π omitted, or 2π or π/2 used, give B0 and then follow through.]
[Integration using parts x ln x and ln x is also viable.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1469
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 32

10 (i) EITHER: Substitute coordinates of a general point of l in given equation of plane m M1

Obtain equation in λ in any correct form A1
Verify that the equation is not satisfied for any value of λ A1
OR1: Substitute for r in the vector equation of plane m and expand scalar product M1
Obtain equation in λ in any correct form A1
Verify that the equation is not satisfied for any value of λ A1
OR2: Expand scalar product of a normal to m and a direction vector of l M1
Verify scalar product is zero A1
Verify that one point of l does not lie in the plane A1
OR3: Use correct method to find perpendicular distance of a general point of l
from m M1
Obtain a correct unsimplified expression in terms of λ A1
Show that the perpendicular distance is 4/3, or equivalent, for all λ A1
OR4: Use correct method to find the perpendicular distance of a particular point of l
from m M1
Obtain answer 4/3, or equivalent A1
Show that the perpendicular distance of a second point is also 4/3, or
equivalent A1 [3]

(ii) EITHER: Express general point of l in component form, e.g. (1 + 2λ, 1 + λ, −1 + 2λ) B1
Substitute in given equation of n and solve for λ M1
Obtain position vector 5i + 3j + 3k from λ = 2 A1
OR: State or imply plane n has vector equation r.(2i – 2j + k) = 7, or equivalent B1
Substitute for r, expand scalar product and solve for λ M1
Obtain position vector 5i + 3j + 3k from λ = 2 A1 [3]

(iii) Form an equation in λ by equating perpendicular distances of a general point of l from m

and n M1*
Obtain a correct modular or non-modular equation in λ in any form A1
Solve for λ and obtain a point, e.g. 7i + 4j + 5k from λ = 3 A1
Obtain a second point, e.g. 3i + 2j + k from λ = 1 A1
Use a correct method to find the distance between the two points M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 6 A1 [6]
[The f.t. is on the components of l.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1
1 Expand √ in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
(4 + 3x)
coefficients. [4]

2 Solve the equation ln(2x + 3) = 2 ln x + ln 3, giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = sin 2θ − θ , y = cos 2θ + 2 sin θ .
dy 2 cos θ
Show that = . [5]
dx 1 + 2 sin θ

e2x
4 The curve with equation y = has one stationary point.
x3
(i) Find the x-coordinate of this point. [4]

(ii) Determine whether this point is a maximum or a minimum point. [2]

5 In a certain chemical process a substance A reacts with another substance B. The masses in grams of
A and B present at time t seconds after the start of the process are x and y respectively. It is given that
dy
= −0.6xy and x = 5e−3t . When t = 0, y = 70.
dt
(i) Form a differential equation in y and t. Solve this differential equation and obtain an expression
for y in terms of t. [6]

(ii) The percentage of the initial mass of B remaining at time t is denoted by p. Find the exact value
approached by p as t becomes large. [2]

6 It is given that tan 3x = k tan x, where k is a constant and tan x ≠ 0.

(i) By first expanding tan(2x + x), show that

(3k − 1) tan2 x = k − 3. [4]

(ii) Hence solve the equation tan 3x = k tan x when k = 4, giving all solutions in the interval
0◦ < x < 180◦ . [3]

(iii) Show that the equation tan 3x = k tan x has no root in the interval 0◦ < x < 180◦ when k = 2. [1]

7
y

x
O p2
√
The diagram shows part of the curve y = cos( x) for x ≥ 0, where x is in radians. The shaded region
between the curve, the axes and the line x = p2 , where p > 0, is denoted by R. The area of R is equal
to 1.

√p2
3 − 2 cos p
(i) Use the substitution x = u to find ã cos( x) dx. Hence show that sin p =
2
. [6]
0 2p

3 − 2 cos pn
(ii) Use the iterative formula pn+1 = sin−1 , with initial value p1 = 1, to find the value of
2pn
p correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

4x2 − 7x − 1
8 Let f (x) = .
(x + 1)(2x − 3)

(i) Express f (x) in partial fractions. [5]

6
(ii) Show that ã f (x) dx = 8 − ln 49
3
. [5]
2

9 The lines l and m have equations r = 3i − 2j + k + λ (−i + 2j + k) and r = 4i + 4j + 2k + µ (ai + bj − k)

respectively, where a and b are constants.

(i) Given that l and m intersect, show that

2a − b = 4. [4]

(ii) Given also that l and m are perpendicular, find the values of a and b. [4]

(iii) When a and b have these values, find the position vector of the point of intersection of l and m.
[2]

10 (a) The complex numbers u and w satisfy the equations

u − w = 4i and uw = 5.
Solve the equations for u and w, giving all answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real.
[5]

(b) (i) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex
numbers satisfying the inequalities |ß − 2 + 2i | ≤ 2, arg ß ≤ − 14 π and Re ß ≥ 1, where Re ß
denotes the real part of ß. [5]
(ii) Calculate the greatest possible value of Re ß for points lying in the shaded region. [1]

BLANK PAGE

9709/33/M/J/12
0.0 Year 2012 1473

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1474 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1475

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1476 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1477

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1478 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1479

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1480 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1481

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2012 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1482 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1483
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1484 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 33

1 EITHER: Obtain a correct unsimplified version of the x or x2 term of the expansion of

− 12 − 12
(4 + 3x) or (1 + 34 x) M1
1
State correct first term B1
2
3 27 2
Obtain the next two terms − x+ x A1 + A1
16 256
−3
OR: Differentiate and evaluate f(0) and f ′(0), where f ′( x) = k (4 + 3 x) 2 M1
1
State correct first term B1
2
3 27 2
Obtain the next two terms − x + x A1 + A1 [4]
16 256
− 1 
[Symbolic coefficients, e.g.  2  are not sufficient for the M or B mark.]
 2 

2 Use law of the logarithm of a power and a product or quotient and remove logarithms M1
2x + 3
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. =3 A1
x2
Solve 3-term quadratic obtaining at least one root M1
Obtain final answer 1.39 only A1 [4]

dx dy
3 Obtain = 2 cos 2θ − 1 or = −2 sin 2θ + 2 cos θ , or equivalent B1
dθ dθ
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dθ dθ
dy − 2 sin 2θ + 2 cos θ
Obtain = , or equivalent A1
dx 2 cos 2θ − 1
At any stage use correct double angle formulae throughout M1
Obtain the given answer following full and correct working A1 [5]

4 (i) Use correct quotient or product rule M1

2x 2x
2e 3e
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. − 4 A1
x3 x
Equate derivative to zero and solve a 2-term equation for non-zero x M1
3
Obtain x = correctly A1 [4]
2

(ii) Carry out a method for determining the nature of a stationary point, e.g. test derivative
either side M1
Show point is a minimum with no errors seen A1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1485
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 33

5 (i) Substitute for x, separate variables correctly and attempt integration of both sides M1
Obtain term ln y, or equivalent A1
Obtain term e −3t , or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant, or use t = 0, y = 70 as limits in a solution containing terms
aln y and be −3t M1
−3t
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. ln y − ln 70 = e −1 A1
−3t
Rearrange and obtain y = 70exp(e − 1) , or equivalent A1 [6]

(ii) Using answer to part (i), either express p in terms of t or use e −3t → 0 to find the limiting
value of y M1
100
Obtain answer from correct exact work A1 [2]
e

6 (i) Use tan (A + B) and tan 2A formulae to obtain an equation in tan x M1

Obtain a correct equation in tan x in any form A1
Obtain an expression of the form a tan 2 x = b M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]

(ii) Substitute k = 4 in the given expression and solve for x M1

Obtain answer, e.g. x = 16.8° A1
Obtain second answer, e.g. x = 163.2°, and no others in the given interval A1 [3]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread and
deduct A1 from the marks for the angles.]

(iii) Substitute k = 2, show tan 2 x < 0 and justify given statement correctly B1 [1]

7 (i) Substitute for x and dx throughout the integral M1

∫
Obtain 2u cos u du A1
Integrate by parts and obtain answer of the form au sin u + b cos u , where ab ≠ 0 M1
Obtain 2u sin u + 2 cos u A1
Use limits u = 0, u = p correctly and equate result to 1 M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [6]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer p = 1.25 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.245, 1.255) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1486 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 33

B C
8 (i) State or imply the form A + + B1
x +1 2x − 3
State or obtain A = 2 B1
Use a correct method for finding a constant M1
Obtain B = −2 A1
Obtain C = −1 A1 [5]

1
(ii) Obtain integral 2 x − 2 ln( x + 1) − ln(2 x − 3) B3
2
(Deduct B1 for each error or omission. The f.t. is on A, B, C.)
Substitute limits correctly in an expression containing terms aln(x + 1) and bln(2x – 3) M1
Obtain the given answer following full and exact working A1 [5]
[SR: If A omitted from the form of fractions, give B0B0M1A0A0 in (i); B1 B1 M1A0
in (ii).]
B Dx + E
[SR: For a solution starting with + , give M1A1 for one of B = –2, D = 4,
x + 1 2x − 3
E = –7 and A1 for the other two constants; then give B1B1 for A = 2, C = −1.]
Fx + G C Fx C
[SR: For a solution starting with + or with + , give M1A1 for
x +1 2x − 3 x + 1 2x − 3
one of C = −1, F = 2, G = 0 and A1 for the other constants or constant; then give
B1B1 for A = 2, B = –2.]

9 (i) Express general point of l or m in component form, i.e. (3 − λ , − 2 + 2λ , 1 + λ ) or

( 4 + aµ , 4 + bµ , 2 − µ ) B1
Equate components and eliminate either λ or µ from a pair of equations M1
Eliminate the other parameter and obtain an equation in a and b M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [4]

(ii) Using the correct process equate the scalar product of the direction vectors to zero M1*
Obtain − a + 2b − 1 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Solve simultaneous equations for a or for b M1(dep*)
Obtain a = 3, b = 2 A1 [4]

(iii) Substitute found values in component equations and solve for λ or for µ M1
Obtain answer i + 2j + 3k from either λ = 2 or from µ = −1 A1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2012 1487
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 33

10 (a) EITHER: Eliminate u or w and obtain an equation in w or in u M1

Obtain a quadratic in u or w, e.g. u 2 − 4iu − 5 = 0 or w 2 + 4iw − 5 = 0 A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic for u or for w M1
OR1: Having squared the first equation, eliminate u or w and obtain an equation in w
or u M1
Obtain a 2-term quadratic in u or w, e.g. u2 = –3 + 4i A1
Solve a 2-term quadratic for u or for w M1
OR2: Using u = a + ib, w = c + id, equate real and imaginary parts and obtain 4
equations in a, b, c and d M1
Obtain 4 correct equations A1
Solve for a and b, or for c and d M1
Obtain answer u = 1 + 2i, w = 1 – 2i A1
Obtain answer u = −1 + 2i, w = −1 − 2i and no other A1 [5]

(b) (i) Show point representing 2 − 2i in relatively correct position B1

Show a circle with centre 2 – 2i and radius 2 B1
1
Show line for arg z = − π B1
4
Show line for Re z = 1 B1
Shade the relevant region B1 [5]

(ii) State answer 2 + 2 , or equivalent (accept 3.41) B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1488 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2011

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Using the substitution u = ex , or otherwise, solve the equation

ex = 1 + 6e−x ,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

2 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 3(1 + sin2 t), y = 2 cos3 t.

dy
Find in terms of t, simplifying your answer as far as possible. [5]
dx

3 The polynomial x4 + 3x3 + ax + 3 is denoted by p(x). It is given that p(x) is divisible by x2 − x + 1.

(i) Find the value of a. [4]

(ii) When a has this value, find the real roots of the equation p(x) = 0. [2]

4 The variables x and θ are related by the differential equation

dx
sin 2θ = (x + 1) cos 2θ ,
dθ
where 0 < θ < 12 π . When θ = 121 π , x = 0. Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for

x in terms of θ , and simplifying your answer as far as possible. [7]

5 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

sec x = 3 − 12 x2 ,

where x is in radians, has a root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 1 and 1.4. [2]

(iii) Show that this root also satisfies the equation

2
x = cos−1 . [1]
6 − x2

(iv) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (iii) to determine the root correct to
2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

6 (i) Express cos x + 3 sin x in the form R cos(x − α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ , giving the exact
value of R and the value of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation cos 2θ + 3 sin 2θ = 2, for 0◦ < θ < 90◦ . [5]

3
−−→
7 With respect to the origin O, the position vectors of two points A and B are given by OA = i + 2j + 2k
−−→ −−→ −−→
and OB = 3i + 4j. The point P lies on the line through A and B, and AP = λ AB.
−−→
(i) Show that OP = (1 + 2λ )i + (2 + 2λ )j + (2 − 2λ )k. [2]

(ii) By equating expressions for cos AOP and cos BOP in terms of λ , find the value of λ for which
OP bisects the angle AOB. [5]

(iii) When λ has this value, verify that AP : PB = OA : OB. [1]

12 + 8x − x2
8 Let f (x) = .
(2 − x)(4 + x2 )

A Bx + C
(i) Express f (x) in the form + . [4]
2−x 4 + x2
1
(ii) Show that ã f (x) dx = ln 25
2
. [5]
0

9
y

x
O e
M

The diagram shows the curve y = x2 ln x and its minimum point M .

(i) Find the exact values of the coordinates of M . [5]

(ii) Find the exact value of the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the x-axis and the
line x = e. [5]

√
10 (a) Showing your working, find the two square roots of the complex number 1 − (2 6)i. Give your
answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are exact. [5]

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent the complex numbers
ß which satisfy the inequality |ß − 3i | ≤ 2. Find the greatest value of arg ß for points in this region.
[5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/31/O/N/11
1492 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1493

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1494 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1495

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1496 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1497

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1498 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1499

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1500 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1501
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1502 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through √”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1503
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 31

1 Rearrange as e2x – ex – 6 = 0, or u2 – u – 6 = 0, or equivalent B1

Solve a 3-term quadratic for ex or for u M1
Obtain simplified solution ex = 3 or u = 3 A1
Obtain final answer x = 1.10 and no other A1 [4]

2 EITHER: Use chain rule M1

dx
obtain = 6 sin t cos t , or equivalent A1
dt
dy
obtain = −6 cos 2 t sin t , or equivalent A1
dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
dy
Obtain final answer = − cos t A1
dx
OR: Express y in terms of x and use chain rule M1
1
dy x
Obtain = k (2 − ) 2 , or equivalent A1
dx 3
1
dy x
Obtain = −(2 − ) 2 , or equivalent A1
dx 3
Express derivative in terms of t M1
dy
Obtain final answer = − cos t A1 [5]
dx

3 (i) EITHER: Attempt division by x2 – x + 1 reaching a partial quotient of x2 + kx M1

Obtain quotient x2 + 4x + 3 A1
Equate remainder of form lx to zero and solve for a, or equivalent M1
Obtain answer a = 1 A1
OR: Substitute a complex zero of x2 – x + 1 in p(x) and equate to zero M1
Obtain a correct equation in a in any unsimplified form A1
Expand terms, use i2 = –1 and solve for a M1
Obtain answer a = 1 A1 [4]
[SR: The first M1 is earned if inspection reaches an unknown factor x2 + Bx + C and an
equation in B and/or C, or an unknown factor Ax2 + Bx + 3 and an equation in A and/or B.
The second M1 is only earned if use of the equation a = B – C is seen or implied.]

(ii) State answer, e.g. x = –3 B1

State answer, e.g. x = –1 and no others B1 [2]

4 Separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side M1

Obtain term ln(x + 1) A1
Obtain term k ln sin 2θ, where k = ±1, ±2, or ± 1 M1
2
1
Obtain correct term ln sin 2θ A1
2
1
Evaluate a constant, or use limits θ = π, x = 0 in a solution containing terms a ln(x + 1) and
12
b ln sin 2θ M1
1 1 1
Obtain solution in any form, e.g. ln(x + 1) = 2
ln sin 2θ − 2 ln 2 (f.t. on k = ±1, ±2, or ± 1 ) A1√
2

Rearrange and obtain x = (2 sin 2θ ) − 1 , or simple equivalent A1 [7]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1504 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 31

5 (i) Make recognisable sketch of a relevant graph over the given interval B1
Sketch the other relevant graph and justify the given statement B1 [2]

(ii) Consider the sign of sec x – (3 – 1

x2) at x = 1 and x = 1.4, or equivalent M1
2
Complete the argument with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iii) Convert the given equation to sec x = 3 – 1

x2 or work vice versa B1 [1]
2

(iv) Use a correct iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.13 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 1.13 to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change
in the interval (1.125, 1.135) A1 [3]
[SR: Successive evaluation of the iterative function with x = 1, 2, … scores M0.]

6 (i) State or imply R = 10 B1

Use trig formulae to find α M1
Obtain α = 71.57° with no errors seen A1 [3]
[Do not allow radians in this part. If the only trig error is a sign error in cos(x – α) give
M1A0]

(ii) Evaluate cos–1 ( 2 / 10 ) correctly to at least 1 d.p. (50.7684…°) (Allow 50.7° here) B1√
Carry out an appropriate method to find a value of 2θ in 0° < 2θ < 180° M1
Obtain an answer for θ in the given range, e.g. θ = 61.2° A1
Use an appropriate method to find another value of 2θ in the above range M1
Obtain second angle, e.g. θ = 10.4°, and no others in the given range A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[Treat answers in radians as a misread and deduct A1 from the answers for the angles.]
[SR: The use of correct trig formulae to obtain a 3-term quadratic in tan θ, sin 2θ,
cos 2θ,or tan 2θ earns M1; then A1 for a correct quadratic, M1 for obtaining a value of θ
in the given range, and A1 + A1 for the two correct answers (candidates who square must
reject the spurious roots to get the final A1).]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1505
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 31

7 (i) Use a correct method to express OP in terms of λ M1

Obtain the given answer A1 [2]

(ii) EITHER: Use correct method to express scalar product of OA and OP , or OB and OP
in terms of λ M1
Using the correct method for the moduli, divide scalar products by products of
moduli and express cos AOP = cos BOP in terms of λ, or in terms of λ and OP M1*
OR1: Use correct method to express OA2 + OP2 – AP2, or OB2 + OP2 – BP2 in terms
of λ M1
Using the correct method for the moduli, divide each expression by twice the
product of the relevant moduli and express cos AOP = cos BOP in terms of λ,
or λ and OP M1*
9 + 2λ 11 + 14λ
Obtain a correct equation in any form, e.g. = A1
3 (9 + 4λ + 12λ 2 ) 5 (9 + 4λ + 12λ 2 )
Solve for λ M1(dep*)
Obtain λ = 3 A1 [5]
8
[SR: The M1* can also be earned by equating cos AOP or cos BOP to a sound attempt at
cos 1 AOB and obtaining an equation in λ. The exact value of the cosine is (13 / 15) ,
2
but accept non-exact working giving a value of λ which rounds to 0.375, provided the
spurious negative root of the quadratic in λ is rejected.]
[SR: Allow a solution reaching λ = 3 after cancelling identical incorrect expressions for
8
OP to score 4/5. The marking will run M1M1A0M1A1, or M1M1A1M1A0 in such
cases.]

(iii) Verify the given statement correctly B1 [1]

8 (i) Use any relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 3, B = 4, C = 0 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [4]

(ii) Integrate and obtain term –3 ln(2 – x) B1√

Integrate and obtain term k ln(4 + x2) M1
Obtain term 2 ln(4 + x2) A1√
Substitute correct limits correctly in a complete integral of the form
a ln(2 – x) + b ln(4 + x2), ab ≠ 0 M1
Obtain given answer following full and correct working A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1506 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 31

9 (i) Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero
1
and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = e– 2 , or equivalent A1
Obtain answer y = – 1 e–1, or equivalent A1 [5]
2

1
(ii) Attempt integration by parts reaching kx3 ln x ± k ∫x
3
. dx M1*
x
∫x
1 1
Obtain 3
x 3 ln x − 3
2
dx , or equivalent A1
1 1
Integrate again and obtain 3
x 3 ln x − 9 x 3 , or equivalent A1
Use limits x = 1 and x = e, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 1 (2e3 + 1), or exact equivalent A1 [5]
9

[SR: An attempt reaching ax2 (x ln x – x) + b ∫ 2 x( x ln x − x) dx scores M1. Then give the

first A1 for I = x2 (x ln x – x) – 2I + ∫ 2x
2
dx, or equivalent.]

10 (a) EITHER: Square x + iy and equate real and imaginary parts to 1 and − 2 6 respectively M1*
Obtain x2 – y2 = 1 and 2xy = − 2 6 A1
Eliminate one variable and find an equation in the other M1(dep*)
Obtain x4 – x2 – 6 = 0 or y4 + y2 – 6 = 0, or 3-term equivalent A1
Obtain answers ± ( 3 − i 2 ) A1 [5]
1
OR: Denoting 1 − 2 6i by Rcisθ, state, or imply, square roots are ± R cis( 2 θ )
and find values of R and either cos θ or sin θ or tan θ M1*
1 1 1 2 6
Obtain ± 5 (cos 2
θ + i sin 2
θ) , and cos θ = 5
or sin θ = − 5
or
tan θ = −2 6 A1
1 1
Use correct method to find an exact value of cos 2 θ or sin 2 θ M1(dep*)
1 3 1 2
Obtain cos 2 θ = ± and sin 2 θ = ± , or equivalent A1
5 5

Obtain answers ± ( 3 − i 2 ) , or equivalent A1

[Condone omission of ± except in the final answers.]

(b) Show point representing 3i on a sketch of an Argand diagram B1

Show a circle with centre at the point representing 3i and radius 2 B1√
Shade the interior of the circle B1√
Carry out a complete method for finding the greatest value of arg z M1
Obtain answer 131.8° or 2.30 (or 2.3) radians A1 [5]
[The f.t. is on solutions where the centre is at the point representing –3i.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Using the substitution u = ex , or otherwise, solve the equation

ex = 1 + 6e−x ,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

2 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 3(1 + sin2 t), y = 2 cos3 t.

dy
Find in terms of t, simplifying your answer as far as possible. [5]
dx

3 The polynomial x4 + 3x3 + ax + 3 is denoted by p(x). It is given that p(x) is divisible by x2 − x + 1.

(i) Find the value of a. [4]

(ii) When a has this value, find the real roots of the equation p(x) = 0. [2]

4 The variables x and θ are related by the differential equation

dx
sin 2θ = (x + 1) cos 2θ ,
dθ
where 0 < θ < 12 π . When θ = 121 π , x = 0. Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for

x in terms of θ , and simplifying your answer as far as possible. [7]

5 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

sec x = 3 − 12 x2 ,

where x is in radians, has a root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 1 and 1.4. [2]

(iii) Show that this root also satisfies the equation

2
x = cos−1 . [1]
6 − x2

(iv) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (iii) to determine the root correct to
2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

6 (i) Express cos x + 3 sin x in the form R cos(x − α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ , giving the exact
value of R and the value of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation cos 2θ + 3 sin 2θ = 2, for 0◦ < θ < 90◦ . [5]

(ii) By equating expressions for cos AOP and cos BOP in terms of λ , find the value of λ for which
OP bisects the angle AOB. [5]

(iii) When λ has this value, verify that AP : PB = OA : OB. [1]

12 + 8x − x2
8 Let f (x) = .
(2 − x)(4 + x2 )

A Bx + C
(i) Express f (x) in the form + . [4]
2−x 4 + x2
1
(ii) Show that ã f (x) dx = ln 25
2
. [5]
0

9
y

x
O e
M

The diagram shows the curve y = x2 ln x and its minimum point M .

(i) Find the exact values of the coordinates of M . [5]

(ii) Find the exact value of the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the x-axis and the
line x = e. [5]

√
10 (a) Showing your working, find the two square roots of the complex number 1 − (2 6)i. Give your
answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are exact. [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/32/O/N/11
1510 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1511

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1512 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1513

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1514 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1515

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1516 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1517

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1518 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1519
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1520 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1521
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 32

1 Rearrange as e2x – ex – 6 = 0, or u2 – u – 6 = 0, or equivalent B1

Solve a 3-term quadratic for ex or for u M1
Obtain simplified solution ex = 3 or u = 3 A1
Obtain final answer x = 1.10 and no other A1 [4]

2 EITHER: Use chain rule M1

3 (i) EITHER: Attempt division by x2 – x + 1 reaching a partial quotient of x2 + kx M1

(ii) State answer, e.g. x = –3 B1

State answer, e.g. x = –1 and no others B1 [2]

4 Separate variables and attempt integration of at least one side M1

Rearrange and obtain x = (2 sin 2θ ) − 1 , or simple equivalent A1 [7]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1522 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 32

5 (i) Make recognisable sketch of a relevant graph over the given interval B1
Sketch the other relevant graph and justify the given statement B1 [2]

(ii) Consider the sign of sec x – (3 – 1

x2) at x = 1 and x = 1.4, or equivalent M1
2
Complete the argument with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iii) Convert the given equation to sec x = 3 – 1

x2 or work vice versa B1 [1]
2

(iv) Use a correct iterative formula correctly at least once M1

6 (i) State or imply R = 10 B1

Use trig formulae to find α M1
Obtain α = 71.57° with no errors seen A1 [3]
[Do not allow radians in this part. If the only trig error is a sign error in cos(x – α) give
M1A0]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1523
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 32

7 (i) Use a correct method to express OP in terms of λ M1

Obtain the given answer A1 [2]

(iii) Verify the given statement correctly B1 [1]

8 (i) Use any relevant method to determine a constant M1

Obtain one of the values A = 3, B = 4, C = 0 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [4]

(ii) Integrate and obtain term –3 ln(2 – x) B1√

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1524 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 32

9 (i) Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero
1
and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = e– 2 , or equivalent A1
Obtain answer y = – 1 e–1, or equivalent A1 [5]
2

[SR: An attempt reaching ax2 (x ln x – x) + b ∫ 2 x( x ln x − x) dx scores M1. Then give the

first A1 for I = x2 (x ln x – x) – 2I + ∫ 2x
2
dx, or equivalent.]

Obtain answers ± ( 3 − i 2 ) , or equivalent A1

[Condone omission of ± except in the final answers.]

(b) Show point representing 3i on a sketch of an Argand diagram B1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

16
1 Expand in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
(2 + x)2
coefficients. [4]

e2x
2 The equation of a curve is y = . Show that the gradient of the curve at the point for which
1 + e2x
x = ln 3 is 9
50
. [4]

3 (i) Express 8 cos θ + 15 sin θ in the form R cos(θ − α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ . Give the value
of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation 8 cos θ + 15 sin θ = 12, giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < θ < 360◦ .
[4]

4 During an experiment, the number of organisms present at time t days is denoted by N , where N is
treated as a continuous variable. It is given that
dN
= 1.2e−0.02t N 0.5 .
dt
When t = 0, the number of organisms present is 100.

(i) Find an expression for N in terms of t. [6]

(ii) State what happens to the number of organisms present after a long time. [1]

a
5 It is given that ã x ln x dx = 22, where a is a constant greater than 1.
1
r
(i) Show that a = .
87
[5]
2 ln a − 1

(ii) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to find the value of a correct to 2 decimal
places. Use an initial value of 6 and give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

6 The complex number w is defined by w = −1 + i.

(i) Find the modulus and argument of w2 and w3 , showing your working. [4]

(ii) The points in an Argand diagram representing w and w2 are the ends of a diameter of a circle.
Find the equation of the circle, giving your answer in the form |ß − (a + bi)| = k. [4]

7 The polynomial p(x) is defined by

p(x) = ax3 − x2 + 4x − a,

where a is a constant. It is given that (2x − 1) is a factor of p(x).

(i) Find the value of a and hence factorise p(x). [4]

8x − 13
(ii) When a has the value found in part (i), express in partial fractions. [5]
p(x)

8
y

x
O

The diagram shows the curve with parametric equations

x = sin t + cos t, y = sin3 t + cos3 t,

for 14 π < t < 54 π .

dy
(i) Show that = −3 sin t cos t. [3]
dx
(ii) Find the gradient of the curve at the origin. [2]

(iii) Find the values of t for which the gradient of the curve is 1, giving your answers correct to
2 significant figures. [4]

a 4
9 The line l has equation r = 1 ! + λ 3 !, where a is a constant. The plane p has equation
4 −2
2x − 2y + ß = 10.

(i) Given that l does not lie in p, show that l is parallel to p. [2]

(ii) Find the value of a for which l lies in p. [2]

(iii) It is now given that the distance between l and p is 6. Find the possible values of a. [5]

10 (i) Use the substitution u = tan x to show that, for n ≠ −1,

1π

ã
1
(tann+2 x + tann x) dx = [4]
4
.
0 n+1

(ii) Hence find the exact value of

1π

(a) ã (sec4 x − sec2 x) dx,

4
[3]
0
1π

(b) ã (tan9 x + 5 tan7 x + 5 tan5 x + tan3 x) dx.

4
[3]
0

1528 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1529

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1530 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1531

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1532 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1533

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1534 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1535

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1536 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1537

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2011 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1538 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1539
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1540 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

1 Either
Obtain correct unsimplified version of x or x2 term in expansion of M1
1
(2 + x)–2 or (1 + x)–2
2

Correct first term 4 from correct work B1

Obtain –4x A1

Obtain + 3x2 A1

Or
Differentiate and evaluate f(0) and f΄ (0) where f΄ (x) = k(2+x)–3 M1

State correct first term 4 B1

Obtain –4x A1

Obtain + 3x2 A1 [4]

2 Use correct quotient or product rule or equivalent M1

2x
(1 + e 2 x ).2e 2 x − e 2 x .2e
Obtain or equivalent A1
(1 + e 2 x ) 2

Substitute x = ln 3 into attempt at first derivative and show use of relevant logarithm M1
property at least once in a correct context
9
Confirm given answer 50
legitimately A1 [4]

3 (i) State or imply R =17 B1

Use correct trigonometric formula to find α M1

Obtain 61.93° with no errors seen A1 [3]

12
(ii) Evaluate cos–1 R ( = 45.099) M1

Obtain answer 107.0° A1

Carry out correct method for second answer M1

Obtain answer 16.8° and no others between 0° and 360° A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1541
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

4 (i) Separate variables and attempt integration on both sides M1*

Obtain 2N0.5 on left-hand side or equivalent A1

Obtain –60e–0.02t on right-hand side or equivalent A1

Use 0 and 100 to evaluate a constant or as limits in a solution containing terms DM1*
aNo.5 and be –0.02t

Obtain 2N0.5 = –60e–0.02t + 80 or equivalent A1

Conclude with N = (40 – 30e–0.02t)2 or equivalent A1 [6]

(ii) State number approaches 1600 or equivalent, following expression of form B1√ [1]
(c + de–0.02t)n

5 (i) Either
Use integration by parts and reach an expression kx2 lnx ± n ∫ x2. 1x dx M1

Obtain 1
2
x2 ln x – ∫ 1
2
x dx or equivalent A1

Obtain 1
2
x2 ln x – 1
4
x2 A1

Or
Use Integration by parts and reach an expression kx(xlnx – x) ± m ∫ xlnx – xdx
M1

Obtain I = (x2 lnx – x2) – I + ∫ xdx A1

Obtain 1
2
x2 ln x – 1
4
x2 A1

Substitute limits correctly and equate to 22, having integrated twice DM1*

87
Rearrange and confirm given equation a = A1 [5]
2ln a − 1

(ii) Use iterative process correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 5.86 A1

Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify 5.86 or show a sign change in the A1
interval (5.855, 5.865)

(6 → 5.8030 → 5.8795 → 5.8491 → 5.8611 → 5.8564) [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1542 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

6 (i) Use correct method for finding modulus of their w2 or w3 or both M1

Obtain │w2│ = 2 and │w3│= 2 2 or equivalent A1

Use correct method for finding argument of their w2 or w3 or both M1

Obtain arg(w2) = – 12 π or 3
2
π and arg(w3) = 1
4
π A1ft [4]

(ii) Obtain centre – 12 – 12 i (their w2) B1ft

Calculate the diameter or radius using │w–w2│ w21 or right-angled triangle M1

or cosine rule or equivalent

Obtain radius 1
2
10 or equivalent A1

Obtain │z + 1
2
+ 12 i│ = 1
2
10 or equivalent A1ft [4]

7 (i) Substitute x = 1
2
and equate to zero

or divide by (2x –1), reach a

2
x2 + kx + ...and equate remainder to zero

or by inspection reach a
2
x2 + bx + c and an equation in b/c

or by inspection reach Ax2 + Bx + a and an equation in A/B M1

Obtain a = 2 A1

Attempt to find quadratic factor by division or inspection or equivalent M1

Obtain (2x –1)(x2 +2) A1cwo [4]

A Bx + C
(ii) State or imply form + , following factors from part (i) B1√
2x − 1 x2 + 2

Use relevant method to find a constant M1

Obtain A = –4, following factors from part (i) A1√

Obtain B = 2 A1

Obtain C = 5 A1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1543
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

8 (i) Differentiate y to obtain 3sin2 t cos t – 3cos2 t sin t o.e. B1

dy dy dt
Use = / M1
dx dt dx

Obtain given result –3sin t cos t A1cwo [3]

3
(ii) Identify parameter at origin as t = π B1
4

3 3
Use t = π to obtain B1 [2]
4 2

(iii) Rewrite equation as equation in one trig variable B1

e.g. sin2t = − 23 , 9 sin4 x – 9 sin2 x + 1 = 0, tan2 x + 3 tan x + 1 = 0

Find at least one value of t from equation of form sin 2t = k o.e. M1

Obtain 1.9 A1

Obtain 2.8 and no others A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1544 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

9 (i) Calculate scalar product of direction of l and normal to p M1

Obtain 4 x 2 + 3 × (–2) + (–2) × l = 0 and conclude accordingly A1 [2]

(ii) Substitute (a, 1, 4) in equation of p and solve for a M1

Obtain a = 4 A1 [2]

(iii) Either
Attempt use of formula for perpendicular distance using (a, 1, 4) M1

2a − 2 + 4 − 10
Obtain at least =6 A1
4 + 4 +1

Obtain a = 13 A1

2a − 8
Attempt solution of = −6 M1
3

Obtain a = –5 A1

Or
M1
Form equation of parallel plane and substitute (a, 1, 4)

Obtain 2 a+ 2
3 − 103 = 6 A1

Obtain a = 13 A1

Solve 2 a+ 2
3
− 103 = −6 M1

Obtain a = –5 A1

Or
State a vector from a pt on the plane to (a, 1, 4) e.g.
B1
 a − 5 a 
   
1  or 1 
4   −6 
   

Calculate the component of this vector in the direction of the unit M1

 a − 5  2 
1   
normal and equate to 6 : 3 1  .  −2  = 6
 4  1 
  

Obtain a = 13 A1

 a − 5  2 
  
Solve 13 1  .  −2  = −6 M1
 4  1 
  

Obtain a = – 5 A1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1545
Page 9 Mark Scheme: Teachers version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2011 9709 33

Or
a 2 
    B1
State or imply perpendicular line r = 1  + µ  −2 
4 1 
   

Substitute components for p and solve for µ M1

8 − 2a
Obtain µ = A1
9

Equate distance between (a, 1, 4) and foot of perpendicular to ±6 M1

3(8 − 2a )
Obtain = ±6 or equivalent and hence –5 and 13 A1 [5]
9

du
10 (i) State or imply = sec 2 x B1
dx

Express integrand in terms of u and du M1

u n +1
Integrate to obtain or equivalent A1
n +1

1
Substitute correct limits correctly to confirm given result A1 [4]
n +1

(ii) (a) Use sec2 x =1 + tan2 x twice M1

Obtain integrand tan4 x + tan2 x A1

Apply result from part (i) to obtain 1

3 A1 [3]

Or
M1
Use sec2 x = 1 + tan2 x and the substitution from (i)

Obtain ∫ u2du A1
1
Apply limits correctly and obtain 3 A1

(b) Arrange, perhaps implied, integrand to B1

t9 + t7 + 4(t7 + t5) + t5 + t3

Attempt application of result from part (i) at least twice M1

1 4 1
Obtain + + and hence 25
24
or exact equivalent A1 [3]
8 6 4

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

2
√
1 Expand 3 (1 − 6x) in ascending powers of x up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

dy
2 Find in each of the following cases:
dx
(i) y = ln(1 + sin 2x), [2]
tan x
(ii) y = . [2]
x

3 Points A and B have coordinates (−1, 2, 5) and (2, −2, 11) respectively. The plane p passes through
B and is perpendicular to AB.

(i) Find an equation of p, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d . [3]

(ii) Find the acute angle between p and the y-axis. [4]

4 The polynomial f (x) is defined by

f (x) = 12x3 + 25x2 − 4x − 12.

(i) Show that f (−2) = 0 and factorise f (x) completely. [4]

(ii) Given that

12 × 27y + 25 × 9y − 4 × 3y − 12 = 0,
state the value of 3y and hence find y correct to 3 significant figures. [3]

5 The curve with equation

6e2x + key + e2y = c,
where k and c are constants, passes through the point P with coordinates (ln 3, ln 2).

(i) Show that 58 + 2k = c. [2]

(ii) Given also that the gradient of the curve at P is −6, find the values of k and c. [5]

6
A

q
B
O 10 cm

The diagram shows a circle with centre O and radius 10 cm. The chord AB divides the circle into two
regions whose areas are in the ratio 1 : 4 and it is required to find the length of AB. The angle AOB
is θ radians.

(i) Show that θ = 25 π + sin θ . [3]

(ii) Showing all your working, use an iterative formula, based on the equation in part (i), with
an initial value of 2.1, to find θ correct to 2 decimal places. Hence find the length of AB in
centimetres correct to 1 decimal place. [5]

2
7 The integral I is defined by I = ã 4t3 ln(t2 + 1) dt.
0

5
(i) Use the substitution x = t2 + 1 to show that I = ã (2x − 2) ln x dx. [3]
1

(ii) Hence find the exact value of I . [5]

6 − 3i
8 The complex number u is defined by u = .
1 + 2i

(i) Showing all your working, find the modulus of u and show that the argument of u is − 12 π . [4]

(ii) For complex numbers ß satisfying arg(ß − u) = 14 π , find the least possible value of |ß|. [3]

(iii) For complex numbers ß satisfying |ß − (1 + i)u | = 1, find the greatest possible value of |ß|. [3]

9 (i) Prove the identity cos 4θ + 4 cos 2θ ≡ 8 cos4 θ − 3. [4]

(ii) Hence
(a) solve the equation cos 4θ + 4 cos 2θ = 1 for − 12 π ≤ θ ≤ 12 π , [3]
1π

(b) find the exact value of ã

4
cos4 θ dθ . [3]
0

[Question 10 is printed on the next page.]

10 The number of birds of a certain species in a forested region is recorded over several years. At time
t years, the number of birds is N , where N is treated as a continuous variable. The variation in the
number of birds is modelled by
dN N (1800 − N )
= .
dt 3600
It is given that N = 300 when t = 0.

(i) Find an expression for N in terms of t. [9]

(ii) According to the model, how many birds will there be after a long time? [1]

0.0 Year 2011 1549

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1550 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1551

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1552 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1553

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1554 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1555

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1556 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1557
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1558 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1559
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 31

1
1 Either: Obtain 1 + kx, where k = ±6 or ± 1 M1
3
Obtain 1 − 2 x A1
Obtain –4x2 A1
Obtain − 403 x 3 or equivalent A1

− 23
Or: Differentiate expression to obtain form k (1 − 6 x) and evaluate f(0) and f ′(0) M1
− 23
Obtain f ′(x) = –2(1 – 6x) and hence the correct first two terms 1 – 2x A1
− 53 2
Obtain f ′′(x) = –8(1 – 6x) and hence –4x A1
− 83 3
Obtain f ′′′(x) = –80(1 – 6x) and hence − 40
3 x or equivalent A1 [4]

k cos 2 x
2 (i) Obtain for any non-zero constant k M1
1 + sin 2 x
2 cos 2 x
Obtain A1 [2]
1 + sin 2 x

(ii) Use correct quotient or product rule M1

x sec 2 x − tan x
Obtain or equivalent A1 [2]
x2

 3 
 
3 (i) Obtain ±  − 4  as normal to plane B1
 6 
 
Form equation of p as 3x – 4y + 6z = k or –3x + 4y – 6z = k and use relevant point to find k M1
Obtain 3x – 4y + 6z = 80 or –3x + 4y – 6z = –80 A1 [3]

 0
 
(ii) State the direction vector  1  or equivalent B1
 0
 
Carry out correct process for finding scalar product of two relevant vectors M1
Use correct complete process with moduli and scalar product and evaluate sin–1 or cos–1
of result M1
Obtain 30.8°or 0.538 radians A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1560 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 31

4 (i) Verify that –96 + 100 + 8 – 12 = 0 B1

Attempt to find quadratic factor by division by (x + 2), reaching a partial quotient
12x2 + kx, inspection or use of an identity M1
Obtain 12x2 + x – 6 A1
State (x + 2)(4x + 3)(3x – 2) A1 [4]
[The M1 can be earned if inspection has unknown factor Ax2 + Bx – 6 and an equation in
A and/or B or equation 12x2 + Bx + C and an equation in B and/or C.]

(ii) State 3y = 23 and no other value B1

Use correct method for finding y from equation of form 3y = k, where k > 0 M1
Obtain –0.369 and no other value A1 [3]

5 (i) Use at least one of e2x = 9, e y = 2 and e2y = 4 B1

Obtain given result 58 + 2k = c AG B1 [2]

dy dy
(ii) Differentiate left-hand side term by term, reaching ae2x + be y + ce2y M1
dx dx
dy dy
Obtain 12e2x + ke y + 2e2y A1
dx dx
Substitute (ln 3, ln 2) in an attempt involving implicit differentiation at least once, where
RHS = 0 M1
Obtain 108 – 12k – 48 = 0 or equivalent A1
Obtain k = 5 and c = 68 A1 [5]

6 (i) State or imply area of segment is 1

2 r2θ – 12 r2 sinθ or 50θ – 50 sinθ B1
1
Attempt to form equation from area of segment = 5 of area of circle, or equivalent M1
Confirm given result θ = 5π
2 + sinθ A1 [3]

(ii) Use iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain value for θ of 2.11 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify value of θ or show sign change in interval
(2.105, 2.115) A1
Use correct trigonometry to find an expression for the length of AB M1
e.g. 20 sin 1.055 or 200 − 200 cos 2.11
Hence 17.4 A1 [5]
[2.1 → 2.1198 → 2.1097 → 2.1149 → 2.1122]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1561
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 31

7 (i) State or imply dx = 2t dt or equivalent B1

Express the integral in terms of x and dx M1
5
Obtain given answer ∫ (2 x − 2) ln x dx , including change of limits
1
AG A1 [3]

1
∫
(ii) Attempt integration by parts obtaining (ax2 + bx)ln x ± (ax 2 + bx)
x
dx or equivalent M1

1
∫
Obtain (x2 – 2x)ln x – ( x 2 − 2 x)
x
dx or equivalent A1

Obtain (x2 – 2x)ln x – 12 x2 + 2x A1

Use limits correctly having integrated twice M1
Obtain 15 ln 5 – 4 or exact equivalent A1 [5]
∫
[Equivalent for M1 is (2x – 2)(ax ln x + bx) – (ax ln x + bx) 2dx]

8 (i) Either: Multiply numerator and denominator by (1 − 2i), or equivalent M1

Obtain –3i A1
State modulus is 3 A1
Refer to u being on negative imaginary axis or equivalent and confirm argument
as − 12 π A1

Or: Using correct processes, divide moduli of numerator and denominator M1

Obtain 3 A1
Subtract argument of denominator from argument of numerator M1
Obtain –tan–1 12 – tan–12 or –0.464 – 1.107 and hence − 12 π or –1.57 A1 [4]

(ii) Show correct half-line from u at angle 14 π to real direction B1

Use correct trigonometry to find required value M1
Obtain 32 2 or equivalent A1 [3]

(iii) Show, or imply, locus is a circle with centre (1 + i)u and radius 1 M1
Use correct method to find distance from origin to furthest point of circle M1
Obtain 3 2 + 1 or equivalent A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1562 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 31

9 (i) Express cos 4θ as 2 cos2 2θ – 1 or cos2 2θ – sin2 2θ or 1 – 2 sin2 2θ B1

Express cos 4θ in terms of cosθ M1
Obtain 8 cos4θ – 8 cos2θ + 1 A1
Use cos2θ = 2 cos2θ – 1 to obtain given answer 8 cos4θ – 3 AG A1 [4]

(ii) (a) State or imply cos4θ = 1

2 B1
Obtain 0.572 B1
Obtain –0.572 B1 [3]

(b) Integrate and obtain form k1θ + k2 sin 4θ + k3 sin 2θ M1

Obtain 83 θ + 321 sin 4θ + 14 sin 2θ A1
32 π + 14 following completely correct work
3
Obtain A1 [3]

10 (i) Separate variables correctly and integrate of at least one side M1

1 A B
Carry out an attempt to find A and B such that ≡ + , or equivalent M1
N (1800 − N ) N 1800 − N
2 2
Obtain + or equivalent A1
N 1800 − N
Integrates to produce two terms involving natural logarithms M1
Obtain 2 ln N – 2 ln (1800 – N) = t or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant, or use N = 300 and t = 0 in a solution involving a ln N, b ln(1800)
and ct M1
Obtain 2 ln N – 2 ln (1800 – N) = t – 2 ln 5 or equivalent A1
Use laws of logarithms to remove logarithms M1
1
t
1800e 2
Obtain N = 1
t
or equivalent A1 [9]
5+e 2

(ii) State or imply that N approaches 1800 B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality | x | < | 5 + 2x |. [3]

2 (i) Show that the equation

log2 (x + 5) = 5 − log2 x
can be written as a quadratic equation in x. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

log2 (x + 5) = 5 − log2 x. [2]

3 Solve the equation

cos θ + 4 cos 2θ = 3,
giving all solutions in the interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ 180◦ .
◦
[5]

4
C

r
x

A O B T

The diagram shows a semicircle ACB with centre O and radius r. The tangent at C meets AB produced
at T . The angle BOC is x radians. The area of the shaded region is equal to the area of the semicircle.

(i) Show that x satisfies the equation

tan x = x + π . [3]

(ii) Use the iterative formula xn+1 = tan−1 (xn + π ) to determine x correct to 2 decimal places. Give
the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

5 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = ln(tan t), y = sin2 t,

where 0 < t < 12 π .

dy
(i) Express in terms of t. [4]
dx
(ii) Find the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point where x = 0. [3]

6 A certain curve is such that its gradient at a point (x, y) is proportional to xy. At the point (1, 2) the
gradient is 4.
2
−1
(i) By setting up and solving a differential equation, show that the equation of the curve is y = 2ex .
[7]

(ii) State the gradient of the curve at the point (−1, 2) and sketch the curve. [2]

5
7 (a) The complex number u is defined by u = , where the constant a is real.
a + 2i
(i) Express u in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [2]
(ii) Find the value of a for which arg(u*) = 34 π , where u* denotes the complex conjugate of u.
[3]

(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, shade the region whose points represent complex numbers ß
which satisfy both the inequalities |ß| < 2 and |ß| < |ß − 2 − 2i |. [4]

5x − x2
8 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(1 + x)(2 + x2 )

5x − x2
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including the
(1 + x)(2 + x2 )
term in x3 . [5]

9 Two planes have equations x + 2y − 2ß = 7 and 2x + y + 3ß = 5.

(i) Calculate the acute angle between the planes. [4]

(ii) Find a vector equation for the line of intersection of the planes. [6]

10
y

M
P

x
O 3

The diagram shows the curve y = x2 e−x .

(i) Show that the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the x-axis and the line x = 3 is
17
equal to 2 − 3 . [5]
e
(ii) Find the x-coordinate of the maximum point M on the curve. [4]

(iii) Find the x-coordinate of the point P at which the tangent to the curve passes through the origin.
[2]

BLANK PAGE

9709/32/M/J/11
1566 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1567

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1568 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1569

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1570 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1571

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1572 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1573

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1574 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1575
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1576 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1577
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

State or imply non-modular inequality x 2 < (5 + 2 x ) , or corresponding

2
1 EITHER:
equation, or pair of linear equations x = ± (5 + 2 x ) M1
5
Obtain critical values –5 and − only A1
3
5
Obtain final answer x < –5, x > − A1
3
OR: State one critical value e.g. –5, by solving a linear equation or inequality, or
from a graphical method, or by inspection B1
5
State the other critical value, e.g. − , and no other B1
3
5
Obtain final answer x < –5, x > − B1 [3]
3
[Do not condone ≤ or ≥.]

2 (i) Use law for the logarithm of a product or quotient M1

Use log232 = 5 or 25 = 32 M1
Obtain x2 + 5x – 32 = 0, or horizontal equivalent A1 [3]

(ii) Solve a 3-term quadratic equation M1

153 − 5
Obtain answer x = 3.68 only, or exact equivalent, e.g. A1 [2]
2

3 Use correct trig formula (or formulae) and obtain an equation in cosθ M1
Obtain 8cos2θ + cosθ – 7 = 0, or equivalent A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic in cosθ and reach θ = cos–1(a) M1
Obtain answer 29.0° A1
Obtain answer 180° and no others A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians (0.505 and 3.14 or π) as a
misread.]
[SR: The answer 180° found by inspection can earn B1.]

4 (i) State or imply CT = r tan x or OT = r sec x , or equivalent B1

Using correct area formulae, form an equation in r and x M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [3]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain the final answer 1.35 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p. , or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.345, 1.355) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1578 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

dx
5 (i) EITHER: State = sec 2 t / tan t , or equivalent B1
dt
dy
State = 2 sin t cos t , or equivalent B1
dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. 2 sin 2 t cos 2 t A1
OR: Obtain y = e2x / (1 + e2x), or equivalent B1
Use correct quotient or product rule M1
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. 2e2x / (1 + e2x)2 A1
Obtain correct derivative in terms of t in any form, e.g. (2tan2t) / (1 + tan2t)2 A1 [4]

1
(ii) State or imply t = π when x = 0 B1
4
Form the equation of the tangent at x = 0 M1
1 1
Obtain correct answer in any horizontal form, e.g. y = x + A1 [3]
2 2
1
[SR: If the OR method is used in part (i), give B1 for stating or implying y = or
2
dy 1
= when x = 0.]
dx 2

dy
6 (i) Show that the differential equation is = 2 xy B1
dx
Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of both sides M1
Obtain term ln y, or equivalent A1
Obtain term x2, or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant, or use limits x = 1, y = 2, in a solution containing terms aln y and bx2 M1
Obtain correct solution in any form A1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [7]

(ii) State that the gradient at (–1, 2) is –4 B1

Show the sketch of curve with correct concavity, positive y-intercept and axis of
symmetry x = 0 B1 [2]
[SR: A solution with k≠ 2, or not evaluated, can earn B0M1A1A1M1A1A0 in part (i).]
dy
[SR: If given answer is assumed valid, give B1 if is shown correctly to be equal to
dx
2xy, is stated to be proportional to xy, and shown to be equal to 4 at (1, 2).]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1579
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

7 (a) (i) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by a – 2i, or equivalent M1

5a 10i
Obtain final answer 2 − 2 , or equivalent A1
a +4 a +4
OR: Obtain two equations in x and y, solve for x or for y M1
5a 10
Obtain final answer x = 2 and y = 2 , or equivalent A1 [2]
a +4 a +4

3
(ii) Either state arg(u) = − π , or express u* in terms of a (f.t. on u) B1√
4
Use correct method to form an equation in a, e.g. 5a = –10 M1
Obtain a = –2 correctly A1 [3]

(b) Show a point representing 2 + 2i in relatively correct position in an Argand diagram B1

Show the circle with centre at the origin and radius 2 B1
Show the perpendicular bisector of the line segment from the origin to the point
representing 2 + 2i B1√
Shade the correct region B1 [4]
[SR: Give the first B1 and the B1√ for obtaining y = 2 – x, or equivalent, and sketching
the attempt.]

A Bx + C
8 (i) State or imply partial fractions are of the form + B1
1+ x 2 + x2
Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = –2, B = 1, C = 4 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (1 + x ) ,
−1

−1
 1 2
1 + x  or 2 + x
2 
( )
2 −1
in ascending powers of x M1

Obtain correct unsimplified expansion up to the term in x3 of each partial fraction A1√ + A1√
Multiply out fully by Bx + C, where BC ≠ 0 M1
5 2 7 3
Obtain final answer x − 3 x + x , or equivalent A1 [5]
2 4
 − 1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   , are not sufficient for the first M1. The f.t. is
1
on A, B, C.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√ in
(ii), max 4/10.]
[In the case of an attempt to expand (5x – x2)(1 + x)–1(2 + x2)–1, give M1A1A1 for the
expansions, M1 for the multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]
[Allow use of Maclaurin, giving M1A1√A1√ for differentiating and obtaining f(0) = 0
5 21
and f '(0) = , A1√ for f ''(0) = –6, and A1 for f '''(0) = and the final answer (the f.t.
2 2
is on A, B, C if used).]
( )( )
[For the identity 5 x − x 2 ≡ 2 + 2 x + x 2 + x 3 a + bx + cx 2 + dx 3 give M1A1; then M1A1
5 7
for using a relevant method to obtain two of a = 0, b = , c = –3 and d = ; then A1 for
2 4
the final answer in series form.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1580 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

9 (i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. i + 2j –2k or 2i + j + 3k B1
Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of the two normals M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the
moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result M1
Obtain the final answer 79.7° (or 1.39 radians) A1 [4]

(ii) EITHER: Carry out a method for finding a point on the line M1
Obtain such a point, e.g. (1, 3, 0) A1
EITHER: State two correct equations for the direction vector (a, b, c) of
the line, e.g. a + 2b – 2c = 0 and 2a + b + 3c = 0 B1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 8 : –7 : –3, or equivalent A1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = i + 3j + λ(8i – 7j – 3k) A1√
 31 3 
OR1: Obtain a second point on the line, e.g.  0, ,  A1
 8 8
Subtract position vectors to find a direction vector M1
7 3
Obtain i − j − k, or equivalent A1
8 8
7 3
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = i + 3j + λ(i − j − k) A1√
8 8
OR2: Attempt to calculate the vector product of two normals M1
Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain 8i – 7j – 3k, or equivalent A1
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = i + 3j + λ(8i – 7j – 3k) A1√
OR3: Express one variable in terms of a second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = (31 – 8y) / 7 A1
Express the first variable in terms of a third M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = (3 – 8z) / 3 A1
Form a vector equation of the line M1
31 3
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = j + k + λ(8i – 7j – 3k) A1√
8 8
OR4: Express one variable in terms of a second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. y = (31 – 7x) / 7 A1
Express the third variable in terms of the second M1
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = (3 – 3x) / 8 A1
Form a vector equation of the line M1
31 3
State a correct final answer, e.g. r = j + k + λ(– 8i + 7j + 3k) A1√ [6]
8 8
[The f.t. is dependent on all M marks having been earned.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1581
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 32

∫
10 (i) Attempt integration by parts and reach ± x 2 e − x ± 2 xe − x dx M1*

∫
Obtain − x 2 e − x + 2 xe − x dx , or equivalent A1
2 –x –x –x
Integrate and obtain –x e – 2xe – 2e , or equivalent A1
Use limits x = 0 and x = 3, having integrated by parts twice M1(dep*)
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct product or quotient rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for non-zero x M1
Obtain x = 2 with no errors send A1 [4]

(iii) Carry out a complete method for finding the x-coordinate of P M1

Obtain answer x =1 A1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Use logarithms to solve the equation 52x−1 = 2(3x ), giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures.
[4]

ln x
2 The curve y = has one stationary point. Find the x-coordinate of this point. [4]
x3

1
− 12 x − 12
3 Show that ã (1 − x)e dx = 4e − 2. [5]
0

4 (i) Show that the equation

tan(60◦ + θ ) + tan(60◦ − θ ) = k
can be written in the form
√
(2 3)(1 + tan2 θ ) = k(1 − 3 tan2 θ ). [4]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

√
tan(60◦ + θ ) + tan(60◦ − θ ) = 3 3,

giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 180◦ . [3]

5 The polynomial ax3 + bx2 + 5x − 2, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p(x). It is given that
(2x − 1) is a factor of p(x) and that when p(x) is divided by (x − 2) the remainder is 12.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, find the quadratic factor of p(x). [2]

6 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

cot x = 1 + x2 ,

where x is in radians, has only one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 0.5 and 0.8. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = tan−1
1
1 + xn2
to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

7 (i) Find the roots of the equation

p
ß2 + (2 3)ß + 4 = 0,
giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [2]

(ii) State the modulus and argument of each root. [3]

(iii) Showing all your working, verify that each root also satisfies the equation
ß6 = −64. [3]

8
y

1
x
O 2
p

The diagram shows the curve y = 5 sin3 x cos2 x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 π , and its maximum point M .

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M . [5]

(ii) Using the substitution u = cos x, find by integration the area of the shaded region bounded by the
curve and the x-axis. [5]

9 In a chemical reaction, a compound X is formed from two compounds Y and Z . The masses in
grams of X , Y and Z present at time t seconds after the start of the reaction are x, 10 − x and 20 − x
respectively. At any time the rate of formation of X is proportional to the product of the masses of Y
dx
and Z present at the time. When t = 0, x = 0 and = 2.
dt
(i) Show that x and t satisfy the differential equation
dx
= 0.01(10 − x)(20 − x). [1]
dt

(ii) Solve this differential equation and obtain an expression for x in terms of t. [9]

(iii) State what happens to the value of x when t becomes large. [1]

10 With respect to the origin O, the lines l and m have vector equations r = 2i + k + λ (i − j + 2k) and
r = 2j + 6k + µ (i + 2j − 2k) respectively.

(i) Prove that l and m do not intersect. [4]

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the directions of l and m. [3]

(iii) Find the equation of the plane which is parallel to l and contains m, giving your answer in the
form ax + by + cß = d. [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/33/M/J/11
0.0 Year 2011 1585

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1586 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1587

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1588 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1589

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1590 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1591

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1592 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1593

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1594 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1595
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1596 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 33

1 Use law for the logarithm of a product, power or quotient M1*

Obtain a correct linear equation, e.g. (2 x − 1) ln 5 = ln 2 + x ln 3 A1
Solve a linear equation for x M1(dep*)
Obtain answer x = 1.09 A1 [4]
x
 25 
[SR: Reduce equation to the form a x = b M1*, obtain   = 10 Al, use correct method to
 3 
calculate value of x M1(dep*), obtain answer 1.09 A1.]

2 Use correct quotient or product rule M1

3 ln x 1
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. − 4 + 4 A1
x x
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x an equation of the form ln x = a , where a > 0 M1
1
Obtain answer exp( ), or 1.40, from correct work A1 [4]
3

1 1
− x − x
3 Attempt integration by parts and reach k (1 − x )e 2
∫
±k e 2 dx , or equivalent M1
1 1
− x − x
Obtain − 2(1 − x )e 2
∫
−2 e 2 dx , or equivalent A1
1 1
− x − x
Integrate and obtain − 2(1 − x )e 2 + 4e 2 , or equivalent A1
Use limits x = 0 and x = 1, having integrated twice M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [5]

4 (i) Use tan(A ± B) formula correctly at least once and obtain an equation in tanθ M1
Obtain a correct horizontal equation in any form A1
Use tan60° = 3 throughout M1
Obtain the given equation correctly A1 [4]

1
(ii) Set k = 3 3 and obtain tan2θ = B1
11
Obtain answer 16.8° B1√
Obtain answer 163.2° B1√ [3]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians (0.293 and 2.85) as a
misread.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1597
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 33

1
5 (i) Substitute x = and equate to zero, or divide, and obtain a correct equation, e.g.
2
1 1 5
a+ b+ −2=0 B1
8 4 2
Substitute x = 2 and equate result to 12, or divide and equate constant remainder to 12 M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 8a + 4b + 10 – 2 = 12 A1
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtain a = 2 and b = –3 A1 [5]

1 2
(ii) Attempt division by 2x – 1 reaching a partial quotient ax + kx M1
2
Obtain quadratic factor x2 – x + 2 A1 [2]
[The M1 is earned if inspection has an unknown factor Ax2 + Bx + 2 and an equation in A
1
and/or B, or an unknown factor of ax 2 + Bx + C and an equation in B and/or C.]
2

6 (i) Make recognisable sketch of a relevant graph over the given range B1
Sketch the other relevant graph and justify the given statement B1 [2]

( )
(ii) Consider the sign of cot x − 1 + x 2 at x = 0.5 and x = 0.8, or equivalent M1
Complete the argument with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once with 0.5 ≤ x n ≤ 0.8 M1
Obtain final answer 0.62 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (0.615, 0.625) A1 [3]

7 (i) Use the quadratic formula, completing the square, or the substitution z = x + iy to find a
root and use i2 = –1 M1
Obtain final answers − 3 ± i , or equivalent A1 [2]

(ii) State that the modulus of both roots is 2 B1√

5
State that the argument of − 3 + i is 150° or π (2.62) radians B1√
6
5
State that the argument of − 3 − i is –150° (or 210°) or – π (–2.62) radians or
6
7
π (3.67) radians B1√ [3]
6

(iii) Carry out an attempt to find the sixth power of a root M1

Verify that one of the roots satisfies z6 = –64 A1
Verify that the other root satisfies the equation A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1598 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 33

8 (i) Use product and chain rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. 15 sin 2 x cos 3 x − 10 sin 4 x cos x A1
Equate derivative to zero and obtain a relevant equation in one trigonometric function M1
Obtain 2 tan 2 x = 3 , 5 cos 2 x = 2 , or 5 sin 2 x = 3 A1
Obtain answer x = 0.886 radians A1 [5]

du
(ii) State or imply du = − sin x dx , or = − sin x , or equivalent B1
dx
Express integral in terms of u and du M1
∫( )
Obtain ± 5 u 2 − u 4 du , or equivalent A1
1
Integrate and use limits u = 1 and u = 0 (or x = 0 and x = π) M1
2
2
Obtain answer , or equivalent, with no errors seen A1 [5]
3

dx
9 (i) State or imply = k (10 − x )(20 − x ) and show k = 0.01 B1 [1]
dt

(ii) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of at least one side M1
1 A B
Carry out an attempt to find A and B such that ≡ + , or
(10 − x )(20 − x ) 10 − x 20 − x
equivalent M1
1 1
Obtain A = and B = − , or equivalent A1
10 10
1 1
Integrate and obtain − ln (10 − x ) + ln (20 − x ) , or equivalent A1√
10 10
Integrate and obtain term 0.01t, or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant, or use limits t = 0, x = 0, in a solution containing terms of the form
a ln (10 − x ) , b ln (20 − x ) and ct M1
1 1 1
Obtain answer in any form, e.g. − ln (10 − x ) + ln (20 − x ) = 0.01t + ln 2 A1√
10 10 10
Use laws of logarithms to correctly remove logarithms M1
Rearrange and obtain x = 20(exp(0.1t ) − 1) / (2 exp(0.1t ) − 1) , or equivalent A1 [9]

(iii) State that x approaches 10 B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2011 1599
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 9709 33

10 (i) EITHER: Express general point of l or m in component form, e.g. (2 + λ, –λ, 1 + 2λ) or
(µ, 2 + 2µ, 6 – 2µ) B1
Equate at least two pairs of components and solve for λ or for µ M1
1
Obtain correct answer for λ or µ (possible answers for λ are –2, , 7 and for
4
1 1
µ are 0, 2 , − 4 ) A1
4 2
Verify that all three component equations are not satisfied A1
OR: State a relevant scalar triple product, e.g.
(2i – 2j – 5k) . ((i – j + 2k) × (i + 2j – 2k)) B1
Attempt to use the correct method of evaluation M1
Obtain at least two correct simplified terms of the three terms of the
expansion of the triple product or of the corresponding determinant,
e.g. –4, –8, –15 A1
Obtain correct non-zero value, e.g. –27, and state that the lines do not
intersect A1 [4]

(ii) Carry out the correct process for evaluating scalar product of direction vectors for l and m M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the
moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result M1
Obtain answer 47.1° or 0.822 radians A1 [3]

(iii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain a – b + 2c = 0 B1

Obtain a + 2b – 2c = 0, or equivalent, from a scalar product, or by
subtracting two point equations obtained from points on m, and solve for one
ratio, e.g. a : b M1*
Obtain a : b : c = –2 : 4 : 3, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a point on m and values for a, b and c in general
equation and evaluate d M1(dep*)
Obtain answer –2x + 4y + 3z = 26, or equivalent A1
OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of direction vectors of l and m M1*
Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain –2i + 4j + 3k, or equivalent A1
Form a plane equation and use coordinates of a relevant point to evaluate d M1(dep*)
Obtain answer –2x + 4y + 3z = 26, or equivalent A1
OR2 : Form a two-parameter plane equation using relevant vectors M1*
State a correct equation e.g. r = 2j + 6k + s(i – j + 2k) + t(i + 2j – 2k) A1
State three correct equations in x, y, z, s and t A1
Eliminate s and t M1(dep*)
Obtain answer –2x + 4y + 3z = 26, or equivalent A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1600 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2010

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality 2| x − 3 | > | 3x + 1|. [4]

2 Solve the equation

ln(1 + x2 ) = 1 + 2 ln x,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 Solve the equation

cos(θ + 60◦ ) = 2 sin θ ,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [5]

4 (i) By sketching suitable graphs, show that the equation

4x2 − 1 = cot x
has only one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 0.6 and 1. [2]

√
(iii) Use the iterative formula
xn+1 = 1
2 (1 + cot xn )
to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

Let I = ä
x2
√
(4 − x 2 )
5 dx.
0

(i) Using the substitution x = 2 sin θ , show that

I=ã [3]
6
π
4 sin2 θ dθ .
0

(ii) Hence find the exact value of I . [4]

The complex number ß is given by

√
6
ß = ( 3) + i.

(i) Find the modulus and argument of ß. [2]

(ii) The complex conjugate of ß is denoted by ß*. Showing your working, express in the form x + iy,
where x and y are real,
(a) 2ß + ß*,
iß*
ß
(b) .
[4]

(iii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram with origin O, show the points A and B representing the
complex numbers ß and iß* respectively. Prove that angle AOB = 16 π . [3]

−−→
With respect to the origin O, the points A and B have position vectors given by OA = i + 2j + 2k and
−−→
7
OB = 3i + 4j. The point P lies on the line AB and OP is perpendicular to AB.

(i) Find a vector equation for the line AB. [1]

(ii) Find the position vector of P. [4]

(iii) Find the equation of the plane which contains AB and which is perpendicular to the plane OAB,
giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d . [4]

Let f (x) =
3x
(1 + x)(1 + 2x2 )
8 .

(i) Express f (x) in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f (x) in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 .
[5]

[Questions 9 and 10 are printed on the next page.]

9
y

x
O 2
M

The diagram shows the curve y = x3 ln x and its minimum point M .

(i) Find the exact coordinates of M . [5]

(ii) Find the exact area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the x-axis and the line x = 2. [5]

10 A certain substance is formed in a chemical reaction. The mass of substance formed t seconds after
the start of the reaction is x grams. At any time the rate of formation of the substance is proportional
to (20 − x). When t = 0, x = 0 and = 1.
dx
dt

(i) Show that x and t satisfy the differential equation

= 0.05(20 − x). [2]

dx
dt

(ii) Find, in any form, the solution of this differential equation. [5]

(iii) Find x when t = 10, giving your answer correct to 1 decimal place. [2]

(iv) State what happens to the value of x as t becomes very large. [1]

1604 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1605
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not
lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote
a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by
substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be
implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1606 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through √" marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures - this is regarded as an error
in accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA -1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1607
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (2(x – 3))2 > (3x + 1)2, or corresponding
quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations 2(x – 3) = ±(3x + 1) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear
equations M1
Obtain critical values x = –7 and x = 1 A1
State answer –7 < x < 1 A1
OR: Obtain critical value x = –7 or x = 1 from a graphical method, or by inspection,
or by solving a linear equation or inequality B1
Obtain critical values x = –7 and x = 1 B2
State answer –7 < x < 1 B1 [4]
[Do not condone: < for <.]

2 Use law for the logarithm of a power, a quotient, or a product correctly at least once M1
Use ln e = 1 or e = exp(1) M1
Obtain a correct equation free of logarithms, e.g. 1 + x2 = ex2 A1
Solve and obtain answer x = 0.763 only A1 [4]
[For the solution x = 0.763 with no relevant working give B1, and a further B1 if 0.763 is
shown to be the only root.]
[Treat the use of logarithms to base 10 with answer 0.333 only, as a misread.]
[SR: Allow iteration, giving B1 for an appropriate formula,
e.g. xn+1 = exp((ln(1 + xn2) – 1)/2), M1 for using it correctly once, A1 for 0.763, and A1 for
showing the equation has no other root but 0.763.]

3 Attempt use of cos(A + B) formula to obtain an equation in cos θ and sin θ M1

Use trig formula to obtain an equation in tan θ (or cos θ, sin θ or cot θ) M1
Obtain tan θ = 1/(4 + 3 ) or equivalent (or find cos θ, sin θ or cot θ) A1
Obtain answer θ = 9.9° A1
Obtain θ = 189.9°, and no others in the given interval A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians as a misread
(0.173, 3.31).]
[The other solution methods are via cos θ = ±(4 +

( 2
)
3 )/ 1 + 4 + 3  or



( 2


)
sin θ = ±1/ 1 + 4 + 3  .]

4 (i) Make recognisable sketch of a relevant graph over the given range B1
Sketch the other relevant graph on the same diagram and justify the given statement B1 [2]

(ii) Consider sign of 4x2 – 1 – cot x at x = 0.6 and x = 1, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.73 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show
there is a sign change in the interval (0.725, 0.735) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1608 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

dx
5 (i) State or imply dx = 2 cos θ dθ, or = 2 cos θ, or equivalent B1
dθ
Substitute for x and dx throughout the integral M1
Obtain the given answer correctly, having changed limits and shown sufficient
working A1 [3]

(ii) Replace integrand by 2 – 2 cos 2θ, or equivalent B1

Obtain integral 2θ – sin 2θ, or equivalent B1√
Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form aθ ± b sin 2θ, where ab Þ 0 M1
1 3
Obtain answer π − or exact equivalent A1 [4]
3 2
[The f.t. is on integrands of the form a + c cos 2θ, where ac Þ 0.]

6 (i) State modulus is 2 B1

State argument is 16 π , or 30°, or 0.524 radians B1 [2]

(ii) (a) State answer 3 3 + i B1

(b) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by 3 − i , or equivalent M1

Simplify denominator to 4 or numerator to 2 3 + 2i A1
Obtain final answer 1
23 + i , or equivalent
1
2 A1
OR 1: Obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y M1
Obtain x = 12 3 or y = 12 A1
Obtain final answer 12 3 + 12 i , or equivalent A1
OR 2: Using the correct processes express iz*/z in polar form M1
Obtain x = 12 3 or y = 12 A1
Obtain final answer 1
2 3 + 12 i , or equivalent A1 [4]

(iii) Plot A and B in relatively correct positions B1

EITHER: Use fact that angle AOB = arg(iz*) – arg z M1
Obtain the given answer A1
OR 1: Obtain tan AOˆ B from gradients of OA and OB and the correct tan(A – B)
formula M1
Obtain the given answer A1
OR 2: Obtain cos AOˆ B by using correct cosine formula or scalar product M1
Obtain the given answer A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1609
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

7 (i) State correct equation in any form, e.g. r = i + 2j + 2k + λ(2i + 2j – 2k) B1 [1]

(ii) EITHER: Equate a relevant scalar product to zero and form an equation in λ M1
OR 1: Equate derivative of OP2 (or OP) to zero and form an equation in λ M1
OR 2: Use Pythagoras in OAP or OBP and form an equation in λ M1
State a correct equation in any form A1
Solve and obtain λ = − 16 or equivalent A1
Obtain final answer OP = 23 i + 53 j + 73 k , or equivalent A1 [4]

(iii) EITHER: State or imply OP is a normal to the required plane M1

State normal vector 2i + 5j + 7k, or equivalent A1√
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 2x + 5y + 7z = d and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer 2x + 5y + 7z = 26, or equivalent A1
OR 1: Find a vector normal to plane AOB and calculate its vector product with a
direction vector for the line AB M1*
Obtain answer 2i + 5j + 7k, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 2x + 5y + 7z = d and evaluate d M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 2x + 5y + 7z = 26, or equivalent A1
OR 2: Set up and solve simultaneous equations in a, b, c derived from zero scalar
products of ai + bj + ck with (i) a direction vector for line AB, (ii) a normal
to plane OAB M1*
Obtain a : b : c = 2 : 5 : 7, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 2x + 5y + 7z = d and evaluate d M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 2x + 5y + 7z = 26, or equivalent A1
OR 3: With Q (x, y, z) on plane, use Pythagoras in OPQ to form an equation in x,
y and z M1*
Form a correct equation A1√
Reduce to linear form M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 2x + 5y + 7z = 26, or equivalent A1
OR 4: Find a vector normal to plane AOB and form a 2-parameter equation with
relevant vectors, e.g., r = i + 2j + 2k + λ(2i – 2j + 2k) + µ(8i – 6j + 2k) M1*
State three correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1(dep*)
Obtain answer 2x + 5y + 7z = 26, or equivalent A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1610 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

A Bx + C
8 (i) State or imply the form + B1
1 + x 1 + 2x2
Use any relevant method to evaluate a constant M1
Obtain one of A = –1, B = 2, C = 1 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (1 + x )
−1
or
( )
2 −1
1 + 2x M1
Obtain correct expansion of each partial fraction as far as necessary A1√ + A1√
Multiply out fully by Bx + C, where BC Þ 0 M1
Obtain answer 3x – 3x2 – 3x3 A1 [5]
 − 1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.,   are not sufficient for the first M1. The f.t.
1
is on A, B, C.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√
in (ii), max 4/10.]
[If a constant D is added to the correct form, give M1A1A1A1 and B1 if and only if
D = 0 is stated.]
[If an extra term D/(1 + 2x2) is added, give B1M1A1A1, and A1 if C + D = 1 is
resolved to 1/(1 + 2x2).]
[In the case of an attempt to expand 3x(1 + x)–1(1 + 2x2)–1, give M1A1A1 for the
expansions up to the term in x2, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final
answer.]
[For the identity 3x ≡ (1 + x + 2x2 + 2x3)(a + bx + cx2 + dx3) give M1A1; then M1A1
for using a relevant method to find two of a = 0, b = 3, c = –3 and d = –3; and then A1
for the final answer in series form.]

9 (i) Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and find non-zero x M1
Obtain x = exp(− 13 ) , or equivalent A1
Obtain y = –l/(3e), or any ln-free equivalent A1 [5]

1
∫
(ii) Integrate and reach kx 4 ln x + l x 4 . dx
x
M1

∫
Obtain 14 x 4 ln x − 14 x 3 dx A1

Obtain integral 14 x 4 ln x − 161 x 4 , or equivalent A1

Use limits x = 1 and x = 2 correctly, having integrated twice M1
15
Obtain answer 4 ln 2 − , or exact equivalent A1 [5]
16

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1611
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 31

dx
10 (i) State or imply = k (20 − x ) B1
dt
Show that k = 0.05 B1 [2]

(ii) Separate variables correctly and integrate both sides B1

Obtain term –ln(20 – x), or equivalent B1
Obtain term 201 t , or equivalent B1
Evaluate a constant or use limits t = 0, x = 0 in a solution containing terms a ln(20 – x)
and bt M1*
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. ln 20 – ln(20 – x) = 201 t A1 [5]

(iii) Substitute t = 10 and calculate x M1(dep*)

Obtain answer x = 7.9 A1 [2]

(iv) State that x approaches 20 B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 2| x − 3 | > | 3x + 1|. [4]

2 Solve the equation

ln(1 + x2 ) = 1 + 2 ln x,
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 Solve the equation

cos(θ + 60◦ ) = 2 sin θ ,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [5]

4 (i) By sketching suitable graphs, show that the equation

4x2 − 1 = cot x
has only one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 0.6 and 1. [2]

√
(iii) Use the iterative formula
xn+1 = 1
2 (1 + cot xn )
to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

Let I = ä
x2
√
(4 − x 2 )
5 dx.
0

(i) Using the substitution x = 2 sin θ , show that

I=ã [3]
6
π
4 sin2 θ dθ .
0

(ii) Hence find the exact value of I . [4]

The complex number ß is given by

√
6
ß = ( 3) + i.

(i) Find the modulus and argument of ß. [2]

(ii) The complex conjugate of ß is denoted by ß*. Showing your working, express in the form x + iy,
where x and y are real,
(a) 2ß + ß*,
iß*
ß
(b) .
[4]

(iii) On a sketch of an Argand diagram with origin O, show the points A and B representing the
complex numbers ß and iß* respectively. Prove that angle AOB = 16 π . [3]

−−→
With respect to the origin O, the points A and B have position vectors given by OA = i + 2j + 2k and
−−→
7
OB = 3i + 4j. The point P lies on the line AB and OP is perpendicular to AB.

(i) Find a vector equation for the line AB. [1]

(ii) Find the position vector of P. [4]

(iii) Find the equation of the plane which contains AB and which is perpendicular to the plane OAB,
giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d . [4]

Let f (x) =
3x
(1 + x)(1 + 2x2 )
8 .

(i) Express f (x) in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of f (x) in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 .
[5]

[Questions 9 and 10 are printed on the next page.]

9
y

x
O 2
M

The diagram shows the curve y = x3 ln x and its minimum point M .

(i) Find the exact coordinates of M . [5]

(ii) Find the exact area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the x-axis and the line x = 2. [5]

(i) Show that x and t satisfy the differential equation

= 0.05(20 − x). [2]

dx
dt

(ii) Find, in any form, the solution of this differential equation. [5]

(iii) Find x when t = 10, giving your answer correct to 1 decimal place. [2]

(iv) State what happens to the value of x as t becomes very large. [1]

0.0 Year 2010 1615

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1616 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not
lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote
a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by
substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be
implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1617
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA -1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1618 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

3 Attempt use of cos(A + B) formula to obtain an equation in cos θ and sin θ M1


( 2


)
sin θ = ±1/ 1 + 4 + 3  .]

4 (i) Make recognisable sketch of a relevant graph over the given range B1
Sketch the other relevant graph on the same diagram and justify the given statement B1 [2]

(ii) Consider sign of 4x2 – 1 – cot x at x = 0.6 and x = 1, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument correctly with correct calculated values A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.73 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show
there is a sign change in the interval (0.725, 0.735) A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1619
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

(ii) Replace integrand by 2 – 2 cos 2θ, or equivalent B1

6 (i) State modulus is 2 B1

State argument is 16 π , or 30°, or 0.524 radians B1 [2]

(ii) (a) State answer 3 3 + i B1

(b) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator by 3 − i , or equivalent M1

(iii) Plot A and B in relatively correct positions B1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1620 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

7 (i) State correct equation in any form, e.g. r = i + 2j + 2k + λ(2i + 2j – 2k) B1 [1]

(iii) EITHER: State or imply OP is a normal to the required plane M1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1621
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (1 + x )
−1
or
(1 + 2x )
2 −1
M1
Obtain correct expansion of each partial fraction as far as necessary A1√ + A1√
Multiply out fully by Bx + C, where BC Þ 0 M1
Obtain answer 3x – 3x2 – 3x3 A1 [5]
 − 1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.,   are not sufficient for the first M1. The f.t.
1
is on A, B, C.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√
in (ii), max 4/10.]
[If a constant D is added to the correct form, give M1A1A1A1 and B1 if and only if
D = 0 is stated.]
[If an extra term D/(1 + 2x2) is added, give B1M1A1A1, and A1 if C + D = 1 is
resolved to 1/(1 + 2x2).]
[In the case of an attempt to expand 3x(1 + x)–1(1 + 2x2)–1, give M1A1A1 for the
expansions up to the term in x2, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final
answer.]
[For the identity 3x ≡ (1 + x + 2x2 + 2x3)(a + bx + cx2 + dx3) give M1A1; then M1A1
for using a relevant method to find two of a = 0, b = 3, c = –3 and d = –3; and then A1
for the final answer in series form.]

9 (i) Use correct product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and find non-zero x M1
Obtain x = exp(− 13 ) , or equivalent A1
Obtain y = –l/(3e), or any ln-free equivalent A1 [5]

1
∫
(ii) Integrate and reach kx 4 ln x + l x 4 . dx
x
M1

∫
Obtain 14 x 4 ln x − 14 x 3 dx A1

Obtain integral 14 x 4 ln x − 161 x 4 , or equivalent A1

Use limits x = 1 and x = 2 correctly, having integrated twice M1
15
Obtain answer 4 ln 2 − , or exact equivalent A1 [5]
16

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1622 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 32

dx
10 (i) State or imply = k (20 − x ) B1
dt
Show that k = 0.05 B1 [2]

(ii) Separate variables correctly and integrate both sides B1

(iii) Substitute t = 10 and calculate x M1(dep*)

Obtain answer x = 7.9 A1 [2]

(iv) State that x approaches 20 B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Expand (1 + 2x)−3 in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [3]

2 The parametric equations of a curve are

x= y = e−2t .
t
2t + 3
,

Find the gradient of the curve at the point for which t = 0. [5]

3 The complex number w is defined by w = 2 + i.

(i) Showing your working, express w2 in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. Find the modulus
of w2 . [3]

(ii) Shade on an Argand diagram the region whose points represent the complex numbers ß which
satisfy
|ß − w2 | ≤ | w2 |. [3]

4 It is given that f (x) = 4 cos2 3x.

(i) Find the exact value of f ′ 19 π . [3]

(ii) Find ã f (x) dx. [3]

2x + 7
7

Show that ä dx = ln 50.

(2x + 1)(x + 2)
5 [7]
0

6 The straight line l passes through the points with coordinates (−5, 3, 6) and (5, 8, 1). The plane p
has equation 2x − y + 4ß = 9.

(i) Find the coordinates of the point of intersection of l and p. [4]

(ii) Find the acute angle between l and p. [4]

(i) Given that ä dx = 25 , show that a = 53 (1 + ln a).

ln x
7 [5]
1
x2

(ii) Use an iteration formula based on the equation a = 53 (1 + ln a) to find the value of a correct to
2 decimal places. Use an initial value of 4 and give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

3
√ √
8 (i) Express ( 6) cos θ + ( 10) sin θ in the form R cos(θ − α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ . Give
the value of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence, in each of the following cases, find the smallest positive angle θ which satisfies the
equation
√ √
(a) ( 6) cos θ + ( 10) sin θ = −4, [2]
√ √
(b) ( 6) cos 12 θ + ( 10) sin 21 θ = 3. [4]

9 A biologist is investigating the spread of a weed in a particular region. At time t weeks after the
√ covered by the weed is A m . The biologist claims that the rate of
2
start of the investigation, the area
increase of A is proportional to (2A − 5).

(i) Write down a differential equation representing the biologist’s claim. [1]

(ii) At the start of the investigation, the area covered by the weed was 7 m2 and, 10 weeks later, the
area covered was 27 m2 . Assuming that the biologist’s claim is correct, find the area covered
20 weeks after the start of the investigation. [9]

10 The polynomial p(ß) is defined by

p(ß) = ß3 + mß2 + 24ß + 32,

where m is a constant. It is given that (ß + 2) is a factor of p(ß).

(i) Find the value of m. [2]

(ii) Hence, showing all your working, find

(a) the three roots of the equation p(ß) = 0, [5]
(b) the six roots of the equation p(ß2 ) = 0. [6]

BLANK PAGE

9709/33/O/N/10
1626 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1627

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1628 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1629

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1630 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1631

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1632 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1633

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1634 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1635
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1636 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through √"
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures - this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1637
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 33

1 Obtain 1 – 6x B1
State correct unsimplified x2 term. Binomial coefficients must be expanded. M1
Obtain … + 24x2 A1 [3]

2 Use of correct quotient or product rule to differentiate x or t M1

3
Obtain correct or unsimplified equivalent A1
(2t + 3)2
Obtain –2e–2t for derivative of y B1
dy ddyt
Use = dx or equivalent M1
dx dt
Obtain –6 cwo A1 [5]

Alternative:
 −6 x

Eliminate parameter and attempt differentiation  y = e 
1− 2 x
B1
 
 
Use correct quotient or product rule M1
Use chain rule M1
−6 x
dy −6 1− 2 x
Obtain = e A1
dx (1 − 2 x )2
Obtain –6 cwo A1

3 (i) Attempt multiplication and use i2 = –1 M1

Obtain 3 + 4i A1
Obtain 5 for modulus B1 [3]

(ii) Draw complete circle with centre corresponding to their w2 … B1√

… and radius corresponding to their |w2| B1√
Shade the correct region cwo B1 [3]

4 (i) Obtain derivative of form k cos 3 x sin 3 x , any constant k M1

Obtain − 24 cos 3x sin 3 x or unsimplified equivalent A1
Obtain − 6 3 or exact equivalent A1 [3]

(ii) Express integrand in the form a + b cos 6 x , where ab ≠ 0 M1

Obtain 2 + 2 cos 6 x o.e. A1
Obtain 2 x + 13 sin 6 x or equivalent, condoning absence of + c, ft on a, b A1√ [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1638 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 33

A B
5 State or imply form + B1
2x + 1 x + 2
Use relevant method to find A or B M1
4 1
Obtain − A1
2x + 1 x + 2
Integrate and obtain 2 ln (2 x + 1) − ln (x + 2 ) (ft on their A, B) B1√B1√
Apply limits to integral containing terms a ln (2 x + 1) and b ln (x + 2 ) and apply a law of
logarithms correctly. M1
Obtain given answer ln 50 correctly A1 [7]

6 (i) State general vector for point on line, e.g.

–5i + 3j + 6k + s(10i + 5j – 5k) or 5i + 8j + k + t(10i + 5j – 5k) or equiv B1
Substitute their line into equation of plane and solve for parameter M1
Obtain correct value, s = 52 or t = − 53 or equivalent A1
Obtain (–1, 5, 4) o.e. A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply normal vector to p is 2i – j + 4k B1

Carry out process for evaluating scalar product of two relevant vectors M1
Using correct process for moduli, divide scalar product by the product of the moduli and
evaluate arcsin(..) or arccos(..) of the result. M1
Obtain 5.1° or 0.089 rads A1 [4]

7 (i) Attempt integration by parts M1

1 x ln x − x ln x 1
∫
Obtain − x −1 ln x + 2 dx ,
x x2
+2
x2 ∫ ∫
dx − 2 2 dx or equivalent
x
A1

Obtain − x −1 ln x − x −1 or equivalent A1
Use limits correctly, equate to 52 and attempt rearrangement to obtain a in terms of ln a M1
Obtain given answer a = 5
3 (1 + ln a ) correctly A1 [5]

(ii) Use valid iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.96 A1
Show sufficient iterations to > 4 dp to justify accuracy to 2 dp or show sign change in
interval (3.955, 3.965) A1 [3]
[4 → 3.9772 → 3.9676 → 3.9636 → 3.9619]

( 3 an −1)
SR: Use of an+1 = e 5 to obtain 0.50 also earns 3/3.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1639
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2010 9709 33

8 (i) Obtain or imply R = 4 B1

Use appropriate trigonometry to find α M1
Obtain α = 52.24 or better from correct work A1 [3]

(ii) (a) State or imply θ − α = cos −1 (− 4 ÷ R ) M1

Obtain 232.2 or better A1 [2]

(b) Attempt at least one value using cos −1 (3 ÷ R ) M1

Obtain one correct value e.g. ± 41.41° A1
1 3
Use θ − α = cos −1   to find θ M1
2 R
Obtain 21.7 A1 [4]

dA
9 (i) State = k 2A − 5 B1 [1]
dt

(ii) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of each side M1

Obtain (2A − 5)2 = … or equivalent
1
A1
Obtain = kt or equivalent A1
Use t = 0 and A = 7 to find value of arbitrary constant M1
Obtain C = 3 or equivalent A1
Use t = 10 and A = 27 to find k M1
Obtain k = 0.4 or equivalent A1
Substitute t = 20 and values for C and k to find value of A M1
Obtain 63 cwo A1 [9]

10 (i) Attempt to solve for m the equation p(–2) = 0 or equivalent M1

Obtain m = 6 A1 [2]

Alternative:
Attempt p(z) ÷ (z + 2), equate a constant remainder to zero and solve for m. M1
Obtain m = 6 A1

(ii) (a) State z = –2 B1

Attempt to find quadratic factor by inspection, division, identity, … M1
Obtain z2 + 4z + 16 A1
Use correct method to solve a 3-term quadratic equation M1
Obtain − 2 ± 2 3i or equivalent A1 [5]

(b) State or imply that square roots of answers from part (ii)(a) needed M1
Obtain ± i 2 A1
Attempt to find square root of a further root in the form x + iy or in polar form M1
Obtain a2 – b2 = –2 and ab = (± ) 3 following their answer to part (ii)(a) A1√
Solve for a and b M1
( ) (
Obtain ± 1 + i 3 and ± 1 − i 3 ) A1 [6]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality | x + 3a | > 2 | x − 2a |, where a is a positive constant. [4]

2 Solve the equation

sin θ = 2 cos 2θ + 1,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [6]

3 The variables x and y satisfy the equation xn y = C, where n and C are constants. When x = 1.10,
y = 5.20, and when x = 3.20, y = 1.05.

(i) Find the values of n and C. [5]

(ii) Explain why the graph of ln y against ln x is a straight line. [1]

4 (i) Using the expansions of cos(3x − x) and cos(3x + x), prove that

2 (cos 2x − cos 4x) ≡ sin 3x sin x. [3]

(ii) Hence show that

√
1

ã
π
sin 3x sin x dx = [3]
3
1
8 3.
1π
6

5 Given that y = 0 when x = 1, solve the differential equation

= y2 + 4,
dy
xy
dx
obtaining an expression for y2 in terms of x. [6]

6
C

x rad
A O B

The diagram shows a semicircle ACB with centre O and radius r. The angle BOC is x radians. The
area of the shaded segment is a quarter of the area of the semicircle.

(i) Show that x satisfies the equation

x = 34 π − sin x. [3]

(ii) This equation has one root. Verify by calculation that the root lies between 1.3 and 1.5. [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = 34 π − sin xn
to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

7 The complex number 2 + 2i is denoted by u.

(i) Find the modulus and argument of u. [2]

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points representing the complex numbers 1, i and u. Shade
the region whose points represent the complex numbers ß which satisfy both the inequalities
|ß − 1| ≤ |ß − i | and |ß − u | ≤ 1. [4]

(iii) Using your diagram, calculate the value of |ß| for the point in this region for which arg ß is least.
[3]

2
(x + 1)(x + 3)
8 (i) Express in partial fractions. [2]

(ii) Using your answer to part (i), show that

2
≡ − + + [2]
2 1 1 1 1
(x + 1)(x + 3) (x + 1) x + 1 x + 3 (x + 3)2
2
.

(iii) Hence show that ä dx = − ln 32 .

4 7
(x + 1) (x + 3)2
2 12 [5]
0

9
y

P
x
–1 O 1

r
1−x
The diagram shows the curve y = .
1+x

1−x dy
1+x
(i) By first differentiating , obtain an expression for in terms of x. Hence show that the
dx √
gradient of the normal to the curve at the point (x, y) is (1 + x) (1 − x2 ). [5]

(ii) The gradient of the normal to the curve has its maximum value at the point P shown in the
diagram. Find, by differentiation, the x-coordinate of P. [4]

10 The lines l and m have vector equations

r = i + j + k + s(i − j + 2k) and r = 4i + 6j + k + t(2i + 2j + k)

respectively.

(i) Show that l and m intersect. [4]

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the lines. [3]

(iii) Find the equation of the plane containing l and m, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d.
[5]

0.0 Year 2010 1643

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1644 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1645

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1646 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1647

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1648 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1649

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1650 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2010 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 31, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1651
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1652 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1653
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 31

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality ( x + 3a ) 2 > (2( x − 2a )) 2 , or corresponding

quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations ( x + 3a ) = ± 2( x − 2a ) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear
equations M1
Obtain critical values x = 13 a and x = 7a A1
State answer 13 a < x < 7 a A1
OR: Obtain the critical value x = 7a from a graphical method, or by inspection, or by
solving a linear equation or inequality B1
Obtain the critical value x = 13 a similarly B2
1
State answer 3
a < x < 7a B1 [4]
[Do not condone Y for <; accept 0.33 for 1
3
.]

2 Use correct cos 2A formula and obtain an equation in sin θ M1

Obtain 4 sin 2 θ + sin θ − 3 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Make reasonable attempt to solve a 3-term quadratic in sin θ M1
Obtain answer 48.6° A1
Obtain answer 131.4° and no others in the given range A1 √
Obtain answer 270° and no others in the given range A1 [6]
[Treat the giving of answers in radians as a misread. Ignore answers outside the given range.]

3 (i) EITHER: State or imply n ln x + ln y = ln C B1

Substitute x- and y-values and solve for n M1
Obtain n = 1.50 A1
Solve for C M1
Obtain C = 6.00 A1
OR: Obtain two correct equations by substituting x- and y-values in x n y = C B1
Solve for n M1
Obtain n = 1.50 A1
Solve for C M1
Obtain C = 6.00 A1 [5]

(ii) State that the graph of ln y against ln x has equation nln x + ln y = ln C which is
linear in ln y and ln x, or has equation of the form nX + Y = ln C, where X = ln x and
Y = ln y, and is thus a straight line B1 [1]

4 (i) State correct expansion of cos(3x – x) or cos(3x + x) B1

Substitute expansions in 12 (cos 2 x − cos 4 x) , or equivalent M1
Simplify and obtain the given identity correctly A1 [3]

(ii) Obtain integral 14 sin 2 x − 18 sin 4 x B1

Substitute limits correctly in an integral of the form a sin 2 x + b sin 4 x M1
Obtain given answer following full, correct and exact working A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1654 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 31

5 Separate variables correctly B1

Integrate and obtain term ln x B1
Integrate and obtain term 12 ln( y 2 + 4) B1
Evaluate a constant or use limits y = 0, x = 1 in a solution containing aln x and bln(y2 + 4) M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. 12 ln( y 2 + 4) = ln x + 12 ln 4 A1
Rearrange as y 2 = 4( x 2 − 1) , or equivalent A1 [6]

6 (i) Using the formulae 12 r 2θ and 12 r 2 sin θ , or equivalent, form an equation M1

Obtain a correct equation in r and x and/or x/2 in any form A1
Obtain the given equation correctly A1 [3]

(ii) Consider the sign of x − ( 34 π − sin x) at x = 1.3 and x = 1.5, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument with correct calculations A1 [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.38 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show
there is a sign change in the interval (1.375, 1.385) A1 [3]

7 (i) Obtain modulus 8 B1

Obtain argument 14 π or 45° B1 [2]

(ii) Show 1, i and u in relatively correct positions on an Argand diagram B1

Show the perpendicular bisector of the line joining 1 and i B1
Show a circle with centre u and radius 1 B1
Shade the correct region B1 [4]

(iii) State or imply relevance of the appropriate tangent from O to the circle B1 √
Carry out complete strategy for finding z for the critical point M1
Obtain answer 7 A1 [3]

A B
8 (i) State or imply the form + and use a relevant method to find A or B M1
x +1 x + 3
Obtain A = 1, B = −1 A1 [2]

(ii) Square the result of part (i) and substitute the fractions of part (i) M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [2]

1 1
(iii) Integrate and obtain − − ln ( x + 1) + ln( x + 3) − B3
x +1 x+3
Substitute limits correctly in an integral containing at least two terms of the correct
form M1
Obtain given answer following full and exact working A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1655
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 31

9 (i) Use quotient or product rule to differentiate (1 – x)/(1 + x) M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
dy
Use chain rule to find M1
dx
Obtain a correct expression in any form A1
Obtain the gradient of the normal in the given form correctly A1 [5]

(ii) Use product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain x = 12 A1 [4]

10 (i) Express general point of l or m in component form, e.g. (1 + s, 1 – s, 1 + 2s) or

(4 + 2t, 6 + 2t, 1 + t) B1
Equate at least two corresponding pairs of components and solve for s or t M1
Obtain s = −1 or t = −2 A1
Verify that all three component equations are satisfied A1 [4]

(ii) Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of the direction vectors of
l and m M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of
the moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result M1
Obtain answer 74.2° (or 1.30 radians) A1 [3]

(iii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain a – b + 2c = 0 and 2a + 2b + c = 0 B1

Solve and obtain one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 5 : −3 : −4, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point and values for a, b and c in
general equation of plane and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer 5x – 3y – 4z = −2, or equivalent A1
OR 1: Using two points on l and one on m, or vice versa, state three equations in
a, b, c and d B1
Solve and obtain one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a ratio of three of the unknowns, e.g. a : b : c = −5 : 3 : 4 A1
Use coordinates of a relevant point and found ratio to find the fourth
unknown, e.g. d M1
Obtain answer –5x + 3y + 4z = 2, or equivalent A1
OR 2: Form a correct 2-parameter equation for the plane,
e.g. r = i + j + k + λ(i – j + 2k) + µ(2i + 2j + k) B1
State three equations in x, y, z, λ and µ M1
State three correct equations A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain answer 5x – 3y – 4z = −2, or equivalent A1
OR 3: Attempt to calculate vector product of direction vectors of l and m M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. –5i + 3j + 4k A1
Form a plane equation and use coordinates of a relevant point to
calculate d M1
Obtain answer –5x + 3y + 4z = 2, or equivalent A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation

2x + 1
= 5,
2x − 1
giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

π
2 Show that ã x2 sin x dx = π 2 − 4. [5]
0

3 It is given that cos a = 35 , where 0◦ < a < 90◦ . Showing your working and without using a calculator
to evaluate a,
(i) find the exact value of sin(a − 30◦ ), [3]
(ii) find the exact value of tan 2a, and hence find the exact value of tan 3a. [4]

4
y

x
O p 2p
M

The diagram shows the curve y = for 0 < x ≤ 2π , and its minimum point M .
sin x
x
(i) Show that the x-coordinate of M satisfies the equation

x = tan x. [4]

(ii) The iterative formula

xn+1 = tan−1 (xn ) + π
can be used to determine the x-coordinate of M . Use this formula to determine the x-coordinate
of M correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

5 The polynomial 2x3 + 5x2 + ax + b, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p(x). It is given that
(2x + 1) is a factor of p(x) and that when p(x) is divided by (x + 2) the remainder is 9.

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, factorise p(x) completely. [3]

6 The equation of a curve is

x ln y = 2x + 1.

= − 2.
dy y
(i) Show that [4]
dx x
(ii) Find the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point where y = 1, giving your answer in the
form ax + by + c = 0. [4]

7 The variables x and t are related by the differential equation

= cos2 x,
dx
e2t
dt
where t ≥ 0. When t = 0, x = 0.

(i) Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for x in terms of t. [6]

(ii) State what happens to the value of x when t becomes very large. [1]

(iii) Explain why x increases as t increases. [1]

8 The variable complex number ß is given by

ß = 1 + cos 2θ + i sin 2θ ,

where θ takes all values in the interval − 12 π < θ < 12 π .

(i) Show that the modulus of ß is 2 cos θ and the argument of ß is θ . [6]

1
ß
(ii) Prove that the real part of is constant. [3]

9 The plane p has equation 3x + 2y + 4ß = 13. A second plane q is perpendicular to p and has equation
ax + y + ß = 4, where a is a constant.

(i) Find the value of a. [3]

(ii) The line with equation r = j − k + λ (i + 2j + 2k) meets the plane p at the point A and the plane q
at the point B. Find the length of AB. [6]

10 (i) Find the values of the constants A, B, C and D such that

2x3 − 1
≡A+ + 2 + [5]
B C D
x2 (2x − 1) 2x − 1
.
x x

(ii) Hence show that

2x3 − 1
2
ä dx = 32 + 12 ln 27 .
16
[5]
1
x2 (2x − 1)

BLANK PAGE

9709/32/M/J/10
0.0 Year 2010 1659

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1660 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1661

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1662 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1663

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1664 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1665

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1666 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1667

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2010 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 32, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1668 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1669
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1670 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 32

1 EITHER: Attempt to solve for 2 x M1

Obtain 2x = 6/4, or equivalent A1
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 2x = a, where a > 0 M1
Obtain answer x = 0.585 A1
OR: State an appropriate iterative formula, e.g. xn + 1 = ln((2 xn + 6) / 5) / ln 2 B1
Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1
Obtain answer x = 0.585 A1
Show that the equation has no other root but 0.585 A1 [4]

[For the solution 0.585 with no relevant working, award B1 and a further B1 if 0.585 is shown to
be the only root.]

2 ∫
Integrate by parts and reach ± x 2 cos x ± 2 x cos x dx M1

∫
Obtain − x 2 cos x + 2 x cos x dx , or equivalent A1

Complete the integration, obtaining − x 2 cos x + 2 x sin x + 2 cos x , or equivalent A1

Substitute limits correctly, having integrated twice M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [5]

3 (i) State or imply sin a = 4/5 B1

Use sin(A – B) formula and substitute for cos a and sin a M1
1
Obtain answer (4 3 − 3) , or exact eqivalent A1 [3]
10

(ii) Use tan 2A formula and substitute for tan a, or use sin 2A and cos 2A formulae,
substitute sin a and cos a, and divide M1
24
Obtain tan 2a = − , or equivalent A1
7
Use tan(A + B) formula with A = 2a , B = a and substitute for tan 2a and tan a M1
44
Obtain tan 3a = − A1 [4]
117

4 (i) Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 [4]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 4.49 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show that
there is a sign change in the interval (4.485, 4.495) A1 [3]

5 (i) Substitute x = − 12 , equate to zero and obtain a correct equation, e.g.

− 14 + 54 − 12 a + b = 0 B1
Substitute x = −2 and equate to 9 M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. − 16 + 20 − 2a + b = 9 A1
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtain a = −4 and b = −3 A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1671
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 32

(ii) Attempt division by 2x + 1 reaching a partial quotient of x 2 + kx M1

Obtain quadratic factor x 2 + 2 x − 3 A1
Obtain factorisation (2 x + 1)( x + 3)( x − 1) A1 [3]

[The M1 is earned if inspection has an unknown factor of x 2 + ex + f and an equation in e and/or

f, or if two coefficients with the correct moduli are stated without working.]
[If linear factors are found by the factor theorem, give B1 + B1 for (x −1) and (x + 3), and then B1
for the complete factorisation.]

1 dy
6 (i) EITHER: State or imply as derivative of ln y B1
y dx
x dy
State correct derivative of LHS, e.g. ln y + B1
y dx
dy
Differentiate RHS and obtain an expression for M1
dx
Obtain given answer A1
2x +1
OR 1: State ln y = , or equivalent, and differentiate both sides M1
x
1 dy
State correct derivative of LHS, e.g. B1
y dx
State correct derivative of RHS, e.g. − 1 / x 2 B1
Rearrange and obtain given answer A1
OR 2: State y = exp(2 + 1 / x) , or equivalent, and attempt differentiation by chain
rule M1
2
State correct derivative of RHS, e.g. − exp(2 + 1 / x) / x B1 + B1
Obtain given answer A1 [4]
[The B marks are for the exponential term and its multiplier.]

(ii) State or imply x = − 12 when y = 1 B1

Substitute and obtain gradient of −4 B1√
Correctly form equation of tangent M1
Obtain final answer y + 4x + 1 = 0, or equivalent A1 [4]

7 (i) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of both sides B1

Obtain term tan x B1
Obtain term − 12 e −2t B1
Evaluate a constant or use limits x = 0, t = 0 in a solution containing terms a tan x and
be–2t M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. tan x = 12 − 12 e −2t A1
Rearrange as x = tan −1 ( 12 − 12 e −2t ) , or equivalent A1 [6]

(ii) State that x approaches tan −1 ( 12 ) B1 [1]

(iii) State that 1 − e −2t increases and so does the inverse tangent, or state that e −2t cos 2 x is
positive B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1672 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 32
2
8 (i) EITHER: State a correct expression for zor z , e.g. (1 + cos 2θ ) 2 + (sin 2θ ) 2 B1
Use double angle formulae throughout or Pythagoras M1
Obtain given answer 2cos θ correctly A1
State a correct expression for tangent of argument, e.g. (sin 2θ /(1 + cos 2θ ) B1
Use double angle formulae to express it in terms of cos θ and sin θ M1
Obtain tan θ and state that the argument is θ A1
OR: Use double angle formulae to express z in terms of cos θ and sin θ M1
Obtain a correct expression, e.g. 1 + cos 2 θ − sin 2 θ + 2i sin θ cos θ A1
Convert the expression to polar form M1
Obtain 2 cos θ (cos θ + i sin θ ) A1
State that the modulus is 2 cosθ A1
State that the argument is θ A1 [6]

(ii) Substitute for z and multiply numerator and denominator by the conjugate of z, or
equivalent M1
Obtain correct real denominator in any form A1
Identify and obtain real part equal to 12 A1 [3]

9 (i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. 3i + 2j + 4k or ai + j + k B1

Equate scalar product of normals to zero and obtain an equation in a, e.g.
3a + 2 + 4 = 0 M1
Obtain a = −2 A1 [3]

(ii) Express general point of the line in component form, e.g. (λ , 1 + 2λ , −1 + 2λ) B1
Either substitute components in the equation of p and solve for λ , or substitute
components and the value of a in the equation of q and solve for λ M1*
Obtain λ = 1 for point A A1
Obtain λ = 2 for point B A1
Carry out correct process for finding the length of AB M1(dep*)
Obtain answer AB = 3 A1 [6]

[The second M mark is dependent on both values of λ being found by correct methods.]

10 (i) EITHER: Divide by denominator and obtain quadratic remainder M1

Obtain A = 1 A1
Use any relevant method to obtain B, C or D M1
Obtain one correct answer A1
Obtain B = 2, C = 1 and D = − 3 A1
OR: Reduce RHS to a single fraction and equate numerators, or equivalent M1
Obtain A = 1 A1
Use any relevant method to obtain B, C or D M1
Obtain one correct answer A1
Obtain B = 2, C = 1 and D = −3 A1 [5]
[SR: If A = 1 stated without working give B1.]

1 3
(ii) Integrate and obtain x + 2 ln x − − ln(2 x − 1) , or equivalent B3√
x 2
(The f.t. is on A, B, C, D. Give B2√ if only one error in integration; B1√ if two.)
Substitute limits correctly in the complete integral M1
Obtain given answer correctly following full and exact working A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality | x − 3 | > 2 | x + 1|. [4]

2 The variables x and y satisfy the equation y3 = Ae2x , where A is a constant. The graph of ln y against
x is a straight line.

(i) Find the gradient of this line. [2]

(ii) Given that the line intersects the axis of ln y at the point where ln y = 0.5, find the value of A
correct to 2 decimal places. [2]

3 Solve the equation

tan(45◦ − x) = 2 tan x,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < x < 180◦ . [5]

4 Given that x = 1 when t = 0, solve the differential equation

dx 1 x
= − ,
dt x 4
obtaining an expression for x2 in terms of t. [7]

5
y

p
x
O

The diagram shows the curve y = e−x − e−2x and its maximum point M . The x-coordinate of M is
denoted by p.

(i) Find the exact value of p. [4]

(ii) Show that the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the x-axis and the line x = p is
equal to 81 . [4]

ln x
6 The curve y = has one stationary point.
x+1
(i) Show that the x-coordinate of this point satisfies the equation
x+1
x= ,
ln x
and that this x-coordinate lies between 3 and 4. [5]

(ii) Use the iterative formula

xn + 1
xn+1 =
ln xn
to determine the x-coordinate correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to
4 decimal places. [3]

7 (i) Prove the identity cos 3θ ≡ 4 cos3 θ − 3 cos θ . [4]

(ii) Using this result, find the exact value of

1π

ã [4]
2
cos3 θ dθ .
1
3
π

8 (a) The equation 2x3 − x2 + 2√x + 12 = 0 has one real root and two complex roots. Showing your
working, verify that 1 + i 3 is one of the complex roots. State the other complex root. [4]
√
(b) On a sketch of an Argand diagram, show the point representing the complex number 1 + i 3.
On the same diagram, shade the region √ whose points represent the complex numbers ß which
satisfy both the inequalities |ß − 1 − i 3 | ≤ 1 and arg ß ≤ 3 π .
1
[5]

4 + 5x − x2
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(1 − 2x)(2 + x)2

4 + 5x − x2
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including
(1 − 2x)(2 + x)2
the term in x2 . [5]

10 The straight line l has equation r = 2i − j − 4k + λ (i + 2j + 2k). The plane p has equation 3x − y + 2ß = 9.
The line l intersects the plane p at the point A.

(i) Find the position vector of A. [3]

(ii) Find the acute angle between l and p. [4]

(iii) Find an equation for the plane which contains l and is perpendicular to p, giving your answer in
the form ax + by + cß = d . [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/33/M/J/10
1676 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1677

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1678 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1679

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1680 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1681

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1682 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1683

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1684 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1685

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2010 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/33 Paper 33, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1686 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 33

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1687
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 33

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1688 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 33

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (x – 3)2 > (2(x + 1))2 , or corresponding quadratic
equation, or pair of linear equations (x – 3) = ± 2(x + 1) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear equations M1
Obtain critical values −5 and 13 A1
1
State answer − 5 < x < 3
A1
OR: Obtain the critical value x = −5 from a graphical method, or by inspection,
or by solving a linear equation or inequality B1
Obtain the critical value x = 13 similarly B2
1
State answer − 5 < x < 3
B1 [4]
[Do not condone ≤ for <; accept 0.33 for 1
3
.]

2 (i) State or imply 3 ln y = ln A + 2 x at any stage B1

2
State gradient is , or equivalent B1 [2]
3

(ii) Substitute x = 0, ln y = 0.5 and solve for A M1

Obtain A = 4.48 A1 [2]

3 Attempt to use tan(A ± B) formula and obtain an equation in tan x M1

Obtain 3-term quadratic 2 tan2 x + 3 tan x – 1 = 0, or equivalent A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic and find a numerical value of x M1
Obtain answer 15.7° A1
Obtain answer 119.3° and no others in the given interval A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given interval. Treat answers in radians, 0.274 and 2.08, as a misread.]

4 Separate variables correctly B1

Obtain term k ln(4 – x2), or terms k1 ln(2 – x) + k2 ln(2 + x) B1
Obtain term –2 ln(4 – x2), or –2 ln(2 – x) –2 ln(2 + x), or equivalent B1
Obtain term t, or equivalent B1
Evaluate a constant or use limits x = 1, t = 0 in a solution containing terms a ln(4 – x2) and bt
or terms c ln(2 – x), d ln(2 + x) and bt M1
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. –2 ln(4 – x2) = t – 2 ln3 A1
2
Rearrange and obtain x = 4 − 3exp(− 12 t ) , or equivalent (allow use of 2 ln 3 = 2.20) A1 [7]

−x −2 x
5 (i) State derivative − e − (−2)e , or equivalent B1 + B1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain p = ln 2, or exact equivalent A1 [4]

−x −2 x
(ii) State indefinite integral − e − (− 12 )e , or equivalent B1 + B1
Substitute limits x = 0 and x = p correctly M1
Obtain given answer following full and correct working A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2010 1689
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 33

6 (i) Use correct quotient or product rule M1

1 ln x
Obtain correct derivative in any form, e.g. − A1
x( x + 1) ( x + 1) 2
Equate derivative to zero and obtain the given equation correctly A1
( x + 1)
Consider the sign of x − at x = 3 and x = 4, or equivalent M1
ln x
Complete the argument with correct calculated values A1 [5]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once, using or reaching a value in the interval (3, 4) M1
Obtain final answer 3.59 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p.,
or show there is a sign change in the interval (3.585, 3.595) A1 [3]

7 (i) Use correct cos(A + B) formula to express cos 3θ in terms of trig functions of 2θ and θ M1
Use correct trig formulae and Pythagoras to express cos 3θ in terms of cosθ M1
Obtain a correct expression in terms of cosθ in any form A1
Obtain the given identity correctly A1 [4]
[SR: Give M1 for using correct formulae to express RHS in terms of cos θ and cos 2θ ,
then M1A1 for expressing in terms of either only cos 3θ and cos θ , or only cos 2θ , sin 2θ ,
cos θ , and sin θ , and A1 for obtaining the given identity correctly.]

1 1 1
(ii) Use identity and integrate, obtaining terms ( sin 3θ ) and (3 sin θ ) , or equivalent B1 + B1
4 3 4
Use limits correctly in an integral of the form ksin 3θ + lsin θ M1
2 3
Obtain answer − 3 , or any exact equivalent A1 [4]
3 8

8 (a) EITHER: Substitute 1+ i 3 , attempt complete expansions of the x3 and x2 terms M1

Use i2 = –1 correctly at least once B1
Complete the verification correctly A1
State that the other root is 1− i 3 B1
OR1: State that the other root is 1− i 3 B1
2
State quadratic factor x − 2 x + 4 B1
Divide cubic by 3-term quadratic reaching partial quotient 2x + k M1
Complete the division obtaining zero remainder A1
2
OR2: State factorisation ( 2 x + 3)( x − 2 x + 4) , or equivalent B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic and use i2 = –1 M1
Obtain the root 1+ i 3 A1
State that the other root is 1− i 3 B1 [4]

(b) Show point representing 1+ i 3 in relatively correct position on an Argand diagram B1

Show circle with centre at 1+ i 3 and radius 1 B1√
Show line for arg z = 13 π making 13 π with the real axis B1
Show line from origin passing through centre of circle, or the diameter which would contain
the origin if produced B1
Shade the relevant region B1√ [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1690 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9709 33

A B C
9 (i) State or imply partial fractions of the form + + B1
1 − 2 x 2 + x (2 + x) 2
Use any relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = 1, B = 1, C = −2 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]
A Dx + E
[The form + , where A = 1, D = 1, E = 0, is acceptable
1 − 2 x (2 + x) 2
scoring B1M1A1A1A1 as above.]

−1 −1
(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (1 − 2 x) , (2 + x) ,
−2 −1 −2
(2 + x) , (1 + 12 x) , or (1 + 12 x) M1
Obtain correct unsimplified expansions up to the term in x2 of each partial fraction A1√ + A1√ + A1√
9 15 2
Obtain answer 1 + x + x , or equivalent A1 [5]
4 4
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.  − 1 , are not sufficient for the M1. The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
1
[For the A, D, E form of partial fractions, give M1A1√A1√ for the expansions then, if D ≠ 0, M1 for
multiplying out fully and A1 for the final answer.]
2 −1 −2
[In the case of an attempt to expand (4 + 5 x − x )(1 − 2 x) (2 + x) , give M1A1A1 for the expansions,
M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]
[SR: If B or C omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√ in (ii).]
[SR: If D or E omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√ in (ii).]

10 (i) Express general point of the line in component form, e.g. (2 + λ , −1 + 2λ , −4 + 2λ) B1
Substitute in plane equation and solve for λ M1
Obtain position vector 4i + 3j, or equivalent A1 [3]

(ii) State or imply a correct vector normal to the plane, e.g. 3i – j + 2k B1

Using the correct process, evaluate the scalar product of a direction vector for l and a normal for p M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the moduli
and evaluate the inverse cosine or inverse sine of the result M1
Obtain answer 26.5° (or 0.462 radians) A1 [4]

(iii) EITHER: State a + 2b + 2c = 0 or 3a – b + 2c = 0 B1

Obtain two relevant equations and solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 6 : 4 : −7, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 6x + 4y – 7z = d and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer 6x + 4y – 7z = 36, or equivalent A1
OR1: Attempt to calculate vector product of relevant vectors,
e.g. (i + 2j + 2k) × (3i – j + 2k) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. 6i + 4j – 7k A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 6x + 4y – 7z = d and evaluate d M1
Obtain answer 6x + 4y – 7z = 36, or equivalent A1
OR2: Attempt to form 2-parameter equation with relevant vectors M1
State a correct equation, e.g. r = 2i – j – 4k + λ(i + 2j + 2k) +µ(3i − j + 2k) A1
State three equations in x, y, z, λ, µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain answer 6x + 4y – 7z = 36, or equivalent A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1691

Year 2009

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the inequality 2 − 3x < | x − 3|. [4]

2 Solve the equation 3x+2 = 3x + 32 , giving your answer correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

3 The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

3xn 15
xn+1 = + ,
4 x3n
with initial value x1 = 3, converges to α .

(i) Use this iterative formula to find α correct to 2 decimal places, giving the result of each iteration
to 4 decimal places. [3]

(ii) State an equation satisfied by α and hence find the exact value of α . [2]

4 A curve has equation y = e−3x tan x. Find the x-coordinates of the stationary points on the curve in the
interval − 12 π < x < 12 π . Give your answers correct to 3 decimal places. [6]

5 (i) Prove the identity cos 4θ − 4 cos 2θ + 3 ≡ 8 sin4 θ . [4]

(ii) Using this result find, in simplified form, the exact value of
1
π
ã [4]
3
sin4 θ dθ .
1
6
π

6 With respect to the origin O, the points A, B and C have position vectors given by
−−→ −−→ −−→
OA = i − k, OB = 3i + 2j − 3k and OC = 4i − 3j + 2k.

The mid-point of AB is M . The point N lies on AC between A and C and is such that AN = 2 NC .

(i) Find a vector equation of the line MN . [4]

(ii) It is given that MN intersects BC at the point P. Find the position vector of P. [4]

7 The complex number −2 + i is denoted by u.

(i) Given that u is a root of the equation x3 − 11x − k = 0, where k is real, find the value of k. [3]

(ii) Write down the other complex root of this equation. [1]

(iii) Find the modulus and argument of u. [2]

(iv) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the point representing u. Shade the region whose points
represent the complex numbers ß satisfying both the inequalities

|ß| < |ß − 2| and 0 < arg(ß − u) < 14 π . [4]

5x + 3
8 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(x + 1)2 (3x + 2)

5x + 3
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including the
(x + 1)2 (3x + 2)
term in x2 , simplifying the coefficients. [5]

9
y

A x
O 4

ln x
The diagram shows the curve y = √ and its maximum point M . The curve cuts the x-axis at the
x
point A.

(i) State the coordinates of A. [1]

(ii) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(iii) Using integration by parts, show that the area of the shaded region bounded by the curve, the
x-axis and the line x = 4 is equal to 8 ln 2 − 4. [5]

10 In a model of the expansion of a sphere of radius r cm, it is assumed that, at time t seconds after the
start, the rate of increase of the surface area of the sphere is proportional to its volume. When t = 0,
dr
r = 5 and = 2.
dt

(i) Show that r satisfies the differential equation

dr
= 0.08r2 . [4]
dt
[The surface area A and volume V of a sphere of radius r are given by the formulae A = 4π r 2 ,
V = 43 π r 3 .]

(ii) Solve this differential equation, obtaining an expression for r in terms of t. [5]

(iii) Deduce from your answer to part (ii) the set of values that t can take, according to this model.
[1]

BLANK PAGE

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

9709/31/O/N/09
0.0 Year 2009 1695

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2009 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/31 Paper 31, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2009 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1696 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 31

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1697
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 31

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1698 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 31

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (2 – 3x)2 < (x – 3)2, or corresponding equation,
and make a reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic M1
Obtain critical value x = – 1 A1
2
1
Obtain x > – A1
2
1
Fully justify x > – as only answer A1
2
OR1: State the relevant critical linear equation, i.e. 2 – 3x = 3 – x B1
Obtain critical value x = – 1 B1
2

Obtain x > – 1 B1
2
1
Fully justify x > – as only answer B1
2

OR2: Obtain the critical value x = – 1 by inspection, or by solving a linear inequality B2

2
1
Obtain x > – B1
2

Fully justify x > – 1 as only answer B1

2
OR3: Make recognisable sketches of y = 2 – 3x and y = |x – 3| on a single diagram B1
Obtain critical value x = – 1 B1
2
1
Obtain x > – B1
2
1
Fully justify x > – as only answer B1 [4]
2
[Condone [ for > in the third mark but not the fourth.]

2 EITHER: Use laws of indices correctly and solve a linear equation for 3x, or for 3–x M1
2
3
Obtain 3x, or 3–x in any correct form, e.g. 3x = 2 A1
(3 − 1)
Use correct method for solving 3±x = a for x, where a > 0 M1
Obtain answer x = 0.107 A1
xn
ln(3 + 9)
OR: State an appropriate iterative formula, e.g. xn+1 = −2 B1
ln 3
Use the formula correctly at least once M1
Obtain answer x = 0.107 A1
Show that the equation has no other root but 0.107 A1 [4]
[For the solution 0.107 with no relevant working, award B1 and a further B1 if 0.107
is shown to be the only root.]

3 (i) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

State final answer 2.78 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there
is a sign change in an appropriate function in (2.775, 2.785) A1 [3]

3 15
(ii) State a suitable equation, e.g. x = x+ 3 B1
4 x
4
State that the exact value of α is 60 , or equivalent B1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1699
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 31

4 Use product or quotient rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Equate derivative to zero and obtain an equation of the form a sin 2x = b, or a quadratic in tan x,
sin2 x, or cos2 x M1*
Carry out correct method for finding one angle M1(dep*)
Obtain answer, e.g. 0.365 A1
Obtain second answer 1.206 and no others in the range (allow 1.21) A1 [6]
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[Treat answers in degrees, 20.9° and 69.1°, as a misread.]

5 (i) EITHER: Use double angle formulae correctly to express LHS in terms of trig functions
of 2θ M1
Use trig formulae correctly to express LHS in terms of sin θ, converting at least
two terms M1
Obtain expression in any correct form in terms of sin θ A1
Obtain given answer correctly A1
OR: Use double angle formulae correctly to express RHS in terms of trig functions
of 2θ M1
Use trig formulae correctly to express RHS in terms of cos 4θ and cos 2θ M1
Obtain expression in any correct form in terms of cos 4θ and cos 2θ A1
Obtain given answer correctly A1 [4]

1 4
(ii) State indefinite integral 4
sin 4θ – 2
sin 2θ + 3θ, or equivalent B2
(award B1 if there is just one incorrect term)
Use limits correctly, having attempted to use the identity M1
Obtain answer 321 (2π – 3 ), or any simplified exact equivalent A1 [4]

6 (i) EITHER: State that the position vector of M is 2i + j – 2k, or equivalent B1

Carry out a correct method for finding the position vector of N M1
Obtain answer 3i – 2j + k, or equivalent A1
Obtain vector equation of MN in any correct form,
e.g. r = 2i + j – 2k + λ(i – 3j + 3k) A1
OR: State that the position vector of M is 2i + j – 2k, or equivalent B1
Carry out a correct method for finding a direction vector for MN M1
Obtain answer, e.g. i – 3j + 3k, or equivalent A1
Obtain vector equation of MN in any correct form,
e.g. r = 2i + j – 2k + λ(i – 3j + 3k) A1 [4]
[SR: The use of AN = AC/3 can earn M1A0, but AN = AC/2 gets M0A0.]

(ii) State equation of BC in any correct form, e.g. r = 3i + 2j – 3k + µ(i – 5j + 5k) B1

Solve for λ or for µ M1
Obtain correct value of λ, or µ, e.g. λ = 3, or µ = 2 A1
Obtain position vector 5i – 8j + 7k A1 [4]

7 (i) Substitute x = –2 + i in the equation and attempt expansion of (–2 + i)3 M1

Use i2 = –1 correctly at least once and solve for k M1
Obtain k = 20 A1 [3]

(ii) State that the other complex root is –2 – i B1 [1]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1700 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 31

(iii) Obtain modulus 5 B1

Obtain argument 153.4° or 2.68 radians B1 [2]

(iv) Show point representing u in relatively correct position in an Argand diagram B1

Show vertical line through z = 1 B1
Show the correct half-lines from u of gradient zero and 1 B1
Shade the relevant region B1 [4]
[SR: For parts (i) and (ii) allow the following alternative method:
State that the other complex root is –2 – i B1
State quadratic factor x2 + 4x + 5 B1
Divide cubic by 3-term quadratic, equate remainder to zero and solve for k, or, using
3-term quadratic, factorise cubic and obtain k M1
Obtain k = 20 A1]

A B C
8 (i) State or imply partial fractions are of the form + + B1
x + 1 ( x + 1) 2 3 x + 2
Use any relevant method to obtain a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = 1, B = 2, C = –3 A1
Obtain a second value A1
Obtain the third value A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (x + 1)–1, (x + 1)–2, (3x + 2)–1
or (1 + 3 x)–1 M1
2
Obtain correct unsimplified expansion up to the term in x2 of each partial
fraction A1√ + A1√ + A1√
Obtain answer 32 − 114 x + 298 x 2 , or equivalent A1 [5]
 − 1
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.   , are not sufficient for the first M1. The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
1
Dx + E C
[The form + , where D = 1, E = 3, C = –3, is acceptable. In part (i) give
( x + 1) 2 3 x + 2
B1M1A1A1A1.
In part (ii) give M1A1√A1√ for the expansions, and, if DE ≠ 0, M1 for multiplying out fully and A1
for the final answer.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√ in (ii), max
4/10]
[If D or E omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√ in (ii), max
4/10]
[In the case of an attempt to expand (5x + 3)(x + 1)–2 (3x + 2)–1, give M1A1A1 for the expansions, M1
for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]
[Allow use of Maclaurin, giving M1A1√A1√ for differentiating and obtaining f(0) = 3 and
2

f ′(0) = – 11 , A1√ for f ″(0) = 29

, and A1 for the final answer (the f.t. is on A, B, C if used).]
4 4

9 (i) State coordinates (1, 0) B1 [1]

(ii) Use correct quotient or product rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain x = e2 correctly A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1701
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 31

1
(iii) Attempt integration by parts reaching a x ln x ± a ∫ x
x
dx M1*

1
Obtain 2 x ln x − 2 ∫ x
dx A1

Integrate and obtain 2 x ln x − 4 x A1

Use limits x = 1 and x = 4 correctly, having integrated twice M1(dep*)
Justify the given answer A1 [5]

dA
10 (i) State or imply = kV M1*
dt
dr dr
Obtain equation in r and , e.g. 8πr = k 4 πr3 A1
dt dt 3

dr
Use = 2, r = 5 to evaluate k M1(dep*)
dt
Obtain given answer A1 [4]

(ii) Separate variables correctly and integrate both sides M1

1
Obtain terms – and 0.08t, or equivalent A1 + A1
r
Evaluate a constant or use limits t = 0, r = 5 with a solution containing terms of the form
a
and bt M1
r
5
Obtain solution r = , or equivalent A1 [5]
(1 − 0.4t )

(iii) State the set of values 0 Y t < 2.5, or equivalent B1 [1]

[Allow t < 2.5 and 0 < t < 2.5 to earn B1.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation

ln(5 − x) = ln 5 − ln x,
giving your answers correct to 3 significant figures. [4]

2 The equation x3 − 8x − 13 = 0 has one real root.

(i) Find the two consecutive integers between which this root lies. [2]

(ii) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = (8xn + 13) 3

to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [3]

3 The equation of a curve is x3 − x2 y − y3 = 3.

dy
(i) Find in terms of x and y. [4]
dx

(ii) Find the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point (2, 1), giving your answer in the form
ax + by + c = 0. [2]

4 The angles α and β lie in the interval 0◦ < x < 180◦ , and are such that

tan α = 2 tan β and tan(α + β ) = 3.

Find the possible values of α and β . [6]

5 The polynomial 2x3 + ax2 + bx − 4, where a and b are constants, is denoted by p(x). The result of
differentiating p(x) with respect to x is denoted by p′ (x). It is given that (x + 2) is a factor of p(x) and
of p′ (x).

(i) Find the values of a and b. [5]

(ii) When a and b have these values, factorise p(x) completely. [3]

6 (i) Use the substitution x = 2 tan θ to show that

2 1

ä
π
= ã [4]
8 4
cos2 θ dθ .
(4 + x2 )2
d x
0 0

(ii) Hence find the exact value of

2
ä [4]
8
(4 + x2 )2
dx.
0

7 The complex numbers −2 + i and 3 + i are denoted by u and v respectively.

(i) Find, in the form x + iy, the complex numbers

(a) u + v, [1]
u
(b) , showing all your working. [3]
v
u
(ii) State the argument of . [1]
v
In an Argand diagram with origin O, the points A, B and C represent the complex numbers u, v and
u + v respectively.

(iii) Prove that angle AOB = 34 π . [2]

(iv) State fully the geometrical relationship between the line segments OA and BC. [2]

1+x
(1 − x)(2 + x2 )
8 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]

1+x
(1 − x)(2 + x2 )
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including the

term in x2 . [5]

9 The temperature of a quantity of liquid at time t is θ . The liquid is cooling in an atmosphere whose
temperature is constant and equal to A. The rate of decrease of θ is proportional to the temperature
difference (θ − A). Thus θ and t satisfy the differential equation

= −k(θ − A),
dθ
dt
where k is a positive constant.

(i) Find, in any form, the solution of this differential equation, given that θ = 4A when t = 0. [5]

(ii) Given also that θ = 3A when t = 1, show that k = ln 32 . [1]

(iii) Find θ in terms of A when t = 2, expressing your answer in its simplest form. [3]

10 The plane p has equation 2x − 3y + 6ß = 16. The plane q is parallel to p and contains the point with
position vector i + 4j + 2k.

(i) Find the equation of q, giving your answer in the form ax + by + cß = d. [2]

(ii) Calculate the perpendicular distance between p and q. [3]

(iii) The line l is parallel to the plane p and also parallel to the plane with equation x − 2y + 2ß = 5.
Given that l passes through the origin, find a vector equation for l. [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/32/O/N/09
0.0 Year 2009 1705

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2009 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/32 Paper 32, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2009 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1706 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1707
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1708 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

1 Use law of the logarithm of a product or quotient and remove logarithms M1

Obtain quadratic equation x2 – 5x + 5 = 0, or equivalent A1
Solve 3-term quadratic obtaining 1 or 2 roots A1
Obtain answers 1.38 and 3.62 A1 [4]

2 (i) Evaluate, or consider the sign of, x3 – 8x – 13 for two integer values of x, or equivalent M1
Conclude x = 3 and x = 4 with no errors seen A1 [2]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 3.43 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there is
a sign change in the interval (3.425, 3.435) A1 [3]

dy
3 (i) State 2xy + x2 as derivative of x2y B1
dx
dy
State 3y2 as derivative of y3 B1
dx
dy
Equate derivative of LHS to zero and solve for M1
dx
3 x 2 − 2 xy
Obtain answer , or equivalent A1 [4]
x2 + 3y 2

(ii) Find gradient of tangent at (2, 1) and form equation of tangent M1

Obtain answer 8x – 7y – 9 = 0, or equivalent A1√ [2]

4 Use tan(A ± B) formula and obtain an equation in tan α and tan β M1*
Substitute throughout for tan α or for tan β M1(dep*)
Obtain 2 tan2 β + tan β – 1 = 0 or tan2 α + tan α – 2 = 0, or equivalent A1
Solve a 3-term quadratic and find an angle M1
Obtain answer α = 45°, β = 26.6° A1
Obtain answer α = 116.6°, β = 135° A1 [6]
[Treat answers given in radians as a misread. Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[SR: Two correct values of α (or β) score A1; then A1 for both correct α, β pairs]

5 (i) Substitute x = –2, equate to zero and state a correct equation, e.g. –16 + 4a – 2b – 4 = 0 B1
Differentiate p(x), substitute x = –2 and equate to zero M1
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 24 – 4a + b = 0 A1
Solve for a or for b M1
Obtian a = 7 and b = 4 A1 [5]

(ii) EITHER: State or imply (x + 2)2 is a factor B1

Attempt division by (x + 2)2 reaching a quotient 2x + k or use inspection with
unknown factor cx + d reaching c = 2 or d = –1 M1
Obtain factorisation (x + 2)2 (2x – 1) A1
OR: Attempt division by (x + 2) M1
Obtain quadratic factor 2x2 + 3x – 2 A1
Obtain factorisation (x + 2)(x + 2)(2x – 1) A1 [3]
[The M1 is earned if division reaches a partial quotient of 2x2 + kx, or if inspection has an
unknown factor of 2x2 + ex + f and an equation in e and/or f, or if two coefficients with the
correct moduli are stated without working.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1709
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

dx
6 (i) State or imply = 2sec2 θ or dx = 2 sec2 θ dθ B1
dθ
Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
Obtain any correct form in terms of θ A1
Obtain the given form correctly (including the limits) A1 [4]

(ii) Use cos 2A formula, replacing integrand by a + b cos 2θ, where ab ≠ 0 M1*
Integrate and obtain 1 θ + 1 sin 2θ A1
2 4
1
Use limits θ = 0 and θ = 4
π M1(dep*)
1
Obtain answer 8
(π + 2), or exact quivalent A1 [4]

7 (i) (a) State that u + v is equal to 1 + 2i B1 [1]

(b) EITHER: Multiply numerator and denominator of u/v by 3 – i, or equivalent M1

Simplify numerator to –5 + 5i, or denominator to 10 A1
Obtain answer – 12 + 12 i, or equivalent A1
OR1: Obtain two equations in x and y and solve for x or for y M1
Obtain x = – 12 or y = 12 A1
Obtain answer – 12 + 1
2
i, or equivalent A1
OR2: Using the correct processes express u/v in polar form M1
Obtain x = – 12 or y = 12 correctly A1
Obtain answer – 12 + 1
2
i, or equivalent A1 [3]

3
(ii) State that the argument of u/v is 4
π (2.36 radians or 135°) B1√ [1]

(iii) EITHER: Use facts that angle AOB = arg u – arg v and arg u – arg v = arg(u/v) M1
Obtain given answer A1
OR1: Obtain tan AOˆ B from gradients of OA and OB and the tan (A ± B) formula M1
Obtain given answer A1
OR2: Obtain cos AOˆ B by using the cosine formula or scalar product M1
Obtain given answer A1 [2]

(iv) State OA = BC B1
State OA is parallel to BC B1 [2]

A Bx + C
8 (i) State or imply partial fractions are of the form + B1
1 − x 2 + x2
Use a relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain A = 23 , B = 23 and C = 13 A1 + A1 + A1 [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1710 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

(ii) Use correct method to find first two terms of the expansion of (1 – x)–1, (2 + x2)–1 or
(1 + 12 x2)–1 M1
Obtain complete unsimplified expansions up to x2 of each partial fraction e.g. 2
(1 + x + x2)
3
1 1 1
and 2
( 23 x – 3
)(1 – 2
x 2) A1√ + A1√
1
Carry out multiplication of (2 + x2)–1 by ( 23 x – 3
), or equivalent, provided BC ≠ 0 M1
1
Obtain answer 2
+ x + 34 x 2 A1 [5]
[Symbolic binomial coefficients are not sufficient for the first M1. The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
[If B or C omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0A0 in (i); M1A1√A1√ in (ii), max
4/10]
[In the case of an attempt to expand (1 + x)(1 – x)–1 (2 + x2)–1, give M1A1A1 for the expansions, M1
for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]
[Allow Maclaurin, giving M1A1√A1√ for differentiating and obtaining f(0) = 12 and f ′(0) = 1, A1√
3
for f ″(0) = 2
, and A1 for the final answer (the f.t. is on A, B, C if used).]

9 (i) Separate variables correctly B1

Integrate and obtain term ln(θ – A), or equivalent B1
Integrate and obtain term –kt, or equivalent B1
Use θ = 4A, t = 0 to determine a constant, or as limits M1
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. ln(θ – A) = –kt + ln 3A, with no errors seen A1 [5]

(ii) Substitute θ = 3A, t = 1 and justify the given statement B1 [1]

(iii) Substitute t = 2 and solve for θ in terms of A M1

Remove logarithms M1
Obtain answer θ = 7 A, or equivalent, with no errors seen A1 [3]
3
[The M marks are only available if the solution to part (i) contains terms aln(θ – A) and bt.]

10 (i) Substitute coordinates (1, 4, 2) in 2x – 3y + 6z = d M1

Obtain plane equation 2x – 3y + 6z = 2, or equivalent A1 [2]

(ii) EITHER: Attempt to use plane perpendicular formula to find perpendicular from (1, 4, 2)
to p M1
2 − 3(4) + 6(2) − 16
Obtain a correct unsimplified expression, e.g. A1
(2 2 + (−3) 2 + 6 2 )
Obtain answer 2 A1
OR1: State or imply perpendicular from O to p is 16 , or from O to q is 2 , or
7 7
equivalent B1
Find difference in perpendiculars M1
Obtain answer 2 A1
OR2: Obtain correct parameter value, or position vector or coordinates of foot of
perpendicular from (1, 4, 2) to p (µ = ± 2 ; ( 117 , 227 , 267 )) B1
7
Calculate the length of the perpendicular M1
Obtain answer 2 A1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1711
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9709 32

OR3: Carry out correct method for finding the projection onto a normal vector of a
line segment joining a point on p, e.g. (8, 0, 0) and a point on q, e.g. (1, 4, 2) M1
2(8 − 1) − 3(−4) + 6(−2)
Obtain a correct unsimplified expression, e.g. A1
(2 2 + (−3) 2 + 6 2 )
Obtain answer 2 A1 [3]

(iii) EITHER: Calling the direction vector ai + bj + ck, use scalar product to obtain a relevant
equation in a, b and c M1*
Obtain two correct equations, e.g. 2a – 3b + 6c = 0, a – 2b + 2c = 0 A1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1(dep*)
Obtain a : b : c = 6 : 2 : –1, or equivalent A1
State answer r = λ(6i + 2j – k) or equivalent A1√
OR: Attempt to calculate vector product of two normals, e.g.
(i – 2j + 2k) × (2i – 3j + 6k) M2
Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain –6i –2j + k, or equivalent A1
State answer r = λ(–6i – 2j + k), or equivalent A1√ [5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation ln 2 + e−x = 2, giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [4]

2
y

x
O 1
4
p

√
The diagram shows the curve y = (1 + 2 tan2 x) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 14 π .

(i) Use the trapezium rule with three intervals to estimate the value of

√
1
π
ã (1 + 2 tan2 x) dx,
4

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) The estimate found in part (i) is denoted by E . Explain, without further calculation, whether
another estimate found using the trapezium rule with six intervals would be greater than E or less
than E. [1]

3 (i) Prove the identity cosec 2θ + cot 2θ ≡ cot θ . [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation cosec 2θ + cot 2θ = 2, for 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [2]

4 The equation x3 − 2x − 2 = 0 has one real root.

(i) Show by calculation that this root lies between x = 1 and x = 2. [2]

(ii) Prove that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

2xn3 + 2
xn+1 =
3xn2 − 2

converges, then it converges to this root. [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula to calculate the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each
iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

When (1 + 2x)(1 + ax) 3 , where a is a constant, is expanded in ascending powers of x, the coefficient
2
5
of the term in x is zero.

(i) Find the value of a. [3]

(ii) When a has this value, find the term in x3 in the expansion of (1 + 2x)(1 + ax) 3 , simplifying the
2

coefficient. [4]

6 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = a cos3 t, y = a sin3 t,

where a is a positive constant and 0 < t < 12 π .

dy
(i) Express in terms of t. [3]
dx

(ii) Show that the equation of the tangent to the curve at the point with parameter t is

x sin t + y cos t = a sin t cos t. [3]

(iii) Hence show that, if this tangent meets the x-axis at X and the y-axis at Y , then the length of XY
is always equal to a. [2]

√
7 (i) Solve the equation ß2 + (2 3)iß − 4 = 0, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y
are real. [3]

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points representing the roots. [1]

(iii) Find the modulus and argument of each root. [3]

(iv) Show that the origin and the points representing the roots are the vertices of an equilateral triangle.
[1]

100
8 (i) Express in partial fractions. [4]
x2 (10
− x)

(ii) Given that x = 1 when t = 0, solve the differential equation

dx
= 1 2
100
x (10 − x),
dt
obtaining an expression for t in terms of x. [6]

9 The line l has equation r = 4i + 2j − k + t(2i − j − 2k). It is given that l lies in the plane with equation
2x + by + cß = 1, where b and c are constants.

(i) Find the values of b and c. [6]

√
(ii) The point P has position vector 2j + 4k. Show that the perpendicular distance from P to l is 5.
[5]

10
y

x
O
√
The diagram shows the curve y = x2 (1 − x2 ) for x ≥ 0 and its maximum point M .

(i) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Show, by means of the substitution x = sin θ , that the area A of the shaded region between the
curve and the x-axis is given by
1
π
A= ã [3]
2
1
4
sin2 2θ dθ .
0

(iii) Hence obtain the exact value of A. [4]

0.0 Year 2009 1715

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2009 question paper

for the guidance of teachers

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2009 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1716 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1717
Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1718 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

1 State or imply 2 + e–x = e2 B1

Carry out method for finding ± x from e±x = k , where k > 0, following sound ln
or exp work M1
Obtain x = – ln(e2 – 2) , or equivalent expression for x A1
Obtain answer x = –1.68 A1 4
[The answer must be given to 2 decimal places]
[SR: the M1 is available for attempts starting with 2 + e–x = 102]

2 (i) State or imply 3 of the 4 ordinates 1, 1.069389..., 1.290994..., 1.732050... B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 121 π and four ordinates M1
Obtain answer 0.98 with no errors seen A1 3
[Accept h = 0.26 but not h = 15 when awarding the M1]
[SR: if only 53 and/or 3 are given, and decimals are not seen, the B1 is available]
[SR: solutions with 2 or 4 intervals can score only the M1 for a correct expression]

(ii) Justify statement that the second estimate would be less than E B1 1

3 (i) Use cot A = 1/tan A or cos A/sin A and/or cosec A = 1/sin A on at least two terms M1
Use a correct double angle formula or the sin(A – B) formula at least once M1
Obtain given result A1 3

(ii) Solve cot θ = 2 for θ and obtain answer 26.6° B1

Obtain answer 206.6° and no others in the given range B1 √ 2
[Ignore answers outside the given range. Treat answers given in radians as a misread]

4 (i) Compare signs of x3 – 2x – 2 when x = 1 and x = 2, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument with correct calculations A1 2

(ii) State or imply the equation x = (2x3 + 2) / (3x2 – 2) B1

Rearrange this in the form x 3 – 2x – 2 = 0, or work vice versa B1 2

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once with xn > 0 M1
Obtain final answer 1.77 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p.,
or show there is a sign change
In the interval (1.765, 1.775) A1 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1719
Page 5 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

2
5 (i) State correct first two terms of the expansion of (1 + ax ) 3 , i.e. 1 + 23 ax B1
2
Form an expression for the coefficient of x in the expansion of (1 + 2 x )(1 + ax ) 3

and equate it to zero M1

Obtain a = –3 A1 3

2
(ii) Obtain correct unsimplified terms in x2 and x3 in the expansion of (1 − 3 x ) 3
2
or (1 + ax ) 3 B1√ + B1 √
Carry out multiplication by 1 + 2x obtaining two terms in x3 M1
3
Obtain final answer − 103 x , or equivalent A1 4
2
[Symbolic binomial coefficients, e.g.  3  , are not acceptable for the B marks in (i) or (ii)]
1

dx 2 dy 2
6 (i) EITHER State = −3a cos t sin t or = 3a sin t cos t , or equivalent B1
dt dt
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
1 1 2 2
2 − 2 −
OR State 3
x 3 dx or 3
y 3 dy as differentials of x 3 or y 3 respectively,
or equivalent B1
dy
Obtain in terms of t, having taken the differential of a constant to be zero M1
dx

dy
Obtain in any correct form A1 3
dx

(ii) Form the equation of the tangent M1

Obtain the equation in any correct form A1
Obtain the given answer A1 3

(iii) State the x-coordinate of X or the y-coordinate of Y in any correct form B1

Obtain the given answer with no errors seen B1 2

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1720 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

7 (i) Use quadratic formula, or completing the square, or the substitution z = x + iy

to find a root, using i2 = –1 M1
Obtain a root, e.g. 1 – 3i A1
Obtain the other root, e.g. –1 – 3i A1 3

(ii) Represent both roots on an Argand diagram in relatively correct positions B1 √ 1

(iii) State modulus of both roots is 2 B1 √

State argument of 1 – 3i is –60° (or 300°, − 13 π , − 53 π ) B1 √
State argument of –1 – 3i is –120° (or 240°, − 23 π , − 43 π ) B1 √ 3

(iv) Give a complete justification of the statement B1 1

[The A marks in (i) are for the final versions of the roots. Allow (±2 – 2 3i )/2
as final answer. The remaining marks are only available for roots such that xy ≠ 0.]
[Treat answers to (iii) in polar form as a misread]

A B C
8 (i) State or imply the form + 2 + B1
x x 10 − x
Use any relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain one of the values A = 1, B = 10, C = 1 A1
Obtain the remaining two values A1 4
Dx + E C
[The form 2
+ is acceptable and leads to D = 1, E = 10, C = 1]
x 10 −x

(ii) Separate variables and attempt integration of both sides M1

Obtain terms ln x, –10/x, –ln (10 – x), or equivalent A1√ + A1√ + A1 √
Evaluate a constant or use limits x = 1, t = 0 with a solution containing
3 of the terms kln x, l/x, mln (10 –x) and t, or equivalent M1
 9 x  10
Obtain any correct expression for t, e.g. t = ln  − + 10 A1 6
 10 − x  x
adx
[A separation of the form 2 = bdt is essential for the M1. The f.t. is on A, B, C]
x (10 − x)
[If A or B (D or E) omitted from the form of fractions, give B0M1A0A0 in (i);
M1A1√ A1√M1A0 in (ii)]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2009 1721
Page 7 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

9 (i) EITHER Substitute coordinates of general point of l in equation of plane and

equate constant terms, obtaining an equation in b and c M1 *
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 8 + 2b – c = 1 A1
Equate the coefficient of t to zero, obtaining an equation in b and c M1 *
Obtain a correct equation, e.g. 4 – b – 2c = 0 A1

OR Substitute (4, 2, –1) in the plane equation M1 *

Obtain a correct equation in b and c, e.g. 2b – c = –7 A1
EITHER Find a second point on l and obtain an equation in b and c M1 *
Obtain a correct equation in b and c, e.g. b + 2c = 4 A1
OR Calculate scalar product of a direction vector for l and
a vector normal for the plane and equate to zero M1 *
Obtain a correct equation for b and c A1
Solve for b or for c M1(dep*)
Obtain b = –2 and c = 3 A1 6

(ii) EITHER Find PQ for a point Q on l with parameter t, e.g. 4i – 5k + t(2i – j – 2k) B1
Calculate scalar product of PQ and a direction vector for l and
equate to zero M1
Solve and obtain t = –2 A1
Carry out a complete method for finding the length of PQ M1
Obtain the given answer 5 correctly A1

OR 1 Calling (4, 2, –1) A, state AP (or PA ) in component form, e.g. 4i – 5k B1

Calculate vector product of AP and a direction vector for l,
e.g. (4i – 5k) × (2i – j – 2k) M1
Obtain correct answer, e.g. –5i – 2j – 4k A1
Divide modulus of the product by that of the direction vector M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1

OR 2 State AP (or PA ) in component form B1

Use a scalar product to find the projection of AP (or PA ) on l M1
18
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. A1
9
Use Pythagoras to find the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1

OR 3 State AP (or PA ) in component form B1

Use a scalar product to find the cosine of PAQ M1
18
Obtain correct answer in any form, e.g. A1
41 ⋅ 9
Use trig to find the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1722 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 8 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9709 03

OR 4 State AP (or PA ) in component form B1

Find a second point B on l and use the cosine rule in triangle APB
to find the cosine of A, B or P, or use a vector product to find the area
of APB M1
Obtain correct answer in any form A1
Use trig or area formula to find the perpendicular M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1

OR 5 Find PQ for a point Q on l with parameter t, e.g. 4i – 5k + t(2i –j – 2k) B1

Use correct method to express PQ2 (or PQ) in terms of t M1
Obtain a correct expression in any form, e.g. (4 + 2t)2 + (–t)2 + (–5 – 2t)2 A1
Carry out a complete method for finding its minimum M1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 5

10 (i) EITHER Use product and chain rule M1

Obtain correct derivative in any form A1
OR Square and differentiate LHS by chain rule and RHS by product rule
or as powers M1
Obtain correct result in any form A1
dy
Set equal to zero and make reasonable attempt to solve for x ≠ 0 M1
dx
Obtain answer x = 23 , or exact equivalent, correctly A1 4

dx
(ii) State or imply dx = cos θ d θ or = cos θ B1
dθ
Substitute for x and dx throughout the integral ∫ ydx M1
Obtain the given form correctly with no errors seen A1 3

(iii) Attempt integration and reach indefinite integral of the form a θ + bsin 4 θ ,
where ab ≠ 0 M1*
Obtain indefinite integral 18 θ − 321 sin 4θ , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits correctly M1(dep*)
Obtain exact answer 161 π A1 4
[Working to carry out the change of limits is needed for the A mark in (ii) but,
if omitted, can be earned retrospectively if it is seen in part (iii)]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1723

Year 2008

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Solve the equation

ln(x + 2) = 2 + ln x,
giving your answer correct to 3 decimal places. [3]

√
2 Expand (1 + x) (1 − 2x) in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

ex
3 The curve y = , for − 12 π < x < 12 π , has one stationary point. Find the x-coordinate of this point.
cos x
[5]

4 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = a(2θ − sin 2θ ), y = a(1 − cos 2θ ).

dy
Show that = cot θ . [5]
dx

5 The polynomial 4x3 − 4x2 + 3x + a, where a is a constant, is denoted by p(x). It is given that p(x) is
divisible by 2x2 − 3x + 3.

(i) Find the value of a. [3]

(ii) When a has this value, solve the inequality p(x) < 0, justifying your answer. [3]

6 (i) Express 5 sin x + 12 cos x in the form R sin(x + α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ , giving the
value of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

5 sin 2θ + 12 cos 2θ = 11,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < θ < 180◦ . [5]

7 Two planes have equations 2x − y − 3 = 7 and x + 2y + 2 = 0.

(i) Find the acute angle between the planes. [4]

(ii) Find a vector equation for their line of intersection. [6]

An underground storage tank is being filled with liquid as shown in the diagram. Initially the tank is
empty. At time t hours after filling begins, the volume of liquid is V m3 and the depth of liquid is h m.
It is given that V = 43 h3 .

The liquid is poured in at a rate of 20 m3 per hour, but owing to leakage, liquid is lost at a rate
dh
proportional to h2 . When h = 1, = 4.95.
dt

(i) Show that h satisfies the differential equation

dh 5 1
= 2− . [4]
dt h 20

20h2 2000
(ii) Verify that ≡ −20 + . [1]
100 − h2 (10 − h)(10 + h)

(iii) Hence solve the differential equation in part (i), obtaining an expression for t in terms of h. [5]

a 1
x
9 The constant a is such that x e 2 dx = 6.
0

(i) Show that a satisfies the equation

− 12 x
x=2+e . [5]

(ii) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that this equation has only one root. [2]

(iii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 2 and 2.5. [2]

(iv) Use an iterative formula based on the equation in part (i) to calculate the value of a correct to
2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

4
√
1 3
10 The complex number w is given by w = − + i .
2 2

(i) Find the modulus and argument of w. [2]

(ii) The complex number has modulus R and argument θ , where − 13 π < θ < 13 π . State the modulus

and argument of w and the modulus and argument of . [4]
w

(iii) Hence explain why, in an Argand diagram, the points representing , w and are the vertices
w
of an equilateral triangle. [2]

(iv) In an Argand diagram, the vertices of an equilateral triangle lie on a circle with centre at the
origin. One of the vertices represents the complex number 4 + 2i. Find the complex numbers
represented by the other two vertices. Give your answers in the form x + iy, where x and y are
real and exact. [4]

0.0 Year 2008 1727

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2008 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.

All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2008 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1728 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above,
an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from
taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1729
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1730 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

1 Use laws of logarithms and remove logarithms correctly M1

Obtain x + 2 = e 2 x , or equivalent A1
Obtain answer x = 0.313 A1 [3]
[SR: If the logarithmic work is to base 10 then only the M mark is available.]

2 EITHER: State correct unsimplified first two terms of the expansion of (1 − 2 x) , e.g. 1 + 12 (−2 x) B1
2
2
State correct unsimplified term in x , e.g. 1
2 .( − 1).(−2 x) / 2!
1
2 B1
2
Obtain sufficient terms of the product of (1 + x) and the expansion up to the term in x
of (1 − 2 x) M1
3 2
Obtain final answer 1 − x2
A1
 12 
[The B marks are not earned by versions with symbolic binomial coefficients such as   .]  
1
[SR: An attempt to rewrite (1 + x) (1 − 2 x) as (1 − 3x 2 ) earns M1 A1 and the subsequent
expansion 1 − 32 x 2 gets M1 A1.]

OR: Differentiate expression and evaluate f(0) and f ′(0), having used the product rule M1
Obtain f(0) = 1 and f ′(0) = 0 correctly A1
Obtain f ′′(0) = −3 correctly A1
Obtain final answer 1 − 32 x 2 , with no errors seen A1 [4]

3 Use correct quotient or product rule M1

e x cos x + e x sin x
Obtain correctly the derivative in any form, e.g. A1
cos 2 x
Equate derivative to zero and reach tan x = k M1*
Solve for x M1(dep*)
Obtain x = − 14 π (or −0.785) only (accept x in [−0.79, −0.78] but not in degrees) A1 [5]
[The last three marks are independent. Fallacious log work forfeits the M1*. For the M1(dep*) the
solution can lie outside the given range and be in degrees, but the mark is not available if k = 0. The final
A1 is only given for an entirely correct answer to the whole question.]

dx dy
4 State or imply = a (2 − 2 cos 2θ ) or = 2a sin 2θ B1
dθ dθ
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dθ dθ
dy sin 2θ
Obtain = , or equivalent A1
dx (1 − cos 2θ )
Make use of correct sin 2A and cos 2A formulae M1
Obtain the given result following sufficient working A1 [5]
[SR: An attempt which assumes a is the parameter and θ a constant can only earn the two M marks. One
that assumes θ is the parameter and a is a function of θ can earn B1M1A0M1A0.]
[SR: For an attempt that gives a a value, e.g. 1, or ignores a, give B0 but allow the remaining marks.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1731
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

5 (i) EITHER: Attempt division by 2 x 2 − 3x + 3 and state partial quotient 2x B1

Complete division and form an equation for a M1
Obtain a = 3 A1

OR1: By inspection or using an unknown factor bx + c, obtain b = 2 B1

Complete the factorisation and obtain a M1
Obtain a = 3 A1

OR2: Find a complex root of 2 x 2 − 3 x + 3 = 0 and substitute it in p(x) M1

Equate a correct expression to zero A1
Obtain a = 3 A1

OR3: Use 2 x 2 ≡ 3x − 3 in p(x) at least once B1

Reduce the expression to the form a + c = 0, or equivalent M1
Obtain a = 3 A1 [3]

(ii) State answer x < − 12 only B1

2
Carry out a complete method for showing 2 x − 3x + 3 is never zero M1
Complete the justification of the answer by showing that 2 x 2 − 3x + 3 > 0 for all x A1 [3]
[These last two marks are independent of the B mark, so B0M1A1 is possible. Alternative methods
include (a) Complete the square M1 and use a correct completion to justify the answer A1; (b) Draw
a recognizable graph of y = 2 x 2 + 3x − 3 or p(x) M1 and use a correct graph to justify the answer A1;
(c) Find the x-coordinate of the stationary point of y = 2 x 2 + 3x − 3 and either find its y-coordinate or
determine its nature M1, then use minimum point with correct coordinates to justify the answer A1.]
[Do not accept ≤ for < ]

6 (i) State or imply at any stage answer R = 13 B1

Use trig formula to find α M1
Obtain α = 67.38° with no errors seen A1 [3]
[Do not allow radians in this part. If the only trig error is a sign error in sin(x + α) give M1A0.]

 11 
(ii) Evaluate sin −1   correctly to at least 1 d.p (57.79577…°) B1√
 13 
Carry out an appropriate method to find a value of 2θ in 0° < 2θ < 360° M1
Obtain an answer for θ in the given range, e.g. θ = 27.4° A1
Use an appropriate method to find another value of 2θ in the above range M1
Obtain second angle, e.g. θ = 175.2° and no others in the given range A1 [5]
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[Treat answers in radians as a misread and deduct A1 from the answers for the angles.]
[SR: The use of correct trig formulae to obtain a 3-term quadratic in tan θ, sin 2θ, cos 2θ, or tan 2θ
earns M1; then A1 for a correct quadratic, M1 for obtaining a value of θ in the given range, and A1 + A1
for the two correct answers (candidates who square must reject the spurious roots to get the final A1).]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1732 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

7 (i) State or imply a correct normal vector to either plane, e.g. 2i –j –3k , or i + 2j +2k B1
Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of the two normals M1
Using the correct process for the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the moduli
and evaluate the inverse cosine of the result M1
Obtain answer 57.7° (or 1.01 radians) A1 [4]

(ii) EITHER: Carry out a complete method for finding a point on the line M1
Obtain such a point, e.g. (2, 0, −1) A1
EITHER: State two correct equations for a direction vector of the line, e.g. 2a –b –3c = 0
and a + 2b + 2c = 0 B1
Solve for one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 4 : −7 : 5, or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2i – k + λ(4i – 7j + 5k) A1√

OR: Obtain a second point on the line, e.g. (0, 72 , - 72 ) A1

Subtract position vectors to obtain a direction vector M1
Obtain 4i – 7j + 5k , or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2i – k + λ(4i – 7j + 5k) A1√

OR: Attempt to calculate the vector product of two normals M1

Obtain two correct components A1
Obtain 4i – 7j + 5k, or equivalent A1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 2i – k + λ(4i – 7j + 5k) A1√

OR1: Express one variable in terms of a second M1

14 − 4 y
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = A1
7
Express the first variable in terms of a third M1

14 + 4 z
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. x = A1
5
Form a vector equation for the line M1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 72 j − 72 k + λ (i − 74 j + 54 k ) , or equivalent A1√

OR2: Express one variable in terms of a second M1

14 − 7 x
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. y = A1
4
Express the third variable in terms of the second M1
5 x − 14
Obtain a correct simplified expression, e.g. z = A1
4
Form a vector equation for the line M1
State a correct answer, e.g. r = 72 j − 72 k + λ (i − 74 j + 54 k ) , or equivalent A1√ [6]
[The f.t. is dependent on all M marks having been obtained.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1733
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

dV dh dV
8 (i) State or obtain = 4h 2 , or = 4h 2 , or equivalent B1
dt dt dh
dV
State or imply = 20 − kh 2 B1
dt
Use the given values to evaluate k M1
Show that k = 0.2, or equivalent, and obtain the given equation A1 [4]
[The M1 is dependent on at least one B mark having been earned.]

(ii) Fully justify the given identity B1 [1]

(iii) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of both sides M1

Obtain terms –20h and t, or equivalent A1
 10 + h 
Obtain terms aln(10 + h) + bln(10 – h), where ab ≠ 0, or k ln  M1
 10 − h 
Obtain correct terms, i.e. with a = 100 and b = −100, or k = 2000/20, or equivalent A1
Evaluate a constant and obtain a correct expression for t in terms of h A1 [5]

1 1
x x
9 (i) Integrate by parts and reach kxe 2 − k e 2 dx ∫ M1
1 1
x x
Obtain 2 xe 2
∫
−2 e 2
dx A1
1 1
x x
Complete the integration, obtaining 2 xe 2 − 4e 2 , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits correctly and equate result to 6, having integrated twice M1
− 12 a
Rearrange and obtain a = e +2 A1 [5]

−1 x
(ii) Make recognizable sketch of a relevant exponential graph, e.g. y = e 2 + 2 B1
Sketch a second relevant straight line graph, e.g. y = x, or curve, and indicate the root B1 [2]

−1 x
(iii) Consider sign of x − e 2 − 2 at x = 2 and x = 2.5, or equivalent M1
Justify the given statement with correct calculations and argument A1 [2]

−1 x
(iv) Use the iterative formula x n +1 = 2 + e 2 n correctly at least once, with 2 ≤ x n ≤ 2.5 M1
Obtain final answer 2.31 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign
change in the interval (2.305, 2.315) A1 [3]

10 (i) State that the modulus of w is 1 B1

State that the argument of w is 23 π or 120° (accept 2.09, or 2.1) B1 [2]

(ii) State that the modulus of wz is R B1√

State that the argument of wz is θ + 23 π B1√
State that the modulus of z/w is R B1√
State that the argument of z/w is θ − 23 π B1√ [4]

(iii) State or imply the points are equidistant from the origin B1
State or imply that two pairs of points subtend 23 π at the origin, or that all three pairs subtend
equal angles at the origin B1 [2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1734 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2008 9709 03

(iv) Multiply 4 + 2i by w and use i 2 = −1 M1

Obtain − ( 2 + 3 ) + ( 2 3 − 1)i , or exact equivalent A1
Divide 4 + 2i by w, multiplying numerator and denominator by the conjugate of w, or equivalent M1
Obtain − ( 2 − 3 ) − ( 2 3 + 1)i , or exact equivalent A1 [4]
[Use of polar form of 4 + 2i can earn M marks and then A marks for obtaining exact x + iy answers.]
[SR: If answers only seen in polar form, allow B1+B1 in (i), B1√ + B1√ in (ii), but A0 + A0 in (iv).]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality | x − 2| > 3|2x + 1|. [4]

2 Solve, correct to 3 significant figures, the equation

ex + e2x = e3x . [5]

3
D N C

a r

x M
A 3a B

In the diagram, ABCD is a rectangle with AB = 3a and AD = a. A circular arc, with centre A and
radius r, joins points M and N on AB and CD respectively. The angle MAN is x radians. The
perimeter of the sector AMN is equal to half the perimeter of the rectangle.

(i) Show that x satisfies the equation

sin x = 14 (2 + x). [3]

(ii) This equation has only one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . Use the iterative formula

2 + xn
xn+1 = sin−1 ,
4
with initial value x1 = 0.8, to determine the root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of
each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

4 (i) Show that the equation tan(30◦ + θ ) = 2 tan(60◦ − θ ) can be written in the form
√
tan2 θ + (6 3) tan θ − 5 = 0. [4]

(ii) Hence, or otherwise, solve the equation

tan(30◦ + θ ) = 2 tan(60◦ − θ ),

for 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 180◦ . [3]

5 The variable complex number is given by

= 2 cos θ + i(1 − 2 sin θ ),

where θ takes all values in the interval −π < θ ≤ π .

(i) Show that | − i| = 2, for all values of θ . Hence sketch, in an Argand diagram, the locus of the
point representing . [3]

1
(ii) Prove that the real part of is constant for −π < θ < π . [4]
+2−i

6 The equation of a curve is xy(x + y) = 2a3 , where a is a non-zero constant. Show that there is only
one point on the curve at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis, and find the coordinates of this
point. [8]

x2 + 3x + 3
7 Let f(x) ≡ .
(x + 1)(x + 3)

(i) Express f(x) in partial fractions. [5]

3
(ii) Hence show that f(x) dx = 3 − 12 ln 2. [4]
0

8
y

x
O T N 1
2p

In the diagram the tangent to a curve at a general point P with coordinates (x, y) meets the x-axis at T .
The point N on the x-axis is such that PN is perpendicular to the x-axis. The curve is such that, for all
values of x in the interval 0 < x < 12 π , the area of triangle PTN is equal to tan x, where x is in radians.

PN
(i) Using the fact that the gradient of the curve at P is , show that
TN
dy 1 2
= y cot x. [3]
dx 2

(ii) Given that y = 2 when x = 16 π , solve this differential equation to find the equation of the curve,
expressing y in terms of x. [6]

9
y

x
O

−1x √
The diagram shows the curve y = e 2 (1 + 2x) and its maximum point M . The shaded region between
the curve and the axes is denoted by R.

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Find by integration the volume of the solid obtained when R is rotated completely about the
x-axis. Give your answer in terms of π and e. [6]

10 The points A and B have position vectors, relative to the origin O, given by
−−→ −−→
OA = i + 2j + 3k and OB = 2i + j + 3k.

The line l has vector equation

r = (1 − 2t)i + (5 + t)j + (2 − t)k.

(i) Show that l does not intersect the line passing through A and B. [4]

(ii) The point P lies on l and is such that angle PAB is equal to 60◦ . Given that the position vector
of P is (1 − 2t)i + (5 + t)j + (2 − t)k, show that 3t2 + 7t + 2 = 0. Hence find the only possible
position vector of P. [6]

1738 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2008 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2008 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1739

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the
formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M
mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1740 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

question or part question are genuinely misread and the object and
difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks
then become "follow through √" marks. MR is not applied when the
candidate misreads his own figures - this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed
at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1741
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2008 9709 03

EITHER State or imply non-modular inequality ( x − 2 ) > (3(2 x + 1)) , or

2 2
1
corresponding quadratic equation, or pair of linear equations
(x − 2) = ±3(2 x + 1) B1
Make reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two linear
equations M1
Obtain critical values x = −1 and x = − 17 A1
1
State answer − 1 < x < − 7 A1
OR Obtain the critical value x = −1 from a graphical method, or by inspection, or
by solving a linear equation or inequality B1
1
Obtain the critical value x = − 7 similarly B2
1
State answer − 1 < x < − 7 B1 [4]
5 1
[Do not condone ≤ for <; accept − 35
and − 0.14 for − .]
7

2 EITHER State or imply e x + 1 = e 2 x , or 1 + e − x = e x , or equivalent B1

Solve this equation as a quadratic in u = e x , or in e x , obtaining one or two
roots M1
1
( )
Obtain root 2 1 + 5 , or decimal in [1.61, 1.62] A1
Use correct method for finding x from a positive root M1
Obtain x = 0.481 and no other answer A1
[For the solution 0.481 with no working, award B3 (for 0.48 give B2).
However a suitable statement can earn the first B1 in addition, giving a
maximum of 4/5 (or 3/5) in such cases.]
OR
1
(
State an appropriate iterative formula, e.g. x n +1 = 2 ln 1 + e xn or)
1
(
x n +1 = ln e xn + e 2 xn
3
) B1
Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1
Obtain final answer 0.481 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 3 d.p., or show there is a
sign change in the value of a relevant function in the interval (0.4805, 0.4815) A1
Show that the equation has no other root A1 [5]

3 (i) State or imply r = a cosec x, or equivalent B1

Using perimeters, obtain a correct equation in x, e.g. 2a cosec x + ax cosec x = 4a,
or 2r + rx = 4a B1
Deduce the given form of equation correctly B1 [3]

(ii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.76 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show that there
is a sign change in the value of sin x − 4 (2 + x ) in the interval (0.755, 0.765)
1
A1 [3]

4 (i) Use tan(A ± B) formula correctly at least once to obtain an equation in tan θ M1
Obtain a correct horizontal equation in any form A1
Use correct exact values of tan 30° and tan 60° throughout M1
Obtain the given equation correctly A1 [4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1742 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2008 9709 03

(ii) Make reasonable attempt to solve the given quadratic in tan θ M1

Obtain answer θ = 24.7° A1
Obtain answer θ = 95.3° and no others in the given range A1 [3]
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[Treat answers in radians as MR and deduct one mark from the marks for the
angles.]

5 (i) Find modulus of 2cosθ − 2isinθ and show it is equal to 2 B1

Show a circle with centre at the point representing i B1
Show a circle with radius 2 B1 [3]

(ii) Substitute for z and multiply numerator and denominator by the conjugate of
z + 2 – i, or equivalent M1
Obtain correct real denominator in any form A1
Identify and obtain correct unsimplified real part in terms of cosθ,
e.g. (2cosθ + 2)/(8cosθ + 8) A1
1 A1 [4]
State that real part equals
4

dy
6 EITHER State x 2 + 2 xy , or equivalent, as derivative of x2y B1
dx
dy
State y 2 + 2 xy , or equivalent, as derivative of xy2 B1
dx
dy
OR State xy (1 + ) , or equivalent, as a term in an attempt to apply the product
dx
rule B1
dy
State ( y + x )( x + y ) , or equivalent, in an attempt to apply the product rule B1
dx
dy
Equate attempted derivative of LHS to zero and set equal to zero M1
dx
Obtain a horizontal equation, e.g. y2 = –2xy, or y = −2x, or equivalent A1√
Explicitly reject y = 0 as a possibility A1
Obtain an equation in x (or in y) M1
Obtain x = a A1
Obtain y = −2a only A1 [8]
[The first M1 is dependent on at least one B mark having been earned.]
[SR: for an attempt using (x + y) = 2a3 / xy, the B marks are given for the
correct derivatives of the two sides of the equation, and the M1 for setting
dy
equal to zero.]
dx
[SR: for an attempt which begins by expressing y in terms of x, give M1A1
dy
for a reasonable attempt at differentiation, M1A1√ for setting equal to
dx
zero and obtaining an equation free of surds, A1 for solving and obtaining
x = a; then M1 for obtaining an equation for y, A1 for y = −2a and A1 for
finding and rejecting y = a as a possibility.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2008 1743
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2008 9709 03

B C
7 (i) State or imply the form A + + B1
x +1 x + 3
State or obtain A = 1 B1
Use correct method for finding B or C M1
Obtain B = 1 A1
2

Obtain C = − 32 A1 [5]

(ii) Obtain integral x + 2 ln ( x + 1) − 2 ln ( x + 3)

1 3
B2√
[Award B1√ if only one error. The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
Substitute limits correctly M1
Obtain given answer following full and exact working A1 [4]
[SR: if A omitted, only M1 in part (i) is available, then in part (ii) B1√ for each
correct integral and M1.]

y dy
8 (i) State = , or equivalent B1
TN dx
dy
Express area of PTN in terms of y and , and equate to tan x M1
dx
Obtain given relation correctly A1 [3]

(ii) Separate variables correctly B1

2
Integrate and obtain term − , or equivalent B1
y
Integrate and obtain term ln(sin x), or equivalent B1
1
Evaluate a constant or use limits y = 2, x = 6 π in a solution containing a term of the
form a/y or bln(sin x) M1
2
Obtain correct solution in any form, e.g. − = ln (2 sin x ) − 1 A1
y
Rearrange as y = 2 / (1 − ln (2 sin x )) , or equivalent A1 [6]
[Allow decimals, e.g. as in a solution y = 2 / (0.3 − ln (sin x )) .]

9 (i) Either use correct product or quotient rule, or square both sides, use correct product
rule and make a reasonable attempt at applying the chain rule M1
Obtain correct result of differentiation in any form A1
Set derivative equal to zero and solve for x M1
1
Obtain x = 2 only, correctly A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply the indefinite integral for the volume is π e − x (1 + 2 x )dx
∫ B1

Integrate by parts and reach ± e − x (1 + 2 x ) ± 2e − x dx

∫ M1

Obtain − e − x (1 + 2 x ) + 2e − x dx , or equivalent
∫ A1
Complete integration correctly, obtaining − e − x (1 + 2 x ) − 2e − x , or equivalent A1
1
Use limits x = − 2
and x = 0 correctly, having integrated twice M1
( )
Obtain exact answer π 2 e − 3 , or equivalent A1 [6]
[If π omitted initially or 2π or π/2 used, give B0 and then follow through.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1744 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2008 9709 03

10 (i) State a vector equation for the line through A and B, e.g. r = i + 2j + 3k + s(i − j) B1
Equate at least two pairs of components of general points on AB and l, and solve for
s or for t M1
Obtain correct answer for s or t, e.g. s = −6, 2, −2 when t = 3, −1, −1 respectively A1
Verify that all three component equations are not satisfied A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply a direction vector for AP has components (−2t, 3 + t, −1−t), or
equivalent B1
AP. AB
State or imply cos 60° equals M1*
AP . AB
Carry out correct processes for expanding the scalar product and expressing the
product of the moduli in terms of t, in order to obtain an equation in t in any form M1(dep*)
Obtain the given equation 3t 2 + 7t + 2 = 0 correctly A1
Solve the quadratic and use a root to find a position vector for P M1
1
Obtain position vector 5i + 3j + 4k from t = −2, having rejected the root t = − 3 for
a valid reason A1 [6]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2007 1745

Year 2007

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

2
k
1
1 Find the exact value of the constant k for which dx = 1. [4]
2x − 1
1

2 The polynomial x4 + 3x2 + a, where a is a constant, is denoted by p(x). It is given that x2 + x + 2 is a

factor of p(x). Find the value of a and the other quadratic factor of p(x). [4]

3 Use integration by parts to show that

4
ln x dx = 6 ln 2 − 2. [4]
2

4 The curve with equation y = e−x sin x has one stationary point for which 0 ≤ x ≤ π .

(i) Find the x-coordinate of this point. [4]

(ii) Determine whether this point is a maximum or a minimum point. [2]

5 (i) Show that the equation

tan(45◦ + x) − tan x = 2
can be written in the form
tan2 x + 2 tan x − 1 = 0. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

tan(45◦ + x) − tan x = 2,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ x ≤ 180◦ . [4]

6 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

2 − x = ln x

has only one root. [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 1.4 and 1.7. [2]

(iii) Show that this root also satisfies the equation

x = 13 (4 + x − 2 ln x). [1]

(iv) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = 13 (4 + xn − 2 ln xn ),
with initial value x1 = 1.5, to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of
each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

7 The number of insects in a population t days after the start of observations is denoted by N . The
variation in the number of insects is modelled by a differential equation of the form
dN
= kN cos(0.02t),
dt
where k is a constant and N is taken to be a continuous variable. It is given that N = 125 when t = 0.

(i) Solve the differential equation, obtaining a relation between N , k and t. [5]

(ii) Given also that N = 166 when t = 30, find the value of k. [2]

(iii) Obtain an expression for N in terms of t, and find the least value of N predicted by this model.
[3]

4 − 3i
8 (a) The complex number is given by = .
1 − 2i
(i) Express in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [2]
(ii) Find the modulus and argument of . [2]

(b) Find the two square roots of the complex number 5 − 12i, giving your answers in the form x + iy,
where x and y are real. [6]

2 − x + 8x2
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(1 − x)(1 + 2x)(2 + x)

2 − x + 8x2
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including
(1 − x)(1 + 2x)(2 + x)
the term in x2 . [5]

10 The straight line l has equation r = i + 6j − 3k + s(i − 2j + 2k). The plane p has equation
(r − 3i) . (2i − 3j + 6k) = 0. The line l intersects the plane p at the point A.

(i) Find the position vector of A. [3]

(ii) Find the acute angle between l and p. [4]

(iii) Find a vector equation for the line which lies in p, passes through A and is perpendicular to l.
[5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/03/O/N/07
0.0 Year 2007 1749

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2007 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2007 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1750 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2007 9709 03

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above,
an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from
taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2007 1751
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2007 9709 03

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1752 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2007 9709 03

1 Obtain indefinite integral of the form aln(2x –1), where a = 12 , 1, or 2 M1

1
Use limits and obtain equation 2
ln (2k − 1) = 1 A1
1
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form aln(2k –1) = 1, where a = , 1, or 2, for k
2
M1
1 2
Obtain answer k = (e + 1) , or exact equivalent
2
A1 [4]

2 EITHER: Attempt division by x 2 + x + 2 reaching a partial quotient of x 2 + kx M1

Complete the division and obtain quotient x 2 − x + 2 A1
Equate constant remainder to zero and solve for a M1
Obtain answer a = 4 A1
OR: Calling the unknown factor x 2 + bx + c , obtain an equation in b and/or c, or state without
working two coefficients with the correct moduli M1
Obtain factor x 2 − x + 2 A1
Use a = 2c to find a M1
Obtain answer a = 4 A1 [4]

1
3 Using 1 and ln x as parts reach xln x ± x.∫ x
dx M1*

Obtain indefinite integral xln x –x A1

Substitute correct limits correctly M1(dep*)
Obtain given answer A1 [4]

4 (i) Use correct product or quotient rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = 14 π or 0.785 with no errors seen A1 [4]

(ii) Use an appropriate method for determining the nature of a stationary point M1
Show the point is a maximum point with no errors seen A1 [2]
[SR: for the answer 45° deduct final A1 in part (i), and deduct A1 in part (ii) if this value in degrees is
used in the exponential.]

5 (i) Use correct tan(A + B) formula to obtain an equation in tan x M1*

Use tan 45° = 1 M1(dep*)
Obtain the given answer A1 [3]

(ii) Make reasonable attempt to solve the given quadratic for one value of tan x M1
Obtain tan x = − 1± 2 , or equivalent in the form (a ± b ) / c (accept 0.4, −2.4) A1
Obtain answer x = 22.5° A1
Obtain second answer x = 112.5 and no others in the range A1 [4]
[Ignore answers outside the range.]
[Treat answers in radians as a MR and deduct one mark from the marks for the angles.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2007 1753
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2007 9709 03

6 (i) Make a recognisable sketch of an appropriate graph, e.g. y = ln x B1

Sketch an appropriate second graph, e.g. y = 2 –x, correctly and justify the given statement B1 [2]

(ii) Consider sign of 2 –x –ln x when x = 1.4 and x = 1.7, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument with correct calculations A1 [2]

(iii) Rearrange the equation x = 13 (4 + x − 2ln x) as 2 –x = ln x, or vice versa B1 [1]

(iv) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 1.56 A1
Show sufficient iterations to 4 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in
the interval (1.555, 1.565) A1 [3]

7 (i) Separate variables correctly and attempt integration of both sides M1*
Obtain term ln N, or equivalent A1
k
Obtain term sin(0.02t ) , or equivalent A1
0.02
Use t = 0, N = 125 to evaluate a constant, or as limits, in a solution containing terms of the form aln N
and bsin(0.02t), or equivalent M1
Obtain any correct form of solution, e.g. ln N = 50ksin(0.02t) + ln 125 A1 [5]

(ii) Substituting N = 166 and t = 30, evaluate k M1(dep*)

Obtain k = 0.0100479…(accept k = 0.01) A1 [2]

(iii) Rearrange and obtain N = 125exp(0.502sin(0.02t)), or equivalent B1

Set sin(0.02t) = −1 in the expression for N, or equivalent M1
Obtain least value 75.6 (accept answers in the interval [75, 76]) A1 [3]
[For the B1, accept 0.5 following k = 0.01, and allow 4.8 or better for ln 125.]

8 (a) (i) EITHER: Carry out multiplication of numerator and denominator by 1 + 2i, or equivalent M1
Obtain answer 2 + i, or any equivalent of the form (a + ib)/c A1
OR1: Obtain two equations in x and y, and solve for x or for y M1
Obtain answer 2 + i, or equivalent A1
OR2: Using the correct processes express z in polar form M1
Obtain answer 2 + i, or equivalent A1 [2]

(ii) State that the modulus of z is 5 or 2.24 B1

State that the argument of z is 0.464 or 26.6° B1 [2]

(b) EITHER: Square x + iy and equate real and imaginary parts to 5 and −12 respectively M1
Obtain x 2 − y 2 = 5 and 2xy = −12 A1
Eliminate one variable and obtain an equation in the other M1
Obtain x 4 − 5 x 2 − 36 = 0 or y 4 + 5 y 2 − 36 = 0 , or 3-term equivalent A1
Obtain answer 3 –2i A1
Obtain second answer –3 + 2i and no others A1
[SR: Allow a solution with 2xy = 12 to earn the second A1 and thus a maximum of 3/6.]
OR: Convert 5 –12i to polar form (R, θ) M1
Use the fact that a square root has the polar form ( R , 12 θ ) M1
Obtain one root in polar form, e.g. ( 13 , − 0.588) or ( 13 ,−33.7°) A1 + A1
Obtain answer 3 –2i A1
Obtain answer –3 + 2i and no others A1 [6]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1754 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2007 9709 03

A B C
9 (i) State or imply the form + + B1
1 − x 1 + 2x 2 + x
Use any relevant method to determine a constant M1
Obtain A = 1, B = 2 and C = −4 A1 + A1 + A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (1 − x) −1 , (1 + 2 x) −1 , (2 + x) −1 ,
or (1 + 12 x) −1 M1
2
Obtain complete unsimplified expansions up to x of each partial fraction A1√ + A1√ + A1√
Combine expansions and obtain answer 1 − 2 x + 172 x 2 A1 [5]
 − 1
[Binomial coefficients such as   are not sufficient for the M1. The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
2
[Apply this scheme to attempts to expand (2 − x + 8 x 2 )(1 − x) −1 (1 + 2 x) −1 (2 + x) −1 , giving M1A1A1A1
for the expansions, and A1 for the final answer.]
[Allow Maclaurin, giving M1A1√A1√ for f(0) = 1 and f ′(0) = −2, A1√ for f ″(0) = 17 and A1 for the
final answer (f.t. is on A, B,C).]

10 (i) Substitute for r and expand the given scalar product, or correct equivalent, to obtain an equation in s M1
Solve a linear equation formed from a scalar product for s M1
Obtain s = 2 and position vector 3i + 2j + k for A A1 [3]

(ii) State or imply a normal vector of p is 2i –3j + 6k, or equivalent B1

Use the correct process for evaluating a relevant scalar product, e.g. (i – 2j + 2k).(2i –3j + 6k) M1
Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the
moduli and evaluate the inverse sine or cosine of the result M1
Obtain final answer 72.2° or 1.26 radians A1 [4]

(iii) EITHER: Taking the direction vector of the line to be ai + bj + ck, state equation 2a –3b + 6c = 0 B1
State equation a –2b + 2c = 0 B1
Solve to find one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain ratio a : b : c = 6 : 2: −1, or equivalent A1
State answer r = 3i + 2j + k + λ(6i + 2j –k), or equivalent A1√
OR1: Attempt to calculate the vector product of a direction vector for the line l and a normal
vector of the plane p, e.g.(i –2j + 2k)×(2i –3j + 6k) M2
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain answer –6i –2j + k, or equivalent A1
State answer r = 3i + 2j + k + λ(−6i –2j + k), or equivalent A1√
OR2: Obtain the equation of the plane containing A and perpendicular to the line l M1
State answer x –2y + 2z = 1, or equivalent A1√
Find position vector of a second point B on the line of intersection of this plane with
the plane p, e.g. 9i + 4j M1
Obtain a direction vector for this line of intersection, e.g. 6i + 2j – k A1
State answer r = 3i + 2j + k + λ(6i + 2j – k), or equivalent A1 [5]
[The f.t. is on A.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Expand (2 + 3x)−2 in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

2 The polynomial x3 − 2x + a, where a is a constant, is denoted by p(x). It is given that (x + 2) is a

factor of p(x).
(i) Find the value of a. [2]
(ii) When a has this value, find the quadratic factor of p(x). [2]

3 The equation of a curve is y = x sin 2x, where x is in radians. Find the equation of the tangent to the
curve at the point where x = 14 π . [4]

4 Using the substitution u = 3x , or otherwise, solve, correct to 3 significant figures, the equation

3x = 2 + 3−x . [6]

√
5 (i) Express cos θ + ( 3) sin θ in the form R cos(θ − α ), where R > 0 and 0 < α < 12 π , giving the
exact values of R and α . [3]
1
2
π
1 1
(ii) Hence show that √ 2
dθ = √ . [4]
cos θ + ( 3) sin θ 3
0

The diagram shows a sector AOB of a circle with centre O and radius r . The angle AOB is α radians,
where 0 < α < π . The area of triangle AOB is half the area of the sector.

(i) Show that α satisfies the equation

x = 2 sin x. [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that α lies between 12 π and 23 π . [2]

(iii) Show that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

xn+1 = 13 xn + 4 sin xn

converges, then it converges to a root of the equation in part (i). [2]

(iv) Use this iterative formula, with initial value x1 = 1.8, to find α correct to 2 decimal places. Give
the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

3
4
1
7 Let I = √ dx.
x(4 − x)
1

2
√ 2
(i) Use the substitution u = x to show that I = du. [3]
u(4 − u)
1

(ii) Hence show that I = 12 ln 3. [6]

2
8 The complex number is denoted by u.
−1 + i

(i) Find the modulus and argument of u and u2 . [6]

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points representing the complex numbers u and u2 . Shade
the region whose points represent the complex numbers which satisfy both the inequalities || < 2
and − u2 < | − u |. [4]

The diagram shows a set of rectangular axes Ox, Oy and O, and three points A, B and C with position
2 1 1
−−→ −−→ −−→
vectors OA = 0 , OB = 2 and OC = 1 .
0 0 2

(i) Find the equation of the plane ABC, giving your answer in the form ax + by + c = d . [6]

(ii) Calculate the acute angle between the planes ABC and OAB. [4]

10 A model for the height, h metres, of a certain type of tree at time t years after being planted assumes
1
that, while the tree is growing, the rate of increase in height is proportional to (9 − h) 3 . It is given that,
dh
when t = 0, h = 1 and = 0.2.
dt

(i) Show that h and t satisfy the differential equation

dh 1
= 0.1(9 − h) 3 . [2]
dt

(ii) Solve this differential equation, and obtain an expression for h in terms of t. [7]

(iii) Find the maximum height of the tree and the time taken to reach this height after planting. [2]

(iv) Calculate the time taken to reach half the maximum height. [1]

1758 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2007 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2007 1759

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the
formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M
mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1760 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2007 1761
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2007 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1762 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2007 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2007 1763
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2007 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1764 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2007 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1765

Year 2006

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Find the set of values of x satisfying the inequality |3x − 8| < 0.5, giving 3 significant figures in your
answer. [4]

2 Solve the equation

tan x tan 2x = 1,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ < x < 180◦ . [4]

3 The curve with equation y = 6ex − e3x has one stationary point.

(i) Find the x-coordinate of this point. [4]

(ii) Determine whether this point is a maximum or a minimum point. [2]

4 Given that y = 2 when x = 0, solve the differential equation

dy
y = 1 + y2 ,
dx
obtaining an expression for y2 in terms of x. [6]

√ √ √ √
5 (i) Simplify (1 + x) + (1 − x) (1 + x) − (1 − x), showing your working, and deduce that
√ √
1 (1 + x) − (1 − x)
√ √ = . [2]
(1 + x) + (1 − x) 2x

(ii) Using this result, or otherwise, obtain the expansion of

1
√ √
(1 + x) + (1 − x)

in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 . [4]

6 The equation of a curve is x3 + 2y3 = 3xy.

dy y − x2
(i) Show that = 2 . [4]
dx 2y − x

(ii) Find the coordinates of the point, other than the origin, where the curve has a tangent which is
parallel to the x-axis. [5]

7 The line l has equation r = j + k + s(i − 2j + k). The plane p has equation x + 2y + 3 = 5.

(i) Show that the line l lies in the plane p. [3]

(ii) A second plane is perpendicular to the plane p, parallel to the line l and contains the point with
position vector 2i + j + 4k. Find the equation of this plane, giving your answer in the form
ax + by + c = d. [6]

7x + 4
8 Let f(x) = .
(2x + 1)(x + 1)2

(i) Express f(x) in partial fractions. [5]

2
(ii) Hence show that f(x) dx = 2 + ln 53 . [5]
0

9 The complex number u is given by

3+i
u= .
2−i

(i) Express u in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [3]

(ii) Find the modulus and argument of u. [2]

(iii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the point representing the complex number u. Show on the
same diagram the locus of the point representing the complex number such that | − u | = 1.
[3]

(iv) Using your diagram, calculate the least value of || for points on this locus. [2]

The diagram shows the curve y = x cos 2x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 14 π . The point M is a maximum point.

(i) Show that the x-coordinate of M satisfies the equation 1 = 2x tan 2x. [3]

1 1
(ii) The equation in part (i) can be rearranged in the form x = tan−1 . Use the iterative formula
2 2x
1
xn+1 = 1 tan−1 ,
2 2xn

with initial value x1 = 0.4, to calculate the x-coordinate of M correct to 2 decimal places. Give
the result of each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

(iii) Use integration by parts to find the exact area of the region enclosed between the curve and the
x-axis from 0 to 14 π . [5]

BLANK PAGE

9709/03/O/N/06
0.0 Year 2006 1769

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2006 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.

The grade thresholds for various grades are published in the report on the examination for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2006 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1770 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the
formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M
mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1771

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1772 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1773
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1774 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1775
Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1 Given that x = 43−y , express y in terms of x. [3]

2 Solve the inequality 2x > | x − 1|. [4]

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

x = 2θ + sin 2θ , y = 1 − cos 2θ .
dy
Show that = tan θ . [5]
dx

4 (i) Express 7 cos θ + 24 sin θ in the form R cos(θ − α ), where R > 0 and 0◦ < α < 90◦ , giving the
exact value of R and the value of α correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

7 cos θ + 24 sin θ = 15,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [4]

5 In a certain industrial process, a substance is being produced in a container. The mass of the substance
in the container t minutes after the start of the process is x grams. At any time, the rate of formation
of the substance is proportional to its mass. Also, throughout the process, the substance is removed
dx
from the container at a constant rate of 25 grams per minute. When t = 0, x = 1000 and = 75.
dt

(i) Show that x and t satisfy the differential equation

dx
= 0.1(x − 250). [2]
dt

(ii) Solve this differential equation, obtaining an expression for x in terms of t. [6]

6 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

2 cot x = 1 + ex ,

where x is in radians, has only one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify by calculation that this root lies between 0.5 and 1.0. [2]

(iii) Show that this root also satisfies the equation

2
x = tan−1 . [1]
1 + ex

(iv) Use the iterative formula

2
xn+1 = tan−1 ,
1 + exn
with initial value x1 = 0.7, to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of
each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

7 The complex number 2 + i is denoted by u. Its complex conjugate is denoted by u*.

(i) Show, on a sketch of an Argand diagram with origin O, the points A, B and C representing the
complex numbers u, u* and u + u* respectively. Describe in geometrical terms the relationship
between the four points O, A, B and C. [4]
u
(ii) Express in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [3]
u*
u
(iii) By considering the argument of , or otherwise, prove that
u*
tan−1 43 = 2 tan−1 12 . [2]

1
The diagram shows a sketch of the curve y = x 2 ln x and its minimum point M . The curve cuts the
x-axis at the point (1, 0).

(i) Find the exact value of the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Use integration by parts to find the area of the shaded region enclosed by the curve, the x-axis
and the line x = 4. Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [5]

10
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(2 − x)(1 + x2 )

10
(ii) Hence, given that | x | < 1, obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to
(2 − x)(1 + x2 )
and including the term in x3 , simplifying the coefficients. [5]

10 The points A and B have position vectors, relative to the origin O, given by
−1 3
−−→ −−→
OA = 3 and OB = −1 .
5 −4
The line l passes through A and is parallel to OB. The point N is the foot of the perpendicular from B
to l.

(i) State a vector equation for the line l. [1]

(ii) Find the position vector of N and show that BN = 3. [6]

(iii) Find the equation of the plane containing A, B and N , giving your answer in the form
ax + by + c = d. [5]

0.0 Year 2006 1779

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced/Advanced Subsidiary Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2006 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/03 Paper 3

Maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does
not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking
began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be
recorded in the published Report on the Examination.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.

The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.

• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2006 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1780 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the
formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M
mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1781

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1782 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1783
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1784 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2006 9709 03

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2006 1785
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2006 9709 03

(iii)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1786 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2005

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Given that a is a positive constant, solve the inequality

| x − 3a | > | x − a | . [4]

Two variable quantities x and y are related by the equation y = Axn , where A and n are constants.
The diagram shows the result of plotting ln y against ln x for four pairs of values of x and y. Use the
diagram to estimate the values of A and n. [5]

3 The equation of a curve is y = x + cos 2x. Find the x-coordinates of the stationary points of the curve
for which 0 ≤ x ≤ π , and determine the nature of each of these stationary points. [7]

4 The equation x3 − x − 3 = 0 has one real root, α .

(i) Show that α lies between 1 and 2. [2]

Two iterative formulae derived from this equation are as follows:

xn+1 = xn3 − 3, (A)

1
xn+1 = (xn + 3) 3 . (B)

Each formula is used with initial value x1 = 1.5.

(ii) Show that one of these formulae produces a sequence which fails to converge, and use the other
formula to calculate α correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of each iteration to 4 decimal
places. [5]

5 By expressing 8 sin θ − 6 cos θ in the form R sin(θ − α ), solve the equation

8 sin θ − 6 cos θ = 7,

for 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [7]

6 (i) Use the substitution x = sin2 θ to show that

x
dx = 2 sin2 θ dθ . [4]
1−x

(ii) Hence find the exact value of

1
4 x
dx. [4]
1−x
0

7 The equation 2x3 + x2 + 25 = 0 has one real root and two complex roots.

(i) Verify that 1 + 2i is one of the complex roots. [3]

(ii) Write down the other complex root of the equation. [1]

(iii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the point representing the complex number 1 + 2i. Show on
the same diagram the set of points representing the complex numbers which satisfy
|| = | − 1 − 2i| . [4]

8 In a certain chemical reaction the amount, x grams, of a substance present is decreasing. The rate of
decrease of x is proportional to the product of x and the time, t seconds, since the start of the reaction.
Thus x and t satisfy the differential equation
dx
= −kxt,
dt
where k is a positive constant. At the start of the reaction, when t = 0, x = 100.

(i) Solve this differential equation, obtaining a relation between x, k and t. [5]

(ii) 20 seconds after the start of the reaction the amount of substance present is 90 grams. Find the
time after the start of the reaction at which the amount of substance present is 50 grams. [3]

3x 2 + x
9 (i) Express in partial fractions. [5]
(x + 2)(x2 + 1)

3x2 + x
(ii) Hence obtain the expansion of in ascending powers of x, up to and including the
(x + 2)(x2 + 1)
term in x3 . [5]

10 The straight line l passes through the points A and B with position vectors
2i + 2j + k and i + 4j + 2k
respectively. This line intersects the plane p with equation x − 2y + 2 = 6 at the point C.

(i) Find the position vector of C. [4]

(ii) Find the acute angle between l and p. [4]

(iii) Show that the perpendicular distance from A to p is equal to 2. [3]

BLANK PAGE

Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced.
The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.

9709/03/O/N/05
1790 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Level and GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level

MARK SCHEME for the November 2005 question paper

9709, MATHEMATICS
8719, HIGHER MATHEMATICS

9709/03 and 8719/03 Paper 3 maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the
requirements of the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially
instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place
at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark
scheme that arose from these discussions will be recorded in the published Report on the
Examination.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.

The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously
published with these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the
Examination for this session.

• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark
schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2005 question papers for most IGCSE
and GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary
Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2005 1791

Mark Scheme Notes

• Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem.

Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just
to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula.
Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted
obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be
implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step

correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks
are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or
DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent
on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work
correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for
fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is

genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate
the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained
cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of
answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark
unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which

is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the
case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct
numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics
questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g
equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1792 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

• The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the

scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is

needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is
valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not
be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from

a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that

is insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the
same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to
be varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

• MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data

of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the
object and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case
all A and B marks then become "follow through √" marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be
applied in particular cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

• PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the
meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2005 1793
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – November 2005 9709, 8719 3

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality ( x − 3a ) 2 > ( x − a ) 2 , or corresponding equation B1

Expand and solve the inequality, or equivalent M1
Obtain critical value 2a A1
State correct answer x < 2a only A1

OR: State a correct linear equation for the critical value, e.g. x –3a = −(x –a), or corresponding
inequality B1
Solve the linear equation for x, or equivalent M1
Obtain critical value 2a A1
State correct answer x < 2a only A1

OR: Make recognizable sketches of both y = x –3a and y = x –a on a single diagram B1
Obtain a critical value from the intersection of the graphs M1
Obtain critical value 2a A1
Obtain correct answer x < 2a only A1 [4]

2 State or imply that ln y = ln A + n ln x B1

Equate estimate of ln y -intercept to ln A M1
Obtain value A between 1.97 and 2.03 A1
Calculate the gradient of the line of data points M1
Obtain value n = 0.25, or equivalent A1 [5]

3 State correct derivative 1 –2sin 2x B1

Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = 121 π A1
Carry out an appropriate method for determining the nature of a stationary point M1
1 π is a maximum with no errors seen
Show that x = 12 A1
5 π in range
Obtain second answer x = 12 A1√
Show this is a minimum point A1 [7]

4 (i) Consider sign of x 3 − x − 3 , or equivalent M1

Justify the given statement A1 [2]

(ii) Apply an iterative formula correctly at least once, with initial value x1 = 1.5 M1
Show that (A) fails to converge A1
Show that (B) converges A1
Obtain final answer 1.67 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p., or show there is a sign change in the
interval (1.665, 1.675) A1 [5]

5 State or imply that R = 10 or R = −10 B1

Use trig formula to find α M1
Obtain α = 36.9° if R = 10 or α = 216.9° if R = −10, with no errors seen A1
Carry out evaluation of sin −1 ( 10
7 ) (≈ 44.427...°) M1
Obtain answer 81.3° A1
Carry out correct method for second answer M1
Obtain answer 172.4° and no others in the range A1 [7]
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1794 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – November 2005 9709, 8719 3

dx
6 (i) State = 2sin θ cos θ , or dx = 2sin θ cos θ dθ B1
dθ
Substitute for x and dx throughout M1
Obtain any correct form in terms of θ A1
Reduce to the given form correctly A1 [4]

(ii) Use cos 2A formula, replacing integrand by a + bcos 2θ , where ab ≠ 0 M1*

Integrate and obtain θ − 12 sin 2θ A1√
Use limits θ = 0 and θ = 16 π M1(dep*)

Obtain exact answer 1π − 14 3 , or equivalent A1 [4]

7 (i) Substitute x = 1 + 2i and attempt expansions M1

2
Use i = −1 correctly at least once M1
Complete the verification correctly A1 [3]
(ii) State that the other complex root is 1 –2i B1 [1]
(iii) Show 1 + 2i in relatively correct position B1
Sketch a locus which
(a) is a straight line B1
(b) relative to the point representing 1 + 2i (call it A), passes through the mid-point of OA B1
(c) intersects OA at right angles B1 [4]
8 (i) Separate variables correctly and attempt to integrate both sides M1
Obtain term ln x, or equivalent A1
Obtain term − 12 kt 2 , or equivalent A1
Use t = 0, x = 100 to evaluate a constant, or as limits M1
1 2
Obtain solution in any correct form, e.g. ln x = − kt + ln 100
2
A1 [5]

(ii) Use t = 20, x = 90 to obtain an equation in k M1*

2
Substitute x = 50 and attempt to obtain an unsimplified numerical expression for t , such as
t 2 = 400(ln 100 – ln 50)/(ln 100 – ln 90) M1(dep*)
Obtain answer t = 51.3 A1 [3]

A Bx + C
9 (i) State or imply partial fractions are of the form + B1
x + 2 x 2 +1
Use any relevant method to obtain a constant M1
Obtain A = 2 A1
Obtain B = 1 A1
Obtain C = −1 A1 [5]

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of (2 + x) −1 , or
(1 + 12 x) −1 , or (1 + x 2 ) −1 M1*
Obtain complete unsimplified expansions of the fractions, e.g. 2. 12 (1 − 12 x + 14 x 2 − 18 x 3 ) ;
( x − 1)(1 − x 2 ) A1√ + A1√
2 −1
Carry out multiplication of expansion of (1 + x ) by (x –1) M1(dep*)
1 5 2 9 3
Obtain answer 2
x+ 4
x − x
8
A1 [5]
 − 1
[Binomial coefficients involving –1, such as   , are not sufficient for the first M1.]
1
[f.t. is on A, B, C.]
[Apply this scheme to attempts to expand (3 x 2 + x)( x + 2) −1 (1 + x 2 ) −1 , giving M1A1A1 for the
expansions, M1 for multiplying out fully, and A1 for the final answer.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2005 1795
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – November 2005 9709, 8719 3

10 (i) State or imply a direction vector of AB is –i +2j +k , or equivalent B1

State equation of AB is r = 2i + 2j + k + λ(−i + 2j + k) , or equivalent B1√
Substitute in equation of p and solve for λ M1
Obtain 4i –2j –k as position vector of C A1 [4]

(ii) State or imply a normal vector of p is i –2j + 2k , or equivalent B1

Carry out correct process for evaluating the scalar product of two relevant vectors,
e.g. (−i + 2j + k).(i –2j + 2k) M1
Using the correct process for calculating the moduli, divide the scalar product by the product of the
moduli and evaluate the inverse cosine or inverse sine of the result M1
Obtain answer 24.1° A1 [4]

(iii) EITHER: Obtain AC ( = 24 ) in any correct form B1√

Use trig to obtain length of perpendicular from A to p M1
Obtain given answer correctly A1

OR: State or imply AC is 2i –4j –2k , or equivalent B1√

Use scalar product of AC and a unit normal of p to calculate the perpendicular M1
Obtain given answer correctly A1

OR: Use plane perpendicular formula to find perpendicular from A to p M1

2 − 2(2) + 2(1) − 6
Obtain a correct unsimplified numerical expression, e.g. A1
(12 + (−2) 2 + 2 2 )
Obtain given answer correctly A1 [3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

− 12
1 Expand (1 + 4x) in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x3 , simplifying the
coefficients. [4]

1
The diagram shows a sketch of the curve y = for values of x from −0.6 to 0.6.
1 + x3

(i) Use the trapezium rule, with two intervals, to estimate the value of
0.6
1
dx,
1 + x3
−0.6

giving your answer correct to 2 decimal places. [3]

(ii) Explain, with reference to the diagram, why the trapezium rule may be expected to give a good
approximation to the true value of the integral in this case. [1]

3 (i) Solve the equation 2 − 2i − 5 = 0, giving your answers in the form x + iy where x and y are real.
[3]

(ii) Find the modulus and argument of each root. [3]

(iii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points representing the roots. [1]

4 (i) Use the substitution x = tan θ to show that

1 − x2
dx = cos 2θ dθ . [4]
(1 + x2 )2

(ii) Hence find the value of

1
1 − x2
dx. [3]
(1 + x2 )2
0

5 The polynomial x4 + 5x + a is denoted by p(x). It is given that x2 − x + 3 is a factor of p(x).

(i) Find the value of a and factorise p(x) completely. [6]

(ii) Hence state the number of real roots of the equation p(x) = 0, justifying your answer. [2]

6 (i) Prove the identity

cos 4θ + 4 cos 2θ ≡ 8 cos4 θ − 3. [4]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

cos 4θ + 4 cos 2θ = 2,
for 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 360◦ . [4]

7 (i) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that the equation

cosec x = 12 x + 1,

where x is in radians, has a root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Verify, by calculation, that this root lies between 0.5 and 1. [2]

(iii) Show that this root also satisfies the equation

2
x = sin−1 . [1]
x+2

(iv) Use the iterative formula

2
xn+1 = sin−1 ,
xn + 2
with initial value x1 = 0.75, to determine this root correct to 2 decimal places. Give the result of
each iteration to 4 decimal places. [3]

8 (i) Using partial fractions, find

1
dy. [4]
y(4 − y)

(ii) Given that y = 1 when x = 0, solve the differential equation

dy
= y(4 − y),
dx
obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [4]

(iii) State what happens to the value of y if x becomes very large and positive. [1]

x
The diagram shows part of the curve y = and its maximum point M . The shaded region R is
+1 x2
bounded by the curve and by the lines y = 0 and x = p.

(i) Calculate the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Find the area of R in terms of p. [3]

(iii) Hence calculate the value of p for which the area of R is 1, giving your answer correct to
3 significant figures. [2]

10 With respect to the origin O, the points A and B have position vectors given by
−−→ −−→
OA = 2i + 2j + k and OB = i + 4j + 3k.

The line l has vector equation r = 4i − 2j + 2k + s(i + 2j + k).

(i) Prove that the line l does not intersect the line through A and B. [5]

(ii) Find the equation of the plane containing l and the point A, giving your answer in the form
ax + by + c = d. [6]

0.0 Year 2005 1799

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the June 2005 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
8719 HIGHER MATHEMATICS

9709/03, 8719/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It
does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1800 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Grade thresholds for Syllabus 9709/8719 (Mathematics and Higher Mathematics) in the
June 2005 examination.

maximum minimum mark required for grade:

mark
A B E
available
Component 3 75 61 55 27

The thresholds (minimum marks) for Grades C and D are normally set by dividing the mark
range between the B and the E thresholds into three. For example, if the difference
between the B and the E threshold is 24 marks, the C threshold is set 8 marks below the B
threshold and the D threshold is set another 8 marks down. If dividing the interval by three
results in a fraction of a mark, then the threshold is normally rounded down.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2005 1801

Mark Scheme Notes

• Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an
intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or
idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an
M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and
similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or
dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier
M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together
by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given
for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct"
answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine
doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of
the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be
lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1802 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

• The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

• MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

question or part question are genuinely misread and the object and
difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks
then become "follow through √" marks. MR is not applied when the
candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed
at the coordination meeting.

• PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2005 1803

June 2005

GCE AS AND A LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 75

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/03, 8719/03

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

PAPER 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1804 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2005 9709/8719 3

1 EITHER: Obtain correct unsimplified version of the x or x 2 or x 3 term M1

State correct first two terms 1 – 2x A1
Obtain next two terms 6 x 2 − 20 x 3 A1 + A1
[The M mark is not earned by versions with unexpanded binomial
− 1
coefficients, e.g.  2  .]
 2 
OR: Differentiate expression and evaluate f(0) and f’(0),
−3
where f ′(x) = k (1 + 4 x ) 2 M1
State correct first two terms 1 – 2x A1
Obtain next two terms 6 x 2 − 20 x 3 A1 + A1 4

2 (i) Show or imply correct decimal ordinates 1.2755…, 1, 0.8223… B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 0.6 and three ordinates M1
Obtain correct answer 1.23 with no errors seen A1 3
[SR: if the area is calculated with one interval, or three or more, give D1
for a correct answer.]

(ii) Give an adequate justification, e.g. one trapezium over-estimates area

and the other under-estimates, or errors cancel out B1 1

3 (i) Use quadratic formula, or the method of completing the square, or the
substitution z = x + iy to find a root, using i2 = -1 M1
Obtain a root, e.g. 2 + i A1
Obtain the other root –2 + i A1 3
[Roots given as ± 2 + i earn A1 + A1.]

(ii) Obtain modulus 5 (or 2.24) of both roots B1√

Obtain argument of 2 + i as 26.6° or 0.464 radians
(allow ±1 in final figure) B1√
Obtain argument of –2 + i as 153.4° or 2.68 radians
(allow ±1 in final figure) B1√ 3
[SR: in applying the follow through to the roots obtained in (i), if both
roots are real or pure imaginary, the mark for the moduli is not available
and only B1√ is given if both arguments are correct; also if one of the
two roots is real or pure imaginary and the other is neither then B1√ is
given if both moduli are correct and B1√ if both arguments are correct.]

(iii) Show both roots on an Argand diagram in relatively correct positions B1√ 1
[This follow through is only available if at least one of the two roots is
of the form x + iy where xy ≠ 0.]

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2005 1805
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2005 9709/8719 3

dx
4 (i) State or imply dx = sec 2θ dθ or = sec 2θ B1
dθ
Substitute for x and dx throughout the integral M1
Obtain integral in terms of θ in any correct form A1
Reduce to the given form correctly A1 4

1
(ii) State integral 2
sin 2θ B1
Use limits θ = 0 and θ = 1
4
π correctly in integral of the form k sin 2θ M1
Obtain answer ½ or 0.5 A1 3

5 (i)

EITHER: Attempt division by x 2 − x + 3 reaching a partial quotient x 2 + x B1

Complete division and equate constant remainder to zero M1
Obtain answer a = −6 A1

OR: Commence inspection and reach unknown factor of x 2 + x + c B1

Obtain 3c = a and an equation in c M1
Obtain answer a = −6 A1

State or obtain factor x2 + x - 2 B1

State or obtain factors x + 2 and x – 1 B1 + B1 6

(ii) State that x2 + x – 2 = 0, has two (real) roots B1

Show that x2 − x + 3 = 0, has no (real) roots B1 2

6 (i)

EITHER: Express cos 4θ in terms of cos 2θ and/or sin 2θ B1

Use double angle formulae to express LHS in terms of cos θ
(and maybe sin θ) M1
Obtain any correct expression in terms of cos θ alone A1
Reduce correctly to the given form A1

OR: Use double angle formula to express RHS in terms of cos 2θ M1

Express cos22θ in terms of cos 4θ . B1
Obtain any correct expression in terms of cos 4θ and cos2θ A1
Reduce correctly to the given form A1 4

(ii) Using the identity, carry out method for calculating one root M1
Obtain answer 27.2° (or 0.475 radians) or 27.3° (or 0.476 radians) A1
Obtain a second answer, e.g. 332.8° (or 5.81 radians) A1√
Obtain remaining answers, e.g. 152.8° and 207.2°
(or 2.67 and 3.62 radians) and no others in range A1√ 4

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1806 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2005 9709/8719 3

7 (i) Make recognisable sketch of a relevant graph over the given range,
e.g. y = cosec x B1

Sketch the other relevant graph, e.g. y = ½ x + 1, and justify the given
statement B1 2

(ii) Consider sign of cosec x − ½ x − 1 at x = 0.5 and x = 1, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument correctly with appropriate calculations A1 2

(iii) Rearrange cosec x = 21 x + 1 in the given form, or vice versa B1 1

(iv) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer x = 0.80 A1
Show sufficient iterations to at least 3 d.p. to justify its accuracy to 2 d.p.,
or show there is a sign change in the interval (0.795, 0.805) A1 3

8 (i) Attempt to express integrand in partial fractions,

A B
e.g. obtain A or B in + M1
y 4−y
1 1 1
Obtain ( + ) , or equivalent A1
4 y 4−y
Integrate and obtain 41 ln y − 41 ln ( 4 − y ) , or equivalent A1√ + A1√ 4

A B
(ii) Separate variables correctly, integrate + and obtain further
y 4−y
term x, or equivalent M1*
Use y = 1 and x = 0 to evaluate a constant, or as limits M1(dep*)
Obtain answer in any correct form A1
Obtain final answer y = 4 /(3 e −4 x + 1) , or equivalent A1 4

(iii) State that y approaches 4 as x becomes very large B1 1

9 (i) Use quotient or product rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x or x2 M1
Obtain x = 1 correctly A1 4
[Differentiating ( x 2 + 1)y = x using the product rule can also earn the
first M1A1.]

[SR: if the quotient rule is misused, with a ‘reversed’ numerator or v

instead of v² in the denominator, award M0A0 but allow the
following M1A1.]

(ii) Obtain indefinite integral of the form k ln ( x 2 + 1) , where k = ½, 1 or 2 M1*

Use limits x = 0 and x = p correctly, or equivalent M1(dep*)
Obtain answer ½ ln(p2 +1) A1 3
[Also accept –ln cos θ or ln cos θ , where x = tan θ , for the first M1*.]

(iii) Equate to 1 and convert equation to the form p2 + 1 = exp(1/k ) M1

Obtain answer p = 2.53 A1 2

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2005 1807
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2005 9709/8719 3

10 (i) State or imply a direction vector for AB is –i + 2j + 2k , or equivalent B1

EITHER: State equation of AB is r = 2i + 2j + k +t(−i + 2j + 2k) , or equivalent B1√

Equate at least two pairs of components of AB and l and solve for
s or for t M1
Obtain correct answer for s or for t, e.g. s = 0 or t = −2; s = − 53 or t = − 31
or s = 5 or t = 3 A1

Verify that all three pairs of equations are not satisfied and that the
lines fail to intersect A1
x − 2 y − 2 z −1
OR: State a Cartesian equation for AB, e.g. = = , and for l,
−1 2 2
x −4 y +2 z−2
e.g. = = B1√
1 2 1
Solve a pair of equations, e.g. in x and y, for one unknown M1
Obtain one unknown, e.g. x = 4 or y = −2 A1
Obtain corresponding remaining values, e.g. of z, and show lines
do not intersect A1

OR: Form a relevant triple scalar product,

e.g. (2i – 4j + k).((−i + 2j + 2k)×(i + 2j + k)) B1√
Attempt to use correct method of evaluation M1
Obtain at least two correct simplified terms of the three terms of the
complete expansion of the triple product or of the corresponding
determinant A1
Obtain correct non-zero value, e.g. – 20, and state that the lines
do not intersect A1 5

(ii)
EITHER: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. 2i –4j + k B1
Use scalar product to obtain an equation in a, b and c, e.g. a + 2b + c = 0 B1
Form a second relevant equation, e.g. 2a – 4b + c = 0 and solve for
one ratio, e.g. a : b M1
Obtain final answer a : b : c = 6 : 1 : −8 A1
Use coordinates of a relevant point and values of a, b and c in
general equation and find d M1
Obtain answer 6x + y – 8z = 6, or equivalent A1

OR: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. 2i –4j + k B1
Obtain a second relevant vector parallel to the plane and attempt to
calculate their vector product, e.g. (i + 2j + k)×( 2i – 4j + k) M1
Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct answer, e.g. 6i + j – 8k A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point in 6x + y – 8z = d, or equivalent,
to find d M1
Obtain answer 6x + y – 8z = 6, or equivalent A1

OR: Obtain a vector parallel to the plane and not parallel to l, e.g. 2i – 4j + k B1
Obtain a second relevant vector parallel to the plane and correctly form
a 2-parameter equation for the plane,
e.g. r = 2i +2j + k + λ(2i – 4j +k) +µ(i + 2j + k) M1
State 3 correct equations in x, y, z, λ and µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1808 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2005 9709/8719 3

Obtain equation in any correct form A1

Obtain answer 6x + y – 8z = 6, or equivalent A1

OR: Using the coordinates of A and two points on l, state three simultaneous
equations in a, b, c and d, e.g. 2a + 2b + c = d, 4a – 2b + 2c = d
and 5a + 3c = d B1
Solve and find one ratio, e.g. a:b M1
State one correct ratio A1
Obtain a ratio of three unknowns, e.g. a:b:c = 6:1:−8, or equivalent A1
Either use coordinates of a relevant point and found ratio to find fourth
unknown, e.g. d, or find the ratio of all four unknowns M1
Obtain answer 6x + y – 8z = 6, or equivalent A1 6

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1809

Year 2004

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1
1 Expand in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x2 , simplifying the
(2 + x)3
coefficients. [4]

2 Solve the equation

ln(1 + x) = 1 + ln x,
giving your answer correct to 2 significant figures. [4]

3 The polynomial 2x3 + ax2 − 4 is denoted by p(x). It is given that (x − 2) is a factor of p(x).

(i) Find the value of a. [2]

When a has this value,

(ii) factorise p(x), [2]
(iii) solve the inequality p(x) > 0, justifying your answer. [2]

4 (i) Show that the equation

tan(45◦ + x) = 2 tan(45◦ − x)
can be written in the form
tan2 x − 6 tan x + 1 = 0. [4]

(ii) Hence solve the equation tan(45◦ + x) = 2 tan(45◦ − x), for 0◦ < x < 90◦ . [3]

The diagram shows a sector OAB of a circle with centre O and radius r . The angle AOB is α radians,
where 0 < α < 12 π . The point N on OA is such that BN is perpendicular to OA. The area of the
triangle ONB is half the area of the sector OAB.

(i) Show that α satisfies the equation sin 2x = x. [3]

(ii) By sketching a suitable pair of graphs, show that this equation has exactly one root in the interval
0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(iii) Use the iterative formula

xn+1 = sin(2xn ),
with initial value x1 = 1, to find α correct to 2 decimal places, showing the result of each iteration.
[3]

9709/03/O/N/04
3

6 The complex numbers 1 + 3i and 4 + 2i are denoted by u and v respectively.

u
(i) Find, in the form x + iy, where x and y are real, the complex numbers u − v and . [3]
v
u
(ii) State the argument of . [1]
v
In an Argand diagram, with origin O, the points A, B and C represent the numbers u, v and u − v
respectively.

(iii) State fully the geometrical relationship between OC and BA. [2]

(iv) Prove that angle AOB = 14 π radians. [2]

− 12 x
The diagram shows the curve y = x2 e .

(i) Find the x-coordinate of M , the maximum point of the curve. [4]

(ii) Find the area of the shaded region enclosed by the curve, the x-axis and the line x = 1, giving
your answer in terms of e. [5]

3x
8 An appropriate form for expressing in partial fractions is
(x + 1)(x − 2)
A B
+ ,
x+1 x−2
where A and B are constants.

(a) Without evaluating any constants, state appropriate forms for expressing the following in partial
fractions:
4x
(i) , [1]
(x + 4)(x2 + 3)
2x + 1
(ii) . [2]
(x − 2)(x + 2)2

4
3x
(b) Show that dx = ln 5. [6]
(x + 1)(x − 2)
3

9709/03/O/N/04 [Turn over

9 The lines l and m have vector equations

r = 2i − j + 4k + s ( i + j − k ) and r = −2i + 2j + k + t(−2i + j + k)

respectively.

(i) Show that l and m do not intersect. [4]

The point P lies on l and the point Q has position vector 2i − k.

(ii) Given that the line PQ is perpendicular to l, find the position vector of P. [4]

(iii) Verify that Q lies on m and that PQ is perpendicular to m. [2]

10 A rectangular reservoir has a horizontal base of area 1000 m2 . At time t = 0, it is empty and water
begins to flow into it at a constant rate of 30 m3 s−1 . At the same time, water begins to flow out at a
√ dh
rate proportional to h, where h m is the depth of the water at time t s. When h = 1, = 0.02.
dt

(i) Show that h satisfies the differential equation

dh √
= 0.01(3 − h). [3]
dt

√
It is given that, after making the substitution x = 3 − h, the equation in part (i) becomes
dx
(x − 3) = 0.005x.
dt

(ii) Using the fact that x = 3 when t = 0, solve this differential equation, obtaining an expression for
t in terms of x. [5]

(iii) Find the time at which the depth of water reaches 4 m. [2]

9709/03/O/N/04
0.0 Year 2004 1813

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the November 2004 question paper

9709 MATHEMATICS
8719 HIGHER MATHEMATICS

9709/03, 8719/03 Paper 3, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It
does not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2004 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1814 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 9709/8719 (Mathematics and Higher Mathematics))
in the November 2004 examination.

maximum minimum mark required for grade:

mark
A B E
available
Component 3 75 59 53 30

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1815

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an
intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or
idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an
M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and
similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or
dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier
M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together
by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given
for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct"
answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine
doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of
the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be
lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1816 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

question or part question are genuinely misread and the object and
difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks
then become "follow through √" marks. MR is not applied when the
candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed
at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1817

November 2004

GCE AS AND A LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 75

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/03, 8719/03

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

PAPER 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1818 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2004 9709 3

1 EITHER: Obtain correct unsimplified version of the x or x2 term in the

−3
 1 
expansion of (2 + x )−3 or 1 + x M1
 2 
1
State correct first term B1
8
3 3 2
Obtain next two terms − x+ x A1 + A1
16 16
[The M mark is not earned by versions with unexpanded binomial
 − 3
coefficients such as   .]
 1 
[Accept exact decimal equivalents of fractions.]
1 3 3 
[SR: Answers given as 1 − x + x 2  can earn M1B1A1.]
8 2 2 
−3
 1  1
[SR: Solutions involving k 1 + x , where k = 2, 8 or , can earn
 2  2
M1 and A1√ for correctly simplifying both the terms in x and x2.]

OR: Differentiate expression and evaluate f(0) and f′(0), where

f′(x) = k(2 + x)-4 M1
1
State correct first term B1
8
3 3 2
Obtain next two terms − x+ x A1 + A1 4
16 16
[Accept exact decimal equivalents of fractions.]

2 Use law for subtraction or addition of logarithms, or the equivalent in exponentials M1

Use In e = 1 or e = exp(1) M1
1+ x
Obtain a correct equation free of logarithms e.g. = e or 1 + x = ex A1
x
Obtain answer x = 0.58 (allow 0.582 or answer rounding to it) A1 4

3 (i) Substitute 2 for x and equate to zero, or divide by x – 2 and equate remainder
to zero M1
Obtain answer a = −3 A1 2

(ii) Attempt to find quadratic factor by division or inspection M1

State quadratic factor 2x2 + x + 2 A1 2
[The M1 is earned if division reaches a partial quotient of 2x2 + kx, or if inspection
has an unknown factor of 2x2 + bx + c and an equation in b and/or c, or if two
coefficients with the correct moduli are stated without working.]

(iii) State answer x > 2 (and nothing else) B1*

Make a correct justification e.g. 2x2 + x + 2 (has no zeros and) is always positive B1(dep*) 2
[SR: The answer x ≥ 2 gets B0, but in this case allow the second B mark if the
remaining work is correct.]

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1819
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2004 9709 3

4 (i) EITHER: Use tan(A ± B) formula correctly to obtain an equation in tan x M1

1 + tan x 2(1 − tan x )
State or imply the equation = or equivalent A1
1 − tan x 1 + tan x
Transform to an expanded horizontal quadratic equation in tan x M1
Obtain given answer correctly A1

OR: Use sin(A ± B) and cos(A ± B) formulae correctly to obtain an

equation in sin x and cos x M1
Using values of sin 45°and cos 45°, or their equality, obtain an
expanded horizontal equation in sin x and cos x A1
Transform to a quadratic equation in tan x M1
Obtain given answer correctly A1 4

(ii) Solve the given quadratic and calculate an angle in degrees or radians M1
Obtain one answer e.g. 80.3° A1
Obtain second answer 9.7° and no others in the range A1 3
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]

1 2
5 (i) Obtain area of ONB in terms of r and α e.g. r cos α sin α B1
2
1 1 
Equate area of triangle in terms of r and α to  r 2α  or equivalent M1
22 
Obtain given form, sin 2α = α, correctly A1 3
[Allow use of OA and/or OB for r.]

(ii) Make recognisable sketch in one diagram over the given range of two suitable
graphs, e.g. y = sin 2x and y = x B1
State or imply link between intersections and roots and justify the given answer B1 2
[Allow a single graph and its intersection with y = 0 to earn full marks.]

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer 0.95 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 2d.p., or show there is a sign
change in (0.945, 0.955) A1 3
[SR: Allow the M mark if calculations are attempted in degree mode.]

6 (i) State u − v is −3 + i B1
EITHER: Carry out multiplication of numerator and denominator of u/v by
4 − 2i, or equivalent M1
1 1
Obtain answer + i, or any equivalent A1
2 2
OR: Obtain two equations in x and y, and solve for x or for y M1
1 1
Obtain answer + i, or any equivalent A1 3
2 2

1
(ii) State argument is π (or 0.785 radians or 45°) A1√ 1
4

(iii) State that OC and BA are equal (in length) B1

State that OC and BA are parallel or have the same direction B1 2

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1820 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2004 9709 3

(iv) EITHER: Use fact that angle AOB = arg u − arg v = arg(u/v) M1
Obtain given answer (or 45°) A1

OR: Obtain tan AOB from gradients of OA and OB and the tan(A ± B)
formula M1
Obtain given answer (or 45°) A1

OR: Obtain cos AOB by using the cosine rule or a scalar product M1
Obtain given answer (or 45°) A1

OR: Prove angle OAB = 90° and OA = AB M1

Derive the given answer (or 45°) A1 2
[SR: Obtaining a value for angle AOB by calculating
 1
arctan(3 ) − arctan  earns a maximum of B1.]
2

7 (i) Use product or quotient rule M1*

1 1
− x 1 − x
Obtain first derivative 2 xe 2 − x 2e 2 or equivalent A1
2
Equate derivative to zero and solve for non-zero x M1(dep*)
Obtain answer x = 4 A1 4

1 1
− x − x
(ii) Integrate by parts once, obtaining kx 2 e 2
∫
+ l xe 2 dx , where kl ≠ 0 M1
1 1
− x − x
Obtain integral − 2 x 2 e 2
∫
+ 4 xe 2 dx , or any unsimplified equivalent A1
1
(
Complete the integration, obtaining − 2 x 2 + 4 x + 8 e 2 or equivalent ) − x
A1
Having integrated by parts twice, use limits x = 0 and x = 1 in the complete integral M1
1
−
Obtain simplified answer 16 − 26e 2 or equivalent A1 5

A Bx + C
8 (a)(i) State answer + B1 1
x + 4 x2 + 3

A Bx + C A B C
(ii) State answer + or + + B2 2
x − 2 (x + 2)2 x − 2 x + 2 (x + 2)2
A B Cx + D
[Award B1 if the B term is omitted or for the form + + .]
x − 2 x + 2 (x + 2)2

A B
(b) Stating or implying f(x) ≡ + , use a relevant method to determine A or B M1
x +1 x − 2
Obtain A = 1 and B = 2 A1
[SR: If A = 1 and B = 2 stated without working, award B1 + B1.]
Integrate and obtain terms ln (x + 1) + 2 ln (x − 2) A1√ + A1√
Use correct limits correctly in the complete integral M1
Obtain given answer ln 5 following full and exact working A1 6

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1821
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2004 9709 3

9 (i) EITHER: Express general point of l or m in component form

e.g. (2 + s, −1 + s, 4 − s) or (−2 −2t, 2 + t, 1 + t) B1
Equate at least two pairs of components and solve for s or for t M1
2
Obtain correct answer for s or t (possible answers are , 10, or 3 for s
3
7
and − , −7, or 0 for t) A1
3
Verify that all three component equations are not satisfied A1

x − 2 y − (− 1) z − 4
OR: State a Cartesian equation for l or for m, e.g. = = for l B1
1 1 −1
Solve a pair of equations for a pair of values, e.g. x and y M1
8 1
Obtain a pair of correct answers, e.g. x = and y = − A1
3 3
Find corresponding remaining values, e.g. of z, and show lines
do not intersect A1

OR: Form a relevant triple scalar product, e.g.

(4i –3j + 3k).((i + j –k)×(−2i +j + k)) B1
Attempt to use correct method of evaluation M1
Obtain at least two correct simplified terms of the three terms of
the complete expansion of the triple product or of the corresponding
determinant A1
Obtain correct non-zero value, e.g.14, and state that the lines cannot
intersect A1 4

(ii) EITHER: ( )
Express PQ or QP in terms of s in any correct form e.g.
−si +(1 − s)j + (−5 + s)k B1
Equate its scalar product with a direction vector for l to zero, obtaining
a linear equation in s M1
Solve for s M1
Obtain s = 2 and OP is 4i + j + 2k A1

OR: Take a point A on l, e.g. (2, −1, 4), and use scalar product to calculate
AP, the length of the projection of AQ onto l M1
Obtain answer AP = 2 3 , or equivalent A1
Carry out method for finding OP M1
Obtain answer 4i + j + 2k A1 4

(iii) Show that Q is the point on m with parameter t = −2, or that (2, 0, −1) satisfies
the Cartesian equation of m B1
Show that PQ is perpendicular to m e.g. by verifying fully that
(−2i − j −3k).(−2i +j + k) = 0 B1 2

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past International Examinations 2005
Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1822 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2004 9709 3

dV dh
10 (i) State or imply = 1000 B1
dt dt
dV dh
State or imply = 30 − k h or = 0.03 − m h B1
dt dt
Show that k = 10 or m = 0.01 and justify the given equation B1 3
[Allow the first B1 for the statement that 0.03 = 30/1000.]

x −3
(ii) Separate variables and attempt integration of with respect to x M1*
x
Obtain x −3 ln x, or equivalent A1
Obtain 0.005t, or equivalent A1
Use x = 3, t = 0 in the evaluation of a constant or as limits in an answer involving
ln x and kt M1(dep*)
Obtain answer in any correct form e.g. t = 200(x −3 −3 ln x + 3 ln 3) A1 5
[To qualify for the first M mark, an attempt to solve the earlier differential equation
in h and t must involve correct separation of variables, the use of a substitution
such as h = u , and an attempt to integrate the resulting function of u.]

(iii) Substitute x = 1 and calculate t M1

Obtain answer t = 259 correctly A1 2

1 Sketch the graph of y = sec x, for 0 ≤ x ≤ 2π . [3]

2 Solve the inequality |2x + 1| < | x |. [4]

3 Find the gradient of the curve with equation

2x2 − 4xy + 3y2 = 3,

at the point (2, 1). [4]

4 (i) Show that if y = 2x , then the equation

2x − 2−x = 1

can be written as a quadratic equation in y. [2]

(ii) Hence solve the equation

2x − 2−x = 1. [4]

5 (i) Prove the identity

sin2 θ cos2 θ ≡ 18 (1 − cos 4θ ). [3]

(ii) Hence find the exact value of

1
3
π
sin2 θ cos2 θ dθ . [3]
0

6 Given that y = 1 when x = 0, solve the differential equation

dy y3 + 1
= ,
dx y2
obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

7 (i) The equation x3 + x + 1 = 0 has one real root. Show by calculation that this root lies between
−1 and 0. [2]

(ii) Show that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

2xn3 − 1
xn+1 =
3xn2 + 1

converges, then it converges to the root of the equation given in part (i). [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula, with initial value x1 = −0.5, to determine the root correct to 2 decimal
places, showing the result of each iteration. [3]

9709/03/M/J/04
3

8 (i) Find the roots of the equation 2 − + 1 = 0, giving your answers in the form x + iy, where x and
y are real. [2]

(ii) Obtain the modulus and argument of each root. [3]

(iii) Show that each root also satisfies the equation 3 = −1. [2]

x2 + 7x − 6
9 Let f(x) = .
(x − 1)(x − 2)(x + 1)

(i) Express f(x) in partial fractions. [4]

(ii) Show that, when x is sufficiently small for x4 and higher powers to be neglected,

f(x) = −3 + 2x − 32 x2 + 11
4
x3 . [5]

ln x
The diagram shows the curve y = and its maximum point M . The curve cuts the x-axis at A.
x2
(i) Write down the x-coordinate of A. [1]

(ii) Find the exact coordinates of M . [5]

(iii) Use integration by parts to find the exact area of the shaded region enclosed by the curve, the
x-axis and the line x = e. [5]

11 With respect to the origin O, the points P, Q, R, S have position vectors given by
−−→ −−→ −−→ −−→
OP = i − k, OQ = −2i + 4j, OR = 4i + 2j + k, OS = 3i + 5j − 6k.

(i) Find the equation of the plane containing P, Q and R, giving your answer in the form
ax + by + c = d. [6]

(ii) The point N is the foot of the perpendicular from S to this plane. Find the position vector of N
and show that the length of SN is 7. [6]

9709/03/M/J/04
4

BLANK PAGE

9709/03/M/J/04
1826 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level
Advanced International Certificate of Education

MARK SCHEME for the June 2004 question papers

9709 MATHEMATICS

9709/01 Paper 1 (Pure 1), maximum raw mark 75

9709/02 Paper 2 (Pure 2), maximum raw mark 50

9709/03, 8719/03 Paper 3 (Pure 3), maximum raw mark 75

9709/04 Paper 4 (Mechanics 1), maximum raw mark 50

9709/05, 8719/05 Paper 5 (Mechanics 2), maximum raw mark 50

9709/06, 0390/06 Paper 6 (Probability and Statistics 1),

maximum raw mark 50

9709/07, 8719/07 Paper 7 (Probability and Statistics 2),

maximum raw mark 50

These mark schemes are published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements
of the examination. They show the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks.
They do not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2004 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE
Advanced Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1827

Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 9709 (Mathematics) in the June 2004 examination.

maximum minimum mark required for grade:

mark
A B E
available
Component 1 75 63 56 31
Component 2 50 37 33 18
Component 3 75 61 55 29
Component 4 50 38 34 18
Component 5 50 36 32 17
Component 6 50 38 34 19
Component 7 50 42 37 22

The thresholds (minimum marks) for Grades C and D are normally set by dividing the mark
range between the B and the E thresholds into three. For example, if the difference between
the B and the E threshold is 24 marks, the C threshold is set 8 marks below the B threshold
and the D threshold is set another 8 marks down. If dividing the interval by three results in a
fraction of a mark, then the threshold is normally rounded down.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1828 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Mark Scheme Notes

• Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula
being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can
be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1829

• The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

• MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

question or part question are genuinely misread and the object and
difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks
then become "follow through √"marks. MR is not applied when the
candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at
the coordination meeting.

• PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1830 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

June 2004

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 75

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/01

MATHEMATICS
Paper 1 (Pure 1)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1831
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 1

1. (i) a/(1–r) = 256 and a = 64 M1 Use of correct formula

→r=¾ A1 Correct only
[2]
(ii) S 10 = 64(1–0.7510) (1–0.75) M1 Use of correct formula – 0.7510 not 0.759
→ S10 = 242 A1 Correct only
[2]

1
3 x + 1dx = (3 x + 1) ÷ 1.5 Ml for (3 x + 1)
1.5
∫
1.5
2. B1 ÷ 1.5
0

then 3 M1 For division by 3

→ [ ] at 1 – [ ] at 0 M1 Must attempt [ ] at x=0 ( not assume it is 0)

and be using an integrated function
→ 16/9 – 2/9 = 14/9 or 1.56 A1 Fraction or decimal. (1.56+C loses this A1)
[4]

3. (i) sin2 θ+ 3sin θ cos θ = 4cos2 θ

divides by cos2 θ M1 Knowing to divide by cos2 θ
→ tan2 θ + 3tan θ = 4 A1 Correct quadratic (not nec = 0)
[2]
(ii) Solution tan θ = 1 or tan θ = –4 M1 Correct solution of quadratic = 0

A1 A1 Correct only for each one.

→ θ = 45° or 104.0°
[3]

4. (i) Coeff of x3 = 6C3 x 23 B1 B1 B1 for 6C3 B1 for 23

=160 B1 B1 for 160
[3]
(ii) Term in x2 = 6C2 x 22 = 60 B1 B1 for 60 (could be given in (i))
reqd coeff = 1 x (i) – 3 x 60 M1 Needs to consider 2 terms
→ –20 A1 co
[3]

(i) Area of sector = ½ 62 0.8 (14.4) M1 Use of ½r2θ with radians

Area of triangle = ½.102.sin0.8 (35.9) M1 Use of ½absinC or ½ bh with trig
→ Shaded area = 21.5 A1 Correct only
[3]

(ii) Arc length = 6 x 0.8 (4.8) M1 Use of s=rθ with radians

CD (by cos rule) or 2 x 10sin0.4 (7.8) M1 A1 Any correct method – allow if in (i)
→ Perimeter = 8 + 4.8 + 7.8 = 20.6 A1 Correct only
[4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1832 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 1

6. (i) eliminates x (or y) completely M1 Needs x or y removed completely

→ x2+x–6=0 or y2–17y+66=0 A1 Correct only ( no need for = 0)
Solution of quadratic = 0 DM1 Equation must = 0.
→ (2, 6) and (–3, 11) A1 Everything ok.
[4]

(ii) Midpoint = (–½, 8½) B1 √ For his two points in (i)

Gradient of line = –1 Use of y-step x-step (beware fortuitous)
Gradient of perpendicular = 1 M1 Use of m1m2 = –1

→ y – 8½ = 1 (x + ½) (or y = x + 9) M1 A1 Any form – needs the M marks.

[4]

7. (i) Differentiate y=18/x → –18x–2 M1 Any attempt at differentiation

Gradient of tangent = –½ A1 For –½
Gradient of normal = 2 DM1 Use of m1m2 = –1
Eqn of normal y–3 = 2(x–6) DM1 Correct method for eqn of line
(y=2x–9)
If y = 0, x = 4½ A1 Ans given – beware fortuitous answers.
[5]

(ii) Vol = π ∫
324
x 2
[
dx = π − 324 x −1 . ] M1 A1 Use of ∫ y dx
2
for M. correct(needs π ) for A

3 4 1
Uses value at x=6 – value at x= 4.5 DM1 Use of 6 and 4.5

–54 π – – 72 π = 18 π A1 Beware fortuitous answers (ans given)

[4]

8. (i) 2h + 2r + π r = 8 M1 Reasonable attempt at linking 4 lengths +

correct formula for ½C or C.
→ h = 4 – r – ½π r A1 Co in any form with h subject.

[2]

(ii) A=2rh+½πr2→ A = r(8–2r– π r) + ½ π r2 M1 Adds rectangle + ½xcircle (eqn on own ok)

→ A = 8r – 2r – ½ π r
2 2
A1 Co beware fortuitous answers (ans given)
[2]
(iii) dA/dr = 8 – 4r – π r M1 A1 Knowing to differentiate + some attempt
= 0 when r = 1.12 (or 8/(4+ π )) DM1 A1 Setting his dA/dr to 0. Decimal or exact ok.
[4]
(iv) d A/dr = – 4 – π
2 2
M1 Looks at 2nd differential or other valid
complete method.
This is negative → Maximum A1 Correct deduction but needs d2A/dr2
[2] correct.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1833
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 1

1 3 4  − 1

        Condone notation throughout.
9. OA =  3 , OB =  − 1, OC =  2 , OD =  0 
 − 1 3  p q
       
Allow column vectors or i,j,k throughout

(i) AB = b–a = 2i – 4j + 4k M1 Use of b–a, rather than b+a or a–b

2 2 2
Unit vector = (2i – 4j + 4k) √(2 +4 +4 ) M1 Dividing by the modulus of "his" AB
= ± (2i –4j + 4k) 6 A1 Co (allow – for candidates using a–b)
[3]

(ii) OA.OC = 4 + 6 – p M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2

= 0 for 90° DM1 Setting to 0 + attempt to solve
→ p = 10 A1 co
[3]

(iii) (–2)2 + 32 + (q+1)2 = 72 M1 Correct method for length with ±d–a, d+a
→ (q+1)2 = 36 or q2 + 2q = 35 A1 Correct quadratic equation

q = 5 and q = –7 DM1 A1 Correct method of solution. Both correct.

or B1 B1 Or B1 for each if (q+1)2=36, q=5 only.
[4]

10. f: x a x2– 2 x , g : x a 2x+3

(i) x2 – 2x – 15 = 0 M1 Equation set to 0 and solved.

End-points –3 and 5 A1 Correct end-points, however used

→ x < –3 and x > 5 A1 Co-inequalities – not ≤ or ≥

[3]
(ii) Uses dy/dx = 2x–2 = 0 or (x–1)2 – 1 M1 Any valid complete method for x value
Minimum at x = 1 or correct form A1 Correct only

Range of y is f(x) ≥ –1 A1 Correct for his value of "x" – must be ≥

No inverse since not 1 : 1 (or equivalent) B1 Any valid statement.

[4]
(iii) gf(x) = 2(x2 – 2x) + 3 (2x2 – 4x +3) M1 Must be gf not fg – for unsimplified ans.

b2 – 4ac = 16 – 24 = –8 → –ve M1 Used on quadratic=0, even if fg used.

→ No real solutions. A1 Must be using gf and correct assumption

[3] and statement needed.
[or gf(x)=0 → f(x)=–3/2. Imposs from (ii) ]

(iv) y = 2x + 3 correct line on diagram B2,1,0 3 things needed –B1 if one missing.
[2] • g correct,
Either inverse as mirror image in y=x • g-1 correct – not parallel to g
or y = g-1(x) = ½ (x–3) drawn • y=x drawn or statement re symmetry

DM1 for quadratic equation. Equation must be set to 0.

Formula → must be correct and correctly used – allow for numerical errors though in b2 and –4ac.
Factors → attempt to find 2 brackets. Each bracket then solved to 0.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1834 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

June 2004

GCE AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/02

MATHEMATICS
Paper 2 (Pure 2)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1835
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 2

1 Use logarithms to linearise an equation M1

x ln 5
Obtain = or equivalent A1
y ln 2
Obtain answer 2.32 A1 3

2 (i) Use the given iterative formula correctly at least ONCE with x1 = 3 M1
Obtain final answer 3.142 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 3 d.p. A1 3

1 306 
(ii) State any suitable equation e.g. x =  4x + 4  B1
5 x 
Derive the given answer α (or x) = 5
306 B1 2

3 (i) Substitute x = 3 and equate to zero M1

Obtain answer α = –1 A1 2

(ii) At any stage, state that x = 3 is a solution B1

EITHER: Attempt division by (x–3) reaching a partial quotient of 2x2 + kx M1
Obtain quadratic factor 2x2 + 5x +2 A1
Obtain solutions x = –2 and x = -½ A1
OR: Obtain solution x = –2 by trial and error B1
Obtain solution x = -½ similarly B2 4
[If an attempt at the quadratic factor is made by inspection, the M1 is earned if it reaches an
unknown factor of 2x2 + bx + c and an equation in b and/or c.]

4 (i) State answer R = 5 B1

Use trigonometric formulae to find α M1
Obtain answer α = 53.13° A1 3

(ii) Carry out, or indicate need for, calculation of sin-1(4.5/5) M1

Obtain answer 11.0° A1√
Carry out correct method for the second root e.g. 180° – 64.16° – 53.13° M1
Obtain answer 62.7° and no others in the range A1√ 4
[Ignore answers outside the given range.]

(iii) State least value is 2 B1√ 1

5 (i) State derivative of the form (e-x ± xe-x). Allow xex ± ex {via quotient rule} M1
Obtain correct derivative of e±x – xe-x A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1
Obtain answer x = 1 A1 4

(ii) Show or imply correct ordinates 0, 0.367879…, 0.27067… B1

Use correct formula, or equivalent, with h = 1 and three ordinates M1
Obtain answer 0.50 with no errors seen A1 3

(iii) Justify statement that the rule gives an under-estimate B1 1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1836 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 2

dx 1 dy 4
6 (i) State that = 2 + or = 1 − 2 , or equivalent B1
dt t dt t
dy dy dx
Use = ÷ M1
dx dt dt
Obtain the given answer A1 3

dy
(ii) Substitute t = 1 in and both parametric equations M1
dx
dy
Obtain = −1 and coordinates (2, 5) A1
dx
State equation of tangent in any correct horizontal form e.g. x + y = 7 A1√ 3

dy
(iii) Equate to zero and solve for t M1
dx
Obtain answer t = 2 A1
Obtain answer y = 4 A1
d
Show by any method (but not via ( y ′) ) that this is a minimum point A1 4
dt

7 (i) Make relevant use of the cos(A + B) formula M1*

Make relevant use of cos2A and sin2A formulae M1*
Obtain a correct expression in terms of cosA and sinA A1
Use sin2A = 1 – cos2A to obtain an expression in terms of cosA M1(dep*)
Obtain given answer correctly A1 5

1 3
(ii) Replace integrand by cos3x + cosx, or equivalent B1
4 4
1 3
Integrate, obtaining sin3x + sinx, or equivalent B1 + B1√
12 4
Use limits correctly M1
Obtain given anser A1 5

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1837

June 2004

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 75

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/03, 8719/03

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

Paper 3 (Pure 3)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1838 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 3

1 Show correct sketch for 0 ≤ x < 12 π B1

Show correct sketch for 1π <x< 3π or 3π < x ≤ 2π B1
2 2 2
Show completely correct sketch B1 3
[SR: for a graph with y = 0 when x = 0, π, 2π but otherwise of correct shape, award B1.]

2 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality (2 x + 1) 2 < x 2 or corresponding quadratic

equation or pair of linear equations (2x + 1) = ± x B1

Expand and make a reasonable solution attempt at a 3-term quadratic, or solve two
linear equations M1
Obtain critical values x = −1 and x = − 13 only A1
State answer − 1 < x < − 13 A1
OR: Obtain the critical value x = −1 from a graphical method , or by inspection, or by
solving a linear inequality or equation B1
Obtain the critical value x = − 13 (deduct B1 from B3 if extra values are obtained) B2
State answer − 1 < x < − 13 B1 4
[Condone ≤ for <; accept –0.33 for − .] 1
3

dy
3 EITHER: State 6 y as the derivative of 3y 2 B1
dx
dy
State ± 4 x ± 4 y as the derivative of −4xy B1
dx
dy
Equate attempted derivative of LHS to zero and solve for M1
dx
Obtain answer 2 A1
[The M1 is conditional on at least one of the B marks being obtained. Allow any
combination of signs for the second B1.]
OR: Obtain a correct expression for y in terms of x B1
Differentiate using chain rule M1
Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Substitute x = 2 and obtain answer 2 only A1 4
[The M1 is conditional on a reasonable attempt at solving the quadratic in y being made.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1839
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 3

1
4 (i) State or imply 2 − x = B1
y
Obtain 3-term quadratic e.g. y 2 − y − 1 = 0 B1 2

(ii) Solve a 3-term quadratic, obtaining 1 or 2 roots M1

Obtain answer y = (1 + 5 ) / 2 , or equivalent A1

Carry out correct method for solving an equation of the form 2 x = a , where a > 0, reaching
a ratio of logarithms M1
Obtain answer x = 0.694 only A1 4

5 (i) Make relevant use of formula for sin 2θ or cos 2θ M1

Make relevant use of formula for cos 4θ M1
Complete proof of the given result A1 3

(ii) Integrate and obtain 81 (θ − 14 sin 4θ ) or equivalent B1

Use limits correctly with an integral of the form aθ + bsin 4θ, where ab ≠ 0 M1
3
Obtain answer 81 ( 13 π + ) , or exact equivalent A1 3
8

6 Separate variables and attempt to integrate M1

Obtain terms 1 ln( y 3 + 1) and x, or equivalent A1 + A1

3
3
Evaluate a constant or use limits x = 0, y = 1 with a solution containing terms k ln ( y + 1) and x,

or equivalent M1

Obtain any correct form of solution e.g. 1 ln( y 3 + 1) = x + 1 ln 2 A1√

3 3
1
Rearrange and obtain y = ( 2 e 3 x − 1) ,or equivalent
3
A1 6

[f.t. is on k ≠ 0.]

7 (i) Evaluate cubic when x = −1 and x = 0 M1

Justify given statement correctly A1 2
[If calculations are not given but justification uses correct statements about signs, award B1.]

2x3 − 1
(ii) State x = , or equivalent B1
3x 2 + 1
Rearrange this in the form x 3 + x + 1 = 0 (or vice versa) B1 2

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1840 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 3

(iii) Use the iterative formula correctly at least once M1

Obtain final answer −0.68 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 2d.p., or show there is a sign change in the
interval (−0.685, −0.675) A1 3

8 (i) EITHER: Solve the quadratic and use −1 = i M1

1 3 1 3
Obtain roots +i and 2
−i or equivalent A1
2 2 2
OR: Substitute x + iy and solve for x or y M1
Obtain correct roots A1 2

(ii) State that the modulus of each root is equal to 1 B1√

State that the arguments are 1π and − 13 π respectively B1√ + B1√ 3
3
5π p
[Accept degrees and 3
instead of − 13 π . Accept a modulus in the form q
or n , where
p, q, n are integers. An answer which only gives roots in modulus-argument form earns B1 for both
the implied moduli and B1 for both the implied arguments.]

(iii) EITHER: Verify z 3 = −1 for each root B1 + B1

OR: State z 3 + 1 = ( z + 1)( z 2 − z + 1) B1

Justify the given statement B1

OR: Obtain z 3 = z 2 − z B1
Justify the given statement B1 2

A B C
9 (i) State or imply f(x) ≡ + + B1
x −1 x − 2 x +1
EITHER: Use any relevant method to obtain a constant M1
Obtain one of the values: A = −1, B = 4 and C = −2 A1
Obtain the remaining two values A1
OR: Obtain one value by inspection B1
State a second value B1
State the third value B1 4
A Bx + C
[Apply the same scheme to the form + which has A = 4, B = −3 and C = 1.]
x − 2 x 2 −1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1841
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 3

(ii) Use correct method to obtain the first two terms of the expansion of ( x − 1) −1 or ( x − 2) −1
or ( x + 1) −1 M1
3
Obtain any correct unsimplified expansion of the partial fractions up to the terms in x
(deduct A1 for each incorrect expansion) A1√ + A1√ + A1√
Obtain the given answer correctly A1 5
 − 1
[Binomial coefficients involving −1, e.g.   , are not sufficient for the M1 mark. The f.t. is on A, B, C.]
 1
[Apply a similar scheme to the alternative form of fractions in (i), awarding M1*A1√A1√ for the
expansions, M1(dep*) for multiplying by Bx + C, and A1 for obtaining the given answer correctly.]

[In the case of an attempt to expand ( x 2 + 7 x − 6)( x − 1) −1 ( x − 2) −1 ( x + 1) −1 , give M1A1A1A1 for the

expansions and A1 for multiplying out and obtaining the given answer correctly.]

[Allow attempts to multiply out ( x − 1)( x − 2)( x + 1)(−3 + 2 x − 32 x 2 + 11

4
x 3 ) , giving B1 for reduction to a
product of two expressions correct up to their terms in x 3 , M1 for attempting to multiply out at least as

far as terms in x 2 , A1 for a correct expansion up to terms in x 3 , and A1 for correctly obtaining the

answer x 2 + 7 x − 6 and also showing there is no term in x 3 .]

[Allow the use of Maclaurin, giving M1A1√ for f(0) = −3 and f ′(0) = 2, A1√ for f ″(0) = −3, A1√ for

f ′′′(0) = 33 , and A1 for obtaining the given answer correctly (f.t. is on A, B,C if used).]
2

10 (i) State x-coordinate of A is 1 B1 1

(ii) Use product or quotient rule M1

2ln x 1 1
Obtain derivative in any correct form e.g. − + . A1
3 x x2
x
Equate derivative to zero and solve for ln x M1
1
Obtain x = e or equivalent (accept 1.65)
2
A1
1
Obtain y = or exact equivalent not involving ln A1 5
2e

[SR: if the quotient rule is misused, with a ‘reversed’ numerator or x 2 instead of x 4 in the
denominator, award M0A0 but allow the following M1A1A1.]

(iii) Attempt integration by parts, going the correct way M1

ln x 1 1
Obtain −
x
+ ∫
. dx or equivalent
x x
A1
ln x 1
Obtain indefinite integral − − A1
x x
Use x-coordinate of A and e as limits, having integrated twice M1
2
Obtain exact answer 1 − , or equivalent A1 5
e
[If u = ln x is used, apply an analogous scheme to the result of the substitution.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1842 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 3

11 (i) EITHER: Obtain a vector in the plane e.g. PQ = −3i + 4j +k B1

Use scalar product to obtain a relevant equation in a, b , c e.g.−3a + 4b + c = 0 or

6a −2b + c = 0 or 3a + 2b +2c = 0 M1
State two correct equations in a, b, c A1
Solve simultaneous equations to obtain one ratio e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 2 : 3 : −6 or equivalent A1
Obtain equation 2x + 3y − 6z = 8 or equivalent A1
[The second M1 is also given if say c is given an arbitrary value and a or b is found.
The following A1 is then given for finding the correct values of a and b.]

OR: Substitute for P, Q, R in equation of plane and state 3 equations in a, b, c, d B1

Eliminate one unknown, e.g. d, entirely M1
Obtain 2 equations in 3 unknowns A1
Solve to obtain one ratio e.g. a : b M1
Obtain a : b : c = 2 : 3 : −6 or equivalent A1
Obtain equation 2x + 3y − 6z = 8 or equivalent A1
[The first M1 is also given if say d is given an arbitrary value and two equations in
two unknowns, e.g. a and b, are obtained. The following A1 is for two correct
equations. Solving to obtain one unknown earns the second M1 and the following
A1 is for finding the correct values of a and b.]

OR: Obtain a vector in the plane e.g. QR = 6i −2j + k B1

Find a second vector in the plane and form correctly a 2-parameter equation for
the plane M1
Obtain equation in any correct form e.g. r = λ(−3i +4j +k) + µ(6i −2j + k) + i − k A1
State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ, and µ A1
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain equation 2x + 3y − 6z = 8 or equivalent A1

OR: Obtain a vector in the plane e.g. PR = 3i + 2j +2k B1

Obtain a second vector in the plane and calculate the vector product of the two
vectors, e.g. (−3i + 4j + k)×(3i + 2j + 2k) M1
Obtain 2 correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product e.g. 6i + 9j −18k or equivalent A1
Substitute in 2x +3y − 6z = d and find d or equivalent M1
Obtain equation 2x + 3y −6z = 8 or equivalent A1 6

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1843
Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 3

(ii) EITHER: State equation of SN is r = 3i + 5j −6k + λ(2i + 3j − 6k) or equivalent B1√

Express x, y, z in terms of λ e.g. (3 + 2λ, 5 +3λ, −6 −6λ) B1√
Substitute in the equation of the plane and solve for λ M1

Obtain ON = i + 2j, or equivalent A1

Carry out method for finding SN M1
Show that SN = 7 correctly A1

OR: Letting ON =xi + yj + zk, obtain two equations in x, y, z by equating scalar

product of NS with two of PQ, QR, RP to zero B1√+ B1√

Using the plane equation as third equation, solve for x, y, and z M1

Obtain ON = i +2j, or equivalent A1

Carry out method for finding SN M1
Show that SN = 7 correctly A1

OR: Use Cartesian formula or scalar product of PS with a normal vector to find SN M1
Obtain SN = 7 A1
State a unit normal n̂ to the plane B1√

Use ON = OS ± 7n̂ M1

Obtain an unsimplified expression e.g. 3i + 5j –6k ± 7( 72 i + 73 j − 76 k ) A1√

Obtain ON = i +2j, or equivalent, only A1 6

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1844 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

June 2004

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/04

MATHEMATICS
Paper 4 (Mechanics 1)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1845
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 4

1 (i) F = 13 cos α M1 For resolving forces horizontally

Frictional component is 12 N A1 2
(ii) R = 1.1 × 10 + 13 sin α M1 For resolving forces vertically (3
terms needed)
Normal component is 16 N A1 2
(iii) Coefficient of friction is 0.75 B1 ft 1

2 X = 100 + 250cos70o B1
Y = 300 – 250sin70o B1
R2 = 185.52 + 65.12 M1 For using R 2 = X 2 + Y 2
R = 197 A1 ft ft only if one B1 is scored or if
the expressions for the
candidate’s X and Y are those
of the equilibrant
tanα = 65.1/ 185.5 M1 For using tanα = Y / X
α = 19.3 A1 ft 6 ft only if one B1 is scored
SR for sin/cos mix (max 4/6)
X = 100 + 250sin70o and
Y = 300 – 250cos 70o
( 334.9 and 214.5) B1
Method marks as scheme M1 M1
R = 398 N and α = 32.6 A1
OR
316(.227766..) or 107(.4528..) or B1 Magnitude of the resultant of
299(.3343..) two of the forces
71.565 …o or 37.2743 .. o or B1 Direction of the resultant of two
–51.7039 .. o of the forces
2 2 2
R = 316.2 + 250 – M1 For using the cosine rule to find
2 × 316.2 × 250cos38.4o R
R2 = 107.52 + 1002 –
2 × 107.5 × 100cos142.7o
R2 = 299.32 + 3002 –
2 × 299.3 × 300cos38.3o
R = 197 A1 ft ft only if one B1 is scored
sin(71.6 - α ) = 250sin38.4 ÷ 197 M1 For using the sine rule to find α
sin(37.3 - α ) = 100sin142.7 ÷ 197
sin(51.7 + α ) = 300sin38.3 ÷ 197
α = 19.3o A1 ft ft only if one B1 is scored

3 (i) Distance AC is 70 m B1
7 × 10 - 4 × 15 M1 For using |AB| = |AC| - |BC|
Distance AB is 10 m A1 3
(ii) x(m) M1 Graph consists of 3 connected
straight line segments with, in
70 order, positive, zero and
negative slopes. x(t) is single
valued and the graph contains
the origin
A1 1st line segment appears
10 steeper than the 3rd and the 3rd
t(s) line segment does not terminate
10 15 30 on the t-axis
A1 ft 3 Values of t (10, 15 and 30) and
x (70, 70, 10) shown, or can be
read without ambiguity from the
scales
SR (max 1out of 3 marks)
For first 2 segments correct B1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1846 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 4

4 (i) KE = 0.2g(0.7) M1 For using KE = PE lost and PE

lost = mgh
Kinetic energy is 1.4 J A1 2
(ii) R = 0.2 × 10 × cos16.3 o
B1 1.92
F = 0.288 N B1 ft From 0.15R (may be implied by
subsequent exact value 0.72,
1.36 or 0.68)
WD = 0.72 J or a = 1.36 B1 ft From 2.5F or from
or resultant downward force 0.2a = 0.2 × 10 × (7/25) – F
= 0.272 N (may be implied by subsequent
exact value 0.68)
KE = 1.4 – 0.72 or M1 For using KE = PE lost – WD
KE = ½ 0.2(2 × 1.36 × 2.5) or or
0.272 × 2.5 KE = ½ mv2 and v2 = 2as or
KE = resultant downward force
× 2.5
Kinetic energy is 0.68 J A1 ft 5

5 (i) 10t2 – 0.25t4 (+C) M1 For integrating v

DM1 For including constant of
integration and attempting to
evaluate it
Expression is 10t2 – 0.25t4 - 36 A1 3
(ii) Displacement is 60 m A1 ft 1 Dependent on both M marks in
(i); ft if there is not more than
one error in s(t)
(iii) (t2 – 36)(1 – 0.25t2) = 0 M1 For attempting to solve s = 0
(depends on both method
t
marks in (i)) or ∫ vdt =36 (but
0
not –36) for t2 by factors or
formula method
Roots of quadratic are 4, 36 A1
t = 2, 6 A1 ft 3 ft only from 3 term quadratic in
t2

6 (i) M1 For using Newton’s 2nd law (3

terms needed)
DF – 400 = 1200 × 0.5 A1
20000 = 1000v M1 For using P = Fv
Speed is 20 ms-1 A1 4
(ii) 20000/v - 400 = 0 M1 For using P = Fv and Newton’s
2nd law with a = 0 and F = 400
vmax = 50 ms-1 A1 2 AG
(iii) 20000 = 1500000 or M1 For using ∆W or for using
P =
∆T ∆T
distance = 1500 000/400 = 3750 ‘distance = work done/400’ and
and ‘time =distance/50’
time = 3750/50
Time taken is 75 s A1 2

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1847
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709 4

7 (i) 25 = 30t – 5t2 t2 – 6t + 5 = 0 M1 For using 25 = ut – ½ gt2 and

(t – 1)(t – 5) = 0 attempting to solve for t
or or for using v2 = u2 – 2g(25) and
v2 = 302 – 500; tup = (20 – 0)/10 tup = (v – 0)/g
t = 1, 5 or tup = 2 A1
Time = 5 – 1 = 4 s or A1 3
Time = 2 × 2 = 4s or 1 < t < 5
(ii) s1 = 30t – 5t2 and s2 = 10t – 5t2 M1 For using s = ut – ½ gt2 for P1
and P2
30t – 10t = 25 M1 For using s1 = s2 + 25 and
attempting to solve for t
t = 1.25 A1
v1 = 30 – 10 × 1.25 or M1 For using v = u – gt (either
v2 = 10 – 10 × 1.25 case) or for calculating s1 and
or substituting into
v12 = 302 – 2 × 10(29.6875) or v12 = 302 – 2 × 10s1 or
v22 = 102 – 2 × 10(4.6875) calculating s2 and substituting
into v22 = 102 – 2 × 10s2
Velocities 17.5ms-1 and – 2.5ms-1 A1 5
OR
(ii) v1 = 30 –10t, v2 = 10 – 10t M1 For using v = u –gt for P1 and
v1 – v2 = 20 P2 and eliminating t
M1 For using v2 = u2 – 2gs for P1
and P2 and then s1 = s2 + 25
(302 – v12) ÷ 20 = A1
(102 – v22) ÷ 20 +25
v1 – v2 = 20, v12 – v22 = 300 M1 For solving simultaneous
equations in v1 and v2
Velocities are 17.5 ms-1 and A1 5
– 2.5 ms-1
(iii) tup = 3 B1
3 – 1.25 M1 For using tup and above = tup – tequal
Time is 1.75 s or 1.25 < t < 3 A1 3
OR
(iii) 0 = 17.5 - 10t M2 For using 0 = u – gt with u equal
to the answer found for v1 in (ii)
Time is 1.75 s or 1.25 < t < 3 A1
SR (max 1 out of 3 marks)
0 = 17.5 + 10t B1 ft

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1848 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

June 2004

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/05, 8719/05

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

Paper 5 (Mechanics 2)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1849
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 5

Mechanics 2

1 For taking moments about the edge of the platform M1

(75g x 0.9 = 25g x x + 10g x 1.1 (3 term equation)
Two terms correct (unsimplified) A1
Completely correct (unsimplified) A1
Distance MC = 3.16m A1 4

NB: If moments taken about other points, the force of the platform on the
plank must be present at the edge of the platform for M1

2r sin α π
2 (i) Evaluates × cos M1
3α 4
Obtains given answer correctly A1 2

(ii) For taking moments about AB M1

1 1 20
{(5 x 10 + π 52) x = (5 x 10) x 5 + π 52(10 + )}
4 4 3π
For the total area correct and the moment of the rectangle correct
(unsimplified) A1
For the moment of CDE correct (unsimplified) A1
Distance is 7.01 cm A1 4

dv
3 For applying Newton’s 2nd law and using a = v M1
dx
dv 3
0 .6 v =− 3 A1
dx x
For separating the variables and integrating M1
3 x −2
0.3v 2 = − (+C) A1 ft
(−2)
(ft omission of minus sign in line 2 only)
For using = 0 when x = 10 M1
2 5 1
ν = 2− (aef) A1 ft
x 20
(ft wrong sign in line 4 only)
3
Speed is ms-1 (=0.866) A1 7
2

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past Paper International Examinations
Collection 2004
EliteEduA@gmail.com
1850 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 5

2 .4
4 (i) Distance of the rod from the hinge is (0.7) or 0.7cos16.26° (=0.672) B1
2.5
[May be implied in moment equation]
For taking moments about the hinge (3 term equation) M1
0.672F = 68 x 1.2 + 750 x 2.4 A1 ft
Force is 2800 N A1 4

(ii) X = 784 (ft for 0.28F) B1 ft

For resolving vertically (4 term equation) M1
Y = 1870 (ft for 0.96F – 818) A1 ft 3

SR: For use of 680 N for weight of the beam: (i) B1, M1, A0. In (ii) ft 680,
so 3/3 possible.

λx 2
5 (i) For using EPE = M1
2L
 200 x 2 
EPE gain = 2  (=50x2) A1
 2× 4 
GPE loss = 10g (4 + x) B1
For using the principle of conservation of energy to form an equation M1
containing EPE, GPE and KE terms
[½10 2
+ 50x2 = 10g (4 + x)]
Given answer obtained correctly A1 5

ALTERNATIVE METHOD:
200x
T= B1
4
 200 x  dv
100 − 2  = 10v M1
 4  dx
1 v 2 = 10 x − 5 x 2 (+C) A1
2

Use x = 0, 2 = 8g M1
2
= 10(8 + 2x – x2) A1

(ii) For using = 0 and factorizing or using formula method for solving M1
x = 4 (only) A1 2

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past Paper International Examinations 2004
Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1851
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 5

25 2 × 10
6 (i) 2 = VTsin35° – 5T2 or 2 = 25tan35°– B1
2V 2 cos 2 35°
25 = VTcos35° B1
For obtaining V2 or T2 in AV2 = B or CT2 = D form where A,B,C,D are
numerical M1
2 2
[[(25tan35° – 2)cos 35°]V = 3125 (aef) or
5T2 = 25tan35° – 2 (aef)]

V = 17.3 or T = 1.76 A1
T = 1.76 or V = 17.3 (ft VT = 30.519365) B1 ft 5

(ii) For using y& = V sin 35° − gT (must be component of V for M1) M1

y& M (= 9.94 – 17.61 = -7.67) < 0 → moving downwards A1 ft

(ft on V and T)
2
For using M
2
= (Vcos35°)2 + y& M M1
2
( M = ((14.20)2 + (-7.67)2) or
For using the principle of conservation of energy
2
( 1 2 m(v M − 17.32 ) = − mg × 2 )

M = 16.1 ms-1 A1 4

LINES 1 AND 2 ALTERNATIVE METHODS

 v 2 sin 70° 
EITHER Compare 25 with 1
2 R 12  M1
 g 
25 > 14.1 → moving downwards A1

 V sin 35° 
OR Compare 1.76 with time to greatest height   M1
 g 
1.76 > 0.994 → moving downwards A1

dy g .10
OR = tan 35° − 2 (= −0.54) used M1
dx V cos 2 35°
As tanφ is negative → moving downwards A1

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past Paper International Examinations
Collection 2004
EliteEduA@gmail.com
1852 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 5

7 (i) Tcos60° = 0.5g (T = 10) B1

2
v
For applying Newton’s 2nd law horizontally and using a = M1
r
(must be a component of T for M1)
0.5v 2
T sin 60° = (for an equation in V2) A1
0.15 sin 60°
For substituting for T M1
= 1.5 A1 5

ALTERNATIVELY:
v2
a= B1
0.15 sin 60°
For applying Newton’s 2nd law perpendicular to the string M1
0.5g cos30° = 0.5(acos60°) A1
For substituting for a M1
(5cos30° = 0.5 /0.15tan60°) (for an equation in V2)
2

= 1.5 A1

0.5(0.9) 2
(ii) (a) T sin 45° = B1
0.15 sin 45°
Tension is 5.4 N B1 2

(b) For resolving forces vertically M1

5.4cos45° + R = 0.5g A1 ft
Force is 1.18 N A1 3

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics of Cambridge
3 Past Paper International Examinations 2004
Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1853

June 2004

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

AICE

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/06, 0390/06

MATHEMATICS
Paper 6 (Probability and Statistics 1)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1854 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/0390 6

x A = 139 (138.75) B1 For the mean

1 (i) B1 For the sd
σ A = 83.1
2

(ii) team B B1 Independent mark

smaller standard deviation B1 dep Need the idea of spread
2 SR If team A has a smaller sd then award
B1only for ‘teamA, smaller sd’

2 (i) axes and labels B1 For correct uniform scales and labels on
points both axes, accept Frequency, %CF,
Number of people, allow axes reversed,
allow halves
(3,0) (15,160) (20,320) (35,480) B1 For 3 correct points
(60,640) B1 All points correct and reasonable graph incl
3 straight lines

(ii) accept 60 – 70 for straight lines M1 For subtracting from 640 can be implied
40 – 70 for curve
A1 For correct answer, reasonably compatible
2 with graph

3 (i)
x 1 2 3 4 5 6 M1 For 36 in the uncancelled denominator
P(X = x) 11 9 7 5 3 1 somewhere, accept decimals eg 0.305
36 36 36 36 36 36 recurring or 0.306 etc
A1 For 3 correct probabilities
A1 All correct
3

(ii) E(X) = 1 × 11 36 + 2 × 9 36 + 3 × 7 36 + M1 For calculation of ∑ xp where all probs < 1

4 × 5 36 + 5 × 3 36 + 6 × 1 36 = 91 36
A1
2
350 − 450
z=
4 (i) 120 M1 For standardising accept 120 or √120, no cc
= −0.833 A1 For correct z value, + or -, accept 0.83
% small = 1 – 0.7975 = 0.2025 or A1 For answer rounding to 0.202 or 0.203
20.25% 3

(ii) 0.7975 ÷ 2 = 0.39875 each M1 For dividing their remainder by 2

Φz2 = 0.60125 M1dep For adding their above two probs together
or subt from 1
z2 = 0.257 M1 For finding the z corresponding to their
probability
x = 120 × 0.257 + 450 M1dep For converting to x from a z value
= 481 A1 For answer, rounding to 481
5

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1855
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/0390 6

5 (a) (i) 3 × 5 × 3 × 2 or M1 For multiplying 3 × 5 × 3

3C1 × 5C1 × 3C1 × 2 A1 For correct answer
= 90
2

(ii) (3 × 5 × 2) + (3 × 3) + (5 × 2 × 3) M1 For summing options that show

= 69 S&M,S&D,M&D
M1 3 × 5 × a + 3 × 3 × b + 5 × 3 × c seen
for integers a,b,c
A1 3 For correct answer

(b) × 9C5 ×
14 C5 4C4 or equivalent For using combinations not all 14C…
= 252252 M1 For multiplying choices for two or three
M1 groups
A1 For correct answer
NB 14!/5!5!4! scores M2 and A1if
3 correct answer
6 (i)
B1 For top branches correct (0.65, 0.9,
0.9 Win
0.1)

1 st in B1 For bottom branches correct (0.35,

0.65 0.1 Lose
0.6 Win 0.8, 0.2)
0.8 2 nd in 0.4 B1 For win/lose option after 2nd in (0.6,
Lose
0.35 0.4)
1 st out

0.2 2nd out

B1 For all labels including final lose at
1 end of bottom branch
Lose 4

) (ii) 0.65 × 0.1+ 0.35 × 0.8 × 0.4 + 0.35 × 2 M1 For evaluating 1st in and lose seen
M1 For 1st out 2nd in lose, or 1st out 2nd out
= 0.247 lose
A1 For correct answer
3

0.65 × 0.1 For dividing their 1st in and lose by

(iii) M1 their answer to (ii)
0.247

= 0.263 (= 5/19) A1ft For correct answer, ft only on

2 0.65 × 0.1/their (ii)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1856 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/0390 6

7 (i) P(0) = (0.8)15 (= 0.03518) B1 For correct numerical expression for

P(1) = 15C1 × (0.2) × (0.8)14 P(0)
(= 0.1319)
P(2) = 15C2 × (0.2)2 × (0.8)13
(= 0.2309) B1 For correct numerical expression for
P(1) or P(2)
P ( X ≤ 2) = 0.398 B1 For answer rounding to 0.398
3

(ii) 1 – (0.8)n ≥ 0.85 M1 For an equality/inequality involving

0.15 ≥ (0.8) n 0.8, n, 0.85
M1 dep For solving attempt (could be trial and
n=9 error or lg)
A1 For correct answer
3

(iii) µ = 1600 × 0.2 = 320 , B1 For both mean and variance correct
2 M1 For standardising , with or without cc,
σ = 1600 × 0.2 × 0.8 = 256
must have on denom
P( X ≥ 290) or P(X<350)
 289.5 − 320  M1 For use of continuity correction 289.5
= 1 − Φ  = 1 − Φ (−1.906)
 or 290.5
 256 

M1 For finding an area > 0.5 from their z

= Φ(1.906) = 0.972
A1 For answer rounding to 0.972
5

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2004 1857

June 2004

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/07, 8719/07

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

Paper 7 (Probability and Statistics 2)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1858 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 7

1 (i) H0: µ = 15 or p = 0.25 B1 1 For H0 and H1 correct

H1: µ > 15 or p > 0.25

(ii) Test statistic M1 For attempt at standardising with or without

21.5 − 15 cc, must have something with 60 in on the
z= ± = 1.938
60 × 0.25 × 0.75 denom

OR test statistic
22 − 0.5 − 15 A1 For 1.94 (1.938)
z= ± 60 60 60 = 1.938
0.25 × 0.75
60

CV z = 1.645 M1 For comparing with 1.645 or 1.96 if 2-tailed,

signs consistent, or comparing areas to 5%
In CR Claim justified A1ft For correct answer(ft only for correct one-tail
4 test)

2 (i) Mean = 3.5 + 2.9 + 3.1 = 9.5 B1 9.5 as final answer

Var = 0.32 + 0.252 + 0.352 (=0.275) M1 For summing three squared deviations
St dev = 0.524 A1 3 For correct answer

9 − 9.5
(ii) z = = −1.907 M1 For standardising, no cc
their var
their var
4 M1 For or √(4 x their var) in denom -
or z = ___36-38 = –1.907 4
√(4 x their var) no ‘mixed’ methods.
Φ (1.907) = 0.9717 = 0.972 A1 3 For correct answer

3 (i) E(2X-3Y) = 2E(X) –3E(Y) = 16 – 18 M1 For multiplying by 2 and 3 resp and subt
=-2 A1 2 For correct answer

(ii) Var (2X-3Y) = 4Var (X) +9Var (Y) B1 For use of var (Y) = 6
= 19.2 + 54 M1 For squaring 3 and 2
M1 For adding variances (and nothing else)
= 73.2 A1 4 For correct final answer

4 (i) x = 375.3 B1 For correct mean (3.s.f)

σ 2
n −1 = 8.29 M1 For legit method involving n-1, can be implied
A1 3 For correct answer

(ii) p = 0.19 or equiv. B1 For correct p

pq
0.19 × 0.81 M1 For correct form p ± z × either/both sides
0.19 ± 2.055 × n
200
B1 For z = 2.054 or 2.055
0.133 < p < 0.247 A1 4 For correct answer

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2004 1859
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – JUNE 2004 9709/8719 7

c − 54 B1 For + or – 1.282 seen

5 (i) = -1.282
3.1 / 10 M1 For equality/inequality with their z ( ± ) (must
have used tables), no 10 needed (c can be
numerical)
3.1 A1 For correct expression (c can be numerical,
c = 54 − 1.282 × = 52.74
10 but signs must be consistent)
A1 4 For correct GIVEN answer. No errors seen.

B1 For identifying the outcome for a type II

 52.74 − 51.5  error
(ii) P( x > 52.74) = 1 - Φ 
 3.1 / 10  M1 For standardising , no 10 needed
= 1 − Φ (1.265) = 1 − 0.8971 A1 For ± 1.265 (accept 1.26-1.27)

= 0.103 or 0.102 A1 4 For correct answer

65
6 (i) P(5) = e − 6 × = 0.161 M1 For an attempted Poisson P(5) calculation,
5! any mean
A1 2 For correct answer

(ii) P(X ≥ 2 ) = 1 –{P(0) + P(1)} B1 For µ = 1.6, evaluated in a Poisson prob

= 1 - e −1.6 (1 + 1.6) M1 For 1 – P(0) – P(1) or 1 – P(0) – P(1) – P(2)

= 0.475 A1 3 For correct answer

(iii) M1 For multiplying P(1) by P(4) any (consistent)

 34  mean
e −3 × 3 ×  e −3 × 
4! 
( ) M1 For dividing by P(5) any mean

P(1 then 4 5 ) = 5
6
e −6 ×
5! A1 3 For correct answer
= 0.156 or 5/32
5

∫
7 (i) c t (25 − t 2 ) dt = 1 M1 For equating to 1 and a sensible attempt to
0 integrate
5
 25t 2 t 4 
c −  = 1 A1 For correct integration and correct limits
 2 4 
0
 625 625  4
c − = 1 ⇒c=
 2 4  625 A1 3 For given answer correctly obtained
4 4
 25ct 2 ct 4  M1* For attempting to integrate f(t) between 2
∫
(ii) ct (25 − t 2 ) dt =  −  = c[136] − c[46]
 2 4  and 4 (or attempt 2 and 4)
2 2
M1*dep For subtracting their value when t = 2 from
72 their value when t = 4
= (0.576)
125 A1 3 For correct answer

5
 4 25t 3 4 t5 
5 M1* For attempting to integrate tf(t), no limits
(iii) ∫ ct 2 (25 − t 2 ) dt = 
 625
×
3
− × 
625 5  needed
0 0 A1 For correct integrand can have c (or their c)
8 M1*dep For subtracting their value when t=0 from
=
3 their value when t=5
A1 4 For correct answer

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1860 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

Year 2003

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 Solve the inequality 2x − 8 < 5. [4]

2 Expand (2 + x2 )−2 in ascending powers of x, up to and including the term in x4 , simplifying the
coefﬁcients. [4]

3 Solve the equation

cos θ + 3 cos 2θ = 2,
giving all solutions in the interval 0◦ ≤ θ ≤ 180◦ . [5]

4 The equation of a curve is

√ √ √
x + y = a,
where a is a positive constant.

dy
(i) Express in terms of x and y. [3]
dx

(ii) The straight line with equation y = x intersects the curve at the point P. Find the equation of the
tangent to the curve at P. [3]

5 (i) By sketching suitable graphs, show that the equation

sec x = 3 − x2

has exactly one root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π . [2]

(ii) Show that, if a sequence of values given by the iterative formula

1
xn+1 = cos−1
3 − x2n

converges, then it converges to a root of the equation given in part (i). [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula, with initial value x1 = 1, to determine the root in the interval 0 < x < 12 π
correct to 2 decimal places, showing the result of each iteration. [3]

9709/03/O/N/03
3

6
y

x
O A
M

The diagram shows the curve y = (3 − x)e−2x and its minimum point M . The curve intersects the
x-axis at A and the y-axis at B.

(i) Calculate the x-coordinate of M . [4]

(ii) Find the area of the region bounded by OA, OB and the curve, giving your answer in terms of e.
[5]

7 + 4i
7 The complex number u is given by u = .
3 − 2i

(i) Express u in the form x + iy, where x and y are real. [3]

(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the point representing the complex number u. Show on the
same diagram the locus of the complex number such that − u = 2. [3]

(iii) Find the greatest value of arg for points on this locus. [3]

x3 − x − 2
8 Let f(x) = .
(x − 1)(x2 + 1)

(i) Express f(x) in the form

B Cx + D
A+ + 2 ,
x−1 x +1
where A, B, C and D are constants. [5]
3
(ii) Hence show that f(x) dx = 1. [4]
2

9709/03/O/N/03 [Turn over

9 Compressed air is escaping from a container. The pressure of the air in the container at time t is P,
and the constant atmospheric pressure of the air outside the container is A. The rate of decrease of
P is proportional to the square root of the pressure difference (P − A). Thus the differential equation
connecting P and t is
dP √
= −k (P − A),
dt
where k is a positive constant.

(i) Find, in any form, the general solution of this differential equation. [3]
√
(ii) Given that P = 5A when t = 0, and that P = 2A when t = 2, show that k = A. [4]

(iii) Find the value of t when P = A. [2]

(iv) Obtain an expression for P in terms of A and t. [2]

10 The lines l and m have vector equations

r = i − 2k + s(2i + j + 3k) and r = 6i − 5j + 4k + t ( i − 2j + k )

respectively.

(i) Show that l and m intersect, and ﬁnd the position vector of their point of intersection. [5]

(ii) Find the equation of the plane containing l and m, giving your answer in the form ax + by + c = d.
[6]

9709/03/O/N/03
1864 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level
Advanced International Certificate of Education

MARK SCHEME for the November 2003 question papers

MATHEMATICS

9709/01 Paper 1 (Pure 1), maximum raw mark 75

9709/02 Paper 2 (Pure 2), maximum raw mark 50

9709/03, 8719/03 Paper 3 (Pure 3), maximum raw mark 75

9709/04 Paper 4 (Mechanics 1), maximum raw mark 50

9709/05, 8719/05 Paper 5 (Mechanics 2), maximum raw mark 50

9709/06, 0390/06 Paper 6 (Probability and Statistics 1),

maximum raw mark 50

9709/07, 8719/07 Paper 7 (Probability and Statistics 2),

maximum raw mark 50

Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.

• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.

CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2003 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level syllabuses.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2003 1865
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus
MATHEMATICS – NOVEMBER 2003 9709

Mark Scheme Notes

• Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula
being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can
be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 PastofPaper
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate
Collection 2003
EliteEduA@gmail.com
1866 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus
MATHEMATICS – NOVEMBER 2003 9709

• The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

• MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

question or part question are genuinely misread and the object and
difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks
then become "follow through √"marks. MR is not applied when the
candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at
the coordination meeting.

• PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© University
Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 PastofPaper
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1867

November 2003

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 75

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/01

MATHEMATICS
Pure Mathematics : Paper One

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1868 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 1

1 x(11-2x) = 12 M1 Complete elimination of x, or of y.

2x²-11x+12=0 A1 Correct quadratic. (or y²-11y+24=0)
Solution of quadratic DM1 Correct method of solution→2values
→ (1½,8) and (4,3) A1 All correct
[4] (guesswork or TI B1 for one pair of
values, full marks for both)
2 (i) 4s⁴+5=7(1-s²) →4x²+7x-2=0 B1 Use of s²+c²=1. Answer given.
[1]
(ii) 4s⁴+7s²-2=0
M1 Recognition of quadratic in s²
→ s² = ¼ or s² = -2
→ sinθ = ±½
→ θ = 30° and 150° A1A1√ Co. For 180° - “his value”
and θ = 210° and 330° A1√ For other 2 answers from “his value”,
[4] providing no extra answers in the range or
answers from s²=−1

3 (a) a=60, n=48, Sn=3726

Sn formula used M1 Correct formula (M0 if nth term used)
→ d = $0.75 A1 Co
3rd term = a+2d = $61.50 A1√ Use of a+2d with his d. 61.5 ok.
[3]
(b) a=6 ar =4 ∴ r=⅔ M1 a, ar correct, and r evaluated
S∞ = a/(1-r) = 18 M1A1 Correct formula used, but needs r <1 for
[3] M mark

4 (i) y = x³ - 2x² + x ( +c ) B2,1,0 Co - unsimplified ok.

(1,5) used to give c= 5 B1√ Must have integrated + use of x=1and y=5
[3] for c

(ii) 3x²-4x+1>0 M1 Set to 0 and attempt to solve.

1 Co for end values – even if <,>,=,etc
→ end values of 1 and 3
A1
→ x< 13 and x>1
A1 Co (allow ≤ and ≥). Allow 1<x< 13
[3]

5 (i) m of BC = ½ B1 Co
Eqn BC y-6=½(x-4) M1A1√ Correct form of eqn. √ on m=”½.”
m of CD = -2 M1 Use of m1m2=-1
eqn CD y-5=-2(x-12) A1√ √ on his “½” but needs both M marks.
[5]

(ii) Sim eqns 2y=x+8 and y+2x=29 M1 Method for solving

→ C (10,9) A1 Co
[2] Diagram only for (ii), allow B1 for (10,9)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1869
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 1

6 (i) 20 = 2r + rθ M1 Eqn formed + use of rθ + at least one r

→ θ = (20 / r) –2 A1 Answer given.
[2]

(ii) A = ½r²θ M1 Appropriate use of ½r²θ

→ A = 10r -r² A1 Co – but ok unsimplified –eg ½r²(20/r)–2)
[2]

(iii)
Cos rule PQ² = 8²+8²-2.8.8cos0.5 M1 Recognition of “chord” +any attempt at
trigonometry in triangle.
Or trig PQ = 2×8sin0.25 A1 Correct expression for PQ or PQ².

→ PQ = 3.96 (allow 3.95). A1 Co

[3]

7 (i) Height = 4 B1 Pythagoras or guess – anywhere, 4k ok.

[1]

(ii) MC = 3i-6j-4k B2,1√ √ for “4”. Special case B1 for –3i+6j+4k

MN = 6j – 4k B1√ √ on “4”. Accept column vectors.
[3]
(nb if (ii) incorrect, but answers are
correct in (iii) allow feedback).

(iii) MC.MN = -36+16 = -20 M1A1√ Use of x1y1+x2y2+x3y3. √ on MC and MN

MC.MN = √61√52 cosθ M1 Product of two moduli and cos θ.
→ θ = 111° A1 Co.
[4]
Nb If both MC and MN “reversed”, allow
111° for full marks.

8
(i) y = 72÷(2x²) or 36÷x² B1 Co from volume = lbh .
A = 4x²+6xy M1 Attempts most of the faces(4 or more)
→ A = 4x² + 216÷x A1 Co – answer was given.
[3]

(ii) dA/dx = 8x – 216÷x² M1 Reasonable attempt at differentiation.

= 0 when 8x³=216 DM1 Sets his differential to 0 and uses.
→ x=3 A1 Co. ( answer = ±3 loses last A mark)
[3]

(iii) Stationary value = 108 cm² A1√ For putting his x into his A. Allow in (ii).

d²A/dx²=8+432÷x³ M1 Correct method – could be signs of dA/dx

→ Positive when x=3 Minimum. A1 A mark needs d²A/dx² correct
[3] algebraically, + x=3 + minimum. It does
not need “24”.

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1870 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 1

9 (i) dy/dx = -24/(3x+2)² M1A1 Use of fn of fn. Needs ×3 for M mark. Co.

Eqn of tangent y-1=-⅜(x-2) M1A1√ Use of line form with dy/dx. Must use
Cuts y=0 when x=4⅔ calculus. √ on his dy/dx. Normal M0.
4
Area of Q = ½×2⅔×1 = M1A1 Needs y=0 and ½bh for M mark.
3
[6] (beware fortuitous answers)

(ii) Vol =π ∫y²dx =π∫64(3x+2)-2dx M1 Uses ∫y² + some integration → (3x+2)k.

=π [- 64(3x+2)-1 ÷ 3] A1A1 A1 without the ÷3. A1 for ÷3 and π
Limits from 0 to 2 DM1 Correct use of 0 and 2. DMO if 0 ignored.
→ 8π A1 Co. Beware fortuitous answers.
[5]

10
(i) fg(x) = g first, then f M1 Correct order - g first, then into f.
= 8/(2-x) – 5 = 7 DM1 Correct method of solution of fg=7.
1
→ x =1 A1 Co. (nb gf gets 0/3)
3
1 [3] (M1 for 6. M1 for g(x)=6. A1)
( or f(A)=7, A = 6, g(x) = 6, → x = 1 )
3

(ii) f-1 = ½(x+5) B1 Anywhere in the question.

Makes y the subject y = 4÷(2-x) M1 For changing the subject.
→ g-1 = 2 – ( 4÷x) A1 Co – any correct answer. (A0 if f(y).)
[3]

(iii) 2-4/x =½ (x+5)

→ x²+x+8=0 M1 Algebra leading to a quadratic.
Use of b²-4ac → Negative value M1 Quadratic=0 + use of b²-4ac.
→ No roots. A1 Correct deduction from correct quadratic.
[3]

(iv)
B1 Sketch of f
B1 Sketch of f -1
B1 Evidence of symmetry about y=x.
[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1871

November 2003

GCE AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/02

MATHEMATICS
Pure Mathematics : Paper Two

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1872 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 2

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality e.g. -2 < 8-3x < 2, or (8-3x)2 < 22,
or corresponding equation or pair of equations M1
1
Obtain critical values 2 and 3 A1
3
1
State correct answer 2 < x < 3 A1
3

OR: State one critical value (probably x = 2), from a graphical method or by
inspection or by solving a linear equality or equation B1
State the other critical value correctly B1
1
State correct answer 2 < x < 3 B1
3

[3]

2 State or imply at any stage ln y = ln k - xln a B1

Equate estimate of ln y- intercept to ln k M1
Obtain value for k in the range 9.97 ± 0.51 A1
Calculate gradient of the line of data points M1
Obtain value for a in the range 2.12 ± 0.11 A1

[5]

3 (i) EITHER: Substitute −1 for x and equate to zero M1

Obtain answer a=6 A1

OR: Carry out complete division and equate remainder to zero M1

Obtain answer a=6 A1
[2]

(ii) Substitute 6 for a and either show f(x) = 0 or divide by (x − 2) obtaining a

remainder of zero B1
EITHER: State or imply (x + 1)(x − 2)= x2 – x − 2 B1
Attempt to find another quadratic factor by division or inspection M1
State factor (x2 + x – 3) A1

OR: Obtain x3 + 2x2 – 2x – 3 after division by x + 1, or x3 – x2 – 5x + 6

after division by x - 2 B1
Attempt to find a quadratic factor by further division by relevant divisor
or by inspection M1
State factor (x2 + x – 3) A1

[4]

4 (i) State answer R = 2 B1

Use trig formula to find α M1
1
Obtain answer α = π A1
3
[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1873
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 2

(ii) Carry out, or indicate need for, evaluation of cos-1( 2 /2) M1*
7
Obtain, or verify, the solution θ = π A1
12
Attempt correct method for the other solution in range
i.e. –cos-1( 2 /2) + α
M1(dep*)
1 25π
Obtain solution θ = π : [M1A0 for ] A1
12 12
[4]

5 (i) Make recognisable sketch of y = 2x or y = x2, for x < 0 B1

Sketch the other graph correctly B1

[2]

(ii) Consider sign of 2x − x2 at x = −1 and x = −0.5, or equivalent M1

Complete the argument correctly with appropriate calculations A1

[2]

(iii) Use the iterative form correctly M1

Obtain final answer −0.77 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 2 s.f., or show there
is a sign change in the interval (−0.775, −0.765) A1

[3]

6 (i) State A is (4, 0) B1

State B is (0, 4) B1

[2]

(ii) Use the product rule to obtain the first derivative M1(dep)
Obtain derivative (4 − x)ex − ex, or equivalent A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve for x M1 (dep)
Obtain answer x = 3 only A1

[4]

(iii) Attempt to form an equation in p e.g. by equating gradients of OP

and the tangent at P, or by substituting (0, 0) in the equation of the
tangent at P M1
4− p
Obtain equation in any correct form e.g. =3–p A1
p
Obtain 3-term quadratic p2 – 4p + 4 = 0, or equivalent A1
Attempt to solve a quadratic equation in p M1
Obtain answer p = 2 only A1

[5]

7 (i) Attempt to differentiate using the quotient, product or chain rule M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Obtain the given answer correctly A1
[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1874 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 2

(ii) State or imply the indefinite integral is –cotx B1

Substitute limits and obtain given answer correctly B1
[2]
(iii) Use cot2x = cosec2x − 1 and attempt to integrate both terms,
or equivalent M1
Substitute limits where necessary and obtain a correct unsimplified
answer A1
1
Obtain final answer 3− π A1
3
[3]

(iv) Use cos 2A formula and reduce denominator to 2sin2x B1

Use given result and obtain answer of the form k 3 M1
1
Obtain correct answer 3 A1
2
[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1875

November 2003

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 75

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/03, 8719/03

MATHEMATICS
Mathematics and Higher Mathematics : Paper 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1876 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 3

1 EITHER: State or imply non-modular inequality −5 < 2 x − 8 < 5, or (2 x − 8) 2 < 52 or corresponding

pair of linear equations or quadratic equation B1
x
Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 2 = a M1
Obtain critical values 1.58 and 3.70, or exact equivalents A1
State correct answer 1.58 < x < 3.70 A1

OR: Use correct method for solving an equation of the form 2 x = a M1

Obtain one critical value (probably 3.70), or exact equivalent A1
Obtain the other critical value, or exact equivalent A1
State correct answer 1.58 < x < 3.70 A1

[4]

[Allow 1.59 and 3.7. Condone ≤ for <. Allow final answers given separately. Exact equivalents must be
in terms of ln or logarithms to base 10.]
[SR: Solutions given as logarithms to base 2 can only earn M1 and B1 of the first scheme.]

2 EITHER: Obtain correct unsimplified version of the x 2 or x 4 term of the expansion of

(1 + 12 x 2 ) −2 or ( 2 + x 2 ) −2 M1
State correct first term 1 B1
4
1 2 3 4
Obtain next two terms − x + 4 16
x A1+A1
 − 2
[The M mark is not earned by versions with unexpanded binomial coefficients such as   .]
 1 
[SR: Answers given as 1 (1 −
4
x2 + 3 x 4 ) earn
4
M1B1A1.]
2 −2
[SR: Solutions involving k (1 + 12 x ) , where k = 2, 4 or 12 can earn M1 and A1 for a correct
simplified term in x 2 or x 4 .]

OR: Differentiate expression and evaluate f(0) and f ′(0), where f ′(x) = kx (2 + x 2 ) −3 M1
State correct first term 14 B1
Obtain next two terms − 14 x 2 + 163 x 4 A1+A1
[Allow exact decimal equivalents as coefficients.]
[4]

3 Use correct cos 2A formula, or equivalent pair of correct formulas, to obtain an

equation in cos θ M1
Obtain 3-term quadratic 6 cos 2 θ + cosθ − 5 = 0 , or equivalent A1
Attempt to solve quadratic and reach θ = cos −1 (a ) M1
Obtain answer 33.6° (or 33.5°) or 0.586 (or 0.585) radians A1
Obtain answer 180° or π (or 3.14) radians and no others in range A1

[The answer θ = 180° found by inspection can earn B1.]

[Ignore answers outside the given range.]
[5]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1877
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 3

1 1 dy
4(i) EITHER Obtain terms and , or equivalent B1+B1
2 x 2 y dx
dy y
Obtain answer in any correct form, e.g. =− B1
dx x
OR: Using chain or product rule, differentiate ( a − x ) 2 M1
Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
dy
Express in terms of x and y only in any correct form A1
dx
a
OR: Expand ( a − x ) 2 , differentiate and obtain term − 2. , or equivalent B1
2 x
Obtain term 1 by differentiating an expansion of the form a + x ± 2 a x B1
dy
Express in terms of x and y only in any correct form B1
dx

[3]

(ii) State or imply coordinates of P are ( 14 a, 14 a ) B1

Form equation of the tangent at P M1
Obtain 3 term answer x + y = 12 a correctly, or equivalent A1

[3]

5 (i) Make recognizable sketch of y = sec x or y = 3 − x 2 , for 0 < x < 12 π B1

Sketch the other graph correctly and justify the given statement B1

[2]

[Award B1 for a sketch with positive y-intercept and correct concavity. A correct sketch of y = cos x can
only earn B1 in the presence of 1 /(3 − x 2 ) . Allow a correct single graph and its intersection with y = 0
to earn full marks.]

(ii) State or imply equation α = cos -1 (1 /(3 − α 2 )) or cos α = 1 /(3 − α 2 ) B1

2
Rearrange this in the form given in part (i) i.e. sec α = 3 − α B1

[2]
[Or work vice versa.]

(iii) Use the iterative formula with 0 ≤ x1 ≤ 2 M1

Obtain final answer 1.03 A1
Show sufficient iterations to justify its accuracy to 2d.p. or show there is a sign
change in the interval (1.025, 1.035) A1

[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1878 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 3

6 (i) Use product or quotient rule to find derivative M1

Obtain derivative in any correct form A1
Equate derivative to zero and solve a linear equation in x M1
Obtain answer 3 12 only A1

[4]

(ii) ∫
State first step of the form ± 12 (3 − x )e -2 x ± 12 e -2 x dx , with or without 3 M1

State correct first step e.g. − 12 (3 − x )e −2 x

− 12 ∫ e -2 x dx , or equivalent, with or
without 3 A1
Complete the integration correctly obtaining − 12 (3 − x )e −2 x + 14 e −2 x , or equivalent A1
Substitute limits x = 0 and x = 3 correctly in the complete integral M1
Obtain answer 14 (5 + e −6 ) , or exact equivalent (allow e 0 in place of 1) A1

[5]

7 (i) EITHER: Attempt multiplication of numerator and denominator by 3 + 2i,

or equivalent M1
Simplify denominator to 13 or numerator to 13 + 26i A1
Obtain answer u = 1 + 2i A1

OR: Using correct processes, find the modulus and argument of u M1

Obtain modulus 5 (or 2.24) or argument tan -1 2 (or 63.4° or 1.11 radians) A1
Obtain answer u = 1 + 2i A1

[3]

(ii) Show the point U on an Argand diagram in a relatively correct position B1√
Show a circle with centre U B1√
Show a circle with radius consistent with 2 B1√

[3]
[f.t. on the value of u.]

(iii) State or imply relevance of the appropriate tangent from O to the circle B1√
Carry out a complete strategy for finding max arg z M1
Obtain final answer 126.9° (2.21 radians) A1

[3]
[Drawing the appropriate tangent is sufficient for B1√.]
[A final answer obtained by measurement earns M1 only.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1879
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 3

8 (i) EITHER: Divide by denominator and obtain a quadratic remainder M1

Obtain A = 1 A1
Use any relevant method to obtain B, C or D M1
Obtain one correct answer A1
Obtain B = −1, C = 2, D = 0 A1

OR: Reduce RHS to a single fraction and identify numerator with that of f(x) M1
Obtain A =1 A1
Use any relevant method to obtain B, C or D M1
Obtain one correct answer A1
Obtain B = −1, C = 2, D = 0 A1

[5]

(ii) Integrate and obtain terms x − ln (x − 1), or equivalent B1√

Obtain third term ln ( x 2 + 1) , or equivalent B1√
Substitute correct limits correctly in the complete integral M1
Obtain given answer following full and exact working A1

[4]
[If B = 0 the first B1√ is not available.]
[SR: If A is omitted in part (i), treat as if A = 0. Thus only M1M1 and B1√B1√M1 are available.]

1
9 (i) Separate variables and attempt to integrate M1
( P − A)
Obtain term 2 ( P − A) A1
Obtain term − kt A1

[3]

(ii) Use limits P = 5A, t = 0 and attempt to find constant c M1

Obtain c = 4 A , or equivalent A1
Use limits P = 2A, t = 2 and attempt to find k M1
Obtain given answer k = A correctly A1

[4]

(iii) Substitute P = A and attempt to calculate t M1

Obtain answer t = 4 A1

[2]

(iv) Using answers to part (ii), attempt to rearrange solution to give P in terms of
A and t M1
Obtain P = 14 A(4 + (4 − t ) 2 ) , or equivalent, having squared A A1

[2]
[For the M1, ( P − A) must be treated correctly.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1880 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 3

10 (i) Express general point of l or m in component form e.g. (1 + 2s, s, − 2 + 3s) or

(6 + t, − 5 − 2t, 4 + t) B1
Equate at least two corresponding pairs of components and attempt to solve
for s or t M1
Obtain s = 1 or t = − 3 A1
Verify that all three component equations are satisfied A1
Obtain position vector 3i + j + k of intersection point, or equivalent A1

[5]

(ii) EITHER: Use scalar product to obtain 2a + b + 3c = 0 and a − 2b + c = 0 B1

Solve and find one ratio e.g. a : b M1
State one correct ratio A1
Obtain answer a : b : c = 7 : 1 : − 5, or equivalent A1
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point and values of a, b and c in general
equation of plane and calculate d M1
Obtain answer 7x + y − 5z = 17, or equivalent A1

OR: Using two points on l and one on m (or vice versa) state three simultaneous
equations in a, b, c and d e.g. 3a + b + c = d, a − 2c = d and 6a − 5b + 4c = d B1√
Solve and find one ratio e.g. a : b M1
State one correct ratio A1
Obtain a ratio of three unknowns e.g. a : b : c = 7 : 1 : − 5, or equivalent A1
Use coordinates of a relevant point and found ratio to find fourth unknown e.g. d M1
Obtain answer 7x + y − 5z = 17, or equivalent A1

OR: Form a correct 2-parameter equation for the plane,

e.g. r = i –2k + λ(2i+j + 3k) + µ(i –2j + k) B1√
State 3 equations in x, y, z, λ and µ M1
State 3 correct equations A1√
Eliminate λ and µ M1
Obtain equation in any correct unsimplified form A1
Obtain 7x + y –5z = 17, or equivalent A1

OR: Attempt to calculate vector product of vectors parallel to l and m M1

Obtain two correct components of the product A1
Obtain correct product, e.g. 7i +j –5z A1
State that the plane has equation of the form 7x + y –5z = d A1√
Substitute coordinates of a relevant point and calculate d M1
Obtain answer 7x + y –5z = 17, or equivalent A1

[6]
[The follow through is on 3i + j + k only.]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1881

November 2003

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/04

MATHEMATICS
Paper 4 (Mechanics 1)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1882 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 4

1 (i) The force is 320 N B1 1

(ii) For using Newton’s second law (3 terms needed) M1

320 – R = 100 × 0.5 A1 √

Resistance is 270 N A1 3

2 (i) Speed is 20 ms-1 B1 1

(ii) For using s = ½ gt2 45 = ½ 10t2 M1

Time taken is 3 s A1 2

(iii) For using v2 = u2 +2gs (40 2 = 30 2 + 2 × 10s ) M1

Distance fallen is 35 m A1 2

3 (i) For using the idea of work as a force times a distance

( 25 × 2 cos 15 o ) M1

Work done is 48.3 J A1 2

(ii) For resolving forces vertically (3 terms needed) M1

N + 25 sin 15 o = 3 × 10 A1 √
(√ cos instead of sin following sin instead of cos in (i))

Component is 23.5 N A1 3

4 (i) KE (gain) = ½ 0.15 × 82 B1

For using PE loss = KE gain M1

Height is 3.2 m A1 3

(ii) For using WD is difference in PE loss and KE gain M1

WD = 0.15 × 10 × 4 - ½ 0.15 × 62 A1

Work Done is 3.3 J A1 3

SR For candidates who treat AB as if it is straight and vertical

(implicitly or otherwise) Max 2 out of 6 marks.
(i) s = 82 ÷ (2 × 10) = 3.2 B1
(ii) a = 62 ÷ (2 × 4) = 4.5 and R = 0.15 × 10 – 0.15 × 4.5 = 0.825 and
WD = 4 × 0.825 = 3.3 B1

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1883
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 4

5 (i) For applying Newton’s second law to A or to B (3 terms

needed) M1

T – 0.6 = 0.4a or 0.1g – T = 0.1a A1

For a second of the above 2 equations or for

0.1g – 0.6 = 0.5a [Can be scored in part (ii)] B1
(Sign of a must be consistent with that in first equation)

Tension is 0.92 N A1 4

(ii) a = 0.8 B1

For using v = at M1

Speed = 1.2 ms-1 A1 3

6 (i) TBM = TAM or TBMcos30o = TAMcos30o B1

For resolving forces at M horizontally (2T sin 30 0 = 5)

or for using the sine rule in the triangle of forces
(T ÷ sin60o = 5 ÷ sin60o)
or for using Lami’s theorem (T ÷ sin120o = 5 ÷ sin120o) M1

Tension is 5 N A.G. A1 3

(ii) For resolving forces on B horizontally ( N = T sin 30 0 ) or

from symmetry (N = 5/2) or for using Lami’s theorem
(N ÷ sin150o = 5 ÷ sin90o) M1

For resolving forces on B vertically (3 terms needed) or for

using Lami’s theorem M1

0.2 × 10 + F = T cos 30 0 or
(0.2g + F) ÷ sin120o = T ÷ sin90o A1

For using F = µR ( 2.33 = 2.5µ ) M1

Coefficient is 0.932 A1 5

(iii) (0.2 + m)g – 2.33 = 5 cos 30 0 or mg = 2(2.33) B1 √

m = 0.466 B1 2

7 (i) For using the idea that area represents the distance travelled. M1

For any two of ½ × 100 × 4.8 , ½ × 200(4.8 + 7.2) ,

½ × 200 × 7.2 (240, 1200, 720) A1

Distance is 2160 m A1 3

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1884 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709 4

(ii) For using the idea that the initial acceleration is the gradient of
the first line segment or for using v = at (4.8 = 100a) or
v2 = 2as (4.82 = 2a × 240) M1

Acceleration is 0.048 ms-2 A1 2

(iii) a = 0.06 – 0.00024t B1

Acceleration is greater by 0.012 ms-2 [√ for 0.06 – ans(ii)

(must be +ve) and/or wrong coefficient of t in a(t)] B1 √ 2
[Accept ‘acceleration is 1.25 times greater’]

(iv) B’s velocity is a maximum when 0.06 – 0.00024t = 0 B1 √

[√ wrong coefficient of t in a(t)]

For the method of finding the area representing s A (250) M1

240 + ½ (4.8 + 6.6)150 or

240 + (4.8 × 150 + ½ 0.012 × 1502) (1095) A1

For using the idea that s B is obtained from integration M1

0.03t2 – 0.00004t3 A1

Required distance is 155 m A1√ 6

(√ dependent on both M marks)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1885

November 2003

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/05, 8719/05

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

Paper 5 (Mechanics 2)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1886 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 5

1 For using Newton’s second law with a = v2/r M1

25 2
F = 50 000 A1
1250
Magnitude of the force is 25 000 N A1

[3]

2 (i) For stating or implying that the centre of mass is vertically above the
lowest point of the cone, and with y = 5 B1
10
For using tan θ = or equivalent M1
y
θ = 63.4° A1

[3]

(ii) For using F < µR M1

mg sinθ < µmg cosθ A1

Alternative for the above 2 marks:

For using µ = tan φ where φ is the angle of friction M1
φ > θ because cone topples without sliding A1

Coefficient is greater than 2 (ft on tanθ in (i)) A1ft

N.B. Direct quotation of “topples if µ > tanθ” (scores B2); µ > 2 (B1)
[3]

88× 0.1
3 (i) T= B1
0.4
For using Newton’s second law (22 – 0.2 x 10 = 0.2a) M1
(3 term equation needed)
Initial acceleration is 100 ms-2 A1

[3]

λx 2 88 × 0.12
(ii) For using EPE = ( ) M1
2L 2 × 0.4
Initial elastic energy is 1.1 J A1

[2]

(iii) Change in GPE = 0.2 x 10 x 0.1 B1

For using the principle of conservation of energy (KE, EPE and GPE
must all be represented) M1
1
[ 0.2v2 = 1.1 – 0.2]
2
Speed is 3 ms-1 A1

[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1887
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 5

4 (i) e.g. For taking moments about BC M1

Distance of centre of mass of triangular portion is

1
9.5 + x 6 (= 11.5) B1
3
1 1
8 × 9.5 × 4.75 + × 8 × 6 × 11.5 = (8 × 9.5 + × 8 × 6) x A1ft
2 2
Distance is 6.37 cm A1

N.B. Alternative method

e.g. Moments about axis through A perpendicular to AB M1

Distance of C.O.M. of triangular piece removed is 2 B1

1
(8 × 15.5) × 7.75 – ( × 8 × 6) × 2 = (124 – 20) x 1 A1ft
2
( x 1 = 9.13) therefore distance is 6.37 cm A1

[4]

(ii) For taking moments about A M1

For LHS of 80(15.5 – 6.37) = T × 15.5 sin30° A1ft
For RHS of above equation A1
Tension is 94.2 N A1

[4]

(iii) For resolving forces on the lamina vertically (3 term equation)

(V = 80 – 94.2 × 0.5) or taking moments about B M1
(15.5V = 8 × 10 × 6.37)
Magnitude of vertical component is 32.9 N A1ft

[2]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1888 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 5

5 (i) For using y& = y& 0 – gt with y& = 0 (t = 2sinα) M1

1
For using y = y& 0t – gt2 with t as found and y = 7.2, or show M1
2
t = 1.2 as in (ii)
V 2 sin 2 α
Alternatively for using ymax = with ymax = 7.2 and V = 20
2g
or y& 2 = y& 02 − 2gy with y& = 0 M2

400 sin 2 α
7.2 = A1
20

Angle is 36.9° A1

[4]

(ii) Speed on hitting the wall is 20 × 0.8 B1ft

(use of ball rebounding at 10 ms-1 scores B0)
1 1
For using y = 0 – gt2 (−7.2 = − 10t2) or
2 2
0 = y& – gt (0 = 12 – 10t) M1

t = 1.2 A1

Distance is 9.6 m (No ft if rebound velocity = 10 ms-1) A1ft

Alternative – speed on hitting the wall is 20 × 0.8 B1ft

Use trajectory equation, with θ = 0° M1
gx 2
−7.2 = x tan 0° − (allow ft with halving attempt including 10) A1ft
2.8 2 cos 2 0°
x = 9.6 m A1

[4]

(iii) y& = m 10 x 1.2 B1ft

y&
θ = tan-1 ( m ) ( x& must have halving attempt. Allow x& = 10) M1
x&

Required angle is 56.3° A1

[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1889
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 5

6 (i) For using Newton’s second law M1

120 – 8v – 80 × 10 × 0.1 = 80a A1

1 dv 1
= from correct working A1
5 − v dt 10

[3]

(ii) For separating the variables and attempting to integrate M1

1
− ln(5 – v) = t + (C) A1
10
For using v(0) = 0 to find C (or equivalent by using limits) M1
(C = −ln5)

For converting the equation from logarithmic to exponential form M1

(allow even if + C omitted) (5 ÷ (5 – v) = et/10)

v = 5(1 – e-t/10) from correct working A1

[5]

dx
(iii) For using v = and attempting to integrate M1
dt
x = 5(t + 10e-t/10) + (C) A1ft

For using x(0) = 0 to find (C) (= −50), then substituting t = 20 M1

(or equivalent using limits)

Length is 56.8 m A1

OR
dv
For using Newton’s second law with a = v , separating the variables and
dx
attempting to integrate M1
x
−v − 5ln(5 – v) = + C A1
10
For using v = 0 when x = 0 to find C (= −5ln5), then substituting
t = 20 into v(t)
(v(20) = 5(1 – e-2) = 4.3233),
And finally substituting v(20) into the above equation
(x = −50(1 – e-2) + 50 × 2 = 50 + 50e-2) M1

Length is 56.8m A1

[4]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1890 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3

November 2003

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

AICE

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/06, 0390/06

MATHEMATICS
Paper 6 (Probability and Statistics 1)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2003 1891
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
AICE AND A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/0390 6

1
x 0 2 M1 For reasonable attempt at the mean using freqs
freq 23 17 or probs but not using prob=0.5
OR
P(0) = 23/40, P(2) = 17/40
Mean = 34/40 = 0.850 A1 For correct mean
Variance = (4 × 17) / 40 − (0.85) 2 M1 For correct variance formula
A1ft 4 For correct answer
= 0.978 (exact answer 0.9775) (391/400)

frequencies: 3, 7, 6, 3, 1 M1 For frequencies and attempt at scaling, accept

scaled frequencies: 3, 7, 3, 1.5, 0.5 cw/freq but not cw × freq , not cw/mid point
or 0.006, 0.014, 0.006, 0.003, 0.001

A1 For correct heights from their scaled frequencies

seen on the graph
scaled f
B1 For correct widths of bars, uniform horiz scale,
5 no halves or gaps or less-than-or-equal tos

B1 4 Both axes labelled, fd and area or m2. Not class

0 500 1000 2000 3000 4000
width
area, m2

3 28 - µ = 0.496σ (accept 0.495 or in between) M1 For any equation with µ and σ and a reasonable z
value not a prob. Allow cc, √σ, σ2, or – and give M1
35 - µ = 1.282σ (accept 1.281 or in between, A0A1ft for these four cases
but not 1.28) A1 A1 For 2 correct equations

M1 For solving their two equations by elim 1

variable sensibly
σ = 8.91 (accept 8.89 to 8.92 incl) A1 For correct answer
µ = 23.6 A1 6 For correct answer

4 (i) (0.95)5 M1 For 0.95 seen, can be implied

= 0.774 A1 2 For correct final answer

(ii) (0.95)4 × (0.05)1 × 5C1 M1 For any binomial calculation with 3 terms,
powers summing to 5

= 0.204 A1 2 For correct answer

(iii) (0.95)2 × (0.05) M1 For no Ps, no Cs, and only 3 terms of type
p2 (1-p)
= 0.0451(361/8000) A1 2 For correct answer

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com
1892 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
AICE AND A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/0390 6

5 M1 For correct shape ie M and F first

C
0.05 A1 All correct, ie labels and probabilities, no labels
M gets M1 only for (implied)correct shape
0.54 0.95
NC

0.46 0.02 C

F
0.98 NC
OR M1 For finding P(M and C) and P(F and C)
A1 For using 4 correct probs

0.54 × 0.05 M1 For correct conditional probability

P( M C ) =
0.54 × 0.05 + 0.46 × 0.02 B1 For correct numerator
M1 For summing two two-factor ‘terms’
= 0.746 (135/181) A1 6 For correct answer

6 (a) (i) 18564 B1 1 For correct final answer

(ii) 17C5 or 6/18 × their (i) or 18C6 – 17C6 M1 For using 17 and 5 as a perm or comb
= 6188 A1 2 For correct answer

(b) (i) 40320 B1 1 For correct final answer

(ii) 5! × 3! × 4C1 B1 For 5!or 5P5 used in a prod or quotient with a term ≠ 5!
B1 For 3!
= 2880 B1 For 4C1, may be implied by 4!
B1 4 For correct final answer

7 (i) z = ± 1.143 M1 For standardising, can be implied, no cc, no σ2 but

P(7.8<T<11)= Φ (1.143) − 0.5 accept √σ
= 0.8735 – 0.5 A1 For seeing 0.8735
M1 For subtracting two probs, p2 – p1 where p2 > p1
= 0.3735 (accept ans rounded to 0.37 to A1 4 For correct answer
0.374)

(ii) (0.1265)2 × (0.8735) × 3C2 M1 For any three term binomial-type expression
with powers summing to 3
= 0.0419 A1ft 2 For correct answer ft on their 0.8735/0.1265

(iii) Not symmetric so not normal B1 For any valid reason

Does not agree with the hospital’s figures B1dep 2 For stating it does not agree, with no invalid reasons

8 (i) 18c = 1 M1 For ∑p i =1

c = 1/18 = 0.0556 A1 2 For correct answer

(ii) E(X) = 2.78 (= 25/9)(= 50c) M1 Using correct formula for E(X)
Var (X) = 1.17 (= 95/81) (=160c – 2500 c2) A1ft For correct expectation, ft on their c
M1 For correct variance formula
A1ft 4 For correct answer ft on their c
(iii) P(X > 2.78) = 11c M1 For using their correct number of discrete values of X
= 0.611 (= 11/18) A1 2 For correct answer

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection
0.0 Year 2003 1893

November 2003

GCE A AND AS LEVEL

MARK SCHEME

MAXIMUM MARK: 50

SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 9709/07, 8719/07

MATHEMATICS AND HIGHER MATHEMATICS

Paper 7 (Probability and Statistics 2)

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1894 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 7

1.9 M1 For equality or inequality involving width or

1 × 1.96 < 1 equivalent and term in 1/ √n and a z-value
n
A1 For correct inequality
n > 13.9 (13.87)
M1 For solving a relevant equation
n = 14
A1 For correct answer cwo
[4]

2 λ = 4.5 M1 For using Poisson approximation any mean

B1 For correct mean used
 4 .5 2 4 .5 3 4 .5 4  M1 For calculating P(2, 3, 4) their mean
P(X = 2, 3, 4) = e − 4.5  + + 
 A1 For correct numerical expression
 2! 3! 4! 
= 0.471 A1 For correct answer
NB Use of Normal can score B1 M1
[5] SR Correct Bin scores M1 A1 A1 only

3 SU ~ N(19,12) B1 For correct mean and variance. Can be

 0 −1 implied if using P(T-S>5) in next part
P( T-SU > 0) or P(T- S > 5) = 1 − Φ  M1 For consideration of P(T – SU > 0)
 21 
M1 For summing their two variances
= Φ(0.2182) M1 For normalising and finding correct area
from their values
= 0.586 A1 For correct answer
[5]

20
4 (i) λ = = 0.25 B1 For λ = 0.25
80
P(X ≥ 3) = 1 − P( X ≤ 2) M1 For calculating a relevant Poisson prob( any
λ)
0.25 2 For calculating expression for P ( X ≥ 3) their λ
= 1 − e −0.25 (1 + 0.25 + ) M1
2
= 0.00216 A1 For correct answer
[4]

−k
(ii) e 80 = 0.9 M1 For using λ = -t/80 in an expression for P(0)
−k M1 For equating their expression to 0.9
= −0.10536
80
M1 For solving the associated equation
k = 8.43 A1 For correct answer cwo
[4]
 1800 − 1850  B1 For 117 / 26 (or equiv)
5 (i) P( X > 1800) = 1 − Φ 
 117 / 26 
M1 For standardising and use of tables
= Φ(2.179)
= 0.985 A1 For correct answer cwo
[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

0.0 Year 2003 1895
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 7

(ii) H0: µ = 1850 B1 Both hypotheses correct

H1: µ ≠ 1850
1833 − 1850
Test statistic = M1 Standardising attempt including standard
117 / 26
error
= −0.7409 A1 Correct test statistic (+/-)

Critical value z = ±1.645 M1 Comparing with z = ±1.645 ,+ with + or – with

– (or equiv area comparison)
ft 1 tail test z=1.282
Accept H0, no significant change A1ft For correct conclusion on their test statistic and their
z. No contradictions.
[5]

6 (i) (a) Rejecting H0 when it is true B1 Or equivalent

(b) Accepting H0 when it is false B1
[2]

(ii) (a) P(NNNNN) under H0 = (0.94)5 M1* For evaluating P(NNNNN) under H0
= 0.7339 A1 For correct answer (could be implied)
P(Type I error) = 1 – 0.7339 M1* For identifying the Type I error outcome
= 0.266 A1ft For correct final answer
dep* SR If M0M0 allow B1 for Bin(5,0.94)used

[4]

(b) P(NNNNN) under H1 = (0.7)5 M1 For Bin(5,0.7) used

= 0.168 M1 For P(NNNNN) under H1
P(Type II) error = 0.168 A1 For correct final answer
[3]
∞

∫ ke
−3 x
7 (i) dx = 1 M1 For attempting to integrate from 0 to ∞ and
0 putting the integral = 1
−k
0− =1⇒ k = 3 A1 For obtaining given answer correctly
3
[2]
q1

∫ 3e
−3 x
(ii)
∫ 3e
dx = 0.25 −3 x
M1 For equating dx to 0.25 (no limits
0
needed)
[− e −3 x 0
q1
] = 0.25 M1 For attempting to integrate and substituting
-3q1 (sensible) limits and rearranging
-e + 1 = 0.25
0.75 = e-3q1
q1 = 0.0959 A1 For correct answer

[3]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

1896 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
A AND AS LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2003 9709/8719 7

∫ 3xe
−3 x
(iii) Mean = dx B1 For correct statement for mean
0 M1 For attempting to integrate 3xe-3x (no limits
∞ needed)
[
= − xe −3 x ] − ∫−e
∞
0
−3 x
dx A1 For –xe-3x or -xe-3x/3
0
∞
 e −3 x 
=  
M1 ∫
For attempt − e −3 x dx (their integral)
 − 3  0 ∞
 e −3 x 
A1 For 0+  
 − 3  0
= 0.333 or 1/3 A1 For correct answer

[6]

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

1 (i) Show that the equation

sin(x − 60◦ ) − cos(30◦ − x) = 1

can be written in the form cos x = k, where k is a constant. [2]

(ii) Hence solve the equation, for 0◦ < x < 180◦ . [2]

1
2 Find the exact value of x e2x dx. [4]
0

3 Solve the inequality x − 2 < 3 − 2x. [4]

4 The polynomial x4 − 2x3 − 2x2 + a is denoted by f(x). It is given that f(x) is divisible by x2 − 4x + 4.

(i) Find the value of a. [3]

(ii) When a has this value, show that f(x) is never negative. [4]

5 The complex number 2i is denoted by u. The complex number with modulus 1 and argument 23 π is
denoted by w.
u
(i) Find in the form x + iy, where x and y are real, the complex numbers w, uw and . [4]
w
(ii) Sketch an Argand diagram showing the points U , A and B representing the complex numbers u,
u
uw and respectively. [2]
w
(iii) Prove that triangle UAB is equilateral. [2]

9x2 + 4
6 Let f(x) = .
(2x + 1)(x − 2)2

(i) Express f(x) in partial fractions. [5]

(ii) Show that, when x is sufﬁciently small for x3 and higher powers to be neglected,

f(x) = 1 − x + 5x2 . [4]

9709/03/M/J/03
3

7 In a chemical reaction a compound X is formed from a compound Y . The masses in grams of X and
Y present at time t seconds after the start of the reaction are x and y respectively. The sum of the
two masses is equal to 100 grams throughout the reaction. At any time, the rate of formation of X is
dx
proportional to the mass of Y at that time. When t = 0, x = 5 and = 1.9.
dt

(i) Show that x satisﬁes the differential equation

dx
= 0.02(100 − x). [2]
dt

(ii) Solve this differential equation, obtaining an expression for x in terms of t. [6]

(iii) State what happens to the value of x as t becomes very large. [1]

2
8 The equation of a curve is y = ln x + , where x > 0.
x
(i) Find the coordinates of the stationary point of the curve and determine whether it is a maximum
or a minimum point. [5]

(ii) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

2
xn+1 = ,
3 − ln xn

with initial value x1 = 1, converges to α . State an equation satisﬁed by α , and hence show that α
is the x-coordinate of a point on the curve where y = 3. [2]

(iii) Use this iterative formula to ﬁnd α correct to 2 decimal places, showing the result of each
iteration. [3]

9 Two planes have equations x + 2y − 2 = 2 and 2x − 3y + 6 = 3. The planes intersect in the straight
line l.

(i) Calculate the acute angle between the two planes. [4]

(ii) Find a vector equation for the line l. [6]

10 (i) Prove the identity

cot x − cot 2x ≡ cosec 2x. [3]

1
4
π
(ii) Show that cot x dx = 12 ln 2. [3]
1
6
π

1
4
π
(iii) Find the exact value of cosec 2x dx, giving your answer in the form a ln b. [4]
1
6
π

9709/03/M/J/03
4

BLANK PAGE

9709/03/M/J/03
1900 Chapter 0. Cambridge Pure Math 3
Page 1 Mark Scheme Syllabus
MATHEMATICS – JUNE 2003 9709

Mark Scheme Notes

• Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula
being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can
be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

The Routledge Handbook of Soft Power 2nd Edition Naren Chitty Download PDF
No ratings yet
The Routledge Handbook of Soft Power 2nd Edition Naren Chitty Download PDF
60 pages
Café de Coral - 3-Year Strategic Plan in 2020
100% (2)
Café de Coral - 3-Year Strategic Plan in 2020
17 pages
Mesne Profits in Possession Project
100% (1)
Mesne Profits in Possession Project
15 pages
Instant Ebooks Textbook Fighting Chess With Hikaru Nakamura Karsten Muller Download All Chapters
100% (4)
Instant Ebooks Textbook Fighting Chess With Hikaru Nakamura Karsten Muller Download All Chapters
34 pages
Pak Study Mcqs 2
No ratings yet
Pak Study Mcqs 2
18 pages
Sodian 1992
No ratings yet
Sodian 1992
16 pages
C1.7 Differentiation
No ratings yet
C1.7 Differentiation
45 pages
MN1 10 PDF
No ratings yet
MN1 10 PDF
108 pages
Past Papers Cambridge Pure Math1 9709 Ms 1864
No ratings yet
Past Papers Cambridge Pure Math1 9709 Ms 1864
1,864 pages
Citizenship & Community
No ratings yet
Citizenship & Community
2 pages
Relationship Book Questions PDF
No ratings yet
Relationship Book Questions PDF
1 page
C2.4 Trigonometry 1
100% (1)
C2.4 Trigonometry 1
47 pages
Musical Story Telling (K)
No ratings yet
Musical Story Telling (K)
1 page
Elements and Principles of Art 3
No ratings yet
Elements and Principles of Art 3
43 pages
C1.2 Algebra and Functions 2
No ratings yet
C1.2 Algebra and Functions 2
50 pages
Thelaziasis
No ratings yet
Thelaziasis
7 pages
Writing Composition Book 3 PDF
100% (3)
Writing Composition Book 3 PDF
87 pages
Trên Hành Trình Vừa Và Nhỏ": "Sải Chân Lớn
No ratings yet
Trên Hành Trình Vừa Và Nhỏ": "Sải Chân Lớn
1 page
Form - Swan Lake by Tchaikovsky (Lesson 1)
No ratings yet
Form - Swan Lake by Tchaikovsky (Lesson 1)
3 pages
Unit 8 - Grammar - Vocabulary
No ratings yet
Unit 8 - Grammar - Vocabulary
7 pages
ML Quiz 1: Course Content
No ratings yet
ML Quiz 1: Course Content
13 pages
Adventure Unknown Whom
No ratings yet
Adventure Unknown Whom
17 pages
The Glory of Sri Harikathamrutasara
No ratings yet
The Glory of Sri Harikathamrutasara
4 pages
C3.7 Numerical Methods
No ratings yet
C3.7 Numerical Methods
35 pages
Chapter 5 Integration
100% (1)
Chapter 5 Integration
57 pages
Reform and Revolution
No ratings yet
Reform and Revolution
1 page
Brown Bear Text
100% (1)
Brown Bear Text
2 pages
Chapter 3 Tourism and Consumer Behavior
No ratings yet
Chapter 3 Tourism and Consumer Behavior
25 pages
Datura in Vajramahabhairava PDF
No ratings yet
Datura in Vajramahabhairava PDF
6 pages
Contact Hours Per Week: 3 Hours
No ratings yet
Contact Hours Per Week: 3 Hours
14 pages
AS-Level Maths:: Statistics 1
0% (1)
AS-Level Maths:: Statistics 1
32 pages
Catholic Social Teaching Matching Game
No ratings yet
Catholic Social Teaching Matching Game
1 page
Eja-E Eja-J Sil Certificate
No ratings yet
Eja-E Eja-J Sil Certificate
2 pages
Ross Jeffries - Questions & Scripts
100% (6)
Ross Jeffries - Questions & Scripts
2 pages
First Grade Complete
100% (8)
First Grade Complete
128 pages
C4.3 Sequences and Series
No ratings yet
C4.3 Sequences and Series
26 pages
M2.2 Kinematics
No ratings yet
M2.2 Kinematics
26 pages
Library and Information Science - PDF
No ratings yet
Library and Information Science - PDF
6 pages
Muyco v. Saratan: Chanroblesvirtua1awlibrary
No ratings yet
Muyco v. Saratan: Chanroblesvirtua1awlibrary
3 pages
10 Mid Year Exam Questions 2018
No ratings yet
10 Mid Year Exam Questions 2018
17 pages
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-05
No ratings yet
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-05
8 pages
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-04
No ratings yet
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-04
8 pages
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-03
No ratings yet
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-03
8 pages
ICAS Maths Paper J NZ Year13 2015 - With - Answer
100% (1)
ICAS Maths Paper J NZ Year13 2015 - With - Answer
12 pages
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-03-Ms
No ratings yet
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-03-Ms
5 pages
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-02
No ratings yet
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-02
7 pages
ICAS Maths Paper H NZ Year11 2017 - With - Answer PDF
100% (2)
ICAS Maths Paper H NZ Year11 2017 - With - Answer PDF
14 pages
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-05-Ms
No ratings yet
Right-Angled Triangles Exam-05-Ms
2 pages
Math Year 08 ACGP CT1 2021 Number
No ratings yet
Math Year 08 ACGP CT1 2021 Number
5 pages
Skill 08 Algebra QP
No ratings yet
Skill 08 Algebra QP
2 pages
Math Year 11 Test 07 Algebra 2 ACG 2013
100% (1)
Math Year 11 Test 07 Algebra 2 ACG 2013
11 pages
Subject Choices 2023
No ratings yet
Subject Choices 2023
1 page
Math Year 08 Algebra 3 ACG 2014 Pattern Graph Solution
No ratings yet
Math Year 08 Algebra 3 ACG 2014 Pattern Graph Solution
5 pages
Math Year 08 Algebra 3 ACG 2014 Pattern Graph
100% (1)
Math Year 08 Algebra 3 ACG 2014 Pattern Graph
5 pages
The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck: A Counterintuitive Approach to Living a Good Life
From Everand
The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck: A Counterintuitive Approach to Living a Good Life
Mark Manson
4/5 (6458)
The Sympathizer: A Novel (Pulitzer Prize for Fiction)
From Everand
The Sympathizer: A Novel (Pulitzer Prize for Fiction)
Viet Thanh Nguyen
4.5/5 (141)
The Little Book of Hygge: Danish Secrets to Happy Living
From Everand
The Little Book of Hygge: Danish Secrets to Happy Living
Meik Wiking
3.5/5 (464)
Principles: Life and Work
From Everand
Principles: Life and Work
Ray Dalio
4/5 (643)
The Yellow House: A Memoir (2019 National Book Award Winner)
From Everand
The Yellow House: A Memoir (2019 National Book Award Winner)
Sarah M. Broom
4/5 (100)
A Man Called Ove: A Novel
From Everand
A Man Called Ove: A Novel
Fredrik Backman
4.5/5 (5181)
The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America
From Everand
The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America
George Packer
4/5 (45)
Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance
From Everand
Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance
Angela Duckworth
4/5 (650)
Elon Musk: Tesla, SpaceX, and the Quest for a Fantastic Future
From Everand
Elon Musk: Tesla, SpaceX, and the Quest for a Fantastic Future
Ashlee Vance
4.5/5 (582)
Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It
From Everand
Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It
Chris Voss
4.5/5 (1005)
The Glass Castle: A Memoir
From Everand
The Glass Castle: A Memoir
Jeannette Walls
4.5/5 (1856)
The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century
From Everand
The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century
Thomas L. Friedman
3.5/5 (2289)
Devil in the Grove: Thurgood Marshall, the Groveland Boys, and the Dawn of a New America
From Everand
Devil in the Grove: Thurgood Marshall, the Groveland Boys, and the Dawn of a New America
Gilbert King
4.5/5 (280)
The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You're Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are
From Everand
The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You're Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are
Brené Brown
4/5 (1175)
A Heartbreaking Work Of Staggering Genius: A Memoir Based on a True Story
From Everand
A Heartbreaking Work Of Staggering Genius: A Memoir Based on a True Story
Dave Eggers
3.5/5 (233)
The Hard Thing About Hard Things: Building a Business When There Are No Easy Answers
From Everand
The Hard Thing About Hard Things: Building a Business When There Are No Easy Answers
Ben Horowitz
4.5/5 (361)
The Emperor of All Maladies: A Biography of Cancer
From Everand
The Emperor of All Maladies: A Biography of Cancer
Siddhartha Mukherjee
4.5/5 (298)
Yes Please
From Everand
Yes Please
Amy Poehler
4/5 (2016)
The Light Between Oceans: A Novel
From Everand
The Light Between Oceans: A Novel
M.L. Stedman
4.5/5 (815)
Shoe Dog: A Memoir by the Creator of Nike
From Everand
Shoe Dog: A Memoir by the Creator of Nike
Phil Knight
4.5/5 (629)
Hidden Figures: The American Dream and the Untold Story of the Black Women Mathematicians Who Helped Win the Space Race
From Everand
Hidden Figures: The American Dream and the Untold Story of the Black Women Mathematicians Who Helped Win the Space Race
Margot Lee Shetterly
4/5 (1022)
Manhattan Beach: A Novel
From Everand
Manhattan Beach: A Novel
Jennifer Egan
3.5/5 (919)
On Fire: The (Burning) Case for a Green New Deal
From Everand
On Fire: The (Burning) Case for a Green New Deal
Naomi Klein
4/5 (78)
The Perks of Being a Wallflower
From Everand
The Perks of Being a Wallflower
Stephen Chbosky
4.5/5 (4103)
Her Body and Other Parties: Stories
From Everand
Her Body and Other Parties: Stories
Carmen Maria Machado
4/5 (903)
Angela's Ashes: A Memoir
From Everand
Angela's Ashes: A Memoir
Frank McCourt
4.5/5 (943)
Fear: Trump in the White House
From Everand
Fear: Trump in the White House
Bob Woodward
3.5/5 (836)
Sing, Unburied, Sing: A Novel
From Everand
Sing, Unburied, Sing: A Novel
Jesmyn Ward
4/5 (1267)
Steve Jobs
From Everand
Steve Jobs
Walter Isaacson
4.5/5 (1139)
Wolf Hall: A Novel
From Everand
Wolf Hall: A Novel
Hilary Mantel
4/5 (4088)
The Constant Gardener: A Novel
From Everand
The Constant Gardener: A Novel
John le Carré
4/5 (278)
Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln
From Everand
Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln
Doris Kearns Goodwin
4.5/5 (244)
Rise of ISIS: A Threat We Can't Ignore
From Everand
Rise of ISIS: A Threat We Can't Ignore
Jay Sekulow
3.5/5 (144)
The Art of Racing in the Rain: A Novel
From Everand
The Art of Racing in the Rain: A Novel
Garth Stein
4/5 (4372)
A Tree Grows in Brooklyn
From Everand
A Tree Grows in Brooklyn
Betty Smith
4.5/5 (2033)
Brooklyn: A Novel
From Everand
Brooklyn: A Novel
Colm Toibin
3.5/5 (2133)
John Adams
From Everand
John Adams
David McCullough
4.5/5 (2546)
The Woman in Cabin 10
From Everand
The Woman in Cabin 10
Ruth Ware
3.5/5 (2792)
Bad Feminist: Essays
From Everand
Bad Feminist: Essays
Roxane Gay
4/5 (1090)
The Outsider: A Novel
From Everand
The Outsider: A Novel
Stephen King
4/5 (2885)
Little Women
From Everand
Little Women
Louisa May Alcott
4.5/5 (2369)

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.

Past Papers Cambridge Pure Math3 9709 Ms 1959

Uploaded by

Past Papers Cambridge Pure Math3 9709 Ms 1959

Uploaded by

Cambridge Past Paper Collection

Pure Mathematics 3 (9709)

Cambridge Pure Math 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

1 Solve the inequality 2 − 5x > 2 x − 3. [4]

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

3 The parametric equations of a curve are

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

4 Solve the equation

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

(b) The sequence of values given by the iterative formula

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

(b) Find the other roots of this equation. [4]

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

8 The coordinates x, y of a general point of a curve satisfy the differential equation

Solve the differential equation, obtaining an expression for y in terms of x. [6]

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

(a) Express f x in partial fractions. [5]

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

(a) Find the exact coordinates of M . [5]

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20 [Turn over

11 Two lines have equations r = i + 2j + k + , ai + 2j − k and r = 2i + j − k + - 2i − j + k, where a is a

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

© UCLES 2020 9709/31/O/N/20

Cambridge International A Level

This document consists of 21 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

4 A1 Do not accept x < –1.33

Alternative method for question 1

State or imply non-modular inequality/equality B1 Two correct linear equations only

4 A1 Do not accept x < –1.33

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection EliteEduA@gmail.com

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

2 Show a circle with centre the origin and radius 2 B1

Show the point representing 1 – i B1

Show a circle with centre 1 – i and radius 1 B1 FT The FT is on the position of 1 – i.

Shade the appropriate region B1 FT The FT is on the position of 1 – i.

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 21

Cambridge Pure Mathematics 3 Past Paper Collection

9709/31 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020

Use correct double angle formulae M1

dy A1 AG. Must have simplified numerator in terms of cosθ.

Alternative method for question 3

Start by using both correct double angle formulae M1

1 Solve the inequality 2 − 5x > 2 x − 3. [4]